Full text of "Transactions and proceedings and report of the Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated)"

See other formats

s makiedadhaihinh k- tiaiheil alin hemmed
Die faiietta et tone k eee ans:
” ad “a NN ae pipette. 2
eee neawener
a4 a.

set

pric Rhicratak ot heen nn ee ee Riper “
‘ eiabctteeiten-steahetcin ok Ano eee
Pee Pr . CP ON ed NO rte
RPA RL GEAR LL OLD Oop sb lire
“ m PAC red aah
vi
ue
bin delathal fata let ca
Te aha NE 33
a: nai snte
ne rd
rie Pebas vaibe

"4 rs ee eee el et ee | ee
OA cap ae A Pace BEN ls ence POLE ef opt namilien a q , eA oe) eo wi
oe itd pate aati tea eatinivei rnd a6 es ie ee A : ae. ate ‘ pees
ites: = fy rareeed =< pin grin Gat NOGA PROSE oh fe gh ext ; roel pall
erhalten elects Bi rahe a Tye Na eh al ns tie et eon Fe “ * os ye Pinel te
an apes fet Wott ohne tre alint ayee mts mba wtb oe 3 eae ep ins vb a~ihe\ibelpe fel whe Ne
eeeouiene : 4 % o vinaao le Ssh rst pA
ie nares ” praig yar taiks y trek Sehehipwees lt PE aga Ne wg? Pd!
i ° Sect ae ors 2 : res aborigines Lier >
my aPso- panne be ; - then , : edn hea" bined
0: rr : ; : Lissa diinberee
ese Pas See EA Ac abi ti
: ret ‘ sar " t Ny ars oer? et
J ‘pt rate lit ‘ ay pinta v3 aay .
Nesaitar widest spigieiaeresabenaseree nt Ape se totes

ee Dots:
ay Spe

er oF
nares
Las oot,
J ;
enya de pape OM
ss
5 -aieetedelin
Jo
ah a
Ba ot Ae NG

nnd elle 5 te aoe 4
at jou FRR eee et a awed aaah adil
i De Phd el eA erg pe re ng i dro) : adel
RE ee ee h.1 aietet dedeteaeeeeetet iA :
I ite hate einer eed pooh tae veh pi
sae eed

AERIALS DOW Pape er
tes STR hj thet et te ET
: " un be ‘ > Wee? ‘
3 ‘ at 08 erm Cin dD Ale SPN)
9

) pee
SAA er

re nS ee oe ae
anal

ig)
7 ete, +.
~~ g ee
if
nivieds 74 are abebelie ;
* bed ‘ eter ;
ete je" Rp ors
fs tare i ‘
a5 e's .
ahaa ali Poa aa rt ina
: Negara teens) a Lab
e he eh a
Diep oy Ps ieee

Sapte
ees

ee) anes
1a ea Te eS twiews
NT ie dicdib sivas Face ed

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

ELSE
ES)

LIBRARY

OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

On os
oe

yea ieee
Se ee othe

‘i
Bb
{
ae
f
s
i
a
4

a ee

SR ae

| TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

- °oREPORT

SESE OSE Ora oe Lowe Reg Geen aa, ten eae ees ee eee

OF THE

- ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA

a (INCORPORATED).
ed Bee

. Ms Co st oo) Oe GE Oe
[WitH THIRTY-SIX PLATES AND EIGHTEEN FIGURES IN THE TEXT. ]

—

_.. EDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, FGS.

Bit ns tf +}

ss PRICE, ~FIFTEEN SHILLINGS. |

Ze Bbelaite :
W. C. RIGBY, ~74, KING WILLIAM STREET.
DECEMBER, 1905.

er ; wi

Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia

from Europe and America should be addressed “per W. C.

- Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 34, Milk Street,
‘: Cheapside, London.”

papags

ae 5

‘ane

4 f

ae ay ; . vas

. a in yo

- , F . i

he t
| ey i]
;
Veer es a) ne {A ,
¥
ria ' es 22,
° é
aA Py ieee Pay BF ‘ ‘ ; i ares
i > ear : a2 wN
if ‘
¢
= ae. | 2 4 5
- c
’ fia © y ‘) TT
r
"t é

z La
-
A.
~ aoe on
‘
. '

5 at | Ray ve ae, ;
ie aa Mp hh, Kiet. ae BL Taki Be off near: ‘ ny
| RR TRS, Sant, 2

4 F4\
*
- oe Fae ed = ~ fm Aya? y ee éteng wae “Su <8 Bip ees Ge je
) eM aig A ae ietcaainors eee eae
a Lo é - ' V4 ’
* és eal . !
> 7
¥
rn

' aed ihakapibeek minima Ft oil a Se
hee <a srs 2) #0 AAR ‘17 pee i. Gee oie,
i Rtas Saha ya AF Loe, ee A eae oc a

Scans .
F ; fi ja
. Z
; : at
oa ia. 8 a a
«4 < Rat @ -
se ? : \ ~. iS - > ae
: s —s As

ERRATA.

Page 119, line 3, for Mairpm™ read INACHID#.

Page 121, line 21, for “figs. 3, 3a” read “fig. 3” only.

Page 124, line 7 from the bottom, for “forwards” read
“upwards.”

Page 131, omit line 6 of explanation of Plate xxii. In
. 5 3 .
line 2 of explanation of Plate xxii., for ‘ Enlarged”
read “Inferior view of anterior regions. Enlarged.”

yeh iy

fepi

Cae ata ho abe aes

ah (Oe hy Re '

COE “EY Us Te ae

= a ©

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND

el eh rl on ir

OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED).
——_4 >——---

Gy St hs GD. eae a

[Wits Txirty-stx PLates AND KIGHTEEN FIGURES IN THE TEXT. ]

KDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, FG.

Adelaide :
W. 0. RIGBY, 74, KING WILLIAM STREBT.
DECEMBER, 1905.

Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia
from Europe and America should be addressed “ per WV. 4G.
Thos. Meadows & Co., 84, Milk Street,

Rigby, care Messrs.
Cheapside, London,”

Royal Society of South Australia

(INCORPORATED).

Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY SIR GEORGE R. LE HUNTE, K.C.M.G.

OFFICERS FOR 1905-6.

qiresident :
JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S.

Vice- Presidents
PROF. E. H. RENNIE, M.A., D.Sc,
REV. THOMAS BLACKBURN, B.A.

Hon. Creasurer :
WALTER RUTT, C.E.

Hon. Secretary and Sealbolder ;
G. G. MAYO, C.E.

MMlembers of Council :
W. L. CLELAND, M.B.
W. HOWCHIN, F.G.S. (Editor and Representative Governor).
E. ASHBY.
SAMUEL DIXON.
W. H. SELWAY.
W. B. POOLE.

Auditor :
J, S, LLOYD,

COMIN tts One Pes

——~ a po—-—

Rosertrson, '. BrRarsrorp: An Outline of a Theory of the
Genesis of Protoplasmic Motion and Hxcitation.

Basepow, H.: Geological teport on Country Traversed by
the South Australian Government North-West aie ac
ing uxpedition, 1903." Plates x11. “to xx. tts

Lower, O. B.: New Australian Lepidoptera (xxii.)

Baker, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus-

tacea. Wart ii. Plates xxi. to xxiv.

Braga, Pror. W. H. and R. D. WLEEMAN: ‘On the Alpha
Particles of Radium, and their Loss of Range in eee
Through Various Atoms and Molecules

Basepow, H., and C. HrpiEy: South Australian Nudi-
branchs, ‘and an Enumeration of the known Australian
Species. Plates 1. to xn.

Hepiey, C.: Rerort on the Mollusca Collected by Mr. H.
Basedow on the South australian Government North-
west ixpedition. Plate sax.

VeERco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol-
lusea, with Description ot New Species. Part. i:
Plate XXx1.

Lower, O. b.: Description ‘ot New Australian ‘Lepidoptera,
with Synonymic Notes. (Gexiias)

Basepow, H.: Un Naticoid Genera Lamellari va and Caledoni-
ella, from south Australia. Plates xxvi. to xxix. :

Bragg, Pror. W. H ., and R. D. KiEEMan: On ape # Recom-
bination of lons in Air and other Gases

Marpen, J. H.: An Aroid New for Australia

luRay Arruor M. : Descriptions of Australian Curculionidae,
‘with Notes on Previously Described Species. Part 111.

Trprer, J. G. O.: Insects Collected in North-Western Region
of South Australia by H. Basedow, with Descriptions of

New Species. No. Tr,
ETHERIDGE, R., JUN. Additions to the Cambrian Fauna of
South Australia. Plate xxv.

Baker, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus-
tacea. Part ii. Plates: xxxil. to xxXxXvl.

BLACKBURN, Rev. T.: Further Notes on Australian ‘Coleop-
tera, with Descriptions of New Genera and Species.
(xxxv.) Be : ers Nas oe

ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS Na

ANNUAL REPORT e,

BALANCE SHEET :

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY

List oF I ELLOWS, ETC.

APPENDICES.
Proceedings, Annual aben OF, etc., of the Field Naturalists’
Section ‘ i. Keig a ak ae
Seventeenth Annual Report of the Native Fauna anu Flora
P>ote:.1on Committee of he Vield Naturalists’ Section
Annual Report, etc., of the Malacological Section

Annual « -rort, ete., of u.e * icrosconical Section
Index ae in =

Qr-

360
363

east palates A eau svar
i nit i ake ’ ’
i er awe: vrs : ' a oes
Saeed Oa |
4 ¥ Pe , ab! 7 i
a SP oe
: a. os PT LAR va! Si

ic 2 TMWATY 60
- i ne re :
ei \ ng aisle ie B peuty A a

3 stenlnse fe Ar ealaodo 5k tae
“ Hoes eart Line Kh 44 Bar ences. in
HOOP Fath wish Saarndapel Riluentiauk of

A r
ys “1 wee vis: AP efit oferal ee ANCE (Ho. Do i
an , yield BOD pont aplaerbay dh. eee 7 ‘a " ?
aT Ket meabeiteA AfGUA me. zt >
Oe 3. Vien) Yaa pedal av rtatl!
nile 00. Koemud cr a eh Din
Lame t. Piigunt BY etic WEA ip gL baby: Pm: atd
>!) ee . SOND Wi emadh wv: ulin’
ibnA ‘ iteviasth hier fought (0 boa 7 Be
milenendk WHORK os 4u (ALG & Vail iit. Wat ttn ‘
63) 11% Of ot cegulL

H at ede badealiy' lbw ilty Ah ons Ne Pro grab :
arene, PRIVY EE ast sary itis dived wi) Zi. VE F

mas oral’ b>! nator
otf, eninge Whnlctintd, Rey 2 ite rahe Be na te a
fl Jal AI ny Wats dy Seip + img), wy ”
nil ‘ oe & |
aad: part ‘nail ae wiih rv’ ify Oh segi Le See | ae
yf v ; Grech, ley aimeive
sHrabshs: } ae 0 (ad lava cb Rib et hbioaliah UH “al q
‘4 ACA Th! Live A BAB) ‘| iF nor ifnne Hanon rf" Wr
gtobell a nt) Sata SCE ks an. Bae ha
vat sek te | 7M? “Helo ie: TT, ite atol 10; oy uA 7.
i ; cw MUNBIAOR SOP wht Digth) WA +. i 7h

eayhvhsrehil pri ytd a1 HEPA . Ye} orl tives: IM geet
MOE So Youth aang gue Dadrinad: ylanuived'h. ag IO AE
Hoisedl (ieien Ye ditiad fy das aly ) woud 3s RP oD Ms

“4 I enondy erent: dative: iroliey! 4 Hi gl GilacheA ee
ation ne WN sr. eae
fo waved miainwlY Git tt marth tibatad cur ee
5 VER Avi “{ wae
“aire! boadet sie Erase: Anon ay 4
Srige ; VELHO of SAR ante an Had
=qunital ) unite ROSA a" ond” Vath oy hae
mene Di Baw)” wat te sar Mire mit
Mos... ‘ag iy ~ al’ Ooo |".
cw iat: 20 EL aa
7) is tank ? ' Mic HI
(ir: no vad ath are. ie nds My. Sea Saee the
Be DDR ES “ 45 i rHktara aut Or

he “ : bbe 4 ges vee id ) aa Ranh. 3 A nee oo
A: eCwax
mr’ -* Veni

Pm Nh Ok meteorite one

RUIN OP ERE 6 pe a:
‘stetwtutwet blot: ants % Re tug Iovands
re “2 (ee iw: , Pare es ;
a) ne Apa

AN OUTLINE OF A THEORY OF THE GENESIS oF
PROTOPLASMIC MOTION AND EXCITATION.

By T. Brattsrorp Rosertson, B.Sc.
From the Physiological Laboratory of the University of Adelaide.
~ Communicated by E. C Stirling, M.D, F.R.S.
[Read April 4, 1905.]
a eo a ContTENTS.

Iutroduction ... sa qi

1, Contact Difference Ae Potential Ratton E lectro-
lytes and its Influence upon Surface

Tension an tf, rs 3 . 3
2. The lon-proteid Thsotty Ub 6
3. The Chemotaxis and Galtamothen: 6 Wiiecllaler
Organisms Ee ae bal
4. The Structure of Biniated Maeda eC dont D7.
5. The Contraction of Striated Muscle 7 y 29
6. On the Propagation of Excitation in Npiie ae
Muscle ny 31
7. On the Normal Piece of eaten Meataid in Ger
tain Tissues and their Sensibility ... pene =
8. Polar Excitation in Muscle and Nerve Bai
Electrotonus aA eer Ve
9. The Influence of Verein Ouraht Deusity ee ae:
10. Tetanus and Fatigue ’ 42

11. The Work of Muscle and the Tniiienee ee Tension 44
12. The Action of Chemical Reagents upon the Con-

tracture of Muscle F. A5
13. Rhythmicity in Muscle and shé Aehion off f Inhibi-
tory and Augmentor Nerves... 47
14. Rhythmicity in Nerves le at ~~ clas
15. The Movements of Plants ... van as nos
16, Summary wes om st tie ean OG
INTRODUCTION.

As far as I have been able to ascertain from the litera-
ture to which I have access, the theory which is put forward
in this paper has not hitherto been propounded, at least in its
entirety.

A number of authors have acknowledged the importance
of surface tension in the vital processes of an organism,* but

* Butschli (Protoplasm and Microscopic Foams: Trans. by
E. A. Minchin, 1894, page 289) gives an account of various
theories as to the influence of surface tension upon the move-
ments of organisms which had been put forward up to that
date. In the same work he develops his own theory, which,
however, is quite different in principle from mine.

the influence of electrolytes upon the surface tension, taken
in conjunction with the ion-proteid theory, does not appear
to have been worked out. Loeb* alludes to his conviction
that the electrical energy of the ions in an electrolyte is trans-
formed into surface energy at the surface of an organism sus-
pended in it; but, as far as I have read his writings, he does
not explain how this is accomplished, nor does he apply the
idea. Mannf suggests that the electrical charge on colloid
particles in solution may be due to the formation of definite
compounds between the colloid and one or other of the ions
in the solution, an hypothesis of which I make frequent use
throughout this paper. Strong has developed a theory of
the nervous impulse, which regards it as due to free ions in
the nerve, but as he does not adopt the ion-proteid theory he
is forced to make assumptions—such as the semi-permeability
of proteid to certain ions—which render his theory of very
limited application.

I had already written the greater part of this paper when
the American Journal of Physiology for March, 1904, arrived,
containing Lillie’s paper § on the toxic and anti-toxic effects
of certain salts. In this he suggests that certain phenomena
of movement in unicellular organisms may be due to surface
tension alterations, due to ions in the medium, and he uses
the analogy of the capillary electrometer ; but, as far as con-
tractility is concerned he does not appear to have applied the
idea or to do more than throw it out as a suggestion ; that is,
so far as my acquaintance with his writings goes. Still more
recently, Matthews’ paper on the nature of chemical and
electrical stimulation has appeared. In this he does not pro-
fess to give an explanation of the physico-chemical mechan-
isms of protoplasmic movement and excitation. Nevertheless,
he concludes, as I do, “that the chemical composition of the
ion is of little importance compared with the importance of
its electrical condition.” 41. He also considers that electrical
stimulation “is due simply to the accumulation of negative

; * Jacques Loeb: American Journal of Physiology, 1902,
ll., page 411

t Gustav Mamn: Physiological Histology: Methods and
Theory, 1902, pages 45 and 46.

tW. M. Strong: A Physical Theory of Nerve. Journal of
Physiology, 1900, vol. xxv., page 427

§ Ralph S. Lillie: The Relation of Ions to Ciliary Move-
ment. American Journal of Physiology, March, 1904.

|| The Nature of Chemical and Electrical Stimulation:
1. The physiological action of an ion depends upon its elec-
trical state and its electrical stability. A. P. Matthews: American
Journal of Physiology, August, 1904.

§] American Journal of Physiology, vol. xi., No. 5, page 456.

or positive ions in different places in the tissue, or, in other
words, to differences in concentration of the ions.’ *

These are the only important allusions to theories similar
to mine which I have been able to find; but, as the literature
to which I have access is limited, my apologies are due to any
authors whose published theories I may have put forward as
original.

I do not, by any means, regard the whole of the hypo-
theses and deductions put forward in this paper as proved.
Indeed, this paper is rather to be looked upon as providing
an outline to be in the future corrected and filled in by an
extended series of experimental investigations. My theory
of chemotaxis, put forward in section 3, and some of my
views on the propagation of excitation in muscle, put forward
in section 6, are, however, upon a somewhat different footing,
inasmuch as they already receive strong support from the
experiments described in these sections, on infusoria, on the
one hand, and on the intestine of a fly, on the other. I may
state that I am about to bring forward strong experimental]
evidence in support of my views in section 13 of this paper on
rhythmicity in muscle, and, at the same time, of those in
sections 6 and 7, on the influence of the mass of ions upon the
formation of ion-proteids in excitable tissues. I also hope
before long to publish further experimental evidence touching
my views on the transmission of excitation, and also further
experiments on chemotaxis.

In concluding these introductory remarks, I desire to
express my gratitude to Professor E. C. Stirling, F.R.S., for
his suggestions, for facilities afforded me for experiments, and
for the interest which he has taken in the preparation of this
paper, and in the experiments; to Dr. C. J. Martin, F.R.S.,
and to Mr. J. A. Craw, for the care with which they read the
paper and for their criticisms ; to Professor W. H. Bragg, for
a valuable criticism ; and to Mr. W. Fuller for his advice and
practical assistance in some of the experiments. This paper
was written nearly a year ago, but, owing to its having been
put into the hands of others, at a distance, for their considera-
tion, its publication has been delayed.

{.—Contact DIFFERENCE OF POTENTIAL BETWEEN ELECTRO-
LYTES AND ITS INFLUENCE UPON SURFACE TENSION.

It is a well-known fact that when two electrolytes, or two
solutions of different concentration of the same electrolyte,
are in contact, there is a difference of electric potential
between their bounding surfaces, just as there is a difference

* American Journal of Physiology, vol. xi., No. 5. page 457.

of potential at the contact surface of two metals, or of a metal
and an electrolyte. Nernst explained the difference of poten-
tial existing between two solutions of the same salt when the
concentrations differ by the ionic theory. If a strong solution
of hydrochloric acid is in contact with pure water the acid
will diffuse into the water. But, since the hydrions and
chloridions are capable of independent motion—the velocity
of the hydrion being greater than that of the chloridion—the
hydrions will travel faster into the water than the chloridions.
But the hydrions carry a positive charge, while the chloridions
carry a negative charge; hence the water becomes positively
charged owing to an excess of hydrions and the acid solution
negatively charged owing to an excess of chloridions. In
such a case as this, however, as the process goes on and the
water becomes positively charged, an electrostatic repulsion
will be produced, tending to retard the incoming hydrions
and to accelerate the chloridions. This will go on until the
electrostatic repulsion is so great as to cause the hydrions and
chloridions to move into the weaker solution at the same
rate. As the diffusion goes on the number of ions in the
weaker solution will increase, and hence the tendency of the ions
to diffuse in from the stronger solution will decrease, and the
electrostatic repulsion necessary to maintain the equal veloci-
ties of the incoming hydrions and chloridions will diminish.
Hence the contact difference of potential will, in this case,
diminish as the concentrations of the two solutions approxi-
mate to each other.

It is on this principle that Lippmann and von Helmholtz
explained the working of the capillary electrometer, and as
we shall have to consider an analogous explanation of certain
vital phenomena, it may be as well to glance at the method
by which the capillary electrometer re-acts to electrical
forces. The capillary electrometer in its simplest form consists
of a capillary tube in which mercury and sulphuric acid meet.
The end of the tube dips into the sulphuric acid, which rises
to a point where it is in equihbrium with the mercury, which
descends the tube under a certain pressure. At the meniscus
there will exist a contact difference of potential; and, since the
mercury and the sulphuric acid solution are both conductors,
the difference of potential will lead to an accumulation of
electricity on the two sides of the bounding surface. The
mercury is positive to the solution, and therefore the double
layer of electricity at the bounding surface consists of posi-
tive electrification on the mercury side and negative electrifica-
tion on the solution side. If T be the observed surface ten-
sion of the surface separating two media, and the area of this
surface is increased by an amount 8, the work which is done

is S T. Now, the surface of separation between the mercury
and acid solution with its double layer may be regarded as a
condenser of which the two armatures are charged to a poten-
tial difference E, where E is the contact difference of potential
between the mercury and the solution.

In any condenser of which the plates are kept at a con-
stant difference of potential, the electrical forces tend to
increase the capacity of the condenser, and hence, in the case
of this double layer, there is a tendency for the area of the
double layer to increase. That is to say, that on account of
the electrical forces the area of the surface of separation
between the mercury and the solution tends to increase, so that
the electrical forces reduce the amount of work which has to
be done against the surface tension when the area of the sur-
face of separation is increased. Thus, if T‘ is the value the
surface tension would have, supposing no electrical double
layer were present, the work done in increasing the area of
the surface of separation by an amount S would be S T'.
Therefore, S T, the actual amount of work done, is less than
S T', the amount of work which would have been done if no
electrical double layer existed, by the amount of work done
by the electrical forces owing to the increase in capacity of
the double layer. Thus, T, the observed surface tension, is
less than T’, the surface tension 1f no double layer were
present.

“Suppose the contact difference of potential between the
mercury and the solution be E, the mercury being at the
higher potential. Then, if an external E M F be applied so
that the wire X” (leading to the mercury) “is positive, the
difference of potential between the mercury and the solution
will be greater than E by the amount of the applied E M F,
and hence the charges on the double layer will be increased,
so that the surface tension will be decreased, and to keep the
meniscus in its sighted position the head of mercury
must be reduced. If, however, the applied E M F is in such
a direction that it acts in the opposite direction to the contact
difference of potential at the meniscus, then the strength of
the double layer will decrease, and hence the surface tension
will increase. This increase will go on till the applied E M F
is exactly equal, and opposite to the contact difference of
potential, for when this occurs there will be no double layer,
and hence the surface tension will possess the value w hich
it would have if no electrical charges were present. If the
applied E M F is further increased, then a double layer will
again be formed, but with the negative charge on the mercury
side. This inverted double layer. will cause a decrease in the
surface tension, since the presence of such a double layer

must decrease the surface tension, whichever side is positive.
Hence, by applying an external E M F, so as to make the
mercury negative, and increasing it till the surface ten-
sion, aS indicated by the pressure which has to be applied to
bring the meniscus to its sighted position, is a maximum, will
be exactly equal and opposite to the contact difference of
potential between the mercury and the sulphuric acid solu-
tion. In this way Lippmann found that the contact differ-
ence of potential between mercury and sulphuric acid solution
was about 1 volt.’’*

2.—TuHE Ion-PRoTEID THEORY.

This theory, due to Loeb, is that when an ionised electro-
lyte diffuses into protoplasm the ions after this diffusion do
not remain dissociated, but that they enter into loose combi-
nation with some proteid constituent of the protoplasm, this
compound being known as ion-proteid. Loeb has brought
forward many facts in support of this view, t which we need
not enter into here, as we shall find many even more cogent
reasons for adopting it in the sequel. I will only quote, after
Loeb, a statement made by Dr. W. Pauli, of Vienna: —‘We
cannot doubt the general existence of ion-proteid compounds
in the living organism. We have even urgent reasons for
assuming that all the proteids of the protoplasm exist there
only in combination with ions.” Thus it would appear that
the bulk of protoplasm is formed of ion-proteid compounds,
and, indeed, it seems probable that they represent the culmi-
nating point of anabolism. We shall see the reasons for this
view later.

If this be true, then it follows that, owing to metabolism
and to dissociation analogous to the dissociation into ions of
electrolytes, a number of these ions must, in general, exist in
the protoplasm in a dissociated state, so that there will, in
general, be a contact difference of potential between any proto-
plasmic body and the (liquid) medium in which it is sus-
pended. This has been directly proved by W. B. Hardy in
the case of particles of albumin suspended in acid and alka-
line solutions. He states his conclusions thus: —‘The proteid
particles, therefore, have this interesting property: that their
electrical characters are conferred upon them by the nature
of the re-action, acid or alkaline, of the fluid. If the latter

* Watson: Textbook of Physics, 1900, page 814.

+ Vide On Ion-proteid Compounds and their réle in the
Mechanics of Life Phenomena. American Journal of Physiology,
1900.

{ On the Coagulation of Proteid by Electricity. Journal
of Physiology, June, 1899.

is alkaline the particles become electro-negative and wice
)
versa.

It must be assumed that the ion-proteid is highly un-
stable in the presence of an excess of ions, and that therefore
the nature of the ion-proteid formed depends upon the pro-
portions of the ions present. If this be granted (and we shall
see that it is an indispensable assumption in accounting for
the various phenomena observed in muscle and nerve) we can
at once see that the reason for the proteid particles becoming
electro-positive in an acid solution is the high velocity of the
hydrion which is the characteristic ion of acids; for far more
kations are diffusing into the proteid particle than anions,
and therefore the ion-proteid formed is, for the greater part,
kation-proteid, and the particle becomes positively charged.
Similarly, in alkalies the fastest ion is the anion, and there-
fore the proteid particles become electro-negative when the
solution is alkaline.

3.—THE CHEMOTAXIS AND GALVANOTAXIS OF UNICELLULAR
ORGANISMS.

We have now to consider the application of the prin-
ciples which we have enunciated to unicellular organisms. We
have seen that it is a characteristic of the proteid part of the
lon-proteid molecule that it readily forms compounds with
any lons which happen to be present in excess, while Hardy’s
experiments, referred to in the last section, show that the
electrical character of the resulting ion-proteid depends upon
the relative velocities of the ions in the solution in which the
proteid is suspended. In the first case, consider the effect
upon a unicellular (amoeboid) organism of a constant current
in the direction shown in the diagram (A =Anode, K=Ka-

FIGURE 1.

thode), the organism being supposed to be laden with kation-
proteid by virtue of the metabolism and dissociation of which

a difference of potential is maintained between the proto-
plasmic surface and that of the medium (indicated by the
small + and — signs).*

Just as in the analogous case of the capillary electrometer
(section 2), the effect of a current travelling from A to K will
be to diminish the contact difference of potential at points
such as a, which form the physiological anode, and to
wmerease it at points such as k, which form the physiological
kathode.

Therefore, as we have seen (section 2), the effect will be
to wcrease the surface tension at points such as a, and to
decrease it at points such as k. The surface, and, conse-
quently, the volume cn the kathodic side of the organism will
therefore wmcrease, while on the anodic side they will de-
crease. The organism will, therefore, move over towards the
kathode, as indicated oy the arrow—it will be “negatively gal-
vanotactic.” | Consider now the effect of a similar curren
upon a “negative” amceboid organism; that is, one which is
laden with anion-proteid, so that the difference of potential
between the protoplasmic surface and that of the medium is
as represented in the diagram. In this case the contact dif-
ference of potential will be increased at the physiological

A (+) (-)K

FIGuRE 2.

anode, and decreased at the physiological kathode; hence,
reasoning as before, the organism will move towards the anode
—it will be “‘positively galvanotactic.” The effects upon
ciliated organisms will be similar, for if the diagram repre-
sents one of the cilia of a ‘positive’ organism subjected to a
constant current in the sense indicated, the P.D. (difference of

* As such organisms are electro-positive to the solution in
which they are suspended, I will in the future distinguish them
as ‘‘positive,’’ those which are laden with anion-proteid being
designated ‘‘negative.’’

FIGuRE 3.

potential) at the surface forming the physiological anode will
be diminished, and that at the physiological kathode increas-
ed; hence the former surface will diminish owing to the in-
creased surface tension, and the latter will increase ; hence the
cilium will bend towards the anode, as indicated by the small
arrow, and the organism will be propelled towards the kathode
—it will be “negatively galvanotactic.” The effect of the same
current on a ‘“‘negative” ciliated organism will, of course, be
the reverse. Hence, we may formulate the rule that “positive”
organisms will be attracted to the kathode, and “negative”
organisms to the anode. When a very strong current is
passed, the lowering of the surface tension at kathodic points
in a “positive” organism or at anodic points in a “negative”
organism may be so excessive that the parts of the surface no
longer colijre, and the organism breaks up. This is the ex-
planation of the uisintegration of certain organisms under the
action of a constant current, e.g., Pelomyxa.* The effect of
the constant current upon organisms which are neither “nega-
tive’ nor “positive”—that is, which are equally loaded with
anions and kations—must obviously be attraction to hoth elee-
trodes, since a contact P.D. would be artificially produced at
both surfaces: thus, such organisms would not exhibit any
marked preference for either electrode. We have now to
consider the effects of chemical re-agents upon these organisms.

From the point of view of the theory which I have put
forward, the phenomena of chemotaxis must be attributed to
the diffusion of the ions in the re-agents into the protoplasm
in different proportions. Consider the effect upon a “‘posi-
tive” ameceboid cell (A, Fig. 4), of a salt such as KCl, in
which the kation has a greater velocity than the anion, diffus-
ing from a capillary (B). Since the quicker-moving kations
will diffuse faster than the anions, more kations will enter the

* Verworn: General Physiology: Trans. by Frederic S.
Lee, page 419.

organism, in a given time, than anions; that is, the contact
P.D. at points such as a (Fig. 4), will be augmented, and

FIGURE 4,

at points such as / unaffected or much less augmented (since
the concentration of the KCl is as the inverse square).
Hence the surface tension at } will be greater than that at a,
and the organism will move towards the capillary.

With a salt like CaCl,, in which many more anions
would enter the organism, in a given time, than kations, the
reverse would be the case.

If the organism were ‘negative’ the above effects would
be reversed.

Of course, leaving a “positive” organism within the
sphere of influence of CaCl, for a sufticient time would
convert its initial repulsion from the CaCl, into attraction,
for the organism would become “‘negative” owing to the excess
of anions entering from the CaCl,. Similarly, a “ negative ”
organism, exposed for too long a time to the influence of a
re-agent in which the kations move faster than the anions
(e.g., KCl, or an acid) would become “positive.”

“Isotactic”” organisms—as we may call those organisms
which are equally loaded with anions and kations—would, of
course, be attracted by both kinds of re-agents, for an arti-
ficial P.D. would be established on the side nearest the re-
agent, and the surface tension therefore decreased at those
points: but, as this P.D. would be very small except in
organisms quite close to the capillary, such organisms would
exhibit no marked re-action.

The theoretical results at which we have arrived may be
tabulated as below : —

Nature of Re-agent.

a
State of | —— | — Calv
Organism. _ Kation faster | Anion faster | ralvanotaxis.

| than Anion. | than Kation.

and Kath ode

The stimulation effect of a re-agent will be proportional
to the difference of potential between the organism and the

U Vv

medium. This will be a itiaal niin ies Where & is a constant
(Oh ey i) ec,

(the temperature being constant), ~ and v are the velocities

of the kation and anion respectively, y, and y, are

their valencys respectively, and c, and c, are the con-

centrations of the electrolyte in the medium and in the

: ° : C . .
organism respectively.* If —2 be constant, and it is_pro-
: c
1
bably nearly so when equivalent solutions are used throughout,
we have that the stimulation effect of an electrolyte is propor-

U w
tional to Y¥, Y.2, which we may call the ‘stimulation

Uu+uwv

is Hittorf’s

efficiency” of the electrolyte.+ Since
, ’ ute

“transport number,” and is usually denoted by 7, the stimu-

: au —-n Mn
lation etticiency may also be expressed by ——, which

Y1 Ye

reduces to 1 —2n, if the ions are mono-valent.

We cannot assume, it is true, that the stimulation effects
of different re-agents will be strictly proportional to their

*Vide Whetham: A Treatise on the Theory of Solution,
1902, page 382.

+ I originally defined the ‘‘stimulation efficiency” as —
which, of course, is only true for univalent ions. I am indebted
to Mr. J. A. Craw for the above correction.

“stimulation efficiencies’ partly because it is uncertain whe-
C : .

ther —2, referred to above, is constant, and also because of
c

the ion-proteid already present in the organism, the influence
of which will be to lessen or to increase the effect of the
testing re-agent. Still, the “stimulation efficiency” of a re-
agent will serve as a rough index of its probable effect, and I
therefore append a rough table of the re-agents most com-
monly used as stimuli in physiology, with their ionic veloci-
ties and “stimulation efficiencies,” the sign + before the
stimulation efficiency denoting attraction of a “‘positive”
organism, and the sign — _ attraction of a “negative”
organism.

If the stimulation efficiency be calculated from the ionic
velocities 1t will not be accurate except for very dilute, com-
pletely ionised, solutions. A more accurate method is to cal-
culate the stimulation efficiency from the value of the trans-
port number 7, at the dilution which we are using. But, in
order to make the table more general, I have, except in the
cases of the carbonates and MgCl,, calculated the stimula-
tion efficiency from the ionic velocities. It 1s necessary to
bear in mind, however, that solutions of a salt formed by
the neutralisation of a strong base by a weak acid, as, for
example, Na,CO,, always contain OH ions, which have a
very high velocity, and which tend to render the stimulation
efficiency negative. Finally, in order to observe any propor-
tion between the stimulation effects of different re-agents we
must use equivalent solutions. The ionic velocities of
Cu, Ba, Ca, SO,, and Ag, in the accompanying table, are
taken from the results given by W. C. D. Whetham in the
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society.* Those of
Cl and I are from Kohlrausch’s results, quoted by Whe-
tham.+ | Whetham found that his results, obtained by a
direct method, corresponded very closely with Kohlrausch’s.
Those of K; Na, Li} H, NO,;, “and OH are ‘from Kener
rausch’s results quoted by Watson.[ The stimulation effi-
ciencies of K,CO,, Na,CO,, and MgCl, are calculated
from the transport numbers for dilute solutions (029, ‘093,
and 087 equivalent gramme molecules per litre respectively)
given in Fitzpatrick’s ‘““The Electro-Chemical Properties of
Aqueous Solutions.’’§

* Vol. clxxxiv. A, page 387; and vol. clxxxvi. A, page 507.
+ Thid.
+t Textbook of Physics, 1900, page 798.

§ British Association Report, 1893. Reprinted by Whetham
in his Theory of Solution and Electrolysis.

The re-agents are in the order of their ‘‘stimulation effi-
ciencies.”’

TABLE OF STIMULATION EFFICIENCIES.
| Velocity of Kation Velocity of Anion Sti :
eee F wi sal Claniinebe } imulation
"5 adhe wy apg es ee appa plete eer ga ISIE
| |
———__—_—_—_|— Polos) aes ae £8) Ne ae

H.SO, thd B90 x1 OOS THU O=" Soe 1,
HCl DP RIOD IOS ONG SP O=o 1) BUTTE
HNO, “axe S20 Ore? | Gate 10> 4 “667
KECO; ot —- —— + 547
K.SO, nee O6*x-10>" 7 Oe cy oe bs
Na,CO, oe — — + 289
Na,SO, ae ae 1Oro | Aye xen Oe + -250
KCl hed: 66° x On re Or + -109
KI _ Cox 10 COE tO= + ‘048
KNO, shes 6635010 Oe LO +° O15
NaCl at 2215 jee cal h) ka Nox = -082
CuSO, a BM ele lee to tO — -092
AgNO, sie fot ae Osx hu = -133
Nal uel Py eer OC cos — *}45
NaNO, a AD ee” (yd veel! mae — 174
LiCl nb 30 Le ee Oss =e
BaCl, te BS eal 4 iS iroceng A a — -364
CaCl, See a inp Gen Ce Be ox LOT i 4)
CuCl, ne le Ore aye ye ed N — -446
KOH bed 66 x 10~° HG oxa ae — -468
MeCl, ae —- — -— D17
NaOH EY Za a UL ape L822 Os, = O04
LiOH ero 36. xlOee Lee cele — 670
Ba(OH), ae 39: x, LO. ise a es Ses.
Ca(OH), fis ose One (e2ux Te" eh ele

The third decimal place in the column of stimulation effi-
ciencies is the nearest approximation.

To test the conclusions arrived at in this section, it is
necessary to ascertain the state, ‘‘positive” or “negative,” of
the organism, and then to test its re-actions to various re-
agents, and to the constant current, under the same condi-
tions.

This appears not to have been done hitherto. H. H.
Dale, it is true, has made investigations of this nature,* but
he nearly always uses acetic acid in his media or in his test

* Journal of iPhecolocy, 1901, ae a Tee 991.

solutions. For our purposes this choice is most unfortunate,
as the dissociation of acetic acid is very small, even in dilute
solutions ; indeed, it is only half dissociated when the solution
contains only about two parts of acetic acid per million.*
Moreover, the amount of hydrion due to acetic acid is greatiyv
reduced on its diffusion into a medium containing highly
ionised salts (as was the case in Dale’s experiments), while the
acetanions are not correspondingly reduced, and the resultant
proportions of ions depend upon the electrolytes into which it
is diffusing.+ Hence the theoretical effects of acetic acid are
highly uncertain, and this corresponds with the uncertainty

of Dale’s results. Such sources of ambiguity do not arise
when we use strong acids in dilute solution and_ perfectly
ionised solutions of salts. A number of other investigators

have tested the effects of various re-agents upon unicetliilar
organisms, but as they did not previously ascertain the nature
of the ions in the medium in which the organisms were tested
their results tell us nothing with regard to this theory. I there-
fore carried out a series of experiments with a view towards
systematically testing the accuracy of the conclusions put
forward in this section. The organisms used were the infu-
soria in the large intestine and rectum of a frog (Ranaodea
aurea). Four species were found and used in these experi-
ments, namely:—1. A species of Spirostomum, closely resem-
bling, if not identical with, S. ambiguum. 2. A species of
Opalina, probably Opalina ranarum. 3. A large disc-shaped
species, more than half the length of Spirostomum sp., and
nearly as wide as it is long, much flattened laterally, endo-
plasm in front of the mouth, triangular in shape, slightly re-
curved. 4. A much smaller species, only about half the
length of Opalina sp., but otherwise resembling the last-men-
tioned species. The two latter species, in the absence of any
expert knowledge of the subject, [am unable to name. I will,
therefore, designate them, respectively, species A and
species B.

A cell of wax was made on a glass slide. It measured
about # in. square, and the walls were about 1 millimetre
deep. In two opposite walls of the cell were grooves, which
were the same depth as the walls. A small portion of the
intestinal or rectal contents was placed in the cell, and a
large drop of a given solution, the medium, was placed in the
cell with it. This was left for a varying period, and then a
cover-glass was placed on the cell, any spaces in the cell being

* Walker: Introduction to Physical Chemistry, third edition,
page 236.

_ + Vide Walker: Introduction to Physical Chemistry, third
edition, pages 304 and 816.

filled up with some more of the solution. Capillaries con-
taining the test-solutions were then inserted through the
grooves, so as to project slightly into the cell, and the re-
mainder of the capillary was sometimes slightly raised by
resting it on slips of paper, in order to aid diffusion. by
gravity. The various parts of the cell, etc., are indicated in
the diagram (Fig. 5). The cell was then examined under the
low power of a microscope, or with a magnifying glass.

FIGuRE 5.

The object of placing the organisms first in a known medium
was to ensure their being “positive” or “negative,” as desired.
Thus an organism which had been placed for ten minutes in
a decinormal solution of KCl would be positive, owing to
the excess of kations which had entered it ; and its reaction, if
our reasoning has been correct, should be attraction to a
solution with a positive stimulation efficiency, and repulsion
from a solution with a negative stimulation efficiency. Of
course, it is quite uncertain what salts have been introduced
with the rectal contents, but as the proportion of rectal con-
tents in the cell to the volume of the medium was, in each
experiment, small, the influence of the introduced salts was
negligible. The results of the experiments, as the accom-
panying table shows, are in entire harmony with the theory
I have put forward—in every case the theoretical and actual
results are the same. Experiment No. 14 might be thought
to be an exception, but when we remember the extremely low
stimulation efficiency of KNO,, and that its effect might be
very easily neutralised by small quantities of salts with nega-
tive stimulation efficiencies introduced with the rectal con-
tents we see that the organisms, in this case, were very pro-
bably isotactic. It will also be observed that the re-action
always takes place quickly when media with a high stimulation
efficiency were employed ; and delay, as in experiment No. 9,
only occurred when the stimulation efficiency of the medium
was low. As there were generally individuals of more than
one species in the cell, some of the results were obtained sim-
ultaneously, e.g., experiment No. 3 gave results for Spirosto-
mum, Opalina, and species B.

‘aqny “TORE
ey} Jo ssoyy UvYy plow sow Tonu 9qny [OH ey
Jo 9soyy Inq “plow a1OM saqny Y}OqG JO szUA4UOD oy)
SNUYIT YIIM SuTyse7 UG ‘eqn “[ORq 944 peroquO
prey Aes Bw pu faqng plow oY} Ul Jeq4snTO Yor v
poulstof pel SUBLIOSNJUL OY], “Inoy [ AOF [[99 stxey

-OWWBYO oY} UL sotaeTIdeo oy YET] *‘9qn} [OH yd

poreqgue swios faqn9 *{QVq 9Ya WoT, sOULYSTp OUIOS
IOYSNO IB[MOALOTULOS YOUyZ BV POUTIOF SUISTURSIO OY)
3 0¢ OG
“TO8d— pur TOH— UIA poqseq uoyy “uruE “ay ]
N N
OL
IOJ WJOT puv TY— ut pooryd o19M suouttoods oy J,
N
‘aad Joy Sutoq Arey[Ideo
“19vq oy}? yuoqe sords oy} ‘esou0 4e ysowTL
Areyidvo [OH 94} Ul doysnp yory vw powas0}
Or
Aoyy—soynuiu Moy BV IOJ TY— ut pooxd uoy)

Ol N

puv [OVN-—- UL poysvam otom suowtoods oly,

IOH 09 Uororayyy

*1Qvq woz uorstndo..

puv JOH 01 uotjoRa47 Vy

“SUUV NAY

*NOMOW-4Y

5m 20S o¢
"1TOvd— pur 1QH—
N N

og oc
*19vq— pur 1QH—
N N

HLA GWLSay,

"WOIdHIN

wnuLojso1idy

wnuojpso.ds

‘NSINVDUO

“ING
| -1NGd xX
40 ‘ON

‘) 1% ‘oangesedway, ‘sjzzed s9oyjo ut uvyy A4ITBO0T
sty} ut aeyory} ATpoyxzeu you stem Aoyy ynq ‘41
peiejue Mey e PU il ey} jo yQnow oy} punor
Ajoody WAS suUSsIURSIO 949 ! poyooge ATpeyreu
qou sea oqny “[Oeg ey} punod sords ey, ‘soqnulw
OF Joe UsAO AveTO peuTeUteI eqn} [OH 9} Jo

ol Ol
yqnow oy} punoreoeds oy, **[ORq— pure [QH—

N N
YUM peqse} Usyy, ‘SUI QT “IY T JOJ Joy pur

IOVN— ut peoryd sem quouttiedxe sv] oy) UI SB

WNJded BULLS BY} JO sjzUa}UOD ayy Jo UoTyA0d VW

‘) 1% feanqeraodway, *Yyysue] sqrt Jo
yout Ue OJ VIAOSHZUL ILM payoyo ATajoTdwo0o sem
aqn} plov ay] anoy ue Jo sioqaenb-seryy UT = “Arey
-jideo JOH 2949 Jo Juoay ur ATOZ eIpowUMT sseUT Yoryy
Y pelulIoy pey SwSTURSIO sy MOY Uv J[VY UL pu
‘peqlesep SVM [[90 YY Jo FTRY “TOR ayy Jo afoyM
ay] anoy uv jo 1eqjaenb vuy “poysesursem Areypidvo
Torq 943 YoryM O7UL Jey ey uRYy peyetndod
AyTYoryy aro ATWOUTASIp SVM poqsosuT sem AavqTpidvo
ploe oy} Yor OJUT [99 9Yyy Jo J[VY 9} ‘suTUT EC
UIIGTA, juouttedxe 949 Jo SuluULseq ey] 4¥ [90
ay} Ysnoasyy poinqiaystp ATYyoryy pue ATUAosUN

Ol Ol
a1aM stustuesio oy, ““TOVq— pue [OH— YIM
N N
Ol
po se} Udy ‘ANOY UV FTVY AOJ JJoT puv [QO y— ut psoryd
N

SBM S]UEJUOD TVJVet BYyy Jo uoljAod ][vUIS YW

“TOV 07
UOTJNVIJIV PoOyIVUL OU |

| —plor wou uoispndey

| *1:Oeq wo.ay uorspnder
| pur [OH 0 uorjoe41y |

| |

J104d=— PU! OH

“1OeG— pue IOH—

IDE Nae

[£9 >: ee!

wnuopsoud sy

unuojso.uds

‘) .LZ ‘ornyesoduta y,
‘eltosnyur yy dn peyoyo sem oqny poe oy} | . |
pur ‘pojtesep Jsouye sem [90 9} JO J[eY *19eq |
ayy IMoy ue yey ut feqny prloe eyy dn popMo.o ©
OL
pey eiiosnyur oy} seynurm OT UT S19eq@—
OT N
pue IOH— WIM poqyse, usy} ‘seqnulu OG 10F |
N |
OL |
qyJoT pure ““ONY— Ur poortd yuouwtsedxe snotaoid .

N | "OVE moarz uorsqndo. OL OL OL |
oy} UI sv WNIOoI OlIeS JO SJUEQUOD Jo oWIOgG — puR por oj UolpRIIVW «= “TORG— pue IOH-—- “ONY | wnwopoudy | g

N N N |
‘) 12 ‘oanyesoduay, -Areqpideo : |
“I9eg oy} punor J94snNpO Yoryy eB seM or0y} pure
StUSTUSIO JO IvopO ATOJoTduIOD SVM 9qny prIOR st)
JO JUOAJ UI VOIR OFA] B SOJNUTU QE Jo pus 949 IV |
‘s7BupLATpur poiezjyvos ATUO poureyuo. FTeY plore |
ey} pur ‘TJe0 949 Jo Fey “TOV 949 07 10A0 poaowl
A\Qourystp pey swsturs10 oyy INOY Uv Fey 10qyV |
Ol |
‘g0U0 4B plow oy} WoO.IF UOTSTuder poyreur “*[ORq—
OL N |
pue [OH— WIM poeqysoz useyy ‘seynuIM OF OF |
N |
OL Ol On OT | |
*1Qeq— ur pooeyd woe, Jo syUeq4UOD Jo oIOg plow wor uoisjndoy = *[Oeq— pue JOH— ‘“TOVq— | wnwojzsoudgy |
N N N | N | |

(e.6)
re

Ten)

‘ININ
‘SUUVNAY ‘NOILOV-AY HLIM GALA], ‘WOlda ‘WSINVOUO | -1ugddxg
| 40 ‘ON

‘? .1@ ‘eanqyeaodura J,

“IOISNJO YOryZ V SVM o1OY} BOTA ‘oqny T[Vyye oy4

jo quoay ut ATayetpowutt ydooxe ‘poytosep Sv [[90

a/OYM oY} SognuTU OZ UL ‘STRNpLAtpur Suratare

AyTysoagz Aq 07 poppe AT[RNUTZUOD Sutoq svar YOM

‘oqny TeYTe oy} puNo Joysnzo T][VWS v SvVAL B.10T]

puv ‘ave oyinb sv oqng ploe oyy punod oourystp

eawos soy sovds oy} soynuTM QT UL ‘Teo ey

qoao AyTuaojTun prords pur ‘aatjoe ynq ‘Aquos

O OL

AT[VIQWUT OOM STUSTURSIO OT, “HOM— pure [OH—
N

YQIM peqseg ‘rnoy ue Jo saozaenb-soayy IOF 4 Fo] Bie

Ol
S1QxQ— ut peortd wingoed Jo szUeyUOo Fo BWOg

7 ‘? .1z ‘oangesodmay, “your uv ynoqe
oy wuyndg pur wnwoyoudg yA dn poeyoyo
Suteg oqny prow oyg ‘peyeyndod ATyoryy sem Fey
plove oy] ety “poqzesep AToynposqe sv [Jo ory
JO Jey 1Ryye oyy amoy ue Jo szozaenh-soayy A9q4FW
‘aqn} plov ey} punod poyesoeisuo0o ATYOIyZ 910M
wlOSNJUL oy. pure ‘oqnyz eye oy} Jo YQnow oy4
punodl vore-doUBIRET)D POYIVIU v SBM O1OY} ANOY
uv jo aojaenb uy “peyeseisuoo pry eBLtosnyur jo
JOqUINU B YOTYM JO JUOIT UL foqny plow oY} potoquo
pey [edeaos pue ‘eqng eye ey} Jo yQnow oy

IvoU OIOM VITOSHJUL OU SOyNUIW GC IOIJW ‘TOH—
OT N

pue HOM— UA poeqseq “anoy uv Jyey IF YJoy pu

N
OI
IOM— ut pooryd umyzoor Jo syuequoD jo eulog

poe
wo1y uolspnder pur
[eye 0f UOTORIa)W

eye wiory uorspndoea
pure por 04 uolqor1qyV

OL OL
EO Sie Pe SDE
N N

Ol Ol
HOU Pus lon —
N N

OL
q9e9— unutojsoudy

OL
ny wnuopsoud sy

‘?) 01a ‘ornqyersduay,
‘porsyue pry visosnjut oy} yo Auew YyoryM oul
‘aqn} plow oy} jo YNow sy} puNod s9XsNTO Yyoryy
@ SVM 910} puv ‘poqzzosep ATONTOSYe SVM [[99 O77
jo J[Vy [eye oy} INoY ue Jo suejaenb-sve1yy A9qFW
‘aqn} plow oy} Jo JUOA, UL JoysNTO vB SBM 910Y4
pur ‘oqny ITey[e oy JO JuOIy UL powWAOF Useq pry
vorv-douRIvETD B SeyNUI CG IOIFY *posqso usyy

OL
‘moy uv FRY OJ [OY— Ul ungo0.a Jo syueqzuoD

‘ 9 Le ‘ornyeroduie J,
‘syeuplatput ‘peop Apjueredde ‘y10ul Moz ev I0Y
qdeoxe poylosep sem Too ay} josey “Oeq oy
Moy uv F[ey ul pue ‘eqn plore oy3 dn pepmo.o
pey swsturs10 04} soynuTM QO, UT ‘YyStssnqs
qnq snogowunu stom vuyndg oJ, “peqyse} usTyy

Or
‘soqnutut (Gg 10y “ON YM— UL wWN4yQda.1 Jo szuaqUO_

ae 1m ‘eanyereduiay, *aqn4
ey) poiezue pry [VleAods pure ‘{[e0 oyy ul vurndC
jo suowtoeds otf} [[B@ pouTezUOD Je4snpO sSTYyy InN0Y

ue Fey UT eqn} plow ey) jo Yyynou oy} punos
doysupo 8 pewlioy pey SUSTURSIO OYy PUB “TIe0 |
ayy Jo Tey “[Oe_ oy Ul 4Jo, e1oM 9UOU ANOY UP |
jo aoqaenb uy ‘T[e0 9Y} 1aA0 peoads AyutzoFrun 4nq

Aquos AT[SIPLUT 919M SUWISTULSIO OY,T, *pejso7 UOT
Ol |
‘MOY UL FTVY LOJ [OY— UL wNgQoed Jo syusquoy

[eye woay uorspndaa |

pur prov 03 uoljpoRaW

“OV woaz uotspudea
pue plov 07 uoM0RI1V

“1Qeq woz uorsqudoea |

| pus ple 0} UolTjoRIa,y

‘SMUV NAY

OL
HOSiss
N

or
OT OE flies
N

i
“10% —
N

pur |

pur

Ol
OHes
N

OL
Ol sles
N

[Eee

"ONM—

puijndg

purndg

nurjpdg

‘NOMOY-AY

HiIM

CULsa

“WOIdU IN

WKSINVOUO

*LNGW
-1UGdXY
IO ‘ON

ri
N

"uIOy [RoLIeyds & OZUL
peqgorrjuoo wey} Jo Auvw pur ‘sseTuoTjow SuLeq
‘peop poarodde o10y9 JJo] S[RNPLAIPUL Moy oY} pur
‘TV9TO JSOTWTR SVAL 9QNy TTeVyTe oy punod oords oy,
‘apisyno qsnf{ poawaoy SRA JoysNpO ssuep wv aT
‘aqng oy} Jo YQNow oy} UT daysnpo Yoryy vB poaundoy
prey soynur % ULyALM pue faqn} plore 949 spreMoy
weas AyeyeIpouUT SWUISIURSIO aT], *poqsoq
ey ‘soynurw QT 1Oy gyorT *ATSnormmflur wwpvdCE

OF
yooye jou prp youpta “OOS eN— ut pooryd squaquos

yo owos { 1ojVM-dez Ul sanoYy FZ WET wnqooy

‘?) .0G ‘oanaeredwey, ‘oqny ITey[e oY Jo
yInow ey} Jo yuoaz ur qsnl Aypewodso ‘poyetndod
APYOryA Fey eyye oy pure ‘pozzesep sea Teo oy
jo Jey ploe oy anoy Ue FRY UL ‘eqny plow oy}
puno. voeds arvapo & SBM o1OY} puUR faqny ITBy[e ot}
punod JeIsnpo peyrvwu Vv SVM d1ey} SoQNUTUT G UT
‘aATpOR ATALR] PUB SHOJOLUNU STUSTURSIGQ, *paqseq

OL
usyy ‘seynuUIw Ce AOFJ[OVN— ULAJorT + “quowttasedxe

snoradid UL sv UIN4D91 OURS JO §}UI98ZUOD JO BUIOG

‘?) .0% ‘orngesodwoy, “spenpra
-ipur ‘peop Apjueiedde “Q19ur moy ev A0J ydooxe
‘puyodg JO «IRe}D soURISIP eWOS TOF sVM aqny
[eye oy Jo yuoay ut sovds oy} soynurm QZ 1077e
qnq ‘UOTjOR-91 poyIeUM OU 4sAy ye—ysissnis AIA
purjodgQ “pe zse} ust} ‘mnoy uP Jo saeqrenb-seryy

qe] pure PyY— url posed ueyy syuequoOo jo ouOS

N
$4ystustaao 107eM-dez Ul 4JoT Soay Jo wnqooy

[eye woazy uorspndoed
pue plor 04 UoTQRIVVW

Bie
woiy wonder pur
TTeyye OF wWoTpORIAW

poe 0} uory
-oelyye poeyrew ou—
eye wo.ay uorspudey

purjod¢o

puyndg

purndgQ

‘9 06 ‘eanqeasdway, ‘avapo eqmb sem eye
ayy jo quor ut osovds oyy, ‘9qn} ey} poazezue
pey sTenplarpur jo Jequinu ¥v Joye, SsoINUT oAY - |
pue ‘eqn plow eyy jo YNow oY} punoa sotoeds
SITY} JO Joysnpo ][VWs vw svVM oIOY} sSoyNUTU QZ
19jFV Inq ‘UOTJOV-o1 poyaeu ou ysay gy “AQUOS
seloeds sty} JO SWISIURSIGQ, *pojse} uy ‘anoy ue

OL |
jo saoqaenh-s01y9 JJoy puv Py— ut pooeyd syzusequoo
N I[Vyle woaz uorspudo.s OL Or Ol
JO olWOS £44 STUIEAO 107eM-dey UT 4JoT WHqooy pue prov 07 uotjoriqyiyW | =HOM— pur JOH r— Vv sowedg | 6

N N N
‘SSOTUOTJOU 19M AFLUIOLA SJL UL STRNPLATpUr OM
10 9UO pUR “IRETO SBM 9QN} plow sy, ‘aqny sy} Jo |
quody UL POWLOF Vo9G PeY STeNpLATpUL sATzOV AOA |
jo Jajsnjpo ¥v eI ‘ssoTUOTJoU 9104} poddoys pur
‘aqn} oY} pelejue pey [eloAes soynurU % UTYITAA
‘oqny I[RyTV sy} OF UoTJoVIQVe poyavy ‘soynUTUT
OL ut poqsoy, ‘Aysuormlutr wueyodg yooye you |
OF
Prp yor **[Oeq— ut peoeyd quouttiedxo snotasad plor |
N woiy uotsjude1 pur Ol Ol OF
UL posh WINZeI 9S JO sqzUeqJUOD Jo g9WOg eye 0} uUoToRAITW HOM— pure 1OH— “19e%q— nupodg | ar

N N N

“ING
“SHUVWAY “NOLO V -AY HLIM CaLsay, “ROHL “"WSINVOUQD | -IWadxy
| io ‘ON

‘?) .La ‘eanqeaodwiay, avayo Suteq oqny
Vyye oyg feqng plow oyy Jo quoay UL poszoyyes
pey seeds siya jo vluosnyur oyj [Te seqgnuruU
OL UT ‘“peqyse, useyy ‘soqnut Qg AOF Jjo,T pur

OL “T)RVq WOT uotstnded OL OL QO]
SONM— ut peoryd umngood Jo syuoqUOd Jo BUOY puv plov 0} uorprlyy | “TOeq— pure IOH— | “ONM— | q sowedg 9
N N N N
‘?) LG ‘ornqzeaiod

“Way, “eqn} 949 peiezyUS Woy] Jo suUOU ynq “TI90
ay} Ul Soloeds STYyq JO STRNPLALpUL 9yy [TR peureqzuOD
Moy UR F[VY UL JoysnTO sIyP, “eqny prov oy Jo
quodjy UL pewWaoy py Aojsnpo YyoryZ wv pu poeqsesop |
SUM PojtesuL sv oqny *[OVg eY4 YOM OVUT [90 |
ay} Jo Jyey 9y} anoy uv jo zoqavnb ve uy ‘snoaswNuU
SWSIURSIQ, “poJse} UeYy} ‘MOY Ue FRY LOF YJOT pur |
OL *19vq woay uoispaded OL OL Ol |
IOM— UL poortd urngqoor Jo syueqUOD yo oWIOg puv plor 0, uotyorayy | FQwq— pur [OH— loy— q sowedg § §
N N N N

rt) 0G ‘ernd
-varad wa J, ‘T]99 949 UL STRNpLALput oy TTR postad

“10D YOTYM eqn} ITVyye 9yy Jo YQNow vy puno.
soloeds sty} jo Jojsnypo ][VUIs Bw SVM o1OyZ puUL
‘peylesop SBAL ][99 9 JO J[VY plow oyy anoy ur Jo
Joyarnh ut faqny expe oy} Jo yZnow oy puno. |
parsyyes pry Teqeaes soynntur say uy “Aquos |
adam sotoeds siyq Jo suustuRsaQ) *pojseq ust) | |

Ol
‘soqnulll CG Of; [OVN— ut pooxjd quowttodxo | ple
N ody UoIstader pur 01 OT Ol
PAOGE UL PEsN WNYADaI VUIRS JO SJUNZUOD Jo OWIOG =| YPRYPV 0} UOTOUNIVIW =— HOM «pee ITOH lOeN— y sawedg | Ol

N N INGE

‘) 02 ‘oranqesodwmey, ‘aqny
TTeyye eyy Jo YINow oy} punodr aAoysnpo yoy wv
SVM a1oy} MOY Ue Jo aoqaenb up = *azRepO sem aqny
plor oy) punoa aoeds oy} soynulu 9Ay UT = *poqse}

OL
usyy ‘SayNUI GE 1OJ [OVN — Ul poorytd yuowLs1odxe

9AOGe UT posn tnjoor tues JO §3UeJUOD JO 9ULOG

‘) .0G o1ng
-eiodway, “eqn} ploe sy} poastejus pel, sTenprlarpur
jo JaquUNU,v 197RT AMoyY uP jo aoqaenb YW “wey
WOIJ dOIF SVM 9QN} TTRYTe 9yJ punos soeds oyy
apy faqny poe oy punod sotoads sty} Jo Joysnyo
[[VwWs B SBM 9194} SOINUIUT YZ JnNoqe UT Ing — 4sIy
qv UOTPOVAI PoyIVUL ON “poejsey Usyy “Moy ue Jo

OT
sieqrenb-ee1y) Jo] pure Py— ur pooryd syuequoo

yO 90g §=“4YSTUIBAO J99VM-dey UT JOT TANQOoyY

‘) .1z ‘oanjesedurey, “sesaey younw
SVM pUv [90 9} UL Ssotoods sIyy JO STeNptALpul
oy} [[B pourezuoo 19qSNzO Sit TMoOY Ue Jo saoqaenb
-9014} UT faqnz ploe 944 JO UOT, UT 194SN]O [[eUUIS
® poWIOF SUISTURSIO OT] PUR peyJosop seM 9qny4
TTex[e 9yy JO YQNOoW sy} punod soeds oy} SoynUTW
aAy UT “peysez usyy “Moy ue Jey OF Ayo] pure

IOM— Ul poeoryd wmjzo01 Jo syuequod Jo aWOg

“SHUVANGDY

pror
wot uorspndad pue

TTeyye 0} . WOTZORIAAIZY

Teyle woaz uorspndea |
pure plor 0} UOljoRI4TY

ITey[e Woaz uotspndes
pue plow 0} UOT}OeI1NVV

‘NOILOV-AY

Or OL
HOM— pure 1H—
N N

OL Ol
THOS I PUU STO iiss
N N

OL OL
HOM = Pe OHS.
N N

HLA CALS,

IOEN=

‘Wwalaayy

q sowedg

q sewedg

gq sewedg

‘KSINVDUO

‘ING
-1aadx'y
410 ‘ON

ee SSOeONBRORORORORmyEuaoUwNwN —aeTvweooew oo

“IBID SVM BQN} PLlOR ayy Jo | |
juoayz ut aoeds oY} apy faqnyg TTeYTR eyy Jo yynou |
ay} punol pewuoy pey Jeysnpo ][VWSs vB seqnuUTW |
OAY UT f IpRYyyR 07 UOTQORAZWR payalepy ‘“‘seqnurur | |

OL | |
OT 10972 peqse7 pur *TOe%g— ut pooryd quowtasedxe poe | |
N woij uorsjnder pur Ol Oils ae OL.

@AOGe UL pasn WNyZdaI VUURS JO $JU9ZUOD JO BOG eye oF uoryoey3y | HOM— pee 1OH— | 10%0— | q sewedg
N N | | |
“INOY UL F[VY 109Jv UAV | |
‘aqny Jey jle 1OJ UOTZORIIVe payIRU ON ‘soqnuTUL |
Ol | |
OT Ul peqse? pure “ON Y— ul psoryd syzuequU0d | |
N OL Oli. OT | |
jo autos $ raqzem-dez UL sanoy FZ Ye, wWnqo0y motored ON | HOM— PUe 1DH— | “ON | q sotedg |
| N N N |
‘a0dj ITRYTW [Joo oY} UL STenprtarpul | |
oy} [TW Surureyuoo plow punor azegsnpo ev soqnuruU | |
aAY UT “ploe 0} UOT}JORIVZe poyARyY ‘soynuLUM
Ol |
OL Ul pagse7 pue *OD*eN— ut pooryd sqyu9}U0D |
N [eye wos uorspndea Ol OL. us |
jo aos ‘$ toyeM-dey UL sanoy FZ Ye, Wnqooey puy por oj uoor143y | HOM-- Pur IOH— | *OO°eN— q soroedg —
N N N | |

It was found that Spirostomum sp. was an ideal species
for these investigations, as it was not injuriously affected by the
solutions, and was very active and sensitive to the test solu-
tions. Species A and B were also uninjured by the solutions,
but did not, as a rule, re-act quite so quickly as Spirostomum
sp. Opalina was very liable to injury by decinormal solutions
—the action of KCl and of NaCl in this respect was capri-
clous—sometimes decinormal solutions appeared to kill the
organisms, sometimes not. Decinormal solutions of Na,CO,,
CaCl,, and BaCl,, were very injurious to Opalina,
the two latter causing almost immediate disintegration,
doubtless owing to their high stimulation efficiency causing
excessive lowering of the surface tension. Decinormal KOH
killed all the species and caused disintegration, doubtless,
again, on account of its bigh stimulation efficiency.

The galvanotaxis of these organisms was also tested. The
ordinary stimulation trough, with parallel sides of porous
clay, described by Verworn,* was employed, and non-polaris-
able brush electrodes were used to lead in the current. The
following results were obtained . —

1. Rectum of a frog left in tap water overnight. Some
of contents placed in KCl in the stimulation trough and

left for a quarter of an hour. Then tested with three two-volt
storage cells. Opalina all dead. Species B numerous, their
rotatory movements became slower and tended towards the
kathode. In ten minutes the anodic half of the trough was
deserted, and the kathodic half well populated, especially near
the kathode.

N
> e eS
2. Some of contents of same rectum placed in a0 CaCl,

for a quarter of an hour. Opalina all dead. Species B
numerous. Tested with three two-volt storage cells. Organ-
isms proceeded with an irregular, wavy motion towards the
anode, and in a few minutes had formed a small cluster there,
which remained unaltered. Several individuals, however, 1e-
mained in the kathodic, half of the cell.

3. Rectum left forty-eight hours in tap water. Some of
contents placed in Tia a,CO,, and left for half an hour.
Tested with ten two-volt storage cells. Organisms scanty, con-
sisting of Opal/ina and species B. Both to kathode, the athrac-
tion of species B being hampered by its rotatory movemeuis.
In half an hour a small cluster had formed at the kathode.

* Verworn: Genera! Physiology: Trans. by Frederic 8.1
page 416.

bo
~l

4. Some of contents of same rectum placed in 70% I, and
left for half an hour. Tested with ten two-volt storage cells.
Opalina and species B, both to kathode. After half an hour
still at kathode, where they had formed a small cluster.

Thus the results of these experiments on galvanotaxis in
different media also go to support the theory I have put for-
ward. In addition, it may be mentioned that the results of
Dale’s experiments in galvanotaxis go generally to support
this theory.* Thus, Balantidiwm duodeni shaken into solu-
tions of increasing acidity collected closely at the kathode when
the solution contained ‘02 per cent. HCl, the current being
six pint bichromate cells. The same species in pure ‘6 per
cent. NaCl went to anode with moderate currents, and to
kathode with twelve cells. The latter result I believe to be
due to the acid liberated at the anode causing the organisms
to become “positive.” Dale also found that Opalina in ‘6 per
cent. saline and ‘01 per cent. NaOH collected at the anode,
and that Vyctotherus did the same when left in the solution
for a sufficient time (ten minutes), and other instances, in
which he used only specified inorganic solutions, will be
noticed on referring to Dale’s paper.

4. THe STRUCTURE OF STRIATED MUSCLE.

The following is extracted from Schafer’s “Essentials of
Histology,” sixth edition, page 102 : —*‘The sarcostyles are sub-
divided at regular intervals by thin transverse disks (mem-
branes of Krause) into successive portions, which may be term-
ed sarcomeres; each sarcomere 1s occupied by a portion of the
dark stria of the whole fibre (sarcous element). The sarcous
element is reaily double, and in the stretched fibre separates
into two at the line of Hensen. At either end of the sarcous
element 1s a clear substance (probably fiuid or semi-fluid),
separating it from the membrane of Krause. This clear sub-
stance is more evident the more the fibril is extended, but
diminishes to complete cisappearance in the contracted muscle.
The cause of the change is explained when we study more
minutely the structurc of the sarcous element. For each sar-
cous element is pervaded with longitudinal canals or pores,
which are open in the direction of Krause’s membrane, but
closed at the middle of the sarcous element. In the con-
tracted muscle the clear part of the muscle substance has
disappeared from view, but the sarcous element is swollen and
the sarcomere is thus shortened ; in the uncontracted muscle,

— —

*“ H. H. Dale: Galvanotaxis and Chemotaxis of Ciliate
Infusoria. Journal of Physiology, 1901, page 291.

on the other hand, the clear part occupies a considerable in-
terval ketween the sarcous element and the membrane of
Krause, the sarcomere being lengthened and narrowed. The
sarcous element does not lie free in the middle of the sarco-
mere, but is attached at either end to Krause’s membrane by
very fine lines, which may represent fine septa, running
through the clear substance: on the other hand, Krause’s
membrane appears to be attached laterally to a fine mem-
brane, which limits the fibril externally.” Page 105:—
“Comparing the structure of the sarcomere with that of the
protoplasm of au ameceboid cell, we find in both a framework
(spongioplasm, substance of sarcous element), which tends to
stain with haematoxylin and similar re-agents, which encloses
in its meshes or pores a clear, probably semi-fluid, sub-
stance (hyaloplasm, clear substance of sarcomere), which re-
mains unstained by these re-agents. In both instances, also,
the clear substance or hyaloplasm, when the tissue is sub-
jected to stimulation, passes into the pores of the porous sub-
tance, or spongioplasm (contraction), whilst in the absence of
such stimulation it tends to pass out from the spongioplasm
(formation of pseudopodia, resting condition of muscle).
Thus, both the movements of cell-protoplasm and those of
muscle seem brought about by similar means, although at first
sight the structure of muscle is so dissimilar from that of
protoplasm. We have already noticed that the movements of
cilia are susceptible of a similar explanation.”

Krause’s Membrane

:— Fine Septa

Sarcous

Element

Woe

yt
t

i
j
1

ry
ee
1
"ay

{ len!
AERA tt
al y 1,',

it]
\\
(yal

Krause’s Membrane

FIGURE 6.

It would thus appear that the structure of the sarcomere
may be regarded as that represented in the diagram. If the
walls of the sarcous element be elastic, it is obvious that the
surface tension (T) of the fluid hyaloplasm would pull them
in at all points along their surface of contact, while on dimi-
nution of the surface tension the sarcous element would swell
in order to increase the surface of contact, and, since nothing
but hyaloplasm is available to fill up the space thus created,
hyaloplasm will flow ato the sarcous element. If the surface
tension is increased the operations would be reversed.

I am aware tkat histologists are not unanimous in adopt-
ing this theory of the structure of striated muscle, but. it
enables us to obtain a clear view of the influence of the sur-
face tension of the hyaloplasm upon the contraction of
muscle.

5.—THE CONTRACTION OF STRIATED MUSCLE.

In order to explain the contraction of striated muscle we
must assume that there is a contact difference of potential be-
tween the spongioplasm and hyaloplasm, due to the presence
of kation-proteul in the muscle. That kation-proteid is pre-
sent in striated muscle is demonstrated by the second part of
Hermann’s law, namely, that muscle becomes negative when
dying, that is, that within the muscle there is an E.M.F.
tending to produce a current from the dying points to the
other points in the muscle.* If “when dying” be taken to
mean “when injury of such a nature as to set up katabolism is
applied” we may at once state that this is due to the libera-
tion of kations by the decomposing ion-proteid.

Similarly, muscle becomes ‘‘negative’’ when excited to
activity, because the excitation sets up katabolism, and kations
are set free. We shall go more fully into the influence of the
electric current upon the katicn-proteid in the sequel ; but, in
passing, we may note Biedermann’s statement that if the pas-
sage of a weak “polarising” current through muscle be con-
tinued, its excitability is first augmented and then dim-
inished.t | We can easily see that while the katabolic pro-
cesses are being hurried up by the polarising current, any
additional excitation will precipitate them the more easily
because the ion-proteid 1s already partly decomposed, while,
as the constant excitation and consequent katabolism continue
the supply ‘of kations becomes so diminished that it can no
longer respond to the demands of additional excitation. That

* For an explanation of this confusion in physiological ter-
minology, vide Waller: Human Physiology, 1896, page 388.

+ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Weiby,
vol. i., page

such continuous excitation does take place during the passage
of the polarising current is a conclusion definitely arrived at
by Biedermann. He says:—“The electrical current sets up a
process of excitation in striated, as in smooth, muscle
throughout the duration of its passage.’* Assuming, for the
moment, what is about to be proved, namely, that the setting
free of kations by the current is the cause of contraction, we
see that the fact that maximal twitches are much higher with
a constant than with an induced current; is due to the
greater amount of decomposition of kation-proteid by the cur-
rent which acts the longer time.

As to the nature of the kations which form the 1on-proteid
in the hyaloplasm of striated muscle, we can say very
little. The effects of chemical re-agents on muscle show, as
we shall see later, that simple metallic ions are capable of
forming ion-proteids in muscle just as in unicellular organ-
isms. Probably K and H ions play an important part—as
it is well known that KH,PO, is always formed when muscle
becomes rigored—and, moreover, K salts predominate in the
ash of muscle, Ca and Mg only being present in traces. {

Now, it is evident that, since hyaloplasm is laden with
kation-proteid, the recult of its katabolism or dissociation
must be the formation of an electrical double layer at the
cohtact surface of the byaloplasm and spongioplasm by the
deposition of ions, just as in the case of the contact surface
between the mercury and sulphuric acid solution in the capi!.
lary electrometer.

The action of a stimulus, such as an electric current, os
muscle, is to set up katabolism at certain points in the
muscle (¢.g., the kathode on make), and the consequence of
this is, as we have seen, to cause “‘negativity”’ at such points
in consequence of the kations set free. This “negativity” is
transmitted, practically unaltered, § along the muscle, and its
mode of transmission will be discussed in detail in the sequel.

It remains to consider the effect of the progress of this
area of high potential along the muscle. It will be, as ex-
pressed by Bernstein’s “wave of excitation,” || to uninterrup-

* Biedermann: LElectro-physiology : Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i., page 185.

t Lbid«; volais paze 176;

{ Starling: Elements of Human Physiology, fifth edition,
page 130.

§ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. We'by,
vol. i1., page 395.

|| Ibid., vol. 1., page 374.

tedly raise the potential at each point in the muscle and un-
interruptedly let it fall again. The effect of this will be (just
as in the capillary electrometer when the potential on one
side of the meniscus is raised) to diminish the surface tension
at the contact surface of the spongioplasm and _ hyaloplasm
owing to the increase in the P.D. between them.

Now, if we suppose the walls of the sarcous element to be
elastic—the effect of the surface tension of the hyaloplasm
will be to exert a pull inwards upon the wall—and therefore
taeys walls: -are . pulled. in. To this. pull. .the
wall will cffer a resistance owing to its elasticity. If
these two forces are in equ'librium, increasing the surface
tension will narrow the tube, while diminishing the surface
tension will widen it. But widening this elastic tube must
shorten it, just as an indiarubber tube when stretched longi-
tudinally grows narrower, and when stretched laterally grows
shorter. The sarcous element, in shortening, must exert a
pull on the fine fibrils which, it is conjectured, attach them to
Krause’s membrane; heice, the two membranes of Krause
are pulled together and the muscle contracts. Hence, since
the “wave of negativity” must diminish the surface tension—
mot by deposition of ions, for in that case 1t would undergo
excessive decrement, which it does not*—but by simply rais-
ing the P.D. between the hyaloplasm and spongioplasm it
must give rise to a contraction.

6.—ON THE PROPAGATION OF EXCITATION IN NERVE AND
MUSCLE.

We have seen that the hyaloplasm of striated muscle con-
tains a kation-proteid owing to the presence and metabolism
of which the surface of contact between the spongioplasmic
sarcous elements and the hyaloplasm is always positively
charged on the nyaloplasmic side, or, in physiological termi-
nology, the surface of the hyaloplasm is always “‘negative” to
that of the spongioplasm. When any breaking up of the
kation-proteid takes place, kations must therefore be set free.
Now, I have previously pointed out that the fundamental
property of ion-proteid is that it is very unstable in the pres-
ence of ions, tending to form new ion-proteid compounds with
any ions which may be present in excess; and, indeed, it is
upon this property of the ion-proteid that the phenomena of
contraction and irritability in living tissues depend. I may
now throw this assertion into a more definite form, and state
that when a certain minimal number of free ions (the number
varying in different tissues) is present at any point in an excit-

* Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. he Weiby,
vol. i., page 395.

able tissue, the mass influence of these ions will be sufficient
to displace the ions already holding the proteid molecule,
and to take their place. Hence the kations set free in one
section of an excitable tissue by excitation may in turn dis-
place others in the next section of ion-proteid material, which
again may set free ions in the following section, and so on, so
that a wave of excitation is propagated through the tissue.
Thus we conclude that the “‘wave of negativity” does not pro-
gress so much by diffusion as by a process of successive dis-
placement.

The evidence for this fact will come out more clearly in
the sequel, but we may allude to some of the facts supporting
it now. Just as in muscle, we consider that there is present
in the axis cylinder of nerve a kation-proteid which, by its
katabolism under stimulation, gives rise to a wave of nega-
tivity, only, as in this case there is no elastic surface for ions
to be deposited on, no contraction is evoked. Now, the exci-
tatory state evoked in nerve by an intense stimulus is propa-
gated more rapidly than that caused by a weaker one.* We
can easily see that this must be due tv the greater mass of
kations set free initially ; they would more easily and quickly
set free other ions in each section (for it is the principle of
mass action that the rate of chemical change depends upon the
masses of the re-acting substances). This will be seen more
easily when we come to consider the genesis of the discharge
in the heart; but it is obvious that if the wave of negativity
were propagated by mere diffusion, since the number of ions
set free in no wise affects their velocity, the intensity of the
stimulus could not affect the velocity of the excitatory wave.

Of a similar nature may possibly be the explanation of
the fact that nerve cells conduct more slowly than nerve
fibres.t The cross-section of a nerve cell is much greater than
that of its fibre; hence at any moment the same number of
ions would have very many more ion-proteid molecules to cope
with than they had during their course in the fibre.

Another line of evidence supporting the theory we have
put forward is the influence of various solutions of salts upon
the transmission of excitation. If a portion of a conducting
excitable tissue were immersed in a solution with a negative
stimulation efficiency, and a wave of negativity initiated else-
where, on passing through the immersed portion (if it travels
by displacement) should either be diminished, abolished, or
converted into a wave of positivity, according as little or

* Gotch: Schafer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. li., page 458.
+ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i1., page 69.

much of the muscle-proteid was taken up by the anions of the
solution. Of course, the wave of positivity thus produced, on
issuing from the region immersed, would be converted into a
wave of negativity again, owing to the anions displacing
kations ; but it would probably be reduced owing to some of
the anions combining directly with kations. ‘Lhis idea re-
ceives support from the fact that nerves which have been im-
mersed for a long time in salt solution, and are repeatedly
stimulated, give a wave of positivity.* Still more suggestive
is the fact that the excitatory state is often diminished when
passing through a portion of nerve treated with NaCl—abso-
lutely with a 61 per cent. Nal solution—though excita-
bility is still present.; Thus the wave of negativity is, in the
second instance, suppressed, as we have said it may be,
though a wave may be started from the point affected by
direct action of the current. The reason why the wave is so
absolutely suppressed in the case of Nal is probably the high
stimulation efficiency of Nal causing a great predominance
of anions; as we shall see, the number of kations in a normal
wave of negativity in medullated nerve is small.

It will be obvious that there is a difficulty in proving this
point in nerve, because the wave of positivity in the affected
region is converted into a wave of negativity directly it
emerges. But our previous investigations into the contrac-
tion of muscle show that a wave of positivity cannot cause a
contraction until it be converted into a wave of negativity,
because a wave of positivity would only diminish, not increase,
the P.D. between the hyaloplasm and spongioplasm, and,
therefore, the surface tension at their contact surface would
not be diminished, and no contraction would ensue; hence, a
portion of a muscle which has been treated with a solution
which has a sufficiently great negative stimulation efficiency
ought to act as a motor nerve to the rest.

This can be very easily demonstrated in the intestine of a
fly. In insects the walls of the intestine contain “striated
(uninuclear) muscle cells, which by contraction set up the nor-
mal peristaltic movements of the digestive tract.’’+ The
species I used for experiments was Callophora villosa, Desv.,
which is the Australian representative of the English blue-
bottle. If the last posterior segment of one of these flies is
torn away with forceps, the end of the intestine is usually
left hanging from it, and, if the operation be performed care-
fully, nearly half an inch of intestine can sometimes be

* Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page 538.
+ Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page 490.
t Biedermann: Electro-vhysiology : Trans. by F. A. Welby.
vol. i1., page 164.
'

obtained. If this be placed on a slide which has been slightly
wetted with a decinormal solution of NaCl, and the super-
fluous fluid taken up by filter paper, on examining the in-
testine under the miscroscope peristaltic waves of con-
traction are seen travelling down the intestine towards the
rectum at an easily followed, uniform velocity, with moderate
frequency. On now touching the intestine at about its middle
point with a fine pointed camel’s hair brush, which has been
just wetted with a decinormal solution of CaCl,, a remark-
able effect is observed : —If one of the peristaltic waves start-
ing at the end of the intestine furthest from the rectum be
followed with the eye, it is observed to completely disappear
on entering the region which has been treated with CaCl, ;
but if we continue to move the eye along the intestine at the
same rate as the wave of contraction was formerly moving, on
reaching the other end of the affected area the wave will be
seen to emerge from it as vigorous as before, and to be travel-
ling at the same rate. Thus, contraction has been abolished
by the CaCl,, while conduction continues to take place at
the same rate as before. The suppression of the wave of con-
traction in the area affected is not due to any apparent
change in form in the intestine in that area, for if the CaCl,
be properly applied, no apparent change in form takes place.
If, however, too much CaCl, is applied—so that it is not
sufficiently diluted by the NaCl present (e.g., a small drop)—
the intestine at that part is thrown into corrugations which
represent fixed contractions ; that is, the intestine at that part
acquires “tone” (the cause of this will be considered later), but
this does not alter the effect of the CaCl, upon incoming
waves of contraction, which enter, and are suppressed, and
re-appear at the other end of the affected region as before.
Care must be taken in these experiments not to have the in-
testine too wet, otherwise it is difficult to confine the effect
of the CaCl, to a given region, as the CaCl, is carried
about by currents in the water. I repeated this experiment a
number of times, and, when the above-mentioned precautions
had been taken. I never failed to get the effect described. I
also obtained the same effect using a decinormal solution of
BaCl, instead of CaCl,. On glancing at the table of stimulation
efficiencies in section 4, it will be seen that both CaCl, and
BaCl, have high negative stimulation efficiencies, so
that our theoretical deduction is confirmed by these experi-
ments. The action of CaCl, and BaCl,, when applied to
a limited region of the intestine, may be contrasted with that
of a decinormal solution of KCl when similarly applied, al-
though no more apparent change of form is produced in the
intestine by the KCl than by CaCl,; yet not only is the

wave of ccntraction suppressed in the region treated v:tn
KCl, but also the wave of excitation, inasmuch as no wave
of contraction issues below the part affected—all parts of the
intestine below that treated with KCl remain motionless,
while those above that part are in vigorous peristalsis. This
action of KCl in abolishing both contractility and _ excita-
bility in the intestine of the fly is only an instance of its
general effect upon contractile tissues, the cause of which will
be discussed later.

7.—On THE NORMAL PRESENCE OF ANION-PROTEID IN
CERTAIN TISSUES, AND THEIR SENSIBILITY.

A fact which it is important to realise is the normal
presence of a certain amount of anion-proteid in irritable
tissues. it is easy to see that this is a priori probable, for,
since the blood and lymph contain ions of both kinds, it is to
be expected that some anions would be taken up and formed
into anion-proteid. But confirmatory evidence is not far to
seek: the cardiac inhibitory vagus fibres, when excited, pro-
duce a positive variation of the muscle current; this can only
be due to anions released by the nervous impulse, and since
“as regards their galvanic re-action to excitation they differ
in no respect from other nerve fibres,’* these anions must be
displaced from anion-proteid in the muscle itself, or in the
nerve endings. The “staircase”? phenomenon, that is, the
improvement of each of the first few contractions of a
muscle by the one that precedes it, which is specially notice-
able in the heart, and in the swimming bell of medusz,7 is
direct evidence of the fact that the wave of negativity is not
propagated by mere diffusion ; for some chemical change evi-
dently takes place wherever the wave passes, since the i1m-
provement is not confined to the point stimulated, but occuys
at all points traversed by the wave of negativity.[ I attri-
bute the “staircase” to the presence of a small amount of un-
stable anion-proteid, which tends to accumulate, and is mostly
removed by the first few waves of negativity, the kations of
which displace the anions. We should note that the “stair-
case” is not always comparable with the cumulative effect of
sub-minimal stimuli on many tissues, so that they eventually
become capable of causing discharge 1nd evoking contraction.
In this case, no doubt, the kations accumulate, being added

* Biedermann: Electro-physiology, vol. ii., page 257.

+ Vide Romanes: Jellyfish, Starfish, and Sea-urchins, Int.
sc. ser., page 56.

+ Romanes: Jellyfish, Starfish, and Sea-urchins. Int. se.
ser., page 57.

to by each stimulus until at last they reach the necessary
minimum required to displace ions from the ion-proteid.
The same principle explains idio-muscular swellings—fixed
waves of contraction of small extent; these are due to the
kations set free not being sufficient to cause a discharge by
displacement, but sufficient to augment the P.D. between
hyaloplasm and spongioplasm, and so cause local contraction
—while the same principle, together with the presence of
anions, explains the local extension at the anode seen in some
muscles ;* anions are liberated, as in ordinary electrolysis, at
the anode—the P.D. between the hyaloplasm and_ spongio-
plasm is diminished, and the muscle extends; but, as kations
are predominant, the anions are not strong enough to cause
displacement, and so the excitation does not travel. Some-
times the P.D. is so far reduced that the muscle extends so
much as to break at the anode;+ such a result could not, cf
course, take place unless the muscle had, normally, a good
deal of ‘‘tone’—that is, there is considerable room for exten-
sion and free kations are numerous.

This leads us directly to the consideration of the
“threshold number” of a tissue—that is, the number of ions
necessary to cause a discharge in a given tissue (the inverse
of which is proportional to the “sensibility” of the tissue). If
we call this number per unit cross-section 6, it is evident
that @ must vary considerably in different tissues, and that
the greater P is the slower will be conduction of excitation,
for at each successive point more time must be allowed for
the ions to gather. Since in non-medullated nerves the rate
of conduction is much lower than in medullated nerves (8
metres per sec. in the former, 27 per sec. in the latter{) we
may state provisionally that § is greater in non-medullated
nerves than in medullated. This is confirmed by the fact
that non-medullated nerve re-acts better to stimuli of prolonged
duration than to short induction shocks, § for more time is
required by the electric current to liberate P ions in non-
medullated nerves than in medullated, in which extremely
short current duration is sufficient.|| The conductivity of
medullated nerve, and, indeed, of all excitable tissues, is lower-

* Biedermann: Electro-physiolvzy : Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i1., page 236.

+ Ibid., vol. 11., page 239.

+Goteh: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., pages
455 and 482.

§ Ibid., vol. il., page 284.

| Ibid., vol. ii., page 475; and Biedermann: Electro-physi-
ology: Trans. by F. A. Welby, vol. ii., pages 121 and 122.

ed by lowering the temperature.* This means that / is
raised, therefore the excitability to short-duration stimuli is
lowered.+ Since conduction is much slower in smooth than in
striated muscle, # must be greater in the former, and the
minimal duration of excitation, in order to cause contraction,
is therefore greater in smooth than in striated muscle. And,
indeed, Biedermann states generally that the excitation of
more sluggish excitable tissues depends on the duration of the
stimulus.{ The conductivity of muscle is lowered by lower-
ing the temperature, but the height of the contractions is
augmented :§ this is because of the greater value of 6 caus-
ing a greater P.D. on excitation. Since the rate of propa-
gation in the heart is less than in striated skeletal muscle (1°5
metres per sec., as against 3 metres per sec.)|| (@ is pro-
bably greater in heart muscle than in ordinary striated
muscle.

8.—PoLaR EXcITATION IN MUSCLE AND NERVE AND
ELECTROTANUS.

One of the most striking facts in the electrical stimula-
tion of muscle is that the make contraction starts at the
kathode, and the break contraction at the anode. From my
theory, however, it seems to obtain a sufficiently simple ex-
planation. On the passage of the electric current the ion-
proteid undergoes decomposition, and, in accordance with
the laws of electrolysis, kations collect at the kathode. As
soon, however, as the kations at the kathode reach the
“threshold number” they displace the kations from the adja-
cent section of ion-proteid material; these, in turn, displace
the kations from the next section, and so the wave of nega-
tivity is propagated through the tissue. This view of the
nature of the “wave of negativity” obtains further support
from the fact that “‘the responsitivity of the kathodic points
of fibres in a muscle traversed by a current increases, up to
a certain limit, with the intensity of the polarising current.
This limit, however, is very low . . . beyond this limit
excitability diminishes, as has been shown, in _ proportion
with the strength of the polarising current.’ {| Suppose a

* Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., pages
486 and 534.

+ Itid., vol. ii., page 485.

~ Biedermann: Electro-physiolozy, vol. ii., page 106

§ Ibid., vol. i,, page 98.

| Burdon Sanderson: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiciogy,
vol. ii., pages 383 and 443.

“| Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i., page 285

certain amount of kation-proteid to be on the point of break-
ing down at points which are about to be made kathodic by
the polarising current, then, if the strength of the polarising
current be insufficient to decompose the whole, an additional
excitation will be aided by the effect already present. If,
however, the polarising current has decomposed all the ion-
proteid most immediately available, irritability at kathodic
points will decrease.

We now touch upon the curious fact, that during the
closure of a constant current, after the make twitch, no per-
ceptible effect 1s usually produced in striated muscle until the
current is broken. |

This depends upon two factors: the superior stimulation
efficiency of rapid variation of current density (to be con-
sidered later); and, secondly, the comparative exhaustion of
ion-proteid material at the kathode after make. It is obvious
that such exhaustion must take place sooner or later, and we
need not be surprised at its taking place immediately after
the initial twitch, for, as we have seen, the duration of the
current has an effect upon the height of the make twitch,
inasmuch as it augments it ;* that 1s to say, the constant cur-
rent decomposes a large amount of ion-proteid material
initially, to produce the make twitch.

We can account for the fact that persistent closure con-
traction takes place more usually, and to a greater degree, in
smooth than in striated muscle, by the higher value in the
former of the “threshold number’—for an excess of free
kations might be liberated by the current, sufficient to cause
a considerable increase in tone of the muscle, and yet insuffi-
cient to cause displacement, and so initiate a wave of nega-
tivity. Nct only is variation of current density ordinarily
of importance, but the comparative exhaustion of ion-proteid
material after the make greatly increases the necessity for
such variation in a way that will be explained shortly. Hence
we cannot wonder that in such highly sensitive: contractile
material as striated muscle persistent closure contractions are
not usually seen in a marked degree.

Biedermann} states that a wave of contraction, initiated
in an extra-polar tract, cannot pass the kathode of a polaris-
ing current of certain intensity, while it can the anode. This
is not due to the persistent closure contraction, because “‘inhi-
bition is most pronounced when a persistent descending cur-
rent in the upper half of the muscle has reduced the original
persistent closure contraction to a minimum.” I can account

* Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i., page 176.

+ Ibid., vol i., page 296.

for this in the following way:—The cause of the extra-polar
wave of contraction is the accompanying “wave of nega-
tivity,’ which means that (in the first instance) when the
wave of negativity approaches the kathode a number of kations
are there set free. These kations will, however, be attract-
ed by the kathode, and, moreover, there will be very little
undecomposed ion-proteid from which they can displace the
ions; hence, the wave of negativity will be seriously hindered,
and the proteid residues at the kathode will tend to retain
some of the kations. At the anode, on the contrary, unde-
composed kation-proteid is abundant, and the kations are not
retarded by the action of the current itself, so that the wave
of negativity passes this region without hindrance.

We have seen that a certain amount of anion-proteid is
present in muscle and nerve, consequently, on electrolysis
taking place, anions are liberated at the anode; but, since
kations are predominant, their number is not sufficient to
cause displacement, and therefore a discharge; while at the
kathode the proteid residues cannot take up kations, for they
are immediately dissociated ; but when the passage of the cur-
rent ceases, the proteid residues at cue kathode immediatuly
pick up kations; hence the concentration of free kations falls
at this point, and kations diffuse in from other points, in-
cluding the anode; hence the mass influence of kations at the
anode is diminished, the anions get the upper hand and create
a discharge, which immediately, as we have seen, becomes a
wave of negativity by displacement of kations. The concen-
tration of kations at the physiological anode may, possibly,
fall on break for other reasons ; thus some of the proteid resi-
due at the kathode may, when the current is broken, take up
the ions from the adjacent 1on-proteid ; this may in turn re-
coup itself from the next section, and so the area of diminish-
ed kation concentration would travel to the anode.

The question immediately arises: Have we any other evi-
dence of the liberation of anions at the anode? The answer
is that we have ample in the phenomena of electrotonus.

The effect of anions at the anode would be to lower
excitability, because, iu order to obtain a sufficient excess of
kations over anions to create a discharge the influence of the
free anions has to be neutralised; it will be to lower con-
ductivity, because the anions will tend to prevent the incom-
ing kations from displacing ions from the ion-proteid by
lowering their mass influence: and it will be to cause “‘posi-
tivity” in the region of the anode. These are the well-known
phenomena of anelectrotonus.*

* Tide Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii.,
pages 494 and 502: and Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans.
bv F. A. Welby, vol. 11., page 268.

The magnitude of the katelectrotonic effects will depend
upon the magnitude of the threshold number (8). If only
a part of the kations liberated at the kathode by a current is
discharged, there will be improvement in excitability, con-
ductivity, and “negativity” at the kathode, owing to the
influence of the free kations; this will be the case when #3 is
small, and occurs, as we should expect, in medullated nerve.*
But where B is ‘large, and the ion-proteid therefore more
stable, a very large proportion of the electrolysable portion
of the ion-proteid is used up in initiating the discharge, and
therefore the proteid residues at the kathode, after discharge,
are great in proportion to the free kations, and their delay-
ing effect neutralises the improving effect of the kations, as
is the case in non-medullated nerve, where, as we have seen,
8 is greater than in medullated nerve, and there is no
katelectrotonus.+. If 8 be larger still the effect of the proteid
residues is to reverse the improving effect that would other-
wise be produced by the kations. This is the case in muscle,
as we have seen, and in muscle / is greater than in nerve. t
The magnitude of the anelectrotonic effect depends on ths
amount of anion-proteid, but since no anions are discharged
until break it should, in general, be greater than the katelec-
trotonic effect, and this is, in fact, the case.§ In further
support of our theory of katelectrotonus, we may allude to
the fact that with strong currents of long duration conduc-
tivity is retarded at the kathode even in medullated nervell
owing to the greater amount of electrolysis and the gradual
diffusion of kations from the kathodic points, leaving behind
the indiffusible proteid residues.

Since there is less anion-proteid than kation-proteid
anelectrotonus develops more slowly than katelectrotonus,
hence “currents of moderate strength but of short duration
excite only on closure, 7.e., at the kathode.”{] Given the
facts of electrotonus, Pfliiger’s law of contraction follows.

* Vide Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii.,
panes “A 494 and 502; and Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans.
A. Welby, vol. page 268.

+ Biedermann : Hh bid eae Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. ii., page 284

t Vide section 8, this paper.

§ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. ii., page 268

|| Zbid., vol. ii., page 148.
{ Gotch: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page 506.

9.—Tue INFLUENCE OF VARYING CURRENT DENSITY.

It seems probable that the reason for the importance of
the steepness of increase in current density for evoking sous-
cular contractions les in the diffusion of the kations away
from the points which form the physiological kathode. When
the kations are only very slowly liberated they diffuse away
from the points where they are liberated, so that they never
become concentrated at any point, and their mass at any
point is never appreciable in comparison with the mass of
ion-proteid with which they come in contact. Hence the
kations diffuse through the whole muscle without the poten-
tial having risen at any point high enough to evoke a per-
ceptible contraction. This view is supported by Bieder-
mann’s statement that “the transmission of excitation from
the seat of direct stimulation would seem, in the last resort,
to be produced and conditioned by a rapid variation in the
current.’’*

Persistent closure contractions, however, appear to be
due to a number of kations hberated by the action of the
current at the different points in the muscle forming the
physiological kathode. These kations are insufficient to
cause a wave of negativity from any of these points, but by
raising the potential at such points they evoke a persistent
contraction. If such were the case we should expect to find
that persistent closure contractions were more apt to occur in
muscles in which the threshold number is large; and this is the
case, for “the visible manifestations of persistent excitation
fall into the background, while the excitatory effects of cur-
rent variation come prominently forward in proportion as
the excitable protoplasm is more highly mobile,’*+ and we
have seen that the less mobile a tissue is the greater is the
threshold number (section 8). Thus we see why the dis-
charge of the initial “wave of negativity’ tends to inhibit
persistent closure contraction in striated muscle.t Only the
more stable ion-proteid compounds are left at the kathode,.
and these, besides being fewer in number for the current to
act on, present a greater resistance to the dissociative effect
of the current, so that very few ions will be liberated at any
given moment, and these will diffuse into the spongioplasm
before any accumulated effect is possible.

* Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i., page 193

+ Ibid., vol. i., page 192.
t Vide remarks on polar excitation in muscle, section 9, this
paper.

10.—TETANUS AND FATIGUE.

When a second momentary current is sent into a muscle
before the contraction due to the first has subsided, the effect
of the second current is added to that of the first, and a new
contraction appears superimposed upon the old, starting from
the degree of contraction at which the latter had arrived,
and proceeding much as if that were the normal condition of
the muscle; with succeeding currents the process goes on
until a certain limit of contraction is reached, beyond which
the muscle cannot go. If the shocks follow one another
quickly enough the recording lever will trace upon a travel-
ling surface a straight line, and the muscle is said to be in
tetanus, and it will, if the shocks are kept up, continue in
this condition until “fatigue” sets in, and the lever gradually
sinks.

Helmholtz considered that ‘“‘from the point at which ‘te
second excitation becomes effective the twitch behaves as if
the contracted state of the muscle at the moment was its
natural state, and the second twitch, alone, induced in ‘t”
It has been found, however, that this is not true even for the
second twitch; it is lower than the first and of a shorter
period,* while it is obviously not applicable to the later
twitches when the lmit is nearly reached. The reason for
this summation is, of course, the repeated discharge of ions
from the seat of stimulation. -the twitches will become smaller
and smaller and shorter as the ion-proteid is used up—and no
increase of contraction can then take place. At this period,
however, since a great mass of kations have been rapidly
liberated, they cannot diffuse at once into the spongioplasm
so as to diminish the difference of potential at the contact sur-
face; so that the muscle remains for some time in tetanus,
and only as the kations diffuse into the spongioplasm will the
lever sink and the muscle enter into “fatigue’’—-finally the
lever sinks quite, and the muscle is isoelectric—or, only with
the usual contact difference of potential between its hyalo-
.plasmic and spongioplasmic surfaces. An objection may he
raised: Why do rapidly succeeaing shocks produce reiterated
contractions when a constant current fails to cause persistent
contraction? There are two reasons: First, that to produce
complete tetanus in striated muscle the shocks must be of
extremely short duration; and we have seen that such shocks
do not discharge so many ions as longer ones; that is, there
is a reserve left, while the muscles in which the shocks aeed
not be so short are just those in which persistent closure con-

* Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. i., page 115.

tractions take place. Secondly, during the intervals, however
short, the proteid residues will be able to gather more kations,
though fewer as time goes on, because the supplies get used
up ; nevertheless they will be able to do so to some extent all
the time, and this corresponds to the fact that in tetanus the
muscle is really vibrating, though its vibrations are imper-
ceptible by ordinary methods.* This is further confirmed by
the fact that too rapid a succession of stimuli corresponds in
effect to a persistent stimulus, even in striated muscles.+
Schoenlein & Richet’s observations of “rhythmically interrup-
ted tetanus” in striated muscles are doubtless due to the
hyaloplasm reclaiming kations from the spongioplasm at the
point of stimulation during the intervals. { Another reason
for the rapidly decreasing height of the summated stimuli lies
in the fact that the elastic re-action of the walls of the sar-
cous elements becomes less and less as the muscle contracts,
so that each new contraction in the series starts with less force
to counteract the pull of the surface tension than the pre-
vious one; hence absolute tetanus may correspond to a state
of the sarcous elements in which no pull is being exerted on
the wall at all. That “fatigue” is really due to the diffusion
of the kations into the spongioplasm is shown by the fact that
in the ureter ‘each wave of contraction produces a temporary
depression of excitability and conductivity in the sheet of
muscle, from which it only recovers during the subsequent
diastole and interval (just as in the striated muscle-nets of
insect intestine).”§ This also illustrates the rapidity with
which the hyaloplasm recovers itself and again gathers
kations; one is also reminded of the “refractory period” in
the heart. It may be frequently observed that when a frog’s
gastrocnemius has been tetanised through its nerve for as long
as several minutes, so that the lever has almost dropped to
the base line again through fatigue, if the tetanising current
be opened only for a moment, and then closed again, the
muscle, if it is fresh, will contract in tetanus almost to the
same height as before. We should, indeed, expect that
striated muscle with its low / (and consequently high sensi-
bility), and a comparatively large surface of spongioplasm to
regain kations from, would have a very much shorter “re-
fractory period” than the heart or the smooth muscle of the
ureter.

* Biedermann: LElectro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby.
i., page 135.

Te ONGeavol. Ie. pace TSdr.
t Tbid., vol. i., page 131.
§ Ibid., vol. 1., page 167.

11.—TuHE Work or MUSCLE AND THE INFLUENCE OF TENSION.

It is well known that the work done by muscle increases,
up to a certain point, with the magnitude of the load, and
then decreases to zero, or even becomes negative, in contrac-
tion. The reason for the initial increase in the work done,
as well as the cause of the favourable effect of moderate ten-
sion upon all contractile tissues, lies in the fact that the
tension increases the surface of contact between the hyalo-
plasm and spongioplasm. It is, indeed, obvious, @ priori, that
when an elastic substance is stretched in any way its surface
is increased; and this is just the case with the sarcous cle-
ments. Hence, the work which has to be done against the sur-
face tension, along the contact surface, in order to increase
that surface, is diminished ; and, since the same work as before
will be done by the ions set free on excitation, only against
a tension that has been diminished, the owtput of work will
be greater.

At the same time, the longitudinal stretching of the sar-
cous element (spongioplasm) will have a horizontal component
tending to decrease its diameter—that is, to decrease the elas-
tic reaction outwards, and so decrease the tendency of the
sarcous element to bulge on stimulation ; when this unfavour-
able influence exactly balances the favourable, the work will
be the same as with a minimal load; between these points
there must be a point of maximum work output; afterwards
the work falls, and, finally, becomes zero. If, now, more
loading is added, when the muscle is stimulated, what hap-
pens is that the pull of the hyaloplasm upon the wall of the
sarcous element is diminished; normally the horizontal reac-
tion would cause the walls to bulge, but now, owing to the
great vertical strain, the horizontal reaction is converted
into a vertical one, and the muscle elongates when it con-
tracts: this is known as Weber’s paradox.* It is just as if
one violently compressed an indiarubber tube which was
being at the same time violently pulled. On releasing the
compression the tube will become more stretched, and its aver-
age bore diminished ; but, if the tube were not stretched its
average bore would be increased.

12.—Tue Action oF CHEMICAL REAGENTS UPON THE
CONTRACTURE OF MUSCLE.
If the “negativity” at any point in a muscle is deter-
mined by the number of free kations in the hyaloplasm at
that point, we should expect to find that when a muscle is

* Hailiburton: Handbook of Physiology, fourth edition,
page 135,

dipped into an electrolyte with a positive “stimulation eftici-
ency’ it would become negative at those points which are
wetted, and we find this to be the case. If one end of a sar-
torius that is free from current is briefly immersed in highly
dilute solutions of K salts, that end becomes strongly “nega-
tive’ to the rest. This is simply neutralised by washing out
with physiological NaCl solution.* A glance at the table
of stimulation efficiencies will show that all the salts of K
used in physiology have positive “‘stimulation efficiencies.”
The antagonistic action of NaCl is simply accounted for by
the fact that it has a negative “stimulation efficiency.” That
the action of NaCl in abolishing the “negativity” induced
by K salts is really due to the fact of its anions diffusing
faster than its kations is shown by the fact that Engelmann
found that a solution of NaCl, if stronger than 6 per cent.,
produces a weak “‘positivity” at points of a muscle immersed
in it.; In face of the fact that nearly all potassium salts
are highly positive stimuli—as shown by the table of stimula-
tion efficiencies—it 1s difficult to deny that their highly
poisonous effect, when applhed to muscle, must be in some
way connected with the high velocity of the K ion, and I
think the explanation must be this: that when a muscle is
dipped into too strong a solution of KCl, suppose, the kations
diffuse so rapidly into the muscle-hyaloplasm and_ spongio-
plasm that little or no contraction is evoked, for the muscle
is now throughly permeated with potassium ions, and ion-
proteid cannot break down at any point without kations being
immediately at hand to regenerate it. Even a strong cur-
rent might not be able to liberate enough kations in any one
section of the muscle to overcome the mass influence of those
in the next; in fact, potassium salts may be said to induce a
state of “‘persistent anabolism”’ in the ion-proteid. Thus it
would appear that the poisonous effect of potassium salts is
primarily due to loss of conductivity in the muscle, owing to
an excessive rise in the threshold number, and this view is
fully borne out by my experiments on the intestine of the
fly. If a section of the intestine is treated, in the manner
described in Section 7, with decinormal KCl solution, a
block is created at the points thus treated—no contraction
can pass this area, and, moreover, the peristaltic contractions
travelling down the intestine do not reappear below the
affected area, hence the excessive rise of the threshold num-
ber at the points treated with KCl renders propagation of
the wave of excitation by displacement impossible.

* Biedermann: Electro-physiologyv: Trans. by F. A. Welby,

vol. i., page 354.
+ Lbzd., vol. i:,. page 356.

It has been shown that potassium salts produce a pro-
longed contraction of the gastrocnemius muscle of a frog,
while calcium salts and, to a lesser extent, sodium salts,
antagonise this action of potassium salts.* We can easily see
that this action of potassium salts is due to the faster diffusing
kation augmenting the P.D. between the hyaloplasm and
spongioplasm, and hence lowering the surface tension at the
contact surface, and causing prolonged contraction, while the
action of the Ca salts and Na salts is simply due to the fact
that in them the anion usually moves faster than the kation.

“The excitability of certain contractile substances (sper-
matic filaments, ciliated cells) is considerably heightened by
Na,CO, in dilute solutions.” “If the pelvic end of
an uninjured curarised sartorius dips into a ‘5—1 per cent.
solution of this salt, the excitability of the muscle to the
closure of weak ascending currents is seen after a short time
to be extraordinarily augmented, while the descending cur-
rent still works quite normally, although break excitations
are discharged with such low intensity of current and brief
duration of closure as would not occur in normal muscle.’’t
This improvement of contraction and excitability on treating
with the Na,CO, is, I believe, owing to its low positive
stimulation efficiency shghtly increasing the threshold num-
ber, while the incoming kations enable a sufficient number to
cause displacement to gather more quickly at any point. In
my own experiments I have observed this improvement in the
sartorious, in the semi-membranosus of the frog (fig. 7), and in
the intestine of the fly. If a section of the fly’s intestine be
touched with decinormal Na,CO,, the peristaltic contrac-
tions are much augmented at that part; and, if the intestine
be quiescent owing to long exposure to NaCl, peristaltic
contractions will start at the point painted with Na,CQO,.
The improvement, in both cases, quickly dies away, and the
intestine becomes puckered at the part affected owing to
increase of tone, this part now acting as if it had been
painted with KCl. This is to be explained by the effect of
the natrions being, at first, partly neutralised by the chlori-
dions already present, and then as the natrions become pre-
dominant the stimulation efficiency is too great, and the ion-
proteids enter into persistent anabolism.

*W. D. Zoethout: American Journal of Physiology, May,
Ne : The Effects of Potassium and Calcium Ions on Striated
Luscle.

+ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. 1., page 221.

Seu ven £4 WARTS Ke :

FIGURE 7.

13.—RHYTHMICITY IN MUSCLE AND THE ACTION OF
INHIBITORY AND AUGMENTOR NERVES.

Direct proof that the rhythm of the heart is due to the
presence of electrolytes in the circulating medium is afforded
by the fact tuat if the proteids be removed from serum which
is then circulated through the heart the rhythmic contractions
will continue. If the salts are removed and the serum is
circulated it is ineffective.* The solutions generally used aud
found effective stimuli for the heart-beat have negative stimu-
lation efficiencies, owing to the predominance of NaCl.
Let us, therefore, consider the case of an excised heart
through which a solution, which has a negative stimulation
efficiency, is circulated. Assuming that the walls of the
heart are equally permeable to both the ions in the solution—
an assumption which, however, is not strictly permissible—
we see that, owing to the difference of ionic concentration on
the two sides of the muscle surface, ions are continually
diffusing in—but at different rates—the anions more quickly
than the kations. Since the time taken for the anions enter-
ing the hyaloplasm to reach a given number—the threshold
number—will be inversely proportional to the velocity with
which the anions enter, we may conclude that, other things
being equal, the frequency of the beat is creater the greater
the velocity of the anions in the solution. Also, since the
driving force which causes the ions to diffuse into the muscle
is dependent upon the difference in ionic concentrations on
the two sides of the muscle surface, we see that, if the solu-

* Gaskell : a ee Textbook ioe Pieeaee a te DRE
226.

tion is-kept sufficiently dilute to ensure complete dissociation
of the salts, the frequency of the beat will be greater the
greater the concentration. And, obviously, the frequency
will be less the vreater the threshold number.

We further notice that if the ions diffusing into the
muscle gathered unchecked on the muscle side of the sur-
face, diffusion would shortly cease because of the approxi-
mation of the concentrations on both sides—the process could
not be kept up. But we know that this is not the case; a
periodic discharge of anions takes place which, by releasing
kations, starts waves of negativity, giving rise to the contrac-
tions, or, when the heart is bathed in a solution with a posi-
tive stimulation efficiency, the periodic discharge is one of
kations starting, as before, a wave of negativity. The con-
centration after each contraction is, therefore, on the muscle
side, kept automatically constant, as far as anions are con-
cerned ; on the fluid side it is kept absolutely constant by cir-
culation, but during the intervals between contractions the
difference between the concentrations on the two sides is not
constant, but continually falls off. Another fact to be con-
sidered is that the difference between the velocities of en-
trance of the anions and kations will diminish progressively
during the intervals between contractions owing to the electro-
static repulsion, due to the excess of one kind of ion which has
entered, tending to accelerate the other kind of ion and
retard the ion bearing a similar charge. Finally, we have
to take into account the reciprocal influence of kations and
anions in altering the threshold number—kations will aug-
ment the threshold number for anions, and anions will aug-
ment the threshold number for kations. Hence the
threshold number will be greater the less the difference be-
tween the velocities of the anions and kations on entering the
muscle. Also, it is possible that kations of one kind may
raise the threshold number for kations of another kind (when
the solution contains two or more salts). Hence the threshold
number, and consequently the extent of contraction, will
vary considerably in different solutions.

It is obvious that a number of conditions must be satis-
fied in order that a solution may be able to keep a heart beat-
ing. Thus, the threshold number must be reached on the
muscle side by the faster-moving ions before their velocity
has been reduced to that of the slower-moving ions, by the
electrostatic force which they develop on the muscle side.
This involves the difference between the velocities of the
anions and kations, the influence of one sort of ion in rais-
ing the threshold number for another sort, and the difference
between the concentrations of the ions on the two sides of the
muscle. Then, again, if the frequency of the beat is too

EE EE

great the beats will merge into one another, and the heart
will go into tonic contraction.

Thus, the normal rhythm of the heart is due to the ions
diffusing in from the blood, and the delicate adjustment of
the threshold number to the nature and concentration of the
salts in the blood. Almost any point in the heart is capable,
in a greater or less degree, of initiating this rhythm, ¢.g., if
the auriculo-ventricular groove be ligatured or cut through,
a series of rhythmical contractions is initiated; this is soon
suppressed ; subsequently a more permanent series is initi-
ated.* The “rhythm of excitation” is due to the kations re-
leased by the injury due to the cut or ligature, the “rhythm
of development” to kations diffusing in from capillary spaces.

A permanent rhythm, such as we see in the normal
heart, could not be maintained on a nutrient fluid whose
stimulation efficiency was negative, unless the excess of
anions was continually removed, for otherwise the anions
would gradually convert most of the kation-proteid into
anion-proteid, and contraction would become impossible. The
solutions, however, which are generally used as circulating
media to keep up the heartbeat have negative stimulation
efficiencies owing to the predominance of NaCl. We should,
therefore, expect to find, if the preceding reasoning has been
correct, that the rhythm of the heart would be slowed by add-
ing a little KCl to the solution (sufficient to reduce its
stimulation efficiency without making it positive), and quick-
ened by adding CaCl, so as to increase its stimulation efh-
ciency (since CaCl, has a greater stimulation efficiency than
NaCl.). This was found to be the case by Greene.t He
found that calcium salts in isotonic solutions of NaCl stimu-
lated a cardiac strip to increased rhythm and final permaneat
contracture. KCl in isotonic solutions of NaCl prevent-
ed contractions and kept the ventricular strip in a state of
relaxation. If the salts CaCl, and KCl were in the pro-
portions of ‘026 per cent. CaCl, to -03 per cent. KCl, a
few good contractions at a very slow and irregular rate might
result. If the ratio was changed by increasing the CaCl,,
or by decreasing the KCl, then the contractions were in-
creased in frequency; but if the CaCl, was diminished or
KCI increased, few contractions were developed, or none at
allt At first sight, these results might seem to be opposed

; * Gaskell: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page
fv.

+ C. W. Greene: American Journal of Physiology, 1899,
vol. ii., page 82.
+t Ibid., vol. ii., pages 107 and 125.

to those obtained by Zoethout in experiments on the gastroc-
nemius,* but, in reality, these results are due to the action
of KCl and CaCl, in lowering and raising the stimulation
efficiency of NaCl respectively. Pure CaCl, or KCl
applied to a heart strip throws it into strong tone,{ as might
be expected from the high stimulation efficiency of both,
since the frequency of contraction is greater the greater the
difference between the ionic velocities. Hence the two sets of
results are, by this theory, brought into entire harmony.

With regard to the influence of the threshold number in
lowering the rate of rhythm, it is obvious that the height of
contraction depends upon the magnitude of the threshold
number, for the greater the potential of the wave of negativity
the greater is the maximum P.D. produced between the
hyaloplasm and spongioplasm; hence we should expect that
the slower the rhythm the greater the height of contraction,
other things being equal. This has been experimentally proved
for smooth muscle by Woodworth.{ As P grows greater in
excitable tissues we find that the “refractory period” grows
greater. During this period the tissue will not respond to
stimuli, and it is greater in cardiac than in _ striated
skeletal muscle.§ The reason is that, 6 being greater, a
greater time must be allowed for the amount of ion-proteid
corresponding to 6 to become unstable ; of course, the moment
at which the kations at the point of initiation are sufficient
to cause a contraction will coincide with the moment at which
the ion-proteid is in a certain minimal state of instability.
This is the same as saying that immediately after a wave of
negativity has passed a point, 6 is great at that point, and
the amount of decomposable material small; the amount of
decomposable material grows, and £ diminishes until a cer-
tain point is reached at which excitation by a given stimulus
is possible. Thus the slowing of a wave of negativity travel-
ling too soon after a contraction is due to the greater magni-
tude of the threshold number.|| Since the frequency of
contraction is greater the greater the difference between the
ionic velocities, any solution in which the ions move at very
different rates will cause tonic contraction. Hence alkalies
cause tonic contraction.{]

* Vide section 12.

+C. W. Greene: American Journal of Physiology, 1899,
vol. ii., page 101.

t R. S. Woodworth: American Journal of Physiology, 1899.
a § Gaskell: Schafer’s Textbonk of Physiology. vol. ii., page
189,

|| Ibid., vol. i1., page 195.

q Ibid., vol. ii., page 195.

In general, inhibition must be due to an income
of anions large enough to neutralise the kations present,
but not strong enough to cause a discharge in addi-
tion. If inhibition in the heart were due to the refractory
period after a subminimal discharge of kations it could not
last 252 seconds after stimulation of the vagus, as it may do.*
We should expect the anions to cause a relaxation, and this
takes place.t | We should expect excitation of the inhibitory
nerve, if it sets free anions in the muscle, to cause ‘‘positi-
vity” at the points affected, and this is the case.t{ All doubt
as to the action of the inhibitory fibres of the vagus being
comparable to the effect of free anions at the parts affected—
that is, to anelectrotonus—is removed by the fact that “‘a
crystal of salt applied to the sinus will produce une same
electrical variation as stimulation of the vagus nerve,” § since
in NaCl the stimulation efficiency is negative. In some
animals the contractions of the ventricle are not diminished
by vagus stimulation, hence there must be few or no anions
at the vagus nerve-endings in the ventricles of these animals,
and a most remarkable confirmation of my theory as to the
nature of the “‘staircase’’|| and of inhibition is that “‘another
somewhat unexpected coincidence is brought out by the com-
parison of ventricular muscle, whose contractions are
diminished by vagus’ stimulation and __ ventricular
muscle, whose contractions are not so diminished,
namely, that the staircase phenomenon obtains
only in the former case, and not in the latter.” {] The effect of
the anions liberated by the inhibitory nerve in the heart will
be to depress the rate of the contractions, because a greater
number of kations will have to gather at each point to over-
come the mass influence of the anions. To depress the con-
ductivity owing to the state of anelectrotonus induced, and
to diminish the force of contractions owing to the diminished
tonicity: all these are known effects of stimulation of the
inhibitory nerve. ** The auriculo-ventricular ring always
specially tends to block contractions—we may assume that

* Gaskell: Schiifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page

207
t Ibid., page 210.

t Biedermann: Electro-physiology, vol. ii., page 257.
me § Gaskell: Schiafer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. ii., page

|| Vide section 7, this paper.

{ Gaskell: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. 11., page
214.

** Tbid., vol. ii., page 209.

this is due to an abundance of anions in this part—hence if
we cut off the supply of kations, by hgaturing the coronary
arteries, a block takes place,* because the anions have now
got the upper hand.

The augmentor nerves increase the rate of rhythm, be-
cause kations are more abundant, and therefore at the initial
points of contraction they more quickly reach the threshold
number. The force of contractions increases because of in-
creased tonicity. Conductivity increases because the inhibi-
tory action of the anion-proteid normally present is overcome
by the free kations; that is, presuming that the augmentor
nerves end in spots where anion-proteid is scarce, and that
the impulse therefore sets free kations; and all these are
known effects of stimulating the augmentor nerve fibres.t
The alteration in tone and the negative variation produced
by stimulating the augmentor fibres is slight. { This is to be
expected, otherwise a discharge would be initiated at the
nerve endings, and the refractory period would diminish con-
ductivity. The discharge by the augmentor fibres must be
less than the threshold number.

The after-effect of inhibitory nerves in improying con-
ductivity § is probably due to increased instability of the jon-
proteid, the after-effect of the augmentors to the reverse.

The facts we have considered throw light on the whole
action of antagonistic nerves in the many cases where there is
a double nerve supply.

14.—RHYTHMICITY IN NERVES.

One of the best examples of rhythmicity in nerves is that
of Ritter’s opening tetanus. ‘An indirectly excited muscle
may, after prolonged closure of a powerful battery current,
fall, on breaking the circuit, into a state of persistent tetanic
excitation.” || It specially occurs in “cooled frogs,” when, as
we saw in section 7, the threshold number is great, and the
nervous impulse which gives rise to the tetanus is rhythmic.{]
There can be little doubt that this is a rhythmic discharge
due to a collection of anions at the anode, just as a rhythmic

* Gaskell: Schifer’s Textbook of Physiology, vol. i1., page
193.

+ Ibid., vol. ii., page 216.

+ Ibid., vol. ii., page 218,

§ Ibid., vol, ii., page 220.

| Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. ii., page 117.

q Ibid., vol. ii., page 119.

discharge is caused in the heart by the anions in a circulating
fluid. ‘Che long closure of a powerful current allows plenty
of time for a large number of anions to be liberated at the
anode, and, what is more important, a large amount of kation-
proteid to be decomposed at the kathode, so that although
the excess of anions liberated at the anode may
not be equal to the threshold number’ while the
current is closed, yet, on opening, the sudden rush of kations
to the former kathode causes a sudden fall in the value of the
threshold number, for anions, at the anode, so that the num-
ber of free anions may now be many times the value of the
threshold number. The fact that it occurs best when the
threshold number is great (cooled nerves)—when the decom-
position at the kathode is most marked*—favours this view.
The fact that the “opening tetanus” is removed by 1mmer-
sion of the nerve in KNO, shows that it is due to anions,
since it 1s removed by an excess of kations.

15.—THE MovEMENTS OF PLANTS.

This theory of the influence of the ion-proteid upon the
surface tension of protoplasm gives a simple explanation of
the movements, and especially the heliotropism, of plants.
It is a well-known fact that, in the presence of chlorophyll,
green plants, under the influence of light, decompose carbon
dioxide, retaining the carbon and_ giving off the
oxygen — this carbon is built up into carbo-hydrates
and _ proteid. + Hence, it is evident that *''the
rapidity with which the synthesis of proteid (and
therefore of ion-proteid) goes on is dependent upon the
supply of carbon; that is, upon the presence and intensity of
illumination. Supposing ‘a contact difference of potential, due
to free ions, exists between the protoplasm of plant cells and
the cell walls, it is readily seen that at the point where the
assimilation of free ions into ion-proteid is going on most
rapidly, this contact difference of potential will be diminished,
and therefore, as we have repeatedly pointed out, the surface
tension along the contact surface will be increased. This will
mean decrease of surface at such points, and comparative in-
crease of surface at other points; therefore, a cylindrical
stem, in which assimilation 1s going on more rapidly on one
side than on the other, will bend towards the former side.

But, we have seen that if one side of a crowing plant
stem is more strongly illuminated than the other, assimilation
will be going on more quickly on the illuminated side; there-

—

* Vide discussion of electrotonus, this paper, section 8.
+ Vide Vine’s Physiology of Plants, 1886, pages 140-148.

fore, we should expect growing plants, with slender mobile
stems, to bend towards the light. And such is, in fact, the
case. [I quote from Darwin: The Movements of Plants,
page 465:—“In our various experiments we were often
struck with the accuracy with which seedlings pointed to a
light, although of small size. To test this, many seedlings of
Phalaris, which had germinated in darkness in a very nar-
row box several feet in length, were placed in a darkened
room near to and in front of a lamp bearing a small cylindri-
cal wick. The cotyledons at the two ends and in the central
part of the box would, therefore, have to bend in widely
different directions in order to point to the light. After they
had become rectangularly bent, a long white thread was
stretched by two persons, close over and parallel, first to one
and then to another cotyledon; and the thread was found in
almost every case actually to intersect the small circular wick
of the now extinguished lamp. The deviation from accuracy
never exceeded, as far as we could judge, a degree or two.”

Of course, in such cases, it may be objected that chloro-
phyll is not yet fully formed ; but, inasmuch as chlorophyll is
very quickly developed in the light, it may be supposed that
the process of its formation, and the consequent accelerated
synthesis of proteid, begins at once; while plenty of time was
allowed for the reaction, since, in the experiment just before
the one quoted, eight hours was allowed for seedlings of
Brassica and Phalaris to bend “rectangularly towards the
light.”

: In order to see how intimately the bendine of plants
towards the hght depends upon the illumination of the
chlorophyll, it is only necessary to refer to Darwin’s “Move-
ments of Plants,” page 449 to page 468.

The few exceptions nearly all admit of some other expla-
nation. Thus, Darwin shows that heliotropism may be much
modified in some plants owing to their habit of climbing; in
other cases apheliotropism may be induced because too intense
illumination injures the chlorophyll,* and therefore reverses
the effect we have described. Further, in time, the prepon-
derating growth of the illuminated side will tend to reverse
the effect. In the rare cases where plants containing little or
no chlorophyll are heliotropic we may assume that light aids
assimilation in some other way. The tendency for leaves to
place themselves perpendicular to any not too strong illumi-
nation} is easily understood when we consider the influence
of illumination upon the leaf stalk; illumination of its upper
surface will cause a diminution of that surface—as we have

* Darwin: The Movements of Plants, page 446.

+ Ibid., page 449.

.
.

a9)

seen—and this will counteract the effect of gravity tending to
make the leaf hang downwards.

The importance of sudden change in illumination*® is due
to two factors: one the tendency of growth to counteract
helotropism if illumination is carried on for some time, and
the other the tendency the ions from the unilluminated side
will have to diffuse faster into the illuminated side, as the ions
there are assimilated, a tendency which would slichtly increase
the P.D. at first lowered by the assimilation. It is evident
that in normal growing plants these factors of heliotropism,
growth, gravity, etc., will eventually reach a state of more or
less settled equilibrium, which will determine the permanent
form of woody parts.

That differences of potential, such as we have described,
do exist in plants is well known. Thus, Biedermann] men-
tions that Kunkel found the veins of a leaf “‘positive” to the
greea surface (translating this physiological terminology this
means that internally to the leaf there was an E.M.F. tend-
ing to promote a current from the green parts to the veins),
There can be no doubt, I think, that this is due to the katious
of the salts, brought up by the transpiration current, diffusing
more rapidly through the walls of the vessels in the veins
than the anions. The salts brought up are mainly KNO,
and KCl, in which the kation has a greater velocity than the
anion.{ The same explanation apples to the “negativity”
of the roots of a seedling towards the cotyledon, and higher
parts,§ for the roots would have a large supply of kations due
to diffusion from the moisture in the soil which diminishes
progressively as the transpiration current mounts up the stem
and the kations are assimilated.

Hermann|| found that cross sections of the stem of a
plant were “negative” to normal parts. This is doubtless due
to decomposition of kation-proteid at the point of injury
liberating kations.

Burdon-Sanderson finds that when the leaf of Dionea
closes, the lower surface becomes “negative” to the upper.
This affords an explanation of its closure, since kations are
liberated on the under side the surface tension on that side is

* Darwin: The Movements of Plants, page 457.
+ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. 11., page 2.

+ Vide Table of Stimulation Efficiencies, this paper, sec-
tion 3.

§ Biedermann: Electro-physiology: Trans. by F. A. Welby,
vol. ii., page 5
| Ibid., vol. 11., page 2.

q Ibid., vol. ii.. page 23.

reduced ; that is, the under surface tends to increase; and the
upper to decrease, hence the leaf closes.

16.—SuMMARY.

It has been proved by Loeb and others that proteid takes
up ions to form a loose compound, which they call ion-
prc teid.

Since these ion-proteid molecules must always be break-
ing down, tnere must be, for this reason, if not for others, a
number of free ions in any protoplasmic body, and therefore,
in general, a difference of potential between it and the
medium in which it lives.

1t is acknowledged by many physiologists* that the
movements of unicellular organisms are due to changes in
surface tension, while others, as Schafer,; consider it pro-
bable that the movements of muscles may ‘be due to the same
cause. It is, indeed, obvious from the structure of amceba,
cilia, muscle, etc., that, if changes in surface tension take
place, movements must follow.

But since, for obvious reasons, the number of free ions
in a protoplasmic body must always be chaneing or subject
to change, 1t follows from known physical laws that the sur-
face tension must also change.

We have shown that this mode of accounting for the
movements of organisms enables us to explain the galvano-
taxis and chemotaxis ot unicellular organisms—the contrac-
tion of muscle—the electro-motive and other phenomena ac-
companying muscular contraction and the nervous impulse—
the rhythmicity of certain muscles and nerves and
the variations in their rhythm—the action of inhibitory and
augmentor nerves, and the movements and electro-motive phe-
nomena of plants.

It seems, therefore, certain that this explanation of the
genesis of movement in living bodies is, in the main, true,
and that it is probably capable of explaining the whole of thai
vast complex of facts which have been gathered together
under the head of phenomena of contractility and irritability.

* Vide Biitschli : Protopiies ded Midtbscopte Raat! “Pie,
by E. A. Minchin, 1894, page 289: and Verworn: General
Physiology: Trans. by Frederic 8. Lee, page 561,

+ Schifer: Essentials of Histology, sixth edition, page 56.

GEOLOGICAL REPORT’ ON THE COUNTRY TRAVERSED BY
THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT NORTH-WEST
PROSPECTING EXPEDITION, 1903.

By Herrsert Basepow, Prospector to the Expedition.

[Read October 4, 1904.]
Prates XITI. to XX,

CoNnTENTS.
Pre-Cambrian:
The Ranges of North-Western South Australie... 57
Musgrave Ranges and their Outliers ... snip)
Mann Ranges and their Outliers —... ae Oo
Tomkinson Ranges $i sin sy! bee >
Everard Ranges ... : se Pata Br,

Ayers Ranges, Northern Peeritory sash Scanpat

The Indulkana Outcrop ty ete We teem &:
Cambrian :—

The Head of Lake Torrens ... ves sa eon
Ordovician :—

The Mount Chandler Outecrop son oe eg eee

Mount Conner ... ue se eS

The Mount Kingston Outer —_ = sapueet

Mount Olga and Ayers Rock a S abe Se)
Supra-Cretaceous :—

The Desert Sandstone ore ee pf SSO
Recent Surface Deposits, Sandhills, ete. ee ... 89
Appendix :—

Petrological Notes on Rocks collected during the

Expedition Abe ay xii Bk oe ner |

Tur RancGes or NortTH-WESTERN SoutH AUSTRALIA.

Although maps represent these ranges as separate en-
tities, they must, on geological and lithological grounds, be
regarded as belonging to one and the same grand system, the
intervening tracts of country which now separate the indi-
vidual ranges being, for the most part, superficial deposits
of comparatively recent sands and sandhills, or supra-creta-
ceous deposits, known as the “desert sandstone.”

Rising abruptly + from the surrounding sandy country,

* This paper, which has been slightly abridged, was the suc-
cessful Tate Memorial Medal Thesis, 1904.

+ Compare J. Forrest, Explorations in Australia, III., page
248 :—‘‘The whole country is level, the ranges rising abruptly out
of the plains, . »” Also the general statement by James
Geikie, in Earth Sculpture. page 202 - “Rising boldly above
the general level, they exhibit no trace of talus or debris. 2?

they extend in an easterly and westerly direction as huge, in-
trusive masses within crystalline schists and gneisses, mostly
devoid of vegetation, though the intruded rocks bear
“mulga,’ pine tree, and undergrowth of bush and grass.
Fertile sandy loams, carrying mulga scrub of variable extent,
surround them; while beyond this belt sandhills with “porcu-
pine grass,” “desert oak,” “‘quondong,” etc., prevail.

Their main bulk consists of plutonic masses, which form
the cores of anticlinal folds of metamorphic rocks. Owing
to the intense metamorphism induced not only in the in-
truded rocks, but also at the outskirts of the igneous intru-
sions themselves, it is often impossible to determine the
actual plane of contact.* This factor has further been the
cause of the contact rocks assuming a distinctive character by
re-crystallisation of the original constituents (/ornfelsstruc
tur). In this process the production of epidote has been
greater than that of all other minerals, it being by far the
most generally distributed near intrusions.

The following section is a diagrammatic representation of
the mode of occurrence of the igneous and metamorphic
series.

Fig. 1.—DI1aAGRAMMATIC SECTION THROUGH PORTION OF THE
Musgrave Ranges, East or MircHey’s Knos.

Owing to the absence of representatives of the Cambrian
system in proximity to the ranges, the age of the igneous in-
trusions could not be definitely determined, but they cer-
tainly took place before the Ordovician period, as examples
may be seen in the low-lying outskirts, as, for instance,
Indulkana, of rocks of the Ordovician period overlying the
intruded fundamentals, and not being themselves penetrated
by the eruptives.

The Musgrave Ranges comprise an extensive series, rang-
ing from acid to basic; the Mann principally acid and inter-

™ Mons. Michél-Levy has described similar features in the
gneisses of the Central Plateau of France. He points out that
whenever it is the case that the granite is massive and intrudes
rocks of acid character the plane of contact is not sharp, but the
intruded and intrusive rocks are connected by a contact zone.—-
Bull. Soe. Géol., France, Ser. 3, tome vii. pages 852 et 853.

mediate; while in the Tomkinson Ranges members of the
basic and intermediate families are typical. The intermediate
group is represented throughout by numerous diorite dykes,
which are usually of no great thickness, but their frequent
appearance within short distances of one another is in
cases marked. Their plane of contact with the intruded
rock is always well defined.* |The diorite intrusions have
occurred later than the main granitic injections of the dis-
trict. This is evident from the fact that often the diorite
can be found penetrating the granite.t Yet the diorite in
places does not appear to have been much subsequent in time,
for magmatic intergrowths may be observed between diorite
and granite rock that have been produced during a state of
semi-plasticity of the latter. On the other hand, magmatic
inclusions of granite rock within the diorite occur. These
have been torn from the walls of the fissure, into which the
diorite was injected, and embedded in the mass.

The intruded rocks, where they appear in considerable
and persistent thickness (Mdchtigkeit), may be included
generally under the headings of “gneissic quartzite’ { or
“gneiss” proper ; yet other crystalline schists are not wanting,
although they are not represented to the same extent. The
great variations in readings of the compass needle, produced
by the magnetic minerals contained in the different granitic
rocks that compose these ranges, have already been noted by
various explorers.

THe MuSGRAVE RANGES.

General Remarks.—The Musgrave Ranges (Gosse, 1873)
lie almost wholly in the State of South Australia, only two
minor offshoots passing northward to beyond the boundary, in
the localities of Opparinna and Fraser Hill. They rise from
the plains as a compact chain that continues in an easterly
and ‘westerly direction for a distance of over one hundred
miles. They are, however, cut in several places by valleys of
denudation that are now occupied by vast deposits of sand,
the upper surfaces of which form elevated plains (such as
Glen Ferdinand), that permit the ranges being crossed with
no great difficulty transversely to their long axis. Their
breadth varies, the maximum being about thirty-five miles,

* Compare Michél-Levy, op. cit., pages 845 et 872.

t See also H. Y. L. Brown, Report Journey from Warrina
to Musgrave Ranges, page 2 (Adelaide: by authority, 1889) ;
and V. Streich, Scien, Res. Elder Expl. Exp., Trans. Roy. Soc.,
S.A., vol. xvi., pp. 77 and 83.

{ An altered (clastic) sandstone in which only a very faint
indication of foliation has been brought about by the production
of secondary minerals.

and the altitude is considerable. Mount Woodroffe, the
highest peak, is estimated to be over 5,000 feet above sea
level, and more than 3,000 feet above the level of the adjoin-
ing desert. Hence this chain of mountains is by far the most
massive of the series seen during the expedition.

Igneous intrusions on a grand scale have produced the
upheaval and form the inner mass of the several folds into
which the intruded metamorphic beds have been thrown.

Mr. W. C. Gosse, in 1874, pointe] out that the Mus-
grave Ranges “are composed chiefly of granite,”* and later
Mr. H. Y. L. Brown’y’ (1889) that they “are composed of
eruptive granite and metamorphic granite rocks of various

kinds, chiefly hornblendic, and seldom containing mica,” :

comprising “ordinary granite, porphyritic granite, horn-
blendic granite, graphic granite, granulite, pegmatite,
syenite, quartz syenite, and epidosite, gneiss, both hern-
blendic and micaceous, and siliceous and felspathic crystal-
line rocks of various kinds,”
diorite and _ dolerite. Mr. J. Carruthers stated: —
;“The Musgrave Ranges are composed principally
of red granite rocks, and covered with spinifex
and few scattered pines; the flats between the hills,
which are principally formed by large creeks coming out of
the ranges, are beautifully grassed, . . . the soils being
a rich, red, sandy alluvial, and firm red loam.”

Igneous Rocks.—The intrusives vary in character from
highly acidic to basic, the differences, however, between the
members of one and the same family being slight. The acid
rocks are principally granitic, the greater bulk consisting of
a rather coarse-grained porphyritic variety, with large cor-
roded crystals of a bluish felspar (orthoclase). Ernest Giles
was the first to mentions this type of granite, and assigned to
it the expressive term of “granite-conglomerate,” making
thereby particular reference to Mount Carnarvon, which is
the eastern hmit of the Musgrave Ranges. Mr. W. C. Gosse,
moreover, in describing Mount Morris, wrote|| “that this
portion of the range is composed of very coarse granite. At
the entrance to Jacky’s Pass, on the south, this class of
granite flanks the chain, but further east the southern slopes

* Parliamentary Paper, No, 48, House Assembly, page 18.

+ Report on Journey from Warrina to Musgrave Ranges. By
authority: 1889,

1 Report to Surveyor General (Adelaide Observer, January
16, 1892).

§ Geogr. Travels in Centr. Austr., 1872-1873, Part ii., page 84.

| Parliamentary Paper, No, 48, House Assembly, 1874, page
16.

and that they are intruded by

consist of fine-grained gneiss, the granitic outcrops being in
the heart of the range. The main intrusion thus extends east
of the pass towards Mount Woodroffe, thence taking a more
northerly turn in direction of Mount Carnarvon; it has its
greatest development east of Harries’ Spring, while on the
eastern borders of the range gneisses predominate. In this
respect the Musgrave resemble the Mann Ranges

A subsidiary arm of the main injection of the igneous
rock produces a prominence in the neighbourhood of Mit-
chell’s Knob, the major and minor veins of the same enclosing
clastic (?) gneisses. (See fig. 1.)

The ranges on the northern flanks, north of Mount Fer-
dinand, present a picturesque appearance, produced by gro-
tesquely shaped, isolated, bare, granitic masses (Sekunddre
Kuppen).

The granite, particularly that of the porphyritic variety,
is characterised in the field by its strong tendency towards
concentric weathering, large shells of rock exfoliating con-
centrically to the present contour of the rock surface. This
feature is deserving of particular notice.

In the valley of the Ferdinand, west of the mount bear-
ing a similar name, the character of the granite changes to a
more even-grained, white variety, with irregular aggregates
of hornblende and biotite distributed through its mass.
Where this granite has been cut by diorite the contact is
marked by a development of large idiomorphic crystals of
hornblende. In the same locality minor veins of epidote
granite, with a red orthoclase felspar, and graphic granite
traverse the main granitic mass in a westerly course.

East of Lungley’s Gully an intrusion of red aplite is deli-
cately veined with crystalline epidote, and the planes of slick-
ensiding, that cut the rock, are lined with a “‘harnish” of
secondary mica and rhombohedral calcite. The rock is con-
spicuously jointed in two planes, the first of which strikes
W., 20° N., and dips northerly 73°, the second striking
N., 45° E., and dipping 23° S.E.; a third plane is less regu-
lar. Rocks belonging to the peridotite family were found in
the form of pebbles among the wash of a small watercourse
south of Mount Morris, but the rock was not observed in situ.
Diorite dykes are very plentiful. The diorite rock is vormai,
quartzless, and moderately fine-grained. It is usuaily mica-
ceous. Dolerite dykes are less numerous. They cousist of a
finely crystalline groundmass with porphyritic crystals of
felspar and pseudomorphous (?) epidote. Dykes of a
peculiar voleanic rock are rare. Fluidal structure is typical
when viewed under the microscope, it being marked by ores

of iron in a glassy groundmass. Corroded phenocrysts of
olivine are plentiful.

Metamorphic Rocks.—The gneisses of the Musgrave
Ranges, derived both from the alteration of sedimentary and
igneous rocks, with few exceptions, skirt the chain on either
side ; they also form the intermediate flanks of folds produced
by the intrusion of the eruptives. They do not extend to the
same altitude as the igneous rocks, and, as is the case in the
Mann Ranges, they appear more extensive on the eastern
than on the western limits of the range.

A natural section along the course of Whittell’s Creek
presented a variety of schists within small range of country.
The section showed a gradation from a compact gneiss through
a series of beds, as follows: —Quartzite, quartz schist (lami-
nated), schists of various kinds (mica, chlorite, epidote, and
garnetiferous, with numerous perfect dodecahedral crystals
of garnet in a dark. quartzitic, schistose matrix); thence
quartzite, jointed regularly in two directions at right angles.
The strike varies from almost due north and south to east and
west ; the latter is, however, the general strike of the beds of
this section. East of Mount Woodward the gneisses are in
parts compact, in parts fissile. They are jointed vertically in
- direction north, few degrees east, and at right angles to this
plane. The planes of foliation dip south. North of here it
is distinctly granitic in character, and separated into more or
less horizontal (lenticular) layers by planes of division ; these
layers thickening appreciably as the depth increases (Bank-
formige Absonderung). At the contact with a diorite dyke it
has assumed a remarkable, closely foliated character; the
folia, produced by a very dark coloured biotite and stringlets
of quartz running parallel with the direction of intrusion.

The gorge cut by the Opparinna Creek affords another
section within the gneisses that skirt the watercourse in the
form of scarped, shattered walls. They show signs
of earth - movement and folding, and are replaced
in parts by smaller bands of chloritic and_sericite schists,
often traversed by small seams of epidote at the zone of con-
tact with diorite dykes. At Opparinna Spring the country
consists of a compact, dark bluish-black gneiss, vertically
jointed in directions W., 20° N., and N., 10° E. (less per-
fectly), and in planes dipping 8S. 5°. Along the last-men-
tioned plane the rock parts readily into layers about twelve
inches thick. North of the spring the metamorphic series
changes to a compact brown gneiss, weathering massive
granitic, and showing a regular cubic jointing. The texture, in
parts, approaches the “graphic” intergrowth of some granites,
the quartz occurring as rounded and elongated inclusions

(quartz de corrosion) in the felspar.* The optically-continu-
ous character of the quartz and felspar can readily be detected
in hand specimens by suitably reflecting the light from a
freshly fractured surface. The planes of foliation of the
true gneiss strike W., 20° 8., and dip northerly 11°.

South of Opparinna Spring the gneissic quartzites | com-
posing the ranges are thrown into a great overthrust fold
which can be observed on the eastern face of the gorge cut
by Moffat Creek, by following up the exposure of two pro-
minent parallel layers of the rock. These, on the south, dip
at a low angle of about 30°, and on the north the same bands
are seen dipping in the same direction at a high angle, with
an inward curve at the top. The crest of the fold has been
removed by denudation; yet the outline of the original con-
tortion of the beds, upon reconstruction, was evidently as
represented in the figure. Within the fold exists a zone of
extensive dioritic intrusion, while the country is severely frac-
tured.

Fig. 2.—An OvertHrust Foip 1n BEps oF GNEISSIC QUARTZITE.
Morrat CREEK, SoutH OF OPPARINNA SPRING, MusGRAVE
RANGES.

A similar feature, though on a smaller scale, was en-
countered in Jacky’s Pass. Beds of gneiss are in this case
bent to a considerable degree; a diorite intrusion within the
fold accompanied the earth-movement.

Several island-like masses of gneiss rise above the sands
to the west and south-west of the group of hills termed the
Kelly Hills. One of such occurs close to a native soakage

* Lacroix has described a somewhat similar type of gneiss
ey eon India.—Record Geol. Survey, India, xxiv., page

+t No doubt equivalent to the ‘‘granitoid quartzites”’ of this

locality mentioned by R. W. ay Extracts Journals of Ex-
plorations, by R. T. Maurice (by authority: 1904, page 29).

well, known to the natives as Tarrawaitarratarra, and it has
been conditioned by the intrusion, within a series of schists,
of pegmatite and greisen. The muscovite of the pegmatite
is remarkable for its peculiar reddish-violet tint, closely re-
sembling that of lepidolite, but failing to give the character-
istic flame test of the latter. The mica, moreover, of one of
the schists is similar to that of the true igneous rock, though
it occurs as smaller individuals. The schist is usually a
closely laminated, quartz-mica rock, often “knotted” oy
secondary mineral development; while at the contact with a
diorite dyke on the summit of the hill a finely foliated gneiss
has been produced. The planes of schistosity strike N., 12°
E., and dip 40° E. The height above sea level of the expos-
ure is 2,100 feet, and it stands 140 feet above the sand plains.
The beds have suffered local displacements; planes of shear
are thickly lined with a glossy layer of secondary minerals.

Outcrops some miles to the north of this exposure were
presumably observed to be overlaid by conspicuous beds of
quartzite. Opportunity was not afforded to determine whe-
ther these beds form part of the fundamental series or whe-
ther they are unconformable to the schists.

The hills further south are composed of rock of the com-
pact granitic character already discussed. In parts they are of
the “fluxion” type of gneiss, and they are characterised by
weathering concentrically.

OUTLIERS OF THE MuSGRAVE RANGES.

The Musgrave Ranges are bordered on the south by
humerous outliers of granitic rock, many of which
are of considerable magnitude, and have consequently
received separate names. A few of these outliers will be
briefly discussed : — 7

Mount Caroline.—South of that portion of the Mus-
grave Ranges known as Lungley’s Gully, about eight miles,
stands a bold, isolated mount, over 1,000 feet above the level
of the sands. It is known as Mount Caroline. Its mass is
composed of biotite granite, with a slight tendency to folia-
tion on the part of the mica. Large porphyritic, corroded
crystals of orthoclase predominate, the quartz being subordi-
nate to the felspar. The rock at the surface is decomposed.
It is cut by a diorite dyke that can be distinguished on the
western front from a distance as a black wall running up
the entire height of the mount. Smaller portions of graphic
and epidote granite are included within the mass.

The hill bears porcupine grass, pine and fig tree, and a
light-coloured lichen covers the massive exposures of the
granite.

EO ————————

Low outcrops of gneiss trending in a north-easterly direc-
tion he not far to the north of Mount Caroline.

Mount Crombre.—Still further south, and about twenty
miles from the above, another conspicuous outcrop of granitic
rock, bearing the name of Mount Crombie, is situated. The
northern outskirts only of this exposure were visited. They
consist of gneiss, whose dark planes of biotite strike roughly
east and west. The rock exfoliates concentrically at the sur-
face into large shells, which subsequently break up regularly
into cubical blocks in well-defined rows, corresponding to a
latent system of planes of weakness brought into prominence
by weathering. A diorite dyke intrudes the gneiss in direc-
tion’ W., 42° N.

Mount Kintore.—Mount Kintore rises from beneath the
desert south of the gap that separates the Mann from the
Musgrave Ranges. It is built up principally of metamorphic
beds intruded by diorite dykes. The beds, comprising gneisses
and quartzite, have been thrown into a series of simple folds,
which is well recognisable on the northern face of the mount.
Gross shattering and crumbling of the rock have accompanied
the folding. The strike of the beds varies slightly, about
south-east, and it is made prominent by the weathering of
the rock into ridges conforming in direction with that of anti-
clinal axes.

At the western end of the outcrop the gneiss is replaced
by a development of graphic granite; and diorite intrusions
traverse the hill in several localities.

Echo Hill.—Echo Hill lies south of the eastern extremi-
ties of the Musgrave Ranges. It is one of many minor out-
crops of granitic rock occurring in this neighbourhood, and is
composed of gneiss neatly “lined” with biotite. Is is cut by
veins of coarse pegmatite, with large felspathic constituents,
while local developments of epidote are frequent. The rock
is jointed in planes striking 8. 40° W., and dipping 40° N.W.
The height of the hill is 2,270 feet above sea level (by aneroid
determination).

THE Mann RanGEs.

General Remarks.—The Mann Ranges, discovered and
named by Gosse in 1873, lie to the west of the Musgrave, and
are separated from them by a desert tract of sandhills bear-
ing Triodia and Casuarina. They extend as a more or less
compact chain in a westerly direction, with a slight trend to
the north, across the border of South Australia and the
Northern Territory, a distance of some eighty miles. Isolated
hillocks can be traced to beyond the border line of Western
Australia, culminating to the westward in a more pronounced
development, known as the Mount Gosse group of hills. The

trend of the Mann Ranges, if produced in an easterly direc-
tion across the intervening tract of sandhills, is in the same
straight line as the axis of the Musgrave Ranges.

Both ranges consist of igneous intrusions* and altered
sedimentary and igneous rocks. The western portion of the
Mann Ranges, of no great width at this end, consists almost
wholly of igneous exposures. In the centre the core of
igneous intrusion is flanked on either side, namely, its north-
ern and southern boundaries, by complexes of gneiss, schist,
and gneissic quartzite; whereas on the eastern limits of the
range, by far the widest portion, the main intrusion lies hid-
den beneath the metamorphic series, into which it was in-
jected, to appear once more at the surface to the eastward, in
the Musgrave Ranges.

A ground plan of the metamorphic exposures of the
Mann Ranges gives roughly a U-shaped form, the flanks that
skirt the middle of the ranges forming the straight arms of
the U, the curved base of the letter being represented by the
thicker mass of crystalline schists at the eastern end.

As a rule, the trend of the ranges coincides with the
strike of the rock, except in a few instances, where irregu-
larity of stress produced by igneous intrusion has interfered,
and where a local bulging out of the mass, no doubt the
result of an igneous offshoot, has produced a spur, the axis of
which does not conform with the general direction of the
range.

Though mineralogically not as rich as the Musgrave
Ranges, the Mann Ranges are geologically of particular
interest, as they exhibit many examples of rock movements
and fracture that accompanied igneous intrusion. +

Igneous Rocks.—An intrusion of granite has been by far
the greatest, it continuing uninterruptedly as the backbone
of the whole range, to disappear under superincumbent
gneisses on the east, and occurring as isolated outliers for a
considerable distance to the west. The character of the rock
varies, passing from a true granite (in portions porphyritic),
tc various metapyrigen gneisses. + ,

—_—_——

* Compare J. Forrest, Explorations in Australia, III., page
243 :—‘‘The Mann Ranges are composed of reddish granite.’’ Also
J. Carruthers :—‘‘The Mann Ranges are covered with pines, blood-
wood, a few scattered gums, dense spinifex, and scattered patches
of coarse grass, the formation being red and grey granite,’’—
(Adelaide Observer, January 16, 1892. page 9.) pat

t+ Compare the statement:—“. . . hills and mountains of
the Mann Ranges, some few of the Musgrave chain, and all west
of the Mann Ranges have been shivered into fragments by vol-
canic force, . . .”—E. Giles, Geogr. Travels in Centr. Austr.,
1872-1873, Part ii., page 108.

{| The term as employed by Dr. J. W. Gregory.

The plane of contact with the primary gneisses is mostly
imperceptible. A contact zone is not infrequently found
gradually merging into granite on the one side, and granitic
gneiss on the other. In other cases the contact has been so
fractured and dislocated for a considerable distance that the
junction cannot be traced.

Large “floating” masses of bedrock were noted at several
localities, as, for instance, north-west of Mount Whinham
and south of Mount Edwin.

The granite in general occurs as bare, rounded, dome-
shaped masses,* several chains’ length of rock often appearing
without the least fracture in the mass, though subsequent
weathering produces large exfoliating shells, which detach
themselves from the body of rock (concentric weathering).
This feature is more usually presented by the porphyritic
varieties, while a more typical granitic aspect is brought
about by the natural systematic jointing of the fine-grained,
uniformly crystalline rock. Frequently the mass shows nei-
ther of these physical features, but is grossly shattered
throughout by the intense stress produced during the process
of solidification of the crystallizing rock magma. Such in-
stances were found south of Mount Cockburn, and on a
splendid scale south-east of Hector’s Pass, where the planes
of fracture have assumed regular, contorted, and curved out-
lines, as though produced during the last stages of solidifica-
tion of the magma, the more rapidly contracting envelope of
the rock having caused the enclosed mass to part along cer-
tain curves of stress by virtue of the extreme pressure from
without.

Diorite dykes are very numerous, forming a fairly regu-
lar system, usually, though not invariably, trending east and
west. The best noted example of excessive intrusion by this
rock was observed in the hills east of Mount Whinham, on
the eastern extremity of the ranges. At this locality no less
than fourteen diorite dykes can be counted traversing the
gneissic hills in a distance of less than a quarter-mile, and
can be clearly seen continued through a similar gneissic
exposure a mile or two further west.

Metamorphic Rocks.—As stated above, crystalline schists

and gneisses appear more extensively developed at the eastern
end of the chain. Near the north-western limit of the main

“ Giles (op. cit.) continues his statement :—‘‘. . . most of
the higher points of all these heights are composed of frowning
masses of black-looking or intensely red ironstone or granite. eoat-
ed with iron. Triodia grows as far up the sides as it is possible
to obtain any soil, but even this plant cannot exist upon solid rock.
therefore all the summits of these hills are bare,”

range, the metamorphosed rock, close to the intrusive, occurs
as a fine-grained, compact quartzite, passing further from
the contact into a garnetiferous gneiss, with large lenticular
crystals of felspar (a variety of adularia, or moonstone), hav-
ing a satin-like lustre, and which, even to the naked eye, can
be seen to be locally surrounded by a layer of finely crushed
material derived from the grinding down of the felspar itself
(Morter structure).

Fig. 3.—AvcEen Gneiss, Mount Cocksurn, Mann Ranggs.

In the former instance the altered rock was no doubt
originally a somewhat massive, siliceous sandstone; in the
latter a finely laminated rock has probably been altered by
minor injection of igneous matter between the planes of lami-
nation (injection gneiss).

South of Mount Cockburn, however, garnet-schist* and
fissile gneiss occur at the zone of contact, while gneissic
quartzites overlie the gneiss. It is in this locality that a
natural section affords opportunity of studying the relative
positions of these altered rocks. (Section on Plate xix.) A
granitic intrusion appears in the form of a central axial-core,

“ W. C. Gosse writes that Mount Charles is ‘‘composed of grey
granite and slate.’? Report and Diary of Central and Western
‘xploring Expedition, 1873. Parliamentary Paper No. 48, House
Assembly, 1874, page 12. No slate was observed in this neigh-
bourhood, and it may be that Gosse mistook the schist or fissile
gneiss for the same. |

trending west, which has thrown the overlying beds into a
series of simple folds: an anticlinal directly conforms with
the surface of the eruptive, and consists of blue garnetiferous
schist and gneiss, with “eyes” of felspar, large crystals of
hornblende and fractured garnets. South of this spot the
overlying beds of gneissic quartzite can be traced, occurring
as two perfect sigmoidal folds, the second synclinal, with a
very sharp angle, thence passing to a shallow monocline that
is finally lost in the zone of crushing at the contact with a
second intrusive mass. The extreme southern exposures of
the range occur as outlying masses of gneissic rock, the strike
of which agrees with that of the country, and the dip is
southerly.

At the foot of Mount Cockburn, a low outlier of the same
exposures consists of quartzitic gneiss, the foliation being im-
perfectly developed, and large, lenticular “augen” of felspar
not infrequent. The hill shows perfect parallel planes of
jointing in direction N., 15° W., dipping 75° westerly.
These planes are made the more conspicuous by the resulting
fissures having become filled with detritus, in which a thick
growth of grass and other vegetation, standing out as dark,
prominent lines from the light-coloured gneiss behind, has
flourished.

To the north the augen gneiss merges on the one hand
into a gneiss with linear foliation, and on the other into a
crushed rock, with large, false “pebbles” of quartz, produced
from the original rock, surrounded by well-marked, concen-
tric “lines of flow” of crushed material. Shearing and com-
pressive stresses have certainly contributed largely to the for-
mation of the latter, and like forces have produced the augen
gneiss, while the ultimate result of rock-crushing and shearing
is the finely “lined” variety of gneiss.

Striking evidence of the extreme conditions of stress that
existed during the mountain-building processes is afforded at
the north-eastern end of the Mann Ranges in the form of a
series of step-faults on a fairly large scale. The country here
consists of compact gneiss, with large, bluish orthoclase and
folia of biotite, intruded by diorite dykes. Ten distinct,
almost vertical, scarp-faces of gneiss, rising one above the
other, can be seen, each surmounted by the severed portions of
one and the same diorite dyke. The igneous rock, four feet
in thickness, forms the floor of each step, the vertical dis-
tances between the successive steps averaging twelve feet,
and each fractured mass of the diorite dyke dipping about
10° 8. The several fault planes hade 10° in a direction N.
LO

DIORITE

DIORITE \

DIORITE

DIoRitTe

Fig. 4.—STEP-FAULTED GNEISS AND Ditor1tTE DyKr, NORTH-EAST
Mann Ranacgss.

_ An interesting phenomenon was encountered in this
series of gneisses some dozen miles north-west of the western
extremity of the main range, where low outcrops skirt the
eastern limit of a large depression or “‘salt pan,” the saline
deposits of which rest directly upon a bed of similar gneissic
rock. These outcrops have weathered by a process of @olzan
erosion into mushroom-shaped masses (Pilzfelsen), with
smooth central columns, narrow at the base, and gradually
widening upwards to support a flat, tabular mass at the top.
The stalk is abraded by deflation, the wind hurling the
coarse grains of sand, which do not rise to beyond a few feet
above the level of the ground, incessantly against the base
of the column. (Plate xiii., fig. 2.)

Streich has reported* mushroom-like forms of sand to
occur in the wind-drifted sands of the Great Victoria Desert.
He states that the sand is generally loose, though somewhat
consolidated by means of a clay cement, but only on the
surface. When the uppermost crust has been broken
through, the wind gradually blows away the underlying
loose sand, leaving the upper layer unsupported around the

* Scient. Res. Elder Expl. Exped., 1891-2, Geology. Trans.
Roy Soc. S.A., vol. xvi., page 88

border. The phenomenon is really resistance to transpor-
tation of the consolidated crust by wind rather than abrasion
or erosion of the underlying loose sand by eolian agency.

A further factor that plays an important part in the
weathering of rocks in the desert was noted in the outcrops
of garnetiferous gneiss immediately west of the shores of
Lake Wilson. This form of weathering, the Seele der Ver-
witterung of Schweinfurth, consists of the flaking off of the
rock as a result of crystallisation of salt within minute fis-
sures in the mass. Portions of the outcrops, that have been
previously locally hardened by cementation (concretionary),
have resisted this weathering to some extent, and consequently
those portions project from the surface of the decomposing
gneiss as irregular, partly serrated, ridges, the direction of
which is usually consistent with that of an original constant
geological feature of the rock.

Veins, etc.—Comparatively few true fissure veins or
lodes were noticed in the Mann Ranges. At the salt pan
just mentioned an exposure of a “quartz reef” occurs in com-
bination with a coarse pegmatite /7.e., secondary quartz, in
the intrusive). The quartz of the “reef” is very coarsely
crystalline, the faces of the prisms exhibiting oscillatory com-
bination to a marked degree. The felspar of the pegmatite
occurs as large pink idiomorphic crystals of orthoclase. The
lode is non-metalliferous.

A common method of formation of so-called “quartz
blows” in the ranges is nothing more than metamorphism
by igneous intrusion into the bedrock, the ultimate product

consisting of a highly altered quartz schist. The best
example of this phenomenon was met with south-east of
Mount Edwin. The quartzose outcrop there consists of

three parallel ridges of metamorphic quartz schist and
granular quartz, the planes of schistosity of the former
being visible either as thin layers of secondary mica or the
direct products of decomposition of the same. The outcrop
trends W. 40° S., and is jointed in directions: (a) N.E.,
dipping 70° S.E., the rock being finely laminated in this
direction, and the planes of lamination a fraction of an
inch in thickness; (b) N.W., in well-defined, parallel planes,
few inches apart; (c) W. 10° N., and N. 20° W., in less
perfect partings. This quartzitic exposure is, beyond doubt,
a true product of contact metamorphism, and the difference
between its strike and that of the country is explained by
parallel outcrops of garnetiferous diorite dykes between the
separate ridges of the formation; for these have been the
cause of the metamorphism of the original schistose beds
lying directly in contact with them.

Owl and Bat Guano.—In the Mann, Musgrave, and
Ayers Ranges. caves were found containing a considerable
floor deposit of so-called guano, the droppings of owls and
bats. These caverns have been produced in the granitic
rock masses by the denudation and subsequent removal of
included softer portions or by the more rapid weathering of
the material along planes of parting in the rock. In the
former case they were usually observed opening out on to

the bare, more or less vertical, joint faces. Owls (princi-
pally Strzx delicatula) appear to be frequent inhabitants of
such caves at the present time. Similar deposits were dis-

covered in the Fraser Range by the Elder Expedition.*

The “guano” consists of a faintly yellowish to dirty
white, compact to flaky, or lamellar mass, with a peculiar,
penetrating odour resembling that characteristic of the ex-
crement of flesh-eating birds. The bottom and oldest layers
of the deposit have assumed, not invariably, a more or less
elastic character when in mass, making it somewhat difficult
to detach in small pieces with a hammer. It breaks away as
distinct layers or slabs.

In April, 1902, Mr. H. Y. L. Brown reported’ ton cave
deposits occurring in quartzite near Yunta. The “guano”
from this locality is almost identical with that from the
ranges of Central Australia. _ I have had opportunity of
comparing hand specimens collected by Mr. Brown with
those I gathered in the Mann and Ayers Ranges. An
analysis of guano from the Yunta caves made by Mr. Goyder
proved the presence of phosphoric acid and nitrogen in diffe-
rent samples in the following proportions: —Phosphoric
acid (P,U,): (a) 55; (b) 6°00; (c) 2°57 per cent.; and
nitrogen: (a) 1°68; (b) 23°44; (c) 6 per cent.t It is evident
from the above estimations that some of our cave deposits
are equal to high-class manures, though it may hardly be
expected that. they will ever become of commercial value. n
account of their limited extent, to say nothing of the
troublesome journey to the above ranges.

Analyses of cave deposits have also been published from
Victoria and New South Wales.§

* V. Streich: Trans.. Roy. Soc. S.A., vol. xvi., page 99.

+ Report of Government Geologist to Minister of Mines,
April, 1902.

t See Macivor, On Australian Bat Guano, ete,, Chem.
News, May 13, 1887, page 3. .

§ Notes and Analyses of Some N 8.W. Phosph. Minerals and
Phosph. Deposits. by J. C. H. Mingaye, Aus. Asso, Adv. Se., vol,
vii., 1893, page 382. ;

Mount Gossez, W.A.

Mount Gosse is situated in Western Australia, about

two miles from the boundary of that State and South Aus-
tralia, and ten miles north of the projected border line
between the Northern Territory and South Australia. It is
composed of an intrusion of granite within schistose to
granitic gneiss, the foliation of which strikes west, slightly
north. The rock shows cubical jointing, and the gnelssic
rocks are overlaid by a compact blue quartzite* possessing a
perfect conchoidal fracture, the whole formation being tra-
versed by the never- failing diorite.
_ A prominent hill, situated seven miles east of north of
Mount Gosse, and almost on the border line, stands 2,250
feet above sea level, and 325 feet above the desert, which
bears Xanthorrhea and Triodia. It has been determined by
an intrusion of granite, with porphyritic blue felspars, the
trend of the intrusion being slightly north of west.

The injection lies within a linearly foliated gneiss, show-
ing closely set veinlets of quartz. In portions the gneiss is
schistose, or slightly fissile, and passes to a fine-grained,
felsitoid quartzite. Minor veins of graphic granite, with a
white (decomposed) felspar matrix, and epidote, are also
met with.

ToMKINSON RANGES.

General Remarks.—These ranges occupy the north-west-
ern corner of the State of South Australia proper, and ex-
tend westward to beyond the border into Western Australia
(Mount Hinckley). They were named by Gosse in 1873.
Generally speaking, their dominant features are similar to
those of the Musgrave and Mann Ranges, namely, igneous
intrusions within crystalline gneisses. In the case of the
Tomkinson Ranges, however, the intrusive rock consists
largely of gabbro, accompanied by diorite dykes. Moreover,
the ranges are not as persistent and compact as those already
described.

The higher intrusive bosses bear scanty vegetation, as
porcupine grass,{ mallee, and pine, while the lower spurs of
gneiss are covered with mulga and kangaroo grass. The
intervening gullies and flats were thickly clothed with grass
and herbs.

eres Phe emenigan at Midarie Gosse. Js a ‘iinet with: ‘Ere!
quent diorite veins and dykes, W. R. Murray, Ex-
tracts from Journals of Explor ations, by R. T. Maurice (by Autho-
rity: 1904), page 17,

t+ See also E. Giles, Geogr. Travels in Centr. Austr., 1872-
1874, II., page 103; and J. Carruthers :—‘‘These hills are covered
with spinifex, : —Report to Surveyor-General (Adelaide
Observer, January 16, 1892).

The Mount Davis chain includes, among others, a large
intrusion of granular olivine-gabbro, * varying in colour
from dirty green, through various shades of green, to faint
blue. In the last case the predominance of plagioclase fel-
spar and the presence of only a small amount of olivine have
produced the bluish tint. The intrusion trends east and
west aS a massive, rugged chain, flanked by less conspicuous
diorite dykes.

The latter, though individually smaller, are very nume-
rous. Their direction of intrusion possesses no regularity,
often cutting one another at various angles. Upon one hill,
about three miles south-east of Mount Davis, two conspicuous
diorite dykes can be traced up the hill slope. These dykes
gradually converge towards the summit of the hill, where
they ultimately cross one another at an angle of about 30°,
each continuing its cwn course after the point of crossing.
The direction of intrusion of the diorite appears more con-
stant (east and west) on the northern side of ihe ranges
than is the case of the more numerous examples on the
south.

Very often smaller dykes can be traced in a direction
nearly at right angles to the larger, from which latter they
have been injected into minor fissures of the rock. The
trend of these smaller dykes, in several cases, was noticed
to correspond with that of the pianes of foliation of the in-
truded gneiss, and their outcrops can be traced down to the
adjacent sandy flats, from which they stand out, by their
superior weathering, as marked, low, parallel walls.+ As a
general rule the diorite rock of the Tomkinson Ranges is of
one type only: a finely crystalline, black-looking (horn-
blendic) variety.

A few miles south of Mount Davis a slight exposure of
graphic granite occurs. The quartz that produces the hiero-
glyphic markings on the surface of the rock is colourless and
embedded in a red orthoclase felspar matrix. The whole
rock is traversed by veinlets of crystalline epidote.

* J. Carruthers, op. cit.: ‘‘The Tomkinson Ranges .. .
are composed of grey and red granite, with large outcrops or dykes
of basalt.” No basalt was found in the neighbourhood of the
Tomkinson Ranges, and it is possible that the gabbro was mis-
taken for basalt by Carruthers. W. C. Gosse, Report and Diary
of Central and Western Exploring Expedition, 1873, Parliamen-
tary Paper No. 48, House Assembly (1874), page 13, writes :—
“Mount Davis must be at least 1,500 ft. high. This portion of
the range is composed chiefly of grey granite.’ W. R. Murray,

Extracts Journals of Explorations by R, T. Maurice (by autho-
rity: 1904, page 17).

+ Which Mr. Streich compares with the ‘‘ruined walls of
houses.’’ Scient. Res. Elder Expl. Exp., Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A.,
vol. xvi., page 93.

Metamorphic Rocks.—The gneisses occur as broken spurs
and ridges, extending far outward into the sandy plains. On
the north their character is granitoid and foliated, the planes
of foliation striking north-easterly. The rock is character-
ised by bands of quartz and the presence of secondary mine-
rals in more or less distinct layers.

North of Mount Davis outcrops of hypersthene-bearing
granulite, which trend slightly east of north, present splen-
did examples of spherulitic weathering (Augelige A bsonder-
ung). This rock is compact and granular, with little or no
evidence of foliation on freshly fractured surfaces, though it
is apparent on weathered faces. The rock has a peculiar
olive-green waxy appearance.*

The most westerly exposure of the Gosse’s Pile Spurf
consists of gneiss, which is normal, though quartzitic, the
quartz occurring in the form of elongated lenticles, and the
mica as small flakes in regular layers of no great thickness.
The rock is thickly studded with red garnets (Almandine).
This class of gneiss predominates in the Tomkinson Ranges,
it being also met with south of the main range.

Veins, ete.—Non-metalliferous quartz veins of a bluish
tint and a shattered glassy character are fairly plentiful.
They are usually seen in direct association with diorite dykes.

The Murru Yilyah Outerop.—This outcrop, which was
stated to be auriferous, skirts the northern foot of the Mount
Davis chain for some miles in a westerly direction (W. 20°
N.), with a prominent escarpment facing the north. The de-
posit consists of a fresh-looking, highly-siliceous rock, vary-
ing from an impure siliceous ironstone through chalcedonic
and semi-opaline varieties of quartz, the chalcedony often
occurring, encrusting, drusy or slightly stalactitic, or per-
vading the rock as irregular planes of infiltration. The silica
has been tinted by mineral salts in solution, the colour rang-
ing from a rich brick-red through pale yellow to a bright
green (chromium). Small, irregular cavities exist in the
rock, which are either coated with a drusy form of quartz or
filled with haematite, compact to cellular. The rock breaks
with a conchoidal to sub-conchoidal fracture, and small frag-
ments, the result of weathering, cover the adjacent slopes and

* Mr. G. W. Card, of the Geological Survey of New South
Wales, who examined a section of this rock for me, writes that
the hypersthene is not very abundant, and is of a deep colour.
Apatite is present in noticeable amount. The bulk of the rock
consists of granular quartz and felspar. Granulitisation and_re-
crystallisation are not complete in the case of the felspar, residual
portions of which may still be seen.

% ee a ‘“‘Gosse’s Pile Hill is of grey granite, with diorite,
Se . R. Murray. op. cit., page 17.

flats. A pseudo-brecciated appearance within the rock is
produced by simultaneous precipitations of compounds of
iron and chromium and chalcedony. Surface cappings of
travertine and small deposits of magnesite rest upon the out-
crop in places, and more frequently upon the diorite dykes in
proximity to it. The deposit is of no great thickness, and
can be seen on the west directly overlying diorite. Its origin
is doubtful, as it can hardly be referred to the “desert sand-
stone,” though in some respects it 1s not dissimilar to it. The
formation has been proved to be non-auriferous.

EVERARD RANGES.

General Remarks.—The Everard Ranges he to the south
of the Tomkinson, and south-west of the Musgrave Ranges.
They are the most southerly of the series of elevations in
Central Australia, the other members of which have already
been described. They were discovered in 1873 by Ernest
Giles, and subsequently (1891) visited by the Elder Expedi-
tion.. Mr. V. Streich, the geologist to that expedition, points
out* that the Everard and Birksgate Ranges consist almost
entirely of eruptive granite, although representatives of a
schistose series overlying the granite were observed, usually
as outliers of the main range. Mr. Carruthers also pointed
out that they ‘‘are chiefly composed of red granite.’+ Only
the eastern limits of the range were visited by the North-
West Expedition, although the main granitic chain, with
Mount Illbilhe as a prominent feature, was sighted in the
distance, and therefore the following notes relate to that por-
tion of the range only.

Igneous FRocks.—True granitic intrusions, often with
large porphyritic felspars, have penetrated granitic gneiss.
The granite at the borders of the intrusions has assumed a
gneissic character, the apparent planes of foliation having a
waved and plicated outline. These planes have, beyond
doubt, been produced by movement of the rock magma after
partial crystallisation of the constituent minerals. Veins of
epidote and epidote granite, in which epidote replaces mica,
are general, while interrupted veins of coarse acid secretions
are not infrequent.

The intrusion of the granite has taken place in a direc-
tion a few degrees south of west, and the weathering of the
softer portions of the rock has left huge, bare massifs, upon

* Scient. Res. Elder Expl. Exped., Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A.,
vol. xvi., page 83.

; ov Rep. to Surveyor-General (Adelaide Observer, January 16,
1892).

the surface of which lie boulder-shaped tors that often rest
in perilous positions.

Diorite and pegmatite dykes occur in fair number, the
former more frequently than the latter.

Metamorphic Rocks.—The gneiss occurring in this
locality is, without exception, granitic and largely “meta-
pyrigen.” The best exposures that came under notice are
those occurring south-east of Artootinna soakage well. At
this spot the planes of foliation, greatly contorted and folded,
strike easterly, and the rock is vertically jointed in direction
north and south. The foliation is made conspicuous by
planes of dark-coloured biotite, the mica in the original in-
trusive mass being in parts poorly developed or absent.

Veins, ete.—Veins of barren quartz within the bedrock
are not wanting. To the east of the ranges, further, small
pegmatitic veins exist within the gneiss, containing irregular
secretions of magnetite.

AYERS RANGES.

General Remarks.—The group of hills, situated for the
most part in the southern limits of the Northern Territory
and partly in South Australia proper, and generally known
as Ayers Ranges, is hardly deserving of such a geographical
term. In appearance the hills are similar, though smaller
and more disconnected than the previously mentioned groups
of elevation. Mr. Ernest Giles, describing these ‘‘ranges,”
which he discovered in 1872, from the summit of Mount Sir
Henry, stated* that “the mount and all others connected
with it rose simply lke islands out of a vast ocean of scrub,”
and that the mount “consisted of enormous blocks and boul-
ders of red stone, so riven and fissured that no water could
lodge for an instant upon it.”

The hills are of fair altitude; yet they appear compara-
tively low. This is because the red sands from which they
rise cover their flanks to a considerable height. The highest
point, Mount Cavenagh,; stands 2,200 feet above sea level,
but only 300 feet above the adjoining sands. They may be
divided into three groups: firstly, that comprising Mounts
Cavenagh, Barrow, and Reynolds, all of which are portions
of the same outcrop and in proximity to one another ; second-
ly, Mount Sir Henry, situated about three miles south of the
former ; and lastly, a prominent southern ridge that extends
into South Australia proper. All these prominences have
been determined by igneous intrusions, the first two sets con-
sisting of granite, the last of an extensive belt of diorite dykes.

* Geogr. Travels in Centr. Austr., 1872-1874, I., page 78.

+ Mount Cavenagh of Giles was re-named Mount Burton by
Carruthers’ party.

Lying between these masses, disconnected, rounded hills
of metamorphic rock appear, rising, as In previous instances,
from a vast expanse of sand.

Igneous Rocks.--The granite is somewhat coarsely crys-
talline, normal to slightly porphyritic, the felspar often oc-
curring as porphyritic individuals. Magnetic ores of iron
are plentifully developed. The rock is superficially rotten.
The mass shows typical granitic features, with a regular, ver-
tical system of jointing, which sometimes, by weathering,
have formed large caves, notably north-west of Mount Cave-
nagh. The intrusion appears to have occurred in a direction
north of west, and the Mount Cavenagh outcrop is divided
by a series of parallel gullies running in a northerly direc-
tion. Outcrops of identical rock were found intermediate in
position between Mount Sir Henry and Mount Carnarvon,
thus geologically connecting the Musgrave and Ayers Ranges.
About fifteen miles south of Mount Cavanagh a different
type of granite is found adjacent to a belt of dioritic intru-
sion. It is a highly felspathic graphic granite, the felspar
being a light red orthoclase, and in parts is pegmatitic. Fur-
ther east it has suffered considerable metamorphism, and _ is
veined by saussuritic rock and a coarsely crystalline, fels-
pathic, acid modification.

Diorite intrusions are exceedingly plentiful. The south-
ern extremity of the ranges is a pronounced ridge, rising atout
200 feet above the plain, about a mile wide, and extending
for several miles east and west. It 1s composed almost en-
tirely of diorite intrusions, with the exception of a few “‘float-
ing’ masses of highly altered rock in the same. The dykes
trend within a degree or two of due west, and are either re2u-
larly jointed into quadrangular blocks or weather into round-
ed masses resembling granitic tors. Between this prominent
ridge and Mount Sir Henry a marked series of parallel diorite
dykes, usually of no great thickness, continues for nearly the
whole distance, a dyke being met with at every few chains.
Their direction is east and west, with very few exceptions.
A few low exposures of the bedrock were met with, consist-
ing of various modifications of altered granite.

Metamorphic Rocks.—The gneiss has its greatest develop-
ment in the east of the ranges, occurring as more or less iso-
lated bare hillocks. It is linearly foliated, the planes of foli-
ation striking N. 10° E., and dipping W. at Kurrekapinnya
soakage. This fact seems extraordinary, as in all other cases
noted the foliation of the gneiss coincided in direction with
the trend of the intrusion, and this evidence, in conjunction
with other physical features, has suggested a change in the
direction of intrusion of the granite. The rock is jointed in

well-defined planes, striking W. 25° N., with a northerly
dip, and, less conspicuously, in planes striking N. 3° E.,
with a dip of 75° W. Secondary minerals line the walls of
these joints, along which, moreover, slight faults and hitches
have occurred.

THE INDULKANA OUTCROP.

About twelve miles east of Indulkana Spr‘ug, adjacent to
Chambers’s old wagon track, a small exposure of bedrock
exists, and, whilst not many square miles in extent, indica-
tions are not wanting that the rock may be found at no great
depth over a much wider area. The exposure is 1,300 feet
above sea level, and is surrounded on all sides by a capping of
“desert sandstone” barely exceeding 30 feet in thickness.

Igneous Rocks.—The intrusive rocks are of the acid and
intermediate families. Diorite dykes predominate, though it
is often difficult to determine the exact planes of contact with
the intruded schists on account of the severe shattering of
the rock. At least four major diorite intrusions have occur-
red in direction east and west, with slight variations, due
possibly to subsequent earth movement. The largest mea-
sures one hundred yards in breadth. In places where the con-
tact with the schist is visible the latter rock appears baked
and highly schistose, with upturned planes of schistosity. The
diorite is for the most part fine-textured, quartzless, and
micaceous ; on the surface the rock is usually “honeycombed”
by unequal weathering of the constituent minerals, the lbe-
rated iron oxides coating the surface with a “rust.”

Intrusions of graphic granite, pegmatite, and greisen
have occurred previous to that of the diorite. This is evident
from the fact that the diorite dykes are often found cutting
the pegmatite, the latter having thereby frequently suffered
lateral displacement. The mineralogical character of these
acid rocks varies considerably. Their common feature is
coarse crystallisation of the constituents. Im some dykes
quartz predominates, in others it is subordinate to felspar,
while mica occurs as irregular aggregates in the greisen and
occasionally as an accessory in the pegmatite—in the latter
case usually in a state of partial decomposition. On the
western limits of the exposure igneous intrusion is marked
by dykes of graphic granite and schorlaceous greisen, the lat-
ter including large, perfect crystals of black tourmaline and a
light-coloured microline., The general direction of intrusion
is east and west, although dykes may be found running at
right angles to this. True granite is feebly represented by a
coarsely crystalline rock, with pink crystals of orthoclase,
rather subcrdinate quartz of a bluish sub-opaline character
and a greenish biotite.

Metamorphic Rocks.—In traversing the outcrop from
south to north a gradual alteration in the structure of the
bedrock will be noticed, the rock grading from a quartz mica
schist on the south, through a highly micaceous black biotite
schist, to a finely foliated quartzitic gneiss, to a typical augen
gneiss on the north. The strike of the beds varies (in zones
of extreme pressure considerably), though the general direc-
tion appears slightly south of west. The dip is doubtful,
possibly northerly. The augen gneiss, compact and granitic,
contains lenticular veinlets of quartz, which are often con-
siderably distended as a result of lateral pressure during a
state of semi-plasticity, and in addition are frequently found
turned upon themselves or complex-folded. The schist can
be distinguished from the gneiss in the field even at a dis-
tance by contrasting its serrated lines of outcrop with the
rounded, massive, boulder-like outcrops of the gneiss. On
the north-east the rock consists of a rotten biotite schist, in
which planes of mica have become so aggregated that the rock
appears to be almost entirely built up of the pure mineral
biotite. Even in hand specimens the curved and crinkled
lamelle of the mica indicate how great a stress the beds have
been subjected to. The planes of schistosity of the rock
strike from 10° to 20° south of east, and dip N. 32°. The beds
are further jointed in directions E. 10° S8., with a dip of 60°
S., N. and S., with a dip of 85° W., and irregularly by a
poor vertical plane. To the south this rock becomes less per-
sistent, and has yielded more to weathering. A small de-
velopment of chlorite schist occurs in contact with the augen
gneiss, and a local production of hornblende epidote schist
has taken place at the contact with certain diorite dykes.
Skirting the north-western limits of the outcrop a finely crys-
talline gneiss seems to point to a zone of crushing of an
igneous rock. (See Appendix. Pages 94-5.) Outcrops of
quartz schist, mica sckist, and gneiss extend more or less con-
tinuously westwards to Indulkana soakage well, at which
spot the gneiss contains coarse vein-segregations of felspar
with a development of tourmaline and titaniferous iron ore.
Repeated searching for tin ore proved fruitless.

Some miles south of the main outcrop low surface expo-
sures of ferruginous clay slates and mud stones appear, the
sharp, serrated edges of the same standing out conspicuously.
In some parts the rock comes near to a phyllite, and is tra-
versed by very many small quartz veins.

Veins, etc.—The so-called “quartz reefs” of the locality
are of two kinds, namely, those forming portions of a true
igneous (pegmatitic) dyke, and those formed subsequently by
deposition freza solution in fissures of the rock. The latter
have a remarkably fresh, compact, crystalline appearance,

and in no case do they extend downward to any depth, but
pinch out in less than a dozen feet; they are the fillings of
wedge-shaped fissures within the diorite dykes. A _ typical
instance of a “reef” occurs one mile east of Krupp Hill. It
measures four feet in width at the surface, but its walls
rapidly converge to a point in depth. The fissure walls
strike E. 8° S8., the northern wall dipping 60° S., the south-
ern 80° S. The quartz is either milky or glassy. The for-
mation may be termed a ‘“‘dead lode,’’* although pyrites is
disseminated through the vein, and in_ one _ instance
deaewrace j.Ol) grey) copper ore was discovered.
The pyrites crystals that impregnate the mass
are decomposed near the surface, leaving small cavities
containing sulphur and a little limonite, the remaining pro-
ducts of decomposition haviny stained the numerous cracks
and crevices in the quartz. Shght quantities of secondary
minerals (chlorite) occur locally, and the walls of small cavi-
ties are coated with drusy quartz. ;

Few miles west of Indulkana soakage a lode of siliceous
ironstonet stands out conspicuously from a fissure in the
crystalline schist. It is possible that this lode overlies a dio-
rite dyke.

CAMBRIAN.

No representatives of the Cambrian system were dis-
covered in the vicinity of the north-western ranges, none of
the contact rocks having disclosed any trace of organic re-
mains in any shape or form. However, limestones that must
without hesitation be correlated with the Cambrian strata of
the Flinders Range occur at the head of Lake Torrens. The
outcrop occupies but a small area at the surface, being about
three miles in length, in direction east and west, by two
miles north and south. The beds are massive, though they
extend to no great vertical height above the general level of
the country; they stand as large, separated blocks resting
upon a more compact body of rock below. The beds seem to
strike westerly, although considerable variation (up to N.
25° W., and more) were observed. On the southern limits
of the exposure they have the form of a slight syncline, the
dips of the strata on either side of the axis of
Poin s bem tows i! (120% Witands 2° respectively).
They are jointed vertically in two directions at
right angles to one another. The rock mass, as a

* One sample of this rock, that was subsequently assayed, re-
turned a mere trace of gold (accidental ?).
t Mr. H. Y. L. Brown has noted a ‘‘lode outcrop of ferrugi-

nous quartzite and iron oxide’’ to occur in this locality, and is
probably the same as that referred to.

whole, shows no signs of bedding, but the impurer portions
(siliceous) exnipit faintly planes of deposition and current
bedding that are rendered more apparent on partial denuda-
tion of the rock. .The character of the rock varies from a
bluish, sub-crystalline limestone to a granular marble, to be
in parts replaced (in the upper layers) by coloured siliceous
and dolomitic limestones. The crystalline limestone con-
tains accessory minerals, as small, perfect crystals of fluorite
and aggregates of ankerite, while carbonates of copper occur
as locally concentrated fissure fillings and pockets of incon-
siderable magnitude or quality. Chert nodules that have
possibly been derived from solution of contained radiolarian
tests, or enclose the spicules of Cambrian sponges,* weather
from the surface of the limestone, by virtue of their superior
hardness. They are flattish-ovoid in shape, and are bounded
by regularly curved, smooth surfaces.

ORDOVICIAN.

Exposures of beds of the Ordovician period were met
with in districts widely separated from one another, namely,
at Indulkana, Mount Conner, and the Mount Kingston out-
crop.

Se ee H. Y. L. Brown visited this outcrop
in 1889, and reported? similar rocks to extend in a direction
southward to Arcoollina Well, and for a long distance west-
wards. Mr. V. Streich passed the same outcrops two years
later, { and traced the western boundary of the same forma-
tion to Townsend Ridge, over one hundred miles beyond the
border line of Western Australia.

On approaching the Mount Chandler range from the
north, it has the appearance of a tableland, with its surface
sloping slightly westward. This is not, strictly speaking,
the case, for, on entering the range, it is found to consist of
a series of parallel ridges trending from east to west. The
whole formation at this locality appears in the form of a
shallow, synclinal trough, the axis of which pitches
east and west. The strike of the beds is E.
5° §. The rock is composed principally of a

* Since writing this paper Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., of Syd-
ney, has kindly examined a section of one of these nodules for
me. He writes that, ‘‘the micro-section of the nodule appears to
consist of calcite and chalcedony, with perhaps a third undeter-
pee mineral. I cannot distinguish any trace of organic strue-
ure,

t H. Y. L. Brown: Report on Journey from Warrina to Mus-
grave Ranges (by authority: Adelaide, 1889).

t V. Streich: Scien. Res. Elder Expl. Exped., 1891-2, Geo-
logy. Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xvi., page 80.

hard, compact, fine-grained quartzite, merging in parts to
a more friable sandstone and grit, portions being ferruginous.
A prominent parting of the rock coincides with the original
planes of bedding, while further two joints, not very persis-
tent, occur: one in direction N. 20° E., dipping 65° easterly,
and another at right angles to this. Planes of shear are
highly polished by shcekensiding, and in parts the rock has
been severely fractured. Drift bedding is much in evidence,
and makes the determination of strike somewhat difficult at
the eastern limit of the outcrop. The rock has a tendency to
cavernous weathering, one of the largest caves having been
occupied as a store by the Government surveyors.

The quartzite overlies unconformably schists and clay
slates, the planes of schistosity and cleavage of which stand
at a high angle. The direct junction is for the most part
hidden by the “waste” of rock that has accumulated at the
foot of the escarpment, but in a small watercourse on the
east the direct contact can be observed for a limited distance,
the quartzite resting upon decomposed clay slate.

Although the underlying pre-Cambrian beds are exten-
sively intruded by diorite, pegmatite, and other dykes, no
such intrusion was observed to penetrate the overlying quart-
zite.* The same is true with regard to large quartz reefs
occurring in the immediate neighbourhcod. From Mount
Chandler the quartzite extends eastward as low, disconnected
ridges, and was subsequently found at Camp 7 (Krupp Hill)
overlying pre-Cambrian schists, but not overlain by desert
sandstone, which, hcwever, directly overlies low outcrops of
pre-Cambrian rocks in the vicinity. This fact would in-

dicate a fair altitude of the quartzite during late Cretaceous
times.

At Ewintinna soakage outcrops of the same formation
take a northerly curve, the beds locally striking N. 25° E.
The rock at this spot is, similarly, a quartzite, slightly band-
ed and sub-fissile, and in parts traversed by numerous wavy
veinlets of secondary quartz. The rock is parted by a promi-
nent strike-joint, dipping about 75° westerly, and another
plane dipping 85° in the direction N. 25° W. A few miles
south of this soakage the quartzite was found to have its
strike identical with that of the Mount Chandler outcrop.

Mount ConnEer.—This monolith, rising to a height of
2,600 feet above sea level, and about "800 feet above the level

Goneare. “ie ene —_ é the sranite and other
dykes and quartz reefs do not oe into these rocks.” H. Y.
L. Brown, Report of Geological Examination of Country in

Neighbourhood of Alice Springs (by Authority: Adelaide, 1890),

of the desert in which it stands, forms one of a remarkable
series of three conspicuous landmarks situated north of the
Musgrave Ranges; the other two being known as Ayers Rock
and Mount Olga. Mount Conner, rising abruptly from the
surrounding desert, is a huge, table-topped outlier of a once
continuous extensive geological formation. The base of the
mount has a circumference of about six miles, while the plat-
eau itself is roughly two miles long by three-quarters broad.
It is surrounded on all sides by a talus, having an angle of
repose of from 30 to 35 degrees ; above the talus an abrupt es-
carpment rises to the edge of the plateau, a vertical distance
of about 250 to 300 feet. | With the exception of one or two
pine trees the escarpment is practically destitute of vegeta-
tion.

The rock is a close-grained, compact, siliceous quartzite.
The beds show a pronounced horizontal parting, correspond-
ing with the original planes of bedding, and the rock is in
portions sub-fissile and fractured, the cracks and _ crevices
affording shelter for numerous hawks and owls.

The topmost layers of the rock are composed of a glossy,
white, hard quartzite, while the lower portions assume a
softer, arenaceous character, and are stained red by precipi-
tated products of decomposition. In places the quartzite con-
tains irregular bands of well-rounded pebbles of altered sedi-
mentary rock (banded and black quartzite), producing locally
a conglomerate. Peculiar false-bedding-like markings are
found, not infrequently surrounding these conglomeritic por-
tions, and the quartzite contains segmented ferruginuus
segregations, which are not altogether unlike orsanic remains.
The strike of the rock varies from west up to 30° north of
west, the beds forming a shallow synclinal fold. Portions of
the quartzite are shattered into small blocks, fairly regularly
bounded by conchoidal surfaces, huge masses being 1n cases
thus reduced to fragments, lying loosely together in a state
of unstable equilibrium. This phenomenon is a direct result
of insolation. (Plate xiv., fig. 2.) Mount Conner
1s surrounded by low, rugged outcrops and
ridges of fissile quartzite, “covered with dense
mulga”’ and “marked by a low cliff.’* The quartzite is band-
ed, and weathers into large flat slabs. The strike varies.

THE Mount Kincston Ovutcrop.—Mount Kingston is
situated west of Mount Watt, the portion of a southern Or-
dovician outcrop that was examined by Messrs. Tate and

* W. H. Tietkens: Journ. Cent. Austr. Expl. Exped., 1889,
page 59,

Watt on the Horn Expedition. These authors report* that
Mount Watt is composed of a hard, dense quartzite, much
fissured, and with few ferruginous bands. Fossils were ob-
tained in the form of casts in large numbers in the quartzite.

The exposure} examined by us is situated about six miles
south-west of Mount Kingston, and appears in the form of
three or four well-defined parallel ridges trending north-east-
erly. The rock is a compact, fine-grained quartzite, in parts
highly ferruginous. In certain zones the rock is fissile, break-
ing into fairly large slabs from a fraction of an inch to seve-
ral inches in thickness. The strike is E. 36° N., and dip 60°
north-westerly. The beds are jointed in directions N.W.,
dipping 60° N.E., and N. 10° W., dipping easterly at a low
angle. A ferruginous coating is found covering slickensided
surfaces, and bands of highly ferruginous rock occur within
the rock. A concretionary structure and dendritic precipi-
tations of iron oxide are common.

The outcrop aopears in the midst of the desert sandstone
tablelands, the broken outliers of which surround the
quartzite on almost every side. Its physical features are,
however, quite distinct from those of the table-top formation,
although hand specimens of the two formations may be not
altogether dissimilar.

The height of the exposure above sea level, by aneroid
determination, is about 1,950 feet, and about 260 feet above
the level of the sand.

Mount Outca anp AvERS Rocx.—No doubt exists in my
mind that Mount Olga and Ayers Rock are isolated rem-
nants of the Ordovician system, the former consisting of a
conglomerate, { the latter of a coarse metamorphic grit.
These features suggest that Mount Olga was probably situat-
ed close to the old Ordovician land surface, Mount Conner
being distant, and Ayers Rock in a position intermediate be-
tween the two.

The geologists of the Horn Expedition § have alreaciy
hinted at the possible Ordovician age of Mount Olga and
Ayers Rock, while Mr. Brown, judging from specimens col-

™ Tate and Watt: Rep. Horn Exped. Centr. Austr., General
Geology, page 59.
_ + Mr. Wells has erected a small! pile of stones on the highest
point of this exposure.

t Compare W. C. Gosse, Parliamentary Paper No. 48, House
Assembly, 1874, page 11:—‘‘This range is formed of a number of
round-topped masses of solid conglomerate rock (known as pud-
ding stone), but with stony, spinifex slopes, from 100 to 300 fesi
rising to their foot. Each hill is a separate rock.”

§ Tate and Watt: op. citl., page 59.

lected by Mr. Tietkens, was inclined to consider Mount Conner
younger than the other two members. *

DESERT SANDSTONE.

The term Desert Sandstone, which was originally used by
Daintree for a highly siliceoas deposit that is often found
overlying the fossiliferous Cretaceous of Australia, is, to a cer-
tain extent, misleading, as the formation is only to a hmited
extent a true sandstone. Mr. H. Y. L. Brown employed the
term Super-Cretaceous, and later Professor Tate and Mr. Watt
Supra-Cretaceous, for the same formation. Messrs. Jack and
Etheridge regard the desert sandstone as Upper Cretaceous.

No conclusive evidence concerning the exact relationship
was found, but I observed that the desert sandstone in many
places, particularly at Indulkana, unconformably overlies
intruded primary schists. This fact, if the formation is to be
correlated with the cretaceous, would demand, as Professor
Tate suggested, that the desert sandstcne overlaps the latter

Beds of this formation occur along the track from
Oodnadatta westward to Indulkana. Such trigonometrically-
surveyed heights as Mount Mystery, Mount Alberga, and De
Rose Hill are prominent members of the series. From !n-
dulkana, the north-western limit of the formation in South
Australia runs east of north in a direction west of Crown
Point ; beyond this line the primary and intrusive rocks oi
the Musgrave, Mann, Tomkinson, and Everard Ranges, ::0
doubt, were high land surfaces during the deposition of ihe
desert sandstone formation. Shght surface exposures oaly
of the so-called sanclstone were observed, immediately south
of the Mann Ranges at Hector’s Pass, in the form of a low
bank of rather decomposed, friable, silicifed quartzite and
white, semi-opaline quartz a mile or two east of the pass. A
similar semi-opaline rock was found a few miles south-east
of Giles West Camp (Musgrave Ranges), and south of Ayers
Ranges, in the Nerthern Territory. Indications of the for-
mation exist, as rock fragments, strewn on the surface, north
of the Mann Ranges.

To the south, the whole of the elevated country lying
between Oodnadatta and Lake Torrens that was traversed by
the Expedition, consists of desert sandstone, with the excep-
tion of comparatively few exposures of palzozoic rocks, as in
the neighbourhood of Mount Woods and at the head of Lake
Torrens.

The formation, as a whole, occurs either as_ isolated
table-topped hills or as groups and ranges of the same. The

* W.H. Tietkens: Journ. Centr. Austr. Expl. Exped.: Sec-
tion by H. Y. L. Brown.

hills are almost invariabiy capped by an exceedingly hard,
silicified layer of rock, the base being of a more friable and
softer character.*

At Indulkana the top layer is composed of a compact,
chalecedonic grit, with irregular, sub-angular fragments of
colourless and blackish quartz scattered through the mass,
with a secondary interstitial cement of a form of quartz.
Though the rock may be a coarse grit, the surfaces of frac-
ture, which are in parts sub-conchoidal, are remarkably
smooth; the compactness of the rock causing the planes of
fracture to pass through the included particles. Professor
Tate described the desert sandstone as being composed of
“sharp grains of glassy quartz, varying much in size, cement-
ed by opaque, white siliceous matter, and more or less stain-
ed red by oxide of iron.” ‘This description would apply
equally well to the Indulkana outcrops. In places the for-
mation becomes very fine-grained, showing a laminated
character or a distinct fissility, and a fairly regular system of
vertical jointing, in a north-easterly direction.

A second variety of desert sandstone has been produced
by an opalisation of the mass. Examples of this character
were seen at Hector’s Pass (Mann Ranges), south-east of
Giles West Camp (Musgrave Ranges), and south of Ayers
Ranges (Northern Territory). The rock is an impure form
of common opal; in colour white to bluish-white ; containing
cellular cavities and small black inclusions of carbonaceous
matter. It breaks with a true conchoidal fracture. Surface
outcrops only were found of this variety.

At North Creek the formation consists of a very fine-
erained, splintery, chalcedonic quartzite, the individual
grains being hardly distinguishable with the naked eye. The
rock is traversed by small veinlets of oxide of iron, subse-
quently precipitated. The colour varies considerably: white,
yellow, reddish, blue, and purple. The rock is brittle
and rings when subjected to the blows of the hammer.

At Yarrabollinna Waterhole the character of the rock
again changes entirely. Large, bluff-shaped masses are com-
posed of an excessively fine-grained form of silica, so fine that
it shows no sign of a gritty feel when rubbed between the
fingers, resembling somewhat the touch produced with kaolin,
which mineral is present in small measure only. The pure
forms are snow-white, others are variously tinted. Within
this deposit nodular masses of a cherty form of silica occur,
which are bounded by an outer concentric growth of white
chert. (See Plate xv., fig. 1.)

“ See Tate and Watt: Rep. Horn Exped. Cent. Aus. Phys.
Geog., page 8; General Geology, page 68.

In the same bed are found nodules of barytes, with a
radiating, concretionary structure. They are more or less
spheroidal in shape, being flat or concavely indented in the.
plane of the longer axis. Others are flatter, broadly dis-
coidal. Their dimensions vary considerably, the largest
being about four inches in diameter. The smaller forms have
a tendency to slit horizontally in two.* ;

A more argillaceous variety of desert sandstone, spangled
with tiny flakes of mica, was observed south of Stuart’s Creek
Cattle Station. This outcrop weathers more like a shale than
the sandstone generally.

Fossilised wood was found in the desert sandstone at a
few localities, notably west of William Creek, in the neigh-
bourhood of Beltabeltana Waterhole, where it is plentiful.
Other fossils were not observed in this formation.

The most picturesque and rugged range of disconnected
masses of the desert sandstone formation came under notice
in the locality known as the Serrated Range. This range is
composed of peaks, bluffs, pillars, and tables, often of a very
quaint appearance, and tinted in various shades of colour.
The formation may with justice be called the Mauvaises Terres
of Australia, as have been termed the Cretaceous desert for-
mations of North America.

Owing to the porcelainised, brittle character of the rock,
particularly of the overlying hard band, it gives way readily
and suddenly when subjected to irregular strain. It is on
this account that the sandstone, wherever met with, has been
more or less broken up into fragments, often terminated by
conchoidal faces; the phenomenon being the result of subjec-
tion to extremes of temperature within a short period of time
(insolation). These fragments are subsequently scattered over
the plains between the table-hills by the floods which occur
at rare intervals, and are known as_ gibbers (less
frequently shingle or — gravel). The gibbers form

* I have recently had opportunity of seeing identical concre-
tions in the Sydney University Museum, which were collected by
Mr. E. F. Pittman from the opal-bearing strata at White Cliffs.
Through the courtesy of the Mines Department of New South
Wales I have been permitted to annex the following analysis by
Mr. J. C. H. Mingaye :—

AnaLysis OF A NopuLE oF BARYTES OBTAINED FROM OPAL-BEARING
STRATA AT WHITE CLIFFs.

04:1666
Barium sulphate +. Be R 079585
Ferric oxide and alumina ... bah es 50
Silica ae ot ‘ak ee icc 2eee
Water a ce by ha ‘ar 72
Lime, magnesia, and undetermined ae 83

stony plains, and have already been’ referred to
by Sturt as the stony desert. Owing to the exten-
sive denudation of the desert sandstone the _ gibbers
cover a considerable area of Central Australia. The lateral
transportation of the stones by water action cannot be con-
siderable, owing to the level contour of the intervening plains ;
in fact, they are deposited, on the removal of the softer, un-
derlying portions more or less vertically below their original
position im situ. On the slopes of many of the hills in process
of disappearance the stony ‘wash’ has accumulated in
rounded terraces or steps, transported by torrential floods.

The reflection of ight from the smooth surfaces of these
stones, when travelling towards the sun, is irritating to the
eye. The glaze has been described by Mr. Brown as being
“probably due to the action of siliceous water,” and the effect
is in small measure increased by a slight, glossy surface coat-
ing of precipitated iron oxide. The superficial polish has also
been assisted, as has been suggested, by the action of wind-
driven sand.

The gibbers consist mainly of different varieties of quartz
—forms of agate, jasper, chalcedony, and semi-opal—while
in association with them occur concretionary forms of lmon-
ite, often assuming grotesque shapes. Gypsiferous clays were
met with throughout the area covered by this formation, and,
in them, large slabs of transparent gypsum that have been
produced by crystalline intergrowth. In addition to these,
various nodules, that occur in the softer portions of the rock
and resist the denudation to a greater extent, are found.

Obsidian Bombs (Volcanic).—These are widely distri-
buted over the desert sandstone area, and have been the cause
of much discussion, without any satisfactory deductions as to
their origin. The phenomenon, which points to a former sur-
face deposition, somewhere, of volcanic ejectamenta has given
rise to various theories, such as meteoric, glacial, and of vol-
canic action in sitw. Comparatively few examples were found
during the Expedition, though single specimens were collected
near to the Mann, Musgrave, and Ayers Ranges. I have,
however, received a number of specimens from Mr. McNa-
mara, from the neighbourhood of the Peake. Their univer-
sal distribution has, no doubt, been assisted by the agency of
the native and the emu (in the form of “gizzard stones’). The
natives call obsidian bombs Pandélla and Kaleya korru, the
latter meaning “emu eye.” They are collected by the medi-
cine men of the tribes, and apphed in the healing of sickness.

RECENT DEPOSITS.
Sand.—With the exception of the various outcrops of
rock previously discussed, sandy deposits cover all the sdija-

cent country to the north-western ranges of South Australia,
and extend for many hundreds of miles north, south, and
west, the tablelands on the east checking the accumulation to
a slight degree in that direction.

The height above sea level of these deposits is consider-
able, the sand ascending to an altitude of 1,900 feet in the
Ayers Ranges, and to 2,200 feet in the locality north of
Opparinna Spring. It is on this account that all the larger
valleys cutting the ranges have become filled up with elevated
deposits, from which large, gum-lined creek beds emerge, to
be subsequently “lost”? in the sands adjoining the ranges.
This drifting cover is embarrassing to the prospector, as the
higher portions of the ranges alone can be examined, the
more favourable contact-rocks being for the greater part hid-
den underneath the great depth of sand.

The material of the deposits consists of a moderately fine-
grained, incoherent sand, the grains being usually superficially
coated red by oxide of iron. In proximity to the ranges these
sands are more loamy, and have been bound together by vege-
tation. There, also, they contain other constituents derived
from ‘he decomposition of the primary rocks, such as cleaved
fragments of felspar and hornblende, flakes of mica, small
nodules of limonite (iron-shot), and occasional patches of
garnets. Beyond the belt influenced by the ranges, the sand
is loose, incoherent, and subject to a continual drift. In
these regions the sand accumulates in the form of more or
less parallel undulations or sandhills, mostly incoherent
throughout, but occasionally very slightly cemented super-
ficially. The direction in which these sandhills trend, beiny
at right angles to prevalent winds, is east and west, south of
the Musgrave Ranges, although the more usuii direction ob-
served further south, in the basin of Lake Torrens, is south-
west. Frequently two such parallel undulations unite to
form one,* thence continuing as one in the same direction.
Nuclei which had in the first place started the formation of
sandhills were observed north of Mount Crombie, in the shape
of low outcrops of granite, while a few miles south of Stuart’s
Creek a prominent “sandhill” consists cf a former tablehill of
desert sandstone, almost completely covered with drift sand,
few exposures only of the rock being visible, and limited to
one side of the hill. The source of this vast amount of sand
must be attributed to the eolian waste of the desert sandstone
formation. t

* Streich states that the ‘“‘sand dunes’”’ of the Great Victoria
Desert are ‘‘very seldom found confluent.’’—Trans. Roy. Soc.,
S.A., vol. xvi., page 89.

+ Compare E. F. Pittman: On the Cretaceous Formation
in the North-Western Portion of New South Wales. Rec. Geol.
Surv. N.S.W.,. vol. iv., Part iv., page 146.

The wonderful capacity for binding the sand dispiayea
by the porcupine grass (Vriodia spp.) can be favourably
compared with that of Spinifex hirsutis on the dunes of our
sea shores.

Travertine.—Travertine was only found as small, local,
surface coverings, most frequently along the banks of creek
beds, where it is regarded as a valuable guide to sub-

terranean water. Examples occur along the course of Op-
parinna Creek and certain creek beds in the Tomkinson
Ranges.

Travertine was further noted in many instances to overlie
diorite dykes, a breccia having often resulted from the cemen-
tation of originally loose rubble derived from the dykes (Op-
parinna). The travertine occurring at the foot of Mount
Davis, in the Tomkinson Ranges, deserves notice on account
of its extreme compactness and hardness, it being almost
resistant to the blade of a knife. At Stuart’s Creek a small
deposit of banded travertine has been produced by the pre-
cipitation of successive layers differently coloured by varying
magnesian and carbonaceous contents.

A thick incrustation of calce-tufa was ciscovered in the
Musgrave Ranges. To the west of Opparinna Spring a series
of rock waterholes is to be found along the bed of a rugged
gorge enclosed by steep walls of gneiss. One of such holes is
situated at the base of a waterfall that has been produced by
the intermittent flow of a creek over a locally hardened band
of blue garnetiferous gneiss, the softer rock below having
become undermined. This deposit of earthy, calcareous sin-
ter, with a fair percentage of included organic matter, occurs
as regular stalactitic and mammillated masses, hanging from
the under side of the indurated ledge or bank of gneiss. The
formation produc?s an imposing aspect.

APPENDIX.

Petrological Notes on Rocks Collected on the
Expedition.

GRANITE.

Locality—Mann Ranges, outcrop fourteen miles west of
Mount Samuel.

Macroscopically.—Granitic, porphyritic; the felspar oc-
curring as large (up to 2°7 cm.), more or less lenticular,
porphyritic crystals, rounded by the chemical (?) corrosion of
the rock magma. Felspar dark grey, fresh, in places not un-
like the greasy-looking elaeolites of syenites.

Quartz in smaller, blackish, segregations throughout the
mass. Mica black, not infrequently as lenticular aggregates
having their long axes indistinctly parallel, and surrounded
by a border of pink secondary mineral. The rock has suf-
fered from the effects of mountain butding forces.

Microscopically.—Rock with a _ holocrystalline ground-
mass, in which the larger crystals of felspar are embedded.

In parts the quartz (appearing normal in plain light)
when viewed in plane polarised light, proves to be microscopi-
cally separated into numerous contiguous particles; micro-
graphic intergrowths with the felspar common; generally
speaking it is allotriomorphic, crowded with inclusions, and its
fissures stained by oxide of iron, subsequently precipitated.

The potash felspar is clouded and crowded with minute
inclusions, which are frequently arranged in parallel bands,
and some, on decomposition, locally stain the enclosing mine-
ral. The felspar crystals are corroded and surrounded by a
border of secondary mineral fibres, radially arranged; the
cleavage cracks are filled with secondary mineral, polarising
with high colours. ‘Strain shadows” traverse the quartz and
felspar crystals on rotating the stage with crossed nicols.

The mica, a rather decomposed dark green biotite in ir-
regular aggregates of crystals, is almost invariably surrounded
by a broad band of closely set, pink garnets, which are
minute (averaging ‘005 millimetres in diameter). The indi-
vidual grains appear rather to have been separately develop-
ed than to be crushed parts of larger garnets. Optical ano-
malies are general among them.

Magnetite is scarce; the rock also contains patches of an
earthy form of iron oxide. Epidote as a scantily developed
accessory (secondary), in smal] though conspicuous (on ac-
count of the high refractive index) aggregates with no definite
geometrical boundaries.

GRANITE.

Locality.—Mount Sir Henry, Ayers Ranges.

Macroscopically.—A moderately coarse-textured, holo-
crystalline rock, considerably decomposed; the quartz and
felspar appear brown from iron pigment; the black-looking
mica in fairly large, irregular aggregates.

Microscopically.—Texture typically hypidiomorphic
granular, the rock being composed essentially of quartz, fel-
spar species, and biotite. The normal order of crystallisation
from the rock magma has generally prevailed, although the
mica occurs in parts interstitial to the felspar. A micro-
graphic intergrowth between quartz and felspar on a very
minute scale is apparent, and the former contains numerous
unindividualised inclusions in parallel bands.

Felspar is of two species: orthoclase and a delicately
twinned plagioclase. Decomposition has acted to a consider-
able extent upon many of the constituents ; the felspar, being
clouded when viewed by plain transmitted light, becomes
brilliantly tinted in the dull portions under crossed nicols on
account of the strong double refraction of the products of de-
composition (kaolin). Orthoclase is somewhat subordinate to
plagioclase ; the cleavage cracks and borders of both are lined
with oxide of iron.

The mica, a green biotite, occurs principally as aggre-
gates of flakes, partially decayed; the whole rock section,
moreover, 1s speckled with minute particles of biotite.

Magnetite is fairly plentiful, usually surrounded by a
layer of secondary mineral.

Apatite is present as stout, prismatic individuals, with
prominent cross fracture.

HOoRNBLENDIC GRANITE.
Plate xviii., fig. 2.

Locality.—Glen Ferdinand, Musgrave Ranges.

Macroscopically.—Rock granitic, normal; composed of
white felspar, colourless quartz, dark mica, and hornblende,
as largish, cystalline secretions.

Microscopically.—Texture hypidiomorphic granular; the
quartz and felspar uniformly distributed over the sections ;
the mica and hornblende not so. A fine mosaic of microcline
and quartz is chazacteristic.

The felspar is represented both by orthoclase and micro-
cline, the former being occasionally crowded with numerous
very slender, crystalline needles of zircon.

Mica (strongly pleochroic, brownish biotite), as irregu-
lar, curved, and twisted lamelle, partially or wholly altered
to a dark-green chlorite, more or less fibrous, and with a
weak double refraction. Pink, fractured garnets of fair size
are rather plentiful, usually, though not necessarily, in prox-
imity to the mica and the altered chlorite.

Magnetite is present as irregular particles.

GRANITE.

Locality.—Everard Ranges.

Macroscopically.—A coarsely crystalline, normal granite
with prominent pink felspar (orthoclase) and dark-coloured
mica. The rock is deeply “honeycombed” on its surface, this
being a result of the ready decomposition and removal of the
felspar.

Microscopically.—Rock typically hypidiomorphic granu-
lar, consisting of clear quartz, a clouded orthoclase, and a
strongly pleochroic biotite. | Micrographic intergrowths be-
tween quartz and felspar are common. Magnetite scarce.

EprmpotE Rock (ALTERED GRANITE).
Plate xvii., fig. 4.

Locality.—Musgrave Ranges, Titania Spring.

Macroscopically.—A granular rock, composed of clear
quartz and white, clouded felspar, traversed by veinlets of
epidote, the small columns that build up the bulk of the epi-
dote standing with their long axes at right angles to the
bounding lines of the veins in the section.

Microscopically.—The texture of this rock, though no
doubt originally holocrystalline, has been obscured by the
secondary secretion of epidote: the rock has, moreover, suf-
fered considerably from crushing.

The felspar is orthoclase, though little of its primary
characteristics remains, it having yielded to metamorphism by
transformation into epidote. Intermediate stages of this con-
version are general.

The epidote, which is hght greenish-yellow in colour,
covers fully three quarter parts of the section, as aggregates
of irregular, elongated, and columnar individuals. The strong
relief produced by the total reflection at the border of the epi-
dote is characteristic, and the cleavage is conspicuous in the
larger individuals only.

An imperfect “cross-hatched” appearance is here and
there visible on the faces of the felspar under crossed nicols.
This is an extreme case of ‘‘strain shadowing” as a result of
pressure.

Hematite (micaceous) is present as dark reddish-brown
(by transmitted light), hexagonal plates, presenting a slight
metallic lustre by reflected light. The perfect forms range
up to ‘27 mm. in diameter, and the adjoining minerals are
invariably stained red by iron pigment for some distance
around.

GNEISS.

Plate xviii, fig. 1.

Locality.—Indulkana, Krupp Hill West.

Macroscopically.— A __ fine-textured gneiss, consisting
essentially of quartz (colourless), felspar, and biotite, the last-
named being arranged in a more or less parallel manner with-
out the production of distinct, continuous planes of foliation
(Quincuncial structure). it is traversed by shattered veinlets
of quartz. A green accessory mineral (epidote) is developed
as irregular particles and patches throughout the rock, im-
parting a faint yellowish-green tint to the rock mass.

Microscopically.—Texture finely crystalline, granulitic,
with faint parallelism in the arrangement of the constituent
minerals. In parts a feeble centric structure is discernible.

The sections appear fresh, though a fine groundmass is here
and there noticeable, connecting the individual minerals: this
is the result of crushing.

The quartz occurs as small grains, with irregular or
rounded boundaries, with numerous fluid pores arranged in
parallel bands or scattered.

Felspar predominates : microcline crowded with inclusions
(unindividualised) more or less grouped: a very small amount
of plagioclase is present. ‘Strain shadows” are much in evi-
dence.

Mica occurs as a dark, brownish-green biotite, with
prism axes roughly parallel; some flakes have undergone par-
tial decomposition peripherally, with the production of a
ereen, fibrous mineral.

Magnetite, as opaque particles, with no definite boundary,
rarely idiomorphic, elongate, frequently enclosed by biotite.

Zircon is fairly well represented as inclusions in the
microline appearing with the rather rare elongated prismatic
habit. The prisms polarise with red and green interference
colours under crossed nicols; they are not surrounded by a
pleochroic halo.

Epidote produced at the expense of the felspar, as colour-
less or faintly yellowish individuals, without definite form.
Some of the felspar individuals can be observed to be parti-
ally converted into epidote, the latter appearing (with crossed
nicols) as very numerous brilliantly coloured specks, almost
entirely obliterating the characteristics of the felspar.

The gneiss in many respects resembles a granulite,
though garnets, usually characteristic of granulites, are en-
tirely absent.

The rock seems beyond doubt a “‘metapyrigen gneiss.”

GNEISS.
Plate xvi., fig. 2.

Locahity.—Mann Ranges, south-west of Mount Samuel.

Macroscopically.— A compact granitic rock, with a ten-
dency to foliation, the mica in elongated patches, whose major
axes point in one direction ; advanced in decomposition super-
ficially.

Microscopically.—Texture granular with a quartz-ortho-

clase mosaic, and larger felspars embedded in a crushed
groundmass.

Quartz clear, with gaseous and liquid inclusions, ar-
ranged more or less distinctly in streaks; also few individual-
ised inclusions of elongate-rounded form, the largest measur-

ing ‘03 mm., with a high refractive index and double refrac-
tion (zircon).

Felspars essentially orthoclase and microcline; plagio-
clase very subordinate, irregular, and finely twinned ; crystal
outlines generally corroded, and the mineral clouded by par-
tial decomposition; the cleavage cracks tinted by subse-
quently deposited iron ores. Twinning after the Karlsbad
law is observed in the orthoclase. Microline subordinate. A
micrographic (granophyric) intergrowth between quartz and
felspar on a small scale is visible in parts of the section.

Biotite strongly pleochroic, from hght greenish-brown to
almost black.

Magnetite as small, angular individuals.

GARNET GNEISS.
Plate xvii., fig. 2.
Locality.—Mount Davis (two miles north), Tomkinson

Ranges.

Macroscopically.—A fine-grained quarzitic gneiss, with a
rich, red-garnet development ; foliated, the biotite in regular
planes, the quartz and felspar foliations often wedging out.
Portions of the rock appear very quartzose, compact, with
largish fragments of smoky quartz.

Microscopically.—A quartz orthoclase mosaic. The folia-
ated character, though clearly visible in hand specimens, is
not apparent under the microscope.

The quartz contains minute liquid inclusions, and aggre-
gates of black particles disseminated through its mass, which
appear to be carbonaceous, the former not infrequently
grouped centrally. A fair amount of isotropic mineral is
also present

Felspar: large clouded crystals of orthoclase and smaller
subordinate plagioclase.

Biotite strongly pl2ochroic, in shades of brown to almost
black, when the rays vibrate parallel to the cleavage; elon-
gated or irregular, and is in parts decomposed, the resulting
iron oxides staining the adjoining minerals reddish-brown ;
often enclosing magnetite and felspar.

Magentite as fine dust and larger individuals, sometimes
filling fissures between the felspar.

Shattered crystals of red garnet, the largest of which are
a millimetre in diameter, are plentiful. They behave com-
pletely isotropically under crossed nicols, though the quartz
and felspar exhibit undulose extinction rather markedly.

This rock appears to be a “clastic gneiss.”

Contact GNEISS.

Locahty.—Opparinna, Musgrave Ranges.

Macroscopically.—A closely foliated, fine-grained gneiss,
with prominent dark planes of mica (linear foliation), and
narrow lenticles of quartz and felspar. The rock occurs in
direct contart with a diorite dyke, and its planes of foliation
have the same strike as the walls of the dyke.

Microscopically.—The distinct gneissic foliation remains
prominent even under a high power objective; the mica in
regular parallel stringlets. The fine state of crushing of the
rock appears to be an ultimate stage of metamorphism.

The quartz ocenrs as excessively crushed particles that
display marked “shadowy extinction” when viewed under
crossed nicols. It is comparatively fresh-looking, and free
from interpositions except the minutest.

The felspar, orthoclase, as small, irregular individuals,
showing shearage on a microscopic scale, with few indi-
vidualised inclusions.

Microperthite is developed to a hmited extent, and dis-
plays a very delicate lamination under crossed nicols.

The biotite 1s clear, strongly pleochroic, and appears in
the form of elongated flakes.

SCHISTOSE Quartz Rock (so-called “Quartz Blow’).

Locahity.—Mann Ranges, south-east of Mount Edwin.

Macroscomcally.— A fine-grained, white quartzose rock,
schistose, with well-defined planes of brown secondary mica,
in parts decomposed and brown.

Microscoyically.— Essentially composed of closely agegre-
gated, allotriomorphic grains of quartz, the boundaries of
which are usually sharp, and the grains in direct contact with
one another. A fair amount of amorphous silica is present.
The quartz is fresh, but contains numerous unindividualised
fluid inclusions, with stationary and mobile gas bubbles, usu-
ally arranged in fairly broad parallel bands, crossing in a
continuous line several adjacent grains. Jt, therefore, ap-
pears that the inclusions are to a certain extent not original,
but have subsequently been produced by the metamorphism
of the rock by igneous intrusion. Individualised inclusions
occur in the form of elonsated prisms of colourless apatite,
with indistinct, rounded prism-terminals and transverse frac-
turing.

The decomposed mica flakes do not exhibit any striking
tendency to parallel orientation. Dark strain shadows cros-
sing the quartz on rotation of stage between crossed nicols
give ample evidence of stress to which the rock has been sub-
jected.

OLIVINE GABBRO.
Plate xvii., fig. 1.

Locality.—Mount Davies, Tomkinson Ranges.

Macroscopically.—Dark green, coarse-grained, heavy
rock, apparently composed essentially of a pyroxene. Frac-
ture very rough.

Microscopically.—Texture hypidiomorphic to allotrio-
morphic granular, of medium-sized grain; composed princi-
pally of diallage, olivine, and plagioclase. The diallage
varies in colour from very faint green to colourless, and shows
the basal striation to perfection. Well-defined, irregular
cross-partings are prominent. Alteration to serpentine is
seen in different stages of progress.

Olivine greenish to colourless, darkened by sranular iron
ores by decomposition. Crystal boundary rounded, and the
cleavage (010) is distinct in a few examples. The crystals of
olivine are altered to serpentine, sometimes completely, with
deposition of a ferruginous “dust.”

The plagioclase (labradorite) is scanty, and occurs chiefly
in aggregates. The albite twin lamelle frequently “wedge
out.” Undulatory extinction, produced by pressure, com-
mon. The scarcity of this mineral gives a decided basic char-
acter.

Ores of chromium were not observed in the rocks ex-
amined, although the Murru Yilyah outcrop, adjoining the
gabbro, contains a secondary siliceous infiltration which is
stained by chromium.

DIORITE.
Plate xvii., fig. 3.

Locality.—Indulkana.

Macroscopically—Heavy, compact, dark-coloured, finely
crystalline rock, coated on the surface with a rusty brown
product of weathering.

Microscopically.—Fine-textured, holocrystalline rock. In
the sections examined quartz is absent.

A slight amount of orthoclase occurs as irregularly
bounded individuals, often squeezed in between idiomorphic
crystals of plagioclase. The plagioclase felspar is twinned
according to the Albite and Karlsbad laws, the former being
often accompanied by Pericline. From determinations on
sections from the zone at right angles to (010) the felspar
appears a slightly basic Andesine. Zoning comparatively
scarce. The felspar is clouded (more so along the central por-
tions) by kaolin and possibly calcite.

Hornblende light brown, enlarged in certain directions
by an outgrowth of secondary, often fibrous, green mineral

(hornblende) ; crystals not infrequently twinned, decompos-
ing with a large deposition of red oxide of iron. Mica scarce
as well-defined flakes of strongly pleochroic brown biotite.

Magnetite plentiful, arranged in groups, the individual
constituents of which have a strong tendency to parallel ar-
rangement, as though conforming with some _ pre-existent
crystal constant. Hornblende has, no doubt, yielded to its
formation.

The absence of quartz, feeble development of orthoclase,
and the brown tint of the hornblende indicate a basic type of
diorite.

DOLERITE.

Locality.—Mount Olga.

Macroscopically.—Slate-coloured, uniformly crystalline
rock of fine grain. The minute needles of felspar are dimly
recognisable, and here and there larger secretions of a green
mineral are apparent (olivine). The rock decomposes to a
richly coloured ochreous powder.

Microscopically.—Holocrystalline; of fine texture. The
lath-shaped felspars, on an average about ‘2 mm. in length,
are clouded; on that account they exhibit twin lamination
and cleavage cracks very imperfectly, and are variously tinted
in polarised light. The arrangement of the laths produces a
poor fluxion structure.

The augite in the sections examined has been almost com-
pletely altered to a scaly, green, chloritic mineral, possessing
a very faint double refraction.

Between the felspars a subsequent crystalline segregation
has taken place radially to small granules of magnetite. These
aggregates show the characteristic black cross under crossed
nicols, having its arms parallel to the cross wires of the micro-
scope.

solace as greenish, irregularly bounded individuals.

Magnetite is distributed generally through the mass as
small granules and cubes; or it darkens the constituent mine-
rals in the form of a very fine dust.

A secondary serpentinous, fibrous mineral present is pro-
bably another product of the decomposition of the augite.

ORDOVICIAN QUARTZITE.

Locality.— Mount Chandler.

Macroscopically.—A highly compact, fine-grained, white,
siliceous quartzite, breaking with a splintery fracture.

Microscopically.—Consists of closely set, rolled grains of
clear quartz, so compacted by pressure as to have left but
little space for interstitial cement, which is also of silica. The
interstices are slightly stained by iron salts. The average

100

dimensions of the quartz grains of this particular specimen
are ‘5 mm., although elsewhere the rock passes into a coarse
grit and conglomerate. The quartz is either perfectly clear
or encloses interpositions, either central, scattered, or arrang-
ed in bands. They are mainly unindividualised. Undulose
extinction is apparent under crossed nicols.

Felspar is very subordinate, or practically absent.

The orginal planes of bedding are indistinctly discernible
by a general tendency of the longer axes of the separate
grains to arrange themselves in parallel lines. |

No trace of any organism has been preserved in the sec-
tions observed, but a similar rock at Mount Watt is highly
fossiliferous.

MetamorpHic Grit (Ordovician).

Locality.—Ayers Rock, Northern Territory.

Macroscopically.—A dark, metamorphic grit,* which on
casual observation may be, and has been, mistaken for an
eruptive rock, the large felspars showing up conspicuously
from the mass with their surfaces of cleavage. The quartz
grains are clearly recognised as derivative (“clastic”). A
black mica, ores of iron, and other foreign minerals are
among the grains. The rock may be termed a greywacke
(Grauwacke) or arkose. The aggregation of waterworn
grains of quartz and felspar (one single grain of the rock,
moreover, often consisting partly of quartz and partly of fel-
spar, stil] in juxtaposition as orginally in an igneous rock)
suggests the disintegration of granite.

Microscopically.—The rocky is compact and composed es-
sentially of quartz and felspar (allothigenous), with addi-
tional fragments and flakes of ores of iron and mica (authi-
genous ).

The quartz cccurs as more or less irregularly rounded and
rolled grains, containing numerous gaseous inclusions in bands
and streaks, or scattered. Some of the grains, moreover, ex-
hibit a microscopic intergrowth between quartz and felspar.

The felspar is of several species. A typical microcline pre-
dominates, and is often traversed by narrow parallel streaks
of strongly doubly refracting altered mineral (kaolin). Micro-
graphic intergrowths of this felspar, with quartz, appear to
be prominent, although the effect is masked. “Strain sha-
dows” under crossed nicols.

* “The rock is a very indurated, and, to some extent, altered,
arkose sandstone, decidedly gritty in parts.’’—Tate and Watt:
Rep. Horn Exped. Centr. Austr., Phys. Geog.. page 8.

+ A description of a similar rock, by Messrs. Smeeth and

Watt, has appeared inthereport of the Horn Expedition, Petro-
logy. ‘‘Arkose”; No. 218, page 83.

101

Orthoclase is clouded and strongly illuminated under
crossed nicols as a result of its alteration.

Plagioclase is subordinately represented, the fragments
being comparatively small. A dark mica (biotite), in aggre-
gates of curved flakes, is plentiful. It is very probably secon-
dary,* and occurs interstitially. Its decomposition has pro-
duced hematite. Few tiny flakes, apparently white mica, are
also present.

Ores of iron are plentiful. Jlmenite occurs as asymmetri-
cal masses, opaque, and (by incident light) shows the imper-
fect system of striation and characteristic brownish tinge. More-
over, this form is replaced in parts by a semi-transparent
variety, “with a clove-brown colour,”+ suggestive of mica-
ceous titanic iron. Magnetite is also represented as irregular
patches.

With regard to the constituents of this rock being essen-
tially of grains of quartz, orthoclase, and microcline, it is
interesting to note that Dr. C. Chewings has described{ a
granite from Mount Olga (a sister outcrop to Ayers Rock),
which is composed almost essentially of quartz, orthoclase, and
microcline. The constituent grains of the rock from Ayers
Rock, therefore, have in all probability been derived from the
same granite as the specimen from Mount Olga. Mount
Olga consists for the most part of a metamorphic conglomerate.

EXPLANATIONS OF Bh eee

Prats XIII.
F)fi, 1.—Mount Conner:an outlier of Ordovician quartzite, sur-
rounded by saltbush flats,
Fie. 2.—Molian erosion; mushroom-shaped outcrops of gneiss in
the desert north-west of the Mann Ranges.

Pratt XIV.
Fie. 1.—Intrusion of porphyritic granite within hornblendic
garnetiferous schist, south of Mount Cockburn, Mann
Ranges.

Fie. 2.—Ordovician quartzite, shattered by insolation, Mount
Conner.

* Compare Tate and Watt: op. cit., page 8—‘‘Although once
a sedimentary rock, it has been to some extent altered by meta-
morphic agencies, a small amount of mica, perhaps of secondary
origin, having been formed.’’

+ Rosenbusch: Microsc. Phys. of Rockmaking Minerals (Idd-
ings), 1900, page 167

t Chas. Chewings: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Geologie Siid-
und Central Australiens, Heidelberg, 1894—‘‘Ein Granit von

Mount Olga (Central-Australien) besteht fast ganz aus Quarz,
Orthoklas, und Mikroklin.”’

F 14.

Fic.

Fig.
Fie.

102

PuateE XV.

1.-—Range of desert sandstone at Yarrabollinna Waterhole.
The bluff consists of excessively fine-grained arena-
ceous material, with nodules of chert and barytes.

2.—Krupp Hill; a table-hill of desert sandstone unconform-
ably overlying primary schists.

Pruate XVI.

1.—Table-hills of the desert sandstone formation east of
Indulkana.

2.—Talus blocks of gneiss in Garnet Glen, south of Mount
Edwin, Mann Ranges. This rock is described in the
text on page 95.

Pratt XVII.

. 1.—Olivine gabbro, Mount Davies, Tomkinson Ranges. |
. 2.—Garnetiferous gneiss, north of Mount Davies, Tomkinson

Ranges.

. 3.—Diorite, Indulkana.
. 4.—Epidote rock, Titania Spring, Musgrave Ranges.

Pirate XVIII.

. 1,—Gneiss, Indulkana, west of Krupp Hill.
. 2.—Hornblendic granite, Glen Ferdinand, Musgrave Ranges.
. 3.—Hypersthene-bearing granulite, north of Mount Davies,

Tomkinson Ranges.

. 4.—Altered augite granite, south of Giles’ West Camp, Mus-

grave Ranges,
Puate XIX.

Sketch section across the Mann Ranges, extending south from

Mount Cockburn. Distance, about 2} miles.
PLATE XX,

Geological sketch map of the Ayers Ranges.

103

NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA.
NiO i22:

By Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S. (Lond.), ete.
[Read April 4, 1905.]
PYRALIDINA.
GALLERIANZ.

MELISSOBLAPTES DISEMA, NR. Sp.

Female, 18 mm. Head, face, and antennz dark fus-
cous, head sprinkled with whitish. Thorax whitish-grey,
patagia fuscous. Abdomen and middle legs fuscous, tibie
and tarsi ringed with whitish, posterior pair suffusedly whit-
ish. Abdomen dark fuscous. Forewings elongate, moderate,
costa nearly straight, arched towards apex, greyish-white,
minutely and irregularly irrorated wth black scales; mark-
ings blackish ; a narrow line along costal edge, from base to
first line; a nearly straight, waved, narrow line from costa
beyond one-third to dorsum at one-third; a similar line,
gently curved throughout, from costa at three-quarters to dor-
sum, before anal angle; a row of spots along termen and
apical fourth of costa; cilia blackish, with a median line of
black scales. Hindwings somewhat transparent; pale grey-
ish-fuscous, paler on basal half; cilia greyish.

Birchip, Victoria. One specimen; received from Mr. D.
Goudie.

CRAMBIN 4A.
TALIS CYCLOSEMA, Low.
(Talis cyclosema, Low. Tr.R.S.8.A., p. 158, 1896;
T. diacentra, Meyr. Tr.H.S., Lond., p. 379, 1897.)

I have received this species from Balaklava, South Aus-
tralia, and Birchip (D. Goudie), Victoria.

SURATTHA HEDYSCOPA, Nl. sp.

Male, female, 18, 24 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax
ochreous-brown, palpi short. Abdomen ochreous-grey. An-
tenne strongly bipectinated throughout. Legs white, tibie
and tarsi infuscated above, tarsi banded with white; thorax
and abdomen white beneath. Forewings elongate, moderate,
costa gently arched, termen obliquely rounded; vein 6 ab-
sent, coincident with 7; 4 and 5 stalked; 8 and 9 stalked;
ochreous, somewhat irrorated with ferruginous and fuscous ;
a thick, rather indistinct, irregular, fuscous fascia, from costa
at one-fifth to dorsum at one-quarter, more prominent on
lower half ; between this and base the ground colour is mixed

104

with whitish ; a rather obscure, strongly waved, oblique, fus-
cous fascia, from before middle of costa to middle of dor-
sum; a very broad fuscous band, mixed with bluish-white
scales, and containing a small, clear, white spot, somewhat
triangular in shape, near its anterior edge above middle;
anterior edge somewhat waved, from beyond middle of
costa to beyond middle of dorsum; posterior edge dentate,
from five-sixths costa to five-sixths dorsum, projecting some-
what below costa; a fine dentate fuscous line along termen;
cilia whitish, mixed with some blackish scales. Hindwings,
with vein 5 present, fuscous grey, paler and becoming grey on
basal half; cilia white, with a fuscous sub-basal line.

Somewhat allied to termia, Meyr., but apart from the
very much shorter palpi and the neural characters it differs
in markings; it would be possible to form a new genus to
receive it. One specimen has vein 5 absent in hindwings, in
the remainder, four in number, it is present; but the whole
of the specimens before me have vein 6 of the forewings ab-
sent. The peculiarity with reference to the absence or pres-
ence of vein 5 of hindwings is also noticeable in bathrotricha,
Low., vein 6, however, in the forewings of that species is pre-
sent.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. Five specimens; in
February, at light. These were all taken at the same time
and place, but I have never since met with the species, al-
though continually collecting in the same locality.

PLATYTES POLIOPEPLA, N. sp.

Female, 16 mm. MHead, palpi, thorax, and antenne
dark fuscous, palpi very long, darker beneath, abdomen
broken, legs dark fuscous. Forewings elongate, moderate,

costa hardly arched, termen oblique, hardly rounded; fus-
cous, mixed with dark fuscous; some scattered, short, black
streaks and spots in disc; a small, clear white spot at two-
thirds from base in middle, more or less surrounded by black-
ish; an obscure row of black scales along termen; cilia fus-
cous. Hindwings light fuscous; cilia greyish-fuscous.

An obscure species, but may be known by the long palpi
and white spot of forewings.
F Te Pa: Victoria. One specimen; probably taken in

pril.
PHYCITIN &.
EUZOPHERODES POLIOCRANA, N. sp.

Female, 18 mm. Head, thorax, and antenne ashy-grey-
whitish, palpi dark fuscous, mixed with whitish beneath.
Abdomen dark fuscous, whitish beneath. Legs fuscous,
strongly suffused with white. Forewings elongate, rather

105

narrow ; ashy-grey-whitish, mixed with dark fuscous and
blackish ; whole of cell filled in with blackish and with a black
bar at posterior extrerity ; a strongly waved, fine, black line
from costa towards dorsum at _ three-quarters, but
not quite reaching it; a row of short, elongate fuscous along
termen, more or less preceded by black inter-neural streaks ;
cilia fuscous, with two darker fuscous lines. Hindwings semi-
transparent ; pale greyish, mixed with fuscous around mar-
gins; cilia grey, with a fuscous basal line.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. Two specimens; in
March. :

METALLOSTICHA METALLICA, Nl. Sp.

Female, 10 mm. Head and antenne ochreous-fuscous.
Palpi and thorax purplish-fuscous, thorax shining metallic.
Abdomen greyish-fuscous. Legs dark purplish-fuscous, pos-
‘terior pair greyish. Forewings elongate, moderate, termen
gently rounded; shining metallic-purplish fuscous; cilia
purplish-fuscous. Hindwings greyish-fuscous, paler towards
base ; cilia greyish-fuscous, with a darker fuscous line at base.

Mackay and Townsville (Dodd), Queensland. Two speci-
mens; in December.

HyPHANTIDIUM HYPOSCOPA, N. Sp.

Female, 10 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, antenne, and
abdomen dark fuscous. Legs dark fuscous, posterior pair
yellow. Forewings elongate, moderately dilated posteriorly,
termen oblique; dark fuscous, crossed by several irreguiar,
waved, spot-like, blackish strigule; a broad, slightly curved,
dull whitish fascia, from three-quarters costa to anal angle,
clearest on upper half; indications of the blackish strigule
crossing the fascia, but more pronounced on costa, where they
form three or four cuneiform spots; ground colour beyond this
fuscous, with several black spots irregularly placed, cilia dark
fuscous. Hindwings orange, slightly tinged with fuscous
around apex; cilia dull orange, becoming fuscous towards
apex, and with an obscure, fuscous sub-basal line through-
out.

At once recognised by the orange hindwings.

Melbourne, Victoria. One specimen ; in October.

NEPHOPTERYX HABROSTOLA, Nl. Sp.

Male, 18 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and antenn:e ferru-
ginous red, face slightly white. | Legs deep ferruginous red,
strongly mixed with fuscous, tibie and tarsi more or less
banded with whitish. Abdomen blackish, reddish beneath
anteriorly. Forewings elongate, moderate, costa gently
arched, termeu nearly straight; deep reddish, somewhat

106

purplish and slightly shining; a narrow, oblique, white
fascia, from costa at one-quarter to dorsum at one-quarter,
more or less edged on either side with deep reddish; a dark
reddish waved line from costa at about two-thirds to just
above dorsum at three-quarters, with a somewhat lunate
white mark on anterior edge of lower extremity; an obscure
narrow white sub-terminal line from five-sixths costa to four-
fifths dorsum, attenuated on upper half; a row of elongate,
dull whitish spots along termen; cilia reddish-ferruginous.
Hindwings dark fuscous, paler on basal half: cilia greyisn,
with a fuscous, sub-basal line.

Townsville (Dodd) and Mackay, Queensland. For
specimens; in June.

CRYPTOBLABES CENTROLEUCA, Ni. Sp.

Male, 12 mm. Head, palpi, antenne, and thorax dark
reddish-fuscous, collar whitish. Abdomen greyish. Legs
fuscous, strongly irrorated with whitish. Forewings elon-
gate, rather narrow, reddish-fuscous, purplish tinged; a
moderate, oblique, white fascia from costa at one-third to
beyond one-third of dorsum, edged posteriorly by twice its
own width of deeper ground colour; a somewhat waved,
oblique, whitish line from costa at five-sixths to dorsum at
four-fifths ; space between this and first fascia finely irrorated
with white, and with an obscure fuscous dot in middle, nearer
to posterior fascia ; a fine, obscure whitish line before termen ;
a waved fuscous line along termen; cilia reddish-purple
mixed with whitish. Hindwings greyish, slightly fuscous-
tinged ; cilia greyish, with a fuscous line.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen; in No-
vember.

EPHESTIOPSIS POLIELLA, N. Sp.

Male, 14 mm. Head and thorax ashy-grey-whitish.
Antenne and palpi fuscous, palpi beneath mixed with whit-
ish. Abdomen silvery-grey. Legs suffusedly white, tarsi
banded with fuscous. Forewings elongate, rather narrow ;
ashy-grey-whitish, costal half broadly suffused with white; a
rather obscure, oblique, fuscous fascia, from beneath one-
third of costa to just beyond one-third dorsum, but not
reaching it; an obscure, waved, fine, fuscous line from five-
sixths costa to just before anal angle, followed by a narrow,
parallel reddish shade, not entire; a fine, interrupted black
line along termen ; cilia greyish, with a fuscous, sub-terminal
line Huindwings greyish, slightly infuscated along termen ;
cilia greyish, with a fine, fuscous, sub-basal line.

Townsville, Queensland. One specimen; received from
Mr. F. P. Dodd. I have also seen specimens from Cooktown,
Queensland. Taken in December.

107

HYDROCAMPIN “2.
CLUPEOSOMA RHODEA, Ni. sp.

Female, 18 mm. Head, palpi, antenne, thorax, and
abdomen reddish-carmine, somewhat coppery-tinged, basal
half of palpi beneath snow-white. Middle and posterior legs
ochreous, middle tibiz and tarsi fuscous, banded with white.
Abdomen beneath ochreous. Forewings elongate-triangu-
lar, termen oblique, hardly rounded ; reddish-carmine, tinged
with coppery metallic scales, especially along costa; markings
deep reddish-fuscous ; a waved, somewhat dentate, lne from
two-thirds of costa to two-thirds dorsum; an oblique, fine,
waved line from costa at four-fifths to dorsum, before anal
angle, with a strong sinuation outwards in middle; a discal
dot above middle, midway between first and second lines ; ter-
men suffused with pale fuscous-purple, thicker on upper half ;
cilia orange-yellow, basal half light reddish-carmine. Huind-
wings pale yellow, suffused with reddish-carmine on terminal
third, except along dorsum;; first line and discal dot absent ;
second line nearly straight, reddish-carmine, from beneath
costa at about four-fifths to three-quarters across wing; a suf-
fused, moderate, reddish-carmine line along termen; ground
colour between the two lines suffused with light reddish-car-
mine; cilia as in forewings.

Mackay, Queensland. One specimen; in December.

SCOPARIAN A.
SCOPARIA PLATYMERA, ND. Sp.

Male, 20 mm. Head, palpi, antenne, thorax, and ab-
domen fuscous, palpi and thorax beneath white. Abdomen
more or less ringed with silvery white, especially beneath.
Legs fuscous, strongly infuscated with white, middle tibiz
and tarsi banded with white. Forewings elongate, moderate,
termen obliquely rounded; whitish, with fuscous markings ;
a basal patch, outer edge waved from one-sixth costa to one-
sixth dorsum ; a very broad fascia occupying median third of
wing, constricted on lower third, edges waved, anterior from
about two-fifths of costa to one-third dorsum, posterior edge
from three-quarters costa to two-thirds dorsum, with a some-
what rounded projection about middle; a fuscous discal dot
in fascia near posterior edge above middle; an irregular band
along termen, narrowed on lower half, with a projection
above middle; a row of blackish elongate streaks along ter-
men ; cilia grey-whitish, barred with fuscous. Hindwings pale
greyish, thinly scaled, tinged with fuscous along termen on
upper half. Closely allied to ewmeles, Meyr., but differently
coloured. |

Hobart, Tasmania. One specimen.

108

TINEINA.
(COPHORID.
PLEUROTA XIPHOCHRYSA, N. sp.

Male, 14 mm. Head ochreous. (Palpi broken.) Thorax
and abdomen dark fuscous. Antenne fuscous. Legs dark
fuscous, posterior pair obscurely banded with ochreous. Fore-
wings elongate, moderate, costa gently arched, termen
obliquely rounded; pale yellow, darker along costa, more or
less mixed with fuscous; an obscure fuscous sub-costal streak
near base; a moderately thick, well-defined, blackish streak
along dorsum, edged above throughout by a streak of brighter
orange-yellow, from base to anal angle; faint indications of
a narrow streak, near and parallel to termen; cilia fuscous.
Hindwings and cilia dark fuscous.

Perhaps nearest callizona, Meyr., but amongst the yel-
low-winged species it is easily separated by the dark fuscous
cilia of both wings.

Stawell, Victoria. One specimen; (? in October).

PLEUROTA PERISEMA, Nl. Sp.

Female, 14 mm. Head and palpi ochreous-yellow, second
joint of palpi externally fuscous, terminal joint fuscous.
Thorax light fuscous. Abdomen greyish-fuscous, segmental
margins whitish. Legs greyish, anterior pair slightly infus-
cated. Forewings elongate, moderate, costa gently arched,
termen obliquely rounded; pale yellow; a moderately thick,
fuscous streak along dorsum, from base to near anal angle,
alternated towards base, but gradually becoming dilated pos-
teriorly, and with a projecting tooth on upper edge at about
three-fifths ; an inwardly oblique ferruginous fascia from just
beneath costa at about two-thirds to termen immediately
above anal angle, leaving a space of ground at anal
angle; space between the ferruginous fascia and
termen more or less wholly irrorated with pale ferruginous,
except beneath costa; cilia yellowish (imperfect).

Distinct, by the outwardly oblique ferruginous fascia; in
most of the other described species the markings are inwardly
oblique.

Tasmania (? Hobart). One specimen; in January.

BoRKHAUSENIA ZOPHOSEMA, Ni. Sp.

Male, 18 mm. Head, palpi, antenne, and thorax fus-
cous, palpi mixed with grey-whitish beneath, except at base ;
antennal ciliations, 1, with strong pecten. Abdomen fus-
cous. Legs greyish, banded with fuscous, posterior pair
greyish, mixed with blackish. Forewings elongate, moderate,

109

costa gently arched, termen obliquely rounded, 2 and 3
stalked, from just before angle; 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to costa;
dark fuscous, with blackish markings; a moderate, well-de-
fined, rather suffused spot at base, reaching dorsum; a suf-
fused spot in middle at one-fifth from base; a second, just
below, joining first; a spot in middle of cell, and one or two
others at end of cell; an obscure curved series of small dots
from beneath costa at three-quarters to dorsum before anal
angle; cilia dark fuscous, mixed with some black scales.
Hindwings with 3 and 4 from a point, 5 widely remote from
4 at base; pale fuscous, paler at base; cilia grey, with a fus-
cous sub-basal line.

Could easily be mistaken for Hulechria photinopis, Low.,
to which it has considerable superficial resemblance, but the-
neural characters are very reliable points of distinction.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen; in
August.

MACROBATHRA GASTROLEUCA, N. Sp.

Female, 14 mm. fHead, palpi, and thorax greyish, ter-
minal joint of palpi fuscous. Antenne white, strongly annu-
lated with fuscous. Abdomen dark fuscous, sharply white
beneath. Legs whitish, anterior and middle pair mixed with
fuscous. Forewings elongate, moderate, lanceolate; white,
dorsal half greyish-tinged ; termen more or less thickly strewn
with ferruginous scales, more pronounced at apex and anal
angle, where they become suffused into dorsal colour; cilia
greyish-fuscous. Hindwings fuscous; cilia greyish, becoming
ochreous on costa and upper half of termen.

This species departs from the general colouring and
markings of the group previously described, and is easily
determined by the white ground colour and ferruginous scales
along termen.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen; in No-
vember.

PARATHETA CYCLOZONA, N. sp.

Male, 14 mm. Head ochreous-white. Thorax whitish,
anteriorly fuscous. Palpi and antennz fuscous, second joint
of palpi with a fuscous apical ring. Abdomen and legs
greyish, tarsi obscurely banded with fuscous. Forewings
elongate, moderate, costa gently arched, termen strongly
oblique; white, very minutely irrorated with fuscous around
the margins; the irroration tends to accumulate more densely
along costa from base to two-thirds, and forms a mote or less
developed costal streak; a well-defined, moderate, slightly
outwardly curved dark fuscous transverse fascia, from about
two-thirds of costa to two-thirds dorsum, but not reaching it ;

110

a small fuscous dot on fold, above anal angle, and another
obscure, at end of cell; cilia ashy-grey-whitish. Hindwings
light fuscous ; cilia fuscous, at base greyish.

At once known by the curved fuscous fascia.

Duaringa, Queensland. One specimen; in January.

XYLORYCTIDA.
CRYPTOPHAGA AGLAODES, Low.
(Tr RSS ALA pe La e937)

Male, 38 mm. _ I have received from Mr. S. Angel the
male of this species. In colour and markings it does not
differ from the female; the antennal pectinations are about
14; this is a similar character to that observed in sarcinota,
“Meyr. (to which this species is mostly allied), but is easily
separated from that species by the totally different colouring,
shorter terminal joint of palpi, and absence of double black
dot on forewing, which is conspicuous in sarcinota.

The male was taken by Mr. Field at Tennant’s Creek,
Central South Australia, and the female (type) at Arthurton,
Yorke’s Peninsula, South Australia.

CRYPTOPHAGA BLACKBURNII, Low.

(Tr.R.8.8.A., p. 15, 1892; Xylorycta neomorpha, Turn, Ann.
Queens. Mus., p. 13, 1897.)

I have recently taken the male of this species at Broken
Hill, which is precisely in accordance with Dr. Turner’s
description of neomorpha. ~The type (female) was taken at Port
Lincoln, South Australia.

HYPERTRICHA STENADELPHA, Ni. Sp.

Female, 20 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax cinerous grey-
whitish, second joint of palpi fuscous at apex, terminal joint
nearly half of second, acute. Antennz fuscous, obscurely
annulated with white. Abdomen dull silvery-grey, segmentai
margins dull reddish. Legs cinerous-grey-whitish, anterior
coxe whitish, posterior legs greyish. Forewings elongate,
moderate, costa gently arched, termen strongly oblique; 7 and
8 coincident ; cinerous-grey-whitish ; a streak of white along
fold from base to end of cell, containing an oblique fuscous
patch in middle, and two or three fuscous dots on upper
half at and near extremity; cilia cinerous-grey-whitish,
terminal half grey-whitish; hindwings pale grey-whitish,
somewhat fuscous tinged around apex; cilia grey, with a fus-
cous basal line.

Bears a striking resemblance to Procometis tetraspora
Low., but the resemblance is superficial only ; the neuration of
the forewings is a specific distinction. Although the termi-

Lig

nal joint of palpi is somewhat longer than the characters of
Hypertricha, that is, one-quarter of second, I scarcely cou-
sider it necessary to erect a new genus for its reception, but
should the male show additional characters there may be some
justification for doing so.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen; in
March.

ELACHISTID.

CoLeopHuora, Hb.

Antenne four-fifths, porrected in repose, often thickened
with scales towards base, in male simple, basal joint long,
usually with rough scales or projecting tuft. Labial palpi,
long, recurved, second joint more or less roughened or tufted
towards apex beneath, terminal shorter, acute. Posterior
tibie rough-haired. Forewings with costa often long-haired
beneath; 1b furcate, 4 sometimes, 5 absent, 6 and 7 con-
nate or stalked, 7 to costa, 8 absent. Hindwings two-thirds,
linear-lanceolate; cilia 3-4 transverse veins sometimes partly
absent, 4 usually absent, 6 and 7 closely approximated or
stalked.

CoLEOPHORA OCHRONEURA, Low.

(Plutella ochroneura, Low., Tr.R.8.8.A., p. 59, 1897.)
Semaphore, South Australia.

COLEOPHORA PUDICA, Ni. sp.

Male, 16, 18 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, antenne, legs,
and abdomen snow-white; base of palpi, antennz, and thorax
beneath faintly ochreous-tinged. Forewings elongate-lanceo-
late ; snow-white, veins very faintly outlined with pale fus-
cous, not perceptible in some species; cilia white. Hindwings
and cilia snow-white.

Differs from ochroneura by its smaller size, white ground
colour, and absence of ochreous streaks. This genus has not
been previously recorded from Australia, but is numerously
represented in Europe, Asia, and North America. Mr. Mey-
rick, to whom specimens were submitted, mentions that the
different species are very difficult to distinguish unless the
larval habits are known; the larve when very young are leaf
miners, but afterwards inhabit a portable case; attaching this
to the leaf or seed vessel on which it feeds, it bores into the
interior ; in leaves a pale blotch is usually produced, with a
round hole in one membrane, which distinguishes the mines
of this genus from all others. I know nothing of the larval
ae of either of the above species; they were taken at
ight.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. Nine specimens; in
April.

112
PLUTELLID.

GLYPHIPTERYX CALLISCOPA, 0. Sp.

Male, 12 mm. Head and thorax brownish-fuscous.
Palpi, antenne, and abdomen fuscous, palpi ringed with
white. Abdomen beneath ochreous-white. Legs fuscous,
ringed with white. Forewings elongate, moderate, costa
gently arched, termen rounded, sinuate beneath apex ; brown-
ish-ochreous, with greenish-metallic markings; a moderate,
oblique fascia from one-third costa to before middle of dor-
sum, and other similar fascie between this and two-thirds, all
more or less interrupted, first reaching to fold, broken in
middle, blackish posteriorly; second reaching half across
wing, becoming black at extremity, and there almost meeting
first; third curved outwards, reaching dorsum, more or less
broken in middle; a similar fascia starting from an ochreous
spot on costa at three-quarters to anal angle; below this and
previous fascia are about six strongly defined black longitudi-
nal streaks, the middle one smallest ; a similar fascia starting
from an ochreous spot and ending on sinuation on termen;
cilia ochreous-white, at apex fuscous, with a blackish basal
line throughout. Hindwings and cilia dark fuscous.

Melbourne, Victoria. One specimen ; in November.

GLYPHIPTERYX PERIMETALLA, N. sp.

Female, 12 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-fuscous.
Antenne and palpi fuscous. Legs cchreous, posterior pair
grey. Abdomen grey-whitish. Forewings elongate, mode-
rate, costa gently arched, termen rounded; ochreous, with
golden-metallic markings, very slightly edged with fuscous; a
narrow, somewhat cuneiform sub-costal streak, frm base to
one-third, narrowed towards base: a second similar streak
along fold, terminating below first costal streak ; three some-
what oblique nearly equi-distant moderate costal streaks ; first
from costa beyond one-third to just above fold; second from
middle of costa to middle of dorsum; third from about two-
thirds costa to anal angle: a narrow streak from apex, con-
tinued along termen, but not reaching anal angle; a short
streak on costa, between third and last mentioned streak, all
streaks more or less ochreous, whitish on costa; cilia ochreous,
terminal half greyish, with a fuscous median line. Hind-
wings and cilia whitish-grey.

Somewhat allied to eyanochalca, Meyr., but differs from
that and the allied species by the absence of any black mark-
ings.

Stawell, Victoria. One specimen ; in November.

113

PHRYGANOSTOLA MACRANTHA, 0. Sp.

Male, 11 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, antenne, abdomen,
and legs dark fuscous, face white, palpi tufted, mixed with
whitish beneath. Legs ringed with whitish. Forewings
elongate, moderate, costa gently arched, apex somewhat
pointed, termen very oblique; dark fuscous, with ochreous-
whitish and metallic markings, more or less blackish mar-
gined ; a well-marked streak along fold from base to just be-
fore anal angle; six outwardly oblique fascia, becoming
metallic below costa; first, from before costa at one-third,
reaching one-third across wing; second, from costa at two-
fifths, reaching nearly half across wing; third from before
two-thirds to just beyond termination of dorsal streak, with
an extra metallic dot below extremity: a small sub-costal dot
just beyond; fourth, from three-quarters costa reaching more
than half across wing ; fifth and sixth short, close together and
similar, on costa at five-sixths; an interrupted metallic streak
along termen ; a round black dot at apex, containing a metallic
spot on lower edge; cilia whitish, basal half blackish, and
with an elongate black apical tooth. Hindwings and cilia
dark fuscous.

Gisborne, Victoria. One specimen; in October.

SIMAETHIS HYPOCALLA, N. sp.

Female, 10 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, antenne, legs, and
abdomen fuscous, palpi ringed with white, antenne ringed
with whitish, and whitish beneath, abdomen whitish beneath,
coxe whitish, tibie and tarsi ringed with whit-
eish. Forewings rather broad, costa gently arched,
termen rounded; dark fuscous, minutely irrorated
obscurely with whitish, which forms about five transverse,
fascia-like series; four large black spots along termen, lower
two larger and occupying lower two-thirds, each with a pur-
plish-metallic spot in middle; cilia fuscous, basal third
darker. Hindwings dark fuscous; a large dull whitish black-
centred spot in cell; a narrow, transverse, dull whitish line
from five-sixths costa to anal angle: a narrow, bright violet-
metallic line just below ; cilia dark fuscous, basal half darker.
terminal half white, irregularly chequered with fuscous.

Recalls Choreutis in appearance, but the palpi being
without a tuft I prefer to place it in Simaethis. Probably the
male may show some additional characters sufficient to war-
rant forming a new genus for its reception. The violet-
metallic line of hindwings is a special character.

Mareeba, Queensland. One specimen;in April. I have
seen a specimen from New Guinea.

114
TINEID A.

CoMoDICA DECASPILA, N. Sp.

Male, female, 12, 20 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax
snow-white, palpi blackish at base, externally and beneath,
thorax with a narrow blackish anterior band, antennz fus-
cous, basal joint white, fuscous beneath. Abdomen greyish.
Legs white, broadly banded with black, anterior pair wholly
blackish beneath. Forewings elongate, moderate, costa
gently arched, termen oblique: an elongate, transparent
patch near base ; snow-white, with black markings ; ten spots,
arranged as follows:—Four oblique, equi-distant, on costa,
first basal; four at five-sixths, reaching one-quarter across
wing ; four others, similar, on dorsum, apices pointed, first at
base; fourth at anal angle, the second one hardly traceable
and hardly reaching dorsum; two in middle of wing, ovoid,
before and beyond middle; indications of another on termen
beneath apex ; cilia white, becoming blackish at base on mark-
ings. Hindwings pale fuscous; cilia grey, becoming white
around apex.

Cooktown, Queensland. Two specimens; in December.

CoMODICA EPISPORA, N. Sp.

Female, 18 mm. Head and palpi whitish, faintly
ochreous tinged, palpi at base beneath dark fuscous. An-
tenne fuscous. Thorax dark ferruginous-ochreous, patagia
paler. Abdomen ochreous, banded with dark fuscous. Legs
ochreous, irregularly banded with fuscous. Forewings elon-
gate, moderate, costa gently arched, termen obliquely rounded ;
3 and 4 coincident, 7 and 8 coincident, to costa, lower fork cf£
vein 1 obsolete ; deep ferruginous-ochreous, with whitish mark-
ings; a rather broad, transverse fascia, from near base of costa
to base of dorsum, shghtly angulated below costa; a rathec
large spot on costa beyond middle, and a smaller one midway
between fascia and last mentioned spot; a large spot on
middle of dorsum; a small spot on dorsum before anal angle ;
a suffused spot below middle of termen ; cilia yellowish-orange,
basal half ferruginous-fuscous. Hindwings with veins 5 and
6 stalked, 6 to costa ; dark fuscous ; cilia yellowish-orange.

Mackay, Queensland. One specimen; taken on a fence
in December.

CoMODICA CITRINOPA, N. sp.

Male, female, 12, 14 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax
white, palpi mixed with ochreous and fuscous beneath, thorax
with a narrow orange anterior margin. Antenne fuscous.
Abdomen greyish, beneath ochreous. Legs ochreous, banded
above with fuscous. Forewings elongate, moderate, termen

115

obliquely rounded ; bright orange-ochreous ; markings whitish,
rather obscure; four equi-distant fuscous spots on costa be-
tween one-sixth and three-quarters; two oblique fascia from
one-quarter and middle, reaching two-thirds across wing, and
thence meeting a thick streak along dorsum from base to two-
thirds ; a moderate spot on costa before three-quarters ; an ob-
scure spot on costa near apex; cilia citron-yellow, mixed with
light ferruginous. Hindwings fuscous; cilia fuscous, around
apex and upper half of termen greyish-ochreous.

Mackay, Queensland. Two specimens; in November.
Mr. Dodd has sent me several specimens taken at Towns-
ville, Queensland.

This may prove to be a variety of the previous species,
but it presents such a different appearance as to justify me
in giving it a distinctive name.

TINEA TETRASPILA, 0. Sp.

Male, 8 mm. Head ochreous. Thorax, palpi, antenne,
abdomen, and legs dark fuscous. Forewings elongate, mode-
rate, costa gently arched, termen obliquely rounded; dark
fuscous, coppery tinged and somewhat shining; markings
ochreous-yellow ; a moderate quadrate spot on dorsum at one-
third; a second, similar, but smaller, on dorsum before anal
angle; a third, obscure, on costa at two-thirds; a fourth, ob-
scure and small, on costa near apex; cilia dark fuscous.
Hindwings elongate-lanceolate; fuscous, somewhat coppery
shining ; cilia fuscous.

Probably nearest tetropa, Meyr., but widely distinct.

Parkside, South Australia. Gisborne, Victoria. Three
specimens ; in October and November.

EREUNETIS STREPTOGRAMMA, Nn. Sp.

Female, 8 mm. Head, palpi, antenne, thorax, and legs
pale whitish-ochreous. Abdomen greyish-ochreous. Fore-
wings elongate, rather narrow, termen obliquely rounded ;
pale ochreous, with fuscous markings; six outwardly oblique
streaks from costa; first at base, spot-like; second at one-
sixth, larger ; third before middle, very oblique, hardly reach-
ing one-third across wing; fourth beyond middle, similar ;
fifth and sixth small, between five-sixths and apex ; last three
more or less connected by a thick, longitudinal streak, which
is continued to below apex; a moderately thick streak along
dorsum from base to three-quarters, wit’ about five projec-
tions on upper edge, third anteriorly oblique and nearly reach-
ing second costal spot ; a fine line along termen, not quite con-
nected with dorsal streak; cilia ochreous. Hindwings fus-
cous ; cilia fuscous.

Duaringa, Queensland. One specimen ; in December.

116

NOTES ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DECAPOD CRUSTACEA.
PART Il.

By W. H. Baker.
[Read May 2, 1905.]
PuatTes XXI. to XXIV.

The following paper is a study of a group of Maioid crabs
or Oxyrhyncha. The first four species and one variety belong
to the genus Halimus, found on our coast, two of which, H.
levis, Haswell, and //. trwncatipes, Miers, are important on
account of their usual large size and frequency of occurrence,
and which, as far as my knowledge goes, have never been
figured; one, //. twmidus, Dana, a figure of which is to be
found in another connection, in Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps
Akademiens Handlingar, Band 23, Plate u., fig. 6, a notable
variety of this species, which I have described in detail; and
another which is here described for the first time. The others
belong to different genera.

In Professor Haswell’s catalogue of Australian crustacea
the first three species are described; but there are several
points of difference which I would like to set forth which are
scarcely mentioned by the above authors.

The definition of the genus given by Miers in his classifi-
cation of Maoid. crustacea, Jnl. Lin. Soc. vol. xiv. p. 646,
runs thus: —‘“Carapace sub-triangular, with lateral marginal
spines. Three spines above the eye. Merus joint of the outer
maxiliipeds somewhat auriculated and produced at its antero-
external angle. Anterior legs in the male enlarged, palm
shghtly compressed. Ambulatory legs, with the penultimate
joint more or less flattened and dilated towards its distal end.
Type, Halimus auritus, Latreille. This genus establishes a
transition to the Maiide.”

In the species of this genus under consideration the
structure of the orbital region may first attract attention as
of importance, especially when compared with the corres-
ponding parts of some members of other genera of the family
Maiide, with which the relationship of Halimus is undoubt-
ed; to mention some genera, viz., Maia, Chlorinodes, Micip-
pa, Schizophrys, Paramithrax, and others, in which, while
the lower margin of the orbit is usually very incomplete,
being partially formed by the basal joint of the antenna, the
upper is divided into, first, a short, usually thickened arcu-
ate portion immediately above the socket of the eye peduncle,
and posteriorly to this usually two spines—or more or less
spiniform processes—the more posterior one of which is on a
slightly lower level. This I take to be the true post-ocular

117

spine, representing the posterior or outer angle of the orbit ;
the preceding one I have called the intermediate spine of the
upper orbital margin. In Paramithrax, Schizophrys, ete.,
these parts are well shown, but have become, as it were,
squeezed together to form a more complete orbit; but in the
species of //a/imus under consideration the spines are dis-
tant, the posterior portion of the orbit being a widely open
space.

Within the genus itself the arrangement of these parts
is useful for classification, the anterior arcuate portion being
spiniform, dentiform, tuberculate, or merely rounded at the
anterior or posterior end, and the two succeeding spines in
different degrees of development. and relationship.

If Chlorinodes coppingeri, Haswell, be examined, these
parts will be seen to be much exaggerated in shape.

Also, in the interocular space on each side, near the orbital
margin above, there is in these species of //alimus a tubercle
with a more or less distinct ridge extending from it on to the
rostral horn; these elevations are supplied plentifully with
the curled corneous bristles so much in evidence amongst
these crabs. In the same species of Chlorinodes mentioned
above this ridge is very distinct; it is also shown in Para-
mithrax and others.

Again, in the species of Halimus under consideration a
more or less papiliform tubercle is situated on the sub-
hepatic region: in H. truncatipes this is somewhat anvil-
shaped and very distinctive.

In the cardiac region of Halimus are usually seen a pair
of tubercles showing a tendency to coalesce, represented in
the species of Chiorinodes again by a lamellar, bifid struc-
ture which is very prominent.

Lastly, in these allied species, the chelipeds of the males
are subject to great variation as to size, their enlargement
apparently taking place well on in the life of the animal, as
in some specimens they scarcely exceed those of the female. I
would instance the case of Leptomithrar spinulosus, Haswell,
where certain males—doubtless adults, on account of size
and being covered by much of .the usual foreign matter—
have the chelipeds little if at all exceeding in size and shape
those of the female, while in others they are massive, with
the fingers very unsymmetrical. In Schizophrys aspera some-
what similar conditions obtain.

In these four species of Halimus the normal chelipeds
scarcely differ; in all, the hands become slightly narrower
distally in the vertical direction, and are more or less pro-
vided with scattered punctations, from which fasciculi of
hairs arise.

118

The following points, therefore, are common to the four
species: —The carapace is sub-pyriform, more or less acutely
pointed medianly on the posterior border, convex, usually
more depressed anteriorly than posteriorly ; the rostral horns
are well developed and divergent and usually curved out-
wards; the pusterior part of the orbit is widely open, the
upper margin consists of, first, an anterior portion forming
an arch over the socket of the eye-peduncle, spined or pro-
jecting each end; second, an intermediate spine more or less
distant from the posterior end; and third, a strong, post-ocu-
lar spine, usually pointing forwards, and distant from the
intermediate spine at a lower level.

The lateral spines of the carapace are, viz., one on the
hepatic region, and three on the branchial, the most posterior
of which approaches nearer the middle of the carapace.

The basal antennal joint has a strong spine at the exter-
nal distal angle, and usually a small one at the internal
angle. There is a small conical tubercle close to the base of
this joint, on the outer side, usually tipped with hairs.

The external maxillipeds have the ischium joint with its
internal distal angle very much produced above the trans-
verse line. The merus joint, inverted-triangular in shape, is
rounded and produced at its external distal angle partially
covering the end of the exopod, truncate, and the margin
insinuate at the internal angle; the ends of the margin thus
defined are acute or spined, the following joint originating
close to the outer (or upper) end of this margin.

Sub-hepatic and pterygostomial regions each with a more
or less conical tubercle.

Chelipeds usually rather weak in the females and in some
males, in others much enlarged, with the fingers widely gap-
ing, but not unsymmetrical. The merus has a spine at the dis-
tal end above. The carpus is strongly keeled in the males.

Ambulatory legs long, becoming successively shorter be-
hind, the joints mainly cylindrical, the ischium joints each
with a small conical tubercle below at the distal end, the
penultimate joints more or less expanded towards their distal
ends, the expansions usually becoming wider on the more pos-
terior legs. The dactyli curved, sharp, with two rows. of
small teeth.

Pleon seven-jointed in the males, the fourth, fifth, and
sixth coalesced in the females.

The species of this genus are, as in other Maioid genera,
well supplied with more or less curved corneous bristles
springing in groups usually from the tubercles, rostral horns,
etc., and also from the ambulatory legs. These are used for
the attachment of foreign substances for purposes of obscura-
tion.

119

The genus may be briefly characterised in the following
manner : - -
Family Matipa@.

Genus Halimus, Latrezlle.

Carapace sub-pyriform, more or less acutely pointed
medianly on the posterior border.

Rostral horns divergent, and sometimes depressed.

Orbits incomplete, especially below.

A large lateral spine on the hepatic region.

Three lateral spines on the branchial region.

The basal antennal joint with a spine on its external dis-
tal angle.

The external maxillipeds with the ischium joint much
produced at its internal distal angle, the merus joint rounded
and produced at its external distal angle, truncate at the in-
ternal angle.

Sub-hepatic and pterygostomial regions each with a more
or less conical tubercle.

Chelipeds usually weak in the females and some males;
in other males much enlarged.

Ambulatory legs long. the joints cylindrical, except the
propodi, which are more or less expanded towards their dis-
tal ends.

Pleon seven-jointed in the males.

Halimus laevis, Haswell. Pl. xxi., figs. 1, la.
(Pr. 8. N-S.W., Sensis. wolkouve 2l435.)

This species is very variable, especially as to size. The
chelipeds of the males are sometimes normal, sometimes mas-
sive.

The following characteristics, in addition to those given
by Professor Haswell, are tolerably constant in a moderate
series of examples noted.

The rostral horns project horizontally. The anterior
portion of the carapace is well depressed from the middle of
the gastric region forwards, and with a less curve behind. The
inter-ocular tubercles are large. There is one well-marked
but low tubercle on each epibranchial region, two more
faintly marked on the mid-branchial, obliquely placed. A
pair of transverse, separate tubercles on the cardiac region,
one median conical tubercle on the intestinal region, and
between this and the cardiac pair a faint indication of a pair
of transverse tubercles; these are more pronounced in some
specimens. The tubercles have a tendency in old speci-
mens to become worn away. The branchial regions are
marked off from the urogastric and cardiac by a row of pits

120

lying in the grooves which separate these regions. The pos-
terior margin is more or less pointed medianly, in some ex-
amples broad, thick, and polished, in others almost or quite
spiniform.

The supra-ocular border is anteriorly thrown into a pro-
minent acute spine; posteriorly there is a smaller one. The
intermediate spine is well developed, projecting nearly hori-
zontally, and further than the preceding one; it is situated
slightly nearer this than to the post-ocular. The post-ocular
sine is long, and is inclined in a forward direction. The he-
patic region has a spine about the same size. The three
lateral spines of the branchial region successively shorten.

The sub-hepatic tubercle is papilliform, as also is that of
the pterygostomial region.

The basal antennal joint has a broad, oblique sulcation,
extending from near the external distal angle. The external
distal spine is rather small, and is only slightly pressed up-
ward. The remainder of the peduncle 1s not covered by the
rostral horn.

The normal chelipeds have the fingers rather long, ap-
proximating nearly their whole length, slightly curved, and
minutely dentate.

The segments of the pleon in the male are moderately
prominent in the median line.

Length of medium-sized specimen, 45 mm.

Breadth in the mid-branchial region, 33 mm.

Length of rostral horn, 7 mm.

Inter-ocular space, 11 mm.

Length of cheliped, male, 40 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 54 mm.

Halimus truncatipes, Mvers. Plate xxii., figs. 2, 2a.
(An. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. v., vol. iv., p. 3.)

My specimens agree weil with Miers’ description. The
species attains to as large a size as //. levis. The chelipeds of
the male also are capable of assuming the larger development.
The lateral spines are stronger, and the tubercles of the cara-
pace more spiniform, also tubercles are shown. where in the
former species there are merely groups of bristles, the cara-
pace itself is more convex, the rostral horns longer and a
little depressed and more divergent. The inter-ocular tu-
bercles are very distinct; there are four papilliform tubercles
occupying the front of the gastric region, the two outermost
smaller, and not in the same transverse line. The supra-
ocular arcuate margin has the anterior spine very prominent
but obtuse, the intermediate spine is large, and has a more
forward direction than in //. /evis. Its position with regard

to the one immediately preceding it is about the same as in
that species. There are six tubercles of varying sizes on each
branchial region—apart from the lateral spines—and the two
cardiac tubercles are distinct. The cardiac and intestinal re-
gions are marked off by sinuous rows of pits, which assume
irregular groups on the sides of the intestinal region.

The eyes are rather small.

The sub-hepatic region has the anvil-shaped spine before
mentioned.

The external distal spine of the basal antennal joint is
large, the internal one very small. There is an oblique sulca-
tion on this joint, as in the preceding species.

This species is common in shallow water at Port Wil-
lunga, Edithburg, and elsewhere, and Mr. Fulton has sent
me specimens from Western Port, Victoria.

Length of carapace, 44 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 32 mm.

Length of rostral horn, 9 mm.

Inter-ocular space, 11 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 56 mm.

Halimus tumidus, Dana. Plate xxii., figs. 3, 3a.
(U.S. Exploring Exped. Crust., 1, p. 165.)

My specimens of this species are small.

The carapace is very convex, anteriorily depressed, as are
much so the rostral horns, which also are somewhat verti-
cally compressed. The tubercles of the upper surface are not
strongly marked, but are more numerous than in the preced-
ing species. The inter-ocular tubercles are very low. There
is no spine on the posterior border, an intestinal tubercle is
present, as also are two on the cardiac region, with a small
one tending to become double between them. The anterior
portion of the upper orbital margin is merely thickened,
rounded anteriorly, and posteriorly scarcely acute. The in-
termediate spine is nearly horizontal in position, and is near
to the post-ocular. The post-ocular spine is well developed,
but the remaining lateral spines poorly, especially the last.

The basal joint of the antenna has its external distal
spine very large and somewhat compressed, showing well
from above, spinulose on its outer margin, and strongly
pressed upwards. The internal distal spine is very small,
the oblique sulcation wide and shallow, the remaining pedun-
cular joints are almost totally hidden by the rostral horn.

The pleon of the male has the segments scarcely promi-
nent medianly except the first two. The pleon of the female
ends in a distinct though obtuse point.

122

The chelipeds in the male are of moderate size, the hand
is short and rather tumid, the fingers are short, narrow, and
evenly dentate. The arm is provided with a distal tooth
above, and there are faint indications of two more further
back. The carpus is strongly keeled with a minute tooth at
the proximal end.

The sub-hepatic tubercle is spiniform, and points for-
ward. ,

The penultimate joints of the posterior pair of ambula-
tory legs are nearly as much expanded as in //. truncatipes.

This is a shallow water species, St. Vincent Gulf.

Length of carapace, 18 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 13 mm.

Length of rostral horn, 3 mm.

Inter-ocular space, 5 mm.

Length of chelipeds, 15 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 17 mm.

Specimens in Adelaide Museum.

Halimus tumidus, var. gracilipes, n. var. Pl. xxiii., fig. 5.

Carapace very convex. Rostral horns rather slender,
well depressed, and divergent, more so from their distal
halves, but little vertically compressed. The upper orbital
border is anteriorly tuberculate, but not so nearly spiniform
as in #7. truncatipes, the posterior end bears a small, acute
tooth, the intermediate spine is well developed and acute,
separated from the preceding tooth by a narrow V-shaped
cleft, while it is separated from the post-ocular by a much
wider space. The post-ocular spine is long, inclined forwards,
and is slightly sigmoid in shape. The hepatic region bears a
small conical spine. The three lateral spines of the branchial
region are moderately developed. The inter-ocular space has
two strong conical tubercles, with a smaller one in advance of
each ; the space between these pairs is somewhat concave, ex-
tending forwards to the base of the rostral horns. Five gastric
tubercles are arranged in the usual manner, and are well
marked ; four or six more lateral ones less distinctly. There
are two, very small, on the urogastric region. The cardiac
region consists of two elevations, each bearing three small
tubercles, and behind these there are three median, sub-acute,
and well-defined, including one on the posterior border, which
is slightly turned up at the apex and slightly bifid. The epi-
branchial regions are slightly tumid, each bearing two small
tubercles, arranged obliquely, and there are nine or ten more
on each branchial region (omitting the lateral spines) more
or less developed. There are two or three very small tubercles
on each hepatic region. Apart from the tubercles, the sur-

123

face of the carapace is smooth. The limiting rows of pits
between the branchial and cardiac regions are very faintly
indicated.

The basal antennal joint is large, broadly sulcate in an
oblique manner. The external distal spine is large, but not
compressed, and is distant from the rostral horn. There is a
small tooth at the inner distal angle. The external margin
of the joint is slightly sinuate, and bears two spiniform
teeth, one of which is on the distal spine. The remaining
joints of the peduncle are not hidden by the rostral horn.

The eyes are well developed. There is a small tubercle
tipped with hairs above the ophthalmus.

The epistome is somewhat excavate.

The external angles of the buccal frame are prominent,
the margin bearing some small, ill-formed tubercles.

The pleon in the female has the fourth, fifth, and sixth
segments very broad and coalesced, medianly sulcate, the
groove marked with a few irregular punctations. The first
three segments are very prominent medianly, especially the
first. The external margin of the coalesced segments is raised.
The terminal segment is broad and distally rounded.

The sub-hepatic spine is strong, acute, and points for-
ward. The pterygostomial one is small.

The chelipeds in the female are slender, the merus joint
short, not reaching as far forward as the post-ocular spine.
It is sub-cylindrical, and bears externally three well-develop-
ed, forward-directed spines, the last larger and at the distal
end. The carpus bears a small tooth near the proximal end
on the outer side. The palm is laterally compressed. The
fingers are slender, long, about two-thirds the length of the
palm, with minute teeth towards their ends.

The ambulatory legs are long and rather slender. The
merus joint of the first pair is cylindrical, and reaches nearly
as far as the carpus of the cheliped. The carpus is sub-equal
in length to the propodus. The proximal half of the pro-
podus is cylindrical, the distal half not much expanded. The
dactylus is slender.

This specimen differs from the typical H. twmidus in the
following respects: —The tubercles and spines of the cara-
pace are much more accentuated. The inter-orbital region
has two tubercles on each side, with a broad, shallow con-
cavity between them. The rostral horns are longer, much
slenderer, and little compressed in the vertical direction.
The upper orbital border has anteriorly a distinct tubercle
and an acute spine posteriorly, the intermediate one being very
close to this. There is a strong median tooth on the pos-
terior margin. The second and third joints of the antennal

124

peduncle are not hidden by the rostral horn. In the cheliped
the merus joint bears two strong projecting spines, besides the
one at the distal end. The ambulatory legs are longer and
slenderer, the penultimate being not so much expanded. The
penultimate joint is more than three times as long as broad.

Habitat, St. Vincent Gulf. Dredged by Dr. Verco.

Length of carapace, 18 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 13 mm.

Length of rostral horn, 4 mm.

Length of cheliped, 15 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 24 mm.

One specimen, a female, in Adelaide Museum.

I have referred this specimen to Mr. G. M. Thomson, of
Dunedin, who has been good enough to examine it, with the
result that it is here recorded as a variety of H. tumidus,
Dana.

Halimus gracilis, n. sp. Pl. xxiii., figs. 4, 4a.

Carapace elongate, shrunken, anteriorly moderately de-
pressed. The rostral horns are long, rather slender, very di-
vergent, especially distally, projecting forward horizontally.
Tubercles of the carapace not so numerous as in the preceding
species; there are two inter-ocular, well marked, two trans-
verse, with three longitudinal behind, on the gastric region,
the last of which is almost obsolete; four others laterally
placed on the gastric region are also nearly obsolete, one on
each epibranchial region, with one a little below and outward
from each. The cardiac tubercle is single, and there is one
on the intestinal, which is very close to the strong median
spine of the posterior border. The rows of pits noticed in
the other species are faintly marked.

The supra-orbital border is thin, without anterior tu-
bercle, the posterior end has a small acute point, the inter-
mediate spine is short, and is situated much further from the
post-ocular than from the point which precedes it. The post-
ocular is longer than the other lateral spines, and projects
well forward, the following hepatic spine projects horizon-
tally, and is situated close behind on the prominent hepatic
region, behind which the carapace is strongly constricted.
The three lateral spines of the branchial region are well de-
veloped, rather contiguous, each being curved forwards.

The basal antennal joint is elongate, narrow, the oblique
sulcation scarcely indicated. The external distal spine is
rather short, scarcely showing from above, the remaining
peduncular joints are not hidden by the rostral horn; there
is a small spine at the internal distal angle.

The epistome is narrow and rather long.

125

The anterior angles of the buccal frame are very promi-
nent.

The sub-hepatic and pterygostomial tubercles are papil-
liform.

The normal chelipeds in the male have the arm sub-
cylindrical, the distal spine well developed, and with a well-
marked tooth near the proximal end above. The carpus is
strongly keeled outwardly, the proximal end very prominent.
The palm is compressed, narrowing in the vertical direction
towards the distal end. The fingers are moderately long,
slightly curved, rather slender, finely denticulate, and ap-
proximating for nearly their whole length. The enlarged
cheliped sometimes occurs in this species in the males.

The ambulatory legs are long, rather slender, sparingly
setose, with the merus joints cylindrical; the carpal and pro-
podal joints nearly equal in length, the propodal little ex-
panded distally. The dactyli are slender, curved, and acute.

The pleon of the male is narrow, the two first segments
more so, the third slightly wider than the rest; their median
portions are only very moderately prominent.

This species may easily be distinguished from the former
ones by its shrunken appearance, by the length of the lateral
spines and rostral horns, its single tubercle on the cardiac re-
gion, etc. In the position of the intestinal tubercle it
resembles /7. aries.

Length of carapace, 30 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 20 mm.

Length of rostral horn, 8 mm.

Length of cheliped, 34 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 49 mm.

Inter-ocular space, 64 mm.

Dredged by Dr. Verco, Investigator Straits, 20-30 fms.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

The next species is referred to the genus Paramicippa,
M.-Edw. I have been able to compare it with P. tubercu-
losa, M.-Edw., and find the following characteristics common
to both.

The carapace is rounded behind. ‘The rostral horns are
depressed, though not quite so much as in P. tuberculosa.
The orbits are similar, although in P. twberculosa the inter-
mediate spine has disappeared, but is perhaps represented by
the bifid, post-ocular spine. The eye peduncles are long,
non-retractile, and project upwards. The basal joint of the
antenna is broad and sloping outwards. The second joint of
the peduncle (although not compressed) is large and prom-
nent. The external maxillipeds resemble those of Ha/zmus.
The pleon segments in the female are free. The dactyli of
the ambulatory legs are without spinules.

126

Family Maripaz.
Genus Paramicippa, M.-Edw.

Paramicippa hispida, n. sp. Pl. xxiv., figs. 6, 6a.

Body thickly covered with long, bristly hairs, especi-
ally on the legs, where they are sometimes curved at the tips.

Carapace pyriform, convex, smooth beneath the hairs,
most elevated in the protogastric region. The gastric regioa
is broad in front, narrowing behind. The urogastric region is
distinct, as also are the cardiac and intestinal. These are
separated from the branchial by an irregular shallow groove
extending longitudinally from the cervical groove to a shal-
low meta-branchial depression ; this groove is bounded on the
outer side by an obscurely marked, rounded ridge following
the same direction. but interrupted in the middle. The
branchial regions are well rounded, moderately tumid, and
without spines. | The posterior margin is slightly produced
medianly, and rounded.

The anterior portion of the upper margin of the orbit is
slightly thickened and strongly arched; the posterior end of
the arch is sub-acutely prominent and pressed down behind
the eye peduncle; the intermediate spine, which is somewhat
compressed and sub-acute, follows close behind with the post-
ocular, which is a little longer and also sub-acute, following
close after it in the same oblique line. The orbit is very
widely open below.

The hepatic region is slightly tumid.

The rostral horns are short, nearly parallel, acute, and
much, though not vertically, depressed. Two ridges, with a
median groove between, extend from the base of the rostrum
to the front of the gastric region, slightly diverging back-
wards.

The ocular peduncles are very long, project upwards, and
are slightly curved in that direction.

The basal antennal joint is short, slightly oblique, slop-
ing outwards, ending distally in a slightly curved, transverse
ridge, which on the outer side is produced to a strong spine,
projecting outwards and upwards, and but very little for-
wards, and on the inner side bearing a small tooth. The re-
maining joints of the peduncle are well clear of the rostral
horn, the more proximal one is short and broad, but not
compressed.

The sub-hepatic region is tumid.

The pterygostomial region has a compressed tubercle or
spine.

R The epistome is depressed.

There is a small, rounded swelling between the orbit

and the external angle of the buccal frame.

127

The external maxillipeds are similar to those of //a/imus,
though the internal distal angle of the ischium and the exter-
nal angle of the merus are not so much produced.

The chelipeds are very weak in both sexes, smooth, un-
armed. The merus is short, cylindrical, and slightly con-
stricted near the distal end. The carpus is narrow and
rounded above. The hand is not much compressed, and nar-
rows in the vertical direction. The fingers are nearly straight,
very faintly toothed, more than half the length of the palm,
nearly cylindrical, and with a proximal hiatus.

The ambulatory legs are moderately long, with the pairs
not differing much in length, very hairy, the joints cylindri-
cal, the carpal joints longitudinally grooved above. The
dactyli are acute and slightly curved.

The male pleon is seven-segmented, the sides shghtly in-
sinuate from the third segment. The segments are medianly
- umbonate, especially at their distal margins; the third seg-
ment has a slight swelling on each side; the terminal seg-
ment is broadly triangulate. The female pleon has the seven
segments distinct.

Length of carapace, 26 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 22 mm.

Inter-ocular space, 7 mm.

Length of cheliped, 23 mm.

Length of first ambulatory leg, 32 mm.

Littoral species, Port Willunga, Mr. W. J. Kimber ; Port
Lincoln, ete.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

This species has the habit of covering itself with extra-
neous materials to an excessive degree, scarcely more than the
chelipeds and eyes are uncovered. The material consists of
sand, calcareous matter, seaweeds, etc., very difficult of re-
moval.

Family Maripz.
Genus Micippa, Leach.

Micippa mascarenica, Kossman, var. nodulifera, x. var.
Pl. xxiv., figs. 8, 8a.

The carapace is sub-oblong, broadest near the posterior
border, depressed—more so in the male. The surface is granu-
late to tuberculate and nodular. The tubercles or nodules
and the larger granules are white, many apparently formed
by coalescence of granules: these are much more crowded near
the posterior border. Groups have the following positions : -——
One on each hepatic region, one on each epi-branchial region,
one on the meso-gastric, preceded in the median line by two
or three large single granules, one on the urogastric and two

128

on the cardiac region. Three well-marked, compressed
tubercles, closely succeed each other on the lateral margin be-
hind the orbit, and behind the last of these are numerous
smaller tubercles, which become almost spiniform posteriorly.
The median regions are slightly raised, and a strong depres-
sion exists in each hepatic region.

The upper margin of the orbit is anteriorly thin and
arcuate, with a longitudinal row of granules near the edge.
Its posterior end is produced to a slight prominence, the suc-
ceeding parts—representing the intermediate and post-ocular
spines—are tuberculiform, compressed in the vertical direc-
tion, and separated from each other by almost closed fissures.
The outer one is similar to those which succeed it on the
lateral margin, and has a somewhat T-shape.

The front is strongly declivous, but not vertically de-
flexed, it is slightly narrower proximally, and faintly crenu-
late on the sides, terminating in four acute lobes or teeth,
the outer ones slightly raised along with the lateral margins,
projecting outwards and slightly upwards, the inner ones pro-
jecting downwards.

The basal antennal joint is broad, oblique, and much
produced at its external distal angle; this is sub-acute and
strongly pressed upwards, showing well when viewed from
above. The outer margin of the joint is slighty crenulate,
the second joint is dilated, the third less so.

The sub-hepatic and pterygostomial regions are tumid
and coarsely granular.

The external maxillipeds are like those of Halimus. The
outer distal angle of the merus is produced and_ broadly
rounded, the distal margin not insinuated, and _ bearing
minute teeth.

The pleon of the male is sub-oblong, proximally a little
constricted, the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth segments are
sub-equal in length, the terminal segment is rounded to al-
most semi-circular form. In the female the segments are dis-
tinct.

The chelipeds are rather weak in the male, smooth, the
merus sub-cylindrical, and slightly curved, the carpus is
rounded above, the palm is scarcely one and a half times as
long as the carpus, the fingers are shorter than the palm,
slightly curved, meeting for nearly the whole length of their
opposable edges, very faintly toothed.

The ambulatory legs are rather short, the first pair
scarcely exceeding the length of the chelipeds, the other pairs
becoming successively shorter, the merus joints are sub-cylin-
drical, the distal ends of these and the carpal joints are
nodular, the carpal joints are short, vertically compressed,

129°

and grooved above, the propodal joints are cylindrical, the
dactyli are curved, strong, and without spinules.

Length of carapace, 10 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 8 mm.

Length of cheliped, 7 mm.

Dredged by Dr. Verco, S.A. coast, 20 fms.

Specimens in Adelaide Museum.

Family PARTHENOPID2.
Genus Thyrolambrus, Rathbun. Pr. U.S. Mus., vol. xvii.
Thyrolambrus excavatus, 2. sp. Pl. xxiv., fig. 7.

The whole of the body is covered with irregular granules,
forming in parts jagged points, becoming more or less spini-
form on the ambulatory legs.

Carapace triangular, broader between the lateral angles
than long, produced to some extent over the bases of the
chelipeds and first two pairs of legs. Surface much eroded,
being covered with irregular granules, for the most part con-
nected together by small ridges, forming somewhat stellate
reticulations. The regions are well defined, those most in
relief are the protogastric and branchial, and most depressed
-the meta-gastric and intestinal. The meta-gastric depression
extends laterally to the margin behind the hepatic region,
and posteriorly between the cardiac and branchial to join the
intestinal, though becoming shallower. The branchial re-
gions are tri-lobed, the lobes arranged in a triangular man-
ner, the apex forming the lateral angle of the carapace. Of
these three lobes the anterior une is the largest. The hepatic
region is small and depressed. The epi-gastric region has a
deep median excavation, between which and the front is a
shallow median groove, which is continued behind the cavity,
bifurcating in front of the meso-gastric region to
join the meta-gastric depression. The meso-gastric
region is triangular, and behind it the median _ por-
tion of the carapace, after being a little depressed, becomes
gradually elevated again at the cardiac region. This has on
each side two or more irregular transverse ridges connecting
it with the meta-branchial lobe, and posteriorly it is abrupt
to the intestinal depression. The sides of the carapace are
very declivous, and below the antero-branchial lobe there is
a slight excavation, beneath which the margin expands to a
ridge immediately above the chelipeds, bearing some spini-
form tubercles and uniting anteriorly with the pterygostomial
ridge. The latero-posterior and posterior margins are nearly
in the same transverse line, the former slightly insinuate,
bearing some obtuse points, especially at the junction with

130

the posterior border. The posterior margin is short, slightly
raised, and granulate, with a small transverse ridge, usually
bearing three distinct granules close above it.

The front is almost vertically depressed, narrowing, and
produced well beyond the orbits, terminating in a small ros-
tral process, which projects downwards between the anten-
nules.

The orbits are nearly circular, the internal sub-orbital
angle slightly accentuated.

The basal antennal joint is slightly oblique, becoming
narrower distally, barely reaching the sub-orbital angle; the
second joint is much smaller, and just reaches the contiguous
part of the front ; the third joint and flagellum are very small
and lie in the orbital cavity.

The epistome is sunken, but strongly berdered all around.

The sub-orbital region is rather tumid ; an excavation be-
hind divides it from the sub-hepatic lobe, and joins a large
cavity, separating the sub-hepatic from the pterygostomial
region.

The external maxillipeds completely close the buccal
cavity. The ischium is about twice as long as the merus; its
internal distal angle is slightly produced above the trans-
verse line; it has a longitudinal groove, and strongly granu-.
late ridge. The merus is sub-quadrate, its external distal angle
shghtly overlapping the end of the exopod, its inner distal
angle truncated, the space filled by the succeeding joint. The
exopod has a longitudinal series of strong granules.

The chelipeds are moderately robust, the merus is
thicker proximally, sub-cylindrical, very rough above, with a
conical, erect process near the proximal end; anteriorly there
are two or three triangular processes, also proximal; the
lower surface is more evenly granulate, and has two small pro-
jections about the middle; there are also one or two projec-
tions posteriorly. The carpus is somewhat flattened above.
The hand is trigonous, its upper surface flattened and ascend-
ing to the base of the mobile finger, where it is very promi-
nent and jagged. The inner margin bears three compressed
processes projecting inwards, the middle one of which is much
larger. The lower margin bears a series of five or six forward-
projecting, compressed processes, usually acute, extending on
to the immobile finger. The outer surface is slightly convex,
and bears an obscure tubercle or two about the middle. The
fingers are as rough as the hand, very much compressed later-
ally, the apices are crossed, and when in this position the op-
posable edges meet.

The ambulatory legs are small, covered with more or less
spiniform points; the first pair does not reach as far as the

i3l

carpus of the chelipeds: the dactyli are nearly straight. The
posterior pair of legs are very short.

The pleon of the female covers the whole of the narrow
sternum between the legs; the distal half is slightly broader
and is medianly very prominent, the prominence broken by
transverse, jagged ridges, which extend to the margins, and
on the last segment have a radiate arrangement. In the
male the pleon is very narrow, especially the distal half, the
sternum showing a deep excavation between its last segment
and the base of the buccal frame.

Length of carapace, 19 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 25 mm.

Length of cheliped, 30 mm.

Dredged by Dr. Verco, Investigator Straits, 20-30 fms.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

I am in doubt whether this species should not be placed
in the genus Parthenope, Fabricius, but its complete agree-
ment with Thyrolambrus, as presented by Miss Rathbun, has
decided me here.

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES.

PuateE XXI1.

Fig. 1 Halimus levis, Haswell—Natural size.
Fig. la. Halimus levis, Haswell—Inferior view of anterior re-

gions. Enlarged.
Prag Ao

Fig. 2. Halimus truncatipes.. Miers—Natural size.

Fig. 2a. Halimus truncatipes, Miers—Inferior view of an-
terior regions. Enlarged.

Fig. 3. Halimus tumidus, Dana—Inferior view of anterior
regions. Enlarged.

Fig. 3a. Halimus tumidus, Dana—Side view.

Pratt XXIII.
Fig. 4. Halimus gracilis, n. sp.—Enlarged.
Fig. 4a. Halimus gracilis, n. sp.—Enlarged.
Fig. 5. Halimus tumidus, var. gracilipes, n. var.—En-

larged. .
Puate XXIV.

Fig. 6. Paramicippa hispida, n. sp.—Enlarged.

Fig. 6a. Paramicippa hispida, n, sp.— Inferior view of an-
terior regions. Enlarged.

Fig. 7. Thyrolambrus excavatus, n. sp.—Slightly enlarged.

Fig. 8. Muicippa mascarenica, Kossman, var. nodulifera, n.
var.—Enlarged. i

Fig. 8a. Micippa mascarenica. Kossman, n. var.—tInferior
view of anterior regions. Enlarged.

132

ON THE ALPHA PARTICLES OF RADIUM, AND THEIR LOSS
OF RANGE IN PASSING THROUGH VARIOUS
ATOMS AND MOLECULES.

By W. H. Brace, M.A., Elder Professor of Mathematics and
Physics in the University of Adelaide, and R. KLEEmMaAn,
B.Sc. .

[Read June 6, 1905.]

ABSTRACT.

In a previous paper laid before the Royal Society of
South Australia on September 6, 1904 (see Vol. xxvii., p.
298; also The Philosophical Magazine, December, 1904), the
authors had adduced theoretical and experimental evidence
in support of the following propositions : —

1. The alpha particle moves always in a rectilinear course,
spending its energy as it traverses atoms of matter,
until its velocity becomes so small that it. cannot
ionise, and there is in consequence no further evi-
dence of its motion.

2. Each particle possesses, therefore, a definite range in
a given medium, the length of which depends on the
initial velocity of the particle and the nature of the
medium.

3. The alpha particles of radium which is in radio-active
equilibrium can be divided into four groups, each
group being produced by one of the first four radio-
active changes in which alpha particles are emitted.

4. All the particles of any one group have the same
initial velocity and the same range.

The present paper could be regarded as a continuation of
the previous communication. Its contents were arranged
under the following heads : —

1. Improvements in the apparatus used for measuring
the ranges and relative strengths of the four groups of rays.

2. Results of experiments with the new apparatus, giving
the following values of the ranges in air at 76 cm. pressure
and 20° C.:—

Radium, 3°50.

Emanation or | if
Radium Af”
Radium A 01 | 4.99
Emanation

Radium C, 7:06
These were probably correct to ‘05 cm.

It also appeared that the four groups were alike in all respects
save that of initial velocity, and that the alpha particle spent

133

its energy at a rate proportional, approximately, to the
inverse square root of its speed.

3. Determinations of the loss of range of alpha particles
in consequence of their passage through various substances,
from which it appeared that for all the materials examined
the loss in traversing any atom was nearly proportional to
the square root of the weight of the atom. The loss in the
case of a complex molecule was proportional to the sum of
the square roots of the weights of the constituent atoms. The
results were presented in the following table : —

TABLE, Showing “‘stopping power” of various atoms and
molecules, as compared to air. The atomic weight
of the imaginary standard atom of air is taken as
14°4, and the atomic square root as 3°79 : —

Ratio of Ratio of
substance Spreteetvadye bacon obstnuoe
Square Roots. Weights.
Hydrogen Jaws DA5246 "265 ‘069
Air At) As 1 1 f
Aluminium 53 1°38 1°88
Copper 2°42 2°1 4°53
Silver 3°12 2°45 5
Tin 3°42 2°88 8:2
Platinum 4°19 3:7 5°5
Goldin... bie. yer 4°45 3° 1374
Methyl bromide 2°09 2°09 3°28
Ethyl chloride 2°30 2°36 2°23
Methyl iodide 2°49 2°35 4°9
Htherayoeso DUS , NSS I SEBO 3°68 2°56
Carbon tetrachloride ... 3°8 61 5:41

When these results were plotted, the metals and gases seemea
to lie on rather different lines.

4. Discussion of these results. The authors suggested as
a possible explanation that, if atoms had a disc-like form (see
Meyer’s Kinetic Theory of Gases, § 112), and if ions could only
be produced on the edges of the discs, then the chances of
ionisation by an alpha particle traversing any atom would be
proportional to the square root of the atomic weight. This
explanation involved the assumption that the energy required
to produce a pair of ions was a constant under all conditions,
as stated by Rutherford. The authors believed that this
assumption was correct, in spite of the fact that in some of
their experiments on gases with complex .atoms the alpha
_ particle did not produce as much total conductivity as in air,
and they suggested, as an explanation of the apparent con-
tradiction, that ions made in complex molecules sometimes
re-combined before getting free of the molecules.

134

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN NUDIBRANCHS, AND AN ENUMERA-
TION OF THE KNOWN AUSTRALIAN SPECIES.

By Herspert Basepow AND CHARLES HEDLEY.
[Read April 4, 1905.]
Prares Eo ro, 2a,
HIstToRIcAL SKETCH.

Our earliest information of Australian Nudibranchs
dates from Baudin’s expedition. The untrained collectors
who visited Australia previously were unlikely to trouble
with objects so difficult to procure or preserve.

In the first years of the last century, those distinguished
marine zoologists, Peron anc Lesueur, took back with them
to Paris several species, which were studied by Cuvier. These
included Scyllaa pelagica, Phyllirhoa lichtensteanu, K entro-
doris maculosa, and Casella atromarginata.

The next contribution was also from a French source.
Quoy and Gaimard, the famous surgeon-naturalists of the
Astrolabe Expedition, dredged their Doris violacea and D.
aurea in nine fathoms, in Jervis Bay, N.S.W., and took
Elysia australis on the beach near Sydney.

Several active naturalists, Jukes, Macgillivray, Huxley,
and Ince, served on H.M.S.S. Fly and Rattlesnake when
those vessels were surveying the coast of Queensland. Hence
the British Museum obtained much material. Gray was pro-
vided with Sphaerodoris inci and Asteronotus cruenta, and
Abraham with Platydoris coriacea, and others.

During a brief visit to Sydney Dr. Stimpson procured
there his Doris obtusa, D. excavata, Goniodoris obscura, and
Aeolis cacaotica.

George French Angas resided for some years in Sydney.
From 1858 to 1860 he took opportunities to make water-
colour drawings from life of Sydney nudibranchs. He ex-
amined thirty species, most of which were then new. Crosse
published these sketches and descriptions, with comments of
his own, in the Journal de Conchylologie. This important
paper represents the only work done locally.

During the voyage of the Challenger several species were
dredged off the coasts of Queensland and New South Wales,
and were described by Dr. Bergh in the Challenger Results.

About the same time the naturalists of H.M.S. Alert
collected five species in North Queensland, which were pub-
lished in the Zoology of that voyage.

A period of twenty years then elapsed, during which no
additions of importance were made to our knowledge.

135

Recently Professor Bergh has described six new species
from material gathered by Miss Lodder in Tasmania.

As Angas was unacquainted with the work of his pre-
decessors, and as Abraham did not know the species of Angas,
the revision here commenced requires to be continued.

In concluding this brief sketch we wish to draw attention
to the valuable assistance rendered by Dr. J. C. Verco, in
allowing one of us to accompany him on his marine dredging
excursion, and thus affording an opportunity of observing
and sketching the forms collected in their natural state, a
factor of extreme importance in the systematic study of these
perishable beings.

CENSUS OF THE DESCRIBED SPECIES OF AUSTRALIA.
NeUsDI BRANCH EAT A.*
NUDIBRANCHIATA CLADOHEPATICA.

FAMILY AEOLIDIADAE.
Genus Aeolidiella, Bergh, 1874.
AEOLIDIELLA FAUSTINA, Bergh.

A. faustina, Bergh, Zool. Jahrb. xii. (3), 1900, p. 235-
250.7 Ploxx.;)£.°39-40. sda Reis.c0 | Arch: i der Phil., Wl;
£9042) p3.25 (Plas, Fy2i7-3h.

Hab.—Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder).

Genus Coryphella, Gray, 1850.
CORYPHELLA FOULISI, Angas.
Aeolis foulisi, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xi., 1864, p. 64,
Pl. vi., f. 3. Coryphella foulisi, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der
Phila (2); 1892. ps 1029.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

CoRYPHELLA (7?) cacaoTica, Stimpson.

Aeolis cacaotica, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. N. Sci. Philad
vii.; 1856, p. 388. Jd., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil, it.
(A) il 808 5p. Kile

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Stimpson).

Obs.—This name perhaps refers to a species of Angas.

CoRYPHELLA MACLEAYI, Angas.
Aeolis macleay1, Angas, Journ. de Conch. x1i., 1864, p.
65, Pl. vi, f. 4. C. macleayi, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der
Phil. 12. (2), U8it8sepa"evic
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

* In the following list the sequence of the species is based on
the classification roposed by Dr. Bergh in Semper’s Reisen im
Archipel der Philippinen.

136

Genus Rizzolia, Trinchese, 1877.
RIZZOLIA AUSTRALIS, Bergh.
R. australis, Bergh., Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 27, Pl. ix.,

f. 1-5. JZd., Reis. im Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1031.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Challenger).

Genus Flabellina, Cuvier, 1830.
FLABELLINA IANTHINA, Angas.

F. vanthina, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu., 1864, p. 66,
Pl. vi.,f..6. . Id,, Bergh, Reis..1m Arch. derj-Phily aia,
1892, p. 1034.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

FLABELLINA ORNATA, Angas.

F.. ornatu, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xi1., 1864, p. 67, PI.
wit; f..7. -dd:, Bergh, Reis» mm Arch.-der, Phil. 1. (2), eg
p. 1034.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

FLABELLINA NEWCOMBI, Angas.

F. newcombi, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p. 68,
Pl v1, 1. 8A ids Bersh, Weis! tm -Arch der Phil asa pe
1892, p. 1034.

Hab.—Coogee, near Sydney (Angas).

Genus Fiona, Alder & Hancock, 1853.
Frona marina, Forskal.

Limax marina, Forskaél, Descrip. Anim., 1775, p. 99.
Fiona marina, Bergh, Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 9, Pl. x1., f. 1.

Hab.—Maroubra, near Sydney (Whitelegge).

Obs.—This world-wide mollusc has an extensive litera-
ture. It has been added to the Australian fauna by Hed-
ley (Proc. Malac. Soc. i., 1895, p. 333). New Zealand speci-
mens were described by Hutton as Molis plicata (Trans. New
Zealand Inst., xiv., 1882, p. 166, Pl. vi., f. 1). Plate dis-
covered it in Chili (Bergh, Zool. Jahrb. xi., 1900, p. 239).

Genus Glaucus, Forster, 1777.
GLAUCUS ATLANTICUS, Forster.
_ G. atlanticus, Forster, Voy. Resolution i., 1777, p. 49.
Id., Bergh, Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 16. Jd., Hedley, Mem.
Aust. Mus. iv., 1903, p. 401.
Hab.—Off Sydney and Southport, Queensland (Hedley).

137

Genus Janus, Verany, 1844.
Janus (?) sancuineus, Angas.
J. sanguineus, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p. 63,
Pl. vi., f..5... Id... Bergh:,; Reis. im: Arch: der Phil. 11. (2),
1892, p. 1036.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).
Obs.—This species has neither the crest nor the rhino-
phores of /anus (properly Antiopa), and is only retained
here till a more suitable position may. be found.

Genus Janolus, Bergh, 1884.
JANOLUS AUSTRALIS, Bergh.
J. australis, Bergh, Chall. Rep. x., 1884, p. 19, Pl. viii.,
1 L0,225; Pls 1x.,<f. 6-8.
Hab.—Arafura Sea (Challenger).

FAMILY DOTONID.
Genus Doto, Oken, 1812.
DotTo AUSTRALIS, Angas.
Melibea australis, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p.
62, Pl. vi., f.2. Melibe australis, Bergh, Zool. Jahrb. Syst. v.,
is3t, p. 48. -Doto (7) australis, Bergh, Reis. im Areh. der
phi ns (2), S92; Pp. 1047.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

FAMILY BORNELLID/4.
Genus Bornella, Gray, 1850.
BorNELLA ADAMSI, Gray.

B. adamsi, Gray, Fig. Moll. Anim. iv., 1850, p. 107, Pl.
excviiwt..6. 2 Wd. Ja &) Ap Adams, -Gen..Moll:, Pl jlevg 4.2.
Id., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. i1. (2), 1892, p. 1053. SB.
hermanni, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p. 61., Pl. vi.,
Poel

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

Obs.—Prof. Bergh regards (Zool. Jahrb. Syst. v., 1891,
p-. 59) as doubtfully distinct from the above, B. arborescens,
Pease, B. caledonica, Crosse, B. semperi, Crosse, and B. han-
cockana, Kelaart.

BorRNELLA DIGITATA, Ad. & Reeve.

B. digitata, Ad: & Rv., Voy. Samarang, 1850; Moll., p.
67, Pl. xix., f.1. Zd,., Ald. & Hanck., Trans. Zool. Soc. v., 1864,
‘p. 140, Pl. xxxiit., f: 8-9. Jd., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der
Phil} in. .(4))b874 spes0l, Pheaexvaiy of..{14-19)} Pl xxxviin,

138

f. 13-22. ZId., Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 92. Td.
Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1904, 1., p. 101.
Hab.—Port Denison, Queensland (Alert).

BorNELLA EXCEPTA, Bergh.

B. excepta, Bergh, Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 36, Pl. vii.,
t13-22, Pl; vad. J-13:
Hab.—Arafura Sea (Challenger).

FAMILY SCYLLAEID.
Genus Scyllza, Linné, 1758.
ScYLL#A PELAGICA, Linné.

S. pelagica, Linn. Syst. Nat. x., 1758, 1., p. 644, 656. Jd.,
Cuvier, Ann. du Mus. vi., 1804, p. 424. Jd., Collingwood,
Trans.. Linn. Soc. Zool: i, V8er, p. "137-8," Pl. x5 ty aoa
Id., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. i. (2), 1892, p:-1056:
[d., Hedley, Proc. Roy. Soc.) Viet... vit, anis.,- 1895, p. Wes

Hab.—Terre d’Edels, Western Australia (Peron), Port
Phillip, Victoria (Bracebridge Wilson), St. Vincent’s Gulf,
South Australia (Verco).

Obs.—This world-wide species has too extensive a biblio-
graphy to insert here unabridged.

FAMILY PHYLLIROID.
Genus Phyllirhoa, Peron & Lesueur, 1811.
PHYLLIRHOA LICHTENSTEINII, Eschscholtz.
Eurydice lichtensteinu, Eschscholtz, Isis, 1825, 1., p.
737, Pl. v., f. 1. Phylliroe punctulatum, Quoy & Gaim.,
Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. ii., 1833, p. 407, Pl. xxvii., f. 15-18.
Id., Macdonald, Proc. Roy. Soc., Lond. vii., 1856, p. 363.
Id., Bergh. Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (1), 1872, p. 210.
Hab.—Terre d’Edels, Western Australia (Quoy and
Gaim.). Lord Howe Island (Macdonald).
Obs.—This bibhography is much abbreviated.

NUDIBRANCHIATA HOLOHEPATICA.

FAMILY PLEUROPHYLLIDIADZ.
Genus Pleurophyllidia, Meckel, 1810.
PLEUROPHYLLIDIA CYGNEA, Bergh.
P. cygnea, Bergh, Malak. Blatt. xxiii., 1876, p. 9, Pl. i.,
f. 1-7. Zd., Reis. im Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1063.

Hab.—Swan River, W.A. (Cuming Coll.), St. Vincent’s
Gulf, S.A. (Ve1co), and Sydney Harbour (Hedley).

139

DORIDIDA CRYPTOBRANCHIAT A.
FAMILY DORIDID 4.
Genus Hexabranchus, Ehrenberg, 1831.
HEXABRANCHUS FLAMMULATUS, Quoy & Gaim.
Doris fammulata, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool.
il., 1833, p. 257, Pl. xvi, f. 6-10. Hewxabranchus flammu-
latus, Wild, Nat. Hist. Soc. Queensland 1., 1894, p. 90.
Hab.—Tweed Heads, Queensland (Wild).

- HEXABRANCHUS IMPERIALIS, Kent.
Doris imperialis, Kent, Naturalist in Australia, 1897,
pot, Pl. v:
Hab.—Rat Island, Abrolhos, W.A. (Kent).

Genus Archidoris, Bergh, 1878.
ARCHIDORIS VARIA, Abraham.
Doris variabilis, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p.
44, Pl. iv., f. 1 (not Doris variabilis, Kelaart, Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (8), iu1., 1859, p. 300). Doris varia, Abraham,
Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 209. Doris pratenera, Abraham,
Proc Zool. Soc. 1877, ps 258, Pl) xaxc f+. 10-12:
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas). St. Vincent’s Gulf,
S.A.

ARCHIDORIS STAMINEA, spec. nuv.
Hab.—Backstairs Passage, 8.A. (Verco).

Genus Staurodoris, Bergh, 1878.
STAURODORIS PUSTULATA, Abraham.

Doris pustulata, Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1877, p. 205,
256, Pl. xxix., f..18, 19. Staurodoris (?) pustulata, Bergh,
Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1093.

Hab.—Australia (Abraham). St. Vincent’s Gulf
(Verco).

Genus Alloiodoris, Bergh, 1904.
ALLOIODORIS MARMORATA, Bergh.

A. marmorata, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. v1.,
1904, p. 42, Pl. i., f. 12-19.

Hab.—Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder). St. Vin-
cent’s Gulf (Basedow).

Genus Discodoris, Bergh, 1877.
Discoporis DuBIA. Bergh.
D. dubia, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. v1,
1904; p.-50;Ploi1., f.'29-30, Pl. iv., £2 1-2:
Hab.—Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder.)

140

‘Discoporis EGENA, Bergh.

D. egena, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. vi., 1904, p.
54, Pl. iv.; f£..7-14.._ .
Hab. —_Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder.)

Genus Thordisa, Bergh, 1877.
THORDISA CLANDESTINA, Bergh.

7. clandestina, Bergh, Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 1A ATs ape Se
lis, te 2025, We tels. 1m “Arch, der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, B:
1098. |
* Hab,—Torres Straits. (Challenger).

Genus Halgerda, Bergh, 1880.
HALGERDA GRAPHICA, spec. nov.
Hab.—-St.. Vincent’s Gulf, S.A. (Verco).

Genus Kentrodoris, Bergh, 1876.
KENTRODORIS MACULOSA, Cuvier. '
Doris maculosa, Cuvier, Ann. du Mus. iv., 1804, p. 466.
d., Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. 11., 1833, p. 249,
Pl. xvi., f..3-5:-: Jd., Abraham; Proc. ZoolwSoc.,. 28145 p.m
Id,; Bergh, Reis..im Arch..der Phil, i. (2), 1878, p. xxx.
Kentrodoris annuligera, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil,
i. (2), 1890. p,,.922.

Hab.—Sharks Bay, W.A. (Peron).

Obs.—Uack of space has excluded numerous references.

Genus Platydoris, Bergh, 1877.
PLATYDORIS CORIACEA, Abraham.

Doris coriacea, Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 203, 247,
Pl. xxvii., f. 1-4. Platydoris coriacea, Bergh, Reis. im Arch.
der Phil. 11. (2), 1892) p. 1102)

Hab.—Sir C. Hardy’ s Isles, Queensland (? H.M.S. Fly),
Green and Masthead Islands, Queensland (Hedley).
Obs.—This species seems suspiciously like Platydoris
scabra, Cuvier.
PLATYDORIS INFRAPICTA, Smith.

Doris infrapicta, Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 91.
Hab.—Queensland (Alert).

PLATYDORIS CRUENTA, Gray.

Asteronotus cruenta (Alder MS.), Gray, Fig. Moll.
Anim. iv., 1850, p. 44, 102, Pl. cexxvi., f. 2, 2a. Doris cruen-
tata, Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 201; not Dores
cruentata, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. ‘Astrolabe, Zool. :\11.,-- 1833;
p 260.

Hab.—Torres Straits tieeey

14]

Genus Asteronotus, Ehrenberg, 1831.
ASTERONOTUS MABILLA, Abraham.
A. mabilla, Bergh, Jahrb. Deut. Mal. Gesell. iv., 1877,
p. 163 (nom. nud.). Id., Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1877, p.
249, Pl. xxviu., f. 1-4. 2d., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil.
li, 1876, p. 644, 1892, p. 1103.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Hedley).

Genus Hypselodoris, Stimpson, 1855.

Obs.—We would point out that the species which Stimp-
son described as Goniodoris obscura is obviously that which
Angas afterwards found in the same place and named @.
crossei. Stimpson saw that his species was unsuitably placed
in Goniodoris, and proposed for its reception Hypselodoris.
As this name, though unknown to any later writer, has nine
years’ precedence cver Alder & Hancock’s Chromodoris, it
must certainly replace it.

HIYPSELODORIS OBSCURA, Stimpson.

Goniodoris obscura, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad., vul., 1855, p. 388. G. crosser, Angas, Journ. de
Conch. xu., 1864, p. 54, Pl. v., f. 1. Chromodoris crossei,
Bergh, Reis, im Arch. der Phil. 1. '(2), ©1884; -~p.-°"648-50.
Wee oc eit., L892, pp, L109, L110. |

Hab.—sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS LINEOLATA, van Hasselt.

Doris lineolata, van Hasselt, Bull. Sci. Nat. Zool.’ 111.,
1824, p. 258. Chromodoris striatella, Bergh, Chall. Zool. x.,
1884, p. (3, Pliiit.,, 1. 26-29 Pl ivs t-4.. Vids, Journ. Mus.
Godeff. xiv., 1879,.p. 5. Jd., Reis.im Arch: der Phil. 11. (2),
1892, p..1106.

Hab.—Port Denison (Dietrich) and Torres Straits (Chal-
lenger).

HYPSELODORIS RUNCINATA, Bergh.

Chromodoris runcinata, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil.
ie vort. p..41o-40ls blo i, ton, oo, © lim. F. 5-12 > Tega,
p.1l07<old:; Chall? Zool.'x., 1884; p76; pl. vir fet-4. Jd.,
Ehot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, 1., p. 393. C. aris, Collingwood,
Trans. Linn Soc. Zool. 11., 1881, p. 127, Pl. ix., f. 9-14.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Challenger).

HYPSELODORIS VERRUCOSA, Crosse.

Goniodoris verrucosa, Crosse, Journ. de Conch. xil.,
1864, p 56, Pl. v., f. 4. Chromodoris verrucosa, Bergh,
Reis. im Arch. ‘der Phil. iz. (2), 1892, p. 1108.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas). °

142

HYPSELODORIS ERINACEUS, Crosse.

Goniodoris erinaceus, Crosse, Journ. de Conch. xi,
1864, p. 57, Pl. v., f. 5. Chromodoris erimaceus, Bergh,
Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1108.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS BENNETTI, Angas.
Goniodoris bennetti, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu., 1864,
p: 51, Pl. iv., f. 10. Chromodoris bennetti, Bergh, Ver-
handl. k.k. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1893, p. 415, Pl. iv., f.
12-17.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS FESTIVA, Angas.
Goniodoris festiva, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xi., 1864,
p. 53, Pl. iv., f. 12. Chromodoris festiva, Bergh, Verhandl.
k.k. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1893, p. 417, Pl. iv., f. 18-22.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS LORINGI, Angas.
Goniodoris loringt, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864,
p. 52, Pl. iv., f. 11. Chromodoris loringi, Bergh, Reis. im
Arch. der Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1109.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS SPLENDIDA, Angas.

Goniodoris splendida, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xil., 1864,
p. 55, Pl. v., f. 2. Chromodoris splendida, Bergh, Reis. im
Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1109. JZd., Eliot, Proc. Zool.
Soc. 1904, 1., p. 390.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

HYPSELODORIS DAPHNE, Angas.
Goniodoris daphne, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu., 1864,
p. 54, Pl. v., f. 3. Chromodoris daphne, Bergh, Reis. im
Arch. der Pil. mn o12) slo02. pr 1102.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).
HYPSELODORIS TASMANIENSIS, Bergh.
Chromodoris tasmamensis, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der
Phils, visii(2); 1905,.p. 6937Ply v.;, £5d2;15.
Hab.—Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder).
HYPSELODORIS EPICURIA, spec. nov.
Hab.—St. Vincent’s Gulf (Newland).

Genus Casella, H. & A. Adams, 1858.
CASELLA ATROMARGINATA, Cuvier.

Doris atromarginata, Cuvier, Ann. du Mus. iv., 1804,
Dp. 475, El ai ates Goniodoris atromarginata, Angas,

143

Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p. 51. Casella atromarginata,
Bergh, Journ. Mus. Godeff. Heft. vi., 1874,; p. 102,, #1. ee
faply-29. Plone. t. 21-32. Id., Reis. im Arch. der Phil.
(2), 1892, p- 1110. Td} Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, a
. 399. Casella gouldii, H..-'\&-' A:; ‘Ad. -Genera- * 11,
1857, Pl. xliii., f.5, Casella philippinensis, Bergh, Reis. im
Arch. der Phil. ii. (1), UO(Aye Pals peers, AP dh

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

Obs.—The above references are not exhaustive.

Bano Albania, Collingwood, 1881.*
ALBANIA (?) VERCONIS, spec. nov.
Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf, 8.A. (Verco).

Genus Ceratosoma, Ad. & Reeve, 1848.
CERATOSOMA BREVICAUDATUM, Abraham.

C. brevicaudatum, Abraham, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
Xvili.. 1876, p. 142, Pl. vu., f. 6. C. oblongum, Abraham,
faewett.,-p. 143. Blievil.; ik e ta, Tb.) fd., Bergh, Reis. im
Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p- aa,

Hab.—Western Australia (Abraham), St. Vincent
Gulf, S.A. (Verco), Sydney Harbour (Hedley).

CERATOSOMA ADELAIDE, spec. nov.
Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf, S.A. (Basedow).

CERATOSOMA TENUE, Abraham.

C. tenwe, Abraham, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), xviil.,
1876, p- 141, PL. Vili. 0, bb. td., Smith, Zool. Coll; Alert,
1884, Deadd; olde Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 1. (2),
1892, fo: LP.

Hab.—Thursday Island, Torres Straits (Alert).

CERATOSOMA LIXI, Rochebrune.

C’. lixzi, Rochebrune, Naturaliste, 1894, p. 595. Id.,
Areh, Mus. Paris, 3 ser., vil.; p. 134, Pls vis, £26:
Hab.—Dead Island, Torres Straits (Lix).

CERATOSOMA GIBBOSUM, Rochebrune.

C’. gibbosum, Rochebrune, Naturaliste, 1894, p. 55. Zd.,
Areh; Mus: Paris; 5 ser.,. vil.,.p. lao, Pl. vi., £..4.
Hab.—Dead Island, Torres Straits (Lix).

* While these pages are going eirepen the press, and too
late to alter the title of Plate iv., we observed that Bergh (Reis.
im. Arch, der Phil., ii. (2), 1894, p. 148) reduces Albania to a
synonym of Aithodoris, Abraham, 1877.

144

Genus Aphelodoris, Bergh, 1879.
APHELODORIS LUCTUOSA, Bergh. |

aa luctuosa, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. vi. (2), 1905,
pif »Plv., £..26-32, Pl. vi., £1-2.
. porate Me Tasmania (Miss Lodder).

Genus Miamira, Bergh, 1875.
MIAMIRA SINUATA, van Hasselt.

| Doris sinuata, van Hasselt, Bull. d. Sci. Nat. and d.
Geol. 11., 1824, p. 239. Miamira nobilis, Bergh, Journ. Mus.

Godefl., Heft. vig [84 Pliawitayf.(8) kheftavni., 1875, p53;

Pl. viu., f. 1-30, Plax .: 1-4 lds Reiszam Arch. deme hil

in, (2), 1876, p. 411, Ply xxxai.5 1.2, and “1392, 451i se

(2),, 1905, p. 81, Pl. v.,.. £..33-36.9.Jd., Smith, Zgaleaeenss

1884, p. 90. Jd., Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1904, 1., p. 405.

Hab.—Port. Denison, Queensland (Alert).

Genus Sphaerodoris, Bergh, 1877.
SPHAERODORIS INCII, Gray.

Doris men (Alder M.8.), Gray, Fig. Moll. An. iv., 1850,
ele eexxviy te Sie p. 103. Dictyodoris inci, Bergh, Reis.
im Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1880, Suppl. p. 75. Sphaerodoris
mew, Bergh, Reis..im Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1113.

Babalorrcs Straits (Ince).

FAMILY DORIOPSIDAs.
Genus Doriopsis, Pease, 1860.
DORIOPSIS DENISONI, Angas.

Doris denison, Angas, Journ. std Conch.. xi1., 1864, -p.
45, Pl. iv., f..2. Doridopsis gemmacea, Ald. & Hancock,
dTrans., Zool. Soc. vs, 1864). p. 126. Pl. xx... 14, 53 9n ee
Id., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (2), 1884, p. 698;
1892, p. 1120. Doridopsis denisoni, Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1904, 11. (1905), p. 277.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

Obs.—Professor Bergh reduces Angas’s name to a
synonym of PD. gemmacea. It appears, however, that J.
demsoni has about six months’ priority over D. gemmacea.

DoRIOPSIS VIOLACEA, Quoy & Gaimard.

Doris violacea, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. i1.,
P6320". OGH PY wi 1: ato. Doriopsis. violacea, Bergh,
Reis. im Arch. der, Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1121.

Hab.—Jervis Bay, N.S.W. (Astrolabe).

145

DORIOPSIS AUSTRALIS, Angas.

Actinodoris australis, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu.,
1864, p. 49, Pl. iv., f. 8. Doriopsis australis, Bergh, Reis.
im) arch. der Phil. 11 (2), °18923"p." 1122.

Hab.—New South Wales (Angas).

DorIoPSIS AUSTRALIENSIS, Abraham.

Doridopsis australiensis, Abraham, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1877, pp. 243, 263, Pl. xxx., f. 25-26. Doriopsis australiensis,
Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 1. (2), 1892, p. 1122.

Hab.—New South Wales.

DoRICFSIS AUREA, Quoy & Gaimard.

Doris aurea, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. i1.,
1832, p. 265, Pl. xix., f. 4-7. Doriopsis aurea, Bergh, Reis.
Mmoearen. der” Phil i. (2), 1892 opt tEi22:

Hab.—Jervis Bay, N.S.W. (Astrolabe), St. Vincent
Gulf, S.A. (Verco).

DORIOPSIS CARNEOLA, Angas.

Doris carneola, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xil., 1864, p.
48, Pl. iv., f. 6. Doriopsis carneola, Bergh, Reis. im Arch.
der aril. 11.(2),, 1892, ‘p:-1Li22:

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas); St. Vincent Gulf
(Basedow).

DoRIOPSIS NODULOSA, Angas.

Doris nodulosa, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p.
48, Pl. iv, f. 6. Doriopsis nodulosa, Bergh, Reis. in Arch.
der Phil. 1. (2), 1892, p: 1122.

Hab.—Ccogee, near Sydney (Angas).

Doriopsis (2?) PANTHERINA, Angas.

Doris pantherina, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864,
Pree El iv: f.-9
Hab.—Coogee, near Sydney (Angas).

FAMILY PHYLLIADIDA.
Genus Phyllidia, Cuvier, 1798.
PHYLLIDIA VARICOSA, Lamarck.

P. varicosa, Lamarck, Syst. des An. s. vert., 1801, p. 66.
Id., Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. 11., 1832, p. 292,
Pl. xxi., f. 25. Zd., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (2),
1876, p.380, Pl.:xxv., f. 7, Suppl. 1881, -p. 8, 1892, p. 1128.
Id., Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1904, 11. (1905), p. 281.

Hab.—Dampier’s Archipelago, W.A. (Gazelle).

146

DORIDIDA PHANEROBRANCHIATA.
FAMILY POLYCERAD,
Genus Triopa, Johnston, 1838.
TRIOPA YATESI, Angas.

T. yatesi, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu., 1864, p. 60, PI.
v., §. 8 Td., Bergh,Reis. 1m Arch. der Phil, 1. (2) veoe.
p. 1139.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

Genus Palio, Gray, 1857.
Pato cook, Angas.

Polycera cooki, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii., 1864, p.
53, EP laiwitt. 6: Palio (?) cooki, Bergh, Reis. im “Arch. ‘der
Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1142.

Hab.—Botany Bay (Angas).

Genus Ohola, Bergh, 1884.
OGHOLA PACIFICA, Bergh.

O. pacifica, Bergh, Chall. Zool. x., 1884, p. 52, Pl. ix.,
f. 9-12.

Hab.—Arafura Sea (Challenger).

Genus Angasiella, Crosse, 1864.
ANGASIELLA EDWARDSI, Angas.
A. edwardsi, Angas, Journ. de Conch., 1864, xi., p. 49,

Pl. iv., f.9. Membrotha (?) edwardsi, Bergh, Reis. im Arch.
der Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1145.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

Genus Nembrotha, Bergh, 1877.
NEMBROTHA VERCONIS, spec. nov.
Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf, S.A (Verco).

Genus Placomopherus, Leuckart, 1828
PLACOMOPHERUS IMPERIALIS, Angas.

Plocamophorus imperialis, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xii.,
1864, p. 59, Pl. v., f. 7. Plocamopherus naevatus, Abraham,
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), xviii., 1876, p. 139, Pl. vi., f. 4, 4a.
P. imperimalis, Bergh, Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. Wien, xxxiil.,
1884, p. 144-9, Pl. vi., f. 10, Pl. x, f. 8-9, Reis. im Arch. der
Phil. 1. (2), 1892, p. 1146.

Hab.—Sydney Harbour (Angas).

147

PLACOMOPHERUS INSIGNIS, Smith.

Plocamophorus insignis, Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884,
peob, Plievi., tf. Boy:
Hab.—Albany Island, Queensland (Alert).

Genus Acanthodoris, Gray, 1857.
ACANTHODORIS METULIFERA, Bergh.

A. metulifera, Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. vi. (2),
HUD Peo, Fl. Vilke f4.0-6)
Hab.—Ulverstone, Tasmania (Miss Lodder).

UNCLASSIFIED SPECIES.
DoRIS ARBUTUS, Angas.
Jicumn. de, Conch.xm,, 1864,.p.47,.0 1. iv., 1.4. dd.

veda wicoc. inn. N.S. W.,.1v;,,18/9, p: 291, Pl. xvu.
Hab.—Coogee.

DoRIS CHRYSODERMA, Angas.
Journ. de Conch. xi., 1864, p. 46, Pl. iv., f. 3.
Hab --Sydney Harbour.
Doris cotuatTatTa, Abraham.
roc, Zool. Soc:, 1877, p. 205, 255, Pl) xxix., f. 25-26.
Hab.—Port Essington.
Doris PECULIARIS, Abraham.
Proc, Aool.soc:, 181i; p. 2lly 2b8,cb 1) xxx., fs 15-17.
Hab.—Port Lincoln, S.A.
Doris ANALAMPULLA, Abraham.
Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877; p. 205;,254, Pl. xxix., f) 8-10.
Hab.— Australia.
Doris oprusa, Stimpson.
Proc. Acad. N. Sc., Philad., vii.5°1855, p. 389.
Hab.—Sydney Harbour.
Doris ExcavaTa, Stimpson.

ProchsAcad. N. Se; Philadt, “vir; -1855;—p. 389 «(not
D. excavata, Pease).
Hab.—Sydney Harbour.

Doris, sp.
W. S. Kent, Great Barrier Reef, 1893, p. 362, pl. xiu..

Hab.—Queensland.

148

Doris, sp.
W. 8. Kent, Great Barrier Reef, 1893, p. Be pe Bill.,
ele
Hab.—Queensland.
ANCULA, Sp.
W. S. Kent, Great Barrier Reef, 1893, p. 362, pl. xiii.,
eee
Hab.—Queensland.
| NUDIBRANCHIATE MOLLUSC.
W. S. Kent, Great Barrier Reef, 1893, p. 362, pl. xiii.,
TS:

abh.—Queensland.
Obs.—Perhaps a Phyllidia.

SUB-ORDER ASCOGLOSSA.
FAMILY ELYSIIDA.
Genus Elysia, Risso, 1818.

ELYSIA AUSTRALIS, Quoy & Gaimard.

Actawon australis, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. Astrolabe, Zool.
1832; p.. 317; Pl -xxiv.; f. 18-20. H.. coogeensis, ~Angaes
Journ. de Conch. x11.,,1864, p:.69, Pl. iw.; 409.

_ Hab.—Syduney Harbour. (Astrolabe), Coogee (Angas)

TO BE EXCLUDED.

ALLPCRTIA EXPANSA, Ten.-Woods.
A. expansad, Ten.-Woods, ‘Proc. Roy: Soc., Tas., 1876,
p. 22 .

Hab.—Southport, Tasmania.

Obs.—In a paper read (June 10, 1902) to the Royal
Society, Tasmania, but still unpublished, Hedley points out
that this name was based on a Planarian worm, Polycelis aus-
tralis, Schmarda.

REMARKS ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN SPECIES, INCLUDING
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
Scyllza pelagica, Linné.
Plate ix., figs. 1 and -2
S. pelagica, Linn. Syst. Nat. x., 1875, 1., p. 644, 656.
Id., Cuvier, Ann. du Mus. vi., 1804, p. 424, etce., ete.
Several divergeut forms lie before us, but after consult-
ing Bergh’s criticisms on the species, and its variations, we

do not hesitate to include them all under the one widespread
species. The main differences are in the length of the dorsal

149

lobes and the colouration, the former feature depending
largely upon the degree of contraction, and the latter, no
doubt, upon the colour of the seaweed upon which the animal
lived.

Dim.—The largest individual that has ‘so far been found
in South Australia measures 42 millimetres in length, the
length of the lobes being 16, and height of body 21, making
a total height of 37 mm. |

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, ‘off Antechamber Bay,
Kangaroo Island, January, 1903 (Verco): thrown up on Port
Willunga beach (Newland).

Pleurophyllidia cygnea, Bergh.
Plate x., figs. 1 and 2.; Plate x1., figs. 1-3 ; Plate xu., figs. 1-6.

_P. cygnea, Bergh, Malakol, Blatter xxin., 1876, p. 9,
Pl. i., figs. 1-7. Zd., Semper’s Reisen im Arch. der Phil. u.
2», 1892, p. 1063.

With some confidence we apply Bergh’s name to a species
which we have obtained from St. Vincent Gulf and Sydney
Harbour respectively. The species appears to be rare and
not to inhabit the beach zone. Since the original description
of the animal from the Swan River, Western Australia
(whence it takes its name), it has not been re-taken by any
collector. That description was based on an old spirit speci-
men. We add the following account drawn from a living
animal : —

Body elongate, oblong; sides nearly parallel, terminating
in a blunt point posteriorly: dorsal surface flat, sloping
towards the posterior extremity. Mantle (notheum) fairly
ample, slightly waved along the edge, and extending from
behind the rhinophores: ornamented longitudinally, with a
series of roughly parallel, black and yellowish, undulating
ridges, the medial of which extending throughout the whole
length, the lateral passing out at the sides, bordered with
yellow. The lobe-like veil is colourless, edged with yellow,
and with a few yellow spots in its centre. Foot dilated later-
ally in front, tapering behind ; the edge waved and extending
to beyond the sides of body ; it is flat, grooved longitudinally
along the centre posteriorly, and does not project appreciably
behind the mantle. Rhinophores longitudinally laminate,
pink, contractile. Branchie pink, on the under side of the
lateral projection of the mantle. Mouth prominent. Geni-
tal orifice and anus prominent on the right side, the latter
19 mm. behind the former. The entire under-surface a uni-
form light crimson. Bai

Radula pale yellow. Lateral spines numerous, about 70,
of equal size, except the most central, which are smaller than

150

the rest. Average length of lateral spines, "27 mm. The
minutely denticulated margin was not observed. Between
the lateral spines and central plate, with its cuspidated edge,
an irregularly triangular, plane plate.

Dim.—Length 82, breadth 34 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, off Antechamber Bay,
Kangaroo Island, January, 1903.

Obs.—The mollusc was kept alive for several days in a
glass of sea water, and it was still alive when transferred to
the preservative. It has retained its colour remarkably well
in a weak solution (3 per cent.) of formaline.

Archidoris varia, Abraham.
Plate v., figs: 1-5.

Doris variabilis, Angas, Journ. de Conch. xu., 1864, p.
44, Pl. iv., fig. 1 (not Doris variabilis, Kelaart, Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (3), 11., 1859, p. 300). Doris varia, Abraham,
Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 209. Doris praetenera, Abraham,
Proe., Zool. Soc., 1877, ,.p.258, Pl. xxx., fig. 10-12;

This species is as abundant in South Australian waters
as in Sydney Harbour.

In addition to the characters indicated by Angas we
note that the skin is soft, and, in preserved specimens, has a
flabby appearance. In dead examples the rugosities of the
back sometimes disappear. The rhinophora arise from ele-
vated conical sheaths, and are ornamented with about 24
lamella. Oral tentacles, with a deep longitudinal groove on
the exterior side. Branchial plumes five, tripinnate. In
colour the species ranges from pale yellowish (St. Vincent
Gulf) to dark reddish-brown (Port River). The wrinkles
on the back are outlined and exaggerated by a mesh-work of
dark lines. The sole of the foot is white, edged with rich
orange, and through the thin skin the liver is visible. Along
the edge of the mantle muscle-fibres are discernible as short,
white, radiating lines.

Radula amber yellow. Lateral spines hamate, nume-
rous, about 70 on either side of each transverse row, de-
creasing very gradually in size inwardly. Average height of
spines, “3 mm. No central spine. Twenty-three rows of
spines in specimen examined. © -O-C.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, St. Vincent Gulf, Janu-
ary, 1903, and Spencer Gulf (Verco); Port River, in 4
fathoms, April, 1902 (Field Naturalists) ; taken at low water,
Port Noarlunga (Ashby): Port Noarlunga (Newland).

Obs.—This species has hitherto been classified in Doris.
On account of the general form, grooved tentacles, and rad-
ula. we propose to include it in Archidoris.

151

Archidoris staminea, spec. nov.
Plate vi., figs. 3 and 4.

Body irregularly elliptical, very slightly narrower pos-
teriorly, convex. Cloak ample, frilled along the border ;
colour, a uniform tint of yellow; roughened by very nume-
rous small tubercular elevations and depressions, which cover
the skin as separate, stellate, or radiate groups of notches ;
the underside of the mantle, of a similar vellow colour, 1s
marked with vein-like threadlets, multiply dividing and
branching towards the outer edge. Foot rounded anteriorly,
sides almost parallel, terminating in a blunt point, slightly
channelled; colour yellow, darkened somewhat in the centre
by the appearance of the liver through the skin. Dorsal ten-
tacles clavate, situated rather far anteriorly. Oral tentacles
linear, prominent. Eyes visible in small examples as little
black specks behind the rhinophores.

Dim.—ULength 32, breadth 19 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, Backstairs Passage,
January, 1903 (Verco).

Staurodoris pustulata, Abraham.
Plate ix., fig. 3.

Doris pustulata, Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
205, Pl. xxix., figs. 18, 19. Staurodoris (?) pustulata,
Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. ii. (2), 1892, p. 1093.

The species before us corresponds well with that described
by Abraham, but as that description was taken from spirit
specimens, we add the following account of the live ani-
mal : —

Body elliptical, moderately convex. Mantle ample with
a slightly waved margin: of an uncommon greenish-grey
ground colour, covered with numerous opaque, yellow, warty
tubercles of various sizes. standing out prominently from the
darker background like golden beads. Foot tapers posteriorly
to a blunt point, well within the mantle-margin; colour of
the entire under-surface, a light flesh-red. | Rhinophores
completely retractile within cavities, the openings to which
are surrounded with a circlet of nodulations. Branchial
plumes, seven, tripinrate, of a deeper shape of grey.

Radula straw-yellow. Lateral spines numerous, about
68 on either side, increasing in size from centre outwards, no
central spine, from 25 to 30 rows in specimen examined.
5 Gopal @ alo Sec

Dim.—Length 20, breadth 11 mm.

Hab.—-Dredged in 20 fathoms, Backstairs Passage, Janu-
ary, 1903 (Verco).

152

Alloiodoris marmorata, Bergh.
Plate viu., figs. 1 and 2

Alloiodoris marmorata, Bergh, Reis. im Areh. der Phil.
1; 1904. p., 4a e le i. digs. 12-19)

The identification of an unfigured species must always
be a matter of some misgiving. None of the South Aus-
tralian examples attain the size given by the author for Tas-
manian specimens. In other respects the description har-
monises so well with the animals before us that we have pre-
ferred to use Dr. Bergh’s name for them. We were unable
to detect the denticules on the lateral teeth. The following
account was. prepared from living specimens : —

Body elliptic, symmetrically rounded at both ends,
moderately convex. Colour yellowish-white to greyish-
brown, covered with minute spiculose elevations on the dor-
sal surface, which impart to it the brownish tint; also, with
less numerous, larger elevations, surrounded by irregular
circles of deep brown. The latter occasionally have a centre
of opaque white, surrounded by a ring of reddish-brown, the
whole giving the impression of miniature craters. Ventral
surface translucent, white; irregularly sprinkled over with
asymmetrical brown spots, either isolated or arranged in
small groups. Mantle considerably broader than the foot,
with a slightly undulating margin; fairly thin along the
border, so that the colour-markings of the dorsal surface are
visible from the under-side. Foot white, with few scattered
spots of brown. Rhinophores and branchiz brown, the lat-
ter seven or eight in number. Larger individuals have come
under our notice since this description.

Dim.—ULength 22°5, breadth 10 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in four fathoms, Port River, December,
1901 (Field Naturalists) ; taken at low water on rocks, covered
with seaweed, off Edithburg, Yorke’s Peninsula, January,
1903 (Basedow).

Halgerda graphica, spec. nov.
Plate i1., figs. 1-4.

Body squat, of elliptic Hanh symmetrically rounded at
both ends, strongly convex. Colour opaque white, liver
faintly visible through the mantie. Ornamented in the fol-
lowing remarkable manner:-—-The surface of the mantle is
divided somewhat regularly into quadrilateral figures, on
either side of a distinct central line, by slightly elevated ridges
of a rich orange-yellow colour ; within these divisions are simi-
lar elevated curves and lines, in places semi-symmetrical with
regard to a dark central spot, almost invariably present in
the centre of each division, but easily detachable by slight

153

abrasion. Under side of mantle white, sparsely dotted with
large and small black spots, irregularly spaced. Foot rounded
in front, sides approximately parallel and slightly frilled,
ending posteriorly in an obtuse point, much narrower than
mantle ; colour opaque white, fringed with a deep orange-yel-
low border. Dorsal tentacles comparatively small, trun-
cated, retractile within low sheaths, brown at the summit,
white at the base. Oral tentacles, fairly long, linear, rounded
in front. Genital aperture inconspicuous, situated about
one-third the whole length from anterior end. Branchial
plumes six, small, black, finely laciniated.

Radula light straw-coloured. Lateral spines numerous,
about 40 on either side; hooked, smooth, rapidly increasing
in size outwards, the three most lateral, however, small.
Average height of spines, 38 mm. No central spine. About
40 curved rows in specimen examined. Formula, 40°0°40.

Dim.—Total length 45, breadth 30, length of foot 42 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, off Antechamber Bay,
Kangaroo Island, January, 1903 (Verco). Dr. Verco has
dredged two individuals of this peculiar form on two sepa-
rate occasions. In the Australian Museum, Sydney, there is a
single specimen, collected on the beach at Middle Harbour
after a gale, which 1s probably identical.

Obs.—Bergh’s definition of Halgerda mentions that the
lateral teeth of the radula are furnished with fine denticules,
but as Eliot finds (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1903, p. 373) that this is
not a constant feature, we have not considered the simple
teeth of our species a bar to its admission in this genus.

The remarkable and artificial appearance presented by
the ornamentation of this species resembles the hieroglyphic
markings of primitive man, and suggests the species-name.

Hypselodoris epicuria, spec. nov.
Plate vu. figs 1-3.

Body elliptic, oblong, fairly convex, highest in region
anterior to branchie. Mantle spiculose, of a rich red colour
and covered with numerous silvery-white spiculose elevations,
of a lighter shade, with a single row of dark red dots. Foot
laterally expanded and slit in front, with a median groove,
tapering behind; border waved; colour white, with a single
row of largish yellow dots along the upper edge, and the
upper surface of the tail with a faint tint of violet or rose.
Both the rhinophoral and anal cavities are encircled with a
stellate coronation of opaque white. Rhinophores surmount-
ed on a white stalk, with 17 or 18 lamine and non-retrac-
tile. Branchial plumes five, non-retractile, mono-pinnate,
with indication of bipinnation at the summit: colour white.

154

Oral tentacles linear, projecting considerably beyond the
mantle border when in motion.

Radula. Lateral spines numerous, about 30; hooked,
the inner edge denticulated ; surmounted on a strong base.

Dim.—Length 34, breadth 8 mm.

Hab.—Thrown up during a gale on Port Willunga beach
(Newland).

Albania (?) verconis, spec. nov.
Plate iv., figs. 1-4.

Body oblong-ovate, rounded in front, moderately .flat-
tened on top; sides elevated ; a strongly acute tail with a dis-
tinct central dorsal ridge, extends beyond the mantle edge
when in motion ; on death this tail curled up. Colour, exqui-
sitely tinted dorsally, with faint, semi-transparent, reddish-
violet near the border, fading imperceptibly to a light brown
in the central region, which is further traversed by a fine net-
work of opaque white lines, not discernible nearer the margin ;
ventrally of a uniform pale violet. Mantle serrated along the
sides, and in parts upturned, produced frontally. Head,
large, distinct. Foot acutely pointed, with a border frill.
Rhinophores small, clavate, laminate, with about twelve
lamine, non-retractile. Genitalia large, situated about one-
fifth the whole length from the anterior end. Branchial
plumes ten, simply pinnate, completely surrounding the vent,
non-retractile ; colour, opaque white.

Radula. Colour, brownish-yellow, deepest in shade at
the dilated end of odontophore. Lateral spines, about 22 on
either side, stout, hooked, the central four or five trifidated.
No rachidian. About 42 straightish rows in specimen examin-
ed. 22°0°22.

Dim.—ULength 27, breadth 11, height 9 mm.

Hab.—A single individual dredged in 20 fathoms, of
Antechamber Bay, Kangaroo Island, January, 1903 (Vere).

Obs.—With considerable hesitation we have referred this
species to Albania. The general appearance, branchie, and
serrate edge of the mantle suggest this genus. Dr. Colling-
wood describes a frontal veil in the type-species ; this was not
observed in the living animal. The only specimen that was
found has so shrunk that we cannot now decide on its ab-
sence or presence.

Ceratosoma brevicaudatum, Abraham.
Plate 1., figs. 1-4
Ceratosoma brevicaudatum, Abraham, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (4), xviii., 1876, p. 142, Pl. viii., fig. 6. Ceratosoma
oblongum, Abraham, loc. cit., p. 148, Pl. vii., figs. 7, 7a, Th.
Id., Bergh, Reis. im Arch. der Phil. 11. (2), 1892, p. 1111.

155

Dr. Bergh brackets this species with CU. caledonicum,
Fischer, C. tenuwe, Abraham, and (’. oblongum, Abraham. It
seems to us that Fischer’s description indicates a species in
which the lobes of the nothaeum are more developed: the
colour scheme of the New Caledonian species is quite unlike
that of the Australian. The difference between C. brevicauda-
tum and C. oblongum seems to us merely a matter of preser-
vation. Out of a parcel resulting from the same dredging we
have seen individuals, some of which shrunk to the shape of
oblongum and others assumed in contraction the form of hre-
vicaudatum. The following description was drawn up from
living specimens : —

Body large, elongate, dorsally flat, rounded in front,
sides nearly parallel, except along a shght lateral enlarge-
ment in the centre, and tapering to an obtuse point behind ;
sides much elevated, especially in the region of the vent.
Cloak obsolete, sub-quadrangular, with an undulate
margin, and ending posteriorly in a _ peculiar nipple-
like protuberance. Colour, beautifully shaded with tints of
buff to light brown, usually of a deeper colour at the border,
and gradually fading inwards, leaving along the margin of
the dorsal surface a series of alternate light and dark patches,
there being in the centre of the former in each case a round,
violet-purple spot surrounded by a uniform ring of reddish-
purple. The central area of this surface is richly sprinkled
with circular spots of varying size, of a light violet-purple
colour, with a darker border, and delicately surrounded in
some cases by a rim of light lemon-yellow; the larger spots of
this series are also rendered conspicuous by being situated
within the more faintly tinted patches of the cloak. The
“post-branchial flesh protuberance” is neatly decorated by a
series of brown circles, placed contiguously so as to produce a
regular network with meshes of different dimensions. The
sides are somewhat similarly marked to the cloak, being
lightly tinted and richly sprinkled with three irregular, longi-
tudinal rows of spots, the two outer rows of rich purple, the
inner of a lighter violet-purple. The median row does not
extend to beyond the length of the«cloak, and thus leaves the
dorsal portion of the tail marked with deep purple spots only.
The spots are in this portion irregularly scattered, and often
appear as small groups of two or three; they are more nume-
rous and smaller in size than those upon the cloak. Foot
linear, tapering posteriorly to a blunt point; colour white.
Dorsal tentacles clavate, obliquely laminated ; the number of
lamelle varying from 16 to 30 or more; colour rich orange
yellow. Sheaths very slightly elevated. Oral tentacles stout,
sub-conical, tapering towards the points. Genital aperture

156

prominent. Branchial plumes twelve, intergrown at the base,
and rather difficult to separate, incompletely surrounding the
tubular anus in horseshoe shape, the posterior portion being
bare ; they are retractile with the anus into a common cavity ;
the five posterior plumes on either side terminate in the same
foot stem respectively, the remaining two plumes are unequal
in size. Colour, rich reddish-yellow.

Radula. Deep yellow to brown in colour. Lateral spines
numerous, about 140 on either side; simply hooked, with an
average length of -2 mm.; about 80 rows in specimen examin-
ed. No central spine. The shape of the odontophore and tiie
arrangement of the spines are similar to the corresponding
features of Doris adelaide, spec. nov. Formula,an -0o:a.

Dim.—Length 111, breadth 25, height 31 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, Gulf of St. Vincent, ani
off Antechamber Bay, Kangaroo Island, January, 1903 (Dr.
Verco) ; taken at low water, Port Noarlunga (Dr. Torr and L
Ashby); and Salt Creek Bay, Yorke Peninsula (E. H. Mat-
thews).

Obs.—This fine species appears to be fairly plentiful and
well distributed within our gulf. Dr. Verco has dredged :t oa
various occasions. Though specifically identical, the littoral
specimens are nowhere nearly as large as the deep-water forms.
The specimens from Antechamber Bay, in particular, deserve
mention for their large size and fine colouration.

Ceratosoma adelaidz, spec. nov.
Plate x., fig. 3-4.

Body small, flattened on top, elongate, a little wider at
the head than further posteriorly, terminating in a small tail.
Mantle sparingly developed. Foot rounded in front, attenu-
ated behind, projecting to no considerable extent beyond tke
mantle. Colour white underneath, scantily spotted with
light lilac along the sides; the dorsal surface, for the most
part of a pale buff colour, is bordered on either side by some-
what regularly spaced deep reddish-violet spots (about eight
on either side), which are made the more pronounced by being
surrounded each by a whitish space, the interspaces between
these spots being of a somewhat deeper shade of brown ‘han
the rest; the central area is decorated with rows of light
bluish spots. Dorsal tentacles club-shaped, obliquely tami-
nated, orange-red in colour. Branchial plumes coherent at
their base, apparently six, non-retractile, of the same tint as
the rhinophores.

Dim.—Length 8, breadth 3 mm.

Hab.—Taken at low water off Marino Rocks in Decem-
ber, 1901; and also off Edithburg, Yorke Peninsula, in Janu-
ary, 1903.

157

Obs.—The species appears to live on the under side of
rocks covered with seaweed, and partially buried in soft mud.

Doriopsis aurea, Quoy & Gaim.
Plate vu., fig. 4.

Doris aurea, Quoy & Gaim., Voy. de l’ Astrolabe, Zool. 11.,
1832, p. 265, Pl. xix., figs. 4-7. Doriopsis aurea, Bergh,
Reisen im Arch. der Phil. u. (2), 1892, p. 1122.

The type of this species was dredged in deep water in
Jervis Bay, New South Wales. Except that the French
authors describe their species as over two inches in length
(ours is only 15 mm. long and 6 mm. broad), the original ac-
count harmonises well with that of South Australian ex-
amples. The white dots on the back are more regularly dis-
posed in Quoy & Gaimard’s figure, and the foot in South Aus-
tralian specimens is white; whereas, in the figure quoted, it
is red.

Examples from New South Wales are not accessible to us
at present, but in view of the close correspondence between
our material and Quoy & Gaimard’s description we are un-
willing to differentiate our form.

Hab.—Dredged in 53 fathoms, off Orontes Shoal, Yorke
Peninsula ; also in 9 fathoms on weed, opposite the American
River, Kangaroo Island, January, 1903 (Verco).

Doriopsis carneola, Angas.
; Plate vi., figs. 1 and 2.

Doris carneola, Angas, Journ. de Conch. x1i., 1864, p. 48.
Plate iv., fig. 7. Doriopsis carneola, Bergh, Reisen im Arch.
der Phil, 11. (2), 1892, p. 1122.

A species has been taken by one of us at Marino, South
Australia, which, neglecting slight locality variations, must
be regarded as Angas’s Doris carneola. It measures 29 mm.
in length, 174 in breadth, as against Angas’s data of 28 and
17 mm. respectively. The colouration of one South Austra-
lian example was identical with that of the Port Jackson
type, while another individual from Marino had quite a dif-
ferent colour scheme. It was of a dirty greyish-white on the
dorsal surface, speckled with silvery-white dots, which were
connected by a faint network of white lines, the central space
in the region of the liver appearing pinkish or brown; ven-
tral surface white. The under side of the mantle of both in-
dividuals is marked with delicate vein-like, multiple branch-
ing lines. The mantle is ample, hard, thick, and fortified
with numerous cale-spicules. The foot is large, and termi-
nates bluntly. The rhinophores are clavate, with about 10
lamine; situated rather far anteriorly; colour yellow or

158

white. We do not note the projecting sheaths of these ten-
tacles, that are apparently represented in Angas’s sketch.
Branchial plumes, four, tripinnate; colour, light orange or
white.

Hab.—Marino, taken from under the rocks, at low water,
March, 1902 (Basedow).

Nembrotha (?) verconis, spec. nov.
Plate i1., figs. 1-3.

Body large, linear, oblong, swollen in centre, and taper-
ing behind. Colour, rich lemon-yellow, with large discon-
nected blunt tubercles of deep prussian blue arranged very
indistinctly parallel to the edge of the foot. The skin is very
delicate, and peels off easily on abrasion; it is noticeably
wrinkled, the pits of the folds thus produced appearing of a
deeper shade than the rest. Cloak almost entirely wanting.
Frontal margin (veil) small, of deep prussian blue colour,
composed of three semi-circular dilations, the two lateral of
which arch laterally around the dorsal tentacles on either
side, then gradually fading to ni/ posterior to them. Foot
square in front, dilated outwardly at the anterior end, sides
slightly frilled, approximately parallel, passing posteriorly to
a bluntish point, colour light sea-blue, with a deep blue border ;
liver visible as a faint brown patch in the centre. Dorsal
tentacles sub-clavate, tapering, laminated; about 30 slightly
oblique laminz, non-retractile; colour deep prussian blue,
with a yellow stalk. Eyes not visible. Genital aperture pro-
minent, situated one-fourth the whole length from the fron-
tal margin; of a lighter (greenish) blue colour than the
tubercles. Branchial plumes five, tripinnate, almost com-
pletely surrounding the anus; colour dark yellow at the base,
passing into a rich blue along the stems and delicately fringed
with small purple tufts.

Radula. Marginal plates four, subquadrate, curved over
in front, the most remote very small or wanting ; lateral spines
one, large, hooked, bifidated; possessing a peculiar spiral
twist. Central plate subquadrate-ovate. Colour light straw
to amber yellow. About 18 rows. Formula, 4+1°1:1+4.

Dim.—Length 55, breadth 12 mm.

Hab.—Dredged in 20 fathoms, off Newland Head, Back-
stairs Passage, January, 1903 (Verco).

Obs.—The indications of the existence of a cloak are al-
most entirely wanting, beyond the slight continuation of the
frontal margin past the dorsal tentacles and the somewhat
linear arrangement of the tubercles. This species seems
clearly separated from co-generic forms by its vivid prim-
rose colour. A large specimen is in the Australian Museum

159

collection ; it measures 40 mm. in length, whereas the con-
tracted body of our type barely reaches 30 mm. We have
much pleasure in dedicating this beautiful species to Dr. J. C.
Verco.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Prats I.

Fig. 1. CeraTrosoMA BREVICAUDATUM, Abraham—Deep-water
form. Dorsal view. Slghtly enlarged.

Fig. 2. CeRATOSOMA BREVICAUDATUM, Abraham—Deep-water
form. Side view. Slightly enlarged.

Fig. 3. CERATOSOMA BREVICAUDATUM, A braham—Shallow-water
form. Natural size.

Fig. 4. An enlarged branchia of (. brevicaudatum, Abraham.

Puate IT.
Fig. 1. NEMBROTHA VERCONIS, spec. nov.—Side view. 2.
Fig. 2. NEMBROTHA VERCONIS, spec. nov.—Ventral view. 2.
Fig. 3. A single row of teeth from the radula of N. verconis,

Prats III.

1. HateGeRDA GRAPHICA, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. ~ 1}.
. 2. HALGERDA GRAPHICA, spec. nov.—Ventral view x 1}.
Fig. 3. Teeth from the radula of H. graphica.
4. Enlarged teeth from the radula of H. graphica.

Puate. IV.
1, ALBANIA VERCONIS, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. x 3.
Fig. 2. ALBANIA VERCONIS, spec. nov.—Ventral view. x3.
Fig. 3. Teeth from the radula of A. verconis.
Fig. 4. Radula of A. verconis, the cross lines representing
transverse rows of teeth.

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. ArcHIpoRIS vARIA, Abraham—Dorsal view. x 1.
Fig. 2. ARCHIDORIS vaRIA, 4braham—Ventral view. x 1.
Fig. 3. Teeth from the radula of A. varia.
Fig. 4. An enlarged branchia of A. varia.
Fig. 5. Radula of A. varia.

Puate VI.
Fig. 1. Dortopsis caRNEOLA, Angas—Ventral view. x14,
Fig. 2. Doriopsis carRNEoLA, Angas-—Dorsalview. x 1+
Fig. 3. ARCHIDORIS STAMINEA, spec. nov.—Ventral view. x 23.
Fig. 4. ARCHIDORIS STAMINEA, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. x 24.

Prats VII.
Fig. 1. Hypsenoporis EPICURIA, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. x 3.
Fig. 2: HypsELODORIS EPICURIA, spec. nov.—Ventral view. x 3.
Fig. 3. An enlarged branchia of H. epicuria.
Fig. 4. Doriopsis atREA, Quoy & Gaimard—Dorsal view.

x 53-5.

Prats VIII.
Fig. 1. AtLoroporIs MARMORATA, Bergh—Dorsal view. x 3}.
Fig. 2. ALLoIODORIS MARMORATA, Bergh—Ventral view. x 3}.

160

Puate IX

Fig. 1. Scyriaa prertacica, Linné—Side view. Lobes con-
tracted. »~x 34 :

Fig. 2. Syoruaa petacica, Linné—-Side view. Lobes expand-
ed. =

x
Fig. 3. Sravroporis pustuLata, Abraham—Dorsal view. » 33.

PLATE X.
Fig. 1. PLeUROPHYLLIDIA CYGNEA, Bergh—Dorsal view. Ani-
mal fully extended. Slightly enlarged.
Fig. 2. PLEUROPHYLLIDIA cy@NnEA, Bergh—Ventral view. Ani-
mal partially contracted. Slightly enlarged.
Fig: 3. CeraATOSOMA ADELAID®, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. x 103.
Fig. 4. CERATOSOMA ADELAIDA, spec. nov.—Dorsal view. x 33.

Prate XI.

Fig. 1. PLrevropHYLLIDIA cyG@nnA, Bergh—Side view. Ani-
mal contracted. Natural size.

Fig. 2. PLEUROPHYLLIDIA CYGNEA, Bergh—Front view. Ani-
mal contracted. Natural size.

Fig. 3. PLreuropnYyLiipia cyGnea, Bergh—Ventral view Ani-
mal contracted. Natural size.

Puate XII.

Fig. 1. Radula of Pleuropiyllidia cygnea, Bergh, showing ar-
rangement of transverse rows of teeth.

Fig. 2. Rachidian cusp with its denticles, of the radula of
P. cygnea

Figs. 3 and 3a. Accessory vlates connecting the rachidian
with the laterals of the radula of P. cygnea.

Fig 4. Lingual spines of P. cygnea—Exterior aspect.

Fig. 5. Lingual spines of P. cygnea—lInterior aspect.

Fig. 6. Mandible of P. cyqnea.

161

REPORT ON THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY MR. HERBERT
BASEDOW ON THEJSOUTH AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT
NORTH-WEST EXPEDITION, 1903.

By CuarLes HEDLEY.
(Communicated by HERBERT BasEpow. |
PLATE XXX.

[Read April 4, 1905.]

The Eremian Region has been shown by the investiga-
tions of the Horn Expedition to possess a considerable and
varied snail population. Desert influence has left its stamp
on the larger snail shells. Though quite unrelated to the
forms that people the arid regions of Asia, Africa, or
America, these Australian shells repeat in their chalky tex-
ture and rough sculpture the features of foreign species sub-
jected to similar environment.

The collection which Mr. Basedow kindly invited me to
examine has both added to the lst of known forms and en-
larged the range of those previously described.

I am indebted to Dr. J. C. Verco for an opportunity of
examining the types of several species described by the late
Professor R. Tate.

Mr. Basedow has generously deposited in the Australian
Museum the collection here discussed.

Diplodon wilsonii, Lea.
For bibliography see Simpson, Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum
emt; LOU. ps :893.
Hab.—Algebuckinna Waterhole and Warrungudinna
Waterhole, in the bed of the Alberga River.

Isidora newcombi, Adams & Angas.
For a discussion of this Eremian species, see Tate, Rep.
Horn. Exped. 11.. Zool., 1896, p. 213.
Hab.—Day’s Gully and Hector Pass, Mann Ranges: In-
dulkanna Creek, Warrungudinna Waterhole, on the Alberga.

Thersites basedowi, n. sp.
Plate: sxx} Migs) dst 2yds
Shell discoidal, of thin and light substance, spire almost
flat, umbilicus broad and shallow. Colour buff. Whorls
four, parted by sharply impressed sutures. Last whorl
acutely keeled at the periphery, rising at the last half-turn
above the level of the coil, previous to plunging deeply below
it, freed at the aperture from the adjoining whorl. Sculp-
I

162

ture: irregular, distant growth lines, and close-set microsco-
pic grains (fig. 2). Aperture very oblique, nearly horizontal ;
lip entire, a little curled back, broadly expanded. Maj.
diam., 19 mm.; min. diam., 15 mm.; height, 6 mm.

A smaller, less sharply keeled specimen from the Mann
Range is regarded for the present as a variety.

Compared with its nearest ally, 7. howardi, Angas, the
novelty is smaller, flatter, without colour bands, but with
more decided granular sculpture. A specimen which I dis-
sected containing a generative system characteristic of Ther-
sites, and comparable to that of 7. setigera, Tate, Horn Ex-
ped., Zool., p. 222, fig. F.

Hab.—Musgrave Ranges.

Xanthomelon sublevatum, Tate.
Plate xxx, fos. 1, 9,

Thersites sublevata, Tate, Rep. Horn Exped., Zool. 1
1896, p. 196, Pl. xvii., fig. 5

A specimen from the Musgrave Ranges extends the
known distribution of this species. It was identified by com-
parison with examples named by its author. As the figure
quoted is unsatisfactory, others are now presented.

Xanthomelon perinflatum, Pfeiffer.
Apparertly this snail is both most numerous individually
and widest spread in this region. Its range is discussed by
Professor Tate (op. cit., p. 198).
Hab.—Musgrave Ranges.

Xanthomelon flindersi, Ad. & Angas.
Hab.—Musgrave Ranges.

Xanthomelon angasianum, Pfeiffer.
Hab.—Musgrave Ranges.

Xanthomelon clydonigerum, Tate, var.
Plate xxx.,, figs.10, 11, 12.
Thersites (Gly ptorhagada ) clydonagera, Tate, Rep. Horn
Exped., Zool. 11., 1896, p. 195, Pl. xix., fig. 24.
The type of this species, now 1n the possession of Dr. J.
C. Verco, is bleached, and, through a malformation of the

later whorls, is subecalar. Compared with Mr. Basedow’s
examples the unique type is, therefore, more elevated ; it is
also smaller and rather more coarsely sculptured. As the

type is not only in poor condition, but distorted, I have hesi-
tated in regarding the apparent difference as of specific value,
and have compromised by offering a description and figures
of the shell obtained by Mr. Basedow under this title.

The reproductive system, a partial dissection of which is
here shown, demonstrates that the species is included in
Xanthomelon, as opposed to Thersites.

Shell depressedly globose, narrowly perforate, substance
rather light and thin. Colour cinnamon-brown, paler on the
base. Whorls five, parted by sharply impressed sutures.
Periphery rounded, but the flattening of the whorl above
suggests an incipient keel. The last whorl descends at the
aperture deeply and abruptly with a wavering suture. Sculp-
ture: the first two whorls are smooth to the eye, but under
the lens fine vermiculate etzhings appear. The adult sculp-
ture commences suddenly, and consists of close, fine, irregu-
lar, backwardly curved riblets, which grow lamellate near the
aperture. During their traverse of the whorls the riblets
sometimes unite, divide or end untimely, while fresh threads
may be intercalated. At the periphery the riblets are especi-
ally prone to anastomose, on crossing the base they become
finer and more regular. Umbilicus very narrow, deep, with
a furrow entering spirally from under the columellar expan-
sion. Aperture oblique ovate, outer lip broadly expanded,
margins united by a callous ridge, columella partly arching
over the umbilicus.

Maj. diam., 22 mm.; minor diam., 18. mm.: height,
15 mm.

Hah.—Musgrave Ranges.

Xanthomelon wilpenense, Tate.
Hadra wilpenensis, Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc., 8.A., 1894,
pode:
Hah.—-Nusgrave Ranges.
Xanthomelon radiatum, nh. sp.
Plate xxx., figs. 4, 5, 6.
Shell lenticular, solid, narrowly perforate, spire shghtly
elevated. Last whorl bluntly angled at the periphery, rather
swollen, and then much contracted behind the aperture.

Colour uniform isabelline. Whorls four, parted by an im-
pressed suture. Sculpture: First two whorls microscopi-

164

cally granose-vermiculate, remainder radiately ribbed. Ribs
regular, prominent, increasing in strength with the growth
of the shell, interstices deeply gouged, in breadth equalling
the ribs, on the last whorl numbering about 45. Umbilicus
oblong, narrow, and deep. Aperture oblique, lunate-ovate,
lip expanded and reflected, margins united by a notched, cal-
lous film.

Maj. diam., 12 mm.; min. diam., 10 mm.; height, 6 mm.

The nearest relation to this seems to be Angasella papil-
losa, Tate, which is larger, with fainter radial sculpture.

Hab.—Mount Davies, Tomkinson Ranges, and Mus-
grave Ranges.

Xanthomelon asperrimum, 0. sp.

Shell depressed, acutely carinated, narrowly perforated,
thin, dull. Colour, uniform chalk white. Whorls four,
flattened above, spire plane or elevated. Suture wound under
the peripheral shelf of earlier whorls. Last whorl descend-
ing in front. Sculpture: The first whorl and a half finely sha-
greened, on the rest of the shell large and prominent grains
are thickly set in anterior and posterior curves, which inter-
sect each other at right angles. At the periphery the shell is
pinched into a broad projecting keel. Base inflated. Um-
biliicus deep and narrow. Aperture oblique, lip sharp and
thin, a little expanded, columella arching over part of the
umbilicus. Margins united by a callus band.

Maj. diam., 20 mm.: min. diam., 16 mm; height, 9 mm.

The peculiar form of this species amply distinguishes it
from its congeners. The influence of desert conditions on the
sculpture of the shell, such as are shown by this species, has
been lucidly discussed by Dr. Dall (Proc. Acad. Philad.,
1896, p. 411).

Hah.—Mann Ranges.

165

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.
Figs. 1, 2, 3. Various aspects and magnified sculpture of
Thersites basedowi, Hedley.
Figs. 4, 5, 6. Various aspects of Xanthomelon radiatum,
Hedley.
5 Figs. 7, 8, 9. Various aspects of Xanthomelon sublevatum,
ate. -

Figs. 10, 11, 12. Various aspects of Xanthomelon clydoni-
gerum, Tate var.

166

NOTES ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MARINE MOLLUSCA, WITH
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.- PART Il.

By Jos. C. Varco, M.D. (lond.), F.R.C.S. (Emg:), sebe.
[Read April 4, 1905.]
PLATH EZ),
Calliostoma zietzi, spec. nov. Pl. xxxi., tigs. 1, 2, 3.

Shell small, conic, imperforate, moderately solid.
Whorls 8, including protoconch of one smooth turn. First two
spire whorls rounded and slightly mammillate, next three
straight-sloping, last two rather convex. Suture moderately
deep, slightly overhung by peripheral hra. Penultimate
whorl with 6 spiral cinguli and 2 inter-liral threadlets. Body
whorl with 6 cinguli, rather narrower than the interspaces,
and 5 threadlets; barely angulated below its centre by a
somewhat stouter cord; base rounded, with 8 concentric lire,
flat, and much wider than the interspaces. Spire and base
finely obliquely incised with growth lines, which cut the hre
less than the interspaces. Aperture roundly quadrate.
Columella nearly straight, slightly oblique and excavated, sub-
truncate below; outer lip simple crenulated by cinguli.
Height, 8 mm.; diameter of base, 5; aperture, 2°5.

Ornament.—Horn-coloured, peripheral band white. Main
cinguli on the spire and those on the base obscurely dotted
with light chestnut ; peripheral band with larger and plainer
spots.

Hab.—Backstairs Passage, St. Vincent Gulf, at 12, 17,
and 20 fathoms; 9 dead.

It is named after Mr. A. Zietz, F.L.S., of the Adelaide
Museum.

Gena terminalis, spec. nov. Pl. xxxi., figs. 4, 5.

Shell minute thin oblong-oval, sides parallel. Whorls 4,
spire terminal inconspicuous. Surface smooth and polished
but for miscroscopic accremental lines; no spiral strie or in-
cisions, except microscopic, on the base of the body-whorl.
Colour white, with crowded spiral bands of crescentic white
and dark and reddish-brown spots and blotches. Length,
5°75 mm.; width, 3 mm. Radula, @.1.(5.1.5.).1.4., 36 rows.

Hab.—Dredged alive, Wallaroo Bay, Spencer Gulf 15
fathoms; also alive and dead in deep water, St. Vincent Gulf.

Ohs.—The ornament varies greatly. The shell may be
blotched pink and white, and there may be numerous fine
spiral, hair-like, dark lines.

167

Diagnosis.—From G. strigosa, A. Adams. lt is smaller,
comparatively narrower, the spire is terminal, the aperture is
more oblong, the columella is straighter, the outer lp joins
the columella almost at a right angle. A juvenile G@. strigosa,
equal in size to an adult G. terminalis, has been drawn in
Plate xxxi., fig. 6, for comparison.

It very closely resembles Gena nigra, Quoy & Gaimard,
Voy. de l’Astrolabe, Zool., Vol. 11., p. 307, Plate Ixvi. (bis),
figs. 10, 11, 12: but their species, as figured, has its spire less
terminal, and rests more upon its two ends, and, according to
the dimensions given, is three times as large.

Astele calliston, spec. nov. Pl. xxxi., figs. 7, 8.

Shell conical, thin. Spire of nine whorls, including two
smooth apical turns; gradated. Whorls straight-sloping,
with crowded spiral lire, about 24 on the penultimate ; cross-
ed by oblique crowded accremental striz, producing sub-
lenticular pitting. Suture linear, immediately beneath the
prominent peripheral cord which gradates the spire. Body
whorl with suture slightly descending at the aperture; spiral
threadlets about 24 ; crowded fine sinuous oblique accremental
strie: periphery acutely angular, with a projecting round-
ed carina, spirally closely engraved on its upper surface, axi-
ally crossed by rounded strie, much more distant than the
accremental striz, provided at somewhat irregular intervals
with 16 rounded invalid tubercles. Base very flatly rounded
with 7 concentric narrow lire, the inner 4 closer than the
rest, which are separated by 4 to 6 inter-lirate striz. Umbili-
cus narrow, minutely axially incised. Aperture oblique,
roundly quadrate: outer lip slightly convex, thin, smooth
within, margin sinuously convex below the suture, concave
towards the periphery: basal lip convex, slightly effuse,
smooth within. Columella, upper third concave, the rest
straight, obliquely truncate below; callus at the base partly
bordering the umbilicus and attached to the columella along
a vertical groove.

Ornament.—Shell purple-brown, with somewhat oblique,
axial, creamy, rhomboidal flames, extending from suture to
suture, and nearly equalling the foundation colour in area.
On the peripheral carina, and hence above the sutures, they
are replaced by two or three creamy spots, while two or three
less marked white spots orcupy the intervals, and thus pick
out the tubercles of the carina. Every whorl is encircled by
four articulated colour bands, which in the white areas are
of a more opaque white than the rest of these areas, and ex-
tend slightly beyond them, and are crossed by narrow verti-
eal or oblique red lines, while in the purple areas they are of

168

a deeper purple tint, and are crossed by narrow axial white
lines. The base is of a lighter tint, the outer 6 cinguli of a
rose pink, minutely dotted with creamy white. The columella
and umbilicus are white, bordered outside with green, which
tints the inner two basal cinguli, and curls around the colu-
mella into the throat. The inner edge of the outer lip is
golden-brown and white, interior shining and _ nacreous.
Operculum horny multispiral, nucleus central, a radial cellu-
lar fringe-like film over the inner three-fourths of each spiral.
Height, 11°75 mm.; diameter, 9°75 ; aperture, 4.

Radula, @.1.5.1.5.1.~. Central rachidian heart-shap-
ed, narrow free end surmounted by small, slightly serrated
denticle; the other rachidians with trilobed cusps, which
gradually enlarge outwards; a single lateral with one cusp
trilobed at its base; marginals many unicuspidate, not ser-
rated.

Hab.—Spencer Gulf, 20 fathoms; 32 alive and dead.

Variations.—Some individuals are uniformly pinkish-
brown, with white peripheral tubercles, and four pink cin-
guli on each whorl articulated with white, the larger white
spots lying vertically between the supra-sutural tubercles,
while narrower, oblique white spots alternate in groups with
them.

Clanculus leucomphalus, spec. nov. Pi. xxxi, figs. 9, 10, 11.

Shell depressed conic, rather thin. Protoconch one turn

and a half smooth. Whorls 6, rapidly increasing, sloping
convex. Penultimate with 8 close-set spiral rows of
smooth ovate granules. Body-whorls with ten spiral

rows of granules above the acutely angled _peri-
phery, the granules of the infra - sutural row
are much larger and placed axially, the rest spl
rally ovate; and ten rows on the base of flatter, more quad-
rate, and more close-set granules. Oblique axial striz crowd
between the granules on the spire, but are obsolete on the
base.

Aperture quadrate oblique; outer lip crenulate, toothed
just within the margin opposite each spiral lira, within this
thickened and wrinkled, and in the throat lirate and na-
creous; basal lip crenulate, thickened within with 5 teeth
gradually enlarging towards the columella; columella oblique,
nearly straight, ending below in a prominent, obliquely fur-
rowed. but not bifid tooth, with a large tubercle at the junc-
tion of its upper and middle third, and with a flange through-
out its whole length bent towards the umbilicus. The umbili-
cus is wide and deep, with a funicle winding up its outer side
to the tubercle on the columella. The umbilical border over-

169

hangs, and has 6 medium-sized tubercles, and is margined by
a fiat, axially incised, spiral lira, with a threadlet on either
side.

Colour light ashen-grey, with obscure flames of deeper grey
or buff, and with numerous small pink dots on the second and
third whorls. The umbilicus and its margin are pure white,
the throat nacreous green.

Height, 8 mm.; diameter of base, 9°75 mm.

Hab.—Backstairs Passage, St. Vincent Gulf; dredged
alive in 20, 22, 23 fathoms, dead in 6 to 23 fathoms.

Dee oras. —The type poe Gray’s collection of Trochus
clangulus, Wood, in the Natural History Museum, London,
differs from our species in having a more sinuous columella,
due to a large tubercle at each end, and a median bulge, only
6 lire on the penultimate whorl, stouter and fewer lire in the
throat, a less rounded periphery, its colour light pink, with
pink spots on the base, and articulated deep pink just above
and below the suture, and green and red tints instead of light
ashen-grey with darker buff flammules.

Crassatellites ponderosus, Gmelin.

This is the name suggested by Mr. Hedley, in P.R.S. of
N.S.W., 1904, Part 1, page 198, for C. castanea, Reeve, as
also for CU’. kingicola, Lamk.; UC. donacina, Lamk.; C decipiens,
Reeve; (. errones, Reeve; CU. pulchra, Reeve; and C. cumingr,
A. Adams, which E. A. Smith and Brazier had previously
united under the name of CU. kingicola, Lamk. Gmelin’s
shell, which was first defined in pre-Linnean times by Chem-
nitz, is cited by von Martens in Malak. Blat. xix., 1872, page
30, as from New Guinea. In Syst. Nature, C. Linné, vi.
Vermes, page 3280, it is given as l’enws ponderosa, No. 54, as
inhabiting the Southern Ocean.

Some 40 specimens have heen dredged by me in South
Australian waters, of which 26 are single values. Living
individuals were found at 20 fathoms, off Normanville, at 19
fathoms off Eastern Cove, Kangaroo Island, and at 15 fa-
thoms off Wallaroo. These form the material on which the
following observations were based.

All the species above-named, except C. castanea, are
validly corrugated by sub-distant concentric ribs. Not one of
my forty examples is so corrugated. It is, therefore, least like
C. kingicola, Lamk. But I only possess one cabinet specimen
of each of them. Perhaps a large series would show examples
with smooth surfaces near the umbos.

Size.—The largest measures 115 mm. antero-posteriorly,
90 mm. umbo-ventrally, and 49 mm. in section, and weighs
ten ounces.

170

Shape.—This varies a good deal, as is noted in Conch.
Cab., Band x., Abtheil i., page 2; Taf. 1., fig. 1; Taf. vi.,
fig. 1, 1886, where two figures are given, one of a shell 88 mm.
by 75 by 42, and another much produced posteriorly, 98 by
73 by 50. One from Port Lincoln, a rounded form, is 112 mm.
by 93, while another very produced behind is 115 mm. by 90.
This is not merely a senile tendency, for the difference in con-
tour is found in young shells, and also in those of equal size
and apparently of similar age. In the produced individuals
the ventral outline, instead of being uniformly convex as far
as the postero-inferior angle, may be somewhat concave in
front of this.

Thickness.- It is very solid; the heaviest shell we have
on our coast; it may weigh 10°75 ounces. Often growth in
superficial area ceases after a time, and then the thickness
greatly increases. Thus a shell only 3°77 inches long and 3'1
deep is 2°05 in section, and weighs 10°75 ounces, whereas
another 4°25 inches long and 3°5 deep is only 1°9 inches in sec-
tion, and weighs but 8 ounces. The volume of the contained
molluse actually diminishes, the thickening taking place at
its expense. The muscular impressions appear deeply exca-
vated then, owing to the heaping up of shelly material around
the adductor muscles beneath the mantle. The ventral mar-
gin, instead of being sharp, is flattened for as much as an
inch, nearly at right angles to the external surface, and is in
some cases even incurved.

Pervostracum.—This is very durable, and even in dead
and decaying valves is frequently present, and allows very
fair cabinet specimens to be prepared from very unpromising
material by a little careful scraping. It disappears sometimes
first at the umbos and the subjacent surface, then erodes
deeply. My largest individual, taken alive, has only a little
of its epidermis remaining along the ventral and posterior
borders, and its face value has been thus greatly depreciated.

Interior.—This is smooth down to the pallial line, which
is slightly crinkled, and thence on there are radial striz
which fade out towards the ventral margin. The older the
shell the deeper is the pallial line, and wider posteriorly, and
more markedly crinkled, and the more rugose become the
radial striz beyond.

Colour.—The interior is white, with a beautiful glisten-
ing chestnut or burnt-umber colouring of certain parts. The
frequency and depth of tinting of these parts is in the fol-
lowing order : —The posterior adductor scar, the posterior part
of the pallial line, the anterior portion of the anterior adduc-
tor scar, the posterior margin, the ventral margin, and the
posterior part of the cartilage pit and hinge plate. Some-

Vp!

times the colour 1s a very deep, almost blackish-brown, with a
delicate flesh tint, and one is tinted a pretty purplish-pink.

Carinaria australis, (Quoy & Gaimard.

Quoy & Gaimard, Voy. de l’Astrolabe, Zool., vol. i,
page 394, Pl. xxix., figs. 9, 13, 1833. The type specimen was
dredged between New Holland and New Zealand in January,
1827. Mr. Hedley supphed me with the following quota-
tion from Voy. de |’ Astrolabe, Histoire du Voyage u., 1830,
page 27:—‘‘January 2, 1827, the zoologists collected some
living carinarias, the shells of which attained a length of eight
to ten lines.”” The next day the vessel was 130 leagues from
Port Jackson, on the way to Cook’s Straits, New Zealand.
Allowimg about a hundred to a hundred and fifty miles for the
day’s run, we can fix the locality of the haul of Carinarias at
about 158° E. longitude and 40° S. latitude. My single
specimen was taken in January, 1905, in 104 fathoms, in
sandy ooze, 35 miles south-west of the Neptune Islands, be-
low the entrance to Spencer Gulf, in E. longitude 135°40°, and
S. latitude 35°25°. So its habitat is extended some 22 or 23
degrees to the west. It measures 10 mm. in length and 3°75
in width. Several characters can be added to those given by
the authors. The transverse ridges spreading fan-like from
the posterior part to the carina increase in number by inter-
calation of secondary and tertiary ridges. The carina is un-
dulated in its proximal part, where it springs from the shell,
but its distal edge is straight, not corrugated, and only at the
back part, where the distal border has been worn or broken
away, is it actually undulated at the margin. The aperture
is oval, and is about twice as wide towards the posterior part
as at the anterior. From within a portion of the protoconch
can be seen projecting through the posterior wall of the shell
somewhat obliquely and slightly to the right of the middle
line. The record of this shell adds not only a new species and
a new genus to the South Australian list of marine molluscs,
but a new order of Gasteropods; the Nucleobranchiata. At-
lanta, another genus of this order, is also represented by an
undetermined species taken in the same haul.

Gibbula lehmanni, Menke.

Turbo lehmanni, Menke, Moll. Nov. Holl., page 18; 7'ro-
chus lehmanni, Philippi, Conchyl. Cab. Band u., Abth. u1.,
page 185, t. 28, fig. 15 ; Fischer, Coq. Viv., page 362, t. 111., fig.
3; Gibbula pulchra, A. Ads. P.Z.S., 1851, page 187; Grbbula
lehmanni, Menke, Tryon, Man. of Conch. Xl., page 233,
Plate xl., figs. 12, 13.

This is a fairly common species. It has been dredged
alive at 14 and 25 fathoms in Spencer Gulf, and dead at 15

172

fathoms in Wallaroo Bay. It has hitherto been confused *n
South Australia with G. Covi, Angas, so I give the following
diagnostic characters: —G. Cozi is more solid, slightly less
depressed, rather more concave between the carine, with
sharper spiral lire, and a much smaller umbilicus. This last
character is the easiest diagnostic. The radial flames ase
much fewer, the colour elsewhere is irregularly stippled in-
stead of spirally articulated, and there are fewer colours in
the same shell. Mr. J. H. Gatliff has sent me this shell as
G. sulcosa, A. Adams, P.Z.8., 1851, page 186, recorded in his
Catalogue of the Marine Shells of Victoria, P.R. Soc. of Vict.
xiv. (N.S.), Part u., 1902, page 132. Adams’s name is given
in Tryon’s Man. ox Conch. xi., page 243, “unfigured and un-
determined species,” with the habitat, Sir C. Hardy’s Island,
North Australia.

Astele subcarinatum, Swainson.

Astele subcarinatum, Swns., 1854, P.R.S., Van Die-
men’s Land, vol. ili., page 36, Plate vi., figs. 1, 2; Hutro-
chus perspectivus, A. Adams, P.Z.S., Lond., 1863, page 506;
Calliostoma (Eutrochus) Adamsi, Pilsbry., Man. Conch. xi.,
page 402.

It has been dredged alive at 16, 19, 20, 22, 23 fathoms,
in Backstairs Passage, and off Newland Head.

Lizyphinus subgranularis, Dunker, Malak. Blatt, 1871,
page 170, No. 56, unfigured, from Bass Straits; C. swbgranu-
latum, Dunker, Man. Conch. x1., page 403, is a half-grown
individual of the same species. This identification was re-
ferred to Mr. Hedley, who says he had arrived at the same
conclusion.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Pirate XXNXI.

Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Calliostoma zietzi, Verco—Basal and pro-
file views, and magnified sculpture.

Figs 4 and 5. Gena terminalis, Verco.

Fig. 6. Gena nigra, Quoy & Gaimard.

Figs. 7 and 8. Astele calliston, Verco.

Figs. 9, 10, and 11. Clanculus leucomphalus, Verco.

173

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA
WITH SYNONYMIC NOTES.—NO. XXIII.

By Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S. (Lond.), ete.
[Read August 1, 1905.]
SYNEMONID.

Synemon monodesma, n. sp.
Male, 38 mm. Head, antenne, and legs dark fuscous;

face and palpi white. Thorax and abdomen whitish
beneath. Legs white, mixed with fuscous. Forewings
elongate - triangular, costa gently arched, termen

obliquely rounded; deep _ fuscous - ochreous, faintly
iridescent ; a moderate, very oblique white fascia from below
costa in middle, extending towards anal angle, but only
reaching two-thirds across wing, almost separated by ground
colour in middle; a suffused, whitish, short, oblique fascia ©
below costa at about four-fifths, about half the length of
previous fascia ; some whitish scales on upper half of termen ;
cilia fuscous-whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded ;
blackish-fuscous, with bright orange markings; a broad cres-
centic fascia at end of cell; a similar fascia, from below costa
at three-fourths, running towards anal angle, but not reach-
ing it, deeply excised on upper edge above middle; an irregu-
lar row of more or less obscure orange spots along termen ;
cia whitish.

Differs from the other described species by the single
fascia of forewings.

Mount Darling Range, Western Austraha. In Novem-
ber ; two specimens.

CARADRININA.
CARADRINID 2.
Ectopatria virginea, 0. sp.

Male, 36 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen snow-
white, legs snow-white. Antenne ochreous. Forewings
elongate, moderate, costa nearly straight, termen oblique,
hardly rounded; snow-white, without markings; cilia snow-
white. Hindwings snow-white, slightly iridescent: cilia
snow-white. A distinct species, weil characterised by the
wholly white colour; at first sight 1t is not unlike Caradrina
gypsina, Low., but is without markings of any kind.

Adelaide, South Australia. One spec‘men: in October.

Euplexia signata, n. sp.

Male, 48 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous,
thorax with ochreous fuscous posterior crest, palpi ochreous.

174

Antenne and legs fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular,
costa hardly arched, termen waved, oblique: hght fuscous,
markings dark fuscous; posterior two-thirds of cell filled in
with dark fuscous: a moderately large sub-triangular blotch
below posterior edge, extending beyond end of cell, only
separated from cell by intersecting vein; an elongate patch
above dorsum, trom base to just beyond one-third; a some-
what quadrate spot beyond posterior extremity of cell, in-
dented on posterior edge; an irregular, triangular blotch on
costa at five-sixths; orbicular indistinct; reniform in middle
of dark fuscous patch in cell, light fuscous, well defined; a
row of small lunate marks along termen, hairs of dorsum
reddish-fuscous throughout; cilia fuscous, with an ochreous
line at base. Hindwings with the termen waved: dark fus-
cous; cilia as in forewings.
Hobart, Tasmania. One specimen ; in October.

CATOCALIN 4s.
Niguza anisogramma, nh. sp.
Male, 30 mm. Head, palpi, and a»tenne ochreous.

Thorax fuscous. Legs ochreous. Abdomen ereyish, segmen-
tal margins ochreous. Forewings elongate; triangular, costa
faintly sinuate, termen rather strongly and obliquely round-
ed; fuscous; a broad, nearly straight, white fascia from one-
fourth costa to one-fourth dorsum; a similar fascia, gently
curved inwards, from costa at four-fifths to dorsum at three-
fourths, edged posteriorly by a line of darker ground colour ;
a large black ring at two-thirds of wing, edged externally by
a line of yellow, and containing two blue metallic spots, one
above the other, and externally by an incomplete ring of
white; a somewhat elongate oviform ring, below and con-
siderably before the ring, filled in with yellow, and edged
above with yellow; a transverse row of somewhat triangular
yellow spots, parallel to limiting line of second white fascia,
and again followed by a small and more indistinct parallel
row of similar spots; a dentate black line along termen, an-
teriorly edged by a whitish line of similar shape; cilia fus.
cous, imperfect. Hindwings with termen slightly waved ;
whitish; a suffused fuscous ante-median band, containing a
darker fuscous whitish centred ring below costa ; a moderately
broad fuscous band along termen, containing the yellow spots,
etc., as in forewings; (cilia imperfect).

A pretty insect, not like any other Australian species
known to me.

Alice Springs, South (Central) Australia. One speci-
men, received from Mr. S. Angel.

175

ACRONYCTIN 4h.
Sesamia albicostata, n. sp.

Male, 28 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and legs light
ochreous-grey, antennze whitish, pectinations ochreous. Ab-
domen shining grey Forewings elongate, moderate, costa

shghtly arched towards base, apex somewhat rounded, termen
obliquely rounded; pale ochreous; veins somewhat outlined
with white; a rather suffused broad white costal streak
throughout, edged below by darker ground colour; cilia
greyish-ochreous. Hindwings and cilia white.

Ocean Grange, near Sale, Victoria. One specimen, taken
in January.

LYMANTRIAD 5.
Anthela niphomacula, n. sp.

Male, 46 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, abdomen, and legs
dull reddish-carmine. Antennz carmine-whitish, pectina-
tions 10, dark fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, ter-
men nearly straight; dull carmine-pink; a moderate white
spot in cell at one-third from base of wing; a similar spot at
end of cell, both faintly edged with fuscous; cilia reddish-
ochreous. Hindwings with colour as in forewings, basal two-
thirds highter and somewhat ochreous-tinged ; cilia as in fore-
wings. Underside of hindwings with a single white fuscous-
edged spot at end of cell.

Allied to Rubescens, Walk., but distinguished at once by
the white spots.

Duaringa, Queensland. One specimen ; in November.

Anthela callispila, n. sp.

Male, 46 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-fuscous, face
ochreous, palpi ochreous beneath, fuscous above. Antenne
whitish, pectinations 10, dark fuscous. Abdomen ochreous-
fuscous, anal tuft ochreous. Legs ochreous-fuscous. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, termen rounded; dark ochreous-
fuscous, irrorated with fine ochreous hair scales along costa ;
markings snow-white, very distinct : a moderately large ellip-
tic spot at anterior end of cell; a large one, rounded, at pos-
terior end of cell; cilia ochreous-yellow. Hindwings with
termen moderately straight; colour as in forewings: a mode-
rately defined whitish spot at posterior end of cell; cilia as
in forewings. Forewings beneath more ochreous, especially
in cell; spots as above reproduced. Hindwings similar in
colour, but an additional round white spot in cell at one-
sixth from base.

A very distinct species, easily recognised by the white
spots on the ochreous ground colour.

176

Broken Hull, New South Wales. One specimen; in
April.
Anthela pyromacula, n. sp.

Male, 48 mm. Head, thorax, abdomen, and antennz
dark fuscous, antennal pectinations, 10; dark fuscous. Fore-
wings shaped as in Cdallispila; dark fuscous, very minutely
irrorated with obscure whitish scales, and more or less ap-
pearing to be streaked with dark fuscous along veins towards
termen; a moderate black line along vein 2; a somewhat
cuneiform orange-red, black-edged spot at anterior end of
cell; a rather large, round, similar coloured spot in cell, at
posterior extremity; cilia dark fuscous, faintly barred with
darker. Hindwings with termen moderately straight ; colour
and cilia as in forewings: basal half of wing clothed with
long fuscous hairs. Forewings beneath with spot at posterior
end of cell reproduced in dull white.. Hindwings with a dull
whitish spot at posterior end of cell.

Not very near any other, probably allied to Clementi,
Swin., but widely distinct.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen; in Sep-
tember.

Orgyia hemicalla, n. sp.

Male, 20 mm. Head, thorax, and antenne blackish,
antennal pectinations, 8. Face, palpi, and legs orange. Ab-
domen blackish, anal tuft orange. Forewings elongate-mode-
rate, costa nearly straight, termen strongly rounded, oblique ;
dark fuscous; costal edge from two-thirds to apex narrowly
orange; cilia orange. Hindwings bright orange; basal half
dark fuscous, suffused and irregular; cilia orange.

Melbourne, Victoria. One specimen; in November.

Orgyia retinopepla, nh. sp.

Male, 24 mm. Head, antennz, and legs dull white, face
and legs mixed with ochreous-fuscous ; antennal pectinations,
fuscous, 8. Thorax and abdomen ochreous-fuscous, beneath
grey-whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa slightly
arched, termen gently rounded; lhght ochreous-fuscous ;
markings somewhat darker fuscous; two suffused fascia ; first
from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, curved outwards,
anterior edge moderately defined ; second from costa at three-
fourths to dorsum at three-fourths, becoming triangular on
costa, curved inwards below middle, and edged throughout by
a narrow dull whitish line; a moderate discal spot above
middle, midway between the two fascia; cilia light ochreous-
fuscous, with a darker basal line. Hindwings light ochreous-
fuscous, paler towards base, dorsal hairs whitish-ochreous ;
cilia as in forewings.

Broken Hill, New South Wales. One specimen: in
October.

SPHINGID~.
Hopliocnena brachycera, Low.

Coemotriche brachycera, Low., T.R.8.S.A., page 50, 1897.
Hopliocnena melanoleuca, Roths. (1902).

I have taken this species at Broken Hill, New South
Wales, and have seen specimens from Roeburne, Western
Australia, and Alice Springs, (Central) South Australia.

NOTODONTIDA.
Cerura (?) melanoglypta, n. sp.

Female, 40 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax cinerous-grey.
Antenne fuscous. Abdomen silver-grey-whitish. Forewings
elongate, moderate, termen slightly waved, rounded, oblique;
cinerous-grey, minutely irrorated with black scales; a well-
marked, narrow, waved, black line starting on costa at one-
sixth, thence becoming sub-costal for a short distance, thence
curved and becoming thrice sinuate, and terminating on dor-
sum at about one-third: a second, nearly straight waved
black line from costa at three-fourths to dorsum about anal
angle, gently curved inwards below, and with a short outward
angulation immediately above dorsum; a moderate, well-
defined, somewhat reniform discal spot above middle; midway
between the two lines; cilia cinerous-grey, faintly barred with
fuscous at extremities of veins. Hindwings with termen gentiy
waved : white; a broad black band along termen, mixed with
ckscure whitish spots along edge of termen, better defined
beneath: cilia whitish.

Mount Pleasant, South Australia. One specimen; in
October.
GEOMETRID A.
BOARMIAN &.
Amelora anthracica, n. sp.
Male, 30 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax black, face
rounded, prominent. Antennz ochreous, pectinations 5.
Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs grey-whitish, anterior and

middle tarsi infuscated. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa
nearly straight, termen gently bowed, oblique; black, with
blacker markings; markings thick, well defined; a_ basal
fascia; a dentate fascia from one-fourth costa to one-fourth
dorsum; a more strongly dentate fascia from costa at five-
sixths to dorsum at five-sixths, more pronounced and some-
what angulated in middle: a large linear discal spot; cilia

178}

black. Hindwings with termen gently waved, rounded;
whitish, becoming fuscous on posterior two-thirds; discal dot
and second line as in forewings, fuscous; cilia dark fuscous.

Probably nearest Milvaria, Gin., but abundantly dis-
tinct from any other described species.

Mount Darling, Western Australia. One specimen; in
November.

Orsonoba (?) euryscopa, N. sp.

Male, 44 mm. _ Head, thorax, palpi, and abdomen yel-
low, abdomen speckled with fine fuscous scales. Antenne
fuscous, bipectinated, pectinations 2. Legs ochreous-yellow-
ish, posterior pair spotted with fuscous. Forewings elongate-
triangular, costa gently arched, apex acute, termen faintly
waved, strongly bowed in middle; sinuate beneath apex; yel-
low-ochreous, becoming broadly paler along costa, from one-
third to apex ; a narrow blackish waved line from costa before
one-third to just above dorsum at two-fifths; a well-defined,
oblique, fuscous line, edged posteriorly by its own width of
white, which colour is again edged suffusedly by a similar
width of dull purple, from apex to dorsum in middle; a round
pale whitish-yellow spot lying on upper edge of fuscous line,
just below middle; cilia ochreous. Hindwings faintly waved,
more or less strongly near angle; colour and cilia as in fore-
wings ; a moderate waved fuscous streak, from one-fifth costa
to one-fifth dorsum; a similar parallel streak before middle
of costa to before middle of dorsum; a fine waved fuscous line
from costa at three-fourths to dorsum before anal angle, ob-
scure on lower half. Wings beneath pale yellowish, finely
irrorated with fuscous, all markings, except streak of fore-
wings from apex, obscurely reproduced.

Mackay, Queensland. One specimen; in November.

MONOCTENIAN.
Homospora rhodoscopa, Low.

Onychodes (2) rhodoscopa, Low., Tr. Roy. Soc., page 228,
1902.

Homospora procrita, Turn., /.c., page 229, 1904.

I am sorry that Dr. Turner has re-named this species, as
I pointed out to him when in Brisbane that I had already
given it a MS.S. name. However, the discovery of the male
has made it necessary to erect a new genus to receive it, and
has borne out my conclusions that. it is allied to Onychodes,
Gin., the female of both genera having the antenne very
shortly pectinated ; it differs; however, from that genus, as
Dr. Turner points out, by the frontal projection - head and
different neuration.

EGG

Systatica xanthastis, Lov.

Dr. Turner has formed this new genus (Tr. Roy. Soc.,
S.A., page 231, 1904), to receive this species; but I am
strongly of opinion that my type is a female; the antenne are
unipectinated, the pectinations being 1. Should my surmise
prove correct, the character of the new genus will require to
be altered in accordance with the above character.

DREPANID.
Oreta hypocalla, pn. sp.

Male, 32 mm. Head, face, and palpi scarlet. Thorax
and abdomen fleshy-ochreous, paler anteriorly. Antenne and
abdomen dull ochreous, fillet reddish. Abdomen beneath
scarlet. Legs scarlet, anterior coxe more brilliant. Fore-
wings elongate-triangular, costa slightly sinuate, arched on
posterior third; termen nearly straight, slightly sinuate be-
neath apex ; dull ochreous-fuscous, finely and obscurely strigu-
lated with darker, especially on median third, where it forms
a broad, transverse fascia, anterior edge curved inwards from
middle of costa to one-fifth dorsum; posterior edge oblique,
from just before apex to two-thirds dorsum; faintly edged
with whitish on upper third; cilia chestnut. Hindwings with
termen gently rounded; colour and cilia as in forewings, the
central fascia faintly indicated. Forewings beneath reddish-
orange, suffused with fuscous: posterior edge of fascia repro-
duced in blackish. Hindwings beneath brilliant scarlet.
Allied to J/:/todes, Low, but differs in shape of forewings and
other details.

Mackay, Queensland. One specimen: in November.

ADDENDA.
Deilephila euphorbiz, Linn.

I recently received a living specimen of this beautiful
Sphinx from Mr. J. Fairhead, who caught the insect in the
sorting room of the post-office at Broken Hill in April. I
feel pretty confident that up to the present it has not been
recorded from Australia, and I am very pleased to be able to
add it to our fauna. I have also taken in Broken Hill the
following Sphingida :—

Alemaris hylas, Linn.

Hemaris kinguw, Macl.

Cherocampa scrofa, Bdv.

Cherocampa celerio, Linn.

* Cherocampa erotus, Cr.

* A single poor specimen.

180

{ ahadonna, Fab.
1 distincta, Lucas.
Protoparce convolvuli, Linn.

f lineata, Fab.
Deilephila < livornica, Esp.
livornicoides, Lucas.

Protoparce

CARADRINID 2.
Amaloptila ptilomela, Low.

Metaptila (?) ptilomela, Low, T.R.S.5.A., page 31, 1900;
Amaloptila triorbis, Turn., T.R.S.S.A., page 6, 1903.

ERASTRIAN A.
Homodes erizesta, Turn.
(P.L.S8.N.8S.W., page 110, 1902.)

I have seen this species standing in some collections as
Homodes gemmifera, Moore, but can find no reference to this in
Coates & Swinhoe’s Catalogue of the Indian Moths, 1889.

PYRALIDINA.
ENDOTRICHINA.
Endotricha baryptera, n. sp.

Male, 16 mm. Head, thorax, palpi, antenne, legs, and
abdomen dark fuscous; thorax ochreous-whitish in middle;
legs more or less banded and ringed with whitish. Forewings
elongate, moderately dilated posteriorly, costa nearly straight,
termen oblique, slightly bowed: dark fuscous-chocolate: a
broad transverse whitish fascia, anterior edge sharply defined,
from just before middle of costa to middle of dorsum, with
a sharp curve inwards on lower one-third, posterior edge
moderately straight, suffused into ground colour ; a fine undu-
lating, whitish, sub-terminal line, with a projection outwards,
just beneath costa; a few small white spots on costa between
fascia and line; a dark fuscous discal spot at end of cell: a
few obscure black dots along termen; cilia dark fuscous.
Hindwings with colour as in forewings; a fine, well-defined,
dentate whitish line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum :
a similar line from costa, just beyond middle, to dorsum near
anal angle, with a sharp jrojection outwards in middle:
cround colour between the two lines much lighter ; cilia as in
forewings.

Mackay and Brisbane, Queensland. Two specimens; in
January.

181

ON NATICOID GENERA LAMELLARIA AND CALEDONIELLA
FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By HeEerBert BasEpDow.
[Read April 4, 1905.]
PuiaTes XXVI. tu XXIX.

The Naticip& include a sub-family known as the Lamel-
lariine, the members of which are characterised by possessing
a thick dorsal shield (reminding of the mantle of the Doride),
partly or wholly enclosing a fragile shell. Five genera have
now been established, and of these two have their shell com-
pletely enveloped by the animal. They are Lamellaria and
Caledoniella.

The genus Caledoniella was founded in 1869 by Souverbie
on the shell of an unknown animal It was consequently very
doubtfully placed among the Naticide, and has maintained
its uncertain position ever since.

Among other genera that came under my notice on Dr.
J. C. Verco’s marine dredging excursion were included a
number of molluscs with internal shells, and of these I have
separated several forms which I unhesitatingly refer to this
little-known genus.

After an examination of the dentition and general struc-
ture of the animal I am fully convinced that Caledoniella is
correctly included under the Naticide, in the sub-family
Lamellarune.

An unfigured species of Lamellaria, the intérnal shell of
which was originally described in 1849 from New Zealand, by
Gray,* has been reported to occur in South Austraha. It
goes by the name of L. ophione. Dr. Verco has dredged a
shell, measuring 8 mm., in Backstairs Passage, in 22 fathoms,
which, as near as determination will permit, is L. ophione.
An additional new species is described in this paper.

GeNuS LAMELLARIA, Montagu, 1815.

Lamellaria australis, spec nov

Animal.—Dorsal shield elliptic, with a waved outline
and notched in front; soft, smooth, or minutely granular ;
appreciably broader than the foot, over the sides of which it
folds very loosely and imperfectly (differing in this respect
considerably from Caledoniella); under side obliquely striated
(muscle fibres), around the foot. Body depressed, more con-

* Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 849, p. 169.

182

vex over the shell. Foot flat, straight and dilated in front,
sides approximately parallel, terminating in a blunt point,
the free tail nearly one-half the whole length ; projects beyond
the mantle border anteriorly when in motion: it is horizont-
ally slit in front. Eves, distinctly discernible as little
black beads on the outer bases of tentacles, which are not
retractile. Genitalia, situated far anteriorly on the right,
immediately adjacent to the trunk of the head. Colour:
The dorsal shield of the unique specimen is of a uniform,
dull, brick-red or vermilion colour, with an imperfectly
stellate, four-lobed, opaque white crown in its centre, and
three additional white blotches on the right side, all of the
white markings being easily removed by abrasion; its under
surface is yellow at the border, grading to vermilion, thence
to an impure white in the region adjoining the foot. Head
and foot shaded brownish yellow. Dentition: Formula
|:!:|: central plate sub-trigonal; laterals large, their spines
overlapping in the central line. Dimensions: Length, 33;
breadth, 25; height, 12 mm.

Shell.— Auriforia, moderately convex, about three and
a half whorls; margin of lip with a shallow concavity ante-
riorly ; ornamented with distinct incremental striae and very
faint spiral incisions, the latter hardly recognisable with the
unaided eye: open underneath, exposing the whorls; invested
with a thin, transparent yellowish epidermis. Colour shining
white, spire and inside nacreous. Dimensions: Major axis,
214; minor axis, 164; height, 9 mm.

Hab.—Backstairs Passage, St. Vincent Gulf. Dredged
in 25 fathoms.

Obs.—The shell of 1. ophione, Gray, is much like that of
L. australis, though smaller, with its body whorl more con-
vex, spire smaller and apex less central; no authentic descrip-
tion or figure of the animal has, however, come to hand. Pro-
fessor F. W. Hutton has taken a mollusc in New Zealand
which he considers in all probability to be L. ophione, of
Gray.* It clearly differs in one respect from my species.
Whereas the dorsal shield of 7. australis is smooth or minutely
granulated, that of the specimen taken by Profesor Hutton
is smooth, but much wrinkled, resembling convolutions of the
brain.

GENUS CALEDONIELLA, Souverbie, 1869.

Animal.—Body ovoid. Dorsal shield thick, ample, ver-
rucose, with its edges tucked in along the sides, and, in a con-
tracted state, completely enclosing the foot: notched an-
teriorly and produced to an imperfectly closing siphon, re-

* Manual New Zealand Mollusca, p. 59.

183

ceiving the inhalent current. Head differentiated ; eyes dis-
tinct, on outer bases of tentacles, which are flattish cylindri-
cal. Foot truncated, horizontally slit, and dilated laterally
in front; bluntly pointed behind; tail free. Renal aperture
on the right, the mantle-border slightly grooved outward
from this spot. Dentition, 2°1:1:1°2. | Mandibles corneous,
strong.

Shell.—Internal, ‘‘heliciform, imperforate oval, orbicu-
lar, thin, invested by a thin epidermis, which extends beyond
the lip;* spire much depressed, sub-lateral; whorls few,
rapidly increasing ; aperture oblique, rather large, the extre-
mities of the simple lp un‘ted by a callus extending widely
up-n the whorl.”

Hah.—New Caledonia and South Australia.

Caledoniella contusiformis, spec. nov.
Plate xxviil., fig. 1, and Plate xxix., figs. 1 to 8.

Animal.—Body ovoid, large. Dorsal shield soft, verru-
cose, and wrinkled; drawn in along the sides, the head and
foot being unprotected when in motion, but capable of being
retracted under the shield, which closes over them securely.
Foot flat; extended laterally, and slit Lorizontally in front;
the tail and head being free to move, and connected to the
main body by a comparatively narrow trunk. Mouth large,
from underneath the strong muscular rim of which the ser-
rated edges of the jaws are visible. JDentition, formula
2°1°1:1°2. ; central tooth sub-quadrangular, minutely and multi-
cuspidated, laterals at least bicuspid, marginals noticeably
narrower than the laterals, strongly hamate. Mandibles
strong, elongate, wing-shaped, horny ; obliquely striate ; outer
edge sharply serrate ; a prominent ridge marking off the serra-
tion, beneath which a narrow band of sete. Colour: The
wrinkled dorsal shield is of an impure white to light brown
ground-colour, which in the valleys of the wrinkles appears
of a deeper hue. Large black, easily detachable blotches
cover the surface, without system in their arrangement; they
are each surrounded by a rim of deeper brown, and, at some
distance from their edge, by a ring of similar colour; the
underside of the shield is light flesh-red. Foot and head
brownish-red, the edge of the dilated front of the former, and
the tips of the tentacles of the latter, black. Dimensions:
Length, 40; breadth, 30; height, 25 mm.; length of foot,
25 mm.

Sheil.—Very thin, globose, ellipsoid, heliciform; about
three whorls, rapidly increasing in size ; spire small, depressed ;

* As a generic character I do not attach much importance
to this feature.

184

covered by a colourless epidermis, which projects beyond the
shell-lip; suture channelled ; aperture oblique, border with a
wide, shallow depression in the anterior ; widely open so as to
display the winding columella up to the apex. Ornamented
by faint accremental striz; the epidermis has raised, branch-
ing lines, radiating from the apex. Colour white, semi-trans-
lucent. WUimensions: Major diameter, 28; minor diameter,
17 mm.

Hab.—Backstairs Passage, St. Vincent Guii; in
fathoms.

Obs.—I have not been able to trace the existence of a
callus over the body whorl of the shell, between the inner and
outer lp, although such was described of the only species
hitherto known, viz., U. montrouzierz, Souverb. The remain-
ing features of that shell correspond so closely with those of
my type that a new genus can hardly be proposed, especially
as the animal has not been previously seen; but the differences
are considered sufficient to warrant the creation of a new
Sy ecies.

The calcareous matter does not completely infiltrate
the shell, which in parts is only membranous (see var. laby-
rinthina, below), especially in the earlier and posterior por-
tion of the last whorl. I will, however, point out that, prior
to my examination of the shells, the molluscs had been kept
in a weak solution of formalin, and it is just possible that this
chemical may have had some deteriorating influence on their
delicate tests.

Mr. E. A. Smith has described* a mollusc from Port
Phillip Bay, closely allied to my new species. No figure of the
living animal is given, and it is not a fair criterion to make
a comparison from the description of a contracted spirit
specimen with the living animals. Mr. Smith’s figure of the
internal shell is more elongate-bulimoid, and the spire more
elevated, than is the case in my specimens.

”

Varieties of Caledoniella contusiformis, spec. nov.

I have before me a number of smaller specimens of Cale-
doniella, which in the outer colouration and design of the
dorsal shield differ markedly from one another and the type
The head and foot are coloured the same in each case, and the
measurements about one-half that of the form described above.
The similarity in shape of the internal shells and other fea-
tures is so close that I feel indisposed for the present to
separate them specifically from C. contusiformis, for it is a
matter of opinion whether, in this strange genus, specific dis-

gee and Mag. Nat. Hist., V. Series. 1886, Vol. xviii..
Pp. Z2/U,

185

tinction can with justice be made on colour variation alone.
For the time being I enumerate them as varieties.

Var. testudinis.
Plate xxviil., fig. 2.

This comes nearest to the described type. The dorsal
shield is more closely wrinkled, of an earthy-brown colour,
with more numerous black blotches, in the centre of the crests
produced by the wrinkles; each crest does not necessarily
carry a blotch.

Shell calcareous, as described in type above.

Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf; in 25 fathoms.

Var. pulchra.
Plate xxvill.; fig. 3.

Dorsal shield comparatively smooth; of a rich yellow
ground-colour, with large, circular, or oval lighter blotches
surrounded by wreaths of black.

Shell calcareous, as described in type above.

Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf; in 25 fathoms.

Var. labyrinthina.
Plate xxvill.; fig. 4.

Dorsal shield wrinkled; of a faint yellowish ground-
colour, of which very little remains visible on account of a
labyrinthine structure, produced by closely set, black, partly
spiral lines, usually more or less concentric to an enclosed
. nucleus in the form of a black dot, into which the innermost
line very often passes.

The internal shell in this case is destitute of calcareous
matter, consisting only of a soft, transparent membrane, with
the characteristics described in the type above.

Hab.—St. Vincent Gulf; in 25 fathoms.

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES.

PuatE XXVI.
Fig. 1. Lamellaria australis, Basedow—Animal; dorsal sur-

Fig. 2. Lamellaria australis—Animal; ventral surface.

Pirate XXVIII.

Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Lamellaria australis, Basedow—Internal
shell, various aspects.

Fig. 4. Lamellaria australis, Basedow—Showing position of
internal shell with respect to animal.

Fig. 5. Lamellaria australis, Basedow—A lateral tooth.

Fig. 6. Lamellaria australis, Basedow—Dentition 1:1:1. A
single row of teeth, unfolded.

186

PoatEe XXY UT.

Fig. 1. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow.

Fig. 2. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Var. testudinis

Fig. 3. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Var. pulchra.

Fig. 4. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Var. laby-
rinthina.

Puate XXIX.

Figs. 1,2, and 3 Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Vari-

ous aspects of internal shell.
ig 4. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Showing posi-

tion of shell with respect to animal.

Fig. 5. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Radula.

Fig. 6. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—A single row of
teeth. Dentition 2:1:1:1:2.

Fig. 7. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Mandible, ex-
ternal aspect.

Fig. 8. Caledoniella contusiformis, Basedow—Mandible.

in-
ternal aspect.

187

ON THE RECOMBINATION OF IONS IN AIR AND
OTHER GASES.

By W. H. Brace, M.A., Elder Professor of Mathematics and
Physics in The University of Adelaide; and R. D. KLEE-
MAN, B.Sc., Demonstrator.

[Read October 3, 1905. |

It is well known that when positive and negative ions are
distributed through a given space a process of combination
goes on until ions of one sign only are left. Let there be
p positive ions, and 7 negative ions in each cubic centimetre
at any instant, and suppose that the relations of any ion to
all those of opposite sign are of the same character. Then
the chance that an ion, say, a positive one, will enter into
combination before the end of a short time 6¢ is propor-
tional to #6¢ ; and generally the number of combinations
taking place in that time may be denoted by apndt where «
is the “co-efficient of recombination.” This has been clearly
established by the experiments of Rutherford, Townsend,
McClung, Langevin, and others.

As a consequence, the current passing between two elec-
trodes in a gas in which ions are being formed by external
agents depends on the magnitude of the potential gradient
or electric force. The relations between current and force
have been carefully studied by many workers, and the observed
facts have been compared with the results of calculation based
on theory. The comparison is partly, but not completely,
satisfactory.

Certain experimental results which we propose to describe
in this paper seem to throw light on the reason of the dis-
crepancy. They point to the existence of another cause, dis-
tinct from that represented by the expression anp, which
prevents ions from reaching the electrodes in the gas in which
they are formed. This cause appears to be a process of re-
combination of newly-formed ions with the atoms from which
they have just been separated. The effects of it are propor-
tional to the number of ions formed in a c.cm. in unit time,
not to the product of the existing numbers of _ posi-
tives and negatives. They a1e independent of the shape of
the ionisation chamber, and in this they differ from those of
general recombination. They depend directly on pressure,
and vary greatly from gas to gas.

In order to bring these effects into relief it 13 only neces-
sary to reduce the number of ions in a c.cm. until the number
of those that are lost by general recombination is negligible

188

compared to the number of those that are formed. When
this is done it is found that it is still necessary to apply a
high potential in order to extract all the ions from the gas.
For example, in air at atmospheric pressure an electric force
of 25 volts to the cm. will only extract about 80 % of the
ions which are obtained when the force is increased to 1,000.
The following example will serve as an illustration: —The
width of the ionisation chamber is 4 mm., the upper electrode
being a metal plate, the lower a sheet of gauze. A thin layer
of radium is placed 6°2 cm. below the sheet, and « particles
emitted from RaC cross the chamber and ionise the air,
which is at atmospheric pressure. The area of the plate on
which the rays fall is about 18 cm. The capacity of the elec-
trometer to which the upper plate is connected is about 150
em, and a potential of ‘125 volts applied direct to the electro-
meter causes a deflection of 722 divisions on the scale; ten
divisions = 1 mm. When the lower plate is raised to 400
volts positive, so that the electric force is 1,000 volts per
em., there is a deflection of 982 divisions in 10 seconds, under
the influence of the a rays. When a potential of 10 volts is
applied, giving a force of 25 volts per cm., there is a deflec-
tion of 772 in 10 seconds.

In the latter case the charge Q received per sq.cm. of
electrode in one second, measured in electrostatic units, is—

772 x 150

10 x 722 x8 x 300 x 18

= 33x 10

The number of ions falling on each sq.cm. of electrode per
second is therefore 1:2 x 10° nearly.

The velocity of ions at this potential gradient is nearly
25 x 1°5, or 37 cm. per second.

Thus, if 2 be the number of ions in a cubic centimetre,
37n=1:2 x 10%, and therefore n=3°2 10%. Hence, the num-
ber of recombinations taking place in a second in the space
between two opposing square centimetres of the electrodes is
equal to ax -4 x (3-2 x 104), If we take the value cf a to be
3,400 x 3x 107% we find this number to be nearly 420.
Finally, therefore, the number of ions recombining in each
second is 420, whilst the number received is 1°2 x 10°,and thus
only 1/3,000th of the ions are lost in this way.

But the current at 25 volts is only 772/982, or about
80%, of the current at 1,000 volts.

It is clear from this example that there is some cause
which prevents the current attaining its full value other
than general recombination between positive and negative
ions.

Now, it is possible that ions newly formed might he
specially liable to recombine with each other. Such a possi-

189

bility has been already suggested by Rutherford (‘“Radio-
activity,’ p. 33). An electron, which has just been ejected
from an atom by a passing a particle, does not go far before
encountering a neighbouring atom. The encounter, perhaps,
results in a temporary attachment, for we know that ion-
clusters are formed in this way. In any case, it is probable
that the electron loses much of its velocity of projection. Now,
it is still under the attraction of the atom from which it has
come. Supposing this atom to have only lost one electron, the
strength of the electric force which it exerts at the distance
of the mean free path is equal to e/7?=3 x 10-"/10 “=3 £.8.U.,
or 900 volts percm. Thisis large compared to the usual im-
pressed electric forces of experiment. It is by no means im-
probable, therefore, that the electron may finally slip back
into its old place. Such a possibility is not considered in the
equations as usually formed. For all writers begin their
arguments by the statement :——“‘Let p be the number of posi-
tive ions in a cubic centimetre, and m the number of nega-
tive.’ In doing so they tacitly assume that the relations of
any one ion to all others of opposite sign are of the same
character. But if a pair of newly-formed ions ran a special
chance of recombination until they got away from each
other, then the relations of either of these two to the other
would be quite different from its relation to all other ions.

Let us, then, for the moment suppose that there is a spe-
cial form of recombination, which we may call “initial,” as
distinguished from general recombination, and let us con-
sider the nature of its effects, in order that we may find
means of testing the correctness of the supposition.

Now, it is clear that the effects of initial recombination
do not depend upon the shape of the ionisation chamber, and
this at once differentiates them from those of general recom-
bination. For the special or initial recombination concerns
only the ion and its parent atom. But general recombination
depends on the chance of an ion meeting others of the oppo-
site sign, which chance depends on the number in a c.cm., and
this, again, on the shape of the chamber. If, for example,
a particles cross a chamber 3 mm. wide, and a sufficient
potential gradient is applied, most of the ions will be car-
ried to the electrodes. If the width of the chamber is in-
creased to 6 mm. the magnitude of the stream of ions 1s
doubled, each positive meets twice as many negatives as be-
fore, and therefore the chance that any one ion enters into
recombination is twice as creat. Suppose the saturation cur-
rent for a 3 mm. chamber were 100, using any arbitrary sys-
tem of units, and the actual current for a moderate potential
were 90, then for the 6 mm. chamber, under an equal poten-
tial gradient, the current would be 160, not 180: the satura-

190

tion current being 200. This is recognised in the usual
formule. For example, Langevin finds that—

Fe igs ti

om om

where @Q) ‘s the saturation current per sq.cm. of electrode,
and @ is the current when sucn a potential is applied that o is
the density thereby caused to exist on each sq.cm. of the
electrode. When ( and (J) are both small compared to a,
it follows that : —

e( eQy et)?

o o 2o°
. G—-Y _
O; 2o

Thus, the relative lack of saturation, viz. (Q@—Q),/Q_ is
proportional to &%, which itself depends on the depth of the
chamber. Other formule show the same dependence.

But experiment shows that when the density of the ions
is small the depth of the ionisation chamber has very little
effect on the degree of saturation. This may be illustrated Ly
the following experiments : —

Five mm.g- of radium bromide were so placed that the
wu rays passed upwards through an aperture in a lead plate
and crossed the gauze of the ionisation chamber. The rays
formed a cone whose vertical angle was about 20°. The
apparatus used was the same as that of the previous experi-
ment described, but the currents were so strong that a capa-
city of 1,070 cms. had to be put in parallel with the electro-
meter. Determinations were then made of the strengths of
the current at various potentials: —(1) When the ionisation
chamber was 3 mm. wide; (2) when 6 mm. wide; and (3) when
9 mm. wide. The values obtained were then reduced so that
the saturation current in each case was set at the same value.
Comparison then showed that the curves were almost identi-
cal except at low potentials, and this was in agreement with
the hypothesis now put forward. For at all but low potentials
an’? was so small as to be negligible. When the potential
was very low, one or two volts per centimetre, then the ions
moved so slowly that » was larger, and an” was not negligible,
and under those circumstances the curve showed a difference
of the right kind. That is to say, the 9 mm. curve was fur-
ther from being saturated than the others. The currents
were specially made not too weak in order to bring out this
contrast between the effects at low and at high potentials.
The figures are given in the following table : —

191

Relation of current to potential gradient for different widths
of the ionisation chamber, the currents being small:
potential gradients in volts per centimetre: currents in
arbitrary units, reduced to common maximum.

Wiptrn oF CHAMBER.

3 mim. 6 mm. 9 mm.
Potential Potential Potential

Gradient. Carrent Gradient. Current. Gradient. Current
1,000 400 1,000 400 1,000 400
34°8 041 Su 385) 36°0 300
$19 308 12°7 302 16°4 300
8°65 294 9°47 292 9°83 290
6°6 285 747 283 781 283
4°66 274 5:90 272 5°83 ri
25 202 215 247 3°10 244
1:92 239 1°89 224 2°23 220
1°50 221 "98 169 1°36 174
1:06 196 col 108 "84 134
ate) 147 “02 4 “04 68

giye1s Pomme BLS

20 AT

These figures are plotted, as far as 36 volts per cm., in
curves A, B, and C of Fig. 1. An open scale is chosen so as
to show the separation of the curves at low values of the field,
when m is not very small.

These figures and curves show tkat the ratio of the cur-
rent at any particular strength of field to the saturation cur-
rent is almost independent of the shape of the ionisation
chamber, when the current is small. As this seems an im-
portant point, we have made many experimental tests of it.
We give below the details of one such test, in order to illustrate
the methods employed and their degree of accuracy.

The arrangements were the same as those just described,
and the special object of the experiment was tne determina-
tion of the degree of saturation under a certain moderate
potential gradient in the case of chambers of two different
depths. The depths were reckoned in turns of the screw, which
raised the upper from the lower plate of the chamber: eleven
turns=1 ecm. The currents were allowed to run into the
electrometer for 10 seconds. The electrometer was not dead
beat, and therefore the first and second resting-places on the
scale were observed, and the mean taken. For example, the
second line, marked +, of the subjoined table, shows that the
first deflection was to 57°47 ecm., and then back to 54°92, zero
being 4,700. The experiment repeated gave 97°42 to 54°92,
and again 57°47 to 54°93. The leak was also measured with

Hu AEE

hoy

‘Aysutyoszoy Aq spew squewysodxo
gO syInset 944 Wory poyeTNoTeo ore gy pue gg

*Ay@ Uy 4uerino pues
quotper3 Tetq{uejod useazeq uoyAeTe1 Bupmoys seainy
re "Sta

auuadgost cotontontettoateetaaten

EueUSTer CSTE HEEEUCLORUEEUOTOSES!™ ogi
lll LETT
PEE ES

St et
SSS

os Sa Ons bel

—— ‘wo sod 8404

00-% = QUerINo UOTPRINGQeS

Cll
A

”
wong ©

193

a metal plate over the radium, and the difference taken as
the proper value of the leak for that experiment, a small pro-

portion only being due to 8 rays. ‘The first measurements
relate to a chamber of depth 6 turns—(i.) under a potential
gradient of 600 volts for the 6 turns: (11.) a gradient of 20
volts for the same distance; (111.) under 600 volts again. The
difference between (1-) and (i11.), as shown in the table, was
due to the variation 1n sensitiveness of the electrometer. In,
almost all our experiments this variation has been negligible:
in this special case it was not so, because so large an amount
of radium was used, viz.. 5 mmg. The yrays penetrated all
the metal casings, and caused a leak in the charge of the
needle. The leak had an exaggerated influence on the read-
ings because the capacity of the electrometer was increased by
the addition, in parallel, of a plate condenser of 1,000 cm.

capacity. This disturbed the usual balance of the electro-
meter, in which leakage of the needle’s charge had little effect

on the deflection for a given quantity of electricity. To
obviate any error from variation of sensibility the results of
(i-) and (i1i.) were averaged, and compared with the result

of (11.). It will be observed that successive determinations of
the same leak were very consistent with each other. This
implies that almost all the observed effect was due to the
radium : extraneous influences were very small.

6 Turns. Zero= 4700.

600 volts 47 | 75 69
| (Metal over Ra) 47 | 63 59 j Mean leak =67
- Nett leak = 852=T, (say)
= IS - 2)
+ 600 volts ef | aa S ul ( Mean —919

20 volts | 47 : 50 54 eerie
(Metal over Ra) 47 | 40 46 {| Mean =48
-Nett leak =695=TI’,
20 volts 55 ; 49 39 49 |
53 : 43 36 42 |

Mean = 743

600 volts LA OFG: GO et ele
(Meta over Ra) 47 | 61 551 Mean=64
Nett leak =829=I,

600 volts bf LOG oe :
54 3-70 66 ( Mean =893

.. Mean value of I, = 840.
Value of I’, =695.

194

3 TuRNS.

ad : K Rs
300 volts ri 53 93 | Mean =49

_ (Metal over Ra) | 44 44 |

| -Nett leak = 416 =I, (say) |
300 volts | 52 : 27 30 31 | ae

10 volts | 47: | 41 424

950: (98 96 a7 ( Meam=315)
feet

300 volts 47 52 Slottales 4 te
(Metal over Ra) | 47 45 42 Mean=48

-Nett leak =396=I
300 volts 52. | :06 «07 041, e j
30 | 88.88 88 ¢ Mean = 445

.. Mean value of I, =406.
Value of Il’, =340.

Hence, I,/I’,= 1-208, and I,/I’,=1:193. A repetition of
the experiment, in different order, gave I,/I,= 1-947, and
U./1,=1-897. These agree well with each other, for we find
from the first set that II’, I,.1, = 1-013, and from the second
that the same fraction = 1-025.

The fraction I,/I’, is the ratio of the saturation current
in a chamber about 6 mm. wide to the current when the
potential gradient is about 35 volts per cm., and I,’I’,; is the
ratio when the chamber is 3 mm. wide, all other conditions
being exactly the same. It ought, perhaps, to be mentioned
that the current for the chamber of double width was not
‘quite twice that for the other, because the widening was
effected by raising the top plate, and so adding to the cham-
ber a layer of air which was about 3 mm. further away from
the radium than the original layer. As a little heap of
radium bromide was used, the curve was of the form shown
in Plate xvii., ‘ Philosophical Magazine,” December, 1904, so
that. 1lonisation decreased as distance from the radium in-
creased. These results show clearly the existence of at least
one effect which we should expect to find as a result of initial
recombination.

Again, we ought to find that variation in current
strength, caused by altering the power of the ionising agent,
makes little difference to the form of the curve when the cur-
rent is small. We have made several experiments in this
direction also. In Fig. 2, curves A and B show the results

— wo rz0d s410A
Fett to ‘ | |
Seneeus , ee
a
Ee i i I
T

@porzostTes jo “wo ) be aed ser1edue
Uy 4UerINd- UoTZWANYS JO 19pP10

- fanor9w jo ‘wo ut oinssesg

Soe tears ol Peete egies ey

1M <——_ queuing V

00-% = NEE udotzBINIBS

196

of experiments with currents which were of an order ten
times smaller than those already described ; yet their form is
very similar. The curve A shows results with an 8 mm. ionisa-
tion chamber ; curve B, 4 mm. The ionisation was due to a
thin layer of radium, surmounted by a set of vertical tubes,
as described by us in the ‘“‘Philosophical Magazine,’’ September,
1905. Other experimental results may be expressed in
terms of I,, the saturation current for 4 turns of the screw
(rather less than 4 mm.), and I’, the current for a potential
gradient of 25 volts per cm., and the same depth of chamber.
Qn one occasion it was found that 1,/T,=1-:17: 1, ,=1-21; and
on another L,/[,=1:18: I, I’3=1:23. In these experiments the
radium was 5:05 cm. from the gauze. When the distance was
6°25 it was “found that “y= 127 = 1-29) and (ama
L/io= 1304-41-30: Te the latter cases the a rays did’ not
all get across the chamber: possibly the small variation of the
ratios with distance may, in some way, be due to this fact.

It might be argued that we ought not to find much varia-
tion in the lack of saturation when the current is increased by
shooting a greater number of a particles across the chamber
in one ‘second, on the following grounds:—KHach particle as
it flies across makes something like 10° ions in a centimetre of
its path. If there are only about 10* or 10° ions in a c.em.
at any one time it is clear that these must be all the work of
one particle, and that all the ions it produces are cleared
away before the next one comes. Thus, the 1cns made by one
a particle have no chance of combining with those made by
another, and recombination cannot be proportional to the
square of the number per c.c. But this consideration, though
no doubt true, cannot furnish an explanation of the fact that
the curves are little altered when the chamber is altered in
depth. It was, indeed, in view of this argument that we
made the experiments with the varying depths of the cham-
ber.

It is very instructive to compare these figures with the
results obtained by Retschinsky, and ‘described by
him in’ a paper contained im “Drude’s Anna-
len,’ No. 8, 1905. Very careful measurements have
been made by this observer of the relation be-
tween current and potential gradient in the case when the
currents are of an order 100 to 1,000 times greater than ee
of the experiments described A Bigs Curves D, E, and F, 1
Fig. 1, are plotted from the table on page 531 in his Ber
being reduced to a saturation value 400, so as to be com-
parable with the other curves in the same figure. It will be
geen that in this case the curves for differ eS widths of the
ionisation chamber differ very widely at low potential gra-

197

dients, and this is in accordance with the present hypothesis.
For, when the currents are so large, the value of an? is
great, and the effects of general recombination must be con-
siderable, unless the potential gradient is much increased. In
fact, the general characteristic of these curves is that the larger
the current the higher the potential gradient must be at the
point where the effects of altering the depth of the chamber
cease to be visible.

Several observers have determined the form of the curve
connecting current and potential gradient, and have calcu-
lated therefrom the recombination co-efficient. Let us now
consider the result of neglecting the effects of initial recom-

bination in these calculations.

If the currents are very great, the effects of initial re-
combination may be small as compared to those of general
recombination. But they must always be there, and their
effect will be of greater relative importan¢ée when the current
is made smaller, either by using a weaker source of ionisa-
tion or by lessening the width of the ionisation chamber. If
both effects are ascribed to one cause, whose influence is
measured by o, then a must be given a value which is ficti-
tiously large. The smaller the chamber, the greater the appa-
rent value of « must be; and this is actually the case, as
found and remarked upon by Retschinsky. For when the
chamber is very small the effects of general recombination
ought to be small; and if, as is the case, there is still a con-
siderable lack of saturation at moderate voltages, the whole
of which is ascribed to general recombination, the value found
for « must be very great. It is possible to find any desired
value of « in this way, if only the currents are made small
enough. This is especially true if we vse the first formula
employed by Retschinsky, and ascribed by him to Riecke. In
this the determination of « depends on the difference between
two current-values taken from the upper part of the curve
where the slope is due rather to initial than to general recom-
bination. To make this point clear consider the following
determinations of a: —

Retschinsky gives the following form of Riecke’s equa-
tion where the quantities are expressed in electrostatic
units : —

a=5-°52 x 10-* (€ an i (1 “Dy aan

where C=saturation current per sq. cm. of electrode
e=current for a potential gradient /’>

= depth of chamber.

198

He has found by experiment that when J is 1 em., and /', is
151 volts per em., then (in amperes)
C= 8:03 x 10/200 (area of electrode = 200 sq. em.)
= ld yall ae
== 3°94 x 10°"
Therefore,

C. ie

=A 1)"

and by substitution in the equation it can be found that
vje=4434 (doe ert., p. 530).
Now, in a similar experiment, with far smaller currents, we find
that when / is 1 em. and /, is 150 volts per em.
Gas. x 0r”
Ci) obi
‘Therefore

=2-2x 10"

and substitution in the equation gives a value of a/e about 5,000
times greater than Retschinsky’s, or about 2 x 10%.

In the second formula (Stark's) the values of « are more
correct, because the current values used are taken, one from
the lower part of the curve, and one from the saturation
values, so that their difference depends less on the effects of
initial recombination. Retschinsky draws attention to these
anomalies in his results, but ascribes them to absorption of
ions by the electrodes. He argues that in a shallow ionisation
chamber this effect must be greater than in a deeper one;
and so he accounts for the lack of saturation in the small
chamber, a lack which is excessive if attempt is made to
explain it as wholly due to general recombination, But we
think that a more reasonable explanation is to be found in
the hypothesis and results described in this paper, in connec-
tion with which Retschinsky’s results fall naturally into place.
Retschinsky points out that McClung obtained smaller values
of a than he himself obtained, and he suggests that, since
McClung’s apparatus consisted of a series of shallow iontsa-
tion chambers, the absorption effects would be considerable.
On the hypothesis of this paper McClung’s method is so far
the more reliable, that it avoids the complications due to the
special phenomena which occur in connection with the origi-
nal forming of the ions, and deals only with a state of things
in which ions have been formed and are distributed at ran-
dom through the gas. All methods in which ions are formed
whilst the potential gradient is in existence must be more or

vod

less affected by those phenomena, hitherto unregarded, which
it is the object of this paper to explain.

When, therefore, the ionising agent is feeble, the only
part of the curve which can be altered by varying the cur-
rent is that where the potential gradient is small; the feebler
the agent the smaller the gradient. Let us now consider
whether our hypothesis makes it probable that we can alter
the shape of the rest of the curve by any variation of the
conditions of the experiment.

Now, 1f initial recombination takes place because the
ejected electron does not get far enough away from its parent
atom before it is stopped by encountering another atom, then
diminution of pressure ought to make it much easier to satu-
rate. But this is a well-known fact (Rutherford, ““Philosophi-
cal Magazine,” vol. xlvi., p. 160). In order to obtain results
comparable with those we had already obtained at ordinary
pressures, we made several experiments in which all the con-
ditions were the same, except that the pressure was less than
that of the atmosphere. Curve C in Fig. 2 shows the results
of such an experiment. If this is compared with the other
curves in the same figure it will be clear that alteration has
taken place in the very portion of the curve where we should
have expected it, and where change in the strength of the
current has small influence, viz., all along the upper part of
the curve up to the high potential end. The saturation
current per sq.cm. was about 107° amp. In further sup-
port of our hypothesis it may be pointed out that it gives a
ready explanation of an experiment due to Rutherford, and
described by him in the “Philosophical Magazine,” vol. xlvn.,
p. 158. He found that the saturation value of the current
through a gas could be obtained for a much lower potential
gradient when the gas was drawn away from the uranium
which ionised it, and treated in a separate vessel. This is
to be expected when it is considered that under the circum-
stances of the experiment initial recombination was wholly
absent.

Tt is now convenient to consider these phenomena as they
are manifested in other gases than air. It is well known that
the relations between current and potential in carbon dioxide
are in some way abnormal. But the peculiarities of this gas
are even intensified in ethyl chloride (C,H,Cl). The fact
is that this effect, which makes it difficult to draw all the ions
to the electrodes in the case of air, is far greater in more
complex gases, and thus it is extremely difficult to obtain the
saturation current unless very high potentials are employed.
We find it necessary to use a potential gradient of two to
three thousand volts per cm. in the case of ethy! chloride at
60 em. pressure. In the investigations which were made by
us (“Philosophical Magazine,” September, 1905), with regard

200

to the ionisation curves in different gases, we found the cur-
rents to be unexpectedly small in the case of some gases. We
suggested that possibly some of the ions made by the «a
particles did not get away from their parent atoms. We pro-
posed to make a special investigation of the point, and it was
with this purpose that the work described in this paper was
undertaken.

It now appears that our suggestion was justified, but it
is also clear that we should have obtained larger currents if
we had used a higher potential gradient; 500 volts per cm.
was insufficient.

Consider the curves in Fig. 3. In A is shown the rela-
tion between current and potential gradient up to 3,000 volts
per cm. for ethyl chloride at 56 cm. pressure, the
saturation current per sq.cm. being about 3 x 107%.
B shows the same_ relation in the case of air
at atmospheric pressure, the saturation current being
rather smaller. Comparison of these two shows how
much more difficult it 1s to obtain the full current in the
more complex gas. Again, C shows the results of experiments
in which the depth of the ionisation chamber was varied. The
crosses refer to a 2 mm. chamber, the dots in cireles to a 4
mm. chamber. The currents were of the 10°" order. The
two sets of observations lie on practically the same curve.
This shows that general recombination is not responsible for
the lack of saturation, and that the cause is probably similar
to that whose effects in the case of air have been described
above. Curves D and E refer to experiments in which the
chamber was maintained at the same depth, 2 mm., but the
currents were altered by varying the distance of the radium.
In the former curve the saturation current is about 107%, in
the latter six times as much. In the case of the results shown
in C, D, and E the gas contained a certain proportion of air.

These results all go to show that the form of the curve
for ethyl chloride is almost independent, as in the case of air,
of strength of current and depth of ionisation chamber, when
the ionisation is small. But also, as in the case of air, it
depends greatly on the density of the gas. F represents the
results of experiments at a pressure of 36 cm., and is to be
compared with A. All the conditions, except as regards pres-
sure, were the same for the two curves.

We have also carried out experiments, similar to some
of those just described, for a mixture of carbon tetrachloride
and air, and obtained similar results. Although there was
only 5% (by pressure) of the denser gas in the mixture, yet
the current at a potential gradient of 330 volts per cm. was
only 82% of the saturation value, whilst in air under similar
conditions it was 93%.

—— Tick -

‘Wu f 310J

‘dae s-OIX Z = auerin9 a0 13 ¥1nj8e “m0 rf

‘einsseid ‘miu ¢ ‘sequreyo Jo qipIm seprsojyo 14430 “a - -
a Ul QaeiInd DOIQBINIeS Bema Kis = q ut

VAEIIND GDOMRINIeS L418 puw epruol qo [AyIq ‘q pu Gs -

“seyorro fq ‘seqmego

“Ate pue aptaotyo TAyya ur

pur [etiuazod uaamjzaq es eae Butmoys saaung

oo e
Hila

‘sessoi9 Aq peyousp seqmeqo wm zg 10}
83(N8e1 Smo Of ‘einsseig 418 paw epls0, qo 4q3q
‘et O1 XS = QueIINS UOIQBIN{ BS
“m9 94 ‘einsseid ! mm QO] ‘Jequreqgo Jo qIpIM i4IV ‘@
dm® Ol ¥ € = 1ueIINO DOMeIN{ES SMO 9S
‘einssoud ‘mum ¢ “seqmeqo JO YIpIM ‘eprso;go A4qia ‘W

quarind uorzesruoT

009

O-

“mo sod>sq TOA

a
HE
ECCLES

rege aad S404
002

It is hardly surprising that initial recombination should
be more effective in a complex gas than in air. For the
molecule contains many atoms, each one of which is just as
likely to lose an electron as if it were not associated with
other atoms. Perhaps, therefore, the molecule as a whole
loses two or three electrons, and its electric field is the more
intense. Recombination of this kind must also be easier, tne
shorter the free path.

It will be clear from the foregoing that certain effects
occur which are characteristic of a process of initial recombina-
tion, a process which is @ prior? not improbable. The question
now arises as to whether any other cause could produce the
same effects.

When we consider the great increase of current in a
complex gas. which is caused by an increase in the electric
force applied, we cannot but ask whether any of it is due to
the production of other ions by those actually made by the «4
particle. Could the electric force aid the freed electron to
gather speed sufficient to 1onise by colhsion? A process of
this kind would be similar in its results to initial recombina-
tion, in that it would be independent of strength of current
and depth of ionisation chamber. It seems probable, how-
ever, that its effectiveness would rather be increased than
diminished by lowering the pressure: and also it would be
difficult to account for the existence of a saturation value of
the current. Nevertheless, it does not seem safe as yet to say
that no such process occurs. Probably further light could be
thrown on the subject by an investigation into the total num-
ber of ions produced in different gases under varying cond1-
tions. Some initial experiments of this kind will be described
presently.

Rutherford has recently shown that the a particle of
RaC has only lost 40% of its velocity when it ceases to ionise.
If this fact is considered in conjunction with our investiga-
tions into the form of the ionisation curves for gaseous m1ix-
tures, it is at once clear that the « particle stops ionising in
every gas when its speed has fallen to precisely the same
value. For, if not, the ionisation curve for a mixture would
show a superposition of simple curves, of which effect there is
no trace. This and other considerations seem to show, as we
have already said (“Philosophical Magazine,” September,
1905), that the « particle performs the same number of acts
of ionisation in every gas. If, then, we find the total satu-
ration current to be different in different gases, we must come
to the conclusion that either the ions in the gases of higher
conductivity produce others by the help of the electric field,
or that in the gases of lower conductivity some of the ions
made by the a particle do not get free, even under conditions

203

of saturation, from their parent atoms, or that both these
effects take place. With tne object of helping to a decision
on this point we have begun a set of experiments, of which
those now described are the first examples.

The method used is to measure the co-ordinates of
some standard point on the ionisation curve of the gas investi-
gated, under different pressures. The point chosen is that
where the side of the RaC curve is struck by the top of the
curve which belongs to the «a particles of next velocity e
those of RaC. This point in air, at 760 mm. and 20° C.,
at a height of nearly 4°83 cm. ‘It is a convenient point és
choose, for the following reasons: —Being on a part of the
RaC curve, where no great change in the ionisation takes
place for a considerable alteration in range, the measure-
ments there are usually pretty consonant eich each other,
even though they are taken quickly, and if several be taken
on the RaC curve they check each other. ‘lhe ordinate of this
point can also be determined with great precision by measur-
ing two or three points along the top slope of the curve of RaA
(or emanation, whichever it finally proves to be). Thus, a
few readings can be quickly taken in succession which deter-
mine the point accurately, and very little leakage of air into
the apparatus takes place while the experiments go on. This
is a desirable thing, because our apparatus leaks slowly when
the pressure within is much reduced, on account of the large
number of connecting tubes and mechanical arrangements.
We find that this method is very satisfactory. We may men-
tion also that to save time it 1s not well, in the case of gases
like ethyl chloride, which are at first in the liquid form, to
admit any of the liquid into the apparatus, as it takes so long
to evaporate completely. It is better to let the liquid evapo-
rate in another chamber, which can be quite small, and then
to take over gas only.

Fig. 4 shows the results of some experiments with C,H,Cl.
The curves shown are portions of the ionisation curves in this
gas at different pressures. In all cases the apparatus was
exhausted of air to about 10 mm. pressure, then partly filled
with gas, re-exhausted, and filled again to the desired pres-
sure. The observations were made at once, those in the
neighbourhood of the standard point being made first, so that
the gas might be as pure as possible whilst. the important
readings were being taken. A potential of 900 volts was used
for the three greater pressures, and of 300 for the low pres-
sure. The chamber was 3 mm. wide, and therefore these
potential gradients were, respectively, 3,000 and 1,000 volts
per cm.

The results for ethyl chloride and for air are contained

BQ
iia ~ "SCRRED 8
GEGGR Sens“ 2eR 2!
eee eae
PE
ERAS SAPARD
REREw do “nano wl
HERRON
BaBE RGR Se
CP cra ea
| SEARS
Mezpeumielesh “|naratar als.
Eero sae
EEC
Ref

2o_— Jd Ge
Re eee
PERARER CBBC
5 | ef ape esd or eaten foe
SHEER tL
GEraeh LT
CBU
FEE EEHEE
ennai
i Ao
ETE
ae

Ionisation curves of ethyl chloride

at different pressures.

Position of standard point pal slolo| :

Distance radiune to ionisation chamber ———>

HRS Rhee eae eRe
tt eee ee eee cee eeeeaee
[| f& | | | | eel {
aa Pepe tel a
la |
400 800

in the following table, where P. denotes the pressure, R. the
range, and I. the ionisation on an arbitrary scale : —

Ethyl Chloride.

i, Re I he Rio wider «Raat ae
53°8 2°87 1,140 3,260 154
41:0 3°78 860 3,260 155
32°5 4°83 666 3,220 157
22°4 6°92 476 3,300 155
Ar.
75°3 LY gy) 546 2,576 355
579 6°08 432 2,620 352
46°9 Lag 340 2.020 348
38°8 9°00 283 2,540 349

205

These results relate to two gases only: but so far as they go
they show: —(i.) That the range varies inversely as the pres-
sure, which result might have been anticipated ; (ii.) that the
total number of ions set free in a gas is independent of the
pressure, but is different in different gases. The total ionisa-
tion is greater in ethyl chloride than in air. This is a con-
trary result to that which we obtained during our experiments
on absorption. We were unaware at that time of the enor-
mous force required to saturate the complex gas.

Finally, the following experiments may be briefly de-
scribed : —

We have tried the effect of reversing the field on the rela-
tion between current and potential, and found a result which
was practically negative. We have found a similar result
when the « particles were not shot straight across the ionisa-
tion chamber in the direction of the lines of force, but in a
slanting direction. These experiments were made in the en-
deavour to find whether there was any relation between the
direction in which electrons were projected and the direction
of the applied field. We have also tried to alter the range
in air by using different potential gradients, with the idea
that it might be possible to obtain ions from an atom traversed
by a slower « particle, if only enough electric force were
apphed. But the result was the same, no matter whether the
force was 20 volts to the cm. or 2,000: and a variation of ‘2
mm. could hardly have escaped detection.

In a paper which we had the honour to lay before this
Society on June 6, 1905, we described the results of some in-
vestigations into the correct form of the ionisation curve.
Assuming that the a particle had lost almost all its energy
when it ceased to ionise, we showed that it spent its energy
at a rate which was inversely proportional to the square root
of its speed. This assumption appeared to us at the time to
be reasonable, but Rutherford has shown since then (‘ Philo-
sophical Magazine,” July, 1905), that the « particle of RaC
still retains 40% of its initial energy when it ceases to ionise
the gas through which it passes. In consequence, the conclu-
sion which we drew from our experimental results needs modi-
fication. Recalculation shows that the «a particle spends
energy at a rate which is inversely proportional to the square
of its speed. This is interesting, since this is the rate at
which any particle moving with great speed gives up energy
to a particle, relatively at rest, which it passes by, it being
supposed that a force acts between the two which is a function
of their mutual distance (Report of the Australasian Associ-
ation for the Advancement of Science, Dunedin, 1904. p. 64).
Rutherford’s remarkable discovery does not affect any other
of our conclusions.

206

We have examined the loss of range of the « particle in
passing through several other atoms and molecules, and
found that in all cases the square root law is fulfilled at least
as accurately as for the atoms and molecules of the original
list. The new substances are:—Lead, iron, nickel, oxygen,
carbon dioxide, carbon bisulphide, ethyl iodide, chloroform,
pentane, and benzene.

During the progress of this work, one of us (R. D. Klee-
man) left Australia for England. We wish to acknowledge
with gratitude the assistance of Mr. H. J. Priest, B.Sc., in
completing the observations.

AN AROID NEW FOR AUSTRALIA.

By J. H. Marpen, Government Botanist and Director of the
Botanic Gardens, Sydney, Honorary Fellow.

[Read June 6, 1905.]

Amorphophallus campanulatus, Blume, Pine Creek,
Northern Territory of South Australia (J. H. Niemann).
Cultivated in the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, where it flower-
ed, October, 1904. Water colour drawings of the flower
(October, 1904), and of the foliage (January, 1905), have
been executed by Miss Margaret Flockton, and are deposited
in the National Herbarium, Sydney.

This species belongs to the section “‘Candarum,” chiefly
distinguished from the other sections by the long style.

According to Engler’s Monograph of Aroidee in DC.’s
Monographie Phanerogarum, vol. ii., p. 308 (1879), the fol-
lowing three species belong to this section : —

A. cam panulatus, Blume.

A. dubius, Blume.

A. hirsutus, Teysm.

The measurements of our plant are: —

Height of spathe, 10? inches.

Breadth of spathe, 8 inches.

Height of spadix, 84 inches (from base to top of
sterile appendage).

Sterile appendage, nearly 4 inches broad, and rather
above 3 inches high.

The measurements of A. dwhius are, according to “‘Bot.
Mag.,” t. 5187 :—
Height of spathe, 6 inches.
Height of spadix, 4 inches.

It will be seen that the flower is about twice as large as
those of 4. dwbius, and are sharply distinguished from that.
species by the wrinkled appendage of the spadix, which is
smooth and almost egg-shaped in 4A. duwbius.

The following are actual measurements of the plant of
A. campanulatus :

Height of plant, 6 feet 4 inches.
Length of petiole (trunk), 3 feet 10 inches.
Diameter of petiole, 1$ inches.

Length of leaf, 2 feet 6 inches.

Spread of foliage, 4 feet 4 inches.

208

The leaf does not differ from that of the type of A. cam
panulatus.

The flower differs in colour and shape. In the typical
A. campanulatus (as figured in ‘“‘Bot. Mag.,” t. 2812, and in
Blume’s “Rumphia,” I. t- 32 and 33) the spathe is broader
than high, while in the Northern Territory specimen the
spathe is higher than broad. The Northern Territory plant
is, further, darker inside and more distinctly spotted outside
than the type, and the sterile expansion on the top of the
spadix is considerably less wrinkled.

I do not think these differences are sufficient to warrant
its description as a new species, and, in view of the amount
of variation known to exist in the species, [ am not altogether
free from doubt as to the expediency of giving it a varietal
name. But it may be a convenience to distinguish the Nor-
thern Territory form, and therefore I propose the name 4d.
campanulatus, Blume, var. australasica, for it.

Several new species of Amorphophallus have been de-
scribed since 1879 (the date of Engler’s Monograph), but none
of the species recorded in the Supplement to the “Index
Kewensis’ come near the Northern Territory plant, so that I
have no doubt the plant is unrecorded for Australia.

Mueller mentions A. varzabilis, Blume, as the only Aus-
tralian species, and Bailey adds two more species, A. galbra
and A. angustiloba, but all these three species belong to a dif-
ferent section of the genus, and are very different from the
plant under consideration.

The geographical range of A. campanulatus is from
Madagascar to the Malayan Archipelago and the Melanesian
and Polynesian Islands, so that its occurrence in Australia
is only what could have been expected.

DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN CURCULIONIDZ, WITH
NOTES ON PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED SPECIES.
By ArtTuur M. Lza.

Rare RL;

|Read October 3, 1905. | .
SUB-FAMILY OTIORHYNCHIDES.
MYLLOCERUS AND ALLIED GENERA.

There is a very natural group of the Otiorhynchides, of
which JJ/yllocerus is the leading genus, that is abundantly
represented in Australia. The species are all comparatively
small, and live on foliage; many of them are clothed witr
green scales, which to the naked eye are sufficiently beautiful,
but which, under the microscope, are almost dazzling ; under
that instrument also scales apparently the most sober greys
and fawns take on a lovely appearance. The species are most
numerous in the tropics, and become sparser and more soberly
coloured the greater the distance from the equator; from Tas-
mania the group appears to be entirely absent.* Mr. Pascoe
proposed a number of genera allied to My//ocerus, but it is
very doubtful if they will all be maintained. He regarded
the bisinuation of the base of the prothorax as the main dis-
tinguishing feature of JJ/yllocerus, but this is a variable
character, and at least two species (ignaria and bicolor) have
been referred to 77tinia, in which the base 1s bisinuate.

I do not know a single external character which alone is
sufficient to denote the sex of a specimen ; where the sexes are
before one they can sometimes be distinguished by the greater
size of the females; in some species also the scape is consider-
ably stouter in one sex than in the other; the shape of the
prothorax is also not always the same; but these characters
are useless for ascertaining the sex of unique specimens.

The scales are usually so dense that the derm cannot be
seen, and the shape and positions of the punctures are seldom
traceable; consequently, before describing the new species, |
have always considered it necessary to partially abrade at
least one specimen. By doing this great differences can be
seen to exist in the punctures of the prothorax (and to a less
extent of the elytra), and of which absolutely no sign was
visible before abrasion.

* It is true that Myllocerus speciosus was described as from
Western Australia and Tasmania, but I do not believe that it,
er any other species of Myllocerus, occurs in Tasmania.

210

Practically ‘any species with green scales, belonging to
the allied genera, would fit the description of Myllocerus AU S-
tralis, Boi., so until more information is forthcoming I think
this name should be regarded as non-existent.

MYLLOCERUS TREPIDUS. Pasc., and DUPLICATUS, Pasce.

There are four specimens before me, from Port Denison
and Endeavour River, which evidently belong to one of these
species, but as to au aia is very doubful if these names really
appertain to distinct species. The four specimens appear to
agree very well with either of the formal descriptions, but on
comparing these together the following apparent discrepancies

appear : —

Trepidus Duplicatus.
Second joint of funicie longer Second joint much longer than
than first first
Prothorax short Prothorax very short
Seutellum oblong Scutellum less oblong
Klytra with irregular white Elytra with white sete in double
setee series.

Duplicatus is also said to be more richly coloured, and
the setose scales otherwise arranged.

The four insects have the elytral sete arranged in places
in double and in places in treble series, but the apparent
arrangement is subject to alteration according to the point
of view. If, however, the character of the antennz is reliable,
the specimens will belong to trepidus, as the second joint of
the funicle is but very little longer than the first.

Mytuiocerus Darwin, Blackb.

I have two specimens from Cairns, one of which agrees
exactly with the description of this species, but in the other
three very faint infuscate lines can be traced on the pro-
thorax.

: My.iLocerus spEciosus, Blackb.

A species which appears to be common in North Queens-
land* agrees with the description of this insect. The dark
vittee of the prothorax are somewhat variable in shape and
width, and the scales on the elytra of some specimens have a
distinct golden gloss.

MYLLOCERUS LATICOLLIS » .Sp.

Dark reddish brown: appendages somewhat paler.
Densely clothed with whitish-grey scales, on the upper sur-
face obscurely mottled with brown; in addition with stout
setose scales or sete; dense on legs, dense and rather fine on
antenne, and subseriate in arrangement on elytra, on the
latter they are but little elevated above the general level.

* Cairns, Badkaveut ee Gealorn. ue

211

Head not impressed between eyes; these prominent and
suboval. Rostrum short, broad, and slightly concave. Scrobes
distant. Two basal joints of funicle subequal in length. /’ro-
thorax strongly transverse, sides strongly dilated to base:
base strongly bisinuate and distinctly wider than elytra.
Scutellum transverse. H/ytra slightly dilated at shoulders,
thence parallel-sided to near apex: striate-punctate. Femuora
feebly dentate. Length, 55 mm. é

Hab.—Queensland: Cairns (Henry Hacker).

The base of prothorax distinctly wider than the elytra
will readily distinguish from all previously described species.
On abrasion the prothorax is seen to be supplied with rather
small, isolated punctures ; those on the elytra are fairly large,
round, and in distinct strie, but before abrasion appear to
be much smaller and narrowly oblong.

MYLLOCERUS ABUNDANS, n.sp.

Black, appendages in places obscurely diluted with red.
Densely clothed with scales, usually more or less green in
colour. In addition with numerous sete, which on the elytra
have a tendency to form in double rows on each interstice.

Head narrowly impressed between eyes; these oblong
oval. Rostrum short, but rather narrow, slightly constricted
in middle, feebly concave along middle. Scrobes deep,
large, and approximating behind. Antenne stout: scape
grooved below; first joint of funicle as long as second and
third, second as long as third and fourth, seventh slightly
longer than sixth. /Prothorax transverse, apex much nar-
rower than base, and slightly incurved to middle; sides
strongly rounded, base trisinuate, the median sinus small and
the width of scutellum. Scwte/lum transverse. Elytra not
much wider than and closely applied to prothorax; striate-
punctate. Femora feebly dentate. Length, 64 to 84 mm.

Hab.—N.W. Australia: Roebourne (C. French).

Judging by the numerous specimens before me, the
colour of the scales seems subject to alteration after death,
either through improper treatment or through oily exuda-
tions. When alive the scales are probably of an uniform
bright green, but in specimens before me there are patches,
varying from single scales to large, irregular areas, in which
the process of change appears to be as follows :—From bright
green to golden green, then to bright golden, then to dull
golden, and finally to ashy, in this stage all lustre having dis-
appeared: the patches are never symmetrical (unless the
whole of the scales are changed), but may be confined to one
side, and appear in some instances to have been altered
through contact with other insects in the bottle in which
they were collected. I believe in other species of the sub-
family the scales are also subject to alteration.

212

The elytral sete are often indistinct, and (except to a
shght extent posteriorly) do not rise above the general level,
on the prothorax they are more distinct. The eyes are less
prominent than in any other here recorded. The emargina-
tion of the apex of the prothorax, although of the same
nature, is much less distinct than in Bovilli. In other species
of the genus the scutellar lobe is probably emarginate, but the
emargination masked. In the present species, however, it is
sufficiently deep to prevent the scales entirely masking it.
The scape is narrowly grooved throughout its entire lower
surface, a most unusual character in any genus of weevils;
there are, however, several of its congeners with traces of this
feature. On abrasion, the punctures are seen ta be as de-
scribed in the preceding species, and the rostrum to have two
fine coste marking the inner boundaries of the scrobes.

Possibly close to aurifex, but differs from the description
of that species in having the elytra without patches or spots
of fawn, the rostrum longitudinally impressed (the impres-
sion, however, often concealed by scales), the eyes shghtly
oblong, elytra not much wider than base of prothorax, and
the second abdominal segment (at least along middle) much
shorter than the first; also in aurzfex no mention is made of
sete. With the description of glawcinus it agrees fairly well,
but it cannot be that species, as Pascoe tabulates it as hav-
ing the “eyes round” and “form more slender,” whilst the
present species is the most robust of its genus I have seen.

MYLLOCERUS AMBLYRHINUS, N. Sp.

Black, appendages reddish. Densely clothed with white
(very lightly tinted with blue) scales, on the elytra obscurely
variegated with small pale brown spots. In addition with
short sete, which on the elytra are curved and slightly ele-
vated above the general level.

Head convex. Eyes suboval and very prominent. Ros-
trum very short, subquadrate, concave only at extreme apex.
Scrobes distant. First joint of funicle not much longer
than second. Prothorax strongly transverse, base mode-
rately bisinuate and slightly narrower than apex; sides
rounded. Hlytra much wider than prothorax, striate-punc-
tate. Femora minutely dentate. Length, 55 mm.

Hab.—N.W. Australia: Roebuck Bay (C. French).

The rostrum is unusually short, and the eyes are more
prominent than usual. The femoral teeth are so small as to
be invisible from most directions. On abrasion the pro-
thoracic punctures are seen to be fairly large, and more numer-
ous than in the two preceding species, but those on the
elytra are much the same.

Evidently close to the description of naswtws, but smaller,

213

prothorax slightly narrower at base than at apex, and with
distinctly rounded sides, the elytra without rows of decum-
bent scales, although on each interstice there is a row of larger
scales, but these are nowhere elevated above the others. From
the description of torr7dus it differs in the first joint of the
funicle slightly longer than the second and the base of its
prothorax not very strongly bisinuate.

MYLLOCERUS SORDIDUS, h. sp.

Blackish-brown, appendages in places obscurely diluted
with red. Densely clothed with white or whitish scales; on
the upper surface largely mottled with rusty brown. In
addition with numerous sete, which on the elytra have a ten-
dency to form in irregular r ws, and are distinctly elevated
above the general level.

Head narrowly impressed between eyes: these suboval
and not prominent. Rostrum not very short, feebly but regu-
larly diminishing in width to apex, feebly concave. Scrobes
rather distant. Antenne fairly stout; apical half of scape
feebly grooved beneath ; first joint of funicle distinctly longer
than second. Prothorax moderately transverse, apex feebly
incurved to middle, sides rounded: base rather strongly bi-
sinuate and not at all or but shghtly wider than apex. Flytra
considerably wider than prothorax, very feebly increasing in
width to beyond the middle; striate-punctate. Memora eden-
tate. Length, 5-65 mm.

Hab.—Western Australia: Geraldton (A. M. Lea).

On abrasion the punctures of the prothorax are seen to
be fairly large and rather numerous, with the minute inter-
vening punctures* rather more distinct than usual.

MYLLOCERUS NIVEUS, D. sp.

Black, appendages reddish. Densely clothed with pure
white scales. In addition with numerous stout sete, which
on the elytra are formed into irregular rows and slightly ele-
vated above the general level.

Head narrowly impressed between eyes: these briefly
elliptic and prominent. Rostrum not very short, diminishing
in width from base but not to extreme apex, gently concave
in front. Scrobes rather distant, distinct to eyes. Antenne
thin, all joints of funicle elongate, first shghtly longer than
second. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rounded, ex-
treme base slightly wider than apex, and srongly bisinuate.
Elytra much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to near
apex; striate-punctate. emora finely dentate. Length,
6-75 mm.

* These minute punctures are evidently for the scales, the
larger ones being for the sete: they are to be seen on all the
species on abrasion, both on the prothorax and elytra.

214

//ab.—Queensland: Cooktown, Endeavour River (Cc.
French). .

On abrasion the punctures of the prothorax are seen tu
be rather large, those on the elytra (although before abrasion
apparently no larger than in other species) are almost as wide
as the interstices separating them.

MYLLOCERUS ELEGANS, n. Sp.

Dark reddish-brown; appendages reddish. Densely
clothed with pale-green, golden-green or rosy glistening scales.
In addition with fine sete, which on the elytra are formed
into irregular rows, and scarcely rise above the general level.
Length, 6 mm.

Hab.—N.W. Australia: Roebourne (C. French).

In structure much like the preceding species, but the
eyes rather less prominent, the prothorax longer, more con-
vex across middle, the sides more strongly rounded, and base
not so strongly sinuous; the antennze are stouter, and the
first joint of the funicle is considerably longer than the sec-
ond: the scales are greenish instead of dull, dead white, sete
denser, finer, and longer: the punctures (as seen after abra-
sion) are also larger and more irregular on the prothorax
and smaller on the elytra. The sete on the upper surface are
unusually thin. It agrees fairly well with the description of
glaucinus, but cannot be that species, which Pascoe placed
in his table amongst those having “prothorax much broader
at the base,” whilst in the present species the base and apex
are of equal width: pwdicus (from Nicol Bay, practically the
same as Roebourne) is briefly compared with glawcinus, and
placed beside it in the table, so that it also cannot be the
present species.

There are two specimens before me, one having the scales
as described, the other having them almost entirely without
gleam, and white, except that in places they are lightly tinged
with green or gold: on this specimen the elytral sete (al-
though exactly as in the type) are much more distinct. The
species, in fact, appears to be one in which the scales (as in
ahundans) are subject to alteration.

MYLLOCERUS .RUGICOLLIS, n. Sp.

Reddish-brown, appendages paler. Densely clothed with
pale, greyish scales, on the elytra very slightly (or not at all)
variegated with small spots of pale brown. In addition with
fairly stout sete, but on the elytra these are very sparse and
indistinct.

Head feebly convex, very narrowly impressed between
eyes: these briefly elliptic and rather large. Rostrum sub-
quadrate, feebly concave. Scrobes distant. Antenne rather

215

stout ; scape grooved on its lower surface at apex; first joint
of funicle slightly longer than second, the others all slightly
transverse; club rather short. Prothorax moderately trans-
verse, apex slightly wider than base, sides rounded, base not
very strongly bisinuate. //ytra much wider than prothorax,
widest at their middle; striate-punctate. Femora distinctly
dentate. Length, 5-6} mm. é'

/ab.—Queensland: Brisbane (R. Lllidge, T. McGregor,
and E. J. Turner).

The prothorax has an elevated ridge across its middle,
with a slight depression on each side behind it, the depres-
sions being occasionally very distinct. On abrasion the punc-
tures of both prothorax and elytra are seen to be almost ex-
actly as in the preceding species, but the elytral interstices
are narrower and more convex.

Close to the description of modestus, but all the femora
distinctly dentate, instead of the front femora only (at least
it is so implied), prothorax no wider at base than at apex and
sides quite strongly rounded ; for that species also no mention
is made of the transverse prothoracic impressions so conspicu-
ous in the present species.

There are two specimens before me from the Endeavour
River, which I hesitate to regard as this species, although
they have a strong general resemblance to it. They differ in
having thinner antenne, none of the joints of the funicle
transverse, and in having the femoral dentition stronger : the
transverse impressions on the prothorax are also absent.

MYLLOCERUS ECHINATUS, Nl. sp.

Dark reddish-brown, appendages (except club) somewhat
paler. Very densely clothed with greyish or pale fawn-
coloured scales. In addition with numerous stout sete: long,
erect, or suberect on the elytra, shorter on the prothorax and
head, and still shorter on the appendages.

Head with the eyes briefly elliptic and rather large. Ros-
trum moderately long and concave. Scrobes subapproximate.
Antenne stout ; first joint of funicle shghtly shorter than sec-
ond. Prothorax as long as wide, sides scarcely rounded, and
very feebly increasing in width to base, base strongly bi-
sinuate. Hlytra much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided
to near apex; striate-punctate. /emora edentate. Length,
4-4) mm.

Hab.—North Queensland: (H. J. Carter), Cairns (E.
Allen).

The elytral sete or bristles are longer and stouter than
in any other species known to me, each is directed at almost
or quite a right angle with the derm in which itis set. From
behind they can be seen to be in quite regular rows, of which

216

the alternate ones are slightly higher than the others. On
abrasion the punctures of the prothorax are seen to be very
large (they are fully twice as large as those of any here re-
corded), close together, and rough; those on the elytra are
large (but smaller than those on prothorax), with the inter-
stices separating them narrow and rather strongly convex.
The rostrum has two very strong costa, which are almost or
quite concealed by the clothing.
MYLLOCERUS SUTURALIS, R. sp.

Dark reddish-brown, elytra and appendages paler.
Densely clothed with whitish scales; on the under surface
slightly tinged with blue, on the upper surface largely (and
to a variable extent) mottled with rusty brown. In addition
with numerous stout sete, which on the elytra become long
and suberect.

/lead almost flat, and with a small impression between
eyes; these fairly large and briefly elliptic. Rostrum slightly
longer than wide, slightly diminishing in width to apex,
feebly concave. Scrobes distant. Antenne rather thin; first
joint of funicle slightly longer than second. Prothorax about
as long as wide, apex just perceptibly incurved to middle,
sides slightly rounded, base as wide as apex and feebly bi-
sinuate. H/ytra much wider than prothorax, almost parallel-
sided to beyond the middle; striate-punctate. Femora finely
but acutely dentate. Length, 32-42 mm.

/1ab.— Queensland: Gayndah (Australian Museum).

The white scales clothe the sides, and form a continuous
line commencing between the antenne and terminated at the
tip of elytra, they usually clothe the shoulders and form spots
(sometimes condensed into more or less oblique fasciz) between
the sides and suture. On several specimens, however, the
white scales do not form a median line on the prothorax, and
on the elytra no distinct spots or patches are defined. The
elytral sete are almost as long as in the preceding species, but
are thinner and less erect, whilst those on the prothorax and
head are quite normal. On abrasion the prothoracic punc-
tures are seen to be fairly large and dense, those on the
elytra are also fairly large and close together.

Although the base of the prothorax is almost truncate, I
have referred this species to /yllocerus, despite Mr. Pascoe’s
contention that all such species should be excluded; to fall in
line with Mr. Pascoe it would be necessary to propose a be-
wildering number of new and highly unstable genera. In
general appearance, the present is lose to several species of
Myllocerus, closer still perhaps to several species of Titinia,
but its dentate femora exclude it from that genus, from
Proxyrus (also with dentate femora and base of prothorax

217

subtruncate), its prothorax distinguishes it, from Proxryrodes
it is distinguished by the scape passing the apex of the pro-
thorax.

MYLLOCERUS TRILINEATUS, N. sp.

Dark reddish-brown; elytra and appendages paler.
Densely clothed with scales ; white on the lower surface, rusty-
brown, variegated with dingy white on the upper. In addi-
tion with stout sete, which on the elytra are arranged in
regular rows, and scarcely rise above the general levei.
Length, male 5, female 7 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Gayndah (Australian Museum).

Decidedly allied to the preceding species, and placed in
Myllocerus for the same reasons; but differs in its feeble
elytral sete and in its larger size, the base of its prothorax 1s
also shghtly more sinuous; the rostrum shghtly diminishes ta
width from base, but not to extreme apex, and 1s not con-

cave, and the antennz are rather thin. On abrasion the
punctures are seen to be much the same, except that those
on the prothorax are somewhat denser and coarser. In all

other features of structure, however, the two species are almost
identical.

The brown scales are almost absent from the head, form
three feeble stripes of variable intensity on the prothorax (of
which the median is always narrower than the others), and
are condensed into numerous spots on the elytra, these spots
(although never eye-like in character) frequently have their
centres darker than their margins. I have two pairs pinned
as having been taken in cop., but except for the difference in
size the sexes appear to be exactly alike.

MYLLOCERUS EXILIS, n. sp-

Brownish-red, appendages of a rather pale red. Densely
clothed with white or greyish-white scales (slightly tinged
with blue or not); prothorax with three very pale stripes of
brown, elytra usually with very indistinct brownish spots.
Setz much as in the preceding species.

Head moderately convex ; eyes briefly elliptic. | Rostrum
shorter than wide, feebly diminishing in width to apex.
Scrobes moderately distant. First joint of funicle just per-
ceptibly shorter than second ; scape stouter in female than in
male. Prothorary in male slightly longer than wide, in female
very feebly transverse, sides feebly rounded, base the width
of apex, and rather feebly bisinuate. #/ytra much wider than
prothorax, widest at about the middle; striate-punctate.
Femora very feebly dentate. Length, 44-5} mm.

Hab.—N.W. Australia: Roebourne (C. French).

A rather thin species; its clothing on the whole is much
as in the preceding species, except that it is much paler (on

218

only one specimen before me are the markings at all distinct),
but the size of both sexes is distinctly less, and the prothorax
is decidedly longer, and on abrasion the punctures are seen
to be somewhat smaller and more regular.

The species of Wy/locerus known to me may be tabulated
as follows: ---
Prothorax at base wider than elytra --: , LOLICOWLS, eee

Prothorax narrower than elytra.
Prothorax at base much wider than at

apex. a}
Apex of prothorax strongly incurved ... Bovilli, Blackh.
Apex of prothorax straight, or almost so. _

Clothing never green... =e ... cinerascens, Pase.

Clothing more or less green.
Prothorax with two irregular black
Vater <:; a ... speciosus, Blackb.
Prothorax without vitte. .. ahundans, n. sp.
Prothorax at base not at all or very little
wider than at apex.
Elvtra with long setze or bristles,
Setze on prothorax and head also long echinatus, n. sp.
Sete on prothorax and head normal . suturalis, n. sp.
Elytra never with long sete,
Clothing more or less green.
Elytra wider at middle than at base ftrepidus, Pase.
Elytra parallel-sided to beyond the
middle.
Prothorax strongly rounded in
middle oe fh LG ... elegans, n. sp.
Prothorax at most moderately
rounded in middle.
Prothorax less than once and
one half as wide as long ... wsitatus, Lea,
Prothorax at least once and one
half as wide as long.
Sutural interstice with dis-
tinct setz throughout ... carinatus, Lea.
Sutural interstice. at most { Tater. Blackb.
setose posteriorly... ... | Darwint, Blackb.
Clothing of upper surface not at all

oreen.
First joint of funicle shorter than

second erilis, n. sp.
First joint of “funicle longer than

second.

Rostrum wider than long.
Klytra wider at middle than at

base beh a me ss, TUGLCOULS, Taste
Elytra parallel-sided to beyond
the middle ik at .. amblyrhinus. n. sp.
Rostrum longer than wide.
Clothing pure white ae iu MIVEUS; N.ISp.
Clothing more or less varie-
cated.
Narrowest ig of rostrum its
apex ii) .. af a ... gordidus, n, sp.

Narrowest part of rostrum
before its apex ae ... ftrilineatus, n. sp.

219

TITINIA.

As with many others of Mr. Pascoe’s genera, there is
really very little to distinguish this genus from ./ y/locerus, the
sinuation at the base of the prothorax being practically one
of degree only. I have referred but one new species to it, but
several placed in J/yllocerus might have been so referred, only
that their femora are dentate, and this character (not that it
is a very good one) I have regarded as a bar to the species
belonging to 7vtinia.

TITINIA EREMITA, Blackb., and sBicotor, Blackb.

Specimens of both of these species were sent to me by
Mr. Blackburn (his 469 and 3945); the two are very closely
allied, but appear to be distinct on account of the first joint
of the funicle being much longer than the second in eremita
and not much longer in /ico/or; in the former also there is a
median whitish vitta on the prothorax, and that part is more
parallel-sided.

In the table Mr. Blackburn supplies* he divides the
genus into two sections : —

“A. Rostrum very narrow between the scrobes.”
“AA. Rostrum but little narrowed between the scrobes.”’

These expressions are somewhat misleading, inasmuch as
the width of the rostrum between the scrobes is much the
same in both sections; in “A,” however, the rostrum itself
is almost continuously narrowed from the base to the apex,
but in “AA” it is narrowed from the base, and then in-
creases 1n width to the apex. But the upper surface of the
rostrum between the scrobes is greatly constricted in both sec-
tions.

TITINIA IGNARIA, Pasc.
marmorata, Pase.
lwta, Blackb.

These names appear to appertain to but one species,
agnaria having been described from a female with the mark-
ings but little pronounced ; marmorata from a male (the male
is always smaller than the female in this species, as in most,
if not all, of the subfamily). Zgnaria was described as hav-
ing the “head (the rostrum presumably included) without any
traces of lines or excavations”; marmorata as having “capitis
fronte rostroque in medio linea longitudinaliter impressa.”
This apparent difference, however, was probably due to the

— —

PP. oN SoWiasteos, Pp. dabs
+ At least in /eta, tenwis, and brevicollis of A, and bicolor and
eremita of AA; the appearance of this space, moreover, varies
according to whether the scales have been abraded or not.

220

comparative freshness of the individuals, as when the head
and rostrum are densely squamose no line can be seen, but
when at all abraded a line can be traced.

The species is a variable and widely distributed one, and
is common on various species of acacia. The elytra are some-
times almost entirely pallid, whilst in others they are very
decidedly maculate; they always, however, have rows of semi-
erect bristles. The prothorax is usually supplied with three
infuscate lines, occasionally with but two (it was probably
from a female of this form that Blackburn drew up his de-
scription of /ata), whilst a form is not at all uncommon in
which the whole upper surface of the prothorax is clothed
with infuscate scales. The size varies from 14 to 2 mm.

In this species (as in others of the subfamily) the appa-
rent width and shape of the joints of the funicle differ accord-
ing to whether they are free or clogged with gum, and fresh
or abraded.

On one specimen before me the deciduous mandibular
processes are present. They are strongly curved, not half
the length of the head and rostrum combined, widest and
obtusely dentate in the middle, and of a reddish ‘colour.

The species is very close to tenuis and brevicollis (if these
are really distinct), but differs in having the prothorax longer
and the elytra with semi-erect bristles.

Hab.-—Victoria: Grampians, Ararat, Melbourne; New
South Wales: Blue Mountains, Springwood, Forest Reefs;
Queensland: Brisbane.

TITINIA PARVA, Nl. Sp.

Black, appendages (except middle of femora) reddish.
Densely clothea with dingy whitish and slaty-brown scales,
and with sparse, stout sete.

H1ead narrowly impressed in middle, the impression con-
tinued on to rostrum. Eyes large, almost round. Rostrum
gradually narrowing to apex. Scrobes short, deep, and ap-
proximating behind. Scape strongly curved ; first joint of
funicle distinctly longer than second. Prothorax feebly trans-
verse, base lightly bisinuate, sides lightly rounded in middle.
Elytra subparallel on basal two-thirds, much wider than pro-
thorax ; striate-punctate. /emora edentate. Length, 2} mm.

Hab.—Victoria (National Museum).

The smallest of the subfamily as yet recorded from Aus-
tralia. From ignaria it differs in being smaller, in the elytra
having the sete sparse, short, and scarcely (usually not at all)
rising above the general level (instead of rather dense and
sub- erect) ; the club also is reddish. The prothorax is dis-
tinctly longer than in fenwis and brevicollis.

221

The white scales in places (but especially on the under
surface) are slightly tinged with green, but they are nowhere
shining; they clothe the head (on one specimen there is a
broad median patch of brown scales extending from the base
to between the antennz), rostrum, scutellum, under surface,
and legs; form four lines on the prothorax (two median and
two lateral), and are distributed in irregular patches on the
elytra; on the latter they cover from one-fourth to one-half
of the surface, on the prothorax they cover less than half. The
setze are rather numerous on the legs and antenne, rather
sparse on the prothorax, and very sparse on the elytra: they
are nowhere dark in colour. The elytra to the eye appear
almost seriate-punctate, the punctures being partially visible,*
but the striz very indistinct.

SYNOMUS ZRUGINOSUS, n. sp.

Black, appendages reauish. Densely clothed witb golden-
green scales: abdomen and appendages with white scales (with
an occasional golden gleam) and with white sete. Elytra with
long, stiff, upright, whitish bristles, prothorax with similar
but shorter bristles, and still shorter ones on head.

Ilead \arge and very feebly convex. Eyes almost round.
Rostrum slightly diminishing in width from base to apex,
with a narrow, impressed line, which terminates posteriorly
in a narrow, ocular fovea. First joint of funicle distinctly
longer than second. /rothorax strongly transverse, base
strongly bisinuate, sides lightly rounded. Scutellwm minute.
Elytra ovate, widest at about the middle, at base closely ap-
plied to and no wider than prothorax: striate punctate. Fe-
mora minutely dentate. Length, 4? mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Chillagoe (C. French).

Ou both specimens before me several obscure patches of
ereyish scales are to be seen on the prothorax and elytra, but
these may be due to an oily exudation. The elytra appear to
be rather finely striate only, but on abrasion fairly large
punctures are exposed. The green scales will readily dis-
tinguish it from cephalotes.

- The elytra at the base no wider than the prothorax + is
practically the only character Pascoe gave as distinguishing
Synomus from Mylloceris, but it appears to be a very good

* These are the only ones that are even partially visible, all
the punctures on the prothorax and elsewhere being quite con-
cealed.

+ This is due to the narrowing of the elytra to the base, the
prothorax being normal: in several species of Myllocerus the
elytra at the base are no wider (in one species they are narrower)
than the prothorax, but this is due to the hind margins of the
prothorax being widened out to the base.

222
one, and, as in other genera having similar elytra, these are
partially soldered together, and the wings are rudimentary.

HoMAOTRACHELUS.

Although this genus* was referred by Faust to the Zany-
mecides, 1t appears to me to belong to the same subfamily as
Myllocerus, despite its short scape: the side pieces of the
meso- and meta-sternum to which (and with justice) so much
importance was attached by Leconte, are identical in both
genera, and, in fact, were the antenne removed, there would
be nothing to prevent the species of it being referred to J/y/lo-
cerus itself.

HomM£oTRACHELUS TRICARINATUS, Nh. Sp.

Black, appendages reddish: apical sides of elytra ob-
scurely diluted with red. Densely clothed with scales—
white on the under surface and legs, greyish-white on upper
surface; elytra and abdomen in addition with subsetose
scales, but which do not (or but seldom) rise above the gene-
ral level.

Head distinctly impressed between eyes; these large and
suboval. Rostrum the length of head, sides parallel and al-
most vertical, sides and middle carinate, the median carina
bifurcate in front, terminated posteriorly in ocular fovea.t
Two basal joints of funicle of equal length, and combined
slightly longer than scape. Prothora« moderately trans-
verse, base not much wider than apex, sides moderately
rounded. Scute//um subtriangular. //ytra much wider than
prothorax, each strongly rounded at base, striate-punctate,
the punctures large, subapproximate and subquadrate, but
more or less concealed. /emora unarmed, the hind pair
glabrous internally. Length, 6-6) mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Port Denison (Macleay Museum).

The prothorax, although almost truncate at the base,
appears to be rather strongly bisinuate; as in others of the
genus the ocular lobes are absent, but their positions are
marked by small patches of long yellowish sete. The punc-
tures are everywhere more or less concealed, but those on
the head and prothorax are evidently rather coarse: those on
the elytra appear to be large, oblong, and black, but when
the scales have been abraded appear of different shape and

* T cannot be mistaken as to its identification, as I have four
specimens agreeing with the description of 77. australasic, and
one of which was sent to me with the name by the late Herr J.
Faust himself.

+ The expression ‘‘ocular fovea’? refers to the impression
which exists between the eyes in almost all weevils, aa which
appears to correspond with the clypeal suture of other heetles.

223

much larger. In general outline it approaches Australasia,
but the clothing is more uniform, and the elytra] punctures
are larger.

SUB-FAMILY CRYPTORHYNCHIDES.,.
LYBHBA ACUTICOSTA, Nn. Sp.

Male. Red, club infuscate ; base of rostrum, sterna, and
abdomen black. Clothed with bright red, variegated with
stramineous scales ; on prothorax the paler scales form a short
median and distinct lateral stripes, on the elytra they are
condensed into numerous small spots, which become more or
less fasciate in arrangement. Under surface with pale
scales; head with red scales continued to near antenne.

Hyes separated the width of rostrum at base. Rostrum
long, moderately curved, thin, parallel-sided to antenne,
thence slightly (but noticeably) decreasing in width and
depth to apex; rather strongly punctate, punctures behind
antenne partially concealed, but leaving three acute coste.
Scape inserted one-third from apex, shorter than funicle.
Prothorar moderately transverse, apex more than half the
width of base, with dense, partially-concealed punctures.
Seutellium round and punctate. Elytra sabcordate, each
gently rounded at base, shoulders gently rounded: striate-
punctate, punctures partially concealed: interstices regular,
much wider than punctures. J/esosterna/ plate semi-circular,
feebly depressed. Abdomen densely and shallowly punctate,
third and fourth segments straight, their combined length
more than that of second and much more than that of fifth.
Femora acutely dentate. Length, 4: rostrum, 14: width,
24 mm.

Female differs in having the derm entirely red, the ros-
trum slightly longer, more “noticeably curved, feebly punc-
tate, shining, gently decreasing in width from base to apex and
clothed only at base: the antennze inserted less close to
apex, and the eyes larger and less prominent.

Hab.—South Australia (Macleay Museum).

Alhed to majormma, but the rostrum different in both
Sexes.

MELANTERIUS IMPOLITUS, Lea.

I have to thank the Rev. T. Blackburn for calling my
attention to a mistake made by me in regard to this species.
In my table it is included amongst those. having “‘interstices
raised posteriorly,’ ’ and in the description I say (quite cor-
rectly), “elytra nowhere ridged.”

MELANTERIUS COSTIPENNIS, Nn. sp.

Piceous-black: head, legs, and rostrum piceous-red, an-

tenne and elytra somewhat paler. Clothed with moderately

224

elongate scales, varying on different specimens from a strami-
neous yellow to an ochreous red; prothorax with a basal spot
and two sublateral stripes: elytra with numerous distinct
spots of scales, the interspaces with small and obscure sooty
scales. Metasterna] episterna each with a distinct row.

Head densely punctate: ocular fovea distinct: eyes
ovate, separation less than width of rostrum at base. | Ros-
trum feebly curved, sides very feebly incurved to middle;
male densely and strongly punctate, punctures leaving five
irregular ridges to antenne: female less coarsely punctate,
and with only the median ridge moderately distinct. Seape
the length of funicle: in male inserted one-third from apex ;
in female two-fifths. /’roivora. strongly transverse, densely
punctate, punctures in places feebly confluent, with or with-
out a feeble median line. Scutellum oblong-ovate. Hlytra
about once and one-third the width of and more than twice
the length of prothorax : shoulders oblique; seriate-punctate,
punctures suboblong, feebly connected: interstices much
wider than punctures, the third, fifth, and seventh acutely
raised, the ridges shining. J/esosternal plate moderately
transverse, depressed, and feebly concave. Metasternum
rather densely punctate, the episterna each with a single row
of punctures. Abdomen with moderately large and shallow
punctures on first segment, smaller and sparser on second,
smaller and dense on fifth : third and fourth combined, slightly
longer than second, each with a single row of punctures.
Legs moderately long: femora rather strongly dentate: pos-
terior tibie with punctures in feeble series. Length, 6 (vix.):
rostrum, 13; width, 3: variation in length, 43-6} mm.

Hab.—Tasmania: Launceston (A. Simson), Hobart (H.
H. D. Griffith, in Acacia galls; A. M. Lea, under bark).

May be distinguished from all previously described species
by the alternate interstices of the elytra being triangularly
raised to the base, with the ridges shining: flor/dus has the
alternate interstices raised, but not triangularly, nor are they
shining; aberrans has somewhat similar interstices, but the
ridges are not continued to the base, and the antennz are
very different: vimosvs has all the interstices raised and the
eyes widely separated.

POROPTERUS NODOSUS, Nn. sp.

Moderately densely clothed with greyish-brown and small
but moderately long scales, becoming ochreous-brown 9n un-
der surface, base of head and base of prothorax. Ciliation of
ocular lobes very distinct, even with head in position.

Convex. //ead with the ocular fovea rather large and
deep: eyes finely faceted. Rostrum with moderate!v dense
subseriate punctures. Funicle slightly longer than scape,

225

first joint slightly longer than second. Prothoras slightly trans-
verse, sides rounded, constriction continued across summit,
across middle a series of four moderately large and very dis-
tinct tubercles, a subobsolete one on each side of apex: with
rather numerous large, glossy granules; median line without
granules, but with a feeble ridge anteriorly. Scutellum sub-
triangular, distinct Slytra ovate, about thrice the length
and at widest about once and one-half the width of pro-
thorax; interstices with numerous small and moderately
large glossy granules, and with about five or six small
tubercles on each side; each side at summit of posterior decli-
vity with a large subconical tubercle ; each side of apex with a
moderately distinct one. Abdomen with second-fourth seg-
ments scarcely depressed, and at a glance appearing almost
equal in length, but the second encroaches on the first. Leys
long and rather thin; posterior femora extending to apex of
elytra; third tarsal joint wide. Length, 15; rostrum, 4;
width, 7 mm.

Hab.—Tasmania (type in Mr. A. Simson’s collection).

A very distinct species, belonging to the swecisws group.
Each elytron has the third interstice subtuberculate at base,
and with two moderately distinct tubercles between the base
and the large tubercle, this is obsoletely granulate and out-
wardly directed.

PoROPTERUS RHYTICEPHALUS, N- Sp-

Rather sparsely clothed with small scales, each puncture
containing a distinct scale; tubercles feebly setose.

Strongly convex, subcylindrical. Head and_ rostrum
roughly punctate; eyes finely faceted; ocular fovea rather
large. Antenne black; funicle longer than scape, its second
joint longer than first. Protworar moderately transverse,
sides rounded ; constriction irregularly continuous across sum-
mit; with numerous granules; across middle a series of four
large rounded punctate granules; with a distinct median
carina, which terminates before base and apex. Seute//im
subtriangular. Hlytra oblong-ovate, not much wider than
prothorax, and more than twice as long: with moderately
large, round punctures, and with numerous subtubercular
elevations ; second interstice with two tubercles of moderate
size; one near base round and slightly larger than those on
prothorax, the other just beyond middle, suboblong, and smal-
ler ; each side near summit of posterior declivity with a large,
obtusely conical tubercle ; apex without tubercles. Abdomen
with third and fourth segments depressed below second and
just perceptibly below fifth. Legs moderately long and thin:
posterior femora just passing elytra. Length, 9}; rostrum,
23: width, 4 mm.

226

Hab.—Queensland (Australian Museum).

A very distinct species belonging to the swccisws group.
The (two) specimens under examination are probably partially
abraded, but as the species is very distinct I have not hesi-
tated to describe them. The seventh elytral interstice is
moderately distinctly ridged in middle, so that it causes an
appearance of a slight epipleural fold. Compared with sucei-
sus it differs in being considerably narrower, the elytra with
less numerous tuberosities, the subapical tubercles larger and
rounded and by the conjointly rounded apex.

PoROPTERUS LISTRODERES, Ni. Sp.

Moderately densely clothed with stout brownish scales,
prothorax with a very distinct complete border of paler
scales, and which is continued on sides of elytra to apex, but
decidedly incurved at basal third.

Flattened, subellptic. //ead flat; ocular fovea indis-
tinct: eyes finely faceted. Rostrum rather short and stout,
increasing in width to apex ; muzzle moderately densely punc-
tate. Funicle slightly longer than scape, second joint much
longer than first. Prothorax flat, sides moderately round,
strongly narrowed towards apex, apex feebly bifurcate.
Elytra not much wider than prothorax, and scarcely twice as
long: base strongly bisinuate; with series of large, shallow
punctures, more regular on sides than on disc; the spaces
between the punctures often tuberculiform, and with small,
shining granules, second interstice near apex with a subconi-
cal tubercle, apex itself without tubercles. Abdomen with
the third and fourth segments below level of second, but not
of fifth. Legs moderately long; posterior femora extending
to apex of elytra; third tarsal joint moderately wide. Length.
11; rostrum, 24; width, 5 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Mount Dryander (A. Simson).

The very distinct pale lateral markings of the prothorax
and elytra will readily distinguish this species; it belongs to
the exitiosus group. ‘The tubercles on the posterior declivity
are rather small, and are indistinct when viewed from above,
but they are very distinct from the sides.

POROPTERUS LONGIPES, Nn. sp.

Moderately densely clothed with muddy-brown scales, in-
terspersed (especially on legs) with rather long blackish sete
and with stouter scales, on the elytra these form a feeble
fascicle on each side at summit of posterior declivity.

Strongly convex. Head with punctures concealed by
clothing; ocular fovea moderately large; eyes finely faceted.
Rostrum long, thin, moderately strongly curved; basal por-
tion coarsely, elsewhere finely (very finely in female) punc-

227

tate; with a feeble median ridge continued to near antennz.
Scape inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum, almost the
length of funicle; second joint of the latter almost twice the
length of the first. Prothoraa shghtly transverse, subglobu-
lar; without punctures or tubercles. L/ytra ovate-cordate,
widest at about one-third from base, less than thrice the
length of prothorax, without tubercles: with series of mode-
rately large (large at sides) punctures, which are partially
concealed by clothing. dA6domen with third and fourth seg-
ments not depressed, their combined length equal to that of
second or fifth; without large punctures except for a curved
row on intercoxal process, and which, around the coxe, be-
come compressed into a distinct groove. Leys unusually
long and thin; posterior femora passing elytra: third tarsal
joint wide. Length, 8); rostrum, 2); width, 4 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Cairns (George Masters).

Belongs to the varicosus group, but is, nevertheless, a
distinct species, and is not close to any known to me.

POROPTERUS CAVERNOSUS, Ni. sp.

Densely clothed with stout, suberect brownish scales al-
most uniform in size and colour throughout, except that on
the legs they are feebly variegated; on the elytra they are
most numerous on the alternate interstices, but even there are
less dense than on the prothorax.

Strongly convex. Punctures of Head and rostrum en-
tirely concealed, but evidently very coarse: eyes coarsely
faceted. Rostrum noticeably incurved to middle. Scape

inserted almost in exact middle of rostrum, much shorter than
funicle ; second joint of the latter much longer than first, third
joint almost as long as two following combined, none trans-
verse. Prothorax as long as wide, or slightly longer than
wide, sides rounded; densely and coarsely punctate, punc-
tures entirely concealed. J//yztra elliptic-ovate; decidedly
raised above, scarcely twice the length of and once and one-
half the width of prothorax ; with nine series of large, regu-
lar foveiform punctures ; the interstices narrow, not much wider
than the transverse ridges between puncture and puncture.
Abdomen without distinct punctures, third and fourth seg-
ments combined slightly shorter than second. Legs moae-
rately long; posterior femora extending to apex of elytra,
third tarsal joint moderately wide. Length, 6}: rostrum,
13; width, 3 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Cairns (Macleay Museum).

Belongs to the varicosus group, and with an outline some-
what similar to that of the preceding species; from which,
however, it totally differs in the punctures and legs: of the
described species it 1s perhaps closer to crassicornis than to

228

any other, but is abundantly distinct from it on account of
the absence of large abdominal punctures (one specimen has
been abraded to make sure of this point), and by the differ-
ent punctures of elytra.

POROPTERUS FOVEATUS, ND. Sp.

Densely clothed with ruddy brown scales, interspersed
with numerous long suberect or erect spathulate scales, which
are very numerous on legs, and even appear on the apex of
the scape.

Strongly convex. Punctures of head and rostrum con-
cealed, but evidently coarse. Scape inserted slightly nearer
_base than apex of rostrum, stout, subclavate, considerably
shorter than funicle; the latter with the second joint very
slightly (if at all) longer than first, third strongly, fourth-
sixth moderately strongly, seventh feebly transverse. Pro-
thorax and elytra much as in the preceding species, but the
former with a feeble median ridge and much larger punc-
tures, the latter with a feeble projection at base of third in-
terstice, and with very much larger and less numerous punc-
tures or fovee. Abdomen with a few large punctures on the
two basal and on the apical segments, third and fourth com-
bined considerably shorter than second or fifth. Legs mode-
rately stout; posterior femora terminated before apex of
elytra: third tarsal joint moderately wide. Length, 54;
rostrum, 13; width, 24 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales (J. Faust).

The shape is much the same as in the preceding species,
but the elytral fovee are almost twice as large as they are
even in that species, and are very much larger than in any
other member of the varicosus group. The brevity of the
third joint of the funicle is very unusual. The eyes are very
coarsely faceted.

PoOROPTERUS INUSITATUS, HN. Sp.

Sparsely clothed with smail brown scales ; prothorax with
four fascicles transversely placed in middle, apex feebly bi-
furcate, each puncture with an elongate scale; elytra with
the alternate interstices moderately densely clothed, the third
with a feeble, dark fascia beyond middle, suture posteriorly
with similar scales, but scarcely fasciculate. | Under surface
moderately densely, the legs, head, and rostrum densely squa-
mose.

Strongly convex. Hcad and rostrum roughly punctate ;
eyes moderately coarsely faceted. Rostrum moderately long,
noticeably increasing in widin to apex. Scape inserted three-
sevenths from apex, shorter than funicle; second joint of the
latter considerably longer tnan first, the others slightly longer

229

tuan wide. Lrothorav as long as wide, sides rounded, con-
striction deep, and not quite continuous: with four tubercles
transversely placed in middle, of which the two median only
are moderately distinct ; with rather large round punctures
somewhat irregular in size and very irregularly distributed,
but more numerous at base than elsewhere. Slytra ovate,
moderately long, more than twice the length of prothorax,
widest at basal third; with series of large punctures, becom-
ing fovee on sides and very small on posterior declivity :
without distinct tubercles. Abdomen with a few large punc-
tures (not foveate, however), on the two basal and the api-
cal segments ; third and fourth combined slightly shorter than
second or fifth. Legs moderately long; posterior femora ter-
minatea before apex of elytra; third tarsal joint wide.
Length, 83; rostrum, 24; width, 4 (vix.), mm.

Hab.— kK. Australia (Horace W. Brown).

Belongs to the varicosus group, from all the members of
which it may be distinguished by the exposed and irregular
prothoracic punctures. On a glance the clothing appears as
if partially abraded, but I am convinced that the specimen
described (which was taken at Orange, in New South Wales,
or Rockhampton, in Queensland), is in perfect preservation.

POROPTERUS LISSORHINUS, N. Sp.

Densely clothed with stout sooty and sooty-brown scales,
rather paler on head and under surface than elsewhere ; pro-
thoracic scales stouter and less numerous than those on elytra.
prothorax with six feeble fascicles; four across middle, and
two at apex; elytra with eight moderately distinct fascicles
(on the third and fifth interstices) forming two distinct trans-
verse series; one near base and one at summit of posterior
declivity.

Moderately convex, subelliptic. Head with punctures
entirely concealed by clothing : eyes finely faceted. Rostrum
long, thin, rather strongly convex ; base and sides behind
antenne coarsely punctate ; elsewhere shining and very sparsely
and finely punctate. Scape inserted slightly nearer base than
apex of rostrum, half the length of funicle and club com-
bined ; second joint of funicle slightly longer than first, the
others transverse. Prothorax and elytra much as in Batastrer
culatus, but the former without carina. Abdomen densely
and regularly punctate, punctures indistinct, but each carry-
ing a large scale; third and fourth segments combined slightly
longer than second or fifth. Legs moderately long ; posterior
femora terminated before anes of oe third tarsal jomt
wide. Length, 7; rostrum, 24; width, 3{ mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Mount Kosciusko (J. J. Flet-
cher).

230

In appearance this species strongly resembles Uitubercu-
latus, and it is remarkable that the two should have exactly
similar tubercles at the base of the elytra; the facets of the
eye, however, are very much finer (less than half the size)
than in that species, and forbid its being regarded as a variety.
Many of the prothoracic and abdominal scales appear to be
conical in shape.

POROPTERUS RUBUS, Pasc.

Two specimens, from Cairns, appear to represent a
variety of this species. They differ from typical specimens in
having the clothing longer and denser, the apex of the elytra
very obtusely mucronate, and all the tubercles more obtuse ;
of the sutural tubercles the second is almost obsolete, being
transformed into a feeble ridge.

DECILAUS APICATUS, N. sp.

Densely clothed with large soft scales, varying from a
dingy white to sooty brown, and causing the upper surface te
appear speckled. Under surface with longer dingy-whitish
scales ; pectoral canal densely squamose.

Head indistinctly but evidently coarsely punctate. Ros-
trum stout; coarsely punctate, punctures irregular in front of
antenne, behind them evidently in seven rows, the lateral
row very distinct. Scape stout, almost the length of funicle,
inserted close to apex. Provhorax (by measurement) sligntly
longer than wide, with moderately large, round, shallow punc-
tures, which are entirely concealed. Hlytra oblong-cordate,
scarcely twice the length of protnorax, striate-punctate, both
striz and punctures entirely concealed, punctures moderately
large, but not as wide as interstices, these flat and punctate.
Abdomen with the punctures almost entirely concealed. An-
terior tibiw at apex with a glabrous, outwardly rounded, and
obliquely flattened plate, from which the terminal hook pro-
ceeds. Length, 5; rostrum, 14; width, 25 mm.

Hab.—South Australia: Eyre’s Peninsula (Rev. T. Black-
burn, No. 1492).

The anterior tibie are very peculiar. The margins of
the elytra in the vicimity of the abdomen are perfectly gla-
brous in the (two) specimens under examination, this char-
acter being invisible from above; it does not appear to be due
to abrasion. Each puncture of the rostrum behind the .
antennez contains a large scale, which entirely conceals it, but
as the scales can be traced in seven rows the punctures are
probably also in rows.

DECILAUS SQUAMIPENNIS, Ni. Sp.

Prothorax with three feeble whitish lines, each puncture
containing a scale, the majority of which are dingy brown, and

231

do not rise to the general level; elytra densely clothed with
soft pale brownish scales and with paler scales, giving the
surface a slightly speckled appearance. Under surface and
legs with brownish-grey scales; head (except between eyes},
rostrum, and pectoral canal sparsely squamose.

Head transversely impressed, and with coarse punctures
between eyes, with smaller (but not fine) and almost regu-
lar punctures elsewhere. Rostrum moderately long; not very
coarsely punctate, punctures forming four distinct rows.
Scape inserted two-fifths from apex, much shorter than
funicle. Prothorax transverse, with dense, moderately large,
round, clearly cut punctures, which are larger on flanks and
smaller on apex than elsewhere ; with or without a feeble median
line. Liytra subcordate, outline almost continuous with that
of prothorax; striate-punctate, punctures moderately large,
subquadrate, only partially concealed ; interstices feebly con-
vex, much wider than punctures, themselves rather densely
punctate. Two basal segments of abdomen, with punctures
which are but little smaller tnan those on prothorax. An-
terior femora feebly dentate. Length, 4; rostrum, 11:
width, 2 mm.

Hab.—Australia (J. Faust): Queensland. Gaynaah
(Macleay and Australian Museums).

The dentition of the femora is more of the nature of a
slight lateral extension of the ridge bordering the groove (as
in moluris), rather than distinct teeth. The difference in the
clothing of the prothorax and elytra is very pronounced. Six
specimens have a distinct transverse wnitish spot on each side
of elytra at summit of posterior declivity, on a seventh these
spots are continued (running parallel with suture) almost to
apex, on an eighth they are not traceable.

DECILAUS CUNICULOSUS, Nn. Sp.

Clothed with greyish-white scales, on the prothorax long
and setose, and each arising from a puncture, on the elytra
softer, and rounded and densely clothing the interstices, each
puncture with a thin, indistinct scale. Under surface and
legs with moderately elongate, almost white scales; metaster-
num with very thin setose scales; pectoral canal moderately
squamose; head and rostrum with similar scales to those on
elytra.

Head coarsely and irregularly punctate. Rostrum moae-
rately stout, coarsely punctate, punctures more or less seriate
in arrangement, and leaving a distinct impressed median
space. Scape inserted two-fifths from apex, the length of the
four following joints; of these the first is longer than the
second. /rothorax moderately transverse, with dense, coarse,
round punctures. 4/ytra subcordate, seriate-punctate, punc-

232

tures moderately large, oblong or suboblong, sometimes with
slightly wrinkled walls; interstices not separately convex,
much wider (at base not much wider) than punctures. Ab-
domen irregularly punctate, the punctures of the two basal
segments never very large, and not very dense, a few larger
than the others on second: third and fourth each with a
single row of squamose punctures. Length, 5; rostrum, 13;
width, 24 mm.

Hab.—South Australia (Rev. T. Blackburn, No. 1493).

The prothoracic punctures are fully as large as in forams-
nosus, but those on the elytra are very much smaller than in
that species. The clothing of the under surface shows a
slight approach to that of auwricomus and tibialis. Mr.
Blackburn informed me that the specimens described were
probably taken near Adelaide.

DECILAUS IRRASUS, Ni. sp.

Sparsely and irregularly clothed with brown and whitish
scales, forming in places indistinct spots. Sterna and basal
segments of abdomen with elongate whitish scales; pectoral
canal almost glabrous.

Head densely and coarsely punctate. Rostrum mode-
rately stout, sides feebly incurved to middle; coarsely punc-
tate, punctures subseriate in arrangement between antenne and
base. Scape inserted three-sevenths from apex, the length of
five following joints; of these the first is noticeably longer
than the second. Prothorax moderately transverse, basal
two-thirds almost parallel sided, with rather large, round,
clearly-cut punctures, which become smaller towards apex.
Elytra oblong-cordate, base almost truncate; seriate-punc-
tate, punctures moderately large, deep, oblong, or suboblong ;
interstices not separately convex, narrower than punctures and
rather coarsely punctate. A/domen with the two basal and
the apical segment irregularly but not densely punctate;
some of the punctures rather large. Length, 3; rostrum,
14; width, 12 mm.

Hab.-—Queensland (Australian Museum).

The prothoracic punctures are about the size that they
are in distans, but those on the elytra are considerably
larger.

DECILAUS AURICOMUS, Nn. sp.

Clothed with pale fawn-coloured and whitish scales; pro-
thorax with three feeble lines of rather stout elongate scales ;
elytra not very densely clothed with soft, almost round scales,
a few of which are of an almost pearly whiteness. Middle of
metasternum and two basal segments of abdomen and the
four posterior coxe with long, slightly curved, golden sete or

239

hair: pectoral canal almost glabrous; legs and head densely
clothed, the scales feebly variegated.

Head and rostrum coarsely and irregularly punctate,
punctures on the latter scarcely seriate in arrangement, but
leaving a feeble, longitudinal, impunctate space. Scape in-
serted two-fifths from apex, slightly shorter than funicle.
Prothorax moderately transverse, with dense, moderately
large, round, clearly defined punctures, which are scarcely
smaller at apex and larger on flanks than on disc. H/ytra
subcordate; seriate-punctate, punctures large, oblong, all
connected together; interstices gently convex, the width of
or slightly wider than punctures, with sparse punctures.
Abdomen with dense and irregular punctures, none of which
_is very large, third and fourth segments each with a single
row of squamose punctures. Length, 45; rostrum, 14: width,
24+ mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Sydney (at roots of beach-
growing plants).

The clothing of the under surface is most remarkable,
and, except in the following species, is dissimilar to that of
any other; two specimens are under examination, and are
probably both males. The colour of the derm is of a brown-
ish-red, the elytra and legs rather less dark than elsewhere.
Each prothoracic puncture contains a scale, but along middle
and towards sides these scales are stouter and paler than else-
where, and cause three feeble stripes to appear. The elytral
punctures cause an appearance as of deep, continuous striz,
the walls of which are slightly waved. I know of no other
species having similar punctures, although there is a slight
approach to them in sprssvs.

DECILAUS TIBIALIS, N. sp.

Male. Upper surface moderately densely clothed with
stout, sooty scales, interspersed with small spots of pale
brownish scales. Under surface, legs, head, and rostrum
with pale brownish scales, the legs feebly ringed with sooty
ones; middle of metasternum and two basal segments of ab-
domen, and the four posterior coxe clothed with very long
recurved golden setz or hairs.

Punctures of head and rostrum (except in front of an-
tennz, where they are moderately dense and coarse) con-
cealed, on the latter evidently subseriate in arrangement.
Scape inserted one-third from apex, the length of four fol-
lowing joints, two basal subequal; club elongate-ovate. Pro-
thorax moderately transverse, base feebly but distinctly bi-
sinuate, apex less than half the width of base: with (for the
genus) rather small punctures, less crowded than usual, but

234

entirely concealed (except at sides): an impunctate and
slightly depressed median line. JZ/ytra cordate, shoulders
slightly prominent; seriate-punctate, punctures large and
deep; interstices feebly convex, not at all or very slightly
wider than punctures, themselves with small and _ rather
numerous, but entirely concealed, punctures. Abdomen
with punctures entirely concealed, but evidently dense and
not very large. Terminal hook of posterior t/bice strongly
incurved and outwardly dentate. Length, 7; rostrum, 13;
width, 4 (vix.); variation in length, 63-74 mm.

Female. Differs in being entirely without golden har
on the under surface, the terminal hook of the posterior tibiz
simple, the rostrum squamose only at base, and antennz in-
serted more distant from apex of rostrum.

Hab.—New South Wales: Armidale (D. McDonald and
A. M. Lea); Tamworth (Lea).

A much less convex species than usual, the male with
very remarkable clothing and posterior tibie. I believe the
species belongs to Decilaus, the clothing of the under surface
is almost exactly the same as in auricomus, an undoubted
Decilaus. .Many of the elytral punctures have a slightly tri-
angular appearance, others are more or less rounded or
ovate, each is isolated by a distinct transverse ridge, which is
just below the level of the interstice, but which is more or l!ess
concealed by the clothing.

DECILAUS SPISSUS, Nn. sp.

Very densely clothed with soft, pale, dirty, fawn-coloured
scales, which are larger and more rounded on prothorax and
abdomen than elsewhere. Head and rostrum very densely
clothed ; pectoral canal with a few elongate scales.

Punctures of head and rostrum entirely concealed, but
those on the latter evidently seriate in arrangement. Ros-
trum wider at base than apex, and much wider than be-
tween antennze. Scape stout, inserted nearer base than apex,
the length of two following joints; these subequal in length.
Prothorax rather strongly transverse, sides not suddenly
narrowed towards apex; with dense, large, round, clearly-
cut punctures, which are partially concealed. EHlytra oblong-
cordate, more than twice the length of prothorax. striate-
punctate, punctures rather large, subcontiguous; interstices
convex, much wider than punctures, fourth widest of all.
Two basal segments of abdomen with exactly similar pune-
tures to those on prothorax. Length, 5; rostrum, 14; width,
24 mm.

The clothing is so dense that, except where abraded, the
sculpture can scarcely be seen.

Hab.—South Australia (Macleay Museum).

235

DECILAUS NOCTIVAGUS, n. sp.

Black, antenne and tarsi dull red. Very densety
clothed with muddy brown scales, with stouter, suberect, and
darker scales, rather thickly distributed, and forming feeble
loose fascicles.

Head and rostrum with coarse but concealed punc-
tures, those of the latter evidently in rows. Lostrum stout,
the length of prothorax. Scape stout, inserted two-fifths
from apex of rostrum, the length of five basal joints of
funicle. Prothorar transverse, sides rounded: with dense
but entirely concealed punctures. JL/lytra_ briefly sub-
ovate, not twice the length of prothorax; striate-punctate,
punctures large, but entirely concealed, strie traceable
through clothing. | Abdomen with rather dense and large
but entirely concealed punctures. Length, 2; rostrum, = ;
width, 12 mm.

Hab.—New South Wales: Forest Reefs (A. M. Lea).

With the exception of /ispidus, the smallest of the
genus. I could only take it (at dusk and night time) crawl-
ing over old “cockatoo” fences, but it was rather numerous
on them. The surrounding “‘post-and-rail”’ fences (although
numerous other weevils were to be obtained on them at the
same time) never seemed to attract specimens of this species.

A specimen from Victoria (Rev. T. Blackburn) differs in
having the clothing more uniform in size and each individual
scale traceable and larger. The general colour is a rather
pale fawn, but with darker patches, the abdomen is sparsely
clothed, and the femora are aistinctly ringed. It probably
represents a distinct species, or at least a very distinct variety,
as I cannot find the least variation in the clothing of eighteen
specimens of the typical form.

DECILAUS CORYSSOPUS, n. sp

Black, antennze (club infuscate), and tarsi dull red.
Densely clothed with dark, muddy-grey, thickly interspersea
with sooty, erect scales; an obscure patch of paler scales on
each side of elytra at basal third, and which is sometimes con-
tinued on to shoulder. Scales of under surface, both of body
and legs, of a rather dark brown.

Punctures of head and basal third of rostrum entirely
concealed; apical two-thirds of rostrum shining, and with
round and moderately coarse punctures, not at all seriate in
arrangement. Scape inserted nearer base than apex, the
length of two basal joints of funicle; of these the second is
slightly longer than the first. Prothorar distinctly transverse,
sides strongly rounded: with dense, moderately large, round,
clearly-cut punctures, which, however, are almost concealed
by the clothing. H/ytra subcordate, widest about middle;

236

striate-punctate, punctures moderately large, but almost con-
cealed ; interstices slightly rough, gently convex, much wider
than punctures. Abdomen with dense round punctures. An-
terior femora distinctly, the four posterior rather feebly, den-
tate. Length, 5; rostrum, 14; width, 24; variation in
length, 44-53 mm.
Hab.—Tasmania: Hobart (H. H. D. Griffith and A. M.
Lea).

ne tooth on each of the anterior femora is triangular,
compressed, and distinct, although not large; it is, however,
of the same character as that of molurvs. ;

A specimen (also from Hobart) differs in having the
scales of a pale fawn, interspersed with sooty brown, and a
few whitish ones; the elytra have sooty suberect scales scat-
tered about, and in places forming feeble spots, but: forming
a moderately distinct fascia across middle and a distinct spot
on third interstice at base: the clothing of the under surface
and legs is of a uniform fawn.

DECILAUS OVATUS, N. sp.

Dark brown, antenne (club excepted) and claw joints
paler. Densely clothed with stout adpressed scales of vari-
ous shades of grey, and stouter on prothorax (where three or
five paler lines are sometimes traceable) than on elytra.

Head with dense concealed punctures. Rostrum rather
strongly curved, comparatively (for the genus) thin, sides
lightly incurved to middle; basal half with coarse punctures
subseriate in arrangement, apical half with moderately large
punctures. Scape inserted almost in exact middle of ros-
trum, the length of three basal joints of funicle; of these the
first is sligntly longer than the second. Prothorax rather
strongly transverse; with dense and rather large, round,
clearly-cut punctures, which, however, are almost concealed.
Elytra not twice the length of and outline subcontinuous with
that of prothorax ; punctate-striate, punctures separated by
feeble ridges, and becoming very small posteriorly, but every-
where concealed; interstices convex, punctate, considerably
wider than strie. (nder surface with dense and large, but
almost entirely concealed, punctures. Femora slightly but
acutely dentate. Length, 5; rostrum, 14; width, 22; varia-
tion in length, 3-54 mm.

Hab.—Queensland: Cooktown (J. Faust).

The dentition of the femora associates this species with
moluris and corysopus, from both of which it may be readily
distinguished by the clothing; in general appearance it ap-
proaches /itoralis. The rostrum is unusually thin for Decz-
laus. In one specimen (probably immature) under examina-
tion, the whole of the derm is red, the rostrum and elytral
suture being reddish-brown.

237

INSECTS COLLECTED IN THE NORTH-WESTERN REGION
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA PROPER BY H. BASEDOW; WITH
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF MANTIDZ AND
PHASMID&.—NO. 2.

By J. G. O. Terrrr, F.L:S., F.8.8c., Ere.
[Read October 3, 1905. |

The insects were collected incidentally during the pro-
gress of an expedition fitted out to examine the mineralog1-
cal, geological, and economic conditions of this hitherto little
visited part of the State, and was engaged in that work
from March to November, 1903. The Coleoptera were prin-
cipally identified by the Rev. Thomas Blackburn, and the
Lepidoptera by Mr. O. Lower, the author being responsible
for the remainder. The collector, not having much time or
adequate facilities at disposal, accounts for the comparative
meagreness and not quite satisfactory state of the specimens
in some cases. The latter, however, were often supplemented
by such obtained previously from neighbouring regions. As
it is, the collection, as the first made there, is of some im-
portance in respect of geographical distribution, filling up a
considerable gap, and has been deposited by the collector in
the South Australian Public Museum.

The present list only comprises the Orthoptera, with
supplementary descriptions of new species, in addition
to previously published ones, and accounts for the greater
part of the collection, as shown by the appended synopsis.
The rest of the collection embraces the following
identified species: —Hymenoptera—Chrysis, sp., Camponotus
testacerpes (Smith), Iridomyrmex glaber (Sm.), "Bothroponera
piliventris (Sm.), Myrmecia sanguinea (Sauss), Mutilla rugi-
collis (Sauss), Humenes bicincta (Sauss), Megachyle Black-
burni (Frogg.), Saropoda bambiformis (Sm.). Odonata—
Hemianax papuensis (Burm.), and Lestes, sp. The remain-
der of these contain species not previously represented in the
Museum.

GENERAL SYNOPSIS.

Coleoptera ... .... 57 genera, 87 species, 211 specimens
Lepidoptera Matwrologres So toe s 108 >,
Hymenoptera... 13 io A 20 - 31 %.
Orthoptera seis g ARUN. Gerth aa 4 67 is
Odonata and Neu-

EOPlCIS so ese ois: Gur st 6 a 1] +.
Hemiptera ‘ &e, GieOe ckb * 21 “
Diptera eee a Dyer. a 2 ¥ 2 ~

P45 34-200 a 451] as

238

ORTHOPTERA.
BLATTARIA.
Epilam pra aspera, Tepper.
Eplampra notabilis (Walk.), Tepper.
Periplaneta basedowi, Tepper.
Pseudepilampra punctata, Tepper, Musgrave Ranges.
Oniscosuma castanea, Brunner.

ManTID&.
Orthodera marginata, Saussure.
Orthodera prasina, Saussure. (Also an egg-case.)
Pseudomantis pulchellus, Tepper.

Fischeria quinquelobata, spec. nov.

Male and female. Resembling Archimantis latistylus,
Brunner, in general aspect. Greyish-brown. Head mucn
compressed. Eyes large, prominent. Antenne very slender.
Tips of mandibles black. Pronotum oval, minutely tubercu-
late, margins minutely spinulate, spines alternately black and
pale. Meso- and metanotum glabrous, unarmed. Forelegs
stout, core with the strong, external ridge provided with four
large lobes and one small. one, mucronate, and black under-
neath; internal ridge minutely serrate. Fore femora with
four spines preceding a fifth much longer one externally ; in-
ternal ridge with numerous sub-equal spines. Middle and
hind legs slender, latter long, unarmed. Tegmina much
longer and wider than the wings, greyish ; veins dark brown ;
two black, sub-rotundate spots at and before middle respec-
tively; anal area pale. Wings about half the size of the
former; all veins and veinlets of the costal area dark brown:
(similar to tegmina). Cerci broadly oar-shaped, apex sub-
obtuse.

Length of body, 92-107 mm. ; width, 5-9 mm.

Length of head, 2-3 mm.; width, 9-10 mm.

Length of pronotum (base), 7-8 mm.; width, 4-5 mm.

Length of mesonotum (max.), 32-37 mm. ; width, 4-6 mm.

Length of metanotum, 5-7 mm.; width, 5-7 mm.

Length of abdomen, 45-52 mm.; width, 6-9 mm.

Length of ant. coxe, 16-20 mm.

Length of ant. femora, 20-25 mm.

Length of ant. tibiz, 8-10 mm.

Length of ant. tarsi, 10-13 mm.

Length of med. femora, 20-23 mm.

Length of med. tibiz, 20-24 mm.

Length of med. tarsi, 12-14 mm.

239

Length of post. femora, 25-32 mm.
Length of post. tibiz, 32-38 mm.
Length of post. tarsi, 12-14 mm.
Length of cerci, 9-10 mm.
Length of tegmina, 24-34 mm.
Length of wings, 13-20 mm.
Length of antenne, 16-20 mm.

The male is similar to the female, only smaller. Bestdes
the specimens from the North-West, there are three others in
the Museum collection, viz.: —One, since 1887, from Yactoo,
Far North (M. Crawford); another from Broken Hill, in
1890 (F. J. Burgess) ; and a third from Central Australia (R.
Helms) ; and are comprised in the above measurements and
description.

PHASMIDAs.

Lonchodes caurus, spec. nov.

Male. Brownish-grey, glabrous, with more or less dis-
tinct black, or blackish, median line or markings dorsally from
transverse carina at back of head to fifth abdominal segment.
Head a little longer than pronotum, tumid behind antenne,
with a raised flat spot in place of the obsolete central ocellus,
and two short aivergent ridges lateral thereof. Eyes elliptical,
small, scarcely prominent. Antenne grey, triquetrous (ter-
minal portion wanting). Pronotum rotundately arched above,
median line slightly, lateral carina more deeply impressed,
transverse carina a little anterior to middle, hind margin nar-
rowly black. Mesonotum slightly wider than head, sides
parallel throughout, median line raised, dorsum along the
middle with numerous blackish, irregularly scattered dots:
lateral carina rather broad, extending for three-fourths of
length, brown, externally to same a blackish line extending
to hind margin, and forming the crest of a low, broad ridge.
Metanotum of same width, or only slightly wider, as the pre-
ceding, and of similar structure, but darker brown, and the
aggregated dots forming a broad dark median stripe. Abdo-
men with segments, 1 to 3 subequal and of same width as
thorax, 4 to 6 somewhat narrower, and much longer, tapering,
next three still more slender, short (two subequal, the third
scarcely more than half the length of the preceaing), last joint
with supra-anal lamina very short, latter with closely adpressed
edges, forming a ridge, subacute, and longer than preceding
segment. Subgenital lamina boat-shaped, last joint finely
rugose, apex ovate, whitish. Cerci very short, concealed. Legs
comparatively short and weak, unarmed, scabrous, grey.

240

Length of body, 70 mm.; width do., 1°5-3 mm.
Length of head, 4°5 mm.
Length of pronotum, 3°5 mm.
Length of mesonotum, 17 mm.
Length of metanotum, 1] mm.
Length of abdomen, 35 mm.
Length of ant. femora, 17 mm.
Length of ant. tibie, 16 mm.
Length of med. femora, 14 mm.
Length of med. tibie, 16 mm.
Length of post. femora, 20 mm.
Length of post. tibie, 16 mm.
Length of tarsi, 3°5 mm.

This species appears to approximate in general form to
Lonchodes Confucius, Westwood, in general form, but differs
from it in being much smaller and differently coloured, while
also disagreeing in most of the minute characters. The
specimen is fairly perfect, excepting the antenne, of which -
only some 12 or 13 of the basal joints are preserved.

Cyphocrania cornuta, spec. nov.

Female. Body hoary grey to whitish, or brownish, where
discoloured. Head with two thick, acuminate, rugose horns,
almost vertical, and subparallel, and with several rows of
tubercles. Tegmina small, with brown veins and veinlets.
Wings perfect, but too small for flight ; costal area with base
pale, and adjoining a large black spot, remainder with ill-
defined pale and dark bars and blotches; membranous portion
deep black, with about five narrow, more or less irregular and
disrupted transverse pale bars and some small isolated spots
near the external margin. Pronotum tuberculate, furrowed,
and ridged. Anterior femora stout, acutely triquetrous, the
superior ridge with four subequal, broad, forward-directed
serrations, terminating in acute spinelets. |. Mesonotum finely
tuberculate in front and behind, with some scattered spine-
lets (two larger than the rest), on the disc. Median femora
with eight spinelets along inferior internal ridge, and one
near the middle of the external; internal ridge of median
tibie with three triangular spines, and one on the external
near the joint, besides the terminal spurs. Hind femora
with larger spines along the central line beneath, five small
spines along the inner lower ridge, and four minute ones on
the external. Abdomen stout, cylindrical to fifth
segment, but gradually contracted beyond. Posterior
margin of fourth segment with four short ridges, the
outer ones convergent, and the margin between them
extended into a folate quadrilateral appendage

241

with rugose edges, and double mid-rib, 4 mm. long.
Subgenital lamina much exceeding the next two segments in
length (24 mm.), apex broad, subemarginate. | Cerci very
short, scarcely exceeding anal segment. Under side of abdo-
men with a double row of tubercles to sixth segment, 6 to &
on each segment.

Length of body, 172 mm.

Length of head, 10 mm.; width, 7 mm.

Length of pronotum, 8 mm.; width, 6°5 mm.

Length of mesonotum, 38 mm.; width, 6°5 mm.

Lengtu of metanotum, 15 mm.; width, 8 mm.

Length of abdomen, 103 mm.; width, 9 mm.

Length of tegmina, 22 mm.; width, 6 mm.

Length of wings, 47 mm.:; width, 47 mm.

Length of ant. femora, 34 mm.

Length of ant. tibiz, 33 mm.

Length of ant. tarsi, 11 mm.

Length of med. femora, 27 mm.

Length of med. tibie, 30 mm.

Length of med. tarsi, 8 mm.

Length of post. femora, 46 mm.

Length of post. tibie, 42 mm.

Length of post. tarsi, 10 mm.

Length of antenne, 35 mm.

The described female is the only specimen in the S.A.
Museum collection which possesses both the conspicuous
cephalic and the dorsal abdominal appendages denoted, nor
have I come across figures or uescriptions indicating these in
the form mentioned—besides other distinctions. There are,
however, one or two other Central Australian species repre-
sented, which exhibit similar form and wing structure of the
females. There is also in tne collection a male with promi-
nent cephalic horns, which may belong to the same species as
the described female, although the horns differ in form, being
very divergent and compressed laterally. There are also seve-
ral other males with small tubercular spines on the head, but
these appear to belong to the hornless females referred to
above. The colour pattern of their ample wings is quite dif-
ferent from that of the described form, but the detailed
descriptions, etc., have to be postponed for the present.

Acrophylla nubilosa, spec. nov.

Male. Pale brown; body very slender. Head glabrous;
fiat, with indistinct, whitish dots and lines above. Occiput
with two median depressions, and curved impressed
furrows on each side. Ocelli obsolete. Antenne
densely hirsute. Pronotum much shorter and narrower thaa

242

the head, with some longitudinal furrows, terminated by a
transverse carina near hind margin. Mesonotum cylindrical,
gradually tapering to near base of elytra, then rapidly ex-
panding to more than double between median legs, thickly
beset with many small interspersed and some large spines.
Metanotum stout, glabrous, with three pairs of short, oblique,
white streaks underneath. Legs very long and slender, all
ridges with small, distant spinelets, except those of the anterior
tibiz and of the tarsi. Tegmina short and narrow, costa ana
a short, oblique, discal streak whitish, remainder brown.
Wings long and rather narrow; costa with some small dark
spots from near middle to apex; veins and veinlets from pale
to dark brown, some of the former interruptedly black to-
wards margin; veinlets bordered with blackish-brown ; outer
margin broadly suffused with dull blackish, likewise the costal
part of the membranous disc, with irregular blotches, the
dark markings separated by translucent areas. Abdomen
very slender throughout; sexual organs, including respective
joint and lamina, also anal joints, very short and tumid.
Cerci broad, ovate, subacute, nearly as long as the preceding
three joints together.

Total length of body, exclusive of cerci, 86 mm.

Length of head, 5 mm.; width, 3 mm. (behind eyes).

Length of pronotum, 3 mm. ; width, 2°3 mm.

Length of mesonotum, 15 mm.; width, 1°5-4 mm.

Length of metanotum, 13 mm.; width, 4 mm.

Length of abdomen, 50 mm.; width, 1°5-2°5 mm.

Length of ant. pedes, 61 mm.

Length of med. pedes, 44 mm.

Length of post. pedes, 62 mm.

Length of tegmina, 10 mm.; width, 4 mm.

Length of wings, 52 mm.; width, 22 mm.

Length of cerci, 8 mm.

The species is comparable with Acrophylla_tesselata,
G.R.G., from N. Australia (Westwood, Cat. Phasm. B.M.,
Plate xxxv., fig. 1), but is larger, and differs in the paucity
of the spinulation of the legs, colouration of the wings, ete.
Taere are a pair of similar insects in the collection from Cen-
tral Australia, but appear to differ in proportions.

Acrophylla paula, spec. nov.

_ Male. Brown; in general aspect resembling the preced-
ing, except size and wing form, in which it approximates 4.
tesselata, Westwood. Head flat, occiput, with anterior median
depression (obsolete ocellus) much larger and deeper than in
preceding, and other markings different. Antenne long,
slender, 16 (?) jointed, minutely hairy. Pronotum with

243

transverse furrow in the middle. Mesonotum and metanotum
similar to preceding ; also abdomen, Tegmina reddish- brown,
costa not whitish, but a whitish, oblique streak indicated ; apex
rounded. Wings rather short, obtusely rounded ; costal area
reddish-brown, with indistinct dark markings along the costa]
margin: membranous area almost colourless; veins alter-
nately pale and dark; veinlets narrowly bordered with black-
ish, but no other spots or blotches present. Legs long and
slender, with minute, distant spinelets along the ridges of
femora and tibie. .

Length of body without cerci, 73 mm.

Length of head, 4 mm.; wiath, 2°5 mm.

Length of antenne, 22 mm.

Length of pronotum, 3 mm.; width, 2 mm.

Length of mesonotum, 10 mm.; width, 1°5 mm.

Length of metanotum, 5 mm.; width, 2°3 mm.

Length of abdomen, 51 mm.; width, 1°3 mm.

Length of tegmina, 8 mm.:; width, 3 mm.

Length of wing, 38 mm.; width, 16 mm.

Length of cerci, 5 mm.

Although agreeing in size and colour patterns of the
wings with Westwood’s fig. 1 of Plate xxxv. (Cat. Phasm.,
B.M.), the specimen differs much in the minuteness and
paucity of the spinelets of the femora and tibiz of the legs,
etc. The ocilli appear also to be practically replaced by mere
shallow depressions. There are no other specimens in the
S.A. Museum collection resembling either of the above. There
is in the collection a female from Lake Aroona (N.W. from
Port Augusta), and also a nymph of one, which appear to
belong to the described male in general aspect, contour, and
colour of wings, etc. Both were collected in December, 1900,
by Mr. A. Loveday, and are differing in being larger.

Necroscia bella, spec. nov.

Male. Greenish to reddish-brown; very slender. Head
above rounded, minutely and distantly tuberculate, occiput
anteriorly with a deep oval impression, median line indis-
tinct ; sides flat. Antennz not much longer than the anterior
femora, finely and densely hairy. Pronotum narrower and
much shorter than the head, with a slight longitudinal and
a promiscuous transverse carina in the middle. Mesonotum
scabrous, nearly twice as long as the two preceding together,
and attenuated towards the middle from both ends. Meta-
notum stout and the widest part of the body. Abdomen
slender, gradually attenuated towards and inclusive of seventh
joint, remainder moderately tumid. Subgenital lamina half
the length of joint, apex emarginate. Cerci short, ovate,

244

hairy; porrected. Legs simple, very slender, moderately
long ; femora, tibie, and first joint of tarsi minutely and very
densely spinulate along all three ridges. Tegmina very small,
apex rotundately sinuate, elevated knob dark brown, remainder
pale brown. Wings narrow, apex almost subacute: veins and
veinlets of costal area from brown at the base to greenisn
along costa, and whitish near margin: of the remainder from
bright to faintly rosy; interspaces pale green near costa, re-
mainder very faintly rosy, transparent.

Length of body, 52 mm.; width, from 1-2°3 mm

Length of head, 3°3 mm.

Length of antenne, 19 mm.

Length of pronotum, 2 mm.

Length of mesonotum, 9 mm.

Length of metanotum, 3°7 mm.

Length of abdomen, 34 mm.

Length of cerci, 3 mm.

Length of tegmina, 2 mm.; width, 1°5 mm.

Length of wing, 28 mm.; width, 12 mm.

Lengtu of ant. femora, 16 mm.

Length of ant. tibie, 15 mm.

Length of med. femora, 10 mm.

Length of med. tibize, 10 mm.

Length of post. femora, 14 mm.

Length of post. tibie, 15 mm.

Length of tarsi, 3-4 mm.

This species appears to be nearest in affinity to V. annu-
lipes, Curtis, but is considerably smaller and more slender, the
proportions of antennze and wings, besides less conspicuous
characters, appear also to be sufficiently different to entitle it
to specific rank. It is the first of the genus which has reached
me from any part of the State of South Australia.

Bacillus peristhenellus, spec. nov.

Two males. Body pale ochreous to dull blackish-brown,
filiform, thorax carinated. Head pale dull ochreous, with
two interrupted black vittee behind the eyes, an ovate, longi-
tudinal impression anteriorly, on either side of which a fine
distinct ridge, hind margin crenate. Eyes yellowish-grey.
Antenne as long or longer as anterior femora, first joint long,
flat, next two very short and thick, remainder shorter than
first, subequal, filiform. Pronotum rough, dull, same colour
as head, wider behind, anterior margin subcrenate, forming
a distinct ridge, median carina very fine, marginal ridges
distinct, intra-marginal carina rather broad. Mesonotum
with subparallel sides, raised median and submarginal ridges,
dark brown. Metanotum similar, ridges much more distinct,

245

both meso- and metanotum very minutely papillose between
the raised lines, and of tne same width. Abdomen very
slender, apparently flat underneath, brown in the dried
specimens, tapering towards apex. Legs triquetrous, with
one or two carina on each face, unarmed. Supra-anal lamina
very short, triangular. Cerci not exceeding apex.

Length of body, 35 mm.; width, 1-1°3 mm.
Lengtn of head, 1°6 mm.
Length of pronotum, 1°4 mm.
Length of mesonotum, 9°5 mm.
Length of metanotum, 6°5 mm.
Length of abdomen, 16 mm.
Length of ant. femora, 11 mm.
Length of ant. tibiz, 11 mm.
Length of med. femora, 8 mm.
Length of med. tibie, 8 mm.
Length of post. femora, 10 mm.
Length of post. tibie, 7°5 mm.

There are two specimens in the collection, one a mature
one apparently, the other immature and much smaller. A\l-
though much smaller, they appear to be best comparable with
B. Peristhenes, Westwood, in general type of form, and to
this the trivial name given refers. There are also two
other immature specimens, too defective for classification.

246

ADDITIONS TO THE CAMBRIAN FAUNA OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By R. ETHERIDGE, JUNR., Hon. Fellow, Curator of the
Australian iieaeeaue Sydney.

[Read April 4, 1905.]
PLATE, 2eey

Our Cambrian Fauna is, comparatively speaking, of so
limited a nature at present that additions are always most
welcome. Mr. W. Howchin recently forwarded to me a
small collection of fossils from a new horizon, discovered by
himself. Mr. Howchin describes the deposit as a “shelly
band in an oolitic limestone of much inferior thickness to that
carrying the great reef of Archzocyathine, situated in the
Flinders Range, not far from Wirrialpa.”

The limestone is, generally speaking, flesh-coloured, and
the fossils break out on fracture in fairly good condition. The
oolite grains appear under two conditions: either on a frac-
tured surface, as small spherical or oval bodies up to one
millimetre in diameter; or, on weathered faces, in natural
section, when their structure, under an ordinary pocket lens,
is very misleading. In this condition they present the appear-
ance of minute corallites of a fasciculate Rugose coral, with
definite septa, and are closely packed on some pieces of lime-
stone, or sparsely distributed on others. On placing a thin
slice of this pseudo-coral, prepared for the microscope, under
a high-power objective, the supposed corallites at once resolve
themselves into oolitic grains of a peculiar structure. These
grains are wholly composed of concentric layers, or zones, of
carbonate of lime, with or without a central nucleus of clear
calcite, accompanied by a radial structure, and it is the latter
that simulates the appearance of a septate coral. In fact,
these grains when seen in natural or weathered transverse sec-
tion resemble very minute Archzocyathine, especially when
the pellicle is thin, or of small diameter, and enclosing a clear
nucleus. This radial structure is not uncommon in oolitic
grains, but its remarkable resemblance to a minute coral has
not before come under my notice. Between crossed Nicols the
black cross is clearly seen in places, indicating crystalline and
not organic structure. No organic nucleus was observed in
any case.

IT have succeeded in determining one _ Trilobite, five
Brachiopods, and one Pteropod, but these, with the excep-
tion of the Pteropod, bear no specific relation to the more
Eom ons fauna, described by the late Professor CR. Tate, *

* Tate—Tr.R.S.S.A., 1892, xv., part 2, r. 183. a

247

from Parara and Curramulka, Yorke Peninsula. The chief
point of interest lies in the addition of the genus Obolella
to the fauna,

The following are descriptions of the fossils : —

TRILOBITA.
Genus OLENELLUS, Hall, 1862.

(Fifteenth Annual Report New York State Cabinet Nat.
Hist., 1862, p. 114.)

Olenellus, sp.
(Plate xxv., fig. 1.)

Obs.—Two species of this characteristic Cambrian Trilo-
bite are known already from Australian rocks: —O. Brownu,
mihi,* and O. Forresti, mihi,t with a possible third, 0. (7)
Pritchardi, Tate.[ The present specimen is very imperfect,
but sufficient remains to indicate Olenellus rather than Ptycho-
paria. It is certainly distinct from Tate’s species, and pro-
bably also from O. Brownz.

The cephalon, less the free cheeks, is semi-circular-saggi-
tate. The glabella oblong, rounded in front, gently convex,
slightly arched in the middle line (most so anteriorly), and
with parallel lateral margins ; the axial grooves are strong and
undulated, to correspond with the glabella furrows; the first
pair are mere indentations of the axial grooves and hardly per-
ceptible, the three latter are all complete; the frontal lobe is
large and subquadrate, the palpebral lobes obpyriform, the
eye lobes large, flat, crescentic, and extend as far forwards as
the palpebral, beyond the first pair of glabella furrows, and
posteriorly to the fourth complete furrow. The free cheeks,
neck lobe, and posterior portion of the glabella are not pre-
served.

There is not sufficient of this cephalon to enable com-
parisons to be made; suffice it so say that it certainly is not
O. (?) Pritchardi, Tate, provided the illustration of the latter
is correct, and not a mere conventional figure. The form of
the palpebral lobes, and complete condition of the glabella
furrows, so far as they are preserved, also forbid a reference to
O. Brown. It is nearest to O. Forresti, mihi, from the Cam-
brian rocks of Kimberley, North-west Australia, possessing
a similarly elongate glabella, yet. not so long as in O. For-
rest?, similarly long and curved eye lobes, and similar pyri-

* Etheridge—Contrib. Pal. S.A., No. 9, S.A. Parl. Papers,
No. 11897. pes pl i, fig 1. |

+ Foord—Geol. Mag., 1890, vii., p. 99, pl. iv. figs 2, 2a-b.
+ Tate—Tr.R.S.S.A., 1892, xv., part 2, p. 187, pl. ii., fig. 11

248

form palpebral lobes, but our specimen is not sufficiently per-
fect to complete the comparison.

On the same piece of limestone is a small portion of ano-
ther glabella, and on another hand specimen part of a fron-
tal border of a cephalon. This lends encouragement to the
belief that additional, and it is to be hoped more complete,
examples will be forthcoming in the near future.

BRACHIOPODA.
Genus OsBoLELLA, Billings, 1861.
(Geol. Vermont, 1861, 11., p. 946.)
Obolella wirrialpensis, sp. nov.
(Plate xxv., figs. 2 and 3.)

Sp. Char.—Valve (? pedical) ovate to subquadrate,
gently convex, rising dorsally into a small umbo; rounded
ventrally and without emargination ; lateral angles rounded.
Internal muscular scars hardly at all curved, diverging from
one another, extending far forward, and tapering to a tine
point. Surface characters very marked and distinctive, con-
sisting of a series of clean-cut, flat, concentric steps, the
“tread” of each step practically at right angles to its ‘‘riser’’ ;
no concentric or radial strie of any kind.

Obs.—Obolella wirrialpensis may be regarded as the char-
acteristic fossil of the band of limestone lately discovered by
Mr. Howchin, and adds another welcome genus to our Cam-
brian list of fossils. It is a more quadrate form than most of
the American Obolelle, with the exception of O. cingulata,
Billings ;* in fact, the outline is more that of Obolus than
Obolella. On the other hand, the internal structure, so far
as it is preserved, is that of the latter, and the outline is more
that of the British than the American species. It is further
remarkable for its size, being equal to the largest of the
latter, and far surpassing the former. Three selected speci-
mens measure as follows :—

Dorsal to ventral. Transverse.
a. eval iente eat 8 mm.
: ine J ain . 10 mm.
C. eanliaes dos, Livin 12> mim:

The step-like nature of the concentric lamine is very char-
acteristic, and cannot fail to arrest attention, even in frag-
ments.

* Billings—Pal. Foss. Canada, 1871, i., p. 8, figs. 8-10.

249

Obolella, xp.
(Plate xxv., figs. 4-6.)

Obs.—It is often a difficult task, in dealing with these
old organisms, particularly when imperfect, to determine how
far difference in outline is to be allowea to have weight in
varietal significance. Associated witn Obolella wirrial pensis
are a few examples differing from the latter by their ovate
flask-shaped outline, accuminating towards the umbo, and
swelling out towards the front; the sculpture appears to be
similar to that of O. wirrialpensis.

In form this rarer shell is clearly allied to the little
O. gemma, Billings,* of the North American Middle Cam-
brian, but is very much larger than the latter.

I anticipate it will ultimately prove to be specifically dis-
tinct from O. wirrialpensis, but as the amount of material is
limited I content myself by suggesting that it be called 0.
wirrialpensis, var. calceoloides.

Genus OrtTHIS, Dolman, 1828.
(Kongl. Vet. Acad. Handlingar, 1827 (1828), p. 96.)

Orthis (?) tatei, sp. nov.
(Plate xxv., figs. 7 and 8.)

Sp. Char.—Pedicle valve, dorsal margin comparatively
straight ; ventral and lateral margins rounded, the former
non-emarginate ; umbo small, depressed: surface in the me-
dian line moderately convex, the wings rather flattened ; sculp-
ture consisting of numerous, thick, sometimes bifurcating, ra-
dating coste, which die out, or are only faintly perceptible
on the wings or towards the lateral margins of the valves, the
surface on these portions being also crossed by very fine con-
centric lines; by the prominence of two or three costz on each
side of the middle, a flattened space, taking the place of a
sulcus, is marked off.

Ob6s.—In the absence of internal features, | am by no
means confident in the generic reference of this fossil, but in
all probability it is an Orthis. The specimens present a very
analogous appearance to one of the late Mr. Thomas Davia-
son’s figures of O. lenticularis, Wahl.,t from the Dolgelly
Group of the Upper Lingula Flags of Wales.

The shell is named in honour of the late Professor R.
Tate, who practically laid the foundation for paleontological
study in South Australia.

* Walcott—Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey. No. 30, 1886, p. 116,
t. 10, figs. 2 and 2a.

+ Davidson—Mon. Brit. Foss. Brach., part vii., No. 3. 1869,
pl. xxxiil., figs. 27-28a.

250

Orthis (ve/ Orthisina), sp.
(Plate xxv., fig. 9.)

Obs.—I regard this as distinct from O. tatex. The valve
is a single specimen, apparently the pedicle, and 1s sub-
quadrilateral, convex, the greatest convexity at about mid-
way in the length of the valve, the sinus gradually deepening
and widening towards the front, and bounded laterally by
ill-defined folds, one on either sive, the surface sloping away
on either side rapidly to the lateral margins, and at a very
much less angle within the sulcus; there are indications of
coste on the divaricating folds and in the sulcus.

The hinge features are hidden in matrix, nor is the umbo
distinctly visible; it may, therefore, be either an Orthis or
an Orthisina.

It is quite distinct from either Orthis (/) peculiarts,
Tate,* or Urthisina compacta, Tate,}+ but in general appear-
ance it resembles Orthis (7) spiriferoides, yaerEe { a Caradoc-
Bala species.

In the Archzocyathinze white limestone at Witision

Orthis (ve/ Orthisina), sp.
(Plate xxv. fig. 10.)

Obs.—In the same white marble occurs another Brachio-
pod, which may belong to either of the above genera, the
same disabilities rendering it impossible to arrive at a satis-
factory conclusion, as in the preceding instance.

This valve, again a single example, I take to be the
brachial. It is rotundato-quadrate, the cardinal margin as
long as the width of the valve, the surface convex, except on
the dorso-lateral alations, where it appears to be flattened.
There is a central, acute, or pinched-up fold, produced for-
ward, and expanding as it advances. There are indications
of the existence of strong, distant, sub-radiating coste.

Whether or no this is the brachial valve of the species
represented by the preceding form, it is, at present, impos-
sible to say; the two occur in the same bed, however. There
is a strange resemblance in the pinched-up fold to the same
portion on the brachial valve of a Caradoc species, Orthis ves-
pertilio, Sby.§

In the geet ha white limestone at uier ee

: Pate—Tr.R.S.S.A., 1892, xv. eer 2, Dp. 185, age bE fig. 5.

+ Tate—loc, cit;, p. 185, t..aix, eee! 6, ba

t Davidson—Mon. Brit. Sil. Bracke. part vil..” No? 4. 1ac
p. 275, t. xxxvil., fig. 3a.

Re Davidson=—Mon., Brit. Sil. Grach., No. 3, t. \ xxx., 7 Ges:
aa.

’

251

PTEROPODA.
Genus Hyo.itHEs, Eichwald, 1840.
(Sil. Schich. Syst. in Ehstland, 1840, p. 97.)
Hyolithes communis, Billings.

Obs.—This genus is represented by single small tubes up
to twenty-five millimetres in length, but without other dis-
tinctive characters. I have not seen any trace of an operculum.
The facies of the specimens is that of /7. communis, Billings,
already recorded from the Parara limestone at Curramulka
by the late Professor R. Tate.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXV.

OLENELLUS, sp.
ig. 1.—Incomplete cephalon, showing the glabella, palpe-
bral and eye lobes, etc.— x 2. :

OBOLELLA WIRRIALPENSIS, Eth. fil.
Fig. 2.—Kxternal view of a nearly complete pedicle (?) valve
— x3.
Fig. 3.—Imperfect internal cast, exhibiting traces of muscu-
laniscars— 5¢3: ;
O. WIRRIALPENSIS, var. CALCEOLOIDES, Eth. fil.
Fig. 4.—External view of a flask-shaped pedicle (?) valve-—
x 3.
Fig. 5.—Side view of another specimen— x 3.
Fig. 6.—Umbonal view of the same— x 3.
OrtuHis (?) TaTEI, Hth. fil.
Fig. 7.—Pedical valve with thick, radiating costze on the
median portion of the valve— x 2.
Fig. 8.—A similar specimen— y 2.
OrruHis (vel ORTHISINA), sp.

Fig. 9.—Subquadrilateral pedicle (?) valve, with a mode.
rately deep sinus, bounded by ill-defined folds— x 3.

OrtuHis (vel ORTHISINA), sp.
Fig. 10.—Rotundo-quadrate brachial (?) valve, with a pinch-
ed-up fold— x 3.

NOTES ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DECAPOD CRUSTACEA.
PART Ill.

By W. H. Baker.
[Read October 3, 1905. |
Puates XXXII. to XXXVI.

The following notes deal with some species of Anomura.
The first three are true hermit crabs of the family Paguride,
which are closely allied to each other, belonging to that divi-
sion of the family whose chief characteristics are the posses-
sion of a pair of modified appendages on the first, and ano-
ther on the second, abdominal somite in the male, and a pair
on the first in the female. The female also is provided with
a brood pouch, which arises from the fourth somite on the
left side, and covers the unpaired biramous appendages which
serve for the attachment of the eggs. These three species are
referred to the genus Paguristes. Of the four remaining
species, three belong to the Porcellanide. Petrocheles aus-
traliensis, Miers, is a fine species, showing well the transition
to the Galatheide, and as far as | know has never been figured.
Of Polyonyx transversus, Haswell, the same may be said; so
it is here figured, and the description extended. Lastly, a
Galathea, belonging to the group which contains G. austra-
liensis, Stimpson; G'. aculeata, Haswell; and G. magnifica,
Haswell, *s described—though provisionally—as G. setosa, for
the first time.

Family Pacuripa#, Dana.

Section I., Pagurine, Ortmann.
Genus Paguristes, Dana.

For latest description of genus see Alcock Cat. Ind.
Decap. Crust., part 2, p. 30, 1900.

Paguristes frontalis, M.-Edw. Pl. xxxii., figs. 1-7.

Pagurus frontalis, M.-Edw., An. des Sci. Nat., 2e série,
t. vi., p. 283, pl. xiii., fig. 3. Hist. Nat. Crust., t. i, p. 234.

Paguristes frontalis, Alcock Cat. Ind. Decap. Crust.,
part 2, p. 155, 1905.

Eupagurus frontalis, Cat. Aust. Crust., Haswell, p. 154.

The carapace anterior to the cervical groove is only
slightly convex from side to side, anteriorly depressed, rather
oblong viewed from above, the sides behind the curve of an-
terior angles being nearly straight ; its surface is smooth and
polished except for some small scattered punctations, but to-
wards the sides it becomes somewhat rough or rugose The

253

triangular rostriform tooth is acute, quickly accuminating to
its apex, depressed and projecting between the bases of
the scales of the ocular peduncles. The margin of the front
is raised, and the antennal projections, which do not reach as
far as the rostrum, are each tipped with a small tooth. A de-
pression behind the rostral tooth sends off an obhque branch
towards each side marking off the hepatic regions, and also a
median longitudinal groove, which, however, is short. In the
region of this groove the carapace is slightly rugose trans-
versely. The hepatic regions are prominent and rounded.
The antero-lateral portions of the carapace scarcely project
forward as far as the tubercles of the first joints of the an-
tennez ; their descending margins carry two or three spinules.
The cervical groove is deeply marked, and the carapace behind
it Is membranaceous, and is marked with some faint, irregu-
lar, longitudinal lines; there is a narrow median region ex-
panding anteriorly, and running to a depression behind. The
branchial regions are moderately tumid. The carapace 1s
sparingly hairy at the sides.

The narrow tergum of the first abdominal segment is tri-
angular, firm, and bears a few sete. The remainder of the
abdomen is soft, except in some specimens a little leathery
underneath ; it is glabrous, except the margin of the oviterous
sac in the female. The sixth segment is strongly calcified dor-
sally, and is divided into two main unequal portions by a
deep, transverse, irregular furrow, the anterior portion thus
divided is irregularly pitted, the posterior has a median, shal-
low furrow, which broadens out behind.

The ocular peduncles are long, as long as the greatest
breadth of the anterior portion of the carapace, moderately
robust, not expanding distally, and with a tendency to become
slightly unequal in length. The basal scales are rather small,
spiniform, close together, and anteriorly depressed. ‘ihe eyes
are rather small.

The basal joint of the antennular peduncle is flattened
and hollowed above, its external margin is compressed, and
each edge bears distally a minute spine (stylocerite). There
is a small distal spine below also. The second and third
joints and the thick portion of the upper flagellum are sub-
equal in length; the lower flagellum is about half the length
of the upper, and is naked, as is also the short distal por-
tion of the upper flagellum.

The first joint of the antennal peduncle has a prominent
tubercle below, which bears the aperture of the green gland.
The second joint is produced distally on the outer side, ending
in three converging spines, with a group of sete immediately
below, the inner distal angle is less produced, and ends in a

254

downward curved spinule. The upper surface of the joint is
hollowed. The third joint is produced below to a strong
spine, which projects one-third the length of the fifth joint;
the fourth joint is short and bears a small distal spinule
above. The fifth joint is cylindrical, slightly curved, and ex-
pands slightly towards the distal end, reaching to about half
the length of the ocular peduncle. The acicle is short and
stout, reaching about as far as the spine on the third joint:
it bears, besides the acute apex, two short, strong spines exter-
nally, and one near the base above; it also carries several
fasciculi of coarse setz. The flagellum is short, not much
more than twice the length of the peduncle, and is non-
ciliate.

The mandibles have the edge of the cutting plate entire ;
a narrow and not deep cleft separates it from the molar pro-
cess ; into this the terminal joint of the palp dips. The molar
process is narrow. The palp is three-jointed, the second joint
markedly compressea, its plane being transverse to the edge
of the cutting plate; the third joint, which is about as long
as the two preceding ones together, is compressed and much
expanded, its plane being parallel to the same edge.

In the first maxille the external branch has the second
joint articulated below the apex of the preceding, presenting
a bifid arrangement; the distal portion is strongly reflexed.
This branch bears a strong setum on the inner side near the
base.

In the second maxille the third joint is compressed,
tapering irregularly, the apex being without sete.

In the first maxillipeds the third joint is twisted and
turned aside so as to be partially hidden behind the exopod.
The exopod is flagellate.

The exopods of the two succeeding maxillipeds are very
robust, compressed, and flagellate. The third maxillipeds
have their coxal joints contiguous, the iscuium bears a row of
corneous teeth on the inner side, and the merus a few spinules
on the same side.

The chelipeds are large and very unequal, the left one is
the larger ; in it the merus is trigonous, reaching a little be-
yond the eyes; it bears a few small, low tubercles, which be-
come more numerous and larger towards the aistal end; some
are migutely punctate at their summits. Tne upper surface
of the carpus is strongly tuverculate, the tubercles becoming
almost spiniform on the inner margin. The hand is large
and swollen, whitish (in contrast to the rest of the append-
ages, which are red), ana finely granulate, the granules be-
coming larger towards the inner side. The fingers open trans-
versely, and are excavate, especially the immobile one, the

255

contiguous surfaces having some punctations, from which a
few hairs spring. The mobile finger is corneous at the tip.
There is a broad, rather obscure, ridge on the outer side of
the immobile finger reaching some distance on the hand; at
the inner end of this ridge is a small area of well-defined, red-
dish granules. The hand, including the fingers, is more than
twice as long as the carpus. On the outer side the fingers
show no hiatus, but a prominence on the immobile one fits
into a corresponding slight hollow in the mobile one. The
right cheliped has the carpus and hand bearing larger tu-
bercles and granules, and a few fasciculi of hairs on the inner
margin.

The second and third pairs of legs are long, almost glah-
rous and robust, exceeding the chelipeds in length. The third
is more robust than the second. In these the meris and pro-
podi are very slightly serrate above and below, the carpi have
a distal spine above, and two or three on the outer side, on
the distal margin. The dactyli, which are longer than the
penultimate joints, are moderately curved ana compressed,
that of the third pair is more flattened on the outer side, and
bears a well-marked, spinulate ridge above; the inner side is
rounded and has scattered spinules, the lower margin is acute
and serrate, especially towards the end. The spinules usually
arise from dark red spots. The dactyli terminate in small
black claws.

The fourth pair are much shortened, the joints are setose
on their anterior and posterior margins, non-chelate, the pro-
podi becoming narrower distally. The dactyli are short, and
bear some stout teeth. The fifth pair are shorter, smaller,
and minutely chelate, the pad of scale-like sete covers the
whole breadth of the distal end of the propodus.

The first and second abdominal segments bear sexual ap-
pendages in the male, the rami of the first being coalesced to
form a semi-cylinder, the inner ramus is provided with a tuft
of brown stiff sete, which originate about the middle of the
inner side, and extend beyond its end, intermingling with
those of the opposite imb, the outer ramus is thickened, com-
pressed, rounded at the end, which is slightly recurved out-
wards, bearing a row of minute teeth. ‘Lhe second pair of
abdominal appendages are long, slender, and uniramous, and
are terminally slightly spatulate and setose. The three suc-
ceeding segments are each provided with a weak uniramous
appendage on the left side.

The uropods, as usual, are very unequal, the external
ramus of the pair of the left side is much larger than the
inner, falcate, and expanded with the usual pavement of
scale-like setz.

256

The telson bears a few sete in groups, and is divided
dorsally into four lobes, with a small lozenge-shaped area in
the middle ; the two terminal lobes are unequal, with a median
cleft between them. The two anterior lobes have each an
ear-shaped pit.

The female has a large brood pouch.

This littoral species is one of the largest and commonest
hermit crabs of our coast, and varies much in size.

Specimens in the Adelaide Museum.

Length of a medium-sized specimen, 6 cm.

Length of carapace, 26 mm.

Breadth of the anterior portion of the carapace, 10 mm.

Length of large cheliped, 4 cm.

Length of ocular peduncle, 10 mm.

Length of second ambulatory leg, 47 mm.

Paguristes brevirostris, n. sp. Pl. xxxiii., figs. 1, la.

The animal is somewhat hairy, especially on the cheli-
peds, the hairs there, however, not thick enough to hide the
armature.

The anterior portion of the carapace is rather flat above,
sparingly pitted, rough or rugose towards the front and sides,
with a depression behind the front, marked on eacn side by a
short, slightly oblique ruga, then another small, depressed
area lies beween this and the hepatic region. The rostral
tooth is very short, obtuse, and scarcely projecting farther
than the prominences external to it; these are rounded, and
each is tipped with a very small denticle. ‘The hepatic re-
gions are rounded and slightly tuberculate; they are sepa-
rated from the other regions by a faintly marked, very ir-
regular, longitudinal groove, which joins the cervical groove
behind. The frontal margin is thickened. The portion of
the carapace behind the cervical groove is thin, and shows
some small disconnected areas of calcification. The branchial
regions are moderately tumid and sparingly setose ; there is 4
tuft of setz on each side of the cardiac region.

The ocular peduncles are moderately robust, not as long
as the breadth of the anterior portion of the carapace, and
somewhat constricted towards the middle. The basal scales
are rather small, and bear five or six small red denticles on
each. They are well separated from each other.

The antennular peduncles reach nearly to the level of the
eyes.

The outer side of the first peduncular joint of the an-
tennz bears one or two denticles. The second joint is hol-
lowed above, its outer distal angle is produced, bearing four
or five spinules, and there are one or two denticles at the
inner angle. The acicle is moderately robust, quickly tapering

257

to a terminal spine, with three or four others on its external
border, and two on its inner boraer near the base: it reaches
more than half the length of the fifth joint. The third joint
is produced below to a prominent spine, and a small spinule
terminates the fourth joint above. The fifth joint is short,
reaching about two-thirds the length of the ocular peduncle.
The flagellum is short, much shorter than the carapace, the
internodes of the joints bearing rather long sete.

The chelipeds are moderately robust, nearly equal. The
merus reacnes a little beyond the level of the eyes, 1ts lower
external border is spinulate, and it is slightly rugose on the
external surface ; it bears some spinules on the distal margin,
and one or two also above a little removed from the distal
end. The carpus is short, its anterior surface is covered with
white, more or less spiniform tubercles, which become larger
on the inner margin. The palm is not ‘much longer than the
carpus, and is covered anteriorly with similar spiniform
tubercles, which extend on to the fingers: on a side view the
joint is strongly wedge-shaped, bein, swollen proximally and
tapering quickly to the end of the immobile finger. ‘The
fingers are slightly longer than the palm, transverse, cormeous
at the tips, and denticulate on their opposable margins, with
a small hiatus.

The second and third pairs of legs are nearly equal in
length—the carpi and propodi of the more posterior pair
being slightly longer—and exceed the chelipeds by about the
length of the dactyli. The more anterior pair is more spinu-
late, spinules being situated on the posterior edges of the
meri, and on the anterior edges of the carpi and propodi.
The carpi and propodi also show squamose markings, from
which hairs arise; these, again, are more evident on the more
anterior pair: the dactyli of both pairs are longer than the
propodi; they are scarcely compressed, slightly sulcate, and
end in dark, corneous claws, and are distally more or less
spinulate.

In the male the pairs of appendages to the first and second
abdominal segments are well developed, as also are the uni-
ramous appendages on the left side of the third, fourth, and
fifth segments ; these bear very long sete.

In the female the brood pouch is a widely open sac,
springing from the fourth segment. This covers the biramous
unpaired appendages of the second, third, and fourth seg-
ments, and carries the ova.

The ultimate segment is four-lobed, with minute teeth
and some hairs on the margin of the terminal lobes.

Length of body, 28 mm.

Length of carapace, 11 mm.

258

Breadth of carapace, anterior portion, 5 mm.
Length of cheliped, 17 mm.
Length of third leg, 19 mm.
Dredged by Dr. Vereo, 8.A. coast, 20-30 fms.
Types in Adelaide Museum.

Paguristes sulcatus, n. sp. Pl. xxxiv., figs. 1, la.

The animal is very hairy, especially on the chelipeds ; the
hairs are plumose or pinnate.

The carapace anterior to the cervical groove is medianly
smooth, except for a few scattered pits; towards the sides,
however, it becomes rough and irregularly furrowed. There
is a rather deep depression behind the rostral tooth, and the
portion of the carapace immediately behind this dips into it
rather abruptly. In this region there are a few slight, ir-
regular furrows, which appear as branching from a median,
shallow groove, which extends from the frontal depression for
a short distance behind. The lateral portions of the frontal
depression are marked on each side by a short, oblique ruga
(more pronounced than in the preceding species), and the
hepatic regions, which are full and sparingly pitted, are marked
off from the rest of the carapace by irregular longitudinal
grooves, which join the cervical groove behind. The rostral
tooth is triangular, acute, shghtly depressed, reaching nearly
as far as the ophthalmic scales. The front between the two
antennal projections is strongly thickened ; these do not pro-
ject as far as the rostral tooth, and each is tipped with a small
denticle.

The abdomen is of the usual soft nature, the dorsal sur-
face of its sixth segment is strongly calcified, and divided by
a transverse groove into two unequal parts; the anterior por-
tion is marked with three irregular pits, the posterior by a
median sulcus, which is not so deep as the transverse one,
and a few small pits.

The ocular peduncles are long and slender, scarcely ex-
panding distally from about the middle: they are a little
shorter than the widest part of the carapace anterior to the
cervical groove. The ophthalmic scales are small, well sepa-
rated, and each is tipped with three spinules, one of which is
small.

The antennular peduncle reaches nearly as far as the eyes.
The upper flagellum slightly exceeds the ultimate peduncular
joint in length.

The first joint of the antennal peduncle bears
externally two spinules. (The upper surface of tne
second joint is slightly excavated ; it is much produced exter-

259

nally, bearing four or five spines, the two apical ones being
rather divergent ; there is also a prominent spine on the inner
angle, with a small spinule just below it. The acicle is robust,
regularly tapering to end in two spines, with one just below
them on the outer or upper side, and.one on the inner side,
near the base; the acicle reaches rather more than half the
length of the fifth joint. The third joint is produced below
to a strong spine, which reaches nearly as far as the fourth
joint. The fourth joint has a small spinule above at the distal]
end. The fifth joint reaches about as far as the middle of the
ultimate joint of the antennular peduncle. The flagellum is
shorter than the carapace, and hairy.

The chelipeds are equal, and weak. The merus reaches
to about the level of the acicle of the antenne ; it bears a few
spines on the upper margin, near the distal end, and a few
on the other two margins; the external surface is slightly
rugose. The anterior surfaces of the carpus and palm are
densely hairy—the hairs hiding the spines—flattened and
covered witu spiniform tubercles, mostly curved forwards, and
many with acute, dark tips; these are larger on the inner
margins. The palm is shorter than the carpus; it is not
swollen behind, as in the preceding species. The fingers are
longer than the palm, spinulose, corneous at their tips, and ex-
ternally marked at their opposable edges with small, rather
regular teeth. There is no hiatus.

The second and third pairs of legs are nearly similar, the
third pair being slightly longer ; they exceed the chelipeds in
length by about half the length of the dactyl in the second
pair. The meri are slightly rugose externally. The carpi
are externally sulcate, as also are the propodi, and with them
bear on their anterior margins spines similar to those on the
chelipeds, which, however, are smaller and less numerous on
the third pair. The propodi also are slightly squamose. The
dactyli are about as long as the propodi: they are faintly sul-
cate and spinulate on their anterior and posterior edges,
are slightly curved, and end in dark claws.

The fourth pair is short, non-chelate, the carpus and
propodus nearly equal in length, the propodus distally nar-
rowing. ‘The dactylus is short, robust, and spinulate.

The first two pairs of abdominal appendages in the male
are well developed ; the single pair of the first segment in the
female is weak. The other appendages are of the usual char-
acter.

The telson is four-lobed, the two anterior lobes larger
than the posterior; the posterior lobes are unequal, rounded

behind, and spinulate and setose on the margins.
12

260

Length of body, 37 mm.

Length of carapace, 16 mm.

Breadth of carapace anterior to the cervical groove,
7 mm.

Length of cheliped, 20 mm.

Length of third leg, 26 mm.

Length of ocular peduncle, 6 mm.

A littoral species. Port Willunga, S.A. coast.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

This species differs from ’’. swhpilosws, Henderson, in tie
following particulars: —'The ocular peduncles are longer and
slenderer. The ophthalmic scales are smaller and trispinose.
The rostral tooth is more acute, and there is a strong depres-
sion behind it on the carapace, and a short, median, longi-
tudinal groove. The antennal flagellum is well ciliated. In
the chelipeds the hand is not swollen behind. In the second
and third pairs of legs the dactyli are not longer than the
propodi, and the anterior borders of the last three joints are
very spinose. Finally, the telson is quadrilobate.

Family PoRcELLANID.
Genus Porcellana, Lamarck.

Porcellana rostrata, n. sp. Pl. xxxv., figs. 1, la, 16.

Tne carapace is subpentagonal, shghtly longer than
broad, shightly convex benind the protogastric ridges. The
surface is uneven, being marked by numerous minute trans-
verse striz ; some of the striz are more distinct, bearing groups
of soft plumose sete, especially in the female; two proto-
gastric ridges are particularly thus indicated. The regions
are well marked ; the cervical groove distinct. |The postero-
lateral regions are rounded and rugose, the ruge extending
around the sides of the carapace to the pterygostomial region,
but not uniting dorsally, as a nearly smooth space intervenes.
The epibranchial regions are slightly tumid. A narrow, de-
pressed area borders the antero-lateral regions. The front
viewed from above shows two prominent lobes, divided by a
median sulcation, which extends gradually, becoming shal-
lower backward between the protogastric ridges; from a front
view the margins of these lobes show as two arches, the outer
limb of each being much shorter than the inner, the two inner
limbs uniting to form an almost vertically depressed, acute,
median lobe or rostrum; the outer lobes, which form part of
the inner margin of the orbits, are also depressed ; the edge of
the front itself bears a series of small denticles, which extend
to the antero-lateral margins. The antero-lateral margin is
longer than tne postero-lateral; it is cristate, and shows an
acute prominence at the external angle of the orbit, a distinct

261

antennal spine, and two others further back ; the crest is 1n-
terrupted by a notch at the anterior end of the cervical
groove, and on a slight lobe behind the notch are sometimes
found two other small spines. The posterior border is raised
and insinuate.

The pleon is smooth, polished, and glabrous, except on
the margins.

The linea anomurica reacnes from beneath the antennal
peduncle to the edge of the lateral wall of the carapace, just
above the coxa of the third pair of legs, a short, oblique ridge
immediately behind the marginal notch before mentioned
reaches from the antero-lateral crest across to this suture.

The eyes are small, and scarcely projecting.

The first joint of the antennular peduncle has two oblique
ridges, which converge and unite inwardly.

The basal joint of the peduncle of the antenna
is somewhat triangular; it forms the external mar-
vin.» of othe orbit; its upper portion reaches
the margin of the carapace, its lower border bears
three or four teeth towards the inner end, the innermost one
of which is below the eye, is spiniform, and directed for-
wards, and is visible from above; the other three teeth are
small, and point inward. The third joint is a little longer
than the second, expanding towards the distal end, where
there is an anterior projection ; the fourth joint is small, and
also has a slight projection. The flagellum is long.

In the external maxillipeds the ischium is moderately
broad, sub-triangular, produced a little, and broadly rounded
at the inner distal angle, its outer distal angle having a
strong, obtuse tooth, which usually les in a shallow groove of
the exopod. The outer surface is slightly excavate, and the
external margin thickened and defined by two ridges. The
merus has the inner lobe marked with six or seven denticles.
The carpus also has an internal lobe, with a strong tooth be-
low, and a longitudinal lateral ridge, and its upper distal end
terminates in an acute tooth. The joints are fringed with
the long hairs, as is usual. The exopod is shghtly curved,
and tapers to an obtuse point. It reaches to more than half
the length of the merus; its outer face is slightly excavate.

The chelipeds are usually equal in the female; they are
rough, lke the carapace. ‘lhe merus is short, and bears a
large anterior lobe, whch is acute, with very small denticles
on its edge; there is a small spine on the distal margin under-
neath. The carpus, which is about as long as the palm, is
slightly excavate longitudinally on the inner surface: the
upper surface has two longitudinal sulcations, with a promi-
nent ridge between them marked by cblique striz: the outer

262

margin bears a series of small forward directed teeth; the
inner margin is divided into two acute lobes and a distal pro-
minence, the two lobes bear marginal minute denticles ; there
are also a few spinules near the distal end above; the lower
surface is nearly smooth. The palm is much compressed, it
widens considerably from the proximal end; there is a broad
ridge on the upper surface which extends to the base of the
mobile finger ; the inner margin is rather acute, with a small
tooth near the distal end, besides a terminal one; the outer
margin, which is nearly straight for most of its length, bears
a series of spinules which extend to the end of the immobile
finger ; there are also a few spinules along with a dense mass
of hair on the upper surface towards the outer margin; the
under surface is nearly smooth. The fingers are very much
compressed and rather unsymmetrical, meeting their whole
length with some obscure longitudinal sulcations ; the mobile
one has a sharp ridge above, which near its distal end shows
some small denticles, its apex is constricted to a hook, its inner
surface is excavate. The immobile finger is excavate ; its apl-
cal tooth is unsymmetrically placed. In the adult male the
chelipeds are very unequal, one is often greater developed, the
hairs are absent, and the asperities much reduced, the fingers
do not meet except at their apices, and there is a tooth on
each near the proximal end of their opposable edges. This
cheliped takes a strong red colour.

The carapace of the male is much less hairy.

The three pairs of ambulatory legs are stout, rather
rough, witn groups of soft hairs, the propodi have a series of
spines behind, the dactyli are strong, more than half as long
as the propodi; they end in one strong claw, at the base of
which there is a little tubercle, tipped with a small spine, and
inwardly from this there are four spines.

The last pair of legs are very slender and chelate; they
reach about half the length of the carapace.

Dredged by Dr. Verco. Investigator Straits, 20-30 fms.

Length of carapace, 6 mm.

Breadth of carapace, 5 mm.

Length of cheliped, female, 10 mm.

Length of cheliped, enlarged, male, 16 mm.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

Sub-genus Polyonyx, Stimpson.
Polyonyx transversus, Haswell. Pl. xxxvi., figs. 2, 2a,
Porcellana transversa, Haswell, Cat. Aust. Crust, p. 150.
_The carapace is nearly smooth, much broader than long,

showing from above a transversely ovate shape, very convex
in the antero-posterior direction, much less so in the trans-

263

verse, rather more depressed behind than in front. The re-
gions are faintly defined ; the postero-lateral strongly rugose.
The protogastric lobes are slightly prominent. The front,
when viewed from above, appears slightly arcuate, rather
more than one-third the wiath of the carapace, marked by a
distinct ridge or crest, the median lobe of which projects, and
there are two lateral lobes very obscure. Slight insinuations
mark the orbits above. Viewed from before, the front ap-
pears nearly straight, the median portion slightly depressed.
The antero-lateral regions are two-lobed, the lobes separated
by a wide notch of the cervical groove; they are faintly cris-
tate, and the anterior one is depressed.

The basal antennular joint is ovate and slightly ridged
above.

The eyes are small, scarcely projecting beyond the mar-
gin of the carapace.

The basal joint of the antenna is large, sub-triangular in
shape; its lower margin very arcuate and prominent; a ridge
runs nearly parallel to the inner margin, and there is a small
tooth projecting inwards at its interior angle beneath the
eye; its upper portion reaches the edge of the carapace, and
both its inner and outer sides are strongly incurved. The
third joint of the peduncle is narrower and longer than the
second, the fourth is very short: these three joints are not
crested or lobed.

The appendages are more or less iridescent.

The external maxillipeds are smooth. The internal mar-
gin of the ischium is almost semi-circular. ‘he merus is sub-
equal in length to the propodus, and there is on the inner
side near the proximal end a prominent lobe. The carpus is
a little shorter than the propodus: it is sub-triangular in
shape from a side view. ‘The joints are fringea with very-long
hairs. The exopod does not reach to the middle of the merus.

The chelipeds are shghtly unequal—in this specimen the
right is larger—they are long and well developed, and very
hairy. In the right one the merus is short, its upper surface
irregularly rugose; there is a small incision on the upper dis-
tal end. The carpus is nearly smooth, rounded behind, some-
what spindle-shaped viewea from above, nearly as long as the
carapace ; the inner and upper margin, which is a thin, very
prominent ridge, bordering a deep longitudinal concavity, 1s
entire and convex, and is clothed with very long plumose
hairs, which extend to parts of the upper surface: the lower
inner margin is scarcely prominent: there 1s a small incision
at the distal end above. ‘he palm is a little shorter than the
carpus, it is compressed, rounded on its upper margin, which
is marked by a longitudinal line, and bears a tew spinules

264

towards the mobile finger. The lower margin is an acute
ridge, bearing a row of small teeth, which reach to the end
of the immobile finger. The oblique outer surface is covered
with a dense mass of plumose or ciliate hairs, which end
abruptly at the ridge, the under surface being quite glabrous.
The mobile finger bears a longitudinal row of: well-developed
teeth on the outer side, on a ridge which sharply marks the
hairy portion from the glabrous. The fingers are crossed at
their apices, and each has an internal large tooth.

The three pairs of ambulatory legs are short, robust, and
mostly smooth, very hairy. The propodi have a series of
spines behind. The dactyli are short, curved, and end in two
claws ; behind these there are two or three strong spines. The
last pair is very slender and chelate.

The pterygostomial regions are somewhat excavate, and
are crossed by a rather sigmoid ridge.

The pleon of the female is very long and partially over-
laps the external maxillipeds: it is smooth or slightly pune-
tate. The first joint 1s narrow at first, but soon becomes as
wide as the second, these become successively broader till the
fifth inclusive, the sixth is slightly concave at the sides, and
bears a pair of well-developed, biramous uropods. The last
segment 1s composed of seven plates, one median and triangu-
lar, the others lateral, the most proximal of which is very
small compared with the others, the two distal plates form the
termination.

Length of carapace, 8 mm.

Width of carapace, 11 mm.

Length of cheliped, 19 mm.

Length of trst ambulatory leg, 10 mm.

Dredged by Dr. Verco, 17 fms., off Newland Head, S.A.

One specimen, a female, in Adelaide Museum.

Genus Petrolisthes, Stimpson.
Sub-genus Petrocheles, Miers.
Petrocheles australiensis, Miers. PI. xxxvi, figs. 1, la.
Petrocheles australiensis, Cat. Crust., N.Z., p. 61.
Petrocheles australiensis, Cat. Aust. Crust., p. 174.

The body is nearly flat, covered with scale-like promi-
nences, which are small on the upper surface of the carapace,
but larger on the appendages. From the scales arise short,
harsn hairs, which, again, are more developed on the limbs.

The carapace 1s obcordate, slightly convex in the trans-
verse direction, less so in the antero-posterior. The cervical
groove is well marked and wide. The protogastric regiva
bears anteriorly just behind the orbits two low spines, followed
by some scale-like tubercles, more pronounced than those 9f

2695

the rest of the carapace. Anterior to these spines the front 1s
depressed, triangular, acute at the apex, each side having
three strong spines, including the supra-ocular, which is large.
The interocular space is more than one-fourth the width of
the carapace.

The lateral margins of the carapace are strongly cristate
anteriorly, furnished with eignt spines, mcluding the post-
ocular: these have often a few spinules between them; these
spines occupy about three-fifths the length of the lateral bor-
der, the postero-lateral remaining portion of which is rounded
and marked with some oblique ruge. The posterior border 1s
strongly insinuate.

The pterygostomial region has a very strong oblique
ridge, reaching well behind.

The pleon is broad, the segments marked with trans-
verse, slightly elevated areas, coarsely hairy. The sixth seg-
ment is longer than the preceding ones and narrower, the
lateral margins being deeply excavated to receive the ped-
uncles of the uropods. The telson 1s composed of five plates,
viz., one large, median, and triangular, two elongate and
lateral, and two terminal ovate, with peduncle-like constric-
tions, and fringed with long, plumose sete.

The eyes are moderately large, on short peduncles.

The basal joint of the antennule is strongly spined dis-
tally, as in Galathea.

Three joints of the antennal peduncle are distinct, the
first of these is very short, and anteriorly bears a prominence
tipped with two or three spines, the second, which is also
short, is prominent in front, with one spine and a few spin-
ules, the third, though scarcely shorter, is cylindrica!; the
flagellum is about as long as the chelipeds.

In the external maxillipeds the ischium is moderately
broad, produced at the internal distal angle, and the margin
broadly rounded and minutely crenulated, also a little pro-
duced at the external distal angle. The merus has the in-
ternal lobe only very slightly projecting, above it is a spine,
and at the distal end a smaller one. The carpus has two
longitudinal ridges on its upper surface, and is a little lobed
internally and deeply hollowed below, to receive the process of
the following joint. The propodus is much lobed internally,
the lobe being hatchet-shaped. The joints bear the usual
long, plumose sete. The exopod is rather slender, reaching
about half the length of the merus; it bears a few coarse
granules on its outer border.

The chehpeds are long, well developed, very spinose to
tuberculate. The merus joint reaches slightly beyond the
level of the eyes, and is somewhat compressed, with two small

266

spines on the distal margin above, and with two or three on
the inner surface longitudinally placed, with a large spine at
the inner distal angle. The carpus is two-thirds the length of
the carapace; it is rounded on the outer side with a row of
seven or eight moderately-sized spines; the upper surface,
which is nearly flat, bears a median row of a similar number
of spines. ihe upper anterior border has six large, forward-
directed spines, and besides these the anterior surface, es-
pecially towards the distal end, bears some more or less spini-
form, scattered tubercles. The lower anterior border is almost
entire, except for the ends of scale-like ridges, which are well
marked on the under surface. The propodus is much com-
pressed, the upper or inner margin of the palm is a little
shorter than the carpus; it is covered by oblique rugz, which
extend for some distance on the under side. The upper or
outer surface has a longituainal granulate to spinulate ridge
nearer the inner border than the outer, and between this and
the outer margin is a flat area, covered by dense but very
short hairs, with some spinules intermingled. The outer
margin is slightly raised, granuiate to spinulate, and a little
sinuate in outline to the end of the immobile finger. The
mobile finger is as long as the inner margin of the palm, it
bears a row of spines on the inner margin, these project for-
wards and a little inwards. There is another row of spines
on the outer side, near the cutting edge; the immobile finger
has a similar row in the corresponding position. The cutting
edges of both fingers are furnished with strong teeth, which
become smaller and more numerous distally ; an hiatus occu-
pies about two-thirds the length of the fingers, and the tip of
the mobile finger is long and hooked, and overlaps its fellow,
which is almost straight. The under surface of the propodus
is covered with scale-like tubercles and is almost glabrous ; it
has an indistinct, broad, longitudinal ridge, which corresponds
in position to the one on the upper surface.

The three pairs of legs which follow are strong, the first
reaches a little further than the end of the carpus of the
cheliped. They are very setose, and are covered with the
scale-like markings. The meri are compressed with a few
strong spines on their anterior margins, and one strong
spine near the distal end of the posterior border, and another
just above it. The propodi, which are scarcely compressed,
have three or four small spines behind, especially one at the
distal end. The dactyli are short and stout, with one ter-
minal slightly curved claw and four spines inward from this.

The last pair much reduced in size is minutely chelate,
and bears terminally many stiff hairs.

Length of carapace in the median line from tip of ros-
trum to the insinuation of the posterior border, 23 mm.

267

Breadth, 25 mm.

Length of cheliped, 56 mm.

It is impossible to look at this species without recognising
its strong likeness to the family Ga/atheida.

Dredged by Dr. Verco, St. Vincent Gulf; also a speci-
men from Port MacDonnell, collected by Dr. ‘Lorr.

Family GALATHEIDA.
Genus Galathea, Fabricius.
Galathea setosa, w. sp Pl. xxxv., figs. 2, 2a, 2b.

This species is found with G. austra/iensis, Stimpson, and
though closely allied to it is, however, I believe, distinct.

The transverse striz of the carapace, which are much less
numerous than in that species, are, especially on the gastric
and hepatic regions, broken up into arcuate lobes or squame,
from which spring very long, coarse, minutely serrate sete,
along with some shorter ones: these extend on to the ros-
trum, where they arise from small, round tubercles, and are
longer than the rostral teeth. The rostral teeth are somewhat
ovato-lanceolate in shape, especially the terminal one. ‘lhe
armature of the surface of the carapace is insignificant ; there
are two very smail, obtuse teeth on the gastric region, placed
on the most anterior arch, which are wider apart than the
two spines of G'. australiensis; two similar teeth are placed
further back and wider apart than these, while there is one
on each hepatic region. The first two teeth only are constant.
The lateral spines of the carapace are seven, including the
post-ocular, which is small.

The three anterior segments of the pleon, except the
first, have deep, transverse sulcations, the posterior margins of
which, and also faint transverse ridges close to the anterior
margins, are fringed with similar forward-directed setz, as
those on the carapace. The fifth segment has a strong trans-
verse ridge about the middle, the hairs of which and also
thoge of its anterior faint ridge are directed backwards.

The eyes are rather large; they have a fringe of strong
setz at their bases.

The spines at the ends of the antennular joints are long,
being visible beyond the eyes.

The flagella of the antenne are longer than the chelipeds
and are furnished with sete at the internodes. (Those of &.
australiensis are nearly naked.)

The chelipeds, as compared with (. australiensis, are
shorter and stouter ; they are squamose and clothed with long,
coarse hairs, the spines also are longer and not so projecting

268

outwards. The fingers are nearly as long as the palm, elon-
gate, and becoming more narrowed or acute at the ends; they
are excavate, and have no hiatus in either sex, and are mi-
nutely serrate on their outer opposable edges. The immobile
finger terminates in two strong, hooked teeth, with one more
or less rudimentary on each side. The mobile finger has one
hooked tooth, with a rudiment on each side.

The following three pairs of legs are very spiny and very
setose. The dactyli are strong, with horny, curved claws and
marginal spines.

In both species the telson of the male has on each side
above the middle a group of strong, corneous bristles; these
on stronger magnification appear to be hollow, and have their
tips split, and in spirit specimens have a shiny appearance
and golden colour. G. australiensis varies in colour, speci-
mens from shallow water are greenish or bluish, those from
20-30 fms. are deep red. The present species has a remark-
able colouration. The carapace is white in the middle, and
towards each side is a band of colour, in which violet, orange,
and brown are seen. The sternal surface is orange. The
chelipeds are white, with red spots, the fingers are deep red.
The legs are banded with violet, orange, and white. The an-
tennal flagella are red.

Although the differences between these two species are
small, they appear constant; a moderate series of specimens
having been observed with no sign of intermediacy. In prac-
tice they are not difficult to separate.

Through the kindness of the Director of the Australian
Museum, I have been able to compare this species with G.
aculeata, Haswell, and note the following differences :—G.
aculeata is much less setose and spinose on all parts, its ros-
trum is nearly smooth, and its terminal spine is much slen-
derer and lanceolate. The joints of the chelipeds are much
less robust, the carpi being longer. ‘The fingers are notably
longer than the palm.

From G. magnifica, Haswell, it differs in the coarse amd
harsh hairs of the carapace. In the strie of the gastric region
being broken up into arcuate lobes. In the setose, rostrum,
eye peduncles, and limbs. The colour markings are also
different.

Length of carapace, 5 mm.

Length of cheliped, 10 mm.

' Dredged by Dr. Verco, Investigator Straits, S.A., 20-30
ms.

Types in Adelaide Museum.

Fig.

Se Oe ee ele

269

DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES.

Prave XX XIT.
Paguristes frontalis, M.-Edw.
Antennal peduncle, side view, enlarged.
Mandible, enlarged.
First maxilla, enlarged.
Second maxilla, enlarged.
First maxilliped, enlarged.
Large cheliped, enlarged.
Aprendage of first abdominal somite of male en-
larged.

Puate XX XIII.

Paguristes brevirostris n. sp., enlarged.

Ry x3 anterior regions, enlarged.

PuatE XXXIV:

Paguristes sulcatus, n. sp., enlarged.

3 “n anterior regions, enlarged.

Prate XXXV.
Porcellana rostrata, n. sp., enlarged.
anterior regions, enlarged.
x a third maxilliped, enlarged.
Galathea setosa, n. sp., enlarged.
third maxilliped, enlarged.
es pl cheliped, enlarged.

PuateE XXXVI.
Petrocheles australiensis, Miers, enlarged
x third maxilliped, enlarged.
" Polyonyzx transversus, Haswell, enlarged.
anterior regions, enlarged.

b] bry

be) 99

2) PP)

270

FURTHER NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, WITH:
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES.

By the Rev. T. Buacksurn, B.A
{Read October 3, 1905.|
XXXV.
LAMELLICORNES LAPAROSTICTI.
TROGIDES (continued).
LIPAROCHRUS.

The species of this genus, as distinguished from Anfzo-
chrus, are of very uniform facies, and much general resem-
blance, inter se, but differing by very satisfactory structural
characters. ‘They are easily divided into well-marked groups,
distinguished by the number of striz on the elytra and the
external armature of the front tibiz. The species of only one
group—that with numerous, closely placed elytral striz—are,
so far as | know, much subject to variety, and it 1s just pos-
sible that in that group the forms which I regard as varieties.
of one species may represent a considerable number of very
closely allied species. Several species, which I refer to Dr.
Sharp’s genus antiochrus, have been attributed to Liparo-
chrus, and concerning that reference I propose offering some
notes below, under the heading “Antrochrus.” Sixteen names
have been proposed as names for species referred to Liparo-
chrus, and one Liparochrus has been erroneously named as 2
member of the genus CVelodes. Of the above-mentioned
seventeen names, however, all except (at most) eight, I believe:
to be synonyms, or not to represent true Liparochri, and of
the eight one name is of doubtful validity. It will be wall
to enumerate this synonymy before I pass on to furnish a
tabular statement of the distinctive characters of the named
Liparochri of Australia, and to describe two new species:
which are before me.

L. crenatulus, Fairm., pimelioides, Lansb., and globul-
formis, Macl., I believe to be synonyms of mu/tistriatus, Har.,
for reasons set forth below, under the name mu/tistriatus.

L. | calodes) bimaculatus, Macl., is said by Harold to be
L. fossulatus, Westw. This is probably correct. I have seen
the type specimen, and it is certainly a Liparochrus. My
note, when I examined it, is, “Liparochrus, probably (from
memory) fossulatus, but there is not. a specimen of the latter
at hand for comparison.”

L. raucus, Fairm., is evidently, I think, judged by the-
description, a synonym of the earlier name, s//phoides, Har.

271

L. ciliboides, [lar., is described in terms that do not dis-
tinguish it from seulptilis, Westw., and is probably identical
with it.

L. aberrans, Fairm., oblongus, Har., and _ politulus,
Macl., must be referred to Antiochrus.

L. asperulus, Fairm. The author’s description of this
species does not indicate characters that would enable me to
place it in the following tabulation. I conjecture that it nas
probably tridentate front tibiz, and if so it certainly must
stand among the four species that I have placed last in the
tabulation. Fairemaire himself states that it is near one of
them (L. geminatus, Westw.). The statement that the inter-
stices of its elytra are rugulose seems to distinguish it from
all the four species I have referred to above, and its colour
being stated as “black” further indicates its distinctness
from all of them except geminatus. I have not seen any
Liparochrus which fits Fairemaire’s description. Nevertheless,
it is to be noted that the differences cited between this species
and geminatus (in which the elytral interstices of the elytra
have a decided tendency towards rugulosity) are so much of
degree that there is room for doubt whether the description
may not have been founded on a small, strongly sculptured
example of the older species, a doubt that could be set at rest
only by examination of the type or of specimens agreeing with
Fairemaire’s description, and emanating from Fairemaire’s
locality (Peak Downs, Qu.). If its front tibie have only
two external teeth the word “nitidissimus” in its description
distinguishes L. asperulus from its congeners of the same
group.

TABULATION OF CHARACTERS.
A. Elytra with closely packed, nenceenuis

nate strize ... multistriatus, Har.
AA. Elytra with widely ‘spaced ' strie,

which run in pairs.

B. Front tibize bidentate externally.
C. Elytra opaque, with nitid gran-

ules on the interstices... silphoides, Har.
CC. Elytral interstices not bearing
nitid granules sculptilis, Westw.

BB. Front tibie tridentate exter nally.
C. Elytra blackish, each bearing 2
red spots. “ ... quadrimaculatus, Har.
te Elytra not bimaculate,
D. Elytral strise impressed with
comparatively lenge foveiform
punctures = ... fossulatus, Westw.
DD. Elytral strie finely (or
searcely) punctulate.
E. Expanded lateral part of
pronotum closely punctulate
or strigose.

272

F. Clypeus not abruptly ex-
panded in front of the eye.
G. Colour black, or nearly

so; elytral interstices
somewhat closely punctu- -
later” geminatus, Westw.

GG. Colour bright ferrugi-
nous; elytral interstices
very sparsely punctulate rufus, Blackb.
FF. Clypeus strongly and ab-
ruptly expanded in front
of eye ome ce ... dilatatifrons, Blackb.
KE. Expanded lateral part of
pronotum punctureless, with
a few setiferous granules... nitidicollis, Blackb.

L. multistriatus, Har. I believe this to be an extremely
variable species, widely distributed in Northern Australia, and
L. crenatulus, Fairm., pimelioides, Lansb., and perhaps globu-
liformis, Macl., to be synonyms of Harold’s name. I have
examined a large number of specimens from numerous locali-
ties, having the closely striated elytra which distinguish the
above-named forms from the other named Australian Liparo-
chri, and tind among them a wide range of size and many dif-
ferences in the sculpture of the pronotum, all these differ-
ences being observable, mmter se, among specimens sent in
batches from a common locality (e.g., in a batch of specimens
from Port Darwin). According to description crenatulus
differs from multistriatus in its pronotum being “sat dense
punctatum,” while that of multistriatus is “in disco parce

punctatum.” I have both forms, and also many intermediate,
and specimens whose pronotum is devoid of puncturation ex-
cept close to the lateral margin. JL. pimelioides should be

smaller, with the elytra more dilated behind, and having the
front angles of the prothorax less acute. A specimen before
me presents these characters except the last, but, on
the other hand, I have an example with the
last-named character very conspicuous, but otherwise
agreeing with typical multistriatus. L. globuliformis,
Macl., should be smaller than multistriatus, with the
pronotum more sparsely punctulate. I have specimens agree-
ing with the latter character, but have not seen any quite so
small as the size Macleay gives (long., 13 1., my smallest specti-
men being 2} 1.), and this extremely small size perhaps sug-
gests specific validity. If the characters named as distinguish-
ing the three forms that have been separated from multistria-
tus are to be regarded as valid, several others of the forms
before me must be treated as distinct species.

L. dilatatifrons, sp. nov. Nitidus; brunneo-rufus; convexus ;
latissime ovalis; sat glaber; clypeo antice late leviter

emarginuto, rugulose subgrosse punctulato, lateribus ante
oculos subito sat fortiter dilatatis : prothorace fortiter
transverso, antrorsum fortiter angustato, supra in disco
sparsim subtilissime (in lateribus fortiter et strigatim)
punctulato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, angulis obtusis,
bast marginata; scutello sparsim subfortiter punctulato ;
elytris sat fortiter geminato-striatis strils vix perspicue
punctulatis, interstitiis sat latis leviter subconvexis spar-
sim sat fortiter (nullo modo rugulose) punctulatis; tibiis
anticis extus tridentatis. Long., 35 1.; lat., 25 1

Among the nitid Liparochr: having geminate non-pune-
tulate (or nearly so) elytral stria, this species stands alone (un-
less L. usperulus, Fairm., agrees with it) in having the part
of its clypeus immediately in front of the eyes abruptly and
horizontally ailated. This clypeal structure is found in some
species of other groups (e.g., mu/tistriatus, Har.). Australia.
J am not sure of the exact locality, but believe it to be in
tropical Queensland.

L. nitidicollas, sp. nov. Nitidus: brunneo-rufus; convexus:
latissime ovalis; sat glaber; clypeo antice late vix emar-
ginato, rugulose grossissime strigato, lateribus ante ocu-
los haud dilatatis ; prothorace fortiter transverso, autror-
sum fortiter angustato, supra in disco subtilissime
sparsissime punctulato, in lateribus haud punctulato sed
granulis setiferis sparsis instructo, lateribus arcuatis,

‘angulis anticis subacutis posticis rotundatis, basi margi-

nata; elytris subtilius geminato-striatis, strils vix pers-
picue punctulatis, interstitiis planis levibus sat latis;
tibiis anticis extus tridentatis. Long., 3 1. (vix); lat.,
141.

A very distinct species, differing widely from all its con-
geners in the sculpture of the lateral portions of its pronotum,
which are perfectly smooth and very nitid /7.e., devoid of any
punctures or strigosity), but bear a few very conspicuous seti-
ferous granules.

N.W. Australia.

ANTIOCHRUS.

I have before me about a dozen specimens which I have
no doubt are congeneric with A. brunneus, Shp. The only
difficulty I feel in thus referring them consists in the absence
from Dr. Sharp’s diagnosis and description of any mention of
the peculiar sculpture of the marginal part of the elytra,
which is present in all the specimens before me. They, how-
ever, present all the characters attributed by Dr. Sharp to
Antiochrus, and moreover are evidently very close to Liparo-

274

chrus oblongus, Har, with which its author subsequently
stated that A. brunneus, Shp., is identical. If I am in error
in referring these specimens to Antiochrus they must be re-
garded as members of an unnamed genus very near to Liparo-
chrus. There can, at any rate, be no objection to placing
them provisionally in Antiochrus. Dr. Sharp says that the
only definite character he can assign to Antiochrus, as dis-
tinguishing 1t from Liparochrus, consists in the great dilata-
tion and compression of the posterior tibiz, which is certainly
very conspicuous in all the specimens I am discussing ; but it
is unquestionably the case that the form of the tibiz is not
constant in typical Liparochri, some of them (e.g., L. gemi-
natus, Har.), having hind tibize very much compressed and
dilated ; in fact, almost as strongly as they well could be. I
should, therefore, as far as that particular character 1s con-
cerned, hesitate to regard it as generally satisfactory if
it stood alone. I find, however, that the species I regard as
Antiochri also differ from Liparochrus very considerably in
facies, being (as Dr. Sharp remarks of the typical Antzo-
chrus, though he does not definitely make it a generic char-
acter, probably on account of having seen only one species of
the genus), in shape more like Tro than Liparochrus, 1.é.,
more elongate, narrow, and parallel than Liparochrus. When
in addition to this marked difference in facies I observe that
all these Trox-shaped allies of Liparochrus with exaggeratedly
dilated posterior tibiz have also a peculiar elytral sculpture,
of which there is no trace in any described typical Liparo-
chrus, I have no hesitation in regarding them as generically
distinct from JLzparochrus. The peculiar sculpture I[
refer to is the presence (on the surface of the elytra close
within the hinder part of the lateral margin, and more or less
extended forward, according to the species) of several very
fine, parallel raised lines placed close to each other, and paral-
lel with the actual margin. In Liparochrus the character of
the elytral sculpture is uniform quite up to the margin.
Although it seems desirable to set forth the foregoing
notes on a genus of Australian Tvrogides, which appears to
me distinct from Trox and Liparochrus, and which I believe
to be identical with Antiochrus, I regret to fina myself unable
to write anything satisfactory about the species. The fol-
lowing species are all, I have little doubt, members of this
genus: —A. brunneus, Shp., and Liparochrus oblongus, Har.,
aberrans, Fairm., and politulus, Macl. As stated above, Har-
old has identified the first two of these names as representing
a single species. The only one of them named in my collec-
tion is A. politulus, Macl., my example of which has been
compared with the type. It appears to be distinct from

275

brunneus and oblongus, inter alia, by its head not being
granulate. It is also quite distinct from all-the other Antio-
chri known to me by the extraordinary thickening of the
hinder part of the lateral margin of its elytra. Among the
remaining eleven specimens before me there are clearly at
least four species, but as I am unable to point out any defi-
nite character in them as reliably specific—as one of them is
certainly variable in respect of sculpture—and as any one of
them might be A. aberrans, Fairm., I must leave the determi-
nation of the species of this genus for future study and in-
creased material.
LAMELLICORNES PLEUROSTICTI.

The Trogides, which end, as far as known Australian
species are concerned, with A ntiochrus (vide supra), form, in
the Lacordairean system of classification, the sixth tribe of
the first subfamily, or “legion,” (Lamellicornes laparostictr)
of the family Lame/licornes. The seventh tribe of that sub-
family, the Glaphyrides, has no known representative in Aus-
traha. One Australian genus (Phenognatha), through its
alliance with a non-Austrahan genus (Aclopus), which Erich-
son referred to the G/laphyrides, has been placed by some
authors in the same tribe; but Lacordaire (Gen. Col., i1.; p
160; note 4) has shown that Erichson was wrong in referring
Aclopus as he did, and that the proper place for it is in the
second subfamily of Lamellicornes. That this is the case with
Phenognatha is obvious to any one who examines a specimen
of that genus. These remarks seem desirable because Phe-
nognatha stands in Masters’ catalogue as a Glaphyrid.

The Lamellicornes pleurosticti are distinguished from
the first subfamily by the position of their abdominal stig-
mata, the hinder three of them being placed (not on the con-
nective membrane of the dorsal and ventral surfaces, but) on
the ventral surface of its segment, so that the last of them is
ordinarily visible when the elytra are closed, as well as when
they are set open to expose the abdomen fully.

These two subfamilies (or “legions,” as Lacordaire calls
them) comprise on the Lacordairean system of classification
the whole of the Lame/licornes. The second subfamily, with
which I hope to deal, in respect of its Australian species, in
this and some following memoirs, is divided into four “tribes,”
each of which is extensively subdivided into groups, sub-
groups, sub-sub-groups, and so on. The four main groups
or “tribes” are the Melolonthides, Rutelides, Dynastides,
and Cetoniides. The first of these differs from the others in the
hinder three of the abdominal stigmata being only slightly
distant from the vonnective membrane, with the consequence

276

that all the six stigmata are almost in a continuous line,
while in the others all the hinder three stigmata are consider-
ably removed from the connective membrane, and therefore
quite out of line with the anterior three. The following table
shows the characters by which these “tribes” are differenti-
ated : —
A. The abdominal stigmata (or ‘‘spira-
cles’) placed almost in a continuous
line se es Lt. a ... Melolonthides
AA. The hinder three abdominal stigmata
quite out of line with the others.
B. The claws of the tarsi unequal ... Rutelides
BB. The claws equal.

C. The front coxze transverse, and but

little prominent _... Dynastides

CC. The front coxze evidently less
transverse and more prominent Cetoniides

Most of the information contained in the preceding re-
marks is, of course, familiar to students of the Lamellicornes,
but before passing on to work in which I hope to diagnose
some new genera and describe new species it seems well to
furnish such a brief recapitulation as the above contains of
preliminary facts, in order to start with a clear understand-
ing of the order and plan I propose to follow.

MELOLONTHIDES.

This first tribe of the second subfamily of Lamellicornes
is of all the tribes of the family by far the most numerously
represented in Australia. Lacordaire divides it into nine sub-
tribes, and another has since been added by Dr. Sharp. Of
these ten subtribes only four are incontestably represented in
Australia, while to a fifth subtribe (Macrophyllides) have been
referred two Australian species (both very rare in collections),
whose position in that subtribe appears to me open to some
doubt. The following table shows the distinctive characters
of these five subtribes : —

A. Labrum fixed to the front of the cly-

peus, and on the same plane with it Systellopides

AA. Labrum not as in the Systellopides.
B. Front coxse prominent, and not or
but little transverse.

C. Palpi inserted very little below

the plane of the clypeus ... if

CC, Palpi inserted considerably be-

low the plane of the clypeus ... Sericoides
BB. Front coxe but little prominent,
and strongly transverse.

C. Ventral segments soldered to-

gether My, 44s 48 ... Melolonthides (true)

CC. Ventral segments free... ... Macrophyllides

The above brief recapitulation of facts regarding the
tribe Melolonthides is (excepting the tabulation) a mere sum-

Sericides

277

mary of matters that I have already discussed at some lengtn
in a former memoir (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, p. 18, ete.), to which
I would refer the reader. I repeat the outline merely to
avoid the need of having another memoir in hand while mak-
ing use of the present one. Referring to the tabulation (in
which I have departed somewhat from the characters relied
on by Lacordaire) I may remind those who may use it that
in characterising large aggregates of species it 1s almost in-
variably impossible to find single sharply defined points of
difference (such as are required for a f¢abular_ state-
ment) that can be relied upon as_ strongly de-
veloped in every member of the aggregates in
question. The truth of this remark is ‘Jlustrated fy
the character assigned to the Systellopides, inasmuch as there
are genera of the Sericides in which to a casual glance it cer-
tainly seems to be present. I have discussed this point before
(loc. cit.), and therefore merely mention it now with the added
remarks that, apart from this character, I cannot see how the
Systellopides are to be distinguished from the Sericides as at
present constituted, and that I am unable to satisfy myself
that the apparent labrum is really that organ in the Systel/o-
pides, and is not in such Sericides as Phyllotocus.

SYSTELLOPIDES (First subtribe of Australian Melolonthides).

This subtribe consists of eight species, described by Dr.
Sharp, to which it seems probable that the two species of the
genus Prochelyna ought to be added, and I have two new
species now to be described. If Prochelyna is distinct from
all Dr. Sharp’s genera, these twelve species must stand divided
into eight genera. They are all extremely rare in collections.
Dr. Sharp has conjectured that Metascelis flerilis, Westw., the
habitat of which is not known, may be a Systellopid, in which
case it might probably be Australian. Dr. Sharp’s memoir
on the subtribe (Ann. Mus. Gen., ix., pp. 311, etc.), sup-
plies an excellent tabular statement of distinctive characters
of those species that can be confidently referred to it. I have
no information as to the habits of these insects.

SPHYROCALLUS.

S. bicolor, sp. nov. Rufo-testaceus, clypeo obscuriori, capite
postice elytrisque piceis; pronoto, scutello, sternis et
femoribus pilis testaceis elongatis dense vestitis; labro
levi; clypeo creberrime sat fortiter punctulato; fronte
antice sparsius (postice sparsissime) punctulata; sutura
clypeali impressa; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice
minus angustato, supra opaco, vix perspicue punctulato
(sculptura sub pilos densos abdita), lateribus sat arceu-

278

atis, angulis obtusis; elytris subnitidis crebre subtilius
minus equaliter punctulatis, leviter minus equaliter
geminato-striatis; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis. Long.,
8 1.3 lat., 41.

This species certainly ought not to be separated generi-
cally from 8. brunneus, Shp., of which I possess an example
agreeing perfectly with Dr. Sharp’s description, and taken in
N.W. Australia (the original locality). Nevertheless, it dif-
fers from S. brunneus in respect of a character that Dr. Sharp
regards as generic in having its clypeus separated from the
frons by an ordinary suture, not a raised line. Also, it de-
parts somewhat in the structure of the labrum, which is inter-
mediate between that of S. brunneus and Chilodiplus (also in
my collection), the front portion of that organ being evidently
thickened or tumid, though the organ is not distinctly bipar-’
tite, as in Chilodiplus. Apart from these slight structural
modifications the present species and S. brunneus are ex-
tremely close, even specifically, the principal external differ-
ences being in the darker head and elytra of the present 1n-
sect, the shorter joints of its antennal flagellum, the opaque
pronotum, the less depth of its elytral striz, its more nitid
and less pilose pygidium, its more densely pilose pronotum,
the presence of three external teeth on its front tibiz (my ex-
ample of S. brunneus has only two, including the apical one),
and the greater length of its ventral segments. I have no
doubt that my S. brunneus and S. bicolor are male and femate
respectively of two allied congeneric species. The joints of
the flagellum of the antenne in brunnews are nearly four
times as long as the preceding four joints together, in bzcolor
scarcely twice as long. Some of the distinctions between tne
two that I have mentioned above are probably sexual, but
those of the labrum, the opacity of the pronotum, and the
striation of the elytra (it is hardly likely that the deeper
sculpture would be in the male), together with much colour
difference and widely separated locality, point to specific dis-
tinctness.

W. Australia; near Eucla.

ENAMILLUS.

The following species must be referred to this genus ac-
cording tu the tabular statement of the characters of the Sys-
tellopid genera furnished by Dr. Sharp (Ann. Mus. Gen., ix.,
p- 319), though it is not unlikely that had it been before Pr.
Sharp he would have found a new generic name for it. Jt
presents all the characters indicated for Hnamillus in the
tabulation, but differs from those set out in the subsequent

279

detailed diagnosis in respect of the antennz, the basal joint
of the flabellum not enfolding the following joints (although
the apical joint enfolds the preceding ones, as in Hnamillus ).
It also differs widely as a species from the unique Hnamillus
(#. striatus, Shp.), especially in its pronotum not beimg
pilose and its elytra not regularly striate, but it is certainly
so close structurally to Hnamillus that no confusion can result
from its being assigned to that genus. Unfortunately, my
specimen has lost its legs, though in all other respects it is n
excellent condition. The Systellopides are so rare in collec-
tions that I do not lke to omit the opportunity of describing
this one, and the species of that subtribe are, so far as known,
such isolated forms that it is unlikely any other species ex-
ists which would be capable of confusion with the present one
for want of a description of the colour, etc., of its legs.

HL. sharpi, sp. nov. Testaceus, antennarum flabello, palpo-
rum maxillarium articulo apicali, capite postice pro-
* noto medio et elytris rufo-piceis (pedibus exempli typici
carentibus); supra sat glaber sed prothorace piloso-
fimbriato; subtus sat hirsutus; capite (labro sat levi
excepto) crebre sat rugulose punctulato; pronoto sub-
nitido minus crebre minus fortiter punctulato, fortiter
transverso, antice valde angustato, lateribus fortiter ro-
tundatis, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis nullis; scu-
tello transverso sparsim punctulato ; elytris inequaliter sat
crebre punctulatis, subopacis nec velutinis, stris sub-
suturali fortiter duabus (geminatim positis) modice
quatuor (geminatim positis) vix et tribus sublateralibus
fortiter impressis. Long., 54 1.; lat., 23 1.

The elytral striz are as follows:—A _ subsutural stria
deeply impressed except close to the scutellum ; three pairs of
strie (the two of each pair very close to each other) at wide
intervals from each other and from the subsutural stria, the
first pair obsolete in front, but moderately deep behind, the
other two pairs scarcely distinct; three entire, fairly deep
striz close to each other ana to the lateral margin. The
piceous median portion of the pronotum is narrow in front
and much dilated hindward, so as to be of triangular form.

W. Australia.

SERICIDES (Second subtribe of Australian \elolonthides,.

Regarding this subtribe I have little to add to what I
wrote seven years ago in the memoir already referred to,
where I discussed at some length the character that Lacordaire
relied on as essentially distinguishing the Sericzdes from the
Sericoides, and, without disputing its validity, proposed a

280

different way of determining its presence or absence, which
would involve some variation from lWacordaire’s classification
of these Melolonthides. I still hold the same opinion on the
matter that I did then. In the memoir mentioned, however,
I omitted to refer to Lacordaire’s subdivision (into smaller
aggregates of genera) of this and the following subtribe—a
reference which seems to be called for by the fact that my
proposed different expression of the distinction between the
subtribes involves a certain degree of re-arrangement of their
“groups” (or sub-sub-tribes). These I ignored, provision-
ally, and furnished a tabulation of the genera without any
intermediate subdivisions. acordaire subdivides the Serv-
cides into five groups, two of which being non-Australian need
not be discussed here; and a third (Mechidudes) has the 1n-
sertion of its maxillary palpi much below the plane of the
clypeus, which I regard as associating them with the Ser-
coides rather than with the other Australian genera that
Lacordaire places among the Serzcides. The Sericoides Lacor-
daire subdivides into six “groups,” two of whch are not known
to be found in Austraha. Of the remaining four groups two
(Pachytrichides and Aclopides—at any rate the Australian
member of the latter) have their maxillary palpi inserted
close to the under surface of the clypeus (as in Phy/lotocus
etc.), and, therefore, in my judgment, should stand near
Phyllotocus, etc., rather than among such genera as Colpo-
chila, Heteronyx, etc. I, therefore, hold that these “groups,”
assuming that the non-Australian Aclopid genus is rightly
associated with Phenognatha), should be transferred to the
Sericides, so that there will be four “groups” of Australian
Sericides and two of Australian Sericoides. And here I may
refer to a valuable memoir on Pachytricha (Ent. M.M. x1.,
pp. 2, etc.), in which Dr. Sharp discusses the difficulty of plac-
ing that genus in the Melolonthid series with all the advan-
tage of his profound learning in anatomy, but does not state
his own judgment as to what place it should occupy; although
IT do not find in his remarks anything inconsistent with the
view I have taken of the affinities of the genus. The “groups”
of the Serzcrdes known as occurring in Australia may, then,
in my opinion, be thus stated : —

A Claws bidentate beneath (size very
large) re a a di ... Pachytrichides
AA. Claws not bidentate beneath (size
moderate or small).
B. Mandibles surpassing the clypeus

and embracing the labrum ... .. Aclopides
BB. Mandibles normal.
C. Hind coxe very wide uit ... Phyllotocides

CC. Hind coxze narrow bie ... Diphucephalides.

281.

PACHYTRICHIDES (First group of Sericides).

The genus Pachytricha, with its six described species,
monopolises this group. The species are all, so far as [ have
observed, rare in collections, nor have any, I believe, been
taken except in W. Australia. They are yery fine, large
insects, and are very closely allied inter se. They have been
fully dealt with by Dr. Sharp in the memoir already men-
tioned, and I have nothing further to say about them.

ACLOPIDES (Second group of Nericides).
Represented in Australia, so far as known, by the single
species, Phenognatha erichsoni, Wope, which is fairly com-
mon in collections, but seems to be limited, in respect of
habitat, to the far north of the continent.

PHYLLOTOCIDES (Third group of Sericides).

For the present I must pass this group over with the
mere remark that I am not yet prepared to deal with it more
fully and confidently than I did in my former memoir (already
referred to); for, although I have made some progress with
a revision of that memoir, it is probable that I may he able
at no distant date to examine certain types, the inspection of
which will enable me to write more definitely than I could do
at this time.

DIPHUCEPHALIDES (Fourth groupof Sericides).

This last group of Australian Sericides contains two
genera, Diphucephala and Hpholcis—the former numerous 1n
known species, and widely distributed, many of its species
very abundant. The latter, so far as at present known, al-
most limited to tropical regions, consisting of not more than
five described species, and not very frequent in collections.
What I have said above concerning the Phyllotocides may be
repeated, mutatis mutandis, concerning this group, and I,
therefore, omit further remark on it for the present.

SERICOIDES (Third subtribe of Australian Melolonthides).
Having referred the Pachytrichides and Aclopides to the
subtribe Serzcides, I leave only two of the groups into which
Lacordaire divided the Sericowes, as representing that sub-
tribe in Australia, viz., the Heteronycides and Stethaspdes.
They are distinguished from eacn other by Lacordaire as fol-
lows : —

A. Species not having a sternal projection .... Heteronycides
AA. Species furnished with a sternal projec-
tion ... ee pt ees * ... Stethaspides

The former of these is by far the most abundant in
species of all the “groups” of Australian Melolonthides. The

282

number of species is so overwhelming that until a muck
larger proportion has been carefully studied and described it
would not be wise to venture an opinion as to whether they
should all remain included within the limits of the one “group”
or ought to be split up into several “groups,” and therefore
I do not propose to aiscuss that point at present. I have
already published a revision of the enormous genus Heter-
onyx, and have now before me a great number of additional
species, which I hope to deal with at no distant date. I have
also furnished a revision of the extensive genus Colpochila andl
of that also have now numerous additional species. Of the
more extensive genera of the “group” there still remains
Liparetrus to be revised by me, of which, in the following
pages I attempt a revision, adding some notes preparatory
for more detailed work on some other genera closely connected
with Liparetrus. I may here draw attention to my having
furnished (in the previous memoir already referred to) a
tabulation of the characters, together with some notes on the
same, of the Australian genera known to me that can be re-
ferred to the Sercoides, though it should be noted that in
that memoir I omitted the Stethaspides (probably by an over-
sight), and limited my remarks to the Hetcronycid portion
of the sub-tribe. That, however, is a matter of little import-
ance, as the known species of Australian Stethaspides are only
two in number, nor is it probable that there are many more
to be added in the future; and, moreover, I do not think
that they will stand permanently in the Serzcoid series. ‘The
Stethaspides, however, do not call for remark here.

LIPARETRUS.

I have found the study of this very extensive genus one
of the most. difficult tasks that I have encountered in Aus-
tralian entomology, not on account of the close alliance of
its species (for most of them have exceptionally distinctive
structural characters), but on account of the very unsatisfac-
tory nature of the monograph of the genus written by Sir
W. Macleay, and published in the Proceedings of the Lin-
nean Society of New South Wales, A.D. 1886, which is ren-
dered practically useless by the fact that no reliance can be
placed upon the apportionment of the species between the
two principal groups into which it divides the genus founded
upon the number of joints in the antenne. I regret to find
that I have to make some corrections in my own work on
Liparetrus, in describing, many years ago, some species as
new which I now find had been previously named by Sir W.
Macleay, I not having discovered at that time that Sir W.
Macleay’s statements of antennal structure were in many in-

283

stances erroneous, so that I assumed species with eight-jointed
antennez to be distinct from those which Sir William asserted
to have nine antennal joints. After many attempts to identify
Macleay’s species by the study of their author’s descriptions I
arrived at the conclusion that it was impossible to do so, and
that an examination of the types (which are in the Sydney
Museums) was essential. Accordingly I have recently visited
Sydney for the purpose of making that examination, and am
now in a position to deal with the matter authoritatively,
and the result of my investigations will be found in the fol-
lowing pages.

The number of names that I can ascertain to have been
given to species presumably of Liparetrus, is 130, of which
29 may be confidently regarded as synonyms, and 9 are so
described that they cannot be identified without the examina-
tion of types to which I have no means of access, the number
of recognisable species being, therefore, 92. To these I have
now to add 20 new species, bringing the total up to 112.

As remarked above, the species of /iparetrus are in
general distinguished by good structural characters, which on
first thoughts would suggest the probability of its being easy
to break the genus up into satisfactory subgenera and _ sec-
tions; but a prolonged and careful study has forced me to the
conclusion that the structural differences are so curiously
intermingled that there is not one of them by means of which
anything approaching a natural group can be formed. The
most striking of the structural characters that I refer to are—
(a) nature of sexual differences; (4) form of clypeus: /(c)
structure of hind tarsi; (d) vestiture of dorsal surface; (/e)
structure of front tibie; (/f) structure of antenne.

The species, however, which are associated by agreement in
any one of these respects differ widely as regards the other
respects, and the species which are placed together by relt-
ance upon any of them are not naturally associated, and have
their closest allies in other groups. I have, therefore, not
thought it well to form any subgenera, but have made the
best use I can of the structural characters for grouping,
without claiming to have succeeded in accomplishing a break-
ing up into natural aggregates except in so far as I shall
indicate in the course of this paper that one or two of the
subordinate aggregates seem to be a natural association of
species.

It must be noted here, however, that JLiparetrus, as
treated by Blanchard and Macleay, includes a number of
species of a genus separated by Burmeister from Liparetrus
under the name Automolus (which I hope to discuss in a
future memoir under the heading of that name), and it is to

284

Liparetrus, as characterised by Burmeister, that the preced-
ing remarks refer.

The previous authors who attempted more or less group-
ing of the Liparetri known to them were Burmeister, Blan-
chard, and Macleay. Burmeister characterised his main
groups according to the relative length of the joints of the
hind tarsi—a system fairly easy to apply, but supremely un-
natural in result. Blanchard founded his groups on antennal
structure alone, and jihis system also leads to unnatural
grouping, and in some cases requires use of a microscope.
Macleay took the antennal structure as the basis of his classi-
fication, with the nature of the sexual distinctions, as indi-
cating secondary aggregates—a system which is not only open
to the same objection as Blanchard’s, but also is vitiated by
the existence of many species of which only one sex is known.
I am unable, however, to fina any method of grouping the
Liparetri which will avoid relying upon the characters that
J have referred to as unsatisfactory. I hope, nevertheless, to
combine them in such fashion as will furnish a tabulation by
which few species will be difficult of identification, although
I can make no claim for my aggregates of being more natural
groups than those of the authors I have referred to above.
I divide the genus into 19 groups, on each of which separately
I append some remarks, but it seems more convenient to make
the tabulation of the species a continuous one than to pro-
vide 19 separate tabulations.

In stating the number of the external teeth of the front
tibiz I have included the apical projection of the tibize as a
tooth. These teeth do not, I find, as a rule, vary sexually in
any marked degree, though they certainly appear to vary in
size somewhat in individuals of the same sex. In some
species (¢.g., discopennis, Guér.), with bidentate front tibiz,
the upper tooth is very feeble in some specimens as compared
with others, and it is usually most feeble in the males; but
where it is well defined in the female it is always, as far as
my observation goes, not actually wanting in the males. The
species showing the greatest sexual disparity, known to me,
in this. respect is 1. discipennis, In the closely alhed J.
canescens, Macl., I do not find any sexual difference whatever
in the armature of the front tibie.

Before I pass to the tabulated statement of the charac-
ters of the species, a list of the names that have to be sunk
as synonyms, and some brief notes on the species that I have
had to omit from the tabulation, seem to be required. I
place the names that must be sunk as_ synonyms
in alphabetical order, setting against each the name

285

of which it becomes a synonym. Basa/is, Macl., and
glaber, Macl., are nom prwoce. Convervus, Boisd., and ob-
scurus, Homb. & Jacq., I have not been able to identify, and
merely place them on the authority of other authors. My
reasons for the rest of the synonymy will be found detailed in
the following pages. It should be noted that obscurus, Macel.,
sinks as a nom. prewocc., as well as for the reason noted under
the name prcerpennis, Germ. The three nom. proce. are ad-
ditional to the 29 original names that are synonyms :—

*acutidens, Macl.=tridentatus, Macl.
* Adelaide, Blackb.= comatus, Macl.
*agrestis, Blackb.=levis, Blanch.
*basalis, Blanch.=sylvicola, Burm. (? Fab.).
basalis, Macl.=albohirtus, Mast.
*brunnercpennis, Blackb.=ubiquitosus, Macl.
converus, Boisd.=sylvicola, Burm (? Fab.).
*flavopilosus, Macl.=fulvohirtus, Macl.
glaber, Macl.=levatus, Macl.
*hirsutus, Burm.=marginipennis, Blanch.
*lanaticollis, Macl.= Palmerstoni, Blackb.
*latiusculus, Macl.=sericeus, Macl.
*Macleayi, Blackb.=sylvicola, Burm. (? Fab.).
*Masterst, Macl.=Germari, Macl.
*maurus, Blackb.=col/aris, Macl.
*montanus, Macl.=discipennis, Guér.
¥nigriceps, Macl.=/evis, Blanch
*nigrohirtus, Macl.=marginipennis, Blanch.
*nitidior, Macl.= picipennis, Germ.
*¥nitidipennis, Macl.=ater, Macl.
obscurus, Hombr. & Jacq.=iridipennis, Germ.
*obscurus, Macl.= picipennis, Germ.
*parvulus, Macl.=levatus, Macl.
¥perplexus, Blackb.=criniger, Macl.
*propinquus, Macl.=rubicundus, Macl.
*pruimosus, Burm.= vestitus, Blanch.
*rugosus, Macl.=nigrinus, Germ.
*salebrosus, Macl.=sylvicola, Burm. (? Fab.).
*senex, Blackb.=vridipennis, Germ.
*simillimus, Macl.=abnormalis, Macl.
*simplex, Blackb.=rotundipennis, Macl.
*spretus, Blackb.=asper, Macl.

The following are the names of the species that I am
unable to place in my tabulation. The type specimens of

* This synonymy has not, I believe, been previously notified.

286

those of them whose names are not Macleay’s are in Europe,
I presume, if still in existence : —

L. uniformis, Blanch., from Eastern Australia, seems
likely to be a member of my twelfth group. The description
implies that its elytra are of testaceous colour, without either
pilosity or dark markings. If that be so, it is probably a
species that I have not seen. Its author supplies no infor-
mation about the structure of its hind tarsi. Macleay sug-
gests its possible identity with his /uridipennis, but that
is most improbable. The descriptions do not agree, and the
localities are very far apart.

L. convexiusculus, Macl. Quite unrecognisable by the des-
cription. I could not find the type in either of the Sydney
Museums, where it might be expected to be.

L. curtulus, Burm. I suspect this species of being identi-
eal with ferrugineus, Blanch., although there are discrep-
ancies of colour which render the identity doubtful. The
description of colour agrees better with whiquitosus, Macl.,
but the clypeus of the male does not seem to agree with that
of the latter species. It may be distinct from both} in which
case I have not seen it.

L. glabratus, Burm. I cannot identify this species. It
is probably a member of my fourth group, and seems to be
nearest to incertus, Blackb., but, inter alia multa, differs ex-
tremely in colouring. If the type was a specimen from whose
propygidium and pygidium the vestiture had been removed
by abrasion 1t might be L. ovatus, Macel.

L. glaber, Burm. This species is scarcely described.
There being no information given by its author with regard
to even such important characters as the structure of the an-
tennz and the front tibiz, it is useless to hazard a guess as
to its proper place in the genus.

L. Lottunm, Dupont. According to Macleay, this species
is identical with LZ. humilis, Blanch., in which case it is an
Automolus. I cannot see, however, that Macleay can have had
any solid ground for identifying it with any insect in parti-
cular, as the description is quite worthless.

L. nigricollis, Hope. This is a mere name; it is unac-
companied by any information that would associate ‘the
species with Liparetrus; in fact, the scanty remarks on the
elytra seem to be more consistent with a place in some other
genus.

L. gagaticeps, Macl. The presumable type is in the Mac-
leay Museum. It appertains to a species that I have not
seen elsewhere. Unfortunately, the structure of its antenne
cannot be examined without manipulation that could not be

287

resorted to. Those organs, however, I can say with confi-
dence, have not more than eight joints. If they are eight-
jointed, the insect should be placed in my tabulation with
levatus, Macl., from which it differs by, inter alia, its brightly
testaceous prothorax. If the antennz are seven-jointed the
insect should be placed in my tabulation with opacicollis,
Macl., from which it differs by, enter alia, its being less than
half the size of that species.

L. striatus, Blanch. Without information as to the
structure of the hind tarsi it is impossible to place this
species in a tabulation. If the basal joint of those tarsi be
shorter than the second joint it might probably be identical
with 1. glaber, Burm., and also with ovatus, Macl., in which
case 1t would have priority over those two names. If its hind
tarsi be not as suggested above it is a species that I have not
geen.

A. Antenne 9-jointed.
B. Front tibie 3-dentate externally.
C. Basal joint of hind tarsi evi-
dently shorter than the 2nd
joint.
D. Disc of pronotum bearing
erect pilosity.
E. Erect pilosity largely ex-
tended on the elytra.
I’. Pilosity of pronotum en-
tirely of pale colour.

G, Front margin of clypeus
very deeply emar-
ginate (as deeply as
in abnormalis, Macl.) WKennedyi, Macl.

GG. Front margin of cly-
peus not (or more
feebly) emarginate.

H. Basal joint of front
tarsi (male) pro-
duced at inner apex.

I. Elytra not closely
punctulate; gemi-
nate strie well

marked te -..- comatus, Macl.
Il. Klytra closely punc-

tulate ; geminate

strie feebly de-

fined fulvohirtus, Macl.

Hit. Basal joint of front
tarsi (male), not, or
scarcely, produced
at inner apex.
I. Pygidium black
J. Elytra with gem-
inate strize not,
or searcely,
traceable ... Xanthotrichus, Rlanch

288

JJ. Elytra with gem-
inate strie well
marked ...

if Py cidium, .ted |. \:...

FF. Pilosity of pronotum

blackish in middle part.

G. Basal joint of front

tarsi (male) keeled on
inner edge.

H. Size very large
rabout 5 1.):; gem-
inate strie of elytra

_ strong
HH. Size moderate

(about’ 4 .1.); gem-

inate striz of ‘ely-
tra feebler
GG. Basal joint of front
tarsi (male) not
keeled, na produced
at inner apex.
H. Front of clypeus

(male) bisinuately
emarginate (as in
canthotrichus)

HH. Front of clypeus
(male) not bisinuate
EE, Elytra glabrous, or nearly

so.

F. Clypeus of male trun-
cate; pilosity of prono-
tum of pale colour.

G. Clypeus scarcely nar-
rowed forward. Front
tarsi of male much

thickened hes On
GG. Clypeus considerably
narrowed forward.

Front tarsi of male
scarcely thickened
FF. Clypeus of male roun-

ded in front: pilosity of

pronotum blackish
DD. Pronotum glabrous on disc.
but frilled with erect hairs all
across front.

E,. Front margin of clypeus
with a median tooth-like
obtuse prominence in both
sexes 1% ce

EE. Front marein of clypeus
not prominent in_ the
middle.

F. Lateral angles of clypeus
acute in the male.

G. All the joints of front
tarsi (male) keeled in-
ternally an a

GG. Tarsi of male not
keeled internally.

necessarius, Blackb.
rufiventris, Vael.

ater, Macl.

pheenicopterus, Germ

Mitchelli, Macl.

villosicollis, Macel.

Germari,

Macl.

eapillatus, Macel,

dispar,

Kreusler

Ingens,

Blackh

2. Macl,

Blackh.

289

H. Elytra strongly prui-
nose and iridescent

HH. Elytra not pruinose
nor iridescent a

FF. Lateral angles of cly-
peus roundly obtuse.
DDD. Pronotum’~ glabrous’ on
disc, or with “only a few
hairs on the antero-external
parts.
E, Clypeus conspicuously tri-
dentate in front...
KE. Clypeus not dentate (or
scarcely so).
F. Entirely testaceous (in-
cluding the head)
FF. Some “part (at least the
head) dark.

G. Sides (but not middle
part) of front margin
of pronotum pilose

GG. Front margin of pro-
notum olabrous.

H. Propygidium and
pygidium clothed
with coarse squami-
form sete.

I. Clypeus (at least of
male) sharply trun-
eate, with well de-
fined angles

II. Clypeus rounded
off at the angles in
both sexes,

J. Size fairly large
(3 l. or more);
tarsi and claws
very long

JJ. Size small (less
than 22 1.) ; tarsi
and claws much
shorter.

K. Median line of
pronotum well
impressed...

KK. Median line

pronotum
not impressed

HH. Propygidium and
pygidium devoid of
squamiform setee

I. Propygidium and
pygidium almost
without sculpture.

J. Prothorax very
strongly trans-
verse see

Jeli: Prothora: AX much
more feebly

transverse

angulatus,

fimbriatus,

Macel.
Blackb.

concolor, Er.

distans, Blackb.

aridus, Blackb.

picipennis,

Germ.

lividipennis, Blackb.

ovatus, Macl.

rubefactus,

Madcl.

subsquamosus, Jacl.

rufipennis,

posticalis,

Macl.

Blackb.

290

II. Propygidium and
pygidium with well
defined punctura-
tion.

J. Head sparsely
punctulate Ly

JJ. Head closely
punctulate oon

K. Pronotum con-
spicuously can-
aliculate (at

any rate near

base).

L, Size mode-
rate aul
more) ae,

LL. Size very
small (scarce-
ly 2 1).

Ki<. Pronotum not
canaliculate ...

CC. Basal two joints of hind tarsi
equal (or scarcely differing) in
length.

D. Disc of pronotum pilose.

E. Basal joint. of hind tarsi
longer than apical spine of
its tibia.

F. Thé hairs of the upper sur-

face black, or nearly so.

G. Propygidium (at least

of female) closely rugu-

lose and subopaque ...

GG, Propygidium (at least

of female) with coarse

sparse punctures, and
somewhat nitid

FF. The hairs of the dorsal
surface flaxen...

EE. Basal joint of hind tarsi
shorter than apica! spine
of its tibia ee uy

I’. Size large (5 1.) : geminate
strie of elytra well de-
fined ms vit

FF. Size much smaller (less
than 3 1.): geminate
stris of elytra very
feeble ibe ae

*DD. Disc of pronotum not, o7
scarcely, pilose ; a frill of very
conspicuous pilosity all across
the front margin.

E. Pronotum sharply and con-
spicuously punctulate,

F. Size fairly large (3-43
1.); pilosity of pronotum

yell

juvenis, Blackb.

incertus,

insularis,

vicarins.

vestitus,

Blackb.

Blackb.
Blackb.

Blanch.

nigro-umbratus, Blackb.

elabripennis, Macel.

erythropterus, Mael.

amabilis,

collaris,

[(?Blanch.)

Blackb.

Macl,

a ai : puer there are a few inconspicuous hairs.

291

FF. Size small (scarcely 3 1.) ;
ilosity of pronotum
ulvous vat iy! “tt

EE. Pronotum faintly, or
scarcely, punctulate.

F. Size moderate (33 |. or
more).

G. The submarginal gem-
inate strize of elytra
become much deeper
close to apex

GG. The submarginal gem-
inate striz of elytra
obsolete towards apex

FF. Sea small (less than
Ft

G. Disc of pronotum with
a few scattered hairs

GG. Disc of pronotum
glabrous

DDD. Pronotum not pilose either
on disc or all across front
margin.

E. Front of clypeus deeply and

angularly emarginate i

EE. Front of clypeus. not, or
searcely, emarginate.

F. Entirely testaceous, ex-
cept infuscate head ..

FF. Entirely black (unless
elytra red).

G. Propygidium and_pygi-
dium densely clothed
with adpressed squami-
form sete

GG. Propygidium and py oi-
dium normal.

H. Front margin of pro-
notum entirely glab-
rous.

I. Clypeus more pro-
duced (in~ male
strongly triden-
tate) : lateral fringe
of pronotum whi-
tish. a's i.

II. Clypeus less pro-
duced (in male
feebly tridentate) ;
lateral fringe of
pronotum brown

J. Puncturation of
propygidium ob-
solete in front

part ; sas

JJ. Ranchieation of
propygidium not
obsolete in front
part 1

analis, Blackb.

consanguineus, Blackb.

Sedani, Blackb.

puer, Blackb.

rotundiformis.

abnormalis,

distinctus,

Macel.

Blackb.

tristis, Blanch.

iridipennis.

eracilipes,

holosericens,

Germ.

Blackb.

Mael.

Macel.

292

HH. Front margin of
pronotum with a
pilose frill widely in-
terrupted in middle

CCC. Basal joint of hind tarsi dis-
tinctly longer than 2nd joint.
D. Disc of pronotum pilose (in
some species more conspicu-
ously so across base and front
margin than elsewhere),
E. Apex (and hind part of
sides) of elytra set with
short stout bristles

EE. Elytra without marginal
bristles.
F. Elytra black.
G. Clypeus distinctly tri-

dentate in both sexes
GG. Clypeus slightly emar-
ee not at all den-

FF. Eigiva red (blackish, « or
not, near base).
G. Front of clypeus with 3
sharp recurved teeth
GG. Front of clypeus feebly

and obtusely tridentate.

H, Elytral puncturation
strong (about as in
L. villosicollis, Macl.)

HH. Elytral punctura-
tion notably finer

DD. Pronotum not pilose’ on
disc, but having a fringe of
erect hairs all across its front

DDD. Pronotum not pilose on
disc, and not fringed across
its front.

EK. Front of clypeus having 3
strong sharp recurved teeth
EE. Front of clypeus distinctly
tridentate ; the teeth feeble,
blunt, and not recurved.
F. Pronotum and pygidium
dark
FF. Pronotum and py sidium
testaceous red...

EEE. Front of clypeus not at

all tridentate.

F, A curved impression on
either side, on pronotum
behind its middle

FF. Pronotum normal.

G. Size moderate (23 1.):

subopaque; colour sub-
uniform, piceous }
GG. Size very small (less

than 2 1.): nitid ; colour
variegated. partly tes-
taceous = si not

sericeus, Jacl.

asper, Macl,

atratus, Burm.

ebeninus, Macl.

tridentatus, Macel.

Macel.
Macel.

parvidens,

obtusidens,

Rothei, Blackb.

Blackb.

Perkinsi,

al ia |

bituberculatus, Macl.

melanocephalus, Blackh.

Macel.

impressicollis,
Macel.

convexior,

leticulus, Blackb.

293

BB. Front tibize not tridentate ex-
ternally.

C. Pronotum pilose, at least with a
fringe of hairs across its front
margin.

D. Elytra pilose.

E, Elytra very long, quite or
almost covering propygi-
dium in both sexes ... fs

EE. Elytra normal (or very
short).

F. Elytra unicolorous.

G. Front tibiz very strong-
ly bidentate externally

GG. Front tibiz not, or
scarcely, bidentate ex-
ternally.

H. Elytra bearing very
long and very coarse
sparse white bristles

HH. Elytra clothed with
fine soft hairs Es

FF. Elytra bicolorous.

G. Front tibiz not toothed
externally above the
apical projection,

H. Basal joint of hind
tarsi fully half again
as long as 2nd joint

HH. Basal joint of hind
tarsi notably shorter
in proportion to 2nd
{OLR Be

GG. Front tibiz distinctly
bidentate externally.

H. Basal joint of hind
tarsi at least half
again as long as
2nd joint Rs

I. Pilosity of dorsal
surface dark x

II. Pilosity of dorsal
surface almost
white

HH. Basal joint of hind
tarsi very little lon-
ger than 2nd joint

DD. Elytra glabrous, or with
only a few hairs close to base.

E. Basal joint of hind tarsi
not shorter than 2nd joint.

F, Dorsal surface not uni-
formly dark.

G. Elytra_ pilose in front

part ge =
GG. Elytra glabrous.
H. Disc of pronotum
clothed with erect
hairs.

alienus, Blackb.

suavis, Blackb,

diversus, Blackb.

rotundicollis, Blackb.

ventralis, Blackb.

assimilis, Jacl.

discipennis, Guér.
albohirtus, Mast.

canescens, Jacl,

eravidus, Blackb.

294

I. Basal two joints ot
hind tarsi equal,
or subequal, in
length.

J. Pilosity of prono-
tum nearly white
JJ. Pilosity of pro-

notum dark
brown or black-
ish.

KK, Front tibize

¢ 0 nspicuously
bidentate ex-
ternally ea
Kx. Front tibize
with upper
tooth all but
non-existent ...
II. Basal joint of hind
tarsi very much
longer than 2nd
joint 8 PA
AA. Desnocee glabrous
on dise, but with a
fringe of long hairs
across front ..
FF. Dorsal surface unifor mly
dark
EE. Basal joint “of hind tarsi
notably shorter than 2nd
joint

CC. Pronotum glabrous, or at most
fringed with hairs on lateral

parts of front margin.

D. Basal joint of hind tarsi fully
as long as joints 2 and 8 to-
gether bay 1a.

DD. Basal joint of hind tarsi
much shorter.

EK. Clypeus very distinctly tri-
dentate in front...
EE, Clypeus not tridentate in
front.
F. No part of dorsal surface

(unless head) black.

G. Basal joint of hind tarsi
not longer than 2nd
joint.

H. Front tibize conspicu-
ously bidentate ex-
ternally

HH. Front tibiee » Ww vith r no
distinct tooth above
the apical projection.

I. Flabellum of = an-

tennee piceous :
head confluently
transversely rugu-
lose ...

discoida

lis, Wael.

occidentalis, Macl.

luridipe

nnis, \Jacl,

sericeipennis, Mael.

cinectipe

nnis, Blackb.

nudipennis, Germ.

Palmerstoni, Blackb.

caviceps, Blackb.

minor,

pallidus,

hrevipes.

Blackb.

Macl.

Blackb.

295

II. Antenne — entirely

testaceous ; head
punctulate (not
very closely) ee
GG, Basal joint of hind

tarsi considerably lon-
ger than 2nd joint

FF. Dorsal surface (except
elytra) black.

G. Front tibize unarmed
above the apical pro-
jection ... Aas Ie

GG. Front tibize distinctly
bidentate ne _—

AA. Antenne consisting of 8 joints

(only).

B. Front tibize tridentate externally.
C. Basal joint of hind tarsi not

longer than 2nd joint.
D. Pronotum pilose on disc, or at
least all across front margin,
E. Pilosity largely extended to

the elytra.

F. Propygidium and _pygi-
dium nect coarsely ver-
miculate-rugulose.

G. Elytra sparsely punc-
tulate, red (more or
less black-margined).

H. Basal joint of hind
tarsi notably shorter
than 2nd joint

HH. Basal 2 joints of
hind tarsi equal ad

GG. Elytra closely punctu-
late, black (at most

reddish near apex).

H. Front angles of male
eclypeus acute and
directed outward ...
HH, Front angles of male
clypeus not acute and
not directed forward
FF. Propygidium and _ pygi-
dium coarsely vermicu-
late-rugulose a
KE. Elytra glabrous, or
only a few basal hairs.
F. Sculpture of elytra
transversely rugate.

with

not

G. Male clypeus strongly
emarginate, with
strong, sharp angles:
pronotum of temale

glabrous on dise
Male clypeus scarcely
emarginate, and with
feeble angles: prono-
tum pilose on dise in
both sexes.

GG.

Blanchardi, Blackb,

modestus, Blackb.

Leai, Blackb.

rotundipennis, Macl.

Blanch.

marginipennis,

pilosus, Macel,

ecallosus, Macl.
Germ.

nigrinus,

svlvicola, Burm. (?Fab.)

ferrugineus, Blanch.

296.

H. Form broadly ovate;

pygidium dark in
both sexes EH.
HH. Form much nar-

rower ; pygidium (and
pronotum) bright red

in male ¢
FF. Elytral sculpture strong-
ly and conspicuously

transversely rugate a
DD. Pronotum glabrous (the late-
ral margins disregarded).
E. Head, ‘pronotum, and elytra
black
EE. Pronotum (at. least partly)
and elytra testaceous.
F. Clypeus subtridentate (dis-
tinctly bisinuate) sh
FF. Clypeus not bisinuate.
G. Hind angles of prono-
tum quite defined.
H. Puncturation of pro-
notum quite sparse...
HH. Puncturation of
pronotum close <
GG, Hind angles of prono-
tum rounded off (non-

existent) b:
EEE. Entirely black. except
the elytra, which are tes-

taceous (black bordered) .
CC. Basal joint of hind tarsi much
longer than 2nd joint
BB. Front tibize with less than 3 ex-
ternal teeth.
C. Front tibiz conspicuously biden-
tate externally ...
CC. Front tibie with no “distinct
aoe above the apical projec-
on
AAA. Antennee consisting of 7 joints only
B. Pronotum not confluently and
asperately punctulate.
C. Pronotum nitid; its longitudinal
channel deep and entire.
D. Pronotum sparsely punctulate
DD. Pronotum closely punctulate
CC. Pronotum not as C.
D. Surface of pronotum entirely
clothed with long pilosity
DD. Pronotum glabrous, except
on sides and across front
margin.
E. Surface of propygidium even
EE. Surface of propygidium
strongly gibbose in middle
DDD. Pronotum entirely glabrous
(except lateral fringe) .
BB. Pronotum confluently and aspe-
rately punctulate aes =

ubiquitosus, Macl.

rubicundus, Mael.

Blackb.

rugatus,

erythropygus, Blanch,

Macel.

badius,

monticola, Macl.(? Fab.)

Blackb.

fallax,

atriceps, Jacl.

Macel.
Macel.

micans,

criniger,

Blackb.

letus,

Macel.

leevatus,

Blackb.
Mael.

mvysticus,
clobulus,

Blackb.

insolitus,
levis. Blanch,
tubereulatus, Lea (2?)
Macl.
Macel.

opacicollis,

squamiger,

297

FIRST GROUP (A, B, C, D, E, OF TABULATION).

The species under this heading form part of a natural
group with which, however, some species with very different
antennal structure (AA, B, C, D, E, of tabulation)
are so closely allied that they ought to be placed in it to
make it complete as a natural group. Sir W. Macleay plac-
ed them all together, and attributed similar antennal struc-
ture to them all. There are strongly marked sexual charac-
ters in the clypeus of all of them, and in the front tarsi of
more than half, sexual characters in the antenne moderately
strong, in the abdomen almost none, vestiture of dorsal sur-
face and structure of hind tarsi uniform, or but slightly
varying specifically, structure of front tibia very uniform.
The following are notes on some of the species : —

L. Adelaidw, Blackb., 1s L. comatus, Macl., although
the description of comatus is extremely misleading, being
founded on a colour var. such as | have not seen, and said to
resemble L. marginipennis, Blanch., which is a species of
the same natural group, but by no means one of the most like
it superficially. Macleay had a peculiarly coloured example
before him, and gave a by no means felicitous description vf
it under the name comatus.

L. flavopilosus, Macl. This species was described from
Gayndah specimens, as also was fulvohirtus, Macl. Between
the two descriptions I find absolutely not one differential
character except that the pilosity of one is called “pale red”
and of the other “yellowish.” In the Australian Museum I
find one specimen (male) of favopilosus and two (female) of
fulvohirtus, doubtless including the types. They are all from
one locality (Gayndah), and do not seem to differ iter se
except in sex.

L. «canthotrichus, Blanch. Macleay says that the basal
two joints of the hind tarsi are equal. The specimens so
named in the Sydney Museums—as also in my own collection
—have hind tarsi with the basal joint (though longer than
is usual in this group) distinctly shorter than the second
joint. The author of the name does not mention the hind
tarsi.

L. ater, Macl. A male (unique) in the Macleay Museum
is evidently the type of this species. Excessively close to
phenicopterus, Germ., and attributed to the same region (S.
Australia) as that species. It is notably larger than any
. specimen that I have seen of ordinarily coloured phenicop-
terus, nor have I seen phenicopterus (of ordinary size) with ~
elytra dark piceous in colour as they are in ater. The gemi-
nate strie of the elytra are more strongly marked than in

298

ordinary exemples of phanicopterus. L. ater may prove to
be a good species, but is possibly only an aberrant specimen
of phoenicopterus.

L. nitidipennis, Macl. A female (unique) in the Mac-
leay Museum is, no doubt, the type of this species It is in
bad condition, and seems to me to be certainly the female of
L. ater, Macl. It is of the size and colouring of a typical
example of phanicopterus, Germ., but differs from the fe-
male of that species by the more strongly marked geminate
strie of its elytra, and the more abruptly narrowed front
portion of its clypeus. Like phanicopterus and ater itis from
S. Australia.

L. Mitchelli, Macl. A male (unique) in the Macleay Mu-
seum, is, no doubt, the type of this species. I do not find
any character to distinguish it from JL. villosicollis, Macl.,
except the slight difference (indicated in the preceding tabu-
lation) in the form of its clypeus. This difference, however,
remoteness of locality being given due weight, seems to indi-
cate probable specific validity.

SECOND GROUP (A, B, C, D, EE, OF TABULATION).

Differs from the preceding group only by the elytra of
its members being glabrous, or with only a few hairs close to
the base.

L. Mastersi, Macl. Among the speci:snens standing under
this name and L. Germari, in the two Sydney museums, it is
impossible to identify the actual types. The distinctions in-
dicated in Macleay’s note on Masters: (it can hardly be called
a description) are too slight to be seriously regarded. In
Germari the male clypeus is said to be nearly quite truncate,
the angles not very acute; in Mastersi, “slightly emarginate
in front, and acutely angled.” In Germari the median line
of the pronotum is said to be “quite traceable,” and in
Mastersi not traceable. Slight differences in puncturation
and vestiture are mentioned. Differences in the inner apical
spur of the front tibie and the degree of dilatation
of the male front tarsi are also mentioned. The last-men-
tioned character, if it were strongly marked and constant,
would, no doubt, be of importance; but, after careful study
of the specimens pinned into the two labels (‘‘Germar?”’ and
“Masters” ), in the Macleay Museum—among which presum-
ably are the types—I have failed in finding two specimens
that present this difference inter se, or even that differ inter
se, as Germari and Mastersi should do in respect of the other
slight characters. I must, therefore, regard them as but one

“2?

species, and as “Germarv” stands before “Masters?” in Mac-

299

leay’s Monograph, and is described (while Alastersi is not),
the species must bear the name ‘(ermari.” |

L. capillatus, Macl. Here, again, the identification of
the type is mere guesswork. It is supposed to be in the Mac-
leay Museum, where I find two specimens (male and female),
pinned into a label bearing the name capi//atus. The female
is in very bad condition, and does not seem to be specifically
identical with the male, having strongly pu.lose elytra, while
the elytra of the male are glabrous. The specimens named
capillatus in the Australian Museum are identicai (so far as
can be judged in dealing with bad specimens) with the female
in the Macleay Museum. As it was a male that Macleay
described, I take it that the male in the Macleay Museum is
probably the real type, and I have accordingly treated it as
such. It is much like Germari, Macl., but is very much
smaller, with different male characters (/.¢., clypeus much
narrowed from base to apex, and front tarsi only very
slightly thickened). | Macleay’s description of capillatus 1s
not definite enough to assist identification of type. It may
be added that a male standing in the Australian Museum as
capillatus differs from the male in the Macleay Museum by
its elytra being pilose and with a dark basal border, and by
its front tarsi being strongly thickened.

L. dispar, Blackb. I place this species in the second
group only with hesitation, since the basal joint of its hind
tarsi is not much shorter than the second joint, and conse-
quently it is somewhat intermediate between this group and
the fifth, from the species of which it differs in the following
respects, wmter alia:-—-From vestitus, nigro-umbratus, and
glabripennis, by the basal joint of its hind tarsi, notably
shorter absolutely (as well as in proportion ta the sécond
joint), from amabilis by much larger size and quite different
colouring ; and from erythropterus by its pronotum consider-
ably more closely punctulate, and its elytra widely dark at
the base.

THIRD GROUP (A, B, Cs; DD, OF TABULATION).

The front of the pronotum entirely bordered with a frill
of erect hairs renders this group easily recognisable among the
Liparetri which have three somewhat equally spaced exter-
nal teeth on their front tibiz, nine-jointed antennz, and the
basal joint of their hind tarsi decidedly shorter than the
second joint. The last-named three characters are all well
defined in all of them, except that in L. /ugens the difference
in the length of the joints of the hind tarsi is somewhat
feeble. If that species were regarded as having those joints
subequal it would be brought into the sixth group, from all

300

the species of which (not greatly differing in size) it differs by
its being devoid of iridescence, and having its pronotum sub-
opaque and closely rugulose.

L. Kreuslere, Macl. The pronotum of this species is
stated by its author to be “free from hair except on the ateral
margins.” That, however, is a mistake. There are specimens
in the Macleay Museum (bearing the name), no doubt in-
cluding the type, and agreeing with the description in all
other respects, but having the apical margin (as well as the
lateral margins) of the pronotum pilose. I have, therefore,
no hesitation in correcting Sir W. Macleay’s description iu
that respect.

L. angulatus, Macl. Two specimens (male and female)
are pinned into the label bearing this name in the Macleay
Museum, and are doubtless the types. The species is one |
have not seen elsewhere. It is near my L. fimbriatus, but
differs from it znter alia by its strongly pruinose and iridescent
elytra.

FOURTH GROUP (A, B, C, DDD, OF TABULATION).

This group is a somewhat heterogeneous assemblage of
species, among which there is considerable variety of facies,
etc. The characters that I have indicated as common to the
group are well marked in all its species, with the exception
that a few of them (notably the female of L. arzdus, Blackb.),
are somewhat intermediate between the fourth and seventh
groups, owing to the basal joint of the hind tarsi being only
a little shorter than the second joint. The use of this char-
acter in the hind tarsi is too valuable in dealing with a long
series of species to be discarded on account of these doubtful
cases, but it seems necessary to furnish a note on each of the
latter showing how the species differs (disregarding the hind
tarsi) from its allies in the seventh group.

L. aridus, Blackb. The entirely testaceous colour of this
species prevents its confusion with any member of the seventh
group except distinctus, Blackb. The basal joint of the hind
tarsi in the latter is quite fully as long as the second joint,
the general build is much more robust than in aridus, the
prothorax much more narrowed in front and much tess finely
punctulate on its upper surface, its colour a much less pallid
testaceous, etc.; also it has remarkable sexual characters on
the abdomen which are wanting in aridus.

L. picipennis, Germ., can scarcely be confused with the
seventh group, as the basal joint of its hinder tarsi is quite
distinctly (though not very much) shorter than the second
joint. It presents the unusual character of a row of erect
hairs widely interrupted in the middle on the front margin

301

of its pronotum. The presumable types of L. nitidior, Macl.,
and L. obscurus, Macl., are mere colour vars. of picipennis.

L. rubefactus, Macl., is in no danger of confusion with
the seventh group, but it is desirable to note that its colour
is extremely inconstant, the elytra propygidium and pygidium
varying from a rusty testaceous, or a distinctly red, colour to
black. The darker specimens are for the most part males.

L. subsquamosus, Macl. <A single specimen—no doubt
the type—is pinned into the label bearing this name in the
Macleay Museum. It is extremely close to L. rubefactus,
Macl., especially the dark examples of that species; but the
difference in the sculpture of the pronotum, in combination
with great distance of habitat, justify the retention (at any
rate, provisionally) of a separate name for this insect. It is
dificult to understand why Macleay placed rubefactus and
subsquamosus in different sections of Liparetrus, as having
the “upper surface entirely glabrous” in the case of the for-
mer, and the “‘body squamose”’ in the case of the latter. The
(presumable) types of the two do not differ at all in that
respect from each other.

L. rufipennis, Macl. The presumable type of this insect
(in the Macleay Museum) is devoid of distinct puncturation
on the propygidium and pygidium—a very unusual character
in Liparetrus. Macleay does not mention it, unless the
phrase “pygidium glabrous” is intended to refer to it.

L. ovatus, Macl. I have examined the presumable type
of this species in the Macleay Museum. There are specimens
in the collection of Mr. H. J. Carter with their elytra black,
which I cannot distinguish otherwise from the type. They
are from W. Australia (the original locality).

L. posticalis, Blackb. This species is certainly rather
close to that discussed above as L. rufipennis, Macl., but I
believe it to be distinct, although the examination of more
specimens from the same locality (Port Darwin) would be de-
sirable to settle the point finally. It is of very evidently nar-
rower and more elongate build than any of the numerous
specimens that I have seen of its ally, the prothorax especi-
ally being longer in proportion to the width. There are also
differences in the puncturation of the head, the punctures of
the clypeus being more coarse and sparse and those of the
frons distinctly asperate, which they are not in the Queens-
land insect, and the tarsi are manifestly less robust than in
either sex of that species. I believe the type to be a female.

L. guvems, Blackb. In my description of this species I
called the basal joint of the hind tarsi ‘‘wix breviorem,” as
compared with the second joint. It is, however, sufficiently

302

shorter to place the species in my fourth group rather than
the seventh. Apart from that character, its uniform pale
colour (except on the head and sterna) distinguishes it readily
from all the species placed in the seventh group.

FIFTH GROUP (A, B, CC, D, OF TABULATION).

This group differs from the second by the much greater
length of the basal joint of the hind tarsi in comparison with
the second joint. The following are notes on some of its
species : —

L. pruinosus, Burm. Macleay did not know this species.
I have found in Mr. Griffith’s collection two examples (from
Tasmania, the original locality), which agree very well with
Burmeister’s description. There appears, on first thoughts,
to be a serious discrepancy from Burmeister’s description,
which attributes to prwinosus hind tarsi having the basal
joint longer than the second joint, whereas I have placed the
insect in a group having those joints equal, or almost equal.
The fact is, Burmeister did not separately describe the hind
tarsi of each species, but made his primary division of the
genus into species having (a) the basal; or (b) the second
joint longer than the other, and recognised no intermediate
group, and by placing prwimosus in (a) he indicates the basal
joint as tne longer. If the basal joint of the species before
me be examined (with care that the whole length of the joint
be in sight) it is seen to be slightly longer than the second
joint, so that in Burmeister’s arrangement it would properly
stand in (a), but the difference is so slight between the
length of the joints that they must certainly be called sub-
equal. In the Macleay Museum there is no Liparetrus
ticketed “prusnosus,” but two examples (from Tasmania), of
the insect referred to above are ticketed ‘“‘vestitws, Blanch.”
IT have no doubt of their being correctly named, and of veste-
tus and pruimosus being synonyms. In his monograph Mac-
leay places vestitus in his section with the “body squamose,”
but the specimens in the Macleay Museum (presumably those
Macleay described) present no such character, nor does Blan-
chard attribute squamosity to vestetus. Blanchard’s figure
in the “Voyage au Pole Sud,” is evidently the figure of this
insect, and the habitat is given as “Tasmania,” although in
Blanchard’s “Cat. Coll. Ent.” it is “Nouv. Holl.” There are
in my collection examples of a Liparetrus from New South
Wales that I cannot distinguish from the Tasmaman ex-
amples of vestitus except by their colouring, which is very
variable. Unfortunately, all the Tasmanian specimens that
I have seen are females, so I cannot be sure of their identity
with those from New South Wales. In some females of the

303

latter the dark marginal colouring is absent from the elytra,
while the single male in my possession has elytra almost en-
tirely piceous, with only a small area of reddish tone on the
disc. The front tarsi of this male are very much longer (but
scarcely thicker) than those of the female.

L. mgro-umbratus, Blackb. In my description of this
species (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1887, p. 22) I mentioned the size of the
upper external tooth of tne front tibiz as probably a sexual
character. I am now, however, of opinion that that is not
so, that in the case (at any rate of most) of the species af
Liparetrus, differences in the robustness of the teeth on the
front tibie are not sexual, and that I do not know the male
of L. nigro-umbratus.

SIXTH GROUP (A, B, C, DD, EE, OF TABULATION).

The relation of this group to the third is similar to that
of the fifth to the second.

L. collaris, Macl. My L. maurus is identical with this
insect. When I described it (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1892, p. 99) I
stated my reasons for considering it distinct from collaris
(which I knew only by Macleay’s description). I have now
examined the presumable type (in the Macleay Museum) and
find that the two are specifically identical. The structure of
the hind tarsi being disregarded, L. collaris is distinct from
all those resembling it in colour, of the third group (which
has similar vestiture), by the form of its male clypeus—not-
ably emarginate in front, and not having the front angles
acute.

SEVENTH GROUP (A, B, CC, DDD, OF TABULATION).

The following are notes on species that belong (at least
probably) to this group, which has characters similar to those
of the fourth group, except in respect of the hind tarsi.

L. iridipennis, Germ. There is no greater difficulty in
studying Liparetrus than the identification of this species
(described A.D. 1848) without examination of the type, which,
if still in existence, is, no doubt, in one of the European col-
lections. As far as Germar’s description is concerned it ap-
plies very accurately to /. senex, Blackb.—a common South
Australian species, of which I have seen examples from, among
other places, the original locality of iridipennis. Unfortu-
nately, there is a very important omission in Germar’s des-
cription, for it contains no reference to the structure of the
hind tarsi. Burmeister redescribed iridipennis, and placed
it in his group of Liparetri having the basal joint of the hind
tarsi longer than the second joint. For the reason noted
above (under L. pruinosus, Burm.), this does not seem to me

304

absolutely incompatible witn the identification of his «rdi-
pennis with sener, although in senexv the basal two joints are
all but equal—in the male the basal joint, in the female the
second, being just barely shorter than the other (Germar and
Burmeister both describe the female only). But, unfortu-
nately for that identification Burmeister adds a note that
Germar gives the wrong size for his insect, and that it 1s (not
34 1, but) 23 1. long. The smallest specimen that I have
seen of L. senex is 35 1. The question, therefore, arises as to
the grounds on which Burmeister made this assertion (giving the
same size for iridipennis that he assigned to discipennis, Guer.,
a very much smaller insect than senerv). Without definitely
asserting it, he certainly seems to imply that he had seen Ger-
mar’s type. Nevertheless, I am of opinion that his irzdipennis
is identical with my senex, and that, if his measurement is
correct, it was founded on an exceptionally dwarfed example.
Burmeister’s accuracy in respect of this species is certainly
discounted by his having represented Blanchard’s sy/vicola as
a synonym of iridipenmis, which is far from a correct state-
ment, Blanchard having merely placed in his descriptive cata-
logue sylvicola, Fab. (without a description, but with the
mention of Tasmania as the locality of the specimens before
him), and appended some synonymy, at the end of which he
places “iridescens, Germ.” (doubtless a misprint). I feel ex-
tremely confident that the Tasmanian specimens which Blan-
chard catalogued as sylvicola were not iridipennis. Sylvicola
is a common species in Tasmania, and I have much negative
evidence (from my own collecting, etc.), that zridipennis is not
found on that island. It seems practically certain that
Blanchard’s reference to iridipennis expresses no more than
that author’s conjecture tnat iridipennis is identical with
sylvicola, which is certainly not the case, though that is not
to the point here. Macleay’s treatment of iridipennis is most
unsatisfactory. In the Macleay Museum two specimens are
pinned into the label “¢rdipennis,’ one of which is my
senex, the other my caviceps (the former with the front tibiz
tridentate and the basal two joints of the hind tarsi subequal,
the latter with the front tibize bidentate and the basal joint of
the hind tarsi very much longer than the second). Mac-
leay’s description of iridipennis—-which has always been a
puzzle to me, appearing to describe a South Australian Lipa-
retrus very different from any that I have seen—is evidently
a jumble of these two specimens, founded on the front tibize
of my senex and the hind tarsi of my caviceps. TI may add
that my treatment of senex as a species distinct from iridi-
pennis was founded on its wide divergence from Macleay’s re-
description, and that author’s assurance that specimens of it

305

which I submitted to him were certainly not iridipennis. The
real identity of iridipennis cannot be settled finally without
examination of Germar’s type: owing to the deficiency of
Germar’s description, and Burmeister’s statement that Ger-
mar’s measurement is seriously imcorrect, it is possible that
widipennis is my gracilipes, or my caviceps, or the species that
I regard as nigrinus, Germ.; but as my senev agrees best on
the whole with Germar’s description, and is certainly the most
plentiful in the locality where Germar’s types were collected,
the evidence is certainly in favour of my sener being the true
iridipennis. At any rate, it is now clear that Macleay’s re-
description of iridipennis depicts a species that does not exist.

L. gracilipes, Blackb. This species is abundantly distinct
from senex, Blackb, but it is, as stated above, not certain that
it may not be the true iridipennis, Germ. Burmeister’s iidi-
pennis is, I think, certainly not gracilipes, as the basal joint
of the hind tarsi of the latter is in both sexes a trifle shorter
than the second joint. Compared with iridipennis, Germ.
(senex, Blackb.), this species is very similarly coloured, ex-
cept that the hairs fringing the pronotum laterally are much
darker (‘dark brown,” however, would characterise them bet-
ter than “black,” the word I used in the original description),
and the iridescence of the surface is less pronounced; the
tarsi are less robust in both sexes; the clypeus is notably less
produced in both sexes and less evidently tridentate (male)
or sinuate (female), although there is some variability in this
respect, some females of both having the clypeus not very
far from evenly truncate; the propygidium is very differently
sculptured, having the hind part in both sexes more strongly
punctulate and impressed with two more or less distinct longi-
tudinal fovez (these, in some examples, arched so as to meet
at both ends and form a ring), between which the surface is
more or less gibbous, and the front part abruptly devoid of
punctures and highly nitid [in zridipennis (senex, mihi) the
propygidium is in front opaque, with fine, very close punctu-
ration, which becomes continuously stronger and less close
hindward, and its surface is even]. In the male of gracilipes
the middle part of the basal two ventral segments is occupied
by a very dense tuft of erect, soft, whitish hairs, which is
wanting in its ally.

L. simillimus, Macl. In the Macleay Museum two speci-
mens (one of them presumably the type) are pinned into the
label bearing this name. Unfortunately, their sex cannot be
confidently determined, as they have both lost their front
tarsi, but, judging by the form of the abdomen, I take them
to be males, and I think they are males of ahnormalis, Macl.,

306

of which the other specimens that I have seen (including the
presumable type in the Macleay Museum) are females.

L. latiusculus, Macl. The presumable type of this species
(female) is in the Australian Museum. I can find no non-
sexual difference whatever between it and the presumable
type (male) of L. sericews, Macl., also in the Australian Mu-
seum. It appears to me doubtful whether the specimen pin-
ned into the label ‘“‘latiwsculus,” is really in its proper place, as
Macleay’s measurements of that insect indicate a considerably
smaller species, but as /atvusculus is practically undescribed
(being merely briefly comparea with picipennis, Germ.), it is
incapable of identification unless the specimen in the Aus-
tralian Museum be accepted as the type.

L. holosericeus, Macl. The presumable type of this
species is in the Macleay Museum. It is closely allied to L.
iridipennis, Germ. (senex, Blackb.), and gracilipes, Blackb.,
but, inter alia, differs from both of them by its clypeus with-
out any tendency to sinuation.

EIGHTH GROUP (A, B, CCC, D, OF TABULATION).

The following notes are on species belonging to this
group, which differs from the first and fifth groups by the
structure of its hind tarsi, but agrees with them in other char-
acters, 7.é., vestiture, etc.

L. asper, Macl. The presumable type of this species is
in the Macleay Museum, and the same species also is ticketed
“‘sylvicola” in the same Museum. If the specimen pinned
into the label “‘asper” is really the type, it is incorrectly des-
cribed in Macleay’s monograph, where the vestiture of the
pronotum is stated to be “a frill of long, erect, black hairs on
the base, apex, and sides.’ Owing to that statement I as-
sumed that the species was not asper, and described it
(P.L.S., N.S.W., 1891, p. 482), as spretus.. It is very pos-
sible that the presumable type is not the real one, but never-
theless, as it now stands in the place of the type, it seems
better to admit its claim, and regard spretus as a synonym,
than to adhere to the description and regard asper as a
species known only by a brief description, and very likely
non-existent. For reasons stated under the name sv7/vicola,
Fab., I am quite confident that Macleay was mistaken in
ticketing asper (spretus, mihi.), as sylvicola.

L. atratus, Burm. In his monograph Macleay expresses
doubt as to his identification of this species, and merely quotes
Burmeister’s description. I have specimens from Tasmania
(the original locality), which agree perfectly with Burmeis-
ter’s description, and are certainly this insect. In both the
Sydney Museums iridipennis, Germ. (senev, Blackb.) stands

307

as utrutus (the same species also standing, along with ¢av:-
ceps, Blackb.), under its right name). I do not find the true
atratus in the Macleay Museum, but in the Australian Mu-
seum an example of it (and also two of concolor, Er.), 1s
labelled “sy/vicola,” which latter name (as noted above) ts
applied in the Macleay Museum to asper, Macl. Apparently
it was the specimen of atratus labelled “‘sy/vicola,” which Mac-
leay described in his monograph as sylvicola.

L. tridentatus, Macl. The presumable type of this
species, and also that of L. acutidens, Macl., are in the Aus-
tralian Museum. I can find no difference whatever between
them. After his description of L. acutidens, Macleay says
that it differs from L. tridentatus, “as the description will
show, very widely.” Placing the two descriptions side by
side, however, I have failed to find even one definite differ-
ence between the two, the nearest approach to it being that
the elytra of tridentatus are called “subsericeous red,” and of
acutidens “iridescent yellow.’ I do not find any conspicuous
difference, even in respect of colour, between the presumable
types.

L. parvidens, Macl. The presumable type of this species
is in the Australian Museum. It somewhat closely resembles
obtusidens, Macl., but is probably a valid species, as its elytral
puncturation is very notably coarser than in that species, and
its habitat (Cleveland Bay) is very far distant from that of
obtusidens,

NINTH GROUP (A, B, CCC, DD, OF TABULATION).

This group differs from the eighth by the absence of
pilosity on the disc of its pronotum, and from the tenth by
the presence of a fringe of erect hairs all across the front of
that segment. I know only one species (/.. othe:, Blackb.)
which can be referred to it.

TENTH GROUP (A, B, CCC, DDD, OF TABULATION).

The following are notes on species appertaining to this
group, which resembles the preceding two groups except in
respect of vestiture of pronotum.

L. intuberculatus, Macl. The female is usually much
darker in colour than the male.

L. converior, Macl. Two specimens (one of them, pre-
sumably, the type) are pinned into the label bearing thi
name in the Macleay Museum. I have not seen the species
elsewhere.

ELEVENTH GROUP (A, BB, C, D, OF TABULATION).

This group differs from all the preceding by the front tibize
of its species not tridentate externally. The following are
notes on species belonging to it.

308

L. assimilis, Macl. The presumable type is in the Mac-
leay Museum. I think it a male. Its apical ventral segment
does not differ materially from that of male drseipennis,
Guér.

L. discipennis, Guér. Specimens from almost all parts
of southern Australia and from Tasmania stand in collec-
tions under this name. Macleay gives New South Wales and
South Australia as its habitat. Whether the specimens from
Tasmania and South Australia are specifically identical with
those from Sydney I feel rather doubtful. It is too variable
a species in colouring for great importance to be attached to
such distinctions as greater or less width of dark margins of
elytra in local races; but the opportunities I have had of ex-
amining sexual characters point to difference in the ventral
characters of the male in at any rate Tasmanian examples.
Unfortunately, there is only a single male among those I have
from Tasmania, and I do not think it safe to found a new
species on the decided (though not very great) difference be-
tween the sculpture of its apical ventral segment and the cor-
responding segment in the few male Sydney specimens before
me. The study of a longer series might not improbably es-
tablish specific difference as constant. The species that Ger-
mar describes as discipennis seems, from the colour of its
vestiture, to be that which Macleay named canescens.

L. montanus, Macl. I have examined the presumable
type of this species, unique in the Australian Museum, and
can find no difference whatever between it and L. discipennis,
Guér. It seems to be a male; at any rate, its apical ventral
segment is quite like that of male discipennis.

L. canescens, Macl. JI have examined the presumable
type in the Macleay Museum. It is a common South Aus-
tralian insect, and very distinct from discipennis, Guér. Be-
sides other differences the apical ventral segment of its male
is nitid and almost punctureless, with a strong, obtuse carina
placed transversely across its middle, the corresponding seg-
ment in male discipennis, from Sydney, having an even sur-
face, on which there is fine puncturation, mixed with some
coarse piliferous granules.

L. albohirtus, Macl. Two specimens are pinned into
the label bearing this name in the Macleay Museum. One of
them is obviously some very different insect—the other pre-
sumably the type. Macleay says that the front tibie are
“scarcely bidentate,” the upper tooth being “nearly obsolete.”
I find, however, that although the upper tooth is small (as in
discipennis, Guér., and canescens, Macl.), it is perfectly well
defined in the type.

309

TWELFTH GROUP (A, BB, C, DD, OF TABULATION).

Resembles the preceding group in respect of most of Its
characters, but has elytra glabrous, or with only a little pilo-
sity near base. The following notes relate to members of this
group.

L. discoidalis, Macl. This and the next two species are
very distinct, inter se, but with few distinctive characters
that lend themselves readily to tabulation. Discoidalis is re-
presented in the Macleay Museum by two specimens (one of
them presumably the type). Their elytra are remarkably
coloured, there being only a very narrow black border, except
at the apex, which is very widely of a deep black colour, so
that to a casual glance they seem to have bright red elytra with
a wide, apical black fascia. In one specimen the pronotum is
partially red. The front tibize are distinctly bidentate ex-
ternally.

L. occidentalis, Macl. Two specimens are pinned into
the label bearing this name in the Macleay Museum. There
is, however, a difficulty in accepting either of them as the true
type, for Macleay says that the hind tarsi were wanting in
the specimen described, which is not the case with either of
those in the Museum. Nevertheless, as they are distinct from
any other species that I can find to have been described, and
agree with the brief description, they may fairly be regarded
as correctly named. They resemble discipennis, Guér., in
colouration, but differ from it widely by, inter alia, elabrous
elytra and basal two joints of hind tarsi subequal. Té is near
discoidalis, Macl., undoubtedly, but with very much darker
vestiture, and moreover the colouring of the elytra in the two
examples of dzscoidalis is so conspicuous and unusual that
there can be little doubt of its being a specific character. I
think one of the specimens of this insect (as also of dscordalis )
is a male. The apical ventral segment in both is not much
different from that of male discipennis.

L. luridipennis. A specimen bears this name in the Aus-
tralian Museum, and agrees well with the description except
in the pilosity of the pronotum being somewhat darker than
“fulvo-villose” would lead one to expect. Its facies is very
different from that of the preceding two species, the size being
notably larger and the form more robust. The head is more
massive, with the clypeus wide and subsemicircular (not un-
like that of rufipennis, Macl.)—not at all of the discipennis
type.

L. lanaticollis, Macl. The presumable type of this species
is in the Macleay Museum. It is identical with my L. Pal-
merstont. Both names were proposed in P.L.S., N.S.W.,
1888. Macleay’s name is a month later than mine.

310

THIRTEENTH GROUP (A, BB, CC, OF TABULATION).

Distinguished from the preceding group by the absence, or
nearly so, of vestiture on the pronotum. The species are all
fairly recognisable, and only one remark seems called for here,
Wiz: =

L. simplex, Blackb. This name must become a synonym
of rotundipennis, Macl. When I described the species I drew
attention to its being near Macleay’s insect, but I judged from
the description of the latter that it was distinct, principally
from the absence of two minute tubercles on the head, which
Macleay mentions, and from the elytral puncturation being
by no means “faint.” Comparison with the presumable type
in the Macleay Museum has, however, satisfied me that the
two are identical, the tubercles on the head being either sexual
or accidental, and the elytral puncturation being not quite
correctly described by Macleay. Macleay’s measurement,
moreover, is incorrect, the length being 23-3 1.

FOURTEENTH GROUP (AA, B, C, D, E, OF TABULATION).

Macleay places all the species of this group among Lipa-
retry having nine-jointed antenne. As a fact, they are so
closely allied to the species of the first group that, so far as I
have observed, the antennal structure alone distinguishes the
one aggregate from the other. It seems clear that Macleay
must have examined the antennz of a few species that fall
into my first group, and then assumed a similar structure in
the rest of the species that, the antenne being disregarded,
would be properly associated with them. Even on that sup-
position, however, it is difficult to understand the positivs
assurance he manifests on the subject, for of hirsutus, Burm.,
he says that the description seems to refer it to the aggregate
containing phanicopterus, Germ., but attributes only eight
joints tc its antenne, which, he adds, ‘seems impossible.”
The following are notes on the species of this group and on
their synonomy : —

L. marginipennis, Blanch. There seems to me to be no
doubt that Blanchard was mistaken in placing this species
among those with nine-jointed antenne. Blanchard’s descrip-
tion (which is a fairly detailed one), and his remark on the
close resemblance of marginipennis to his xanthotrichus seem
to forbid any doubt that he had before him a well-known
species, which is common in New South Wales, and stands in
Australian collections generally under the name marginipen-
nis; but there are certainly only eight joints in its antenna.
Probably Blanchard counted the joints in the antenne of
vanthotrichus, and assumea that a species so closely resembling

311

it as marginipennis does would have similar antenne. This
species stands in the Macleay Museum as margimipenns,
Blanch. The presumable type of L. mgrohirtus, Macl., in the
Macleay Museum, is also marginipennis.

L. hirsutus, ‘Burm. it seems clear that ‘this species 1s
identical with marginipennis, Blanch. The descriptions pre-
sent no definite difference except in Burmeister stating the
number of joints in the antenne as “only eight,” which, as
remarked above, is correct. Burmeister’s omission to ideutiiy
marginipenmis may be accounted for by his remark that he is
unable to bring Blanchard’s Liparetr: into his work because
their author has not described their tarsi.

L. pilosus, Macl. I have examined the presumable type
in the Australian Museum. Its antenne consist of eight
joints only. It is extremely close to L. marginipennis,
Blanch., but differs by the basal two joints of its hind tarsi
being almost equal, rnter se.

L. callosus, Macl. I have examined the presumable type
in the Australian Museum, the colouring of which is very
unusual in the genus. Its antennz-have only eight joints.
The species seems to be variable in respect of colouring, as
other specimens before me (otherwise identical) are without
the red mark on the elytra.

L.(Melolontha) sylvicola, Fab. This species is one of the
difficult Liparetri for identification. Its first assignment to
Liparetrus seems to be in Blanchard’s catalogue, where, how-
ever, it 1s not redescribed. Eurmeister redescribed it,:and I
think his identification must be accepted as reliable, inas-
much as he expressly stated that he had examined the Fabri-
cian types of Melolonthides in London, among which that of
sylvicola was, no doubt, included. Then Macleay followed
with a redescription, which, however, is evidently founded
upon L. atratus, Burm. In the Australian Museum two
specimens of L. concolor, Er., and one of L. atratus, Burm..,
are pinned into the label “‘sy/lvicola, Fab.,” and in the Mac-
leay Museum, L. asper, Macl., stands under that name as
well as under the name asper. In his monograph, Macleay
described Burmeister’s sylvicola (incorrectly in respect of the
antenne, by placing it among the species having nine-jointed
antennz), under the name salebrosus, and without citing any
reason for rejecting Burmeister’s name. The complications,
however, do not stop here, unfortunately ; for sy/vicola is an
insect the sexes of which are so different that they have been
treated as distinct species. Sy/ricola, Burm., is the female
and the male was described by Blanchard as ‘ basalis, Her e,
again, Macleay has confused matters by describing a totally
different species as basalis, Blanch. I myself in my earliest

312

memoir on Liparetrus neglected to verify this determination
of Macleay, and, assuming that basalis, Blanch.,! was rightly
identified by Macleay, redescribed the true basalis as Macleay.
The synonymy which I believe to be correct, then, stands
thus :—
L. sylvicola, Fab., Burm. (nec., Macl), fem.

salebrosus, Macl., fem.

basalis, Blanch. (nec., Macl.), mas.

Macleayi, Blackb., mas.

I do not think that any one comparing Macleay’s description
of salebrosus with Burmeister’s of sylvicola can doubt that
they refer to the same insect, which is a remarkably isolated
species, and very common in southern Australia. As to
Macleay’s “‘bausalis, Blanch,” it is an Awtomolus, and is found
in Victoria and Tasmania. Unfortunately, Blanchard’s des-
cription of basalis is an exceptionally meagre one, and it was
perhaps not unnatural that Macleay should have referred it
to the insect he did if he had not the genuine basalis before
him. In fact, it is chiefly a matter of colourng and sculpture
(although the two inseets differ very widely in respect of im-
portant characters that Blanchard does not refer to). Both
occur in Tasmania commonly. Blanchard says of basalis,
“elytris fusco-rubris, basi late nigris,” which exactly fits the
male of sylvicola, Burm. Macleay says of the species that
he regards as basalis, “elytra brownish-red, the base black-
ish,’ which aptly describes his basalis, but not the male of
sylvicola, the former having a mere blackish infuscation across
the base of the elytra, the other a wide basal fascia, well
defined, and of deep black colour. As to sculpture, Blanchard
says of basalis, “prothorace scabroso x x elytris punctato-
scabrosis x x pygidio scabroso,”’ which very correctly indicates
the vermiculate-rugulose sculpture of sylvicola (as character-
ised by Burmeister, who calls it “rugoso-varioloso’’), and of
salebrosus, Macl., which its author describes as ‘‘coarsely vario-
lose-punctate.” No other Liparetrus known to me in nature
or description has any such sculpture. JL. basalis, Macl.
(nec., Blanch.), is quite differently sculptured. Macleay calls
it “rugosely punctate,” a term which he applies (correctly
enough) to the sculpture of numerous other Liparetri, corres-
ponding to the “rugoso-punctatus” which Blanchard applies
to the sculpture of various Liparetri.

As to the identity of L. sylvicola (Fab.), Burm., and
basalis, Blanch. (Macleayi, Blackb.), as sexes of one species, I
can state that I have taken them paired in Tasmania subse-
quently to my describing Macleay.

It is, perhaps, best to add that nothing short of Bur-
meister’s strong implication that his description of sylvicola

313

is founded on an examination of the specimen that stands as
the type would justify the acceptance of his identification as
correct, inasmuch as Fabricius’s description says, ‘“‘capite et
thorace glabris.” If Burmeister’s sy/vicola were regarded as
distinct from that of Fabricius, the name of Burmeister’s
species would have to be changed to basalis, Blanch.

L. nigrinus, Germ. The species that stands under this
name in the Macleay Museum, and that Macleay describes
under this name, is a common South Australian insect, and
it does not agree, in an important character, with Germar’s
description, inasmuch as its front tibie are tridentate exter-
nally, whereas Germar says, “tibiis bidentatis.” 1 beheve,
however, that in Germar’s description “‘bidentatis’” must be a
misprint, as in other respects that description satisfactorily
enumerates the characters of the species in question. More-
over, I have not seen in any collection any species with biden-
tate front tibie that could possibly be nigrinus, and it is
hardly likely that a collection with so many South Australian
Liparetri as were in that which Germar described would not
contain this common one. Germar does not mention the
structure of the antennze, which are eight-jointed, although
Macleay’s description particularly emphasises them as nine-
jointed. The species in the Macleay Museum undoubtedty,
however, has antennz very easily seen to have only eight
joints. Burmeister, I think, applied the name nigrinus to
the same species, although there are difficulties in the way of
that opinion. He gives the size as 23-3 1. (Germar says
“34 1,” Macleay 33 1., the smallest specimen I have measured
is, long. 4 1.), and says that the clypeus of the male is “‘obtuse
tridentato.” | Macleay asserts that this (and Burmeister’s
assertion that the antenne are eight-jointed) can-
not be consistent with Burmeister’s nigrinus being identical
with his (Macleay’s). In respect of the antenne, it was Mac-
leay’s mistake, not Burmeister’s, as already noted; in respect
of the clypeus (the only remaining difficulty), there unques-
tionably is a slight tendency to bisinuation (scarcely sufficient
to deserve mention, I admit, but to which Burmeister, no
doubt, referred), in the front margin of the clypeus of the
male of this species; indeed, I have a specimen in my own
collection in which it is quite distinct, and it is just barely
traceable in the specimens that are named nigrinus in the
Macleay Museum. My conclusion, therefore, is that nigri-
nus, Germ., was correctly identified by both Burmeister and
Macleay, the only doubt being connected with what neither
of them mentions as a difficulty, viz., Germar’s having called
the front tibiz bidentate. It should just be added that this
difficulty cannot be got rid of by the supposition that Bur-

314

meister may not have counted the apical projection of the
tibie as an external tooth, for in the case of other species he
always does so count the apical projection. ;

L. rugosus, Macl. The presumable type of this species
is in the Macleay Museum, pinned into the label “rugosus,
S. Australia.” It is a female of the species mentioned above
as labelled in the same collection, “nzgrinus, Germ.” If it
should prove eventually that there is another species (not
known to me) which is the true nigrinus, the species I believe
to be nigrinus would, of course, have to bear the name
rUGOSUs.

FIFTEENTH GROUP (AA, B, C, D, EE, OF TABULATION).

Although this group is distinguished from the preced-
ing one by an apparently slight character (the elytra glabrous
or nearly so), its species differ very much in facies from all
oi the fourteenth group, except sylvicola, Burm. (Fab. ?), to
which latter they bear more resemblance of a general kind.

L. ferrugineus, Blanch. This is one of the most abundant
and widely distributed Liparetri. It is remarkable for the
pronotum of its male being entirely pilose, while that of the
female has only an apical (and, of course, a lateral) fringe
of hairs. Blanchard described a female; Macleay’s redes-
cription is a mixture of the two sexes. Both authors over-
looked the fringe of hairs on the front of the clypeus in the
female. I have examined the specimens in the Macleay Mu-
seum on which Macleay’s redescription was doubtless founded.

L. ubiquitosus, Macl. It is strange that this common
New South Wales /Lipuretrus should have remained undes-
cribed until Macleay published his monograph. Neverthe-
less, it certainly seems to have been unknown to the earlier
authors. Macleay is in error in attributing nine-jointed an-
tenne to it. It is rather near to ferrugineus, Blanch., but
easily distinguished by the very different sculpture of the cly-
peus in the male, the much more pilose pronotum of the
female, the different colouring, etc. I have examined the
presumable type in the Macleay Museum.

L, brunneipennis, Blackb. This name is a synonym of
ubiquitosus, Macl. At the time when I described the insect
I accepted Macleay’s statement that his species has _ nine-
jointed antenne.

L. rubicundus, Macl. Two (presumably including the
type) are pinned into the label ‘“‘rubrcwndus” in the Mac-
leay Museum. Their antenne have only eight joints, though
Macleay calls them nine-jointed.

L. propnquus, Macl. Two specimens (including the
presumable type) are pinned into the label “propinquus”’ in

315

the Macleay Museum. They have eight-jointed antenne.
This insect is, I have no doubt, the female of rubicundus,
Macl.

SIXTEENTH GROUP (AA, B, C, DD, OF TABULATION).

This group includes the species having eight-jointed an-
tennz, front tibie tridentate externally, and pronotum with-
out vestiture (unless along the lateral margins). The follow-
ing notes are on species appertaining to it: —

L. fallax, Blackb. This species is well distinguished from
atriceps, Macl., by the hind angles of its prothorax being dis-
tinctly defined. It also differs in colouring, its pronotum being
uniformly testaceous brown, while that of atriceps presents
the unusual character of being bicolorous (its front part
black). Its pronotum, moreover, is notably less convex longi-
tudinally, that of atriceps being exceptionally declivous im-
mediately in front of the base. Also, the general dorsal
sculpture of fallax is considerably finer and feebler than of
atriceps. The sexual characters in both species seem to be
slight, consisting in little more than an increased robustness
of the front tarsi in the male.

L. badius, Macl., is referred by its author to a section
of Liparetrus, to which he attributes nine-jointed antenne ;
the antenne nevertheless have only eight joints. I have ex-
amined the presumable type in the Macleay Museum. The
clypeus of that specimen is distinctly bisinuate (or obsoletely
tridentate) on its front margin, although that character is
not mentioned in the description. JI have examples before me
of a Liparetrus from Beverley, W.A., which J hesitate to rce-
gard as specifically distinct from badius; nevertheless the
front margin of its clypeus is more decidedly tridentate, its
colour notably paler testaceous, and the puncturation of its
elytra certainly finer and less close than in badius.

L. monticola, Macl. (? Fab.). In the Macleay Museum
two very much broken specimens are pinned into the label
bearing, ‘‘monticola, Fab.” They are examples of two dis-
tinct species, one that which elsewhere in the same museum
is labelled, “atriceps, Macl.,” the other superficially resem-
bling it, but different, inter ‘alia, by the finer and _ sparser
puncturation, and the well- defined hind angles of its pro-
notum. The latter is probably that on which Macleay’s des-
cription is founded, as that description calls the pronotum
“thinly punctate.” I can give no opinion as to Macleay’s
reason for the identification with monticola—which seems to
me doubtful in the extreme; out, as I am quite unable to
identify monticola myself, I see no objection to ailowing this
Species to stand as “monticola, Macl. (? Fab.)’’ provisionally.

316

L. atriceps, Macl. This is the species that I had formerly
supposed to be monticola, Macl. (and have probably so named,
for correspondents), on account of its having antenne with
only eight joints, whereas Macleay places atriceps in his sec-
tion of the genus with nine-jointed antenne. The presum-
able type is in the Macleay Museum bearing a label, “atr-
ceps, Macl.” I have mentioned others of its characters
(above), under L. fallax, Blackb.

L. micans, Macl. Placed by Macleay in his monograph
among the species with nine-jointed antenne. I examined
the presumable type, unique in the Macleay Museum, and
made the following note on it:—‘‘New to me. Antennz
eight-jointed. Near fal/ar, mihi, from which it differs, inter
alia, by its quite different colouring, 7.e., dorsal and under
surface entirely black except disc of elytra.”

SEVENTEENTH GROUP (AA, B, CC, OF TABULATION).

This group contains only one known species—L. criniger,
Macl.—easily recognised by its presenting the following char-
acters in combination: —Antenne eight-jointed, front tibie —
with three external teeth, basal joint of hind tarsi notably
longer than second joint.

L. perplexus, Blackb. ‘This name is a synonym of ZL.
criniger, Macl., to which its author incorrectly attributes
nine-jointed antenne; and, owing to that error, I failed to
discover the identity of the two until I recently found out
that Macleay’s characters are not reliable. I have examined
the presumable type, in the Macleay Museum.

EIGHTEENTH GROUP (AA, BB, OF TABULATION).

A small aggregate of species presenting the unusual com-
bination of eight-jointed antenne, with front tibie having
less than three external teeth.

L. levatus, Macl. Originally described by its author as
glaber (nom. prwocc.), ana placed in Macleay’s monograph
among the species with nine-jointed antenne. I have ex-
amined the presumable type, in the Australian Museum, and
find that its antenne have only eight joints.

L. parvulus, Macl. 1 nave examined the presumable
type, in the Australian Museum, and find (as Macleay says)
that the difference is only in colour, which is, no doubt, either
varietal or sexual. I unfortunately omitted to investigate
the sex of the types. Both are from Gayndah.

NINETEENTH GROUP (AAA, OF TABULATION),

Easily distinguishable from all the other groups by the
antenne of its species having only seven joints.

317

L. levis, Blanch. I have before me specimens from the
Swan River (Blanchard’s locality) of a species so satisfac-
torily agreeing with Blanchard’s description of this species in
every respect, except the number of joints in its antenne, that
I cannot escape the conclusion that that author was mistaken
in regard to its antenne, probably neglecting to examine the
antenne on account of the general resemblance of the insect
to other Liparetri, which have nine-jointed antenne. The
same species stands in the Australian Museum as L. /evis,
Blanch.

L. agrestis, Blackb. I regret to find that when I des-
cribed this species I counted the joints in its antennez incor-
rectly, and stated them as eight in number. ‘There was no
excuse for doing so (as the joints are evidently only seven).
No Liparetrus had been previously described as having seven-
jointed antennez, although several species, really having such
antennz, had been described erroneously. I remember think-
ing that only seven joints was an impossible number, and
persuading myself that I discerned a very minute additional
joint. In a memoir which I published in the following year
attention was first drawn to the existence of Liparetri hav-
ing antenne of only seven joints. Blanchard having attri-
buted nine-jointed antenne to nis 1. levis, I did not take
that species into account when I described agrestis, but I am
now of opinion that the two names represent only one species.

L. nigriceps, Macl. I think there is httle doubt of this
being the female of 1. /evis, Blanch. Macleay attributed
nine-jointed antenne to it. I have examined the presumable
type, in the Australian Museum, and find it to be—though
in very bad condition —certainly conspecific with specimens
in my own collection, whch I have long regarded as niqri-
cons, Mach and as the female of /@vs, Blanch.

LL. globulus, Macl. The presumable type is in the Mac-
leay Museum, and I nave examined it there.

Ts. tuberculatus, Lea. This species is practically unde-
scribed, the structure of the antenne not being referred to
except as involved in a reterence to Macleay’s grouping of
the genus, in which (as mentioned above) the antennal struc-
ture is about as often wrong as right. There is no reference
at all to the structure of the hind Tone As, however, there
happens to be one marked character of the insect mentioned
in the description, I have selected a /iparetrus presenting
that character (which, however, is probably sexual), to be
called ‘“‘tuberculatus, Lea (?%),” and have indicated its char-
acters by its place in the foregoing tabulation.

L. opacicollis, Macl. The presumable type in the Mac-
leay Museum has antennez of only seven joints. It is near

318

L. levis. Disregarding the difference in the vestiture of the
pronotum, it is, iter alia, a considerably larger insect.

L. squamiger, Macl. I have examined the presumable
type, which is in the Macleay Museum.

L. necessarius, sp. nov. Ovatus; minus nitidus ; totus cinereo-
pilosus, elytrorum pilis nigricantibus exceptis ; niger, an-
tennis (clava excepta) palpis et elytris (his ad basin an-
guste plus minusve nigricantibus) rufis, pedibus plus
minusve piceis vel rufescentibus ; antennis 9-articu-
latis; clypeo nitido fortiter minus crebre punctulato;
fronte crebre nec subtiliter rugulosa ; prothorace fortiter
transverso, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra sanalicu-
lato, fere ut frons sed paullo minus crebre punctulato,
lateribus sat arcuatis; elytris perspicue geminato-striatis,
interspatiis sat fortiter vix crebre punctulatis; propy-
gidio sparsius, pygidio magis crebre, rugulosis; tibiis
anticis extus tridentatis (dentibus intervallis subzequali-
bus divisis) ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basah quam
2"5 sat breviori.

Maris clypeo antice sat profunde emarginato (fere ut L. vello-
sicollis, Macl.), angulis sat acutis nec vel vix extrorsum
directis; tarsis anticis sat incrassatis.

Femine clypeo truncato vix emarginato, angulis sat rotun-
datis. Long., 3-4 1.; lat., 14-24
The characters indicated in the tabulation satisfactorily

distinguish this species from its allies; it is well, however, to

remark that it is apparently identical with all the specimens
pinned into the label “capillatus, Macl.,” in the Sydney Mu-
seums (so far as the bad condition of those specimens will
allow comparison) except the one male in the Macleay Mu-
seum, which is the presumable type, and which agrees well
with Macleay’s description. From that male it differs con-
siderably in vestiture, and also in the form of the clypeus,
which, in the present species, is strongly emarginate, and not-
ably less narrowed forward. It should be added that the
emargination of the clypeus, though quite strong, is very dif-
ferent from the profound excision of the clypeus of L. Ken-
nedyi, Macl. The notably darker colour of the pilosity of
the elytra in comparison with that of the pronotum is an
unusual character.

Western Australia (Perth, Mr. Lea).

L. distans, sp. nov. Ovalis; sat nitidus; supra sat glaber
(lateribus piloso-fimbriatis) ; subtus cinereo-pilosus ; fer-
rugineus, antennis pallidioribus (his 9-articulatis) ;
clypeo leviter sat grosse subsquamoso-punctulato, antice
3-vel 4-dentato; fronte sat quali, subtiliter cre-

319

berrime punctulata:; prothorace valde transverso, supra
vix manifeste canaliculato antice sat angustato, minus
crebre minus subtiliter punctulato, lateribus leviter arcu-
atis; elytris sat fortiter geminato-striatis, interstitiis sub-
fortiter minus crebre punctulatis ; propygidio pygidioque
coriaceis, illo vix perspicue punctulato, hoc puncturis
sparsis sat magnis minus fortiter impresso et apicem ver-
sus plis nonnullis vestito; tibiis amnticis extus 3-
dentatis (dentibus intervallis subaqualibus divisis) ; tar-
sorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2™ perspicue
(nec valde) breviori.

Maris abdomine toto longitudinaliter sulcato.

Fem. latet. Long., 5-54 1.; lat., 25-24 1.

One of the largest species in the genus, and with no near
ally among the previously described Liparetri. I have three
specimens before me (two of them belonging to Mr. Griffith),
which appear to be of one sex, and the peculiar concavity
running down the whole length of the ventral segments is
certainly indicative of their being males. In one example
the median projection of the clypeus is bifid, making the
front of the clypeus 4-dentate.

N.W. Australia.

L. lividipennis, sp. nov. Ovatus; sat nitidus; supra sat glaber
(fronte pilis erectis vestita, lateribus piloso-fimbriatis,
propygidio pygidioque setis crassis brevibus subsquami-
formibus vestitis); subtus cinereo-pilosus; niger, elytris
lividis margine obscuro anguste cinctis; antennis 9-
articulatis; clypeo antice truncato (angulis subrectis),
grosse squamoso-punctulato; fronte sat equali, crebre
subtiliter punctulata: prothorace fortiter transverso, vix
perspicue canaliculato, supra ut frons punctulato, antice
sat angustato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, pilis lateralibus
albidis; elytris vix fortiter geminato-striatis, inter-
spatiis sat fortiter minus crebre punctulatis; propygidio
crebre subtiliter, pygidio minus crebre minus subtiliter,
punctulatis; tibiis anticis extus leviter 3-dentatis
(dentibus intervallis subzqualibus divisis, dente summo
subobsoleto) ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam
2"s multo breviori.

Maris quam feminz antennarum flabello longiori, tarsis anti-
cis robustioribus. Long., 3-34 1.; lat., 2-211.

The uppermost tooth of the front tibie is very
feeble, and seems to indicate this as a transition form
leading on to the /7paretr? having less than three external
teeth. JI have two specimens before me, which I believe to
be male and female, as the antennal flabellum is distinctly

320

longer and the front tarsi more robust in one than in the
other. There is no marked difference between them im res-
pect of the clypeus.

South Australia.

L. incertus, sp. nov. Ovatus; sat nitidus; nonnihil irides-
cens ; supra sat glaber (lateribus piloso-fimbriatis, propy-
gidio pygidioque setis brevibus albidis adpressis ves-
titis), subtus cinereo pilosus: niger, nonnullorum exem-
plorum elytris plus minusve piceis vel rufis, antennis
(clava excepta), palpisque rufis, pedibus plus minusve
rufescentibus; antennis 9- articulatis ; clypeo modice
reflexo, nitido, sat grosse leviter squamoso-punctulato ;
fronte antice impressa, crebre punctulata ; prothorace for-
titer transverso, supra fortius sat crebre punctulato, sat
late leviter (basin versus sat fortiter) canaliculato, an-
tice fortiter angustato, lateribus arcuatis (ante basin sat
fortiter rotundato-dilatatis) ; elytris sat elongatis, sat for-
titer geminato-striatis, interspatiis sat fortiter sat crebre
punctulatis ; propygidio subtilius, pygidio magis fortiter,
punctulatis, ambobus plus minusve perspicue carinatis ;
tibiis anticis extus triaentatis (dentibus intervallis sub-
equalibus divisis); tarsorum posticorum articulo basali
quam 2" sat (nec valde) breviori.

Maris quam feminz antennarum ilabello sat longiori, tarsis
anticis multo robustioribus, clypeo antice magis truncato
et obsoletissime tridentato. Long., 35-341; lat., 2-23 1.
This species bears much resemblance to JL. picipennis,

Germ., from which, however, it may be at once separated by,

enter alia, the absence of any erect hairs on the front margin

of the pronotum, and the evident (though slight) tendency
to tridentation of the front margin of the clypeus in the
male. It seems to be a fairly common species in Victoria and

New South Wales (southern parts), so that it is difficult to

believe Sir W. Macleay had not seen it, but I conjecture that

he had not noticed its distinctions from picipennis. The
colour of the elytra is very variable, but whatever the colour

a slight iridescence seems to be constant.

Victoria and New South Wales.

L vicarius, Blackb. Ovatus; minus nitidus; niger, antennis
palpis pedibus elytris (et non-nullorum exemplorum
abdomine prothoraceque) rufescentibus; supra glaber ;
subtus pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo minus
crebre punctulato, antice late rotundato (vix subtrun-
cato); fronte crebre punctulata; prothorace fortiter
transverso, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra minus
crebre subtilius punctuiato, haud canaliculato, lateribus

321

sat arcuatis; elytris geminato-striatis, inter-spatiis sub-

fortiter sat crebre punctulatis; propygidio pygidioque

crebre sat fortiter punctulatis; tarsorum posticorum
articulo basali quam 2"* sat breviori; tibiis anticis extus
tridentatis (dentibus intervallis subzequalibus divisis).

Long., 3-33 1; lat., 14-2 1.

I think, from slight differences in the form of the abdo-
men, that 1 have both sexes of this species before me, but I
do not find any sexual characters in the clypeus or tarsi. This
insect is near incertus, Blackb, from which it differs, iter
alia, by the considerably less coarse puncturation of its elytra,
its non-canaliculate pronotum, and its front tarsi much shor-
ter than those of either sex of imcertus.

North Queensland. .

L. amabilis, sp. nov. Ovatus; parum nitidus; capite pro-
thorace sternisque nigris, elytris abdomine propygidio
pygidioque lete rufis, antennis palpis pedibusque ferrugi-
neis vel picescentibus; antennis 9-articulatis, stipite
brevissimo ; clypeo squamoso-punctulato, antice late sub-
truncato, cum fronte et pronoto (hoc basin’ versus
glabro) pilis erectis obscure brunneis (certo adspectu
nigricantibus) vestito; fronte sat equali, cum prothorace
crebre subrugulose punctulata; hoc fortiter transverso,
vix perspicue canaliculato, antice ‘fortater angustato,
Jateribus postice amphato-rotundatis antice sinuatis;
elytris minus fortiter geminato-striatis, interspatiis
leviter minus subtiliter punctulatis, glabris: propygidio
pygidioque pilis brevibus erectis albidis vestitis, hoc grosse
(illo sat fortiter) minus crebre punctulatis; corpore sub-
tus albido-piloso; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis (denti-
bus intervallis subequalibus divisis); tarsorum _posti-
corum articulis basalibus 2 inter se sat equalibus. Long.,
2£ 1. ; lat., 12 1.

A very distinct species by the structural characters indi-
cated in the tabulation : also by its colouring, which is a unt-
form bright red, except the black of the head, prothorax, and
sterna. It is one of the prettiest of the Liparetri. I think
the unique type to be a female.

New South Wales (Mulwala); sent by Mr. Sloane.

LZ. analis, Blackb.? (Mas.). Ovatus; sat nitidus; niger
elytris tarsisque obscure’ rufis, antennis (clava
picea excepta) palpisque testaceis, pedibus plus minusve
picescentibus: supra glaber (pronoto antice et ad latera
pilis fulvis elongatis fimbriato excepto); subtus pilosus;
antennis 9-articulatis, stipite perbrevi: clypeo antice

322

leviter emarginato sat fortiter reflexo ; fronte crebre sub-
tillus rugatim punctulata, antice impressa, postice

longitudinaliter nonnilil subcarinata: —prothorace
valde transverso, supra sparsius sat fortiter
punctulato, subiridescenti, leviter canaliculato,
antice sat angustato, lateribus sat arcuatis ;

elytris minus perspicue geminato-striatas, interspatus
fortiter sat crebre punctulatis ; propygidio subtiliter
minus crebre (prope apicem magis fortiter) punctulato,
longitudinaliter subcarinato; pygidio fortiter sat crebre
punctulato, antice longitudinaliter fortiter carinato ;
tiblis anticis extus tridentatis (dentibus intervallis sub-
equalbus divisis); tarsorum posticorum articulo basali
quam 2" parum breviori. Long., 3 l.; lat., 121

I have abstained from giving’ a ie name to this
insect, because, in view of the great sexual differences of some
Liparetri, and of the fact that the unique example described
above is a male, while the unique type of analis is a female,
I see nothing conclusive against their specific identity. The
two specimens differ greatly in colouring, and the pygidium
of analis is non-carinate. The hind tarsi of analis (type) have
only the basal joint, but it 1s quite like the basal joint of the
hind tarsi of the specimen described above. If further in-
vestigation should prove that the male described above is dis-
tinct from analis, it will be time then to give it a separate
name. The /abitat of the type of analis is uncertain. The
fact that the basal joint of the hind tarsi is a trifle shorter
than the second joint renders it desirable to compare it with
the species of the third group, from all of which its nitid pro-
notum bearing strong, decidedly sparse puncturation, in com-
bination with its colouring and smaller size, readily dis-
tinguishes it.

South Australia (Kangaroo Island). In 8.A. Museum.

L. consanguineus, sp. nov. Ovatus; sat nitidus; niger, supra
nonnihil ceeruleo-iridescens, antennis (clava picea excepta)
palpisque rufis, pedibus plus minusve picescentibus ; supra
sat glaber ; pronoti marginibus omnibus pilis brunneis
elongatis fimbriatis, propygidio pygidioque sparsim pilo-
SIS ; ‘subtus pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo an-
tice late rotundato vix subtruncato, leviter reflexo, crebre
subtilius sat profunde (nec squamose) punctulato ; fronte
sat equali, fere ut clypeus (sed antice magis subtiliter)
punctulata; prothorace valde transverso, supra (basin
versus) vix perspicue canaliculato, antice minus angus-
tato, leviter subtilius (in disco sparsim latera versus
magis crebre) punctulato, lateribus sat arcuatis; elytris

323

manifeste geminato-striatis, interspatiis fortius sat

erebre punetulatis ; propygidio pygidioque subopacis, illo

leviter sparsius, hoc magis crebre magis fortiter, punctu-
lato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis (dentibus ‘interval-
lis subequalibus divisis); tarsorum posticorum articulis

basalibus 2 sat equalibus. Long., 3? 1.; lat., 221.

A very broad species, bearing much superficial resem-
blance to several other species, from most of which it is dis-
tinguished by the vestiture of its pronotum, that segment
being glabrous except on the margins, which are fringed by
long, erect pilosity. As the basal joint of its hind tarsi is
possibly a trifle shorter than the second joint it seems desir-
able to indicate the characters that (apart from the hind
tarsi) distinguish it from those species of the third group
which are not very differently coloured. From all of them
known to me it differs, mmter alia, by the form of its clypeus
and the very much feebler and sparser puncturation of its
pronotum. The unique type is a male.

South Australia (Tintinarra): in S.A. Museum.

L. puer, sp nov. Ovatus; sat opacus: ee elytris (his
nonnihil iridescentibus) cum propygidio pygidioque
piceis vel rufescentibus, antennis (clava picea excepta)
palpis pedibusque ruts, elytris basin versus obscure
nigricantibus ; supra sat ‘glaber, sed capite piloso pronoti
marginibus omnibus pulls erectis perlongis fimbriatis
propygidio pygidioque sparsim pilosis; subtus pilosus:
antennis 9-articulatis (stipite perbrevi): clypeo antice
late rotundato (fere subtruncato), sat fortiter reflexo,
erebre subtiliter fere ut frons (hoc sat equali) punctu-
lato ; prothorace fortiter transverso, equali, subtilius sub-
obsolete punctulato, inter puncturas nonnihil ruguloso
vel subgranuloso, antice minus angustato, lateribus sat
arcuatis ; elytris manifeste geminato-striatis, interspatiis
fortiter (fere subgrosse) vix crebre punctulatis: propy-
gidio sat fortiter minus crebre punctuiato, sat nitido:
pygidio sparsius sat grosse punctulato, nitido: tibiis
anticis tridentatis (dentibus intervallis subeequalibus
divisis) ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2"
vix breviori.

Maris quam feminz antennarum flabello p: “le longiori, tar-
sis anticis longioribus et robustioribus: maris pygidio
TN aeDiSs has leviter (femine nullo modo) carinata.
Long., 22 1.; lat.. 12 1.

This very et Liparetrus seems not very close to any
other species known to me, and clearly distinct from all
-those described by Macleay. [ suspect that Macleay would

324

have placed it in the discipennis group near holosericeus,

Macl., which, however, he places in that group only with

doubt. H olosericeus is a larger insect, differently coloured,

and is glabrous above. It is, moreover, from a widely dis-
tant locality. It may be noted that there are a few hairs on
the disc of the pronotum of puer, but they are quite incon-
spicuous compared with the strong frill of long pilosity across
the front margin.

South Austraha (Eucla district).

L. Perkinsi, sp. nov. Ovatus; minus nitidus; niger, sat
iridescens ; elytris antennis palpisque rufo-testaceis, pedi-
bus plus minusve rufescentibus ; supra sat glaber, subtus
pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo antice dentibus
3 fortibus acutis recurvis armato, nitido, subsqua-
mose vix crebre punctulato, fronte coriacea crebre sub-
tiliter punctulata; prothorace fortiter transverso, vix
perspicue canaliculato, supra fere ut frons sed minus
crebre punctulato, antice fortiter angustato, lateribus
fortiter rotundatis; elytris subfortiter geminato-striatis,
interspatiis subfortiter vix crebre punctulatis; propy-
gidio pygidioque equalibus, equaliter ut frons sculptu-
ratis: tibiis anticis extus fortiter tridentatis (den-
tibus intervallis subzqualibus—sed superioribus 2 non-
nihil approximatis-—divisis) ; tarsorum posticorum arti-
culo basali quam 2's manifeste (vix multo) longiorti.
Long., 27-32.1.; lat., 12-121
The ce sinter of three sharp recurved teeth pro-

jecting from the front of the clypeus distinguishes this
species from nearly all its congeners. The two species to
which Macleay attributes that character have their head and
pronotum v.llose. I do not find any marked sexual charac-
ters in any of the eight specimens that I have seen of this
insect, though I think (from slight abdominal differences)
that both sexes are present.

North Queensland. (Sent by Mr. R. C. L. Perkins.)

L. alienus, sp. nov. EKlongato-ovatus: minus nitidus; niger,
antennis (clava picea excepta) palpis elytris pedibus
femineque abdomine rufis; supra totus (propygidio
pygidioque albido-pilosis exceptis) pilis sat elongatis
nigris erectis minus dense vestitus ; subtus cinereo-pilosus ;
antennis 9- articulatis; clypeo subnitido, squamose
punctulato, antice truncato (angulis obtusis); fronte
equali, ut pronotum coriacea sparsim sat grosse punctu-
lata; prothorace fortiter transverso, quali, antice sat
angustato, lateribus arcuatis; elytris sat elongatis, spar-
sim subseriatim subgrosse nec profunde punctulatis,

325

haud _ striatis; propygidio pygidioque subnitidis,

corlaceis, sparsius leviter subgrosse punctulatis; tibus

anticis extus bidentatis; tarsorum posticorum articulo
basali quam 2"° vix breviori.

Maris antennarum clava quam feminz manifeste longiori,
tarsis anticis paullo longioribus pygidio subtus producto
sic ut eran ventralia brevissima sunt in medio.
Long., 13-24 ].; lat., 1-141.

I am not sure that this species might not properly be re-
garded as the type of a new genus allied to Liparetrus. its
long elytra almost covering the propygidium in both sexes
and its depressed elongate appearance, together with its pecu-
har sculpture and vestiture, render it very isolated in this
genus. I cannot, however, discover any definite structural
character that is not paralleled in some unquestionable Lipare-
trus, unless it be the abdominal character of the male /7.¢.,
the pygidium folded under so as to narrow, as if crowded toge-
ther, the ventral segments on the middle line). This, how-
ever, does not seem sufficient to justify the creation of a new
genus. It should be noted that in both sexes the front tarsi
are remarkably short, being (even in the male) less than half
as long as the hind tarsi: and that the erect hairs on the
elytra are disposed in longitudinal rows.

Western Australia. | S3everley; Mr Lea.)

L. rotundicollis, sp. nov. Sat breviter ovatus ; minus nitidus ;
niger vel piceo-niger, iridescens, antennis palpiisq ue
rufis, pedibus (et nonnullorum exemplorum pygidio) plus
minusve rufescentibus ; totus cinereo-pilosus (capite pro-
notoque fulvo-pilosis exceptis): antennis 9-articulatis ;
clypeo nitido, crebre subgranulatim punctulato, antice
truncato ; fronte sat equali fere ut clypeus punctulata ;
prothorace fortiter transverso, antice sat angustato,
equali, supra confertim subtiliter ruguloso, lateribus for-
titer rotundatis; elytris obsolete geminato-striatis, inter-
spatiis crebre fortius punctulatis ; propygidio pygidiogue
fortiter crebrius punctulatis; tibiis anticis extus biden-
tatis (dente superiori subobsoleto) ; tarsorum posticorum
articulis basalibus 2 sat squalibus inter se. Long.,
24-34 1.; lat., 12-12 1.

I have seen two specimens of this insect, and do not find
any defined sexual characters among them. They are pro-
bably females, and it is not unlikely. that the male has some
distinctive character in the ventral segments and clypeus.
The species described above is very different from all its
allies (inter alia, by the very close, strong, subrugulose punc-
turation of its elytra, and its colouring), and may safely be

326

described without the knowledge of both sexes. It is not un-

like LZ. nudipennis, Germ., superficially, but is very distinct

from that species by, inter alia, the pilosity of its elytra
South Australia.

L. ventralis, sp. nov. (Mas.). Breviter ovatus; sat opacus ;
niger, antennis palpis elytris (his anguste nigrocinctis)
tibiis anticis tarsisque omnibus brunneo-testaceis: totus
albido-pilosus: antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo nitido
minus crebre, fronte sat crebre, rugulosis; prothorace
fortiter transverso, antice sat angustato, supra minus
crebre punctulato, vix ruguloso, haud canaliculato,
lateribus sat rotundatis: elytris vix perspicue geminato-
striatis, interspatiis leviter minus subtiliter punctu-
latis ; propygidio leviter sat crebre, pygidio sat profunde
minus crebre, punctulatis ; tarsorum posticorum articulo
basali quam 2's dimidia parte longiori; tibls anti-
cis unidentatis: segmento ventrali apicali antice longt-
tudinaliter obtuse bicarinato, ad apicem deorsum acute
bispinoso.. Long., 24 L.; lat., 121
This species differs from all the others described, of the

same group, by its combination of bicolorous elytra, front

tibie without any trace of an external tooth above the api-
cal projection, and hind tarsi with basal joint much longer
than the second joint. It is rather close to L. assimalis,

Macl., from which (I have examined the presumable type,

unique, in the Macleay Museum) it differs by the uniform

whitish colour of its vestiture, ass¢milis having much very
dark brown pilosity, as well as by the much longer basal joint
of its hind tarsi.

North Queensland.

L. gravidus, sp. nov. Sat late ovatus; minus nitidus; niger,
antennis palpis, elytris (his obscuro- cinctis) et (pilus
minusve) pedibus testaceis vel ferr ugineis ; capite, pronoto
elytris (basin versus), propygidio pygidioque (hoe cum
propygidio etiam setis aapressis albidis vestito) pulis
brunneis vestitis: corpore subtus cinereo-piloso : antennis
9-articulatis; clypeo antice truncato, cum fronte (hac
sat equali) pronotoque crebre ruguloso; prothorace for-
titer transverso, supra obsolete canaliculato, antice for-
titer angustato, lateribus arcuatis: elytris obsolete gemi-
nato-striatis, interspatiis leviter nec crebre punctulatis ;
propygidio pygidioque confertim subtiliter rugulosis;
tibiis anticis extus bidentatis ; tarsorum posticorum arti-
culis basalibus 2 inter se sat equalibus.

Maris clypeo quam femine magis elongato magis abrupte
truncato, antennarum flabello paullo hale ae anti-
cis multo longioribus. Long., 4-44 1.; lat., 23-22 1.

297

Rather closely allied to L. /uridipennis, Macl., but lar-
ger and differently coloured (the elytra more terruginous, and
with a better defined, dark bordering), the upper tooth of the
front tibiz much stronger, and (especially) the basal region
of the elytra pilose.

Western Australia (Swan River); Mr Lea.

L. eimetipennis, sp. nov. Breviter ovatus; minus nitidus ;
niger, antennis (clava picea excepta) palpis et elytris
(marginibus late nigris exceptis) ferrugineis, pedibus

lus minusve picescentibus : supra sat glaber, pronoto
antice et ad latera piloso-fimbriato, propyg sidio pygidioque
setis adpressis albidis vestitis ; subtus cinereo- pilosus ; an-
tennis 9-articulatis: clypeo antice truncato, cum fronte

(hac sat zqual1) pronotoque confertim subtiliter ruguloso ;

prothorace fortiter trausverso, equali, antice sat fortiter

angustato, lateribus arcuatis: elytris obsolete geminato-
striatis, interspatis leviter nec crebre punctulatis ; pro-
pygidio pygidioque crebre sat subtiliter rugulosis; tibus
anticis extus bidentatis (dente superiori minuto vel sub-

obsoleto) ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basal quam 2"

vix longiorl.

Maris quam femine clypeo magis abrupte truncato, anten-
narum flabello parum longiori, tarsis anticis paullo ro-
bustioribus. Long., 3 LL: lat., 2 1.

Easily distinguishable from L. Juridipennis, Macl., and
gravidus, Blackb., by, inter alia, the non-pilose disc of its
pronotum and the deep biack, much wider, and more sharply
defined bordering of its elytra.

Western Australia (Perth)

L. minor, sp. nov. (Mas.)—Ovatus : minus nitidus ; piceus, v1x
rufescens, clypeo antennis (clava picea excepta) palpis
pedibus elytrisque testaceo-brunneis:; supra glaber ; sub-
tus sparsim pilosus: antennis 9- articulatis : clypeo
nitido sparsim punctulato, antice tridentato (dente
mediano sat acuto): fronte crebre subtiliter subaspere
punctulata, sat aequali : prothorace sat fortiter transverso,
antice fortiter angustato, supra subtilius sparsim leviter
punctulato, postice obsolete impresso, lateribus
sat fortiter rotundatis: elytris obsolete geminato-
striatis interspatiis sparsius sat fortiter punctulatis;
propygidio pygidioque crebre punctulatis; tibiis anticis
extus, l-dentatis; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali
quam 2" manifeste breviori. Long., 2 1.; lat, 121.

The clypeus of the female 1s probably ee strongly tri-
dentate than that of the male, but in the male the mecian
tooth is so well defined that it ic not likely to be unrepre-

328

sented in the female. The front tibiz have no distinct tooth
(scarcely even an inequality) above the apical projection. All
the species placed by Macleay among those having the clypeus
tridentate in the male and which bear any superficial resem-
blance to this insect, have the basal joint of their hind tarsi
louger than the second joint. It should be noted that al-
though in my unique example of this insect the propygidium
and pygidium are glabrous, I judge from the nature of the
sculpture and the analogy of allied species that those parts
‘are probably abraded, and that in a fresh specimen they
might bear some sparse vestiture.
Queensland ; Port Mackay (Mr. Lower).

L. brevipes, sp. nov., fem. Breviter ovatus; subnitidus ;
brunneo-testaceus, antennarum clava capiteque piceo-
nigris, prothorace testaceo-rufo; supra glaber; subtus
cinereo-pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis: clypeo antice
rotundato, ut frons (nac sat equali) transversim crebre
ruguloso ; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice sat angus-
tato, supra obsolete canaliculato, subtilius sat crebre
punctulato, lateribus arcuatis: clytris sat fortiter gemt-
nato-striatis, interspatiis sat fortiter vix crebre punctu-
latis; propygidio pygidioque fortiter sat crebre punctu-
latis; tibiis anticis extus 1-dentatis; tarsis brevibus,
posticorum articulo basali quam 2" parum_ breviori.
hones 225 Hatin ale
An exceptionally wide species, and with unusually short

‘tarsi. It is not very close to any other species known to me

except the next species to be described (1. Blanchardi, sp. n.),

but bears considerable superficial resemblance to L. letus,

Blackb., which, however, infer alia, has antennz consisting

of only eight joints, and front tibiz conspicuously bidentate

externally.
Western Australia (Perth).

L. Blanchardi, sp. nov., fem. Sat breviter ovatus; minus
nitidus; brunneo-testaceus, fronte et (angustissime)
elytrorum basi nigris, sterno paullo infuscato ; supra fere
glaber (pygidio sparsius brevissime villoso); subtus
cinereo-pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo nitido
leviter squamose punctulato, antice subtruncato (latissime
rotundato): fronte sat quali, subtilius minus crebre
punctulata; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice for-
titer angustato, supra postice vix manifeste canaliculato,
sat crebre minus subtiliter punctulato, lateribus fortiter
rotundatis; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, interspatiis
sat fortiter sat crebre punctulatis: propygidio pygidioque
crebre minus fortiter punctulatis: tibiis anticis extus

329

l-dentatis; tarsis modice elongatis, posticorum arti-

culis basalibus inter se sat equalibus. Long., 2 1.; lat,,.

121).

Somewhat closely allied to the preceding. Disregarding
the somewhat considerable differences in colouring, it differs,
inter alia, by the sculpture of its head, the much more
strongly rounded sides of its pronotum, and its considerably
longer tarsi.

Queensland (Port Mackay).

L. Leai, sp. nov. Ovatus; minus nitidus; niger, antennis
(clava excepta) palpis et elytris (his anguste piceo-
cinctis) brunneo-testaceis, pedibus picescentibus; supra
fere glaber, propygidio pygidioque setis adpressis albidis
vestitis; subtus cinereo-pilosus; antennis 9-articulatis ;
celypeo (ut frons, hac sat equali) transversim ruguloso,
antice subtruncato ; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice
angustato, supra postice vix canaliculato, leviter sat
crebre vix subtiliter punctulato, lateribus arcuatis ;
elytris leviter geminato-striatis, interspatiis sat fortiter
vix crebre punctulatis; propygidio pygidioque sat crebre
sat fortiter (hoc quam ille magis fortiter) punctulatis ;
tibiis anticis extus l1-dentatis: tarsorum posticorum
articulis basalibus 2 inter se sat equalibus. Long.,
oe labes 1;

I believe that both sexes of this species are before me;
if so the sexual characters are slight, consisting in a slight
additional robustness in the front tarsi (and especially the
front claws) of the male. It is possible, however that the speci-
men I regard as the female may be a somewhat feebly de-
veloped male. This species bears much superficial resemblance
to L. ovatus, Macl., but differs, enter alia, by its front tibize
having no external tooth above the apical projection and its
pronotum having no dorsal channel except a faint impression
close to the base (which is entirely wanting in very few
Liparetri).

Western Australia; Perth (from Mr. Lea).

L. rugatus, sp. nov., fem. Late ovatus; minus nitidus;
niger, antennis (clava obscura excepta) palpis elytris (his
basin versus nigricantibus) abdomineque obscure rufis,
pedibus picescentibus ; supra in pronoto propygidio pygi-
dioqgue pilis erectis vestitus: subtus cinereo-pilosus ;
antennis §8-articulatis: clypeo crebre sat fortiter
punctulato, antice truncato, fronte sat squali, fere ut
clypeus punctulata ; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice
sat angustato, supra zquali, inequaliter (prope apicem
et basin fere ut frons, in disco magis grosse minus crebre)

330

punctulato, lateribus arcuatis; elytris vix mantfeste
geminato-striatis, interspatiis fortiter crebre subrugulose
punctulatis transversim rugatis; tibiis anticis extus
3-dentatis (dentibus intervallis subqualibus divisis) ;
tarsorum posticorum articulis basalibus 2 inter se sat
sequalibus. Long., 3} 1.; lat., 23 1

This species is evidently allied to L. ferrugineus, Blanch.,
from which it is easily distinguishable by, inter alia, the much
closer and stronger puncturation of its elytra, and the very
evidently greater length of the basal joint of its hind tarsi.

North Queensland.

L. insolitus, sp. nov. Ovatus; vix nitidus; niger, antennis
(clava excepta) palpis, elytrisque (his ad basin anguste
nigricantibus) ferrugineis, pedibus et nonnullorum
exemplorum pygidio picescentibus; supra (elytris—nis1
ad basin summam—-capiteque exceptis) pilis erectis fulvis
vestitus; subtus cinereo-pilosus; antennis 7-articu-
latis; clypeo sat subtiliter subsquamose punctulato ;
fronte leviter inzquali, quam clypeus magis_ subtiliter
magis crebre vix squamose punctulata: prothorace for-
titer transverso, antice fortiter angustato, supra minus
perspicue canaliculato, subgrosse nec profunde vix crebre
punctulato, lateribus modice arcuatis; elytris sat fortiter
geminato-striatis, interspatus sat fortiter sat crebre punc-
tulatis; tarsorum posticorum articulo basal quam 2™
parum breviori: tibiis anticis extus tridentatis.

Maris clypeo antice abrupte truncato (fere subemargi-
nato); tarsis anticis sat elongatis: propygidio sparsim
dupliciter (subtiliter et subfortiter), pygidio magis for-
titer magis crebre, punctulatis.

Femine clypeo antice minus abrupte truncato, tarsis anticis
brevioribus, propygidio pygidioque confertim rugulosis.
Long., 34-41; lat., 2-24 1.

This species may be described as superficially a close ally
of L. phenicopterus, Germ., having antennz consisting of
only seven joints. No other known to me of the species with
similar antennz (seven-jointed) bears the least resemblance
to it.

Western Australia: Swan River (Mr. Lea).

MICROTHOPUS.

I diagnosed the genus JMacleayia in Tr.R.S.S.A., 1887,
and in the same volume added a note as to the possibility of
its identity with Burmeister’s genus Microthopus. Since that
time I have had the opportunity of examining large numbers
of Liparetroid Coleoptera, from Western Australia, and as T

ool

have not met. with any insect more likely to be Muicrothopus,
I have recently reconsidered the question of the identity with
it of Macleayia, and am now of opinion that the two genera
cannot be separated. The discrepancy between Macleayia
and the diagnosis of Microthopus consists in the flabellum of
the antenne of the male of Macleayia being five-jointed,
while it is said to be three-jointed in Microthopus. The ex-
treme variability of the antennal structure, however, among
many Australian Me/o/onthides that seem to present no other
difference likely to be generic, seems to forbid the acceptance
of that as a valid generic character. Indeed, having now seen
what I believe to be the male of my J/. hybrida (the second
species that I attributed to Macleayia), | am fairly confident
that in that insect the flabellum of both sexes is three-
jointed. Therefore, I do not regard Macleayia as more than
a subgenus of Microthopus, containing only one described
species (singularis, Blackb.), while two described species (hy-
brida, Blackb., ard castanopterus, Burm.), are of Micro-
thopus in the strict sense. It is even possible that hybrida is
a variety of castanopterus, as there does not seem to be any
good character to separate them, apart from colour: but it
would not be safe to pronounce them specifically identical
without examining a specimen agreeing in all respects with
Burmeister’s description.

Burmeister distinguishes J/icrothopus from Liparetrus
by characters that are quite insufficient now that the species
of the latter genus have been found to be so numerous and
varied in structure, viz., its more elongate elytra and less
convex pygidium. It is well differentiated, however, by a
character that I have already referred to (Tr.R.S.8.A.,
1898, p. 31), as of great value for the generic distribution of
the Australian Melolonthides, viz., the sculpture of the elytra,
which in Microthopus (but in no Liparetrus known to me),
consists of well-defined, uniform striation.

AUTOMOLUS.

In Tr.R.8.S.A., 1898, p. 31, I suggested the possibility
of the species on which this Tasmanian genus was founded
being congeneric with some of those of which Macleay formed
his second section of Liparetrus. I am now, after a much
more extensive study of Liparetroid Lamellicornes, very con-
fident that my conjecture was correct. As is so frequently
the case in respect of the JMe/olonthides of Australia, the
genera involved in this discussion have been rendered more
difficult to identify by the absence of knowledge, on the part
of their founders, of the extreme variability of the antennz
of the insects in question. Burmeister gives “nine-jointed

332

antenne” as a generic character of Automolus, and Macleay
makes ‘“antenne eight-jointed” the essential character of his
second section of Liparetrus. As I have already remarked,
authors have so obviously been in the habit of assuming it un-
necessary to count the joints carefully in more than one of an
aggregate (of Australian Melolonthides) of evidently closely
allied species, that there is no reason whatever for deciding
against the identity of two generic names merely because the
insects they are applied to have antenne differing in the
number of joints And, in the case of the species under discus-
sion, the further consideration must not be overlooked that
they have antenne of which the stipes is extremely short and
difficult to examine. In the present case the really reliable
distinction of most of the species included by Macleay in his
second section of Liparetrus from all of those which he places
in the first section is to be found in the structure of the front
tibie—which have two adjacent external teeth close to the
apex, and one (a very small one) close to the base (the mar-
gin of the tibize between them being straight or all but
straight)—a structure which I have seen in no Liparetroid
species that is not obviously a close ally of these insects (e.g.,
Automolus (Liparetrus) poverus, Blanch.). That structure
is assigned by Burmeister to the front tibie of Awtomolus:
ana the assignment to it of nine-jointed antenne need occa-
sion no difficulty in associating it with species having
similar tibial structure and eight-jointed antenne, because on
the one hand Burmeister might be almost excusable if he
miscounted the joints of such obscure antenne, and, on the
other hand, at least one of the species before me with the
tibial structure indicated above, has nine-jointed antenne.

As regards Burmeister’s species (A. angustulus), the
description is in general certainly suggestive of my Auto-
molus (Liparetrus) alpicola. T am, however, contident in
saying that the antennz of the latter have only eight joints,
and [ have not met with it, nor seen it, from Tasmania.
These considerations combined lead me to the opinion that
A. angustulus, Burm., is a species that I have not seen, and
which has not been redesc1ibed by any author. TI regard
Automolus as a valid genus.

333

ABSTRACT OF PROCKEDINGS

OF THE

Royal Society of South Australia

(Incorporated)

FoR 1904-5.

DDL LYVEF DADA AAO OWAP™>LPWWOOPFP_™lLLPO9mPWI™OUWI™P*

ORDINARY MrETING, NovEMBER 1, 1904.

THe Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the
chair.

ExuHipits.—A. H. C. Zretz, F.L.S., C.M.Z.8S., a large
number of the preserved skins of the Australian honey-eaters.
The PRESIDENT exhibited three volutes from the lobster pots,
Victor Harbour, the markings beautifully preserved, named
respectively Voluta exoptanda, V. papillosa, V. fulgetrum.
These shells had been taken into the pots by the later occu-
piers—hermit crabs—in search of food.

Papers.—‘‘New Species of South Austrahan Marine
Mollusca,” by J.C. Verco, M.bD., F.R.C.S. Dr. VERco, in
introducing his paper, called the attention of the meeting to
some interesting features in some of the molluscs therein
described, the Glycimeris sordidus, the shell of which shows
periods of rest, which are not found in its very near ally, G.
pectenordes. In this latter shell, in the older stages, growth
ceases, and the mantle contracts. J/odiola penetecta, almost
covered with epidermis, whilst J/. australis is much less so.
In these species a very marked difference exists in the fila-
ments of the epidermis. ‘l'rigonia bednalli, probably a variety
of margaritacea, a genus now found only in Australian seas,
but remarkable as found fossil from very early geological
ages. Dr. VeErco also drew attention to very marked differ-
ences between Ovula, of which a very fine specimen was shown,
and Cyprea.

OrDINARY MEETING, APRIL 4, 1905.

THe Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the
chair.

NominatTion.—Dovueitas Mawson, B.Sc., B.E., Lecturer
in Mineralogy and Petrology in the University of Adelaide,
as a Fellow.

Exuisits.—A. H. C. Zretz, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., exhibited
a number of flies collected near Adelaide, all well-known

304

European species, including the European blowfly (Jfusca
vomitoria). This is the first record of this species for Aus-
tralia. J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., gave an interesting ac-
count of the growth, development, and nature of the gadfly,
and exhibited a very prolific plant of the Umbelliferous order,
probably Ferula, growing near Adelaide. ,
Parers.—‘“‘An Outline of a Theory of the Genesis of
Motion in Living Bodies,” by T. BrarLsrorD ROBERTSON, 1n-
troduced by Professor E. C. Stirtine, F.R.S. “On the For-
mation known as Glacial Till of Cambrian Age in South Aus-
tralia,” by J. D. Inirre, B.Sc.,and HErBert Basepow. “New
Species of South Australian Marine Mollusca” (part 2), by J.
C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S. ‘Additions to the Cambrian Fauna
of South Australia,’ by R. Erueripce, sun., Hon. Fel-
low. ‘South Australian Nudibranchs and an Enumeration
of the known Australian Species,’ by HERBERT Basepow and
Cuar.es Hepiey, F.L.S. ‘On the Naticoid Genera, Lamel-
laria, and Caledoniella, from South Australia, ” by HERBERT
Basepow. “Report on the Mollusca collected by Herbert
Basedow, on the S.A. Government N.W. Expedition, 1903,”
by CHartes Hepiey, F.L.S. ‘Description of New Australian
Lepidoptera,” by Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S. (Lond.).

OrpDINARY MEETING, May 2, 1905.

THe Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the
chair.

Ba.ttot.—Dovucias Mawson, B.Sc., B.E., Lecturer in
Mineralogy and Petrology in the University of Adelaide, was.
elected a Fellow.

NoMINATIONS.—GEORGE BrookmMan, Gentleman, as a Fel-
low; Cuartes Hepiey, F.L.S., and Tuomas Guu, I.8.0.,
Under-Treasurer, as Hon. Members. G. M. Tuomson,,
F.L.S., F.C.S., as a Corresponding Member

Exuipits.—Mr. Epwin Asusy, bird skins from Kan-
garoo Island. Amongst these may be mentioned Calypto-
rhyncus viridis (Viell), Leach’s cockatoo and egg, the red-
rumped ground wren (Hylacola cauta) (Gould), Ptilotis era-
titia, P. lencotis, Meliornis australasiana, M. nove hollandia,
Acanthorhynchus tenwrostris, Glycyphila fulvifrons, all
honey-eaters ; Strepera melanoptera, Platycereus elegans, and
others. The absence of several species of birds, found in
Southern Yorke Peninsula, from Kangaroo Island, and the
presence of others, unknown in the vicinity of Adelaide, but
common to the Victorian side, would, according to Mr. Ashby,
seem to indicate that the last connection of the island with
the mainland was at its eastern end. Mr. Zrerz. F.L.S.,
C.M.Z.S., male and female of the king quail (#xcalfactoria

335

australis), from near Victor Harbour, and, for comparison
with Mr. Ashby’s specimens, ('alyptorhynchus mnaso, cock
and hen and two eggs, from MacDonnell Ranges, also C.
furnereus and C(. banks. Mr. J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., ex-
hibited tsetse flies.

Mr. Howcurn, F.G.8., then opened the discussion on
Messrs. Iliffe and Basedow’s paper on the Cambrian glaciation
in South Australia. In a carefully considered address he
showed that the beds in question had no resemblance to a
crush conglomerate, as advocated by the essayists, but that
they answered in every particular to a glacial till laid down
by floating ice. The paper was a crude attempt to explain
phenomena with which the writers had insufficient acquaint-
ance. Mr. D. Mawson, B.Sc., B.E., in supporting Mr. How-
chin, said that from a petrological examination of these rocks
there was no evidence in support of the theory of their being
crush conglomerates produced by cataclastic action.

Papers.—‘“‘South Australian Decapod Crustaceans,”
part 2, by W. H. Baxer. “Description of Vertebre of Geny-
ornis newtont,” being part 3 of “Memoirs on Fossil Remains
of Lake Callabonna,”’ by PRorressor E. C. Srrrumnc, M.D.,
Bns...and oA. —i. C. Zitz, .L.S., .C.M.Z.8.

OrDINARY MEETING, JUNE 6, 1905.

THe Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the
chair.) )

NominatTion.—Dr. Rogers, M.A., as a Fellow.

Battot.—The following were elected: —GrorcE Broox-
MAN, Gentleman, of North Gilberton, as a Fellow; CHARLES
H. Hepuey, F.L.S., Naturalist, Australian Museum, Sydney ;
and Tuomas Giz, I.S.0., Under-Treasurer, as Hon. Mem-
bers; and G. M. Tuomson, F.L.S., F.C.S., Chemist and Bac-
teriologist, Dunedin, New Zealand, as a Corresponding Mem-
ber.

Exuipits.—A. H. C. Zirrz, Assistant Director of the
Museum, a very large and beautiful collection of Australian
finches’ skins. Mr. Zrerz described the birds, their nests, and
also mentioned the parts of Australia in whicu the various
species were found.

Papers.—‘‘An Aroid New for Australia,” by J. H. Mar-
DEN, F.L.S., Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. ‘“Fur-
ther Researches on the Alpha Rays of Radium,” by Prorss-
sor W. H. Braee, M.A.

ORDINARY MEETING, JULY 4, 19085.
THE Presipent (J.C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the

chair.

336

Battor.—Dr. R. S. Rogers, M.A., Adelaide, was elected
a Fellow.

Exuisits.—Dr. Verco, several specimens of Atlanta, and
one of Carinaria australis (Quoy & Gaimard), which add two
species, two genera, and a new order to the Nucleobranchiata
of South Australia. Gibbula cori (Angas) and G@. lehmanny
(Menke), which had hitherto been confounded. Astele sub-
granularis (Danker). This, which had been described from
Bass’s Straits, is a half-grown individual of 4. swhcarimatum
(Swanson). Several examples of Crassutellites ponderosa
(Gmelin), hitherto known as (’. castanea, of Reeve, to illus-
trate differences of shape and weight and colouration. J. G.
O. Tepper, F.L.S., described a new species of mantis.
(Fischeria quinquelobatus), captured during the N.W. Go-
vernment expedition, and Phasmides, Lonchodes caurus,
Cry ptocrania cornuta, Acrophylla nubilosa, A. paula, Necrosia@
bella, and Bacillus peristhenella, all taken in the same expedi-
tion. Dovetas Mawson, B.Sc., B.E., then gave an address.
on “Theories of the Earth’s Origin.”’ Introducing the subject,
Mr. Mawson stated that the harmonies of the solar system
proclaim for the individual planets a common origin. Theories
dealing with the past history of our own planet must, there-
fore, relate to the others, so that it 1s necessary, at the outset,
to be thoroughly acquainted with cosmical geology in all its
aspects. To this end the physics of the solar system, toge-
ther with a brief description of the constituent factors, was.
then shortly summarised. The nebular theory was pro-
pounded by Kant, and given mathematical form by Laplace
in his ““Mechanique Celeste,” over a century ago. The origi-
nal theory was later strenuously upheld by Herbert Spencer
and John Fiske, whose logic failed to disclose its several in-
accuracies. This theory traces the beginning and develop-
ment of the solar system from an original gaseous nebula,
an exceedingly tenuous and intensely heated cloud of matter
extending in a spheroidal form, beyond the orbit of Neptune,
the outermost planet. Of late years such serious objections:
have been raised to this theory, that it has been generally dis-
credited. Sir Norman Lockyer, in 1890, brought forward
his meteoric hypothesis. Reasoning from his extensive inves-
tigations in spectrum analysis, he states his views as fol-
lows: —“Nebule are really swarms of meteorites, or meteoric
dust in the celestial spaces. The meteorites are sparse, and
the collisions among them bring about a rise of temperature
sufficient to render luminous their chief constituents.” Pro-
fessor Chamberlin, of the University of Chicago, has, dur-
ing the last five or six years, propounded a theory to explain
the development of the heavenly bodies depending upon

337

mechanical principles essentially different from those embodied
in previous arguments. He explains his ‘‘planetesimal hypo-
thesis,’ as he calls it, in the following terms:—‘“The pre-
vailing form of the smaller nebulous areas of the heavens is
a spiral, in most of which two arms are discernible. Such a
form would be developed from any nebulous body were ano-
ther of sufficient mass to pass close to it, in the way that,
say, comets sweep around the sun. It is further thought that
the gaseous matter of the arms formed by such a disruptive
approach would solidify into tiny planetesimals, which, in
course of time, becoming concentrated by their mutual at-
tractive forces, would produce relatively large masses of mat-
ter (the planets), whirling in the same direction, around the
parent body (the sun).” Mr. Mawson then shortly referred
to some of the leading points of difference in the geological
development of an earth, built up, after the “planetesimal
hypothesis,” of aggregations of cold particles, and not origi-
nally intensely heated, as required by the nebular hypothesis.

OrpDinaRY MEETING, AucustT 1, 1905.

THE PrREesipeENtT (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the
chair.

Exuipits.—A. H. C. Ziztz, F.L.S., C.M.Z.8., a block
of opal of a variety known as ‘pineapple opal,” from its
shape. Unlike ordinary opal it is composed of large crystals.
The specimen was found at the White Cliffs opal fields. The
mineralogist of the Australian Museum, in Sydney, de-
clared this variety to be a pseudomorph after Glauberite.
He also exhibited another mineral of very similar structure,
which has not yet been analysed. This was found at the
Blinman Mine, embedded in clay. Mr. Z1erz also exhibited two
British slugs, found in an Adelaide garden, Limaz arborum,
which in England lives in birch trees, and Limasz gagatus.
The PRESIDENT, several molluscs, illustrating the change of
form in the same species as it passes through the four stages
of growth—embryonic, adolescent, mature, and the senile.
Latirus aurantiacus, gradually developing in weight, in the
rudeness of the nodules, and in the size and cave-like appear-

ance of the perforation. Voluta adcocki (Tate), in which,
at a certain stage of growth, a change took place
in the colour pattern. A Brachites, from Port Lincoln, in

which the minute valves of the embryo gradually open out and
become connected by shelly matter, in the form of a large,
tapering tube, resembling coral. Dr. Verco stated that a
protoconch, found alone, had been described as a separate
genus /Sinusigera), but when older specimens were collected
it was shown to be a Purpura; also that in some species the

338

protoconch was sinistral, while later developed portions of
the shell were dextral.

Parer.—‘‘Description of New Australian Lepidoptera,”
by Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S., Lond.

ANNUAL MEETING, OcTOBER 3, 1905.

The President (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.8.), im the
chair.

The annual report and balance sheet .were read and
adopted. a

ELECTION oF OrFricersS.—J.C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S., as
President ; Professor E. H. Rennie, D.Sc., F.C.S., and Rev.
Thomas Blackburn, B.A., as Vice-Presidents; Walter Rutt,
C.E., as Hon. Treasurer.

ELECTION OF MEMBERS OF CounciL.—Dr. Cleland and W.
B. Poole.

ELEcTION or Aupirors.-—J. 8. Lloyd and David Fleming.

Papers.—‘“On the Recombination of Ions in Air and
other Gases,” by Professor W. H. Bracc, M.A. ‘‘Notes on
Some Decapod Crustacee”’ (No. ITI.), by “*V. H. Baxer. ‘‘Des-
cription of Australian Curculionide, with Notes on Previously
Described Species (Part III.), Subfamily Otiorhynchides,” by
ArtTHurR M. Lea. “Description of a New Species of Mantidz
and of Six New Species of Phasmide, collected in the North-
West Region of South Australia,” by J. G. O. Teppsr,
F.L.S. “Further Notes on the Australian Coleoptera,’”’ by
Rev. THomas Buackpurn, B.A.

1904-5.

CUNEATE a

The Council has to report that the work of the Society in
the various departments of science has been maintained. The
following papers have been read or laid on the table: —New
Species of South Australian Marine Mollusca,” by J. C.
Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S8., parts ii. and iii. “ Additions to the Cam-
brian Fauna of South Australia,” by Robert Etheridge. ‘ An
Outline of a Theory of the Genesis of Motion in Living Bodies,”
by T. Brailsford Robertson. ‘On the Formation known as
the Beds of Glacial Till of Cambrian Age in South Australia ”
by J. D. Iliffe, B.Sc., and Herbert Basedow. ‘South Aus-
tralian Nudibranchs and an Enumeration of the Known Aus-
tralian Species,” by Herbert Basedow and Charles Hedley,
F.L.S. “On Naticoid Genera, Lamellaria, and Caledoniella,
from South Australia,” by Herbert Basedow. “Report on
the Mollusca collected by Herbert Basedow, on the S.A. Go-

339

vernment N.W. Expedition, 1903,” by Charles Hedley,
F.L.S. “South Australian Decapod Crustaceans,” parts 11. and
iii., by W. H. Baker. ‘Description of Vertebre of Genyornis
Newtoni, being part iii. of Memoirs on Fossil Remains from
Lake Callabonna,” by Professor E. C. Stirling, M.D., F.R.S.,
CeORG..) andl Avec 'C. “Zaebz. C.MAZ.S,° FLL: “An
Aroid New for Australia,’ by J. H. Maiden.
“Further Researches on the Alpha Rays of Radium,” by Pro-
fessor W. H. Bragg, M.A. ‘Description of New Australian
Lepidoptera, with Synonymic Notes, No. xxiii.,” by Oswald
Lower, F.E.S. (Lond.). “On the Recombination of Ions in
Air and other Gases,” by Professor W. H. Bragg, M.A. “De-
scription of Australian Curculionide, with Notes on Pre-
viously Described Species, part iii., Subfamily Otiorhynchides,”
by A. M. Lea. “Descriptions of New Species of Mantide,
and of Six New Species of Phasmidz, collected in the N.W.
Regions of South Australia by H. Basedow,” by J. G. O. Tep-
per, F.L.S. ‘Further Notes on the Australian Coleoptera,”
No. xxxv., by the Rev. Thomas Blackburn, B.A.

Among the new periodicals received this year the fol-
lowing are, perhaps, worthy of mention:—The Maryland
Geological Survey, Report of the South African Association
for the Advancement of Science, and the Journal of the Na-
tional Museum, Monte Video. _

The publications of this Society are well distributed
throughout the civilised world. Exchanges are made with 25
learned Societies in the United Kingdom, with 52 in Europe,
33 in the U.S. of America, 7 in Canada, 5 in South and
Central America, and 6 in India, Japan, and the Pacific.
Some 15 or 20 more of the publications are sent to the other
States of the Commonwealth and New Zealand.’

The Society now includes 12 honorary and 9 correspend-
ing members, 65 fellows, and 2 associates.

For some time past the financial position of the Society
has been far from satisfactory. Actuated by a desire to help
us out of our difficulties, the President (Dr. Verco) has very
kindly offered to give £1,000 towards the formation of an en-
dowment fund, provided that the additional sum of £2,000
shail be first obtained elsewhere. The Council hopes that
some help will be forthcoming to enable the Society to take
advantage of this most generous offer.

The space reserved for books and literature in our present
quarters is hopelessly inadequate. The Government has re-
cently been approached with a view of securing better accom-
modation in this respect for the Royal and other local Socie-
ties. It is hoped that something may shortly be done in this
matter.

- "GOBL ‘T 10497990 ‘oprepepy
2 ‘ONINGITY GIAVG
SOUPRY Y yegey-T a ‘dxA0TT ‘S ‘ff ‘LOINSBOLY, “LLOY WALTV AL
is *QO@1.100_ dot diel hale spe PERE ee oes og & ai ie : = ee
tT 9 &Igs T 9 else
Lo S00 a oo? :
Tt sce. spuvy S,leinsBory, UT Olle qseloquyT yuvg ,,
0 F 681 GO6L ‘OG tequie4 (0) TLL 4% SUOTJOVSUBIT, JO v[Vg ,,
-deg ‘yueVq sdeUuTAvg uy Gar) 006 = =
—oouRleg ,, 0 0 OST vIpBiysny YyINog
QO 36 senbeyg uo e6ULYOXY ,, UL SUOTZVSIYSOAUT IYIZUOTOG
5 ius me SUISTLIOAPY —,, uo sylodey suljulig 07
9 OL OL AT@UOTY 6 FL9¢. suorzdrtiosqng uC
-w1G pues ‘eseqsog ‘SUTIJULIg ,, —SQUBINQH JUSTITLIOAON ,,
oO OG eas "* JOYV{IVO—SOSVM ,, O..6 =i SSS
wee ea S~ 0 0 6 SUOPOBSUCL Teorey
Op. 29 UO0TJDOQ [VoTdoosO.1II “snr 104 ‘queuueg “ff “AW
0: Oe FE UOIQEG [VOTSOpOOK[VI, 0: 20e 2 S: SUOTPOVSURIT, 94¥19
0 0 OL °° WOTQDEG ,S4STTRIN{VN Ppl] “Sn 0% ‘mopeseg “H ‘AN
HRI) 5) Oso" Olle SUOIJOVSUBLT,
GC wor ae ayerysnyt oF “Oo10A “AC
(ay EEF i SUIZVIYSNITT —SUOIZVUOG ,,
agiesr SUIQULI | Or gieg9 =
—SIIOWOTT ,, 9 B19 WOIpSG [vordooso1OIfy
L $k Cts 9 LI 0 UoTp~eS eolsoTooR]e
8 PF OL Suryst[qud 0 ¢ ge * Agetoog jekoy
0 ST OSI SUTZVIYSN][T —suorjdiiosqng ,,
Fi Ot 1e--' SuyuLtd 9 PI 66 “= = UME OF,
—suorporsuvily, Ag ‘POGT “IST 1040790
‘pgs ops 8 oe Ee) ‘9 os Soe Sp"? FF Iq

(CaLVUOdYOONT) VITVULSAV

HLAOS AO ALHIOOS IVAOU AHL ALIA

INQOO0V NI ATUASVOUL THI

341

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY
For YEAR 1904-5.

TRANSACTIONS, JOURNALS, REPORTS, Erc.

Presented by the respective Editors, Societies, and
Governments.

AUSTRIA AND GERMANY.

Berlin—Konigl. Preuss. Meteor. Instits. Bericht, 1903. Ver-
Offentlichungen der Ergebnisse, 1899, Heft. Do.
do., der Niederschlags-Beobachtungen, M. and J.
U., 1898. Abhandlungen der... Band 2, Nos.
3, 4.
——— KoOnigl. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Ber-
lin. Sitzungsberichte, 1903, Nos. 19-40; 1904,
Nos. 25-55
——— Deutsches Meteorologisches Jahrbuch, 1903, Heft. 2.
——— Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthrop. Ethnol. und Ur-
geschichte, Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie—Jahr-
gang, 35, Heft. 6; do., 36, Heft. 3, 4
——— Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde, Zeitschrift der, 1902, No.
9); 1903; Nose lo38,° 9) 10);51904,) Nos..1-S,, 10°;
£905 Nossche2:
Fribourg—Berichte der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu
Fribourg, Band 40.
Gottingen—Konigl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu
Gottingen Math. Phys. Klasse, 1904, Heft. 1, 2,
4, 6; 1905, Heft. 3; do. do., Geschaftliche
Mittheilungen, 1904, Heft 2: 1905, Heft. 1.
—-—-—-— Nachrichten von der Konigl. Gesellschaft der
Wissen. und der Georg., August, 1904, Heft.
3, 4, 5.

Heidelberg—Berichte uber Land—und Forstwirtschaft in
Deutschostafrika, Band 2, Heft. 4.
Kiel-—-Schriften Naturwissenschaften Vereins fiir Schleswig-

Holstein, Band 1-12.
Miinchen—Sitzungsberichte der K.B. Akademie der Wis-
senschaften zu Miinchen, Math. Phys. Klasse,
1905, Heft. 1. Abhandlungen der do. do.,
Band 22, Abteil. 1, 2.
Niirnberg—Abhandlungen Naturhistorischen Gesellschaft zu
Niirnberg, Band 15, Heft. 2.

342

Vienna—Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien
Sitzung, der Math. Naturwiss., 1904, Nos. 10-13,
19-24 ; 1905, Nos. 1-10, 15-17.

——— Do. do., Anzeiger Math. Naturwiss., Nos. 25-27,
1904 ; 1903, Nos. 2, 3; 1904, Nos. 2-15; 1905, Nos.
1, 2, 6-9, Jahrgang, 1904.

——-— Arbeiten des K.K. Gradmessungs Bureau-Astron.,
Band 13.

——— K. KoOniglichen Zool.-Botanischen ‘Gesellschaft in
Wien, 1903, Band 53, Heft. 1-10.

—-—— Annalen K.K. Naturhistorischen Hofmuseums, Band
18, Nos: 2.,o545; band 19. Nos.d. 22,3.
Wiirzburg—Sitzungs.-Berichte Physikalisch—Medicinischen

Gesellschaft zu Wiirzburg, 1904, Nos. 1-10.

AUSTRALIA AND NEw ZEALAND.

Adelaide—Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery, Annual
Report, 1903-4.
——-— Woods and Forest Department, Annual Progress Re-
port, 1903-4.
——-— Royal Geographical Society, Proceedings, 1903-4,
vol. vil.
——— Adelaide Observatory, Meteorological Observations,
1899, 1900, and 1901.
——— Department of Mines, Supplement, 1905; Review
half-year ending December, 1904.
Brisbane—Royal Society of Queensland, Proceedings,
vol. xviii.
——— Department of Agriculture, Botany Bulletin, No. 16.
Department of Mines. Geol. Survey Report. Map No.
lo’, Reports Nos. 184-195.
——— Department of Public Lands, North Queensland
Ethnography, Bulletin No. 7, 1904.
——— Queensland Museum, Annals, No. 6.
Geelong—Geelong Naturalist, Proceedings, Second Series,
vol.'a., Nos. 2,,-4. .
Melbourne—Victoria Department of Agriculture, Journal,
vol. 11., parts 2, 4, 7, 10; vol. ili., parts 1-5.
———— Australasian Institute of Mining Engineers, Trans-
actions, vol. x.
———— Royal Society of Victoria, Proceedings, vol. xvii.,
parts 1, 2.
——-—— Maines and Water Supply, Secretary’s Annual Re-
port, 1903.
——-——— Department of Mines, Geological Survey, Bulletin,
Nos. 14, 15, 17. Memoirs, vol. i., part 3.

343

Melbourne— Victorian Yearbook, 1903.

—_——— Victorian Geographical Journal, vol. xxu., 1904.

————— Victorian Naturalist, vol. xx., Nos. 5, 6; vol. xxi.,

Nosnayts 6,9; 10, T2svol> xxi. Noel, 2.

Hobart—Department of Mines, Progress Keport, 1904.

Perth—Department of Mines, Report, 1903, 1904.

——— Geological Survey, Bulletin, Nos. 11-20.

——— W.A. Mining Industry, Standard, 8/12/04.

Sydney—Department of Mines and Agriculture, Geol. Sur-
vey, Monograph No. 13; Memoirs, vol. vii., part
4, etc.; Records, vol. vil., part 4 and Map; vol.
vill., part 1, 1904.

——— Agricultural Gazette, vol. xv., parts 5, 9, 11, 12, and
index; volwxvi; parts«b, 2, 3,)4, 5 6)°8; 9; 10:

——— University Calendar, 1905.

——-— Botanic Gardens.

——w— Linnean Society, vol. xxix., No. 115; vol. xxx., Nos.
117, 118, Supplement, and Rules.

——— Australian Museum, Nests and Eggs of Birds Breed-
ing in Australia, Cat. 1, vol. 1.

——— Records do. do., vol. v., No. 5; vol. vi., part 1.

——— Forest Flora of New South Wales, vol. ii., parts 2,
554, 90:

——— Fisheries of New South Wales, Report of Commis-
sioners, No. u., 1902.

——— Rabbit Pest: Its Cause and Cure, by W. Rodier.

——-— Naturalists’ Club, Memoirs, Synopsis of Fisheries of
New South Wales, Nos. 1 and 2.

——_— Atoll of Funafuti, Meteorological Observations, Sec-
tion 2.

Wellington—New Zealand Mines Department, Annual Re-
port, Nos. xxxvi. and xxxvil.
Dunedin—Australasian Association for the Advancement of

Science, vol. x., 1904.

BELGIUM AND HOLLAND.

Brussels—Société Royale Zoologique Malacologique de Bel-
gique, Annales de la, tomes 37 and 38.

——— Société d’Etudes Coloniales, Bulletin, First Year,
No. 12, December, 1904.

——— Musée Royal d’histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Extrait
des Mémoires, tome 2, 1903.

—-—— Société Entomologique de Belgique, tomes, 46 and 47.

Liege—Société Royale des Sciences, Memoires, tome 5.

Batavia—Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereenigen in Nederl.-

India, Tijdschrift, D. 63.

344

CANADA.

Montreal—Canadian Record of Science.
Ottawa—Geological Survey, Annual Report., vol. xill., with

maps.
——— Paleontology, vol. i1., part 3.
——— Department of the Interior, Altitudes.
Toronto—Canadian Institute, Transactions, vol. vii., part 3..

ENGLAND, IRELAND, AND SCOTLAND.

London—British Museum, Catalogue of Lepidoptera, vols..
iv. and v. and plates. Guide Books. Gallery of
Birds, Fossils, etc. Natural History, Birds,
vol. iv.

——— Chemical Society, Journal, Nos. 503-510, 513; Pro-
ceedings, vol. xx., Nos. 274, 283-287; vol. xx1.,.
Nos. 287, 288, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294.

——— Conchology Society, Journal, vol. 11., Nos. 4, 5, 6.

——_— Entomological Society of London, Transactions,
1904.

—— — Royal Colonial Institute, Proceedings, vol. xxxv.

——w— Linnean Society of London, Proceedings, 1904, List
of Members, 1904-5.

——— National Physical Laboratory, Report, 1903, 1904,
Collected Researches, vol. 1.

——— Royal Society of Lonaon, Biological Science, Series
B; <vol., xxvi.,..No.; 507.» Yearbook, ,1904, 19052
Mathematical and Physical Sciences, Series A, vol.
Lxxaiity No.) 494.;. vol.~lxxwi.,,No.1A,:'507: . nee
ceedings, vol. Ixxn., No. 479; vol. Ixxui., No.
495 ; vol. Ixxiv., No. 497, 498, 499, 500, 501, 502,
503, 504, 505, 506. Obituary Notices, October,
1904. Evolution Committee Report, No. 4.
Sleeping Sickness Commission, Report, Nos. v.
and vi.

——— Royal Geographical Society, Journal, vol. xxiv.,
No. 3

——— Royal Microscopical Society, Journal, 1904, parts 5
and 6; 1905, parts 1, 2, 3.
Liverpool—Biological Society, Proceedings and Transactions,

vol. xviii.
Manchester—Geological Society, Transactions, vol. xxv., parts
13, 14, 15.

———-—- Literary and Philosophical Society, Memoirs,
vol. xxv. ; Proceedings, vol. xlix., parts 1, 2, 3.

———-—~— Field Naturalists’ and Archzologists’ Society,.
Report and Proceedings, 1904.

345

‘Sunderland—West Hendon House Observatory, Variable
Stars, No. 3.

Edinburgh—Royal Physical Society, Proceedings, vol. xv1.,
pages 1-48. Sessions, 1903-4 ; 1904-5.

Belfast—Natural History and Philosophical Society, Proceed-

ings, Sessions 1903-4. a

Cambridge—Philosophical Society, Proceedings, vol. x1iL,
parts 1, 2.

Dublin—Royal Irish Academy, Proceedings, vol. xxv., See-
tion A, Nos. 1, 2, 3; Section B, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 6;
Section C, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11. Transactions, vol.
XXxll., part 6, Section A, part 1, Section C.

——— Royal Dublin Society, Economic Proceedings, vol. i.,
part 5; Scientific Proceedings, vol. x., part 2;
Transactions, vol. vili., parts 6-16. Index, vol. ix.,
part 1.

FRANCE.

Caen—Société Linnéene de Normandie, Bulletin, Series 5,
vol vile, £90s:

Nantes—Société des Sciences Naturelles de lVouest de ia
France, Bulletin, tome 3, Series 2; tome 4, 1 2,
trim.

Paris—Notes sur les Fourmis et les Guepes, Charles Janet ;
pacts?s, LOR A tons is, Dy 23:

——— Société Entomologique de France, Bulletin, 1904, Nos.
OG Oe Loner LO ei Lore ks 20. eo es
1905) Nos. 124." 5.6. 03. 4.

——— Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes, Nos. 405-408, 410-

414.

——— Direction de Agriculture, Bulletin No. 12, Decem-
ber, 1904.

Rennes—l’Université de Rennes, Travaux Scientifiques, tome
3, 1904.

ITALY.
Florence—Nocieta Entomologica Italiana, Bulletino xxxvi.,
tremestri 1, 2, 3.
Milan—Societa Italiana Geografiche e Commerciali, Bollet-
tino, Anno. xix., face. 17, 18.
——-— Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali e del Museo Civico
di Storia Naturale in Milano, vol. xliti., fase. 3,
foglio 8#, fasc. 4, foglio 9; vol. xliv., fase. 1,
foglio 54.
Palermo—Italia Scienze Naturali e Economiche, Giornale,
vol. xxiv., 1904.
Pisa—Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali Atti della Processi
Verbali, vol. xiii., part 5; Memorie, vol. xx.;
vol. xiv., Nos. 3-4.

346

INDIA.

Calcutta—Indian Museum, Annual Report, 1903-4. Investi-
gator Dredging, Decapod Crustacean, part 2;
Deep Sea Holothurioidea.

Madras—Government Museum Bulletin, vol. v., No. 1.

JAPAN.

Tokyo—Asiatic Society of Japan, Transactions, vol. xxxlii.,.
art 1.

——— Tahal University of Tokyo, College of Science,
Journal, ‘vol,’ xiv. ; ‘vol! xvii., art./14°5 vol. xvi
art. (3,8 Vol: xix, ‘art, 1, 84,6045, 14, dee
LP ORS, 19s volo mex. arto, 4

Kyoto—Imperial University. College of Science and Engi-
neering, vol 1., No. 2.

Tokyo—Seismological Society, Earthquake Investigation Com-
mittee, Pubs. Nos. 17, 18, 19, 20.

MEXxIco.

Mexico—lInstituto Geologico de México Parergones, tomo 1,
INGSS 35 4,40., 105 ods

——— Sociedad Cientifica, Memorias y revista, tomo 13,
Nos. 7, 8; tomo 18, No. 6; tomo 19, Nos. 5-12;
tomo 20, Nos. 1-12, and calendar.

NoRWAY AND SWEDEN.

Stockholm—Sweden, 1904.

———-— Entomologisk Tidskritt, arg. 25, heft. 1-4.

———— Geologiska Foreningens Forhandlingar Tjugotredje-
Bandet, 26, 1904.

——-—— Antikvarisk Tidskrift for Sverigi, vol. xvii., No. 3.

Christiania—Norske Gradmaalings, Kommission, heft. 6.

———— Den Norsko Lind sygelovgivning, Foreloesninger
Norwegischen Meteor Instituts, Jahrbuch,
1900-3.

Bergens—Museums, Aarsberetning, 1903.

ee Aarbog, 1903, Hefte. 2; 1904, Hefte. 1.

Upsala—Nova Acta Regie Societatis Scientiarum Upsalli-

enpis,. VOl.oxXks42.

Stavanger—Museum, Aarshefte, 1902, 13de aar, 1903, 14th

aar.
RUSSIA.

Kiew—Société des Naturalistes, Memoires, tome 19.

Moscow—Société Impériale des Naturalistes, Memoires, tome
16, liv. 3, 4; Bulletin, Nos. 3, 4, 1901; No. 4,
1903.5, 1904, 12, '3,.4.

347

$t. Petersburg—Société Impériale Mineralogique Verhand-
lungen, band. 41, D. Lisb.; Second Series,
band. 22.

— Comité Geologique, Memoirs, vol. xiii., No. 4,
et dern.; vol. xix., No. 2, et dern. Bulle-
tins, vol. xxi1., Nos. 1, 3, 5-10.

+ Russisch, Kaiserlichen Mineralogischen (Ge-
sellschaft, Verhandlungen, band. 22, 1.

5 Académie Impériale des Sciences, Memoires,
vol. xiil., No. 6; vol. xiv., Nos. 1-4, 6-10;
woh omy. ./Nog, TSP vol xvi. Nos. 1, 2, 3.

SWITZERLAND.

Geneva—Société de Physique et de Histoire Naturelle,
Compte-rendu des Seances, xxi., 1904.

Lausanne—Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles Bulle-
tin, vol. xxxvill., No. 144; vol. xxxix. No. 148;
VOleaxls. Nas. FOO alo

‘Neuchatel—Société Neuchateloise des Sciences Naturelles
Bulletin, vol. xxviu., 1900.

SouTH AND CENTRAL AMERICA.
Lima—Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru, Boletin,
Nos. 2, 5, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19.
Monte Video—-Museo Nacional Anales 2 Entrega, tomo 2
(continued) ; Hist. Phil., tomo 1, tomo 4.
Rio Janeiro—Observatorio do., Boletin Mensal, Jan. a Set-
embro, de 1904; Annerario, 1904.
Sao pease do Museu Paulista Publicada, vol. vi.,
1904.

me Revista da Sociedade Scientifica de Sao Paulo,
No.1. dunho;.. 1905:

SoutH AFRICA.

Albany—Museum, Records, vol. 1., parts 3, 4.

Cape Town—South African Association for. the Advance-
ment of Science, Report, 1904.

Se South African Philosophical Society, Transac-
tions, vol. xv., parts 2, 3, 4; vol. xvi., parts
1, vol. xii.

—-~- South African Museum, Aunals, vol. iii., parts
G 738..9.5 wololv.; part 6:

Natal—South African Surveyor-General’s Department, Re-

port 2.

348

UNITED STATES oF AMERICA.

Boston—Society of Natural History, Memoirs, vol v., Nos.
10,115 vol. vi., No. 1; Proceedings, : voll xxmie
INOS! Ree noe OO. 1.
———— American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Pro-
ceedings, vol. xxxix., Nos. 5-21, 24; vol. xl.,
Nos. 1-11, 15-17.
Berkeley—University of California Publications, Botany,.
vol. i., pp. 165-418, parts 17-27; vol. ii., pp.
1-90. Zoology, vol. i, No. 3, pp. 115-156,
parts 12-13, No. 8, pp. 269-286, parts 24, 25;
vol. u1., Nos., 1,..2,,pp. 1-51, part 15 volam
No. 3, pp. 51-112, parts 2, 3.
Baltimore—John Hopkins University, Maryland Geol.
Survey, Miocene, text and plates; Circulars,
1904, Nos. 2, 3, .9,. 7, 83, 1905, No. 1) bistosy
and Political Science Studies, Series 22, Nos.
io12 <don 2a. NOs. 2:
———— American Chemical Journal, vol. xxix., Nos. 3-6;
vol. xxx., Nos. 1-6; vol. ‘xxxi., Nos: 1-6% uel
xxxii.. Nos; 16> vol._xxxin.,. Nas. 12:
Cambridge—Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Col-
lege, the Report, 1903-4; Bulletin Geol.
Series, vol. vi., Nos. 4 and 6; Bulletins, vol.
xhi.; vol. xliv;;, vol. xly.,.,No. 4; ,voljaiane
Nos. 2, 3, 4; vol. xlvii.
Chicago—Field Columbian Museum, Report, vol. u., No. 3;
Zoological Series, vol. 111., Nos. 12-16; vol. iv.,
Nos. 1, 2; Botanical Series, vol. i1., Nose2.
Geological Series, vol. 11., No. 5; Anthropological
Series, vol. ii., No. 6; vol. 1., No. 4; yolafig
V., ovis Nor S vol? yin, No. ML:
——_—— University of Chicago, President’s Report, Publi-
cations of Members.
Champaign—Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History,
Bulletin, vol. 1., No. 3; vol. vi. and index;
vol. vii., Nos. 1-3.
Granville—Scientific Laboratories, Denison University Bulle-
tin; ;-vol.. x1, Nos.7o. 10, 11, and adem
Indianapolis—Indiana Academy of Science, Proceedings,
1902-3.
Lawrence—Kansas University, Science Bulletin, vol. ii,
Nos: 129 >) vol ive Naes
Massachusetts—Tufts College Studies, No. 8.
New York—Public Library, Bulletin, vol. vii., No. 9; vol.
yili2)) Nos. 5, 9-12; vol. 1x., Nosvd-4.

349

New York—-Experimental Medicine, the Rockefeller Institute
for Medical Research, sample copy, vol. vi..,

Nonaie
—- ++ ae eae Museum, Journal, vol. 1., Nos. 1-12;
VOMMial NOS. u1s9et voll ainsi Nos. 1-5; vol. 19

Nos i aaenvolt y.. Nos. |e Aa

———-—-— American Museum of Nakteal History, Bulletin,
VOIR. SOX VONR Va RVs RVI, IK. | Rosie
Memoirs, “oll dai, part 3; Geol. Fossily, vol.
1, parts 1-8; Whole Series, vol. 1i., part 2;
vol. iv., parts 1-4; vol. v., parts 1, 2; vol.
vi.; vol. vil., part 1. Annual Report of Pre-
sident, 1893-1902, 1903. Guide Leaflets, Nos.
3, 9, 12. Memoirs, Anthropology, vol. 11.,
FOpevOl ile aru Ll

——_——_ —__— Academy of Sciences, Annals, vol. xiv., parts 3,
4; vol. xv., parts 2, 3; vol. xvi., part 1. Me
mois, Vole dl. part 4, 1905.

——_ —___.__ American Mathematical Society, Transactions.
vols. 1.-v., 1900-4, index.

————— American Geographical Society, Bulletin, vol.
xxx view (Nios a'Q:

Brooklyn—Cold Spring Harbour Monographs, Nos. 1, 2, 3.

——-—— The Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and

Science, volaie, Nos. [13 5.6,

Oberlin—Wilson Bulletin, Oberlin College Library, Nos. 47,

48, 49.

Philadelphia—Zoological Society, Annual Report, No. 33.

ss ee Academy of Natural Sciences, Proceedings, vol.
liv., part 1; vol. ly., parts 2, 3; vol. lvi., parts
Dear

a American. Philosophical Society, Proceedings,
vol. oxcliten Now li45- volescta., Nos. £75, 176,
177, 178; Transactions, vol. xxi., new series,
part 1.

Sacramento—University of California, Pubs. College of Agri-
culture, Bulletin, Nos. 162/3/4: Twenty-
second Annual Report.

San Francisco—Californian Academy of Science, Memoirs,

vol. iv., T. and Index, vol. 1c: Occasional
Papers, Constitution, and By-laws: Math.
Phys. Proceedings, Third Series, vol. i.,
No. 8: Geology, ae e 1., No. 10; Botany,
vol. n., Novi 2. and Index, vols. 1. and
u., Zoology, vol. i., Nos. 7-13; Title and
Index, vols. i. and 11.

350

St. Louis—Botanical Gardens. Annual Report, No. 15, 1903.
——-—-— The Academy of Science, vol. x11., Nos. 9, 10: vol.
xili., Nos. 1-9; vol. xiv., Nos. 1-6.
Washington—Smithsonian Institution, United States Na-

tional Museum, Bulletins Nos. 50, part. 3,
No. 52; Proceedings, vol. xxvii.; Contribu-
tions, C.N.H., vol. 9; Annual Report, 1902 ;
Annual Report of Board of Regents, 1903.
———— —— Academy of Sciences, Proceedings, vol. vi.,
pp. 1-481.
———--—-— Carnegie Institution, Yearbook, No. 2. 1903.
ee United States Geological Survey, Directors’
Annual Report, Department of the Interior,
Twenty-fourth Annual Report: Mono-
graphs, vols. xlv. and. xlvi.; Mineral Re-
sources, 1902-3 ; Professional Papers, Series
Hi, Forestry, 230; 231. 232: Series "Beam
D, Underground Water, No. 17; Series
C, Systematic Geology and Paleontology,
Nos. 16 ana 19; Series D, E, No. 18: Series
A; B, Geology, Nos. 11,12, 20,21), 22
26, 27; Department of the Interior, Bulle-
tin, Nos. 208, 218-242, 244-246, 248-250,
252, 253, 255, 258-261, 264; Water Supply
and Irrigation Papers, Nos 88-118.
———--—— Department of Agriculture, Yearbook, 1904.
Urbana—Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History,
Bulletin No 7, article 4.

351

LIST OF FRELLOWS, MEMBERS,

ETC.,

OCTOBER, 1905.

Those marked (Lt) are Life Mellows. Those marked with an
asterisk have contributed papers published in the Saciety’s
Transactions.

Any change in the address should be notified to the Secretary.
Date of Honorary FELLOWS.
Election.

1893. *Cossman, M., Rue de Maubeuge,, 95, Paris.

1897. *Davip, T. W. Epcrwortn, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., Prof.
Geol., Sydney University.

1888. *DENNANT, JOHN, I*.G.8S., F.C.S., Inspector of Schools, Cam-
berwell, Victoria.

i876. Hriery, R. L. J., F.R.S., U.R.A.S.,. Gov: Astron., the
Observatory, Meibourne, Victoria.

1890, “HTHERIDGE, Rosert, Director of the Australian Museum of
New South Wales, Sydney.

1905. Gitt, THomas, 1.S.0., Under-Treasurer, Adelaide.

1893. Grecorto, Marquis pr. Palermo, Sicily.

1905. “Hepiey, Cuas. H., Naturalist, Australian Museum, Syd-
ney.

1855. Hurt, H. M., Hobart, Tasmania.

1892. *Matpen, J. H., F.L.8., F.C.S., Director Botanic Gardens,
Sydney, New South Wales.

1898. “Meyrick, EK. T., B.A., Elmswood, Marlborough, Wilts,
England.

18/6. Russert, H. C., B.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Gov. Astron.,
Sydney, New South Wales

1894. *Witson, J. T., M.D., Prof. of Anatomy, Sydney University.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.
1881. Baier, F. M., F.L.S., Colonial Botanist, Brisbane,
Queensland.
1881..*Croup, T. C., F.C.S., London, England.
1880. *ForLscuE, Paut, Inspector of Police, Palmerston, N.T.
1893. “McKitLop, Rev. Davin, Daly River Mission, N.T.
1886. Nicotay, Rev. C. G., Fremantle, W.A.
1885. “Srirtine, James, Meivourne, Victoria.
1893. StTRETton, W. G., Palmerston, N.T.
1905. Tuomson, G. M., F.L.S., F.C.S., Dunedin, New Zealand.

I ELLOWS.
1895. *AsHBY, KpwiIn, Royal Exchange, Adelaide.
1902. *Baker, W. H., Glen Osmond road, Parkside.
1901. *Basepow, HeErRBeErT, Kent Town.
1887. *BLackBuRN, Rev. Tuomas, B.A., Woodville.
1886. *Brace, W. H., M.A., Prof. of Mathematics, University of
Adelaide, S.A.
1905. BrookmMan, Grorer, North Gilberton.
1883. “Brown, H. Y. L., ¥.G.S., Gov. Geologist, Adelaide.

1882.

1899.
1893.
1904.
1904.
1879.

1895.
1876.
1887.
1902.
1886.
1904.
1904,
1880.

1896.
1904.
1896.
1899.

1891.
1883.
1902.

1893.
1902.
LOOOYs*
1898.
S97:
1884.

1856.
1888.
1905.
1874.
1897.
1884.
1859.
1883.
1886.
1904.

1885.

1905.
1869.
1891.
1893.
1857.
1900.

1871.

352

Browne, L. G., Davenport Chambers, Currie street, Ade
laide, S.A.
Browne, T. L., Marlborough Chambers, Adelaide.

BRuMMITT, RoBERT, M.R.C.S., Gilberton.

BRUNSKILL, Gxorge, Rotorua, Auckland, New Zealand.

CHRISTIE, Wainer, Adelaide.

*CLELAND, W. L., M.B., Ch.M., J.P., Colonial Surgeon,
Resident ‘Medical’ Officer Parkside Lunatic Asylum, Lee-
turer in Materia Medica, University of Adelaide.

CLELAND, JoHN B., M.D. Adelaide.

(L) Cooxn, EBenezer, Commissioner of Audit, Adelaide.

*DIXON, SAMUEL, Bath street, New Glenelg.

Epavist, A. G., Hindmarsh.
Fiemine, Davin, Barnard street, North Adelaide.
GARTRELD JA8s., Burnside.

GORDON, Davin, Gawler place, Adelaide.

*Goxnne, Grorexr, A.M., F.C. S. ., Analyst and Assayer, Ade-
laide.

GREENWAY, THos. J., Adelaide.

GRIFFITH, aa Hurtle square, Adelaide.

HAWKER, W., F.C.S., Adelaide.

*HIGGIN, s ie, Assistant Lecturer on Chemistry, University
of Adelaide.

aa Maovrice, F.L.S. Director Botanic Gardens, Ade-
aide.

*Howcnin, WALTER, F.G.S., Lecturer on Geology and
Paleontology, University, Adelaide.

IL1iFFE, JAS. DRiInKWATER, B.Sc., Prince Alfred College,
Kent Town.

JAMES, THomas, M.R.C.S., Moonta,

_JEFFREYS, GEO., Gilbert Place, Adelaide.

* JOHNOOCK, Cuas. F. , Morphett Vale.

" Kocn, Max, Port Pirie.

*Lea, A. M., Gov. Entomologist, Hobart, Tasmania.
LENDON, A. A., M.D. (Lond.), M.R.C.S., Lecturer on For-

ensic Medicine and on Chemical Medicine, University
and Hon. Physician, Children’s Hospital, North ter race,
Adelaide.

*Luoyp, J. S., Alma Chambers, Adelaide.

*LOWER, OSWALD B., Broken Hill, New South Wales.

Mawson, Doveras, RB. Sc., .B.E. "Univer sity, Adelaide.
Mayo, Gro. G., C.E., Tatham street, Adelaide.
*Morean, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., Angas. street, Adelaide.
Mounton, H. S.. North terrace, Adelaide.
(L) Murray, Davin. Adelaide.

Puitiiees, W. H., Adelaide.

Poote, Ww. Be Savings Bank, Adelaide,

REISSMANN, CHARLES, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), B.So.
(Lond.), etc., Adelaide.

*RENNIE, Epwarp H., M.A., D.Sc. (lond.), F.C.S., Profes-
sor of Chemistry, University of Adelaide.

Rogers, R. S., M.D., Flinders Street. Adelaide.

*RUTT, WALTER, Chief’ Assistant Engineer, Adelaide.

SELWAY, W. H., Treasury, Adelaide.

Simson, Avucustus, Launceston, Tasmania.

*SmeEaton, THomas D.. Mount Lofty.

SMEATON, StrrLING, B.A., C.E., Engineer-in-Chief’s Office,
Adelaide.

SmitH, Ropert Barr, Adelaide.

1881.
1904.
1886.
1897.
1894.
1902.
1889.

1878.

1883.
1878.
1859.
1904.
1902.
1886.

1901.
1904.

* TORR,
gd May oa ‘A, JEvreris, M.D. , Brisbane, ueensland.

353

F.R.C.S., Professor of Physiology, University of Ade-
laide, Director of S.A. Museum.
TAYLor, WiLLiAM, St. Andrews, North Adelaide.

“Tepper, J. G. O., F.L.S., Entomologist, S.A. Museum.

[Corres yonding Member, 1878. |
& LL.D., M.A., B.C.L., Brighton.

VANDENBERGH, W. J., Warrister and Solicitor, J.P., Ade-
laide.

Varpon, Hon. JoserH, M.L.C., J.P., Gresham Street,
Adelaide.

*Verco, JosepH C., M.D., F.R.C.S., Lecturer on the Prin-

ciples and Pr actice of Medicine and Therapeutics, Uni-
versity of Adelaide.

Wainwericuat, K. H., B.Sc. (Lond.), St. Peter’s College,
Hackney, Adelaide.

Ware, W. L., J.P. Adelaide.

Way, Right on Sir Sauer J duns, Bart: .{ PCa D.C.b.,
Chief Justice and Lieutenant-Governor of South Aus-
tralia, Adelaide.

WHITBREAD, Howarp, Currie street, Adelaide.

*“WootnoucH, Water GEorGE, D.Sc., F.G.S., University,

Sydney.
Z1e17zZ, A..H. C., F.L-8., C.M.Z.8., Assistant Director,
South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

ASSOCIATES.
Coniison, Epirn, B.Sc., Medindie.
Roginson, Mrs. H. R., ‘‘Las Conchas,’’ Largs. South Aus-
tralia.

354

APPENDICES.

FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION

OF THE

Hoval Society of South Australia (Incorporated).

TWENTY-SECOND ANNUAL REPORT OF THE
COMMITTEE.

For tHE YEAR ENDING SEPTEMBER 30, 1905.

Last October the Field Naturalists’ Section of the Royal
Society celebrated the twenty-first anniversary of its incep-
tion. The function was highly successful, but amidst the
congratulations there was an element of regret from the fact
that the Society was about to lose the services of its inde-
fatigable Hoon. Secretary (Mr. W. H. Selway), owing to his
projected departure for England.

The same number of evening meetings and excursions
have been held as last year, and the members maintained an
equal interest, both at the meetings and in the field work.
Last year’s attendance was a decided improvement on the
previous year’s, and this has been maintained.

The meetings held auring the season were as follows : —

1904.

October 19. Conversazione, Twenty-first Anniversary.

November 29. Last evening meeting for the season. Scien-
tific results of three days’ excursion to Blumberg.

1905.

April 18. Paper by Miss E. Benham, “Some Changes in
Vegetable Cells Connected with the Formation of the
Embryo.” Resignation of Mr. W. H. Selway as Hon.
Secretary, presentation to him, and election of Mr. E.
H. Lock to the position.

May 16. “Geological Notes,” by Mr. Douglas Mawson, B.Sc.,
B.E. ; “Microscopical Notes,” by Mr. E. J. Bradley.
June 20. Discussion on subject of Chairman’s annual ad-

dress, “Animal Instinct or Reason,” by Mr. E. H. Lock.

July 18. “A Visit to Tuggerah Lakes,” by Mr. J. W. Mellor.

355

August 15. “Visit to Tasmania,” by Mr. F. R. Zietz and Mr.
J. W. Mellor.
September 19. Annual meeting.

The subjects under discussion were of the usual scien-
tific order, but rather more of the educational element than
during the previous year. This phase of work is to be com-
mended. miss Benham’s paper upon “Vegetable Cells,” with
illustrative diagrams, was distinctly educational in character,
and the same remark applies to the address upon ‘“‘Geologi-
cal Observations,’ by Mr. Douglas Mawson. Mr. J. W.
Mellor and Mr. F. R. Zietz were good enough to give mem-
bers a glimpse of the “Tuggerah Lakes” and of various places
in Tasmania. Both of these addresses were exceedingly in-
teresting, and on the subject of ornithology very instructive.

An evening was devoted to the scientific results of the
three days’ excursion to Blumberg, when Mr. A. Zietz dealt
with the bird life; Mr. Griffith, Coleoptera; Mr. J. G. O.
Tepper, botany; Mr. 8. Smeaton, geology. Mr. E. H. Lock
introduced a discussion on ‘“‘Animal Instinct or Reason.” The
subject was a new form of study at the meetings, and proved
interesting.

The conversazione to celebrate the twenty-first anniver-
sary of the Section was a great success. The exhibition of
natural history specimens would have done credit to a
museum, and the regret was expressed that it could not be
on view for more than one evening. It demonstrated the
fact that the members of the Section have been doing a
great amount of work in making private collections.

A very instructive and interesting feature of the even-
ing meetings has always been the exhibits. These have not
been so numerous as at some of the meetings of previous
years, and it is hoped that members will not allow this prac-
tice to lose its interest. Perhaps the most striking feature
of exhibits has been the keen interest taken in the collec-
tion of orchids. The Chairman of the Section has created
quite a new enthusiasm in this branch of botanical study.
His explorations in field work, ably assisted by Mrs. Rogers,
have resulted in a splendid collection, taken at all times of the
year, and the members will congratulate them upon
having added three species not previously recorded by
the Section, and one apparently not recorded at all in Aus-
tralia. In the same direction, note must also be made of the
records of Mr E. Ashby, who has from time to time sent in
specimens and records of orchids as they appeared in the
vicinity of Blackwood.

356

The field excursions were as follows: —

1904.

Oct. 1. Gandy’s Gully.

Oct. 15. Typical orchard, Mylor.

Oct. 29. National Park.

Nov. 12. Blumberg (three days).

Dec. 17. Last excursion for the season, Norton’s Summit.

1905.

Feb. 18. Dredging excursion, Port River.
June 3. Blackwood (Viaducts).

June 17. Belair (National Park).

July 15. Black Hill.

Aug. 12. Teatree Gully.

Sep. 1 Scott’s Creek (three days’ camp).
Sep. 23. Coromandel Valley.

The excursion to Gandy’s Gully was a new field for ex-
ploration, and the record shows that while it would seem
difficult to find new places for excursions, there are yet a
number of places not yet visited that would well repay the
trouble of finding them.

The Typical Orchard at Mylor was revisited after a lapse
of some two years, and the object lesson of fruit culture here
was well demonstrated.

National Park was twice visited, and, although well
known to most of the members, it was found that this ground
is by no means exhausted.

The annual three days’ excursion in November was held
this year again at Blumberg. The same hospitality that was
extended to the Section on a previous visit was again heartily
given by we residents, and a new programme having been
laid out for excursions, the engagement was highly successful
and enjoyable.

The Port River was again visited, and the results to the
Microscopists were successful, while an additional interest was
realised in noting the progress of the construction of the
Outer Harbour.

Blackwood is regarded as the most prolific field for
botanical collecting, and this year an excursion to the neigh-
bourhood of the Railway Viaducts proved a new source of
interest to those attending.

Blackhill and Teatree Gully are both well known to the
members ; but they never fail to produce something worth the
effort of exploring. Both places were visited, and also the
vicinity of Norton’s Summit. The latter, however, was more
in the nature of a picnic to close the list for 1904.

On the lst of September the members ventured upon a
new departure in arranging a three days’ Camp at Scott’s

357

Creek, which had not been previously visited by the Section.
The result of this experiment is best summed up in the wish
expressed by several members “that arrangements should be
made for another excursion in November of a similar char-
acter.” ‘lhe matter is now under consideration.

Next Saturday the vicinity of Sturt River at Coroman-
del Valley will be visited, to complete the list of twelve ex-
cursions for the year under review.

It is very gratifying to note that, during the year, seveui-
teen names have been added to the list of membership.

It is a coincidence, that, in April of 1904, the Chairman
(Dr. E. Angas Johnson) resigned his position to make a vis*t
to England. In the same month of the following year (1905)
the Secretary resigned for the same purpose. Both vacan-
cies were filled by Mr. Lock, which may also be regarded as
an unusual circumstance. In the resignation of Mr. Sel-
way the Section was deprived of the services of the most
indefatigable worker the Section had ever had, and his ser-
vices were appropriately acknowledged by a suitable presenta-
tion of a Floral Address.

SEVENTEENTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE NATIVE
FAUNA AND FLORA PROTECTION COMMITTEE
OF THE FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE
ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH _AUSTRALIA, FOR
THE YEAR ENDING SEPTEMBER, 1905.

At a meeting of the Committee, held in November last,
on the occasion of the retirement of their Chairman from the
Commissionership of the National Park, a resolution was
passed, as follows: —‘“That the Committee exceedingly regret
the resignation of Mr. Dixon as a Commissioner of the Na-
tional Park, and wish to place on record their appreciation
of the able manner in which he has represented them while
upon the Board.” It was at the same time decided that Mr.
Ashby should be recommended for appointment in his place.
This suggestion was sent on to the authorities, but without
avail, another gentleman being appointed. The Committee
therefore, have now no representative upon tne Board. As
it was through the persistent exertions of the Committee that
the National Park was established, they consider that they
have a good claim to representation, and they are further
strongly of opinion that at least one Commissioner should be
a naturalist.

An application having been made for a lease of the Cape
Borda Lighthouse Reserve for a cattle station, the Secretary

358

to the Marine Board courteously wrote, asking whether any
reason could be adduced why, in the interests of the fauna,
it should not be granted. On the Committee representing to
the Marine Board the desirability of protecting the indige-
nous kangaroos and wallabies on the reserve, the application
was refused.

Referring to the resolution passed by the International
Ornithologists’ Congress recently held in London—“The
Congress appeals most strongly to the Government of the
Commonwealth of Australia to pass legislation to prevent
the wholesale destruction of penguins and all those birds boiled
down for oil in the lands under its rule ”—a letter has been
received from the Crown Lands Office, seeking information as
to whether further protection to these birds is desirable in
South Australia. The Committee recommend that instru--
tions should be given to the lighthouse-keepers at various sta-
tions, and especially at the Neptune Islands, to as far as pos-
sible prevent the destruction of penguins, mutton birds, and
all other birds during their respective close seasons, and that
the police in outlying districts should also be specially directea
to enforce the observance of the Birds’ Protection Act.

Samu. Dixon, Chairman.
Adelaide, September 19, 1905.

“ALRJILVAg “UOF] “MOOTT OH OL

G 9 965
é stl
0 €§. 0
OX 2° a
ee Say
O .GEef
n- 9 Gh
9 BL &
GO: Tig
‘pis F
“ti

‘GOBL “63 Joquiezdog ‘oprejepy
‘dx0TT ‘Gg “ff

auny “Q WaALIV A

‘qoo11I00 PUNOJ pue poxIphy

‘SLOJIPUY |

GC 9 YGF
COGL ‘OG tequieydeg ‘puvy ul Yysey ,,
= - OS te LES Ss >
IOYBIOIVD ,,
‘aJo ‘ALOMOTZRYC _,,
soseqysog ,, (or te pe “* SuUOISINOxe WOA, snfding ,,
DUOIZESALBAUOD) (6) (Oa i * AQeLoog [VAOY Wor JUBID ,,
OOO eee at Soe ye le ee “' G-FOGL 10F Suotydtiosqng ,,
sustyioapy AG | [1G € 7" FOGT “OG Jequiezdog ‘puvy ur ysey oL
2
“AM ALLIGNUA XO] ‘SLd downy ‘Iq

“GOGL COR UAW bday SNTGNG UVOL A HON WHOLTONGdXGf ANV Sida yy wo INGA HEV LS

NRRL RNR OIL AEE LAA ALAA

‘VIIVULSOV HLOAOS HO ALHIOOS IVAOU HHL AO NOLLOUS SUSTIVUOLVN GT

360

MALACOLOGICAL SECTION

OF THE

Roval Society of pouty Australia (incorporated).

ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1904-5.

The Committee has to report that there are now thirteen
members of the Section. During the past year eleven meet-
ings were held, at which the average attendance was seven.

Steady progress has been made in the routine work of
revising the census of South Australian gastropods, and,
following Zittel’s classification, all the species have been
dealt with, from the trochide to the naticide. In addi-
tion, four papers have been contributed to the transactions
of the Royal Society—two by Dr. J. C. Verco, entitled
“Notes on South Australian Marine Mollusca, with Des-
criptions of New Species, parts i. and u.”; one by Mr. H.
Basedow, in collaboration with Mr. C. Hedley, “South Aus-
tralian Nudibranchs, and an Enumeration of the known
Australian Species’; and another by Mr. H. Basedow on
“New Species of South Australian Lamellaria and Caledoni-
ella.”

The following is a copy of the balance sheet : —

REcEIPTS AND EXPENDITURE FoR 1904-5.

Receipts.

Dr. = eode
To balance brought forward ee a: «| 6<O8 Greg
‘¢ Subscriptions ; 1 10) 30
*¢ Grant from Royal Beciety ISO

£2516
Expenditure.

Cr. £3 se ds
By Postages and Sundries ... O14
‘€ Honorarium to Caretaker for 1904 end 1905 1. O50
‘¢ Balance in hand 1 oe

£216 3

R. J. M. Crucas, Hon. Secretary and Treasurer.

361

MICROSCOPICAL SECTION

OF THE

Ropal Society of South Australia (Incorporated).

ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1904-5.

CHAIRMAN—D. FLEMING.

ComMiITTEE—W. B. Poot, D. Gorpon, W. FuLuer.

Hon. SrcreTary—KE. J. BRaDtEy, Dover Street, Malvern.

The second year’s work of the Section has been successful
in promoting the objects contemplated, viz., the encourage-
ment of microscopical research as a means of intelligent re-
creation. Satisfaction is felt at the action of the Council of
the Adelaide University in establishing, at the request of Mr.
Gcrdon and a number of our members, a class for the study of
microscopical technique. The average attendance at the even-
ing meetings has been 15, whilst the total number of members
on the roll at present is 43.

The following meetings and excursions have been held
during the session : —

September 27, 1904—-Annual general meeting.

October 22—Excursion to Port docks and swamps.

October 25—Paper on “Foraminifera,” by Mr. E. J.
BRADLEY.

November 22—Paper on “Nodules on Roots of Legumes,”
by Mr. W. B. Poote.

February 18, 1905—Dredging excursion to Port River
and Outer Harbour.

March 28—Paper on “Some Changes in Vegetable Cells
in Connection with the Formation of the Embryo,” by Miss
BENHAM.

April 25—Examination of live material obtained from
the River Murray by the Boys’ Field Club.

May 23—Examination of Mr. G. Crase’s collection of show
objects.

June 29—Mr. 8S. Smeaton, B.A., gave an explanation of
the “Functions of Hairs of Plants” and “Lori of Ferns,” and
exhibited a large collection prepared by Mr. T. D. Smeaton.
Mr. W. P. Dotiman gave a practical demonstration of ‘“Micro-
photography.”

July 25—Question Box Evening—Mr. E. J. Brapiry
gave an exhibition of slides illustrating the “External Ana-
tomy of the Honey Bee.”

362

August 19—Excursion to ponds at Blackwood.

August 22—Mr. W. B. Poor gave a demonstration and
paper on “Cutting, Staining, and Mounting Plant Sections,”
with an explanation of the structure of plant stems.

September 23—Excursion to ponds at the Black Road,
O'Halloran Hill, and also Happy Valley Reservoir.

Davip FLeminG, Chairman.
Epvear J. Brapiey, Hon. Secretary.

MICROSCOPICAL SECTION OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

BALANCE-SHEET, SESSION 1904-5.

Receipts.

fs. -as

Cash in hand at beginning of ae o.. UB ELGIANS
Grant from Royal ee te 2 bbe tae
Subscriptions, 1904-5 . ara Ne 225 Ta Opa
FAS 26 UD

Expenditure.

£. is,, de

Postage Yee
Printing 2i0B6
Stationery... 0 6 5
Subscriptions paid to Treasurer of Royal Society 6.12.6
Duty Stamp . A 0 a ei
Attendance (Caretaker) 1:**5 ag
Balance in hand hvaws

K pear J. Braptey, Hon. Secretary.

Audited and found correct,

S. SMEATON. .
THEO, GoDLEE, Auditors.

363

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specitic names printed in italics are described as new. |

Aclopides, 281.

Acrophylla nubilosa, 241; paula,
242

Additions to Cambrian Fauna of
South Australia, 246.

Albania (7?) verconis, 154.

Alloiodoris marmorata, 152.

Alpha Particles of Radium, 182.

Amaloptila ptilomela, 180.

Amelora anthracica, 177.

Annual Meeting, 338.

Annual Report, 338.

Anthela callispila, 175; niphoma-
eula, 175; pyromacula, 176.

Antiochrus, 273; A. brunneus, 273,
274.

Archidoris staminea, 151; varia, 150.

Aroid, New for Australia, 207.

Astele calliston, 167; subcarinatum,
172, 336; subgranularis, 336.

Atlanta sp., 336

Automolus, 331.

Ayers Ranges, Geology of, 77.

Bacillus peristhenellus, 244.

Balance Sheet, 340.

Baker, W. H., South Australian De-
capod Crustacea, 116, 252.

Basedow, H., Geology of Country
traversed by North-West Prospec-

ting Expedition, 57; Land Mol-
luseca collected, 161; New South
Australian Lamellaria and Cale-
doniella, 181; [and C. Hedley]

South Australian Nudibranchs, 134.
Birds of Kangaroo Island, 334.
Borkhausenia zophosema, 108.
Brachites, sp., 337.

Bragg, Prof., and R. D. Kleeman,
Alpha Particles of Radium, 132;
Recombination of Ions in Air and
other Gases, 187.

Caledoniella contustformis, 183: var.
labyrinthina, 185; var. pulchra,
185; var. testudinis, 185.

Calliostoma z7etz7, 166.

Cambrian Fauna of South Austra-
lia, Additions to, 246.

Cambrian Limestone of Lake Tor-
rens, 81.

Carinaria australis. 171. 336.

Ceratosoma adelaide, 156: brevicau-
datum, 154.

Cerura (2) melanoglypta, 177.

Discussion

Clanculus leucomphalus, 168.

Clupeosoma rhodea, 107.

Coleophora, 111; C. ochroneura, 111;
pudica, 111.

Comodica citrinopa, 114;
pila, 114; epispora, 114.

Crassatellites ponderosus, 169, 336.

Crustacea, South Australian Deca-
ped, 116, 252.

Cryptoblabes centroleuca, 106.

Cryptophaga aglaodes, 110;
burnii, 110.

Curculionide, Description of Austra-
lian, 209.

Cyphocrania cornuta, 240.

Decapod Crustacea of South
tralia, 116, 252.

Decilaus apicatus, 230; auricomus,
252; coryssopus, 235; cuniculosus,
251; trrasus, 232; noctivagus, 235;
goatee 256; spissus, 234; tibialis,

decas-

black-

Aus-

Deilephila euphorbiz, 179.

Desert Sandstone, 86.

Diphucephalides, 281.

Diplodon wilsonii, 161.

Denations to the Library, 341.

Doriopsis aurea, 157: carneola, 157.

Earth, Theories on the Origin of
the, 336.

Ectopatria virginea, 173.

Enamillus, 278; E. sharp, 279.

Endotricha baryptera, 180.

Ephestiopsis po/tella, 106.

Ereunetis streptogramma, 115.

Etheridge, R.; Additions to
Cambrian Fauna of South
tralia, 246.

Euplexia signata, 173.

Euzopherodes poliocrana, 104.

Everard Ranges, Geology of, 76.

Fellows. Members, etc., List of, 351.

Field Naturalists’ Section, Annual
Report, 354; Balance Sheet, 359.

Fischeria quinquelobata, 238.

Galathea setosa, 267.

Gena terminalis, 166.

Genesis of Protoplasmic Motion and
Excitation, 1.

the
Aus-

Geology of Country traversed by
North-West Prospecting Expedi-
tion, 57.

Gibbula coxi, 336: Jehmanni, 171,
336.

Glycimeris pectenoides, 333; sor-
didus, 333.

Glyphipteryx calliscopa, 112; peri-
metalla, 112.

Halgerda graphica, 152.

Halimus; 119; H. gracilis, 124;

levis, 119; truncatipes, 120; tumi-
dus, 121; var. gracilipes, 122.

Hedley, Chas., Report on Australian
Land Mollusca of the North-West,
161. [See also Basedow and Hed-
ley. |

Homeotrachelus tricarinatus, 222.

Homodes erizesta, 180.

Homospora rhodoscopa, 178.

Hopliocnena brachycera, 177.

Hyolithes communis, 251.

Hypertricha stenadelpha, 110.

Hyphantidium hyposcopa, 105.

Hypselodoris epicuria, 153.

Indulkana, Geology of, 79.

Insects of North-Western Australia,
287:

Tons, Recombination of, in Air and
other Gases, 187.

TIsidora newcombi, 161.

Kangaroo Island, Birds of, 334.

Kleeman, R. [See Brage and Klee-
man. |

Lamellaria australis, 181.

Lamellicornes Pleurosticti, 275.

Latirus aurantiacus, 537.

Lea, Arthur M.. Description of Aus-
tralian Curculionids, 209.

‘Lepidoptera, New Australian, 103,
173:

Library, Donations to. 341.

Limax arborum, 337: gagatus. 337.

Liparetrus, 282; synonymic list, 285;
table of snecies, 287, et. seq. L.
adelaidx, 297; agrestis. 317: albo-
hirtus, 308; alienus, 324: amabilis,
521; analis, 3521: aneulatus. 300:
aridus, 300: asper. 306: assimilis,
508; ater, 297: atratus. 306: atri-
ceps. 516; badius. 315: bitubercu-
latus, 307; blanchardi, 328; brev-
ipes, 328: brunneipennis. 314; cal-
losus, 311; canescens, 308: capil-
latus, 299: cinetinennis, 327: col-
laris, 303: consanguineus, 322; con-

vexior, 307: convexiusculus, 286:
curtulus. 286: discinennis. 308:
discoidalis. 309: disnar. 299: dis-

tans, 318: fallax, 315: ferrugineus,
514; flavopilosus. 297: wagaticens,

286: glaber 286: wlahratus. 284:
globulus. 317: eracilines. 305:

gravidus, 426; hirsutus, 411: holo-
sericeus. 396: /ncertus. 320: inso-
Vitus, 330; iridipennis, 303: juvernis.
301: kreusleraz. 300: lewatus. 316:
levis, 317: lanaticollis. 309: latius-
eulus, 306: eat, 329: Mridipennis.

364

319; lottini, 286; luridipennis, 309;
marginipennis, 310: mastersi, 298;
micans, 316; minor, 327: mitchell,
298; montarnus, 508; monticola,
315; necessarius, 318; nigriceps,
$17; nigricollis, 286; nigrinus, 313;
nigro-umbratus, : nitidi-
pennis, 298; occidentalis, 309;
opacicollis, 317; ovatus, 301; parvi-
dens, 307; parvulus, 316; perkinsi,
524; perplexus, $16; picipennis,
500; pilosus, 311; posticalis, 301;
propinquus, 314; pruinosus, 302;
puer, 525; rothei, 507; rotundicol-
lis, 525; rubefactus, 301: rubicun-
dus, 314; rufipennis, 301: rugatus,

329: rugosus, $14; simillimus,
505; simplex, 310; squamiger,
518; striatus, 287; subsquamosus,
301; svlvicola, 311; tridentatus,

507; tuberculatus, 317; ubiquitosus,
514; uniformis, 286; ventralis, 326;
vicarius, 520: xanthotrichus, 297.
Liparochrus, 270; table of species,
271; L. aberrans, 271: asperulus,
271: bimaculatus, 270; ciliboides,
271; crenatulus, 270; dilatatifrons,
272: fossulatus, 270: globuliformis,
270; multistriatus, 270, 272; nitids-
collis, 273: oblongus, 271; pimeli-
oides, 270: politulus. 271; raucus,
270: silphoides, 270.
Lonchodes caurus, 239.
Lower, O. New

a, Australian
Lepidoptera, 103, 173.

| “Lybeba acuticosta, 223.

Macrobathra gastroleuea, 109.
Maiden, J. H., An Aroid New for

Australia, 207.
Malacological Section, Annual Re-
port, 360.

Mann Ranges, Geology of, 65.

Mantide, Description of New Species
Of 250

Mawson, Douglas. Theories on the
Earth’s Origin. 336.

Melanterius costipennis, 223:
politus. 223.

Melissoblantes disema, 103.

Melolonthides, Table of, 276.

im-

Metallosticha metallica, 105.

Micippa mascarenica, var. noduii-
tera, 127.

Microsconical Section, Annual Re.
nort, 361.

Microthopus, 330.

Moola australis, 333; penetecta,

Teenie New Australian Marine,

Mollusea, Land, North-West of South
Australia, 161.

Meunt Gosse. Geology of, 73.

Musgrave Ranges. Geology of. 59.

365

Myllocerus, 209; table of, 218; M.
abundans, 211; amblyrhinus, 212;
darwini, 210; duplicatus, 210;
eehinatus, 215; elegans, 214; exi/is,
217; laticollis, 210; niveus, 213;
rugicollis, 214; sordidus, 213;
speciosus, 210; suturalis, 216; tre
pidus, 210; trilineatus, 217.

Native Fauna and Flora _ Protec-
tion Committee, Annual Report,

S57.

Necroscia bella, 243.

Nembrotha (2) verconis, 158.

Nephopteryx Aabrostola, 105.

Niguza anisogramma, 174.

Nudibranchs, South Australian, 134.

Obolella wirrialpensis, 248; sp. 249.

Olenellus, 247.

Opal, pseudomorph after Glauberite,
337.

Ordovicians of the North-West, 82.

Oreta hypocalla, 179.

Orgyia hemicalla, 176;
176.

Orsonoba (2?) euryscopa, 178.

Orthis (?) tatei, 249; sp. 250.

Orthisina (?), sp. 250.

Ovula, 333.

Pachytrichides, 281.

Paguristes brevirostris, 256; fronta-
lis, 252; sulcatus, 258.

Paramicippa hispida, 126.

Paratheta cyclozona, 109.

Petrocheles australiensis, 264.

Petrological Notes on Rocks _ col-
lected by the North-West Expedi-
tion, 91.

Phasmide, Description of
Species of, 237.

Phryganostola macrantha, 113.

Phyllotocides, 281.

Platytes poliopepla, 104.

Pleurophyllidia cygnea, 149.

ea perisema, 108; «xiphochrysa,

Polyonyx transversus, 262.

Porcellana rostrata, 260.

retinopepla,

New

Poropterus, cavernosus, 227; fovea-
tus, 228; inusitatus, 228; longipes,
226: Jlissorhinus, 229; lstroderes,

226; nodosus, 224; rhyticephalus,
225; rubus, 230. ;
Protoplasmic Motion and _ Excita-

tion, Theory of the Genesis of, 1.

Purpura, 337.

Radinm, Alpha, particles of, 132.

Recombination of Ions in Air and
other Gases, 187.

Robertson, T. B., Theory of Genesis
of Protoplasmic Motion and Ex-
citation, 1.

Scoparia platymera, 107.

Scyllea pelagica, 148.

Sericides, 279; 'Table of, 280.

Sericoides, 281.

Sesamia a/bicostata, 175.

Simethis hypocalla, 113.

Sinusigera, 337.

Sphyrocallus bicolor, 277.

Staurodoris pustulata, 151.

Surattha hedyscopa, 103.

Syvnemon monodesma, 173.

Synomus eruginosus, 221.

Systatica xanthastis, 179.

Systellopides, 277.

Talis cyclosema, 103.

Tepper, J. G. O., Description of
Insects from North-West of South
Australia, 237.

Thersites basedowi, 161.

Thyrolambrus excavatus, 129.

Tinea tetraspila, 115.

Titinia bicolor, 219; eremita, 219;
ignaria, 219; parva, 220.

Tomkinson Ranges, Geology of, 73.

Trigonia bednalli, 333: margari-
tacea, 333.

Verco, Dr. J. C., South Australian
Marine Mollusca, 166.

Veluta adcocki, 337.

Xanthomelon angasianum, 162;
asperrimum, 164; clydonigerum,
162: flindersi, 162; perinflatum,
162: radiatum, 163: sublevatum,
162; wilpenense, 163.

A374E— Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, 26 and 28, Waymouth Street, Adelaide, So. Aus.

US pace ied Pt Wg a a

ronwing ater’ sition) laut jarel (Angra) §

plidashe, blue fright ae em nA es
a eihe ( nor sent wat et AVCae i rt
FSi lene at ao ere wuit he iat rhe

the Chectans aise. | mg

nt cae “ yh piidhe aie iy wi )

i ‘ Wei? y Milsons] Sah
b de wis 1B a ar aoisu aed TE bee oe
ccaeeny: ie ron T eT yavadraha st Bye Ae ‘op

om. me S biaars cigar } ty tats
“ fA itd Lage iano,
rw HB if Pree enn y nriagie fied Age
ERTo (FoR LE avy " i} | ym . . BY L) fs ThE)

ba ‘ve. eldal thts aah toner bee tts a edenty iste
eat et eERS ubAlii ii tt HES) aya 2S! ag he

: tht saihaniassh i) Digan ahs \ ty ’
hd; ald ieee avr ayst te niet S}rrody ely cayte Sree
he Ay AM bOe a tL i, ORR
, AYS ‘ababe ait Lieedons ilar $3 Sande aL era dM, tui
ee 3 | ab princes & acruborn ate et) OV RG
<7 ail Asay}. neta eV Were on ay!
tA Pave Basha dan tinny ; Ee . we
OR Uitabenin avamues | HGS, caltteenle
F ’ are abi Tinthia ay a“ psateeF O88, At4 aby
rio RE aoe sarqus lane : - Ae aye
BOL sineeloyy 2ila dT ; + iy Nee F a
Ww goinientl “gths Ae. agaquel * euler o. 1(DBR ee

damon Jaden Wire owe) ah metyt nuh. {SS awthionwseee

‘ ves x ii tauf ir Tut pEW ey
5 OR a wal AH erie! 7; ¥ - , J OSL nye im ; a
4

|
‘ ot. eWwAR ent All TESTU AC EUR Le 7 : (OOL Fadee fy ae
; Gil. .Mkic Aah Ws? paogre ng Atalay a
erg aime Of weloaid owiiintT he teal Dbl en, y aeake wr
AES Ming § zt Sy dogs ae -Mieeqnel juen lf hrwiHa, ods
By lt) Pen ldes), south menial ST: ene
Tayi an BGR siliguhed': anucwiv4l 100 esi el wer rienetl
a tee wine] nar : " ‘ vt
cal artaged Apyine: rae ta * vie? Pe ae are iM satel ‘

j yy iad ir am wear lerhig iowa

sm Sdeeeties brkes
Bagi S968 a ‘vont, ayvahia'd |. Rotana
- al DA vy “ ip ¥ » ily
Sel. sain ces i} sah ve Oro) SLT
eetert gistebee| i « Bey! TS ss dice cl view Pay rai hay rr 4 hie io
mag uiaeny 4881 ...iqrphiel > afiad Ca ‘igi SG
lariat vet ytd) 5 Bak he m See 8
$3], .aermnelim-sBbi . Zao ~atovieae
eis 2 , x + “ j a meg a
7 *} : ¢ rox rita ;
1 8 i 7: + iy 5 m ve “a ») Mula
‘+ aT Laem r Pixel as if!
cAif fa 5 I ' ae
qeanes sh Qe Fs i t sia ese |. til eet
: ' ; )
ey ae ies i
aid tl ; rit Aira oy) of ace Wp 4 by i’ os Nase
My. atabow. Sp oleh ee RRS EE
af Tata! yo ‘ Aad) rm ie ) aa" on
ary eet ue av bd (AA 5 : ed “ a fe Neva s
M LM): 06 5} TV AMAL Ye ashe
hom, tae? Af ia asi. WIV” Greve J ben : ae | ae voce
a ery ae Se Nn, ee ae OF 6 ra Nid
so 1% Shy: eration les vy) ia’ ye | r ag, A Chg any 4 yan

| my ‘wih 6 oie = Hidomel a i tt oti = ut

PEATES I. Oy XXXVE

Ss OS UINKXK OT 1 ea TAs
f ;

Vol. XXIX. Plate I.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

CERATOSOMA BREVICAUDATUM, Abraham.

Vol. XXIX. Plate Il.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

NEMBROTHA VERCONIS, Basedow & Hedley.

pene Vel a ees. iT
A
‘ hahet vi UNO Neb ris rs
; ¥ ihe ; - tg:
7 gir — 7 a
F ; ‘ é z »
; + ¢ ~
' * Ue © Ae ab an
; y Pr RUE ae
Va
iS OTA a aaa |
oe % ne Ws ‘ Ma
' ag ; q oh: ; t :
OF) Se
Mee : via oe
re
hale! »
- if . »
att da 4

4, ; . > ar rele s a ile J

UN maa F Maree a Y,

“Oy y : its ae! Li Piel ie at tea oss ‘us
ei I s,s

. *
of Pal
. ue
.- ty
; :
F .
; 5
’
-
'
:
* a 4 ” ’ ’
‘ *
4
+) ine "
it by ea ff As : Da” oes
J i SS Paes’ @ sy Vet t
:
i ns"
’
4
} iv
F] 4 21
; ' . 4 J
+ * ¢ '
\ 4 7
a
"
f 4 7
A « Sy ie - ie ;
rt | en Cay ee
’ n'a as a”. jie
o eae
; oY ie f 7 iD
t) - i . * ed :
‘an eo eno |

Vol. XXIX. Plate III.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

HALGERDA GRAPHICA, Basedow & Hedley.

Vol. XXIX. Plate IV.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

ALBANIA VERCONIS, Basedow & Hedley.

fe ar
al

wore Meigs
+ U

gap - teen |p es
; '~ fs

iN
a
*

q
ii

‘na ine

a. 6
fav z

Vol. XXIX. Plate V.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

ARCHIDORIS VARIA, Abraham.

Vol. XXIX. Plate VI.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

1&2. DORIOPSIS CARNEOLA, Angas.
3&4. ARCHIDORIS STAMINEA, Basedow & Hedley.

Vol. XXIX. Plate VII.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

1,2 &3. HYPSELODORIS EPICURIA, Basedow & Hedley.
4, DORIOPSIS AUREA, Quoy & Gaimard.

Vol. XXIX. Plate VII.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

ALLOIODORIS MARMORATA, Bergh.

7
Lar
4
7
&

Vol. XXIX: Plate IX.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

Deo SCY LLASA PELAGICA, ‘Linne.
3. STAURODORIS PUSTULATA, Abraham.

Vol. XXIX. Plate

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

ice2s PEEWUROPHYLEIDIA CYGNEA, Berean.
3&4. CERATOSOMA ADELAIDAE, Basedow & Hedley.

Vol. XXIX. Plate XI.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

PLEUROPHYLLIDIA CYGNEA, Bergh.

Vol. XXIX. Plate XII.

H. Basedow del. et pinx. ad nat.

PLEUROPHYLLIDIA CYGNEA, Bergh.

Vol. XXIX., Plate XIII.

H. Basedow

Photo.

Hussey

& Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

ind We Ped: eke
7 at r ;

) an
&

‘
-
t
=
a)
oss
t
’
j
da
és
wii
?
'
_ i
a

tit ~F Ba

Ande

ra ia
on

f ait A:
ee ta

Rae cf x

= 4 ¥ . vi a A ea a j
; @
“ : ; ,
)
, ST e
Pmiee | Ti i
5
f
. ‘
fi 4! j
'
‘
it
2 J
’
‘
; ?
7 -
.
zal
‘ S 4
— JF ~
. ; p e\i=
5
i ;
>
rr
Fs A, smn
Ree
‘ : ; | |
; i f. 4
~ cs
A tas if
ar ? |
‘3 .- -
f 3 F
’ - ‘ i
<7 - | ;
By rs &
|
=
| f S »
< 7 , |
= ~~ ly rs
4
7
. La
4
. yf x
4 ° :
an F
By
. 1
‘
f =
.
oe ak
5 '
a
<1 —_
ay
& a
\
-
Yue of P
6) L, siti
Ay ut ’ iP
j ’ d ; i i . a
| rue
| | ae
é : Hie ie a *), *
: a
i ‘ . i s ned
' i ae : . ;
‘ : Py i) ‘
: é iat
t A ¢é ‘ 4 i
3% 4 2 rc Mle He ay
4 fi Rr Cahir Me ie ‘4 Bay
j ’ Si 4 th ie ‘h 7 ;
‘ ‘7 , i)
ae as ® aie) PAT i nine dash
“ay 4 Nels
Sats Tete ry ae) if PY
Gsy omit ih

»
He: AN i Bais

H. Basedow

, Photo.

Vol. XXIX., Plate XIV.

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

4
. ad
‘
i
'
‘
‘
‘
‘
i
‘
7 ‘
Es Tr 4
<
4
?
Oe >
‘ .
‘ ,
- *~
ay
.
? ry
7 = oS
’
= .
“ fe
‘
be a:
. ’
.
Pi
‘
*
i 2
‘
‘
j
Lf
; \ :
" uM
ele "a
‘.
‘
i
4
i“ } ~
vere <= |
= =
7 ‘ } « ‘
J tig
+ r ei]
bd vs .
b
i 4 Ay) y

wis

; ail,

‘ald no bs Tar 3

H. Basedow, Photo.

Vol. XXIX., Plate XV.

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

, , “ 4
} , oe,
7 a
i‘. ;
q } | "
’ p24) i iu y rv
| ie
ft
rT uv :
Mi » '
j
®
{
4
i
7 j
’
ts
‘ ‘
5? 9
7
<
F
«
i

j -
+ 5 7
“a B
> x by s
5 ‘ ey Wael
ive : + ‘ ay hae
ret = ae ' : De
i ar
j LY sal fac8 :
i ie 5 ; b i:
y
J t=
. ;
7 At :
t fy ’ yt Pe a be
Meek Be ep Hy
Renae Mahe na tae
= ' t z - a -
. - yi E ,
- ' ; wa :
is, Poet ’ hie z , ;
7 ao PS Reet i!
‘ - ;
\ al y ‘o> ol Mi i a: * +
. ary i ried 7 hi. 444 o* r 7
es un 4 a i’ Meee
; ashi Sie ! é ite ‘ee sige iy
. V nl ‘ Cfo { - a vs it LA Leh,
U fi. pa i} ' we os Sane j Sa?
4 tel! Li Pia i Me re
Cone a a
wy) ae a ri ye
ra eet Mh haat ae Mae AA
ee .
yy Lr a Ana iin lye:
rt
i
, _ ' ; |
7 iene em I oie iia ‘afi! sie)
= e
> 4

Vol, XXTX., Plate XV1.

H. Basedow, Photo.

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

j oa
=
‘
{
I ~
. cs
ve
= f
’
le an .
= is
A chat =
x ) =)
= y
P’ a
t ee
E 1 4
= z,
t
i =e
=a r = it
* -
ee ; Sa
> 5 -)
P ts
z Z
> 3
oe 7 ates
ue
ane | A
ys sz PY,
: iF, p
\ .
Tn a 4
ee) Me, ' 4
a /
ev \
< ‘
Gs eh :
Os ee els
' na! ee /
‘ Ay! }
, ““ % “4
Me
f ts
e
a) » }
oe 7 j
Oe |
i og h§ ‘
LY ee | Bh a bk 1
abt ie ee Pes I
Meeps otk tied

Pies aeretitl yy, tet

‘
py?’ ih
nea

Vol. X XEN) Plate XVI

INIT
Ms ee # he rr -
eg 4 ‘ag het, af vagy

V py J

H. Basedow, Photo. Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

‘a ie;

Pry)

eet

TY ite, a ' Wh y Tele Not J 6a, r 1 ) 7 ‘i

ae
_
6

soe

=
—:
ay
7
=

Vol: XXTx~ Plate XVIIL.

H. Basedow, Photo. Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

iM f
4 ‘
. 4 ¥ 3 } ; f
‘ ari , fe
iy ri are) A \ t
r } a‘a as y 5 ae
a mh. eens fire a ra
:
+ ‘
mi ‘
i
,
ts
+
1 7 ye ; ¢ i
f
we “ *
ve |
' ‘4 1
i
: .
*
4d me! 5 i
F Ss . i
yore ”
F ; ;
y - n
ile —_ F
i : ae
me ri ,
‘ td 7 :
oe ct Yi \
y, A ‘ Ld
Aig i us
ty aa]
:
rt »
\ of Wan a :
A “
via. Ki é
hm i " aed ‘ i
Ly ih ¥ i ’ ' l i Hi
5 J Ve ?
7 , x , Ye { a be q
4 AW): ie ' AG
: ho AR AOS ‘ Ve ia Sel itr an
4 , iv , ; ’ 7
i mae i ft q ea : i
’ u ; -
, (
Py 4 } m rt
i ra oi " rex ‘ i
- a Ban {
git a 4 ‘ {
£ Ws
* oy : ek " % '
4 5 tay : r ue 4
, i
i i :
we ae ¥, i €.
ai } ; ® .
: ; ‘ G Sine : {
} Ly’ Stay ,
Pa he one F fell
iff 4 ‘
Padi y ’ f {
; ti + 5
ou ee Aa i? if a
we ‘
i
l i as
Bis thts, UT
‘ fr
1 4 !
+ j
i
\
F ft ‘
per rg
Ate ' :
. , é
4 id
4 i)
: at) ple be
pl i} a
i 1 6 bia -

Vol. XXTX— Plate cLX:

B1IZ149ND

-JISSISNO

y3i1.no

Be ee eect hor
ee tetet+ 445

NYN@v9090 LNNOW

TEESE Ue Le aE TN

aw)
= \'4

JSN3iNI

Z1avnd

31)

-DISSISND

$a39g

O31L4OLNOD

1S1HOS

ILNY

- L3NYHV9

TYNIT

‘=
ce)
ce
Zz
=
io)
°
ie}
x

Nun

SOI) ¢G tNOgy : eouRsiGg

“UINGQHOOD) FUNO/A] Wodt YInNos Bulpuse}xe

‘SSONVY NNVN

aul sso1oe

Ne@iek Oc Sa Oske>

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

H.Basedow, Photo.

TWAT pie
Soa

Vol, DEI Pigte

~“N-
“No
Y)
()
—
()
7S
\ Pm
/ aa ud
5 oc
aS F
ae =
ae (3 = ot:
z= S S at Grae
© PK SS —— oa a &
(+ 2 a
t=) as say. 2)
5 = ©
ia) Q F + are "
G
y
=z
¢
3
a)
5}
a
=\ tn
bi g
Re €
Ned Xe S69
ATA Lit “ Qn Sesey
4 5
\ na ee
1 S es. =a Se LO
Very Tumerous = Gy ae
Diorite Dykes a a 4
rae Gane °
: rae as
trending E and W— Wa

eee

DIORITE RIDGE

GEOLOGICAL SKETCH MAP ae

Vibe S RANGES

=] INTRUSIVE METAMORPHIC

SST GRANITE ETS GNEISS
DESERT RECENT
Pa SANDSTONE SANDS
ScALE: | INCH = 8 MILES 4) DaSenare

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

*]
#)
ra) or
i
Tih ‘ “ - *
‘ Sab
: 7 | ie “| a
a ' {
ral ’ \ ‘ ‘
4 > a j Sa tt by Ae r
¥ a f
; , F
J
= ; a.
/
‘
a,
sy
:
:
} -
:
7 '
. Fs i
.
F 5
8 -
¥,
4 :
x i
4
,
.
‘
i
i ’
:
= i
‘
*
:
~
Se
'
; ~ ss
i
x
i
is
i)
i
' :
. ‘ ;
. =
'
: ‘
'
,
r
h
aS
u
‘
1
‘
ry
. ‘ ry, *
‘ i,
ee ' ”
iy i
i . ‘
uf v

PTA base a aa) oe
ekical i y, vo. Lia tee nae
iniiae* ny ae Pern, rnc a ts Pacis
Ce el a nD ou 19),
i : ” it au +? |

bs VOL. XXIX PLATE XXI

Hussey &

HALIMUS LAVIS.

XAII

—

NIG aie

W.H.B, DE!

TUMIDUS.

HALIMUS TRUNCATIPES.

Sa be coe
bal dnl Me UP eee

lat
een \ \ é

0 : ¢
q ¢ }
RE Ne fn. 6 aint A r 7 an s Be eM Wt
: r) mbna’ ge! = oy day aly rs A> Matos a

VOL. XXIX PLATE XXIII

W.H.B. DEL. Hussey & GILLINGHAM.LITH-
HALIMUS GRACILIS. H. TUMIDUS var. GRACILIPES.

iy : ' i F iW
Pe wen jesse Be ae 4 be - codehi res 4 Yemen cnt
rl i) 4) +." oO . tay ar mts
w a woe fi cy ie yee oe

XAIV

PLAT

VOL, XXIX

LITH

HAM

LING

=
oO
&
>
uw
yy
Ww
=)
=

W.H,B. DEL

MICIPPA MASCARENICA. THYROLAMBRUS EXCAVATUS.

PARAMICIPPA HISPIDA.

ae 7 USD 6 yal anh? Pr
, ty '

x " eicereemteg ee +. or Fae thes Ala a :
a) ¢
mia AI POR J A. ba ol Sea appr aca he j er mites ies

ays
t i ores ass y a se OY art 7 ee |
os nett OF fa. ®» Nae The oe b/ nl hee “ye sania

pew
aie
fie

gee

Hussey & GILLINGHAM LITH.

ees

xz
Ms
4
i
4
us
a
2
o
n
fa)
<
I
e
a
=

VOL. XXIX PLATE XXVI

& GicLinGHam LITH.

VOL. XXDC PLATE. Xx

H.BASEDOW DEL.ET PINX.AD. NAT. Hussey & GILLINGHAM LITH.

LAMELLARIA AUSTRALIS, Basedow.

' ° age
te
2 * wd
? tat
A ;
.
' ’ OF
’ ‘ at
any iP wee ww A - ie 4 PAY Am eacs A
re <p | Saat Mant Uh e bil ™~s or’ yi ind
.
;
i
i
‘ i
‘ F ee IMA LPN ‘4

byw any ty tet ree hie he vite

Vol. XXIX., Plate XXVII.

LAMELLARIA AUSTRALIS, Basedow.

H. Basedow, del. Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

‘ . f, ee . a
Ay ae i / 4 livre Cag a is ‘ ole 4
re Ae, Cas { ’ y
Se alia Hike | Ni: Poa ;
A Ly 9 ioe ; +
om Ly) 7 @ j af fs na i : Juy ae ak aan sa ‘f af, gy: 3

VOL. XX!IX PLATE XXVIII

i”

HY,
ie

HsBASEDOW DEL.ET PINX. AD. NAT. Hussey & GILLINGHAM_LITH

CALEDONIELLA CONTUSIFORMIS, Basedow

Plate X XIX.

XXIX.,

Vol.

ONTUSIFORMIS, Basedow.
Hussey & Gillingham, Printers,

ELLA

DONI

CAL

del.

Adelaide.

H. Basedow,

' :
4 f ;
} , > Lge Lh See
{ te . 20) Ne! | ‘
. 4 c -
t a” ~
F io bs | % -
*, ALL. ,
Am ce E i
E j ‘ j *
‘ | Pl ~ Z
ae - Bieta, 2 -
4) a ‘
ES = =
. ‘ 2
N ;
oF
4 ei r 7 5 :
~ “d A
i = ; :
7 a rs .
a “
© en
a. ,
2
*
:
ae |
tm : z
; ‘ .
eee
3 oe
may) ees
‘ =F 3
'
te} 8 —
s t
Yi
y -
a Pa [ : * o
. ? :
1 '
o ' " ae ES o
+h : : vik
: i * 4 ry , -
te : ' tte : a is ue A
a x y had + ‘¥ : ;
. a A ~ . >
[ “4 i. 7 ct 7 h *
a a
‘ vt = = . r nh
t xy ig ; ‘ = in’
y A , . ae
A ; A { ’ ;
eed ; i ' oie
f ot ‘ =i9 7]
2 r a a ea
Tait ‘, iz) Pet
4 j
ci : “a a4
* ' ’ : © 4 4 ois?
eae i \ : =e - i et ,
‘ yeas . 4
ti 4 q te are wre fh A rn = ea!
: : 7 ' , »
: ii z a ' "1 in
ry Ae Ff Nel. G hy . +
, ‘dts ah bi) ia AY ea ae 8. P| vty Bil
P i MY : at >.
me

aN eae ere sen AS: yu iy

7 ile &'

Vol. XXIX., Plate XXX.

Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide.

a 2

Seas na

ya '
: ae Sh
a) te a it
af eu!
rh i a }

ML ea aed

(an, + Lhe q
Ae Ke tye 9

Vaid gt '

qa? Nt
Anes ar Sg

a » i ye Path
-

ri - 2 tne F

x
\\

“SS
ie \

>)
BD)

H. L. Kesteven, del

, Printers, Adelaide.

ingham

Hussey & Gill

Ay ate

1
eu! "*

5S
‘=
we
ae as,

j
i,
ee |
1. *
|
ihe 58
sit ;
Tis we }

oi: bay

tee ‘

\
‘
fi
.
’
'
:
v
{
;
s
he I
ia

ee
M4 rsa

Boek a gh 4g eemedigy
é
r td
h
' a)
‘ , é
‘
* ‘ty
ai
A P
4
HM,
=“ y
ay
pee =y
if, 4 '
uf
Rah Cy, ¢
A eI
Me
1 =
ne a wee
ay a
$ “ he ;
os
7 es.
‘
? ’
*
5
Xe
aa ~
'
:
5 ’
4
' 5
ns is
aay
!
a
: 4
,
} By
' u
bases . j yi
Ree 1 ne
WS
| z ti
a
. cle
'

due =

Bore ee

VOL. KXIX PLATE XXAII

W.H.B. DEL.

PAGURISTES FRONTALIS.

‘ a '
' ' <i we

» ‘ 7" _
3 4 =k haa

y =

rs eet 4 ri e*
er, aL oP, tot : au ; i) oi?
ref ¢ ae a! Hi Se
f ’ fe = wa) ; ;
4-
:

PLATE-XXXIII

XX\X

VOL.

=
2
<
x
o
z
J
1
oO
*
>

HuSSE

|
Liu
a
co
a
=

STES BREVIROSTRIS.

PAGURI

KKXKIV

oH a ft Se

XX 1X

VOL:

sO
BZ

Ome

=a = aa TATRUCOE!

4
WW
a
ca
ae
=

PAGURISTES SULCATUS.

HusseY & GILLINGHAM._LITH-

PORCELLANA ROSTRATA. GALATHEA SETOSA.

WH.B. DEL. : Hussey &- GILLINGHAM LiT#
PETROCHELES AUSTRALIENSIS. POLYONYX TRANSVERSUS.

“—

Ps : I
=. : .
tae -

ae
ae
od - &
a
i

ele am emt a aw a ee
+

piety

CONTENTS.

Honea ccs, T. Bratsrorp: An Outline of a Theory of the %

Genes.s of Protoplasmic Motion and Excitation.

Basepow, H.: Geological HKeport on Country Traversed be ;
' the South Australian Government North-West i :

ing uxpedition, 1903. Plates xiii. to: xx. oes
Lower, O. B.: New Australian Lepidoptera (xxii.)

BAKER, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus

tacea. Part Lit = Plates xxi. to Xxlv.
Braee, Pror. W. H. and R. D. isteeMan: ‘Un the Alpha

Particles of Radium, and their Loss of Range in Lae :

Through Various Atoms and Molecules

BasEpow, H., and C. HepLey: South Australian — Nudi--
branchs, ‘and an Enumeration of the known Australian |

Species. Plates i. to x11,
Hepiey, C.: Report on the Mollusca Collected by ‘Mr. H.

Basedow on the South Australian Government North-

west. 4ixpedition. Plate xxx.

; Verco, Dr. J: C.: Notes on South Australian "Misrine Mol 4

lusea, with Description of New Species. Part ii.
Plate xxxi.

- Lowgr, O. b.: Description ‘of New Austraiian ‘Lepidoptera,

with Synonymic Notes. (xxtii.)

Basepow, H.: Un Naticoid Genera Lamellaria ‘and Caledoni- pe

ella, ‘from South Australia. Plates xxvi. to XX1x. 4
Brae, Pror. W. H. .. and R. D. KiremMan: oid the Recom-
bination of lons in Air and other Gases - ey ;
Marpen, J. 4.: An Aroid New for Australia
Lea, ARTHUR as Descriptions of Australian Curculionidae,
with Notes on Previously Described Species. Part iii.

TEPPER, J. G. O.: Insects Collected in North-Western Region |
of South Australia by H. Basedow, with Descriptions of :

New species. No. ll.

ETHERIDGE, R., JUN. Additions ‘to the Cambrian Fauna of g

South Australia. Plate xxv.

Baker, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus-

tacea. Part iii. Plates xxxil. to xXxxvl.
BuacksuRn, Rev. T.: Further Notes on Australian Coleop-
tera, with Descriptions of ate onee west hres

(xxxv.)

ApstRacT OF PROCEEDINGS ... 0 2-0 ee eee

ANNUAL REPORT

, BALANCE SHEET : pe ae roa es lms

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY |
Le OF H'ELLOWS, ETC.

APPENDICES.

E rooee ee: Annual Report, etc., of the Field Naturalists’

ection s

Seventeenth Annual Report of the Native Fauna and Flora
Protection Committee of the Field Naturalists’ Section

Annual Report, etc., of the Malacological Section Aa

shana Rerort, etc., of tne Microscopical Section

ndex vis A Ay, ee aN a

‘ 2 Pit ae x _
ee Ie Rey. Rah gnc BF Ree
tot é

\
SPER hry Ca (a we eee 4 es

A Wat Reka 2) en
i Ss had, ae iw hae ot a

6, ays
Nee Pee eo

ey ee
Lyk fe ae LEDS wy iF TRA eR eine)
pee oe Re rs WT ee Se

oo ee...
7

Te ye ,)

: Ee dee hie

< ohn te Ke
SP RAED Dy.”

hy ey
Privo. ule

ot)

044 106 281 546

Date Due

fie Peas,
aye 3

Site rior

Bence eh
tees eke
a Phan ee
Nae a “aig SG

Pipe ote A$

seeser:
SiS tes
neared
cena aes
RR ARP ALI A ER EARS = 18
ey in

phew

Fp toh Ot A PIN LY SE PAE POT
Nae ee hee di béaieebadedal tiekeneaetedonedeue
= Ms Se Sees ee

hate haa teedeiedeasi*
Cd. Sad pe ha on oad

. Coa

°. of he en

r aes SPS A EASE ave nahinr tet-cheGushandbatemeasnsiiomaderaee et ea

ODI EPS eter Beal: — SOE NRE OH I i Pe reese te

Pe, che 2 9c HL eb lnate feps ¥ per PO a MAT I MEI om ng nee
Ft pO tg - « * - ar: EY UD aig » Dry nS OE

Pe eeer san

— awe,

Gee

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Transactions and proceedings and report of the Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated)"

See other formats